Manage an IT Budget

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}70|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
  • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
  • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
  • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
  • IT is viewed as a cost center without a clear understanding of the value it provides.
  • After completing the budget, the CIO is faced with changing expectations, disruptions, new risks, and new threats.
  • IT departments often lack a reliable budget management process to keep itself on track towards its budget goals.
  • Over budgeting risks credibility if projects are not all delivered, while under budgeting risks not being able to execute important projects.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Managing your budget is not just about numbers; it’s also about people and processes. Better relationships and a proper process leads to better management of your budget. Understand how your relationships and current processes might be leveraged to manage your budget.
  • No one likes to be over budget, but being under budget isn’t necessarily good either. Coming in under budget may mean that you are not accomplishing the initiatives that you promised you would, reflecting poor job performance.

Impact and Result

  • Implement a formal budget management process that documents your planned budget and actual expenditures, tracks variances, and responds to those variances to stay on track towards budget goals.
  • Manage the expectations of business stakeholders by communicating the links between IT spend and business value in a way that is easily understood by the business.
  • Control for under- or overspending by using Info Tech’s budget management tool and tactics.

Manage an IT Budget Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the increasing expectations for IT departments to better manage their budgets, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Document

Create a streamlined documentation process that also considers the elements of people and technology.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 1: Document
  • Manage Your IT Budget Tool

2. Track

Track your planned budget against actual expenditures to catch areas of over- and underspending in a timely manner.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 2: Track

3. Control

Leverage control mechanisms to manage variances in your budget.

  • Manage an IT Budget – Phase 3: Control
[infographic]

Workshop: Manage an IT Budget

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Document Budget

The Purpose

The first step of managing your IT budget is to make sure there is a properly documented budget that everyone agrees upon.

Key Benefits Achieved

A properly documented budget facilitates management and communication of the budget.

Activities

1.1 Review budget for the year.

1.2 Document each budget in the tool.

1.3 Review CAPEX vs. OPEX.

1.4 Customize accounts to match your organization.

Outputs

Budget broken out into monthly increments and by each account.

Budget documented in tool.

Tool customized to reflect organization's specific accounts and terminology.

2 Optimize Documentation Process

The Purpose

A proper documentation process forms the backbone for effective budget management.

Key Benefits Achieved

A streamlined documentation process with accurate inputs that also considers the elements of people and technology.

Activities

2.1 Draw out process flow of current documentation.

2.2 Identify bottlenecks.

2.3 Discuss and develop roadmap to solving bottlenecks.

Outputs

Process flow of current documentation process with identified bottlenecks.

Plan to mitigate bottlenecks.

3 Track and Control for Over- and Underspending

The Purpose

Track your planned budget against actual expenditures to catch areas of over- and underspending in a timely manner. Then, leverage control mechanisms to manage variances in your budget.

Key Benefits Achieved

Tracking and controlling for variances will help the IT department stay on track towards its budget goals. It will also help with communicating IT’s value to the business.

Activities

3.1 Walk through the “Overview Bar.”

3.2 Document actual expenses incurred in fiscal to date.

3.3 Review the risk of over- and underspending.

3.4 Use the reforecast column to control for over- and underspend.

Outputs

Assess the “Overview Bar.”

Document actual expenditures and committed expenses up to the current date.

Develop a strategy and roadmap for how you will mitigate any current under- or overspends.

Reforecast expenditures for each account for each month for the remainder of the fiscal year.

10 Secrets for Successful Disaster Recovery in the Cloud

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}419|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $12,096 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
  • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
  • The pay-per-use pricing structure of cloud services make it a cheaper DR option, but there are gotchas you need to avoid, ranging from unexpected licensing costs to potential security vulnerabilities.
  • You likely started on the path to cloud DR with consideration of cloud storage for offsite retention of backups. Systems recovery in the cloud can be a real value-add to using cloud as a backup target.
  • Your cloud-based DR environment has to be secure and compliant, but performance also has to be “good enough” to operate the business.
  • Location still matters, and selecting the DR site that optimizes latency tolerance and geo-redundancy can be difficult.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Keep your systems dormant until disaster strikes. Prepare as much of your environment as possible without tapping into compute resources. Enjoy the low at-rest costs, and leverage the reliability of the cloud in your failover.
  • Avoid failure on the failback! Bringing up your systems in the cloud is a great temporary solution, but an expensive long-term strategy. Make sure you have a plan to get back on premises.
  • Leverage cloud DR as a start for cloud migration. Cloud DR provides a gateway for broader infrastructure lift and shift to cloud IaaS, but this should only be the first phase of a longer-term roadmap that ends in multi-service hybrid cloud.

Impact and Result

  • Calculate the cost of your DR solution with a cloud vendor. Test your systems often to build out more accurate budgets and to define failover and failback action plans to increase confidence in your capabilities.
  • Define “good enough” performance by consulting with the business and setting correct expectations for the recovery state.
  • Dig deeper into the various flavors of cloud-based DR beyond backup and restore, including pilot light, warm standby, and multi-site recovery. Each of these has unique benefits and challenges when done in the cloud.

10 Secrets for Successful Disaster Recovery in the Cloud Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out the 10 secrets for success in cloud-based DR deployment, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

[infographic]

Improve IT Team Effectiveness

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}521|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $16,549 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Lead
  • Parent Category Link: /lead
  • Organizations rely on team-based work arrangements to provide organizational benefits and to help them better navigate the volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous (VUCA) operating environment.
  • This is becoming more challenging in a hybrid model as interactions now rely less on casual encounters and now must become more intentional.
  • A high-performing team is more than productive. They are more resilient and able to recognize opportunities. They are proactive instead of reactive due to trust and a high level of communication and collaboration.
  • IT teams are more unique, which also provides unique challenges other teams don’t experience.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

IT teams have:

  • Multiple disciplines that tend to operate in parallel versus within a sequence of events.
  • Multiple incumbent roles where people operate in parallel versus needing to share information to produce an outcome.
  • Multiple stakeholders who create a tension with competing priorities.

Impact and Result

Use Info-Tech’s phased approach to diagnose your team and use the IDEA model to drive team effectiveness.

The IDEA model includes four factors to identify team challenges and focus on areas for improvement: identity, decision making, exchanges within the team, and atmosphere of team psychological safety.

Improve IT Team Effectiveness Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Team Effectiveness Storyboard – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to properly assess your team’s effectiveness and activities that will identify solutions to overcome.

The storyboard will walk you through three critical steps to assess, analyze, and build solutions to improve your team’s effectiveness.

  • Having your team members complete an assessment.
  • Reviewing and sharing the results.
  • Building a list of activities to select from based on the assessment results to ensure you target the problem you are facing.
    • Improve IT Team Effectiveness Storyboard – Phases 1-3

    2. The Team Effectiveness Survey – A tool that will determine what areas you are doing well in and where you can improve team relations and increase productivity.

    Each stage has a deliverable that will support your journey on increasing effectiveness starting with how to communicate to the assessment which will accumulate into a team charter and action plan.

    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey Tool

    3. Facilitation Guide – A collection of activities to select from and use with your team.

    The Facilitation Guide contains instructions to facilitating several activities aligned to each area of the IDEA Model to target your approach directly to your team’s results.

  • Determining roles and responsibilities on the team.
  • Creating a decision-making model that outlines levels of authority and who makes the decisions.
  • Assessing the team communications flow, which highlights the communication flow on the team and any bottlenecks.
  • Building a communication poster that articulates methods used to share different information within the team.
    • Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide
    • Identity – Responsibilities and Dependencies
    • Decision Making Accountability Workbook
    • Exchanges – Team Communications Flow
    • Exchanges – Communications Guide Poster Template
    • Atmosphere – SCARF Worksheet

    4. Action Plan – A template to help build your team action plan.

    The Action Plan Template captures next steps for the team on what they are committing to in order to build a more effective team.

    • Action Plan Template

    5. Team Charter – A template to create a charter for a work group or project team.

    A Team Charter captures the agreements your team makes with each other in terms of accepted behaviors and how they will communicate, make decisions, and create an environment that everyone feels safe contributing in.

    • IT Team Charter Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Team

    The Purpose

    Determine if proceeding is valuable.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set context for team members.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Identify IT team members to be included.

    1.3 Determine goals and objectives.

    1.4 Build execution plan and determine messaging.

    1.5 Complete IDEA Model assessment.

    Outputs

    Execution and communication plan

    IDEA Model assessment distributed

    2 Review Results and Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Review results to identify areas of strength and opportunity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As a team, discuss results and determine actions.

    Activities

    2.1 Debrief results with leadership team.

    2.2 Share results with team.

    2.3 Identify areas of focus.

    2.4 Identify IDEA Model activities to support objectives and explore areas of focus.

    Outputs

    IDEA assessment results

    Selection of specific activities to be facilitated

    3 Document and Measure

    The Purpose

    Review results to identify areas of strength and opportunity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    build an action plan of solutions to incorporate into team norms.

    Activities

    3.1 Create team charter.

    3.2 Determine action plan for improvement.

    3.3 Determine metrics.

    3.4 Determine frequency of check-ins.

    Outputs

    Team Charter

    Action Plan

    Further reading

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Implement the four critical factors required for all high-performing teams.

    Analyst Perspective

    All teams need to operate effectively; however, IT teams experience unique challenges.

    IT often struggles to move from an effective to a high-performing team due to the very nature of their work. They work across multiple disciplines and with multiple stakeholders.

    When operating across many disciplines it can become more difficult to identify the connections or points of interactions that define effective teams and separate them from being a working group or focus on their individual performance.

    IT employees also work in close partnership with multiple teams outside their IT domain, which can create confusion as to what team are they a primary member of. The tendency is to advocate for or on behalf of the team they primarily work with instead of bringing the IT mindset and alignment to IT roadmap and goals to serve their stakeholders.

    A Picture of Amanda Mathieson

    Amanda Mathieson
    Research Director, People & Leadership Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The Challenge

    Organizations rely on team-based work arrangements to provide organizational benefits and better navigate the volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous (VUCA) operating environment.

    This is becoming more challenging in a hybrid environment as interactions now rely less on casual encounters and must become more intentional.

    A high-performing team is more than productive. They are more resilient and able to recognize opportunities. They are proactive instead of reactive due to the trust and high level of communication and collaboration.

    Common Obstacles

    IT teams are more unique, which also provides unique challenges other teams don't experience:

    • Multiple disciplines that tend to operate in parallel versus within a sequence of events
    • Multiple incumbent roles where people operate in parallel versus needing to share information to produce an outcome
    • Multiple stakeholders that create a tension with competing priorities

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Use Info-Tech's phased approach to diagnose your team and use the IDEA model to drive team effectiveness.

    The IDEA model includes four factors to identify team challenges and focus on areas for improvement: identity, decision making, exchanges within the team, and atmosphere of team psychological safety.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT teams often fail to reach their full potential because teamwork presents unique challenges and complexities due to the work they do across the organization and within their own group. Silos, not working together, and not sharing knowledge are all statements that indicate a problem. As a leader it's difficult to determine what to do first to navigate the different desires and personalities on a team.

    How this blueprint will help

    Assess, diagnose, and address issues to realize your team's full potential.

    This research helps IT support:

    • Work Teams: Operate under one organizational unit or function. Their membership is generally stable with well-defined roles.
    • Project Teams: Typically, are time-limited teams formed to produce a particular output or project. Their membership and expertise tend to vary over time.
    • Management or Leadership Teams: Provide direction and guidance to the organization and are accountable for overall performance. Membership is structured by the hierarchy of the organization and includes a diverse set of skills, experience, and expertise.

    Traditionally, organizations have tried to fix ineffective teams by focusing on these four issues: composition, leadership competencies, individual-level performance, and organizational barriers. While these factors are important, our research has shown it is beneficial to focus on the four factors of effective teams addressed in this blueprint first. Then, if additional improvement is needed, shift your focus to the traditional issue areas.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make it difficult to address effectiveness for many IT teams:

    • Teams do not use one standard set of processes because they may have a wide variety of assignments requiring different sets of processes.
      Source: Freshworks
    • There are multiple disciplines within IT that require vastly different skill sets. Finding the connection points can be difficult when on the surface it seems like success doesn't require interconnectivity.
    • IT has many people in the same roles that act independently based on the stakeholder or internal customer they are serving. This can lead to duplication of effort if information and solutions aren't shared.
    • IT serves many parts of the organization that can bring competing priorities both across the groups they support and with the IT strategy and roadmap itself. Many IT leaders work directly in or for the business, which can see them associate with the internal client team more than their IT team – another layer of conflicting priorities.

    IT also experience challenges with maturity and data silos

    48%

    of IT respondents rate their team as low maturity.

    Maturity is defined by the value they provide the business, ranging from firefighting to innovative partner.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, Tech Trends, 2022

    20 Hours

    Data Silos: Teams waste more than 20 hours per month due to poor collaboration and communication.

    Source: Bloomfire, 2022

    Current realities require teams to operate effectively

    How High-Performing Teams Respond:

    Volatile: High degree of change happening at a rapid pace, making it difficult for organizations to respond effectively.

    Teams are more adaptable to change because they know how to take advantage of each others' diverse skills and experience.

    Uncertain: All possible outcomes are not known, and we cannot accurately assess the probability of outcomes that are known.

    Teams are better able to navigate uncertainty because they know how to work through complex challenges and feel trusted and empowered to change approach when needed.

    Complex: There are numerous risk factors, making it difficult to get a clear sense of what to do in any given situation.

    Teams can reduce complexity by working together to identify and plan to appropriately mitigate risk factors.

    Ambiguous: There is a lack of clarity with respect to the causes and consequences of events.

    Teams can reduce ambiguity through diverse situational knowledge, improving their ability to identify cause and effect.

    Teams struggle to realize their full potential

    Poor Communication

    To excel, teams must recognize and adapt to the unique communication styles and preferences of their members.

    To find the "just right" amount of communication for your team, communication and collaboration expectations should be set upfront.

    85% of tech workers don't feel comfortable speaking in meetings.
    Source: Hypercontext, 2022

    Decision Making

    Decision making is a key component of team effectiveness. Teams are often responsible for decisions without having proper authority.

    Establishing a team decision-making process becomes more complicated when appropriate decision-making processes vary according to the level of interdependency between team members and organizational culture.

    20% of respondents say their organization excels at decision making.
    Source: McKinsey, 2019

    Resolving Conflicts

    It is common for teams to avoid/ignore conflict – often out of fear. People fail to see how conflict can be healthy for teams if managed properly.

    Leaders assume mature adults will resolve conflicts on their own. This is not always the case as people involved in conflicts can lack an objective perspective due to charged emotions.

    56% of respondents prioritize restoring harmony in conflict and will push own needs aside.
    Source: Niagara Institute, 2022

    Teams with a shared purpose are more engaged and have higher performance

    Increased Engagement

    3.5x

    Having a shared team goal drives higher engagement. When individuals feel like part of a team working toward a shared goal, they are 3.5x more likely to be engaged.

    Source: McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=5,427

    90%

    Engaged employees are stronger performers with 90% reporting they regularly accomplish more than what is expected.

    Source: McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=4,363

    Effective and high-performing teams exchange information freely. They are clear on the purpose and goals of the organization, which enable empowerment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Clear decision-making processes allow employees to focus on getting the work done versus navigating the system.

    Case Study

    Project Aristotle at Google – What makes a team effective at Google?

    INDUSTRY: Technology
    SOURCE: reWork

    Challenge

    Google wanted to clearly define what makes a team effective to drive a consistent meaning among its employees. The challenge was to determine more than quantitative measures, because more is not always better as it can just mean more mistakes to fix, and include the qualitative factors that bring some groups of people together better than others.

    Solution

    There was no pattern in the data it studied so Google stepped back and defined what a team is before embarking on defining effectiveness. There is a clear difference between a work group (a collection of people with little interdependence) and a team that is highly interdependent and relies on each other to share problems and learn from one another. Defining the different meanings took time and Google found that different levels of the organization were defining effectiveness differently.

    Results

    Google ended up with clear definitions that were co-created by all employees, which helped drive the meaning behind the behaviors. More importantly it was also able to define factors that had no bearing on effectiveness; one of which is very relevant in today's hybrid world – colocation.

    It was discovered that teams need to trust, have clarity around goals, have structure, and know the impact their work has.

    Overcoming barriers

    Teams often lack the skills or knowledge to increase effectiveness and performance.

    • Leaders struggle with team strife and ineffectiveness.
    • A leader's ability to connect with and engage team members is vital for driving desired outcomes. However, many team leads struggle to deal with low-performing or conflict-ridden teams.
    • Without adequate training on providing feedback, coaching, and managing difficult conversations, team leads often do not have the skills to positively affect team performance – and they do not appreciate the impact their actions have on desired outcomes.
    • Team leads often find it difficult to invest time and resources in addressing challenges when the team is working toward deadlines.
    • Team leads who are new to a management role within the organization often struggle to transition from independent contributor to leader – especially when they are tasked with managing team members who are former peers.
    • Some team leads believe that soliciting help will be viewed as a personal failure, so they are reluctant to seek support for team performance management from more-senior leaders.

    It's unrealistic to expect struggling teams to improve without outside help; if they were able to, they would have already done so.
    To improve, teams require:

    • A clearly defined team identity
    • A clearly defined decision-making paradigm
    • Consistently productive exchanges within the team
    • An atmosphere of psychological safety

    BUT these are the very things they are lacking when they're struggling.

    An image of Info-Tech's Insights for Improving IT Team Effectiveness.

    Improving team effectiveness

    Use the Info-Tech IDEA Model to assess and improve your team's effectiveness.

    Begin by assessing, recognizing, and addressing challenges in:

    • Identity – team goals, roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities
    • Decision-making paradigms and processes within the team.
    • Exchanges of information, motivation, and emotions between team members
    • Atmosphere of team psychological safety

    IDEA Model of Team Effectiveness

    Effective Team

    • Identity
    • Decisions
    • Exchanges
    • Atmosphere

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1: Assess the team Phase 2: Review results and action plan Phase 3: Document and measure

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    Call #2: Prepare to assess your team(s) using the assessment tool.

    Call #3: Review the assessment results and plan next steps.
    Call #4: Review results with team and determine focus using IDEA model to identify activity based on results.
    Call #5: Complete activity to determine solutions to build your action plan.

    Call #6: Build out your team agreement.
    Call #7: Identify measures and frequency of check-ins to monitor progress.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1
    (Half Day)

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Determine objectives and assess

    Review survey results

    Determine and conduct activities to increase effectiveness

    Bridge the gap and
    create the strategy

    Activities

    With Leader – 1 hour
    1.1 Review the business context.
    1.2 Identify IT team members to be included.
    1.3 Determine goals and objectives.
    1.4 Build execution plan and determine messaging.
    With Team – 90 minutes
    1.5 Share messaging, set context.
    1.6 Complete Team Effectiveness Survey.

    2.1 Debrief results with leadership team.
    2.2 Share results with team.
    2.3 Identify areas of focus.
    2.4 Identify IDEA Model activities to support objectives and explore areas of focus.

    3.1 Conduct IDEA Model Activities:

    • Identify – Clarify goals, roles, and responsibilities.
    • Decisions – Determine levels of authority; decision-making process.
    • Exchanges – Review information shared with communication methods and preferred styles of each team member.
    • Atmosphere – Create a psychologically safe environment.

    3.2 Record outcomes and actions.

    4.1 Create team charter or agreement.
    4.2 Identify metrics to measure progress.
    4.3 Identify risks.
    4.4 Determine frequency of check-ins to review progress.
    4.5 Check-in with sponsor.

    Deliverables

    1. Execution and communication plan
    2. Team Effectiveness Survey
    1. Assessment results
    2. IDEA Model team-building activities
    1. List of solutions to incorporate into team norms
    2. Action Plan
    1. Team Charter

    Phase 1

    Assess the team

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    Improving team effectiveness

    Use the Info-Tech IDEA Model to assess and improve your team's effectiveness

    Begin by assessing, recognizing, and addressing challenges in:

    • Identity – team goals, roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities.
    • Decision-making paradigms and processes within the team.
    • Exchanges of information, motivation, and emotions between team members.
    • Atmosphere of team psychological safety.

    Effective Team

    • Identity
    • Decisions
    • Exchanges
    • Atmosphere

    Assess the shared understanding of team identity

    In addition to having a clear understanding of the team's goals and objectives, team members must also:

    • Understand their own and each other's roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities.
    • Recognize and appreciate the value of each team member.
    • Realize how their actions impact each others' work and the overall goals and objectives.
    • Understand that working in silos is considered a work group whereas a team coordinates activities, shares information, and supports each other to achieve their goals.

    Clear goals enable employees to link their contributions to overall success of the team. Those who feel their contributions are important to the success of the department are two times more likely to feel they are part of a team working toward a shared goal compared to those who don't (McLean & Company, Employee Engagement Survey, IT respondents, 2023; N=4,551).

    Goals matter in teamwork

    The goals and objectives of the team are the underlying reason for forming the team in the first place. Without a clear and agreed-upon goal, it is difficult for teams to understand the purpose of their work.

    Clear goals support creating clear roles and the contributions required for team success.

    Team Identity = Team goals and Objectives + Individual roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities

    Assess the shared understanding of decision making

    Decision making adds to the complexity of teamwork.
    Individual team members hold different information and opinions that need to be shared to make good decisions.
    Ambiguous decision-making processes can result in team members being unable to continue their work until they get clear direction.
    The most appropriate decision-making process depends on the type of team:

    • The higher the degree of interconnectivity in team members' work, the greater the need for a general consensus approach to decision making. However, if you opt for a general consensus approach, a backup decision-making method must be identified in the event consensus cannot be reached.
    • High-pressure and high-stakes environments tend to centralize decision making to make important decisions quickly.
    • Low-pressure and low-stakes environments are more likely to adopt consensus models.

    Spectrum of Decision Making

    General consensus between all team members.

    A single, final decision maker within the team.

    Ensure team members understand how decisions are made within the team. Ask:

    • Do team members recognize the importance of sharing information, opinions, and suggestions?
    • Do team members feel their voices are heard?
    • Must there be consensus between all team members?
    • Is there a single decision maker?

    Assess team exchanges by focusing on communication

    Evaluate exchanges within your team using two categories:

    These categories are related, but there is not always overlap. While some conflicts involve failures to successfully exchange information, conflict can also occur even when everyone is communicating successfully.

    Communication

    Managing Conflict

    Information, motivations, emotions

    Accepting and expressing diverse perspectives

    Resolving conflict (unified action through diverse perspectives)

    Transmission

    Reception
    (listening)

    Success is defined in terms of how well information, motivations, and emotions are transmitted and received as intended.

    Success is defined in terms of how well the team can move to united action through differences of opinion. Effective teams recognize that conflict can be healthy if managed effectively.

    Successful exchange behaviors

    • Shared understanding of how to motivate one another and how team members respond emotionally.
    • Team moving beyond conflict to united action.
    • Formalized processes used for resolving conflicts.
    • Platforms provided for expressing diverse or conflicting perspectives and opinions – and used in a constructive manner.
    • Use of agendas at meetings as well as clearly defined action items that reflect meeting outcomes.
    • Avoidance of language that is exclusive, such as jargon and inside jokes.

    Exchanges of information, emotion, and motivation

    When selecting a method of communication (for example, in-person versus email), consider how that method will impact the exchange of all three aspects – not just information.

    Downplaying the importance of emotional and motivational exchanges and focusing solely on information is very risky since emotional and motivational exchanges can impact human relationships and team psychological safety.

    • Information: data or opinions.
    • Emotions: feelings and evaluations about the data or opinions.
    • Motivations: what we feel like doing in response to the data or opinions.

    Communication affects the whole team

    Effects are not limited to the team members communicating directly:

    • How team members interact one on one transmits information and causes emotional and motivational responses in other group members not directly involved.
    • How the larger group receives information, emotions, and motivations will also impact how individuals relate to each other in group settings.

    Remember to watch the reactions and behavior of participants and observers when assessing how the team behaves.

    Managing conflict

    Identify how conflict management is embedded into team practices.

    • Resolving conflicts is difficult and uses up a lot of time and energy. This is especially true if the team needs to figure out what to do each and every time people disagree.
    • Teams that take the time to define conflict resolution processes upfront:
      • Demonstrate their commitment to resolving conflict in a healthy way.
      • Signal that diverse perspectives and opinions are valued, even if they spur disagreement sometimes.
      • Are ready for conflict when it arises – prepared to face it and thrive.

    Successfully communicating information, emotions, and motivations is not the same as managing conflict.

    Teams that are communicating well are more likely to uncover conflicting perspectives and opinions than teams that are not.

    Conflict is healthy and can be an important element of team success if it is managed.

    The team should have processes in place to resolve conflicts and move to united action.

    Assess the atmosphere

    Team psychological safety

    A team atmosphere that exists when all members feel confident that team members can do the following without suffering negative interpersonal consequences such as blame, shame, or exclusion:

    • Admit mistakes
    • Raise questions or concerns
    • Express dissenting views

    (Administrative Science Quarterly, 1999;
    The New York Times, 2016)

    What psychologically safe teams look like:

    • Open and learning-focused approach to error.
    • Effective conflict management within the team.
    • Emotional and relational awareness between team members.
    • Existence of work-appropriate interpersonal relationships between team members (i.e. beyond mere working relationships).

    (Administrative Science Quarterly, 1999;
    The New York Times, 2016)

    What "team psychological safety" is not:

    • A situation where all team members are friends.
      In some cases psychologically safe team atmospheres might be harder to create when team members are friends since they might be more reluctant to challenge or disagree with friends.
    • Merely trust. Being able to rely on people to honor their commitments is not the same as feeling comfortable admitting mistakes in front of them or disagreeing with them.

    "Psychological safety refers to an individual's perception of the consequences of taking an interpersonal risk or a belief that a team is safe for risk taking in the face of being seen as ignorant, incompetent, negative, or disruptive… They feel confident that no one on the team will embarrass or punish anyone else for admitting a mistake, asking a question, or offering a new idea."

    – re:Work

    Psychological safety

    The impact of psychological safety on team effectiveness

    Why does an atmosphere of team psychological safety matter?

    • Prevents groupthink.
      • People who do not feel safe to hold or express dissenting views gravitate to teams that think like they do, resulting in the well-known dangers of groupthink.
    • Encourages contribution and co-operation.
      • One study found that if team psychological safety is present, even people who tend to avoid teamwork will be more likely to contribute in team settings, thereby increasing the diversity of perspectives that can be drawn on (Journal of Organizational Culture, 2016).

    Creating psychological safety in a hybrid environment requires a deliberate approach to creating team connectedness.

    In the Info-Tech State of Hybrid Work in IT report autonomy and team connectedness present an interesting challenge in that higher levels of autonomy drove higher perceptions of lack of connectedness to the respondent's team. In a hybrid world, this means leaders need to be intentional in creating a safe team dynamic.

    47% of employees who experienced more control over their decisions related to where, when, and how they work than before the pandemic are feeling less connected to their teams.
    Source: Info-Tech, State of Hybrid Work in IT, 2022

    1.1 Prepare to launch the survey

    1-2 hours

    1. Review and record the objectives and outcomes that support your vision of a high-performing team:
      1. Why is this important to you?
      2. What reactions do you anticipate from the team?
    2. In your team meeting, share your vision of what a high-performing team looks like. Engage the team in a discussion:
      1. Ask how they work. Ask them to describe their best working team environment from a previous experience or an aspirational one.
      2. Option: Instruct them to write on sticky notes, one idea per note, and share. This approach will allow for theming of ideas.
    3. Introduce the survey as a way, together as a team, the current state can be assessed against the desired state discussed.
      1. Be clear that as the leader, you won't be completing the survey as you don't want to influence their perceptions of the team. As the leader, you hold authority, and therefore, experience the team differently. This is about them and their feedback.

    Input

    • Observations of team behavior
    • Clearly articulated goals for team cohesion

    Output

    • Speaking notes for introducing survey
    • Survey launch

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • IDEA Assessment

    Participants

    • Leader
    • Team Members

    Download the IT Team Effectiveness Survey

    1.2 Launch the survey

    1-2 hours

    1. Determine how the survey will be completed.
      1. Paper-based
        1. Email a copy of the Word document IT Team Effectiveness Survey for each person to complete individually.
        2. Identify one person to collect each survey and enter the results into the team effectiveness survey tool (tab 2. Data – Effectiveness Answers and tab 3. Data – Team Type Answers). This must be someone outside the team.
      2. Online direct input into Team Effectiveness Survey Tool
        1. Post the document in a shared folder.
        2. Instruct individuals to select one of the numbered columns and enter their information into tab 2. Data – Effectiveness Answers and tab 3. Data – Team Type Answers.
        3. To protect anonymity and keep results confidential, suggest each person opens document in "Cognito mode."
        4. Hide the Summary and Results tabs to avoid team members previewing them.

    Download the IT Team Effectiveness Survey Results Tool

    Paper-Based Cautions & Considerations

    • Heavily dependent on a trusted third party for genuine results
    • Can be time consuming to enter the results

    Online Direct Cautions & Considerations

    • Ensure that users keep to the same numbered column across both entry tabs
    • Seeing other team members' responses may influence others
    • Least amount of administration

    Phase 2

    Review Results and Action Plan

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing and debriefing the results to determine themes and patterns to come to a team consensus on what to focus on.
    • Facilitated activities to drive awareness, build co-created definitions of what an effective team looks like, and identify solutions the team can undertake to be more effective.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Leader of the team
    • All team members

    Deliverables:

    • A presentation that communicates the team assessment results
    • A plan for effectively delivering the assessment results

    Phase 2: Build a plan to review results and create an action plan

    Reviewing assessment results and creating an improvement action plan is best accomplished through a team meeting.

    Analyzing and preparing for the team meeting may be done by:

    • The person charged with team effectiveness (i.e. team coach).
    • For teams that are seriously struggling with team effectiveness, the coach should complete this step in its entirety.
    • The team coach and the team lead.
    • Truly effective teams are self-reliant. Begin upskilling team leads by involving team leads from the start.
    1. Analyze team assessment results
    2. Prepare to communicate results to the team
    3. Select team activities that will guide the identification of action items and next steps
    4. Facilitate the team meeting

    2.1 Analyze results

    Health Dials

    1. Once the results are final, review the Health Dials for each of the areas.
      1. For each area of the team's effectiveness
        • Red indicates a threat – this will derail the team and you will require an external person to help facilitate conversations.
          It would be recommended to contact us for additional guidance if this is one of your results.
        • Yellow is a growth opportunity.
        • Green is a strength and pay attention to where the dial is – deep into strength or just past the line?
      2. Think about these questions and record your initial reactions.
        1. What surprises you – either positively or negatively?
        2. What areas are as expected?
        3. What behaviors are demonstrated that support the results?

    Prioritize one to two factors for improvement by selecting those with:

    • The lowest overall score.
    • The highest variance in responses.
    • If psychological safety is low, be sure to prioritize this factor; it is the foundation of any effective team.

    An image of the Health dials for each area.

    2.2 Analyze results

    Alignment of Responses

    1. The alignment of responses area provides you with an overview of the range of responses from the team for each area.
      • The more variety in the bars indicates how differently each person is experiencing the team.
      • The more aligned the bars are the more shared the experiences.

    The flatter the bars are across the top, the more agreement there was. Factors that show significant differences in opinion should be discussed to diagnose what is causing the misalignment within your team.

    1. Recommendation is to look at high scores and the alignment and lower scores and the alignment to determine where you may want to focus.

    The alignment chart below shows varied responses; however, there are two distinct patterns. This will be an important area to review.
    Things to think about:

    • Are there new team members?
    • Has there been a leadership change?
    • Has there been a change that has impacted the team?
    An image showing the alignment of responses for Identity, Decisions; Exchange; and Atmosphere.

    2.3 Analyze results

    Team Characteristics and Stakes

    1. Team Characteristics. Use the Team Type Results tab in the IT Team Effectiveness Assessment Tool to identify how the team characterizes itself along the High-Low Scale. The closer the dark blue bar is to the right or left suggests to which degree the team views the characteristic.
      1. Interdependence highlights the team's view on how interconnected and dependent they are on each other to get work done. Think of examples where they should be sharing or collaborating, and they are not.
      2. Virtual describes the physicality of the team. This area has changed a lot since 2020; however, it's still important to note if the team shares the same understanding of work location. Are they thinking of team members in a different geography or referring to hybrid work?
      3. Decision making describes the scale of one decision maker or many. Where are most decisions made by on your team or who is making them?
      4. Stability refers to the degree to which the team stays the same – no membership change or turnover. It can be defined by length of time the group has been together. Looking at this will help understand alignment results. If alignment is varied, one might expect a less stable team.
    2. Stakes and Pressure
      1. Pressure refers to the conditions in which the team must work. How urgent are requests?
      2. Stakes refers to the degree of impact the work has. Will outputs impact safety, health, or a service?
      3. This category can be reviewed against decision making – high pressure, high stakes environments usually have a high concentration of authority. Low pressure, low stakes decisions can also be made either by one person as there is relatively no impact or with many as you have time to get many perspectives.
      4. This area informs what your decision-making protocols should look like.

    A bar graph for Team Characteristics, and a quadrant analysis for comparing Stakes and Pressure.

    2.4 Prepare for meeting

    1-2 hours

    1. Select a facilitator
      • The right person to facilitate the meeting and present the results is dependent upon the results themselves, the team lead's comfort level, and the root and degree of team dysfunction.
      • Typically, the team lead will facilitate and present the results. However, it will be more appropriate to have a member of the HR team or an external third party facilitate.
    2. Set the agenda (recommended sample to the right) that ensures:
      • Team members reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results. (E.g. Are they surprised? Why/why not?)
      • Results are clearly understood and accepted by team members before moving on to activities.
      • The aim of the meeting is kept in mind. The purpose of the team meeting is to involve all team members in the creation of an effectiveness improvement plan.
    3. Customize the Facilitation Guide and activities in the Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide. (Activities are aligned with the four factors in the IDEA model.)
      • Identify a clear objective for each activity given the team assessment results. (E.g. What are the areas of improvement? What is the desired outcome of the activity?)
      • Review and select the activities that will best achieve the objectives.
      • Customize and prepare for chosen activities appropriately.
      • Obtain all necessary materials.
      • Practice by anticipating and preparing for questions, objectives, and what you will say and do.

    Facilitation Factors
    Select a third-party facilitator if:

    • The team lead is uncomfortable.
    • The leadership or organization is implicated in the team's dysfunction, a third party can be sought in place of HR.
    • Regardless of who facilitates, it is critical that the team lead understands the process and results and is comfortable answering any questions that arise.

    Agenda

    • Review the IDEA Model.
    • Discuss the assessment results.
    • Invite team members to reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results.
    • Ensure results are clearly understood and accepted.
    • Examine team challenges and strengths through selected team activities.
    • Create a team charter and effectiveness improvement plan.

    Materials

    • IT Team Effectiveness Activities Facilitation Guide
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey results

    Participants

    • Leader

    2.5 Run the meeting

    2-3 hours

    Facilitate the team meeting and agree on the team effectiveness improvement plan.

    Work with the team to brainstorm and agree on an action plan of continuous improvements.

    By creating an action plan together with the team, there is greater buy-in and commitment to the activities identified within the action plan.

    Don't forget to include timelines and task owners in the action plan – it isn't complete without them.

    Document final decisions in Info-Tech's Improve IT Team Effectiveness Action Plan Tool.

    Review activity Develop Team Charter in the Improve IT Team Effectiveness Facilitation Guide and conclude the team meeting by creating a team charter. With a team charter, teams can better understand:

    • Team objectives
    • Team membership and roles
    • Team ground rules

    Facilitation Factors

    Encourage and support participation from everyone.

    Be sure no one on the team dismisses anyone's thoughts or opinions – they present the opportunity for further discussion and deeper insight.

    Watch out for anything said or done during the activities that should be discussed in the activity debrief.

    Debrief after each activity, outlining any lessons learned, action items, and next steps.

    Agenda

    • Review the IDEA Model.
    • Discuss the assessment results.
    • Invite team members to reflect on the results and discuss reaction to the results.
    • Ensure results are clearly understood and accepted.
    • Examine team challenges and strengths through selected team activities.
    • Create a team charter and effectiveness improvement plan.

    Materials

    • IT Team Effectiveness Activities Facilitation Guide
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • IT Team Effectiveness Survey results

    Participants

    • Leader
    • Team Members
    • Optional – External Facilitator

    Phase 3

    Document and measure

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Identify team members
    and behaviors to improve using IDEA Model
    1.2 Determine messaging including follow-up plan
    1.3 Send survey

    1.1 Review results with team
    1.2 Determine IDEA focus area(s)
    1.3 Conduct activity to determine solutions

    1.1 Document outcomes and actions
    1.2 Create team charter
    1.3 Identify metrics to show success
    1.4 Schedule check-in

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:
    Building your team charter that will include:

    • Team vision, mission, and goals
    • Roles and responsibilities of each member
    • Decision-making responsibilities and process
    • How information will be shared and by whom
    • Ways to build psychological safety on the team

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Leader of the team
    • All team members

    Document and agree to regular check-ins to reassess.

    As a team it will be important to drive your brainstormed solutions into an output that is co-created.

    • Agree to what actions can be implemented.
    • Capture agreed-to team goals, roles, responsibilities, and decision process into a team charter. Also include your communication protocol that articulates how information will be shared in future.
    1. Review suggestions and actions
    2. Capture in team charter
    3. Assign metrics to measure success and determine when to review
    4. Complete ongoing check-ins with team through team meeting and plan to reassess if agreed to

    Team Charter

    Never assume everyone "just knows."

    Set clear expectations for the team's interactions and behaviors.

    • Some teams call this a team agreement, team protocol, or ways of working. Determine the naming convention that works best for your team and culture.
    • This type of document saw a renewed popularity during COVID-19 as face-to-face interactions were more difficult, and as teams, news ways to work needed to be discovered, shared, and documented.
    • A co-created team charter is a critical component to onboarding new employees in the hybrid world.

    Info-Tech Insight – State of Hybrid Work in IT

    One contributor to the report shared the effort and intention around maintaining their culture during the pandemic. The team agreement created became a critical tool to enable conversations between leaders and their team – it was not a policy document.

    Team effectiveness is driven through thoughtful planned conversations. And it's a continued conversation.

    A screenshot of the IT Team Charter Template page

    Download the IT Team Charter Template

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    Identify the impact that improved team effectiveness will have on the organization.
    Determine your baseline metrics to assess the success of your team interventions and demonstrate the impact to the rest of the organization using pre-determined goals and metrics.
    Share success stories through:

    • Newsletters or email announcements
    • Team meetings
    • Presentations to business partners or the organization

    Sample effectiveness improvement goal

    Sample Metric

    Increase employee engagement
    Increase overall employee engagement scores in the Employee Engagement survey by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Overall employee engagement

    Strengthen manager/employee relationships
    Increase manager driver scores in the Employee Engagement survey by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Employee engagement – manager driver
    • Employee engagement – senior leadership driver

    Reduce employee turnover (i.e. increase retention)
    Reduce voluntary turnover by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Voluntary turnover rate
    • Turnover by department or manager
    • Cost of turnover

    Increase organizational productivity
    Increase the value added by human capital by 5% by December 31, 2023.

    • Value added by human capital
    • Employee productivity
    • Human capital return on investment
    • Employee engagement

    Reassess team effectiveness

    Reassess and identify trends after they have worked on key focus areas for improvement.

    Track the team's progress by reassessing their effectiveness six to twelve months after the initial assessment.
    Identify if:

    • Team characteristics have changed.
    • Areas of team strengths are still a source of strength.
    • Areas for improvement have, in fact, improved.
    • There are opportunities for further improvement.

    As the team matures, priorities and areas of concern may shift; it is important to regularly reassess team effectiveness to ensure ongoing alignment and suitability.
    Note: It is not always necessary to conduct a full formal assessment; once teams become more effective and self-sufficient, informal check-ins by team leads will be sufficient.

    If you assess team effectiveness for multiple teams, you have the opportunity to identify trends:

    • Are there common challenges within teams?
    • If so, what are they?
    • How comfortable are teams with intervention?
    • How often is outside help required?

    Identifying these trends, initiatives, training, or tactics may be used to improve team effectiveness across the department – or even the organization.

    Teams are ultimately accountable for their own effectiveness.

    As teams mature, the team lead should become less involved in action planning. However, enabling truly effective teams takes significant time and resources from the team lead.

    Use the action plan created and agreed upon during the team meeting to hold teams accountable:

    • Ensure teams follow through on action items.
    • Ensure you are continuously assessing team effectiveness (formally or informally).

    The team coach should have a plan to transition into a supportive role by:

    • Providing teams with the knowledge, resources, and tools required to improve and sustain high effectiveness.
    • Providing team members and leads with a safe, open, and honest environment.
    • Stepping in as an objective third party when required.

    If the team continues to face barriers

    Other important information: If team effectiveness has not significantly improved, other interventions may be required that are beyond the scope of this project.

    The four factors outlined in the IDEA Model of team effectiveness are very important, but they are not the only things that have a positive or negative impact on teams. If attempts to improve the four factors have not resulted in the desired level of team effectiveness, evaluate other barriers:

    For organizational culture, ask if performance and reward programs do the following:

    • Value teamwork alongside individual achievement and competition
    • Provide incentives that promote a focus on individual performance over team performance
    • Reward or promote those who sabotage their teams

    For learning and development, ask:

    • Is team effectiveness included in our manager or leadership training?
    • Do we offer resources to employees seeking to improve their teamwork competencies?

    If an individual team member's or leader's performance is not meeting expectations, potential remedies include a performance improvement plan, reassignment, and termination of employment.

    These kinds of interventions are beyond the control of the team itself. In these cases, we recommend you consult with your HR department; HR professionals can be important advocates because they possess the knowledge, influence, and authority in the company to promote changes that support teamwork.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Redesign Your IT Department

    • You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren't structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.
    • Increase the effectiveness of IT as a function.
    • Provide employees with clarity in their roles and responsibilities.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • With the growing IT job market, turnover is a serious threat to IT's ability to deliver seamless value and continuously drive innovation.
    • Engagement initiatives are often seen as being HR's responsibility; however, IT leadership needs to take accountability for the retention and productivity of their employees in order to drive business value.

    Info-Tech Leadership Programs

    • Development of the leadership mind should never stop. This program will help IT leaders continue to craft their leadership competencies to navigate the ever-changing world in which we operate.
    • Actively delegate responsibilities and opportunities that engage and develop team members to build on current skills and prepare for the future.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    A picture of Carlene McCubbin

    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Nick Kozlo

    Nick Kozlo
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Stephen O'Conner

    Stephen O'Conner
    Executive Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    A picture of Jane Kouptsova

    Jane Kouptsova
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Dr. Julie D. Judd, Ed.D.
    Chief Technology Officer
    Ventura County Office of Education

    Works Cited

    Aminov, I., A. DeSmet, and G. Jost. "Decision making in the age of urgency." McKinsey. April 2019. Accessed January 2023.
    Duhigg, Charles. "What Google Learned From Its Quest to Build the Perfect Team." The New York Times, 25 Feb. 2016. Accessed January 2023.
    Edmondson, Amy. "Psychological Safety and Learning Behavior in Work Teams." Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 44, no. 2, June 1999, pp. 350-383.
    Gardner, Kate. "Julie Judd – Ventura County Office of Education." Toggle, 12 Sept. 2022. Accessed January 2023.
    Google People Operations. "Guide: Understand Team Effectiveness." reWork, n.d. Accessed February 2023.
    Harkins, Phil. "10 Leadership Techniques for Building High-Performing Teams." Linkage Inc., 2014. Accessed 10 April 2017.
    Heath, C. and D. Heath. Decision: How to make better choices in life and work. Random House, 2013, ISBN 9780307361141.
    Hill, Jon. "What is an Information Silo and How Can You Avoid It." Bloomfire, 23 March 2022. Accessed January 2023.
    "IT Team Management Software for Enhanced Productivity." Freshworks, n.d. Accessed January 2023.
    Jackson, Brian. "2022 Tech Trends." Info-Tech Research Group, 2022. Accessed December 2022.
    Kahneman, Daniel. Thinking fast and slow. Farrar, Straus and Giroux. 2011.
    Kouptsova, J., and A. Mathieson. "State of Hybrid Work in IT." Info-Tech Research Group, 2023. Accessed January 2023.
    Mayfield, Clifton, et al. "Psychological Collectivism and Team Effectiveness: Moderating Effects of Trust and Psychological Safety." Journal of Organizational Culture, Communications and Conflict, vol. 20, no. 1, Jan. 2016, pp. 78-94.
    Rock, David. "SCARF: A Brain-Based Model for Collaborating With and Influencing Others." NeuroLeadership Journal, 2008. Web.
    "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech Hypercontext." Hypercontext. 2022. Accessed November 2022.
    Weick, Carl, and Kathleen Sutcliff. Managing the unexpected. John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
    "Workplace Conflict Statistics: How we approach conflict at work." The Niagara Institute, August 2022. Accessed December 2022.

    Improve Incident and Problem Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}290|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $43,761 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 23 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Incident and problem management
    • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-core-processes/infra-and-operations/i-and-o-process-management/incident-and-problem-management
    • IT infrastructure managers have conflicting accountabilities. It can be difficult to fight fires as they appear while engaging in systematic fire prevention.
    • Repetitive interruptions erode faith in IT. If incidents recur consistently, why should the business trust IT to resolve them?

    Continue reading

    Leadership, Culture and Values

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}34|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}34|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $912
    • member rating average days saved: 7
    • Parent Category Name: People and Resources
    • Parent Category Link: /people-and-resources

    The challenge

    • Your talent pool determines IT performance and stakeholder satisfaction. You need to retain talent and continually motivate them to go the extra mile.
    • The market for IT talent is growing, in the sense that talent has many more options these days. Turnover is a serious threat to IT's ability to deliver top-notch service to your company.
    • Engagement is more than HR's responsibility. IT leadership is accountable for the retention of top talent and the overall productivity of IT employees.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Engagement goes both ways. Your initiatives must address a real need, and employees must actively seek the outcomes. Engagement is not a management edict.
    • Engagement is not about access to the latest perks and gadgets. You must address the right and challenging issues. Use a systematic approach to find what lives among the employees and address these.
    • Your impact on your employees is many times bigger than HR's. Leverage your power to lead your team to success and peak performance.

    Impact and results 

    • Our engagement diagnostic and other tools will help get to the root of disengagement in your team.
    • Our guidance helps you to avoid common errors and engagement program pitfalls. They allow you to take control of your own team's engagement.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows you why engagement is critical to IT performance in your company. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in handling this.

    Measure your employee engagement

    You can use our full engagement surveys.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 1: Measure Employee Engagement (ppt)
    • Engagement Strategy Record (doc)
    • Engagement Communication Template (doc)

    Analyze the results and brainstorm solutions

    Understand your employees' engagement drivers. Involve your team in brainstorming engagement initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 2: Analyze Results and Ideate Solutions (ppt)
    • Engagement Survey Results Interpretation Guide (ppt)
    • Full Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide (ppt)
    • Pulse Engagement Survey Focus Group Facilitation Guide (ppt)
    • Focus Group Facilitation Guide Driver Definitions (doc)
    • One-on-One Manager Meeting Worksheet (doc)

    Select and implement engagement initiatives

    Choose those initiatives that show the most promise with the most significant impact. Create your action plan and establish transparent and open, and ongoing communication with your team.

    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template (xls)
    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template (doc)

    Build your knowledge transfer roadmap

    Knowledge transfer is an ongoing effort. Prioritize and define your initiatives.

    • Improve Employee Engagement to Drive IT Performance – Phase 3: Select and Implement Engagement Initiatives (ppt)
    • Summary of Interdepartmental Engagement Initiatives (doc)
    • Engagement Progress One-Pager (ppt)

     

    Optimize IT Change Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}409|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,585 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 27 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Infrastructure managers and change managers need to re-evaluate their change management processes due to slow change turnaround time, too many unauthorized changes, too many incidents and outages because of poorly managed changes, or difficulty evaluating and prioritizing changes.
    • IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.
    • Infrastructure changes are often seen as different from application changes, and two (or more) processes may exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ITIL provides a usable framework for change management, but full process rigor is not appropriate for every change request.
    • You need to design a process that is flexible enough to meet the demand for change, and strict enough to protect the live environment from change-related incidents.
    • A mature change management process will minimize review and approval activity. Counterintuitively, with experience in implementing changes, risk levels decline to a point where most changes are “pre-approved.”

    Impact and Result

    • Create a unified change management process that reduces risk. The process should be balanced in its approach toward deploying changes while also maintaining throughput of innovation and enhancements.
    • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    • Establish and empower a change manager and change advisory board with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.
    • Integrate a configuration management database with the change management process to identify dependencies.

    Optimize IT Change Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize change management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Optimize IT Change Management – Phases 1-4

    1. Define change management

    Assess the maturity of your existing change management practice and define the scope of change management for your organization.

    • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    2. Establish roles and workflows

    Build your change management team and standardized process workflows for each change type.

    • Change Manager
    • Change Management Process Library – Visio
    • Change Management Process Library – PDF
    • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure

    3. Define the RFC and post-implementation activities

    Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

    • Request for Change Form Template
    • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    4. Measure, manage, and maintain

    Form an implementation plan for the project, including a metrics evaluation, change calendar inputs, communications plan, and roadmap.

    • Change Management Metrics Tool
    • Change Management Communications Plan
    • Change Management Roadmap Tool
    • Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize IT Change Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Change Management

    The Purpose

    Discuss the existing challenges and maturity of your change management practice.

    Build definitions of change categories and the scope of change management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the starting point and scope of change management.

    Understand the context of change request versus other requests such as service requests, projects, and operational tasks.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline strengths and challenges

    1.2 Conduct a maturity assessment

    1.3 Build a categorization scheme

    1.4 Build a risk assessment matrix

    Outputs

    Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    2 Establish Roles and Workflows

    The Purpose

    Define roles and responsibilities for the change management team.

    Develop a standardized change management practice for approved changes, including process workflows.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Built the team to support your new change management practice.

    Develop a formalized and right-sized change management practice for each change category. This will ensure all changes follow the correct process and core activities to confirm changes are completed successfully.

    Activities

    2.1 Define the change manager role

    2.2 Outline the membership and protocol for the Change Advisory Board (CAB)

    2.3 Build workflows for normal, emergency, and pre-approved changes

    Outputs

    Change Manager Job Description

    Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)

    Change Management Process Library

    3 Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    The Purpose

    Create a new change intake process, including a new request for change (RFC) form.

    Develop post-implementation review activities to be completed for every IT change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Bookend your change management practice by standardizing change intake, implementation, and post-implementation activities.

    Activities

    3.1 Define the RFC template

    3.2 Determine post-implementation activities

    3.3 Build your change calendar protocol

    Outputs

    Request for Change Form Template

    Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    Project Summary Template

    4 Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    The Purpose

    Develop a plan and project roadmap for reaching your target for your change management program maturity.

    Develop a communications plan to ensure the successful adoption of the new program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A plan and project roadmap for reaching target change management program maturity.

    A communications plan ready for implementation.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify metrics and reports

    4.2 Build a communications plan

    4.3 Build your implementation roadmap

    Outputs

    Change Management Metrics Tool

    Change Management Communications Plan

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Further reading

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Right-size IT change management practice to protect the live environment.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Balance risk and efficiency to optimize IT change management.

    Change management (change enablement, change control) is a balance of efficiency and risk. That is, pushing changes out in a timely manner while minimizing the risk of deployment. On the one hand, organizations can attempt to avoid all risk and drown the process in rubber stamps, red tape, and bureaucracy. On the other hand, organizations can ignore process and push out changes as quickly as possible, which will likely lead to change related incidents and debilitating outages.

    Right-sizing the process does not mean adopting every recommendation from best-practice frameworks. It means balancing the efficiency of change request fulfillment with minimizing risk to your organization. Furthermore, creating a process that encourages adherence is key to avoid change implementers from skirting your process altogether.

    Benedict Chang, Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Infrastructure and application change occurs constantly and is driven by changing business needs, requests for new functionality, operational releases and patches, and resolution of incidents or problems detected by the service desk.

    IT managers need to follow a standard change management process to ensure that rogue changes are never deployed while the organization remains responsive to demand.

    Common Obstacles

    IT system owners often resist change management because they see it as slow and bureaucratic.

    At the same time, an increasingly interlinked technical environment may cause issues to appear in unexpected places. Configuration management systems are often not kept up-to-date and do not catch the potential linkages.

    Infrastructure changes are often seen as “different” from application changes and two (or more) processes may exist.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach will help you:

    • Create a unified change management practice that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
    • Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    • Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

    Balance Risk and Efficiency to Optimize IT Change Management

    Two goals of change management are to protect the live environment and deploying changes in a timely manner. These two may seem to sometimes be at odds against each other, but assessing risk at multiple points of a change’s lifecycle can help you achieve both.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

    • Build a right-sized change management practice that encourages adherence and balances efficiency and risk.
    • Integrate the change management practice with project management, service desk processes, configuration management, and other areas of IT and the business.
    • Communicate the benefits and impact of change management to all the stakeholders affected by the process.

    Change management is heavily reliant on organizational culture

    Having a right-sized process is not enough. You need to build and communicate the process to gather adherence. The process is useless if stakeholders are not aware of it or do not follow it.

    Increase the Effectiveness of Change Management in Your Organization

    The image is a bar graph, with the segments labelled 1 and 2. The y-axis lists numbers 1-10. Segment 1 is at 6.2, and segment 2 is at 8.6.

    Of the eight infrastructure & operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT professionals from 620 organizations

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Gaining buy-in can be a challenge no matter how well the process is built.
    • The complexity of the IT environment and culture of tacit knowledge for configuration makes it difficult to assess cross-dependencies of changes.
    • Each silo or department may have their own change management workflows that they follow internally. This can make it difficult to create a unified process that works well for everyone.

    “Why should I fill out an RFC when it only takes five minutes to push through my change?”

    “We’ve been doing this for years. Why do we need more bureaucracy?”

    “We don’t need change management if we’re Agile.”

    “We don’t have the right tools to even start change management.”

    “Why do I have to attend a CAB meeting when I don’t care what other departments are doing?”

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Build change management by implementing assessments and stage gates around appropriate levels of the change lifecycle.

    The image is a circle, comprised of arrows, with each arrow pointing to the next, forming a cycle. Each arrow is labelled, as follows: Improve; Request; Assess; Plan; Approve; Implement

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Create a unified change management process that balances risk and throughput of innovation.
    2. Categorize changes based on an industry-standard risk model with objective measures of impact and likelihood.
    3. Establish and empower a Change Manager and Change Advisory Board (CAB) with the authority to manage, approve, and prioritize changes.

    IT change is constant and is driven by:

    Change Management:

    1. Operations - Operational releases, maintenance, vendor-driven updates, and security updates can all be key drivers of change. Example: ITSM version update
      • Major Release
      • Maintenance Release
      • Security Patch
    2. Business - Business-driven changes may include requests from other business departments that require IT’s support. Examples: New ERP or HRIS implementation
      • New Application
      • New Version
    3. Service desk → Incident & Problem - Some incident and problem tickets require a change to facilitate resolution of the incident. Examples: Outage necessitating update of an app (emergency change), a user request for new functionality to be added to an existing app
      • Workaround
      • Fix
    4. Configuration Management Database (CMDB) ↔ Asset Management - In addition to software and hardware asset dependencies, a configuration management database (CMDB) is used to keep a record of changes and is queried to assess change requests.
      • Hardware
      • Software

    Insight summary

    “The scope of change management is defined by each organization…the purpose of change management is to maximize the number of successful service and product changes by ensuring that the risk have been properly assessed, authorizing changes to process, and managing the change schedule.” – ALEXOS Limited, ITIL 4

    Build a unified change management process balancing risk and change throughput.

    Building a unified process that oversees all changes to the technical environment doesn’t have to be burdensome to be effective. However, the process is a necessary starting point to identifying cross dependencies and avoiding change collisions and change-related incidents.

    Use an objective framework for estimating risk

    Simply asking, “What is the risk?” will result in subjective responses that will likely minimize the perceived risk. The level of due diligence should align to the criticality of the systems or departments potentially impacted by the proposed changes.

    Integrate your change process with your IT service management system

    Change management in isolation will provide some stability, but maturing the process through service integrations will enable data-driven decisions, decrease bureaucracy, and enable faster and more stable throughput.

    Change management and DevOps can work together effectively

    Change and DevOps tend to be at odds, but the framework does not have to change. Lower risk changes in DevOps are prime candidates for the pre-approved category. Much of the responsibility traditionally assigned to the CAB can be diffused throughout the software development lifecycle.

    Change management and DevOps can coexist

    Shift the responsibility and rigor to earlier in the process.

    • If you are implementing change management in a DevOps environment, ensure you have a strong DevOps lifecycle. You may wish to refer to Info-Tech’s research Implementing DevOps Practices That Work.
    • Consider starting in this blueprint by visiting Appendix II to frame your approach to change management. Follow the blueprint while paying attention to the DevOps Callouts.

    DEVOPS CALLOUTS

    Look for these DevOps callouts throughout this storyboard to guide you along the implementation.

    The image is a horizontal figure eight, with 7 arrows, each pointing into the next. They are labelled are follows: Plan; Create; Verify; Package; Release; Configure; Monitor. At the centre of the circles are the words Dev and Ops.

    Successful change management will provide benefits to both the business and IT

    Respond to business requests faster while reducing the number of change-related disruptions.

    IT Benefits

    • Fewer change-related incidents and outages
    • Faster change turnaround time
    • Higher rate of change success
    • Less change rework
    • Fewer service desk calls related to poorly communicated changes

    Business Benefits

    • Fewer service disruptions
    • Faster response to requests for new and enhanced functionalities
    • Higher rate of benefits realization when changes are implemented
    • Lower cost per change
    • Fewer “surprise” changes disrupting productivity

    IT satisfaction with change management will drive business satisfaction with IT. Once the process is working efficiently, staff will be more motivated to adhere to the process, reducing the number of unauthorized changes. As fewer changes bypass proper evaluation and testing, service disruptions will decrease and business satisfaction will increase.

    Change management improves core benefits to the business: the four Cs

    Most organizations have at least some form of change control in place, but formalizing change management leads to the four Cs of business benefits:

    Control

    Change management brings daily control over the IT environment, allowing you to review every relatively new change, eliminate changes that would have likely failed, and review all changes to improve the IT environment.

    Collaboration

    Change management planning brings increased communication and collaboration across groups by coordinating changes with business activities. The CAB brings a more formalized and centralized communication method for IT.

    Consistency

    Request for change templates and a structured process result in implementation, test, and backout plans being more consistent. Implementing processes for pre-approved changes also ensures these frequent changes are executed consistently and efficiently.

    Confidence

    Change management processes will give your organization more confidence through more accurate planning, improved execution of changes, less failure, and more control over the IT environment. This also leads to greater protection against audits.

    You likely need to improve change management more than any other infrastructure & operations process

    The image shows a vertical bar graph. Each segment of the graph is labelled for an infrastructure/operations process. Each segment has two bars one for effectiveness, and another for importance. The first segment, Change Management, is highlighted, with its Effectiveness at a 6.2 and Importance at 8.6

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

    Of the eight infrastructure and operations processes measured in Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program, change management consistently has the second largest gap between importance and effectiveness of these processes.

    Executives and directors recognize the importance of change management but feel theirs is currently ineffective

    Info-Tech’s IT Management and Governance Diagnostic (MGD) program assesses the importance and effectiveness of core IT processes. Since its inception, the MGD has consistently identified change management as an area for immediate improvement.

    The image is a vertical bar graph, with four segments, each having 2 bars, one for Effectiveness and the other for Importance. The four segments are (with Effectiveness and Importance ratings in brackets, respectively): Frontline (6.5/8.6); Manager (6.6/8.9); Director (6.4/8.8); and Executive (6.1/8.8)

    Source: Info-Tech 2020; n=5,108 IT Professionals from 620 organizations

    Importance Scores

    No importance: 1.0-6.9

    Limited importance: 7.0-7.9

    Significant importance: 8.0-8.9

    Critical importance: 9.0-10.0

    Effectiveness Scores

    Not in place: n/a

    Not effective: 0.0-4.9

    Somewhat Ineffective: 5.0-5.9

    Somewhat effective: 6.0-6.9

    Very effective: 7.0-10.0

    There are several common misconceptions about change management

    Which of these have you heard in your organization?

     Reality
    “It’s just a small change; this will only take five minutes to do.” Even a small change can cause a business outage. That small fix could impact a large system connected to the one being fixed.
    “Ad hoc is faster; too many processes slow things down.” Ad hoc might be faster in some cases, but it carries far greater risk. Following defined processes keeps systems stable and risk-averse.
    “Change management is all about speed.” Change management is about managing risk. It gives the illusion of speed by reducing downtime and unplanned work.
    “Change management will limit our capacity to change.” Change management allows for a better alignment of process (release management) with governance (change management).

    Overcome perceived challenges to implementing change management to reap measurable reward

    Before: Informal Change Management

    Change Approval:

    • Changes do not pass through a formal review process before implementation.
    • 10% of released changes are approved.
    • Implementation challenge: Staff will resist having to submit formal change requests and assessments, frustrated at the prospect of having to wait longer to have changes approved.

    Change Prioritization

    • Changes are not prioritized according to urgency, risk, and impact.
    • 60% of changes are urgent.
    • Implementation challenge: Influential stakeholders accustomed to having changes approved and deployed might resist having to submit changes to a standard cost-benefit analysis.

    Change Deployment

    • Changes often negatively impact user productivity.
    • 25% of changes are realized as planned.
    • Implementation challenge: Engaging the business so that formal change freeze periods and regular maintenance windows can be established.

    After: Right-Sized Change Management

    Change Approval

    • All changes pass through a formal review process. Once a change is repeatable and well-tested, it can be pre-approved to save time. Almost no unauthorized changes are deployed.
    • 95% of changes are approved.
    • KPI: Decrease in change-related incidents

    Change Prioritization

    • The CAB prioritizes changes so that the business is satisfied with the speed of change deployment.
    • 35% of changes are urgent.
    • KPI: Decrease in change turnaround time.

    Change deployment

    • Users are always aware of impending changes and changes don’t interrupt critical business activities.
    • Over 80% of changes are realized as planned
    • KPI: Decrease in the number of failed deployments.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for change management optimization focuses on building standardized processes

     1. Define Change Management2. Establish Roles and Workflows3. Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities4. Measure, Manage, and Maintain
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

      Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) Change Management Project Summary Template
    Phase Deliverables
    • Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Change Management Risk Assessment Tool
    • Change Manager Job Description
    • Change Management Process Library
    • Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
    • Change Management Pre-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist
    • Change Management Metrics Tool
    • Change Management
    • Communications Plan
    • Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Change Management Process Library

    Document your normal, pre-approved, and emergency change lifecycles with the core process workflows .

    Change Management Risk Assessment Tool

    Test Drive your impact and likelihood assessment questionnaires with the Change Management Risk Assessment Tool.

    Project Summary Template

    Summarize your efforts in the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template.

    Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Record your action items and roadmap your steps to a mature change management process.

    Key Deliverable:

    Change Management SOP

    Document and formalize your process starting with the change management standard operating procedure (SOP).

    These case studies illustrate the value of various phases of this project

    Define Change Management

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    A major technology company implemented change management to improve productivity by 40%. This case study illustrates the full scope of the project.

    A large technology firm experienced a critical outage due to poor change management practices. This case study illustrates the scope of change management definition and strategy.

    Ignorance of change management process led to a technology giant experiencing a critical cloud outage. This case study illustrates the scope of the process phase.

    A manufacturing company created a makeshift CMDB in the absence of a CMDB to implement change management. This case study illustrates the scope of change intake.

    A financial institution tracked and recorded metrics to aid in the success of their change management program. This case study illustrates the scope of the implementation phase.

    Working through this project with Info-Tech can save you time and money

    Engaging in a Guided Implementation doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

    Guided ImplementationMeasured Vale
    Phase 1: Define Change Management
    • We estimate Phase 1 activities will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

    Phase 2: Establish Roles and Workflows

    • We estimate Phase 2 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).
    Phase 3: Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities
    • We estimate Phase 3 will take 2 FTEs 10 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $3,100 (2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year).

    Phase 4: Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    • We estimate Phase 4 will take 2 FTEs 5 days to complete on their own, but the time saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology will cut that time in half, thereby saving $1,500 (2 FTEs * 2.5 days * $80,000/year).
    Total Savings $10,800

    Case Study

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Intel implemented a robust change management program and experienced a 40% improvement in change efficiency.

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    ITIL Change Management Implementation

    With close to 4,000 changes occurring each week, managing Intel’s environment is a formidable task. Before implementing change management within the organization, over 35% of all unscheduled downtime was due to errors resulting from change and release management. Processes were ad hoc or scattered across the organization and no standards were in place.

    Results

    After a robust implementation of change management, Intel experienced a number of improvements including automated approvals, the implementation of a formal change calendar, and an automated RFC form. As a result, Intel improved change productivity by 40% within the first year of the program’s implementation.

    Define Change Management

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Define Change Management

    • Call #1: Introduce change concepts.
    • Call #2: Assess current maturity.
    • Call #3: Identify target-state capabilities.

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    • Call #4: Review roles and responsibilities.
    • Call #5: Review core change processes.

    Define RFC and Post- Implementation Activities

    • Call #6: Define change intake process.
    • Call #7: Create pre-implementation and post-implementation checklists.

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    • Call #8: Review metrics.
    • Call #9: Create roadmap.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

     Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5
    Activities

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Outline Strengths and Challenges

    1.2 Conduct a Maturity Assessment

    1.3 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    1.4 Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Define the Change Manager Role

    2.2 Outline CAB Protocol and membership

    2.3 Build Normal Change Process

    2.4 Build Emergency Change Process

    2.5 Build Pre-Approved Change Process

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Create an RFC Template

    3.2 Determine Post-Implementation Activities

    3.3 Build a Change Calendar Protocol

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Reports

    4.2 Create Communications Plan

    4.3 Build an Implementation Roadmap

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Maturity Assessment
    2. Risk Assessment
    1. Change Manager Job Description
    2. Change Management Process Library
    1. Request for Change (RFC) Form Template
    2. Pre-Implementation Checklist
    3. Post-Implementation Checklist
    1. Metrics Tool
    2. Communications Plan
    3. Project Roadmap
    1. Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
    2. Workshop Summary Deck

    Phase 1

    Define Change Management

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Assess Maturity
    • Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 1.1

    Assess Maturity

    Activities

    1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

    1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of maturity change management processes and frameworks
    • Identification of existing change management challenges and potential causes
    • A framework for assessing change management maturity and an assessment of your existing change management processes

    Define Change Management

    Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Change management is often confused with release management, but they are distinct processes

    Change

    • Change management looks at software changes as well as hardware, database, integration, and network changes, with the focus on stability of the entire IT ecosystem for business continuity.
    • Change management provides a holistic view of the IT environment, including dependencies, to ensure nothing is negatively affected by changes.
    • Change documentation is more focused on process, ensuring dependencies are mapped, rollout plans exist, and the business is not at risk.

    Release

    • Release and deployment are the detailed plans that bundle patches, upgrades, and new features into deployment packages, with the intent to change them flawlessly into a production environment.
    • Release management is one of many actions performed under change management’s governance.
    • Release documentation includes technical specifications such as change schedule, package details, change checklist, configuration details, test plan, and rollout and rollback plans.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure the Release Manager is present as part of your CAB. They can explain any change content or dependencies, communicate business approval, and advise the service desk of any defects.

    Integrate change management with other IT processes

    As seen in the context diagram, change management interacts closely with many other IT processes including release management and configuration management (seen below). Ensure you delineate when these interactions occur (e.g. RFC updates and CMDB queries) and which process owns each task.

    The image is a chart mapping the interactions between Change Management and Configuration Management (CMDB).

    Avoid the challenges of poor change management

    1. Deployments
      • Too frequent: The need for frequent deployments results in reduced availability of critical business applications.
      • Failed deployments or rework is required: Deployments are not successful and have to be backed out of and then reworked to resolve issues with the installation.
      • High manual effort: A lack of automation results in high resource costs for deployments. Human error is likely, which adds to the risk of a failed deployment.
    2. Incidents
      • Too many unauthorized changes: If the process is perceived as cumbersome and ineffective, people will bypass it or abuse the emergency designation to get their changes deployed faster.
      • Changes cause incidents: When new releases are deployed, they create problems with related systems or applications.
    3. End Users
      • Low user satisfaction: Poor communication and training result in surprised and unhappy users and support staff.

    “With no controls in place, IT gets the blame for embarrassing outages. Too much control, and IT is seen as a roadblock to innovation.” – Anonymous, VP IT of a federal credit union

    1.1.1 Outline the Organization’s Strengths and Challenges

    Input

    • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)
    • Organizational chart(s)

    Output

    • List of strengths and challenges for change management

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As group, discuss and outline the change management challenges facing the organization. These may be challenges caused by poor change management processes or by a lack of process.
    2. Use the pain points found on the previous slide to help guide the discussion.
    3. As a group, also outline the strengths of change management and the strengths of the current organization. Use these strengths as a guide to know what practices to continue and what strengths you can leverage to improve the change management process.
    4. Record the activity results in the Project Summary Template.

    Download the Optimize IT Change Management Improvement Initiative: Project Summary Template

    Assess current change management maturity to create a plan for improvement

     ChaosReactiveControlled

    Proactive

    Optimized
    Change Requests No defined processes for submitting changes Low process adherence and no RFC form RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists RFCs are reviewed for scope and completion RFCs trend analysis and proactive change exists
    Change Review Little to no change risk assessment Risk assessment exists for each RFC RFC form is centralized and a point of contact for changes exists Change calendar exists and is maintained System and component dependencies exist (CMDB)
    Change Approval No formal approval process exists Approval process exists but is not widely followed Unauthorized changes are minimal or nonexistent Change advisory board (CAB) is established and formalized Trend analysis exists increasing pre-approved changes
    Post-Deployment No post-deployment change review exists Process exists but is not widely followed Reduction of change-related incidents Stakeholder satisfaction is gathered and reviewed Lessons learned are propagated and actioned
    Process Governance Roles & responsibilities are ad hoc Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented Roles, policies & procedures are defined & documented KPIs are tracked, reported on, and reviewed KPIs are proactively managed for improvement

    Info-Tech Insight

    Reaching an optimized level is not feasible for every organization. You may be able to run a very good change management process at the Proactive or even Controlled stage. Pay special attention to keeping your goals attainable.

    1.1.2 Complete a Maturity Assessment

    Input

    • Current change documentation (workflows, SOP, change policy, etc.)

    Output

    • Assessment of current maturity level and goals to improve change management

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool to assess the maturity and completeness of your change process.
    2. Significant gaps revealed in this assessment should be the focal points of your discussion when investigating root causes and brainstorming remediation activities:
      1. For each activity of each process area of change management, determine the degree of completeness of your current process.
      2. Review your maturity assessment results and discuss as a group potential reasons why you arrived at your maturity level. Identify areas where you should focus your initial attention for improvement.
      3. Regularly review the maturity of your change management practices by completing this maturity assessment tool periodically to identify other areas to optimize.

    Download the Change Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Case Study

    Even Google isn’t immune to change-related outages. Plan ahead and communicate to help avoid change-related incidents

    Industry: Technology

    Source: The Register

    As part of a routine maintenance procedure, Google engineers moved App Engine applications between data centers in the Central US to balance out traffic.

    Unfortunately, at the same time that applications were being rerouted, a software update was in progress on the traffic routers, which triggered a restart. This temporarily diminished router capacity, knocking out a sizeable portion of Google Cloud.

    The server drain resulted in a huge spike in startup requests, and the routers simply couldn’t handle the traffic.

    As a result, 21% of Google App Engine applications hosted in the Central US experienced error rates in excess of 10%, while an additional 16% of applications experienced latency, albeit at a lower rate.

    Solution

    Thankfully, engineers were actively monitoring the implementation of the change and were able to spring into action to halt the problem.

    The change was rolled back after 11 minutes, but the configuration error still needed to be fixed. After about two hours, the change failure was resolved and the Google Cloud was fully functional.

    One takeaway for the engineering team was to closely monitor how changes are scheduled. Ultimately, this was the result of miscommunication and a lack of transparency between change teams.

    Step 1.2

    Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

    1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

    1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

    1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

    Define Change Management

    Step 1.1: Assess Maturity → Step 1.2: Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure/Applications Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear definition of what constitutes a change in your organization
    • A defined categorization scheme to classify types of changes
    • A risk assessment matrix and tool for evaluating and prioritizing change requests according to impact and likelihood of risk

    Change must be managed to mitigate risk to the infrastructure

    Change management is the gatekeeper protecting your live environment.

    Successfully managed changes will optimize risk exposure, severity of impact, and disruption. This will result in the bottom-line business benefits of removal of risk, early realization of benefits, and savings of money and time.

    • IT change is constant; change requests will be made both proactively and reactively to upgrade systems, acquire new functionality, and to prevent or resolve incidents.
    • Every change to the infrastructure must pass through the change management process before being deployed to ensure that it has been properly assessed and tested, and to check that a backout /rollback plan is in place.
    • It will be less expensive to invest in a rigorous change management process than to resolve incidents, service disruptions, and outages caused by the deployment of a bad change.
    • Change management is what gives you control and visibility regarding what is introduced to the live environment, preventing incidents that threaten business continuity.

    80%

    In organizations without formal change management processes, about 80% (The Visible Ops Handbook) of IT service outage problems are caused by updates and changes to systems, applications, and infrastructure. It’s crucial to track and systematically manage change to fully understand and predict the risks and potential impact of the change.

    Attributes of a change

    Differentiate changes from other IT requests

    Is this in the production environment of a business process?

    The core business of the enterprise or supporting functions may be affected.

    Does the task affect an enterprise managed system?

    If it’s for a local application, it’s a service request

    How many users are impacted?

    It should usually impact more than a single user (in most cases).

    Is there a configuration, or code, or workflow, or UI/UX change?

    Any impact on a business process is a change; adding a user or a recipient to a report or mailing list is not a change.

    Does the underlying service currently exist?

    If it’s a new service, then it’s better described as a project.

    Is this done/requested by IT?

    It needs to be within the scope of IT for the change management process to apply.

    Will this take longer than one week?

    As a general rule, if it takes longer than 40 hours of work to complete, it’s likely a project.

    Defining what constitutes a change

    Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.

    ChangeService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)
    • Fixing defects in code
    • Changing configuration of an enterprise system
    • Adding new software or hardware components
    • Switching an application to another VM
    • Standardized request
    • New PC
    • Permissions request
    • Change password
    • Add user
    • Purchases
    • Change the backup tape
    • Delete temporary files
    • Maintain database (one that is well defined, repeatable, and predictable)
    • Run utilities to repair a database

    Do not treat every IT request as a change!

    • Many organizations make the mistake of calling a standard service request or operational task a “change.”
    • Every change request will initiate the change management process; don’t waste time reviewing requests that are out of scope.
    • While the overuse of RFCs for out-of-scope requests is better than a lack of process, this will slow the process and delay the approval of more critical changes.
    • Requiring an RFC for something that should be considered day-to-day work will also discourage people from adhering to the process, because the RFC will be seen as meaningless paperwork.

     

    1.2.1 Define What Constitutes a Change

    Input

    • List of examples of each category of the chart

    Output

    • Definitions for each category to be used at change intake

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As a group, brainstorm examples of changes, projects, service requests (user), operational tasks (backend), and releases. You may add additional categories as needed (e.g. incidents).
    2. Have each participant write the examples on sticky notes and populate the following chart on the whiteboard/flip chart.
    3. Use the examples to draw lines and define what defines each category.
      • What makes a change distinct from a project?
      • What makes a change distinct from a service request?
      • What makes a change distinct from an operational task?
      • When do the category workflows cross over with other categories? (For example, when does a project interact with change management?)
    4. Record the definitions of requests and results in section 2.3 of the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).
    ChangeProjectService Request (User)Operational Task (Backend)Release
    Changing Configuration ERP upgrade Add new user Delete temp files Software release

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Each RFC should define resources needed to effect the change

    In addition to assigning a category to each RFC based on risk assessment, each RFC should also be assigned a priority based on the impact of the change on the IT organization, in terms of the resources needed to effect the change.

    Categories include

    Normal

    Emergency

    Pre-Approved

    The majority of changes will be pre-approved or normal changes. Definitions of each category are provided on the next slide.

    Info-Tech uses the term pre-approved rather than the ITIL terminology of standard to more accurately define the type of change represented by this category.

    A potential fourth change category of expedited may be employed if you are having issues with process adherence or if you experience changes driven from outside change management’s control (e.g. from the CIO, director, judiciary, etc.) See Appendix I for more details.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Do not rush to designate changes as pre-approved. You may have a good idea of which changes may be considered pre-approved, but make sure they are in fact low-risk and well-documented before moving them over from the normal category.

    The category of the change determines the process it follows

     Pre-ApprovedNormalEmergency
    Definition
    • Tasks are well-known, documented, and proven
    • Budgetary approval is preordained or within control of change requester
    • Risk is low and understood
    • There’s a low probability of failure
    • All changes that are not pre-approved or emergency will be classified as normal
    • Further categorized by priority/risk
    • The change is being requested to resolve a current or imminent critical/severity-1 incident that threatens business continuity
    • Associated with a critical incident or problem ticket
    Trigger
    • The same change is built and changed repeatedly using the same install procedures and resulting in the same low-risk outcome
    • Upgrade or new functionality that will capture a business benefit
    • A fix to a current problem
    • A current or imminent critical incident that will impact business continuity
    • Urgency to implement the change must be established, as well as lack of any alternative or workaround
    Workflow
    • Pre-established
    • Repeatable with same sequence of actions, with minimal judgment or decision points
    • Dependent on the change
    • Different workflows depending on prioritization
    • Dependent on the change
    Approval
    • Change Manager (does not need to be reviewed by CAB)
    • CAB
    • Approval from the Emergency Change Advisory Board (E-CAB) is sufficient to proceed with the change
    • A retroactive RFC must be created and approved by the CAB

    Pay close attention to defining your pre-approved changes. They are going to be critical for running a smooth change management practice in a DevOps Environment

    1.2.2 Build a Change Categorization Scheme

    Input

    • List of examples of each change category

    Output

    • Definitions for each change category

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Discuss the change categories on the previous slide and modify the types of descriptions to suit your organization.
    2. Once the change categories or types are defined, identify several examples of change requests that would fall under each category.
    3. Types of normal changes will be further defined in the next activity and can be left blank for now.
    4. Examples are provided below. Capture your definitions in section 4 of your Change Management SOP.
    Pre-Approved (AKA Standard)NormalEmergency
    • Microsoft patch management/deployment
    • Windows update
    • Minor form changes
    • Service pack updates on non-critical systems
    • Advance label status on orders
    • Change log retention period/storage
    • Change backup frequency

    Major

    • Active directory server upgrade
    • New ERP

    Medium

    • Network upgrade
    • High availability implementation

    Minor

    • Ticket system go-live
    • UPS replacement
    • Cognos update
    • Any change other than a pre-approved change
    • Needed to resolve a major outage in a Tier 1 system

    Assess the risk for each normal change based on impact (severity) and likelihood (probability)

    Create a change assessment risk matrix to standardize risk assessment for new changes. Formalizing this assessment should be one of the first priorities of change management.

    The following slides guide you through the steps of formalizing a risk assessment according to impact and likelihood:

    1. Define a risk matrix: Risk matrices can either be a 3x3 matrix (Minor, Medium, or High Risk as shown on the next slide) or a 4x4 matrix (Minor, Medium, High, or Critical Risk).
    2. Build an impact assessment: Enable consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
    3. Build a likelihood assessment: Enable the consistent measurement of impact for each change by incorporating a standardized questionnaire for each RFC.
    4. Test drive your risk assessment and make necessary adjustments: Measure your newly formed risk assessment questionnaires against historical changes to test its accuracy.

    Consider risk

    1. Risk should be the primary consideration in classifying a normal change as Low, Medium, High. The extent of governance required, as well as minimum timeline to implement the change, will follow from the risk assessment.
    2. The business benefit often matches the impact level of the risk – a change that will provide a significant benefit to a large number of users may likely carry an equally major downside if deviations occur.

    Info-Tech Insight

    All changes entail an additional level of risk. Risk is a function of impact and likelihood. Risk may be reduced, accepted, or neutralized through following best practices around training, testing, backout planning, redundancy, timing and sequencing of changes, etc.

    Create a risk matrix to assign a risk rating to each RFC

    Every normal RFC should be assigned a risk rating.

    How is risk rating determined?

    • Priority should be based on the business consequences of implementing or denying the change.
    • Risk rating is assigned using the impact of the risk and likelihood/probability that the event may occur.

    Who determines priority?

    • Priority should be decided with the change requester and with the CAB, if necessary.
    • Don’t let the change requester decide priority alone, as they will usually assign it a higher priority than is justified. Use a repeatable, standardized framework to assess each request.

    How is risk rating used?

    • Risk rating is used to determine which changes should be discussed and assessed first.
    • Time frames and escalation processes should be defined for each risk level.

    RFCs need to clearly identify the risk level of the proposed change. This can be done through statement of impact and likelihood (low/medium/high) or through pertinent questions linked with business rules to assess the risk.

    Risk always has a negative impact, but the size of the impact can vary considerably in terms of cost, number of people or sites affected, and severity of the impact. Impact questions tend to be more objective and quantifiable than likelihood questions.

    Risk Matrix

    Risk Matrix. Impact vs. Likelihood. Low impact, Low Likelihood and Medium Impact, Medium Likelihood are minor risks. High Likelihood, Low Impact; Medium Likelihood, Medium Impact; and Low Likelihood, High Impact are Medium Risk. High Impact, High Likelihood; High Impact, Medium Likelihood; and Medium Impact, High Likelihood are Major risk.

    1.2.3 Build a Classification Scheme to Assess Impact

    Input

    • Current risk assessment (if available)

    Output

    • Tailored impact assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk impact.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
    4. Capture your results in section 4.3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
    Impact
    Weight Question High Medium Low
    15% # of people affected 36+ 11-35 <10
    20% # of sites affected 4+ 2-3 1
    15% Duration of recovery (minutes of business time) 180+ 30-18 <3
    20% Systems affected Mission critical Important Informational
    30% External customer impact Loss of customer Service interruption None

    1.2.4 Build a Classification Scheme to Define Likelihood

    Input

    • Current risk assessment (if available)

    Output

    • Tailored likelihood assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Define a set of questions to measure risk likelihood.
    2. For each question, assign a weight that should be placed on that factor.
    3. Define criteria for each question that would categorize the risk as high, medium, or low.
    4. Capture your results in section 4.3.2 of your Change Management SOP.
    LIKELIHOOD
    Weight Question High Medium Low
    25% Has this change been tested? No   Yes
    10% Have all the relevant groups (companies, departments, executives) vetted the change? No Partial Yes
    5% Has this change been documented? No   Yes
    15% How long is the change window? When can we implement? Specified day/time Partial Per IT choice
    20% Do we have trained and experienced staff available to implement this change? If only external consultants are available, the rating will be “medium” at best. No   Yes
    25% Has an implementation plan been developed? No   Yes

    1.2.5 Evaluate and Adjust Your Risk Assessment Scheme

    Input

    • Impact and likelihood assessments from previous two activities

    Output

    • Vetted risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Draw your risk matrix on a whiteboard or flip chart.
    2. As a group, identify up to 10 examples of requests for changes that would apply within your organization. Depending on the number of people participating, each person could identify one or two changes and write them on sticky notes.
    3. Take turns bringing your sticky notes up to the risk matrix and placing each where it belongs, according to the assessment criteria you defined.
    4. After each participant has taken a turn, discuss each change as a group and adjust the placement of any changes, if needed. Update the risk assessment weightings or questions, if needed.

    Download the Change Management Rick Assessment Tool.

    #

    Change Example

    Impact

    Likelihood

    Risk

    1

    ERP change

    High

    Medium

    Major

    2

    Ticket system go-live

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    3

    UPS replacement

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    4

    Network upgrade

    Medium

    Medium

    Medium

    5

    AD upgrade

    Medium

    Low

    Minor

    6

    High availability implementation

    Low

    Medium

    Minor

    7

    Key-card implementation

    Low

    High

    Medium

    8

    Anti-virus update

    Low

    Low

    Minor

    9

    Website

    Low

    Medium

    Minor

     

    Case Study

    A CMDB is not a prerequisite of change management. Don’t let the absence of a configuration management database (CMDB) prevent you from implementing change management.

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: Anonymous Info-Tech member

    Challenge

    The company was planning to implement a CMDB; however, full implementation was still one year away and subject to budget constraints.

    Without a CMDB, it would be difficult to understand the interdependencies between systems and therefore be able to provide notifications to potentially affected user groups prior to implementing technical changes.

    This could have derailed the change management project.

    Solution

    An Excel template was set up as a stopgap measure until the full implementation of the CMDB. The template included all identified dependencies between systems, along with a “dependency tier” for each IT service.

    Tier 1: The dependent system would not operate if the upstream system change resulted in an outage.

    Tier 2: The dependent system would suffer severe degradation of performance and/or features.

    Tier 3: The dependent system would see minor performance degradation or minor feature unavailability.

    Results

    As a stopgap measure, the solution worked well. When changes ran the risk of degrading downstream dependent systems, the impacted business system owner’s authorization was sought and end users were informed in advance.

    The primary takeaway was that a system to manage configuration linkages and system dependencies was key.

    While a CMDB is ideal for this use case, IT organizations shouldn’t let the lack of such a system stop progress on change management.

    Case Study (part 1 of 4)

    Intel used a maturity assessment to kick-start its new change management program.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Due to the sheer volume of change management activities present at Intel, over 35% of unscheduled outages were the result of changes.

    Ineffective change management was identified as the top contributor of incidents with unscheduled downtime.

    One of the major issues highlighted was a lack of process ownership. The change management process at Intel was very fragmented, and that needed to change.

    Results

    Daniel Grove, Senior Release & Change Manager at Intel, identified that clarifying tasks for the Change Manager and the CAB would improve process efficiency by reducing decision lag time. Roles and responsibilities were reworked and clarified.

    Intel conducted a maturity assessment of the overall change management process to identify key areas for improvement.

    Phase 2

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    For running change management in DevOps environment, see Appendix II.

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following steps:

    • Determine Roles and Responsibilities
    • Build Core Workflows

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 2.1

    Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    Activities

    2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

    2.1.2 Determine Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

    2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

    2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clearly defined responsibilities to form the job description for a Change Manager
    • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the change management team, including the business system owner, technical SME, and CAB members
    • Defined responsibilities and authority of the CAB
    • Protocol for an emergency CAB (E-CAB) meeting

    Identify roles and responsibilities for your change management team

    Business System Owner

    • Provides downtime window(s)
    • Advises on need for change (prior to creation of RFC)
    • Validates change (through UAT or other validation as necessary)
    • Provides approval for expedited changes (needs to be at executive level)

    Technical Subject Matter Expert (SME)

    • Advises on proposed changes prior to RFC submission
    • Reviews draft RFC for technical soundness
    • Assesses backout/rollback plan
    • Checks if knowledgebase has been consulted for prior lessons learned
    • Participates in the PIR, if necessary
    • Ensures that the service desk is trained on the change

    CAB

    • Approves/rejects RFCs for normal changes
    • Reviews lessons learned from PIRs
    • Decides on the scope of change management
    • Reviews metrics and decides on remedial actions
    • Considers changes to be added to list of pre-approved changes
    • Communicates to organization about upcoming changes

    Change Manager

    • Reviews RFCs for completeness
    • Ensures RFCs brought to the CAB have a high chance of approval
    • Chairs CAB meetings, including scheduling, agenda preparation, reporting, and follow-ups
    • Manages post-implementation reviews and reporting
    • Organizes internal communications (within IT)

    2.1.1 Capture Roles and Responsibilities Using a RACI Chart

    Input

    • Current SOP

    Output

    • Documented roles and responsibilities in change management in a RACI chart

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. As a group, work through developing a RACI chart to determine the roles and responsibilities of individuals involved in the change management practice based on the following criteria:
      • Responsible (performs the work)
      • Accountable (ensures the work is done)
      • Consulted (two-way communication)
      • Informed (one-way communication)
    2. Record your results in slide 14 of the Project Summary Template and section 3.1 of your Change Management SOP.
    Change Management TasksOriginatorSystem OwnerChange ManagerCAB MemberTechnical SMEService DeskCIO/ VP ITE-CAB Member
    Review the RFC C C A C R C R  
    Validate changes C C A C R C R  
    Assess test plan A C R R C   I  
    Approve the RFC I C A R C   I  
    Create communications plan R I A     I I  
    Deploy communications plan I I A I   R    
    Review metrics   C A R   C I  
    Perform a post implementation review   C R A     I  
    Review lessons learned from PIR activities     R A   C    

    Designate a Change Manager to own the process, change templates, and tools

    The Change Manager will be the point of contact for all process questions related to change management.

    • The Change Manager needs the authority to reject change requests, regardless of the seniority of the requester.
    • The Change Manager needs the authority to enforce compliance to a standard process.
    • The Change Manager needs enough cross-functional subject-matter expertise to accurately evaluate the impact of change from both an IT and business perspective.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Some organizations will not be able to assign a dedicated Change Manager, but they must still task an individual with change review authority and with ownership of the risk assessment and other key parts of the process.

    Responsibilities

    1. The Change Manager is your first stop for change approval. Both the change management and release and deployment management processes rely on the Change Manager to function.
    2. Every single change that is applied to the live environment, from a single patch to a major change, must originate with a request for change (RFC), which is then approved by the Change Manager to proceed to the CAB for full approval.
    3. Change templates and tools, such as the change calendar, list of preapproved changes, and risk assessment template are controlled by the Change Manager.
    4. The Change Manager also needs to have ownership over gathering metrics and reports surrounding deployed changes. A skilled Change Manager needs to have an aptitude for applying metrics for continual improvement activities.

    2.1.2 Document Your Change Manager’s Responsibilities

    Input

    • Current Change Manager job description (if available)

    Output

    • Change Manager job description and list of responsibilities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Markers/pens
    • Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description
    • Change Management SOP

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    1.Using the previous slide, Info-Tech’s Change Manager Job Description, and the examples below, brainstorm responsibilities for the Change Manager.

    2.Record the responsibilities in Section 3.2 of your Change Management SOP.

    Example:

    Change Manager: James Corey

    Responsibilities

    1. Own the process, tools, and templates.
    2. Control the Change Management SOP.
    3. Provide standard RFC forms.
    4. Distribute RFCs for CAB review.
    5. Receive all initial RFCs and check them for completion.
    6. Approve initial RFCs.
    7. Approve pre-approved changes.
    8. Approve the conversion of normal changes to pre-approved changes.
    9. Assemble the Emergency CAB (E-CAB) when emergency change requests are received.
    10. Approve submission of RFCs for CAB review.
    11. Chair the CAB:
      • Set the CAB agenda and distribute it at least 24 hours before the meeting.
      • Ensure the agenda is adhered to.
      • Make the final approval/prioritization decision regarding a change if the CAB is deadlocked and cannot come to an agreement.
      • Distribute CAB meeting minutes to all members and relevant stakeholders.

    Download the Change Manager Job Description

    Create a Change Advisory Board (CAB) to provide process governance

    The primary functions of the CAB are to:

    1. Protect the live environment from poorly assessed, tested, and implemented changes.
      • CAB approval is required for all normal and emergency changes.
      • If a change results in an incident or outage, the CAB is effectively responsible; it’s the responsibility of the CAB to assess and accept the potential impact of every change.
    2. Prioritize changes in a way that fairly reflects change impact and urgency.
      • Change requests will originate from multiple stakeholders, some of whom have competing interests.
      • It’s up to the CAB to prioritize these requests effectively so that business need is balanced with any potential risk to the infrastructure.
      • The CAB should seek to reduce the number of emergency/expedited changes.
    3. Schedule deployments in a way that minimizes conflict and disruption.
      • The CAB uses a change calendar populated with project work, upcoming organizational initiatives, and change freeze periods. They will schedule changes around these blocks to avoid disrupting user productivity.
      • The CAB should work closely with the release and deployment management teams to coordinate change/release scheduling.

    See what responsibilities in the CAB’s process are already performed by the DevOps lifecycle (e.g. authorization, deconfliction etc.). Do not duplicate efforts.

    Use diverse representation from the business to form an effective CAB

    The CAB needs insight into all areas of the business to avoid approving a high-risk change.

    Based on the core responsibilities you have defined, the CAB needs to be composed of a diverse set of individuals who provide quality:

    • Change need assessments – identifying the value and purpose of a proposed change.
    • Change risk assessments – confirmation of the technical impact and likelihood assessments that lead to a risk score, based on the inputs in RFC.
    • Change scheduling – offer a variety of perspectives and responsibilities and will be able to identify potential scheduling conflicts.
     CAB RepresentationValue Added
    Business Members
    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Analyst
    • Identify change blackout periods, change impact, and business urgency.
    • Assess impact on fiduciary, legal, and/or audit requirements.
    • Determine acceptable business risk.
    IT Operations Members
    • Managers representing all IT functions
    • IT Directors
    • Subject Matter Experts (SMEs)
    • Identify dependencies and downstream impacts.
    • Identify possible conflicts with pre-existing OLAs and SLAs.
    CAB Attendees
    • Specific SMEs, tech specialists, and business and vendor reps relevant to a particular change
    • Only attend meetings when invited by the Change Manager
    • Provide detailed information and expertise related to their particular subject areas.
    • Speak to requirements, change impact, and cost.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Form a core CAB (members attend every week) and an optional CAB (members who attend only when a change impacts them or when they can provide value in discussions about a change). This way, members can have their voice heard without spending every week in a meeting where they do not contribute.

    2.1.3 Define the Authority and Responsibilities of Your CAB

    Input

    • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

    Output

    • Documented list of CAB authorities and responsibilities

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    1.Using the previous slide and the examples below, list the authorities and responsibilities of your CAB.

    2.Record the responsibilities in section 3.3.2 of your Change Management SOP and the Project Summary Template.

    Example:

    CAP AuthorityCAP Responsibilities
    • Final authority over the deployment of all normal and emergency changes.
    • Authority to absorb the risk of a change.
    • Authority to set the change calendar:
      • Maintenance windows.
      • Change freeze periods.
      • Project work.
      • Authority to delay changes.
    • Evaluate all normal and emergency changes.
    • Verify all normal change test, backout, and implementation plans.
    • Verify all normal change test results.
    • Approve all normal and emergency changes.
    • Prioritize all normal changes.
    • Schedule all normal and emergency changes.
    • Review failed change deployments.

    Establish an emergency CAB (E-CAB) protocol

    • When an emergency change request is received, you will not be able to wait until the regularly scheduled CAB meeting.
    • As a group, decide who will sit on the E-CAB and what their protocol will be when assessing and approving emergency changes.

    Change owner conferences with E-CAB (best efforts to reach them) through email or messaging.

    E-CAB members and business system owners are provided with change details. No decision is made without feedback from at least one E-CAB member.

    If business continuity is being affected, the Change Manager has authority to approve change.

    Full documentation of the change (a retroactive RFC) is done after the change and is then reviewed by the CAB.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Members of the E-CAB should be a subset of the CAB who are typically quick to respond to their messages, even at odd hours of the night.

    2.1.4 Determine an E-CAB Protocol for Your Organization

    Input

    • Current SOP or CAB charter (if available)

    Output

    • E-CAB protocol

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather the members of the E-CAB and other necessary representatives from the change management team.
    2. Determine the order of operations for the E-CAB in the event that an emergency change is needed.
    3. Consult the example emergency protocol below. Determine what roles and responsibilities are involved at each stage of the emergency change’s implementation.
    4. Document the E-CAB protocol in section 3.4 of your Change Management SOP.

    Example

    Assemble E-CAB

    Assess Change

    Test (if Applicable)

    Deploy Change

    Create Retroactive RFC

    Review With CAB

    Step 2.2

    Build Core Workflows

    Activities

    2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

    2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

    2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

    2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    Step 2.1: Determine Roles and Responsibilities → Step 2.2: Build Core Workflows

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • Emergency change workflow
    • Normal process workflow
    • Pre-approved change workflow

    Establishing Workflows: Change Management Lifecycle

    Improve

    • A post-implementation review assesses the value of the actual change measured against the proposed change in terms of benefits, costs, and impact.
    • Results recorded in the change log.
    • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

    Request

    • A change request (RFC) can be submitted via paper form, phone, email, or web portal.
    • Accountability: Change requester/Initiator

    Assess

    • The request is screened to ensure it meets an agreed-upon set of business criteria.
    • Changes are assessed on:
      • Impact of change
      • Risks or interdependencies
      • Resourcing and costs
    • Accountability: Change Manager

    Plan

    • Tasks are assigned, planned, and executed.
    • Change schedule is consulted and necessary resources are identified.
    • Accountability: Change Manager

    Approve

    • Approved requests are sent to the most efficient channel based on risk, urgency, and complexity.
    • Change is sent to CAB members for final review and approval
    • Accountability: Change Manager
      • Change Advisory Board

    Implement

    • Approved changes are deployed.
    • A rollback plan is created to mitigate risk.
    • Accountability: Change Manager Change Implementer

    Establishing workflows: employ a SIPOC model for process definition

    A good SIPOC (supplier, input, process, output, customer) model helps establish the boundaries of each process step and provides a concise definition of the expected outcomes and required inputs. It’s a useful and recommended next step for every workflow diagram.

    For change management, employ a SIPOC model to outline your CAB process:

    Supplier

    • Who or what organization provides the inputs to the process? The supplier can be internal or external.

    Input

    • What goes into the process step? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

    Process

    • Activities that occur in the process step that’s being analyzed.

    Output

    • What does the process step produce? This can be a document, data, information, or a decision.

    Customer

    • Who or what organization(s) takes the output of the process? The customer can be internal or external.

    Optional Fields

    Metrics

    • Top-level indicators that usually relate to the input and output, e.g. turnaround time, risk matrix completeness.

    Controls

    • Checkpoints to ensure process step quality.

    Dependencies

    • Other process steps that require the output.

    RACI

    • Those who are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, or Informed (RACI) about the input, output, and/or process.

    Establish change workflows: assess requested changes to identify impact and dependencies

    An effective change assessment workflow is a holistic process that leaves no stone unturned in an effort to mitigate risk before any change reaches the approval stage. The four crucial areas of risk in a change workflow are:

    Dependencies

    Identify all components of the change.

    Ask how changes will affect:

    • Services on the same infrastructure?
    • Applications?
    • Infrastructure/app architecture?
    • Security?
    • Ability to support critical systems?

    Business Impact

    Frame the change from a business point of view to identify potential disruptions to business activities.

    Your assessment should cover:

    • Business processes
    • User productivity
    • Customer service
    • BCPs

    SLA Impact

    Each new change can impact the level of service available.

    Examine the impact on:

    • Availability of critical systems
    • Infrastructure and app performance
    • Infrastructure and app capacity
    • Existing disaster recovery plans and procedures

    Required Resources

    Once risk has been assessed, resources need to be identified to ensure the change can be executed.

    These include:

    • People (SMEs, tech support, work effort/duration)
    • System time for scheduled implementation
    • Hardware or software (new or existing, as well as tools)

    Establishing workflows: pinpoint dependencies to identify the need for additional changes

    An assessment of each change and a query of the CMDB needs to be performed as part of the change planning process to mitigate outage risk.

    • A version upgrade on one piece of software may require another component to be upgraded as well. For example, an upgrade to the database management system requires that an application that uses the database be upgraded or modified.
    • The sequence of the release must also be determined, as certain components may need to be upgraded before others. For example, if you upgrade the Exchange Server, a Windows update must be installed prior to the Exchange upgrade.
    • If you do not have a CMDB, consider building a CMDB-lite, which consists of a listing of systems, primary users, SMEs, business owners, and system dependencies (see next slide).

    Services Impacted

    • Have affected services been identified?
    • Have supporting services been identified?
    • Has someone checked the CMDB to ensure all dependencies have been accounted for?
    • Have we referenced the service catalog so the business approves what they’re authorizing?

    Technical Teams Impacted

    • Who will support the change throughout testing and implementation?
    • Will additional support be needed?
    • Do we need outside support from eternal suppliers?
    • Has someone checked the contract to ensure any additional costs have been approved?

    Build a dependency matrix to avoid change related collisions (optional)

    A CMDB-lite does not replace a CMDB but can be a valuable tool to leverage when requesting changes if you do not currently have configuration management. Consider the following inputs when building your own CMDB-lite.

    • System
      • To build a CMDB-lite, start with the top 10 systems in your environment that experience changes. This list can always be populated iteratively.
    • Primary Users
      • Listing the primary users will give a change requester a first glance at the impact of the change.
      • You can also use this information when looking at the change communication and training after the change is implemented.
    • SME/Backup
      • These are the staff that will likely build and implement the change. The backup is listed in case the primary is on holiday.
    • Business System Owner
      • The owner of the system is one of the people needed to sign off on the change. Having their support from the beginning of a change is necessary to build and implement it successfully.
    • Tier 1 Dependency
      • If the primary system experiences and outage, Tier 1 dependency functionality is also lost. To request a change, include the business system owner signoffs of the Tier 1 dependencies of the primary system.
    • Tier 2 Dependency
      • If the primary system experiences an outage, Tier 2 dependency functionality is lost, but there is an available workaround. As with Tier 1, this information can help you build a backout plan in case there is a change-related collision.
    • Tier 3 Dependency
      • Tier 3 functionality is not lost if the primary system experiences an outage, but nice-to-haves such as aesthetics are affected.

    2.2.1 Build a CMDB-lite as a Reference for Requested Changes

    Input

    • Current system ownership documentation

    Output

    • Documented reference for change requests (CMDB-lite)

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Start with a list of your top 10-15 systems/services with the highest volume of changes.
    2. Using a whiteboard, flip chart, or shared screen, complete the table below by filling the corresponding Primary Users, SMEs, Business System Owner, and Dependencies as shown below. It may help to use sticky notes.
    3. Iteratively populate the table as you notice gaps with incoming changes.
    SystemPrimary UsersSMEBackup SME(s)Business System OwnerTier 1 Dependency (system functionality is down)Tier 2 (impaired functionality/ workaround available)Tier 3 Dependency (nice to have)
    Email Enterprise Naomi Amos James
    • ITSMs
    • Scan-to-email
    • Reporting
     
    • Lots
    Conferencing Tool Enterprise Alex Shed James
    • Videoconferencing
    • Conference rooms (can use Facebook messenger instead in worst case scenario)
    • IM
    ITSM (Service Now) Enterprise (Intl.) Anderson TBD Mike
    • Work orders
    • Dashboards
    • Purchasing
     
    ITSM (Manage Engine) North America Bobbie Joseph Mike
    • Work orders
    • Dashboards
    • Purchasing
     

    Establishing workflows: create standards for change approvals to improve efficiency

    • Not all changes are created equal, and not all changes require the same degree of approval. As part of the change management process, it’s important to define who is the authority for each type of change.
    • Failure to do so can create bureaucratic bottlenecks if each change is held to an unnecessary high level of scrutiny, or unplanned outages may occur due to changes circumventing the formal approval process.
    • A balance must be met and defined to ensure the process is not bypassed or bottlenecked.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Define a list pre-approved changes and automate them (if possible) using your ITSM solution. This will save valuable time for more important changes in the queue.

    Example:

    Change CategoryChange Authority
    Pre-approved change Department head/manager
    Emergency change E-CAB
    Normal change – low and medium risk CAB
    Normal change – high risk CAB and CIO (for visibility)

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Initiation

    Change initiation allows for assurance that the request is in scope for change management and acts as a filter for out-of-scope changes to be redirected to the proper workflow. Initiation also assesses who may be assigned to the change and the proper category of the change, and results in an RFC to be populated before the change reaches the build and test phase.

    The image is a horizontal flow chart, depicting an example of a change process.

    The change trigger assessment is critical in the DevOps lifecycle. This can take a more formal role of a technical review board (TRB) or, with enough maturity, may be automated. Responsibilities such as deconfliction, dependency identification, calendar query, and authorization identification can be done early in the lifecycle to decrease or eliminate the burden on CAB.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Technical Build and Test

    The technical build and test stage includes all technical prerequisites and testing needed for a change to pass before proceeding to approval and implementation. In addition to a technical review, a solution consisting of the implementation, rollback, communications, and training plan are also built and included in the RFC before passing it to the CAB.

    The image is a flowchart, showing the process for change during the technical build and test stage.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Approval (CAB)

    Change approval can start with the Change Manager reviewing all incoming RFCs to filter them for completeness and check them for red flags before passing them to the CAB. This saves the CAB from discussing incomplete changes and allows the Change Manager to set a CAB agenda before the CAB meeting. If need be, change approval can also set vendor communications necessary for changes, as well as the final implementation date of the change. The CAB and Change Manager may follow up with the appropriate parties notifying them of the approval decision (accepted, rescheduled, or rejected).

    The image shows a flowchart illustrating the process for change approval.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Example process: Normal Change – Change Implementation

    Changes should not end at implementation. Ensure you define post-implementation activities (documentation, communication, training etc.) and a post-implementation review in case the change does not go according to plan.

    The image is a flowchart, illustrating the work process for change implementation and post-implementation review.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.2 Create a Normal Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Normal change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a normal change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
      5. Implementation and Post-Implementation Activities
    3. Optionally, you may create variations of the workflow for minor, medium, and major changes (e.g. there will be fewer authorizations for minor changes).
    4. For further documentation, you may choose to run the SIPOC activity for your CAB as outlined on this slide.
    5. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 11 of your Change Management SOP.

    Download the Change Management Process Library.

    Identify and convert low-risk normal changes to pre-approved once the process is established

    As your process matures, begin creating a list of normal changes that might qualify for pre-approval. The most potential for value in gains from change management comes from re-engineering and automating of high-volume changes. Pre-approved changes should save you time without threatening the live environment.

    IT should flag changes they would like pre-approved:

    • Once your change management process is firmly established, hold a meeting with all staff that make change requests and build changes.
    • Run a training session detailing the traits of pre-approved changes and ask these individuals to identify changes that might qualify.
    • These changes should be submitted to the Change Manager and reviewed, with the help of the CAB, to decide whether or not they qualify for pre-approval.

    Pre-approved changes are not exempt from due diligence:

    • Once a change is designated as pre-approved, the deployment team should create and compile all relevant documentation:
      • An RFC detailing the change, dependencies, risk, and impact.
      • Detailed procedures and required resources.
      • Implementation and backout plan.
      • Test results.
    • When templating the RFC for pre-approved changes, aim to write the documentation as if another SME were to implement it. This reduces confusion, especially if there’s staff turnover.
    • The CAB must approve, sign off, and keep a record of all documents.
    • Pre-approved changes must still be documented and recorded in the CMDB and change log after each deployment.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    At the beginning of a change management process, there should be few active pre-approved changes. However, prior to launch, you may have IT flag changes for conversion.

    Example process: Pre-Approved Change Process

    The image shows two horizontal flow charts, the first labelled Pre-Approval of Recurring RFC, and the second labelled Implementation of Child RFC.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Review the pre-approved change list regularly to ensure the list of changes are still low-risk and repeatable.

    IT environments change. Don’t be caught by surprise.

    • Changes which were once low-risk and repeatable may cause unforeseen incidents if they are not reviewed regularly.
    • Dependencies change as the IT environment changes. Ensure that the changes on the pre-approved change list are still low-risk and repeatable, and that the documentation is up to date.
    • If dependencies have changed, then move the change back to the normal category for reassessment. It may be redesignated as a pre-approved change once the documentation is updated.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Other reasons for moving a pre-approved change back to the normal category is if the change led to an incident during implementation or if there was an issue during implementation.

    Seek new pre-approved change submissions. → Re-evaluate the pre-approved change list every 4-6 months.

    The image shows a horizontal flow chart, depicting the process for a pre-approved change list review.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.3 Create a Pre-Approved Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Pre-approved change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for a pre-approved change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
    3. Document the process of a converting a normal change to pre-approved. Include the steps from flagging a low-risk change to creating the related RFC template.
    4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and sections 4.2 and 13 of your Change Management SOP.

    Reserve the emergency designation for real emergencies

    • Emergency changes have one of the following triggers:
      • A critical incident is impacting user productivity.
      • An imminent critical incident will impact user productivity.
    • Unless a critical incident is being resolved or prevented, the change should be categorized as normal.
    • An emergency change differs from a normal change in the following key aspects:
      • An emergency change is required to recover from a major outage – there must be a validated service desk critical incident ticket.
      • An urgent business requirement is not an “emergency.”
      • An RFC is created after the change is implemented and the outage is over.
      • A review by the full CAB occurs after the change is implemented.
      • The first responder and/or the person implementing the change may not be the subject matter expert for that system.
    • In all cases, an RFC must be created and the change must be reviewed by the full CAB. The review should occur within two business days of the event.
    Sample ChangeQuick CheckEmergency?
    Install the latest critical patches from the vendor. Are the patches required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? No
    A virus or worm invades the network and a patch is needed to eliminate the threat. Is the patch required to resolve or prevent an imminent critical incident? Yes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Change requesters should be made aware that senior management will be informed if an emergency RFC is submitted inappropriately. Emergency requests trigger urgent CAB meetings, are riskier to deploy, and delay other changes waiting in the queue.

    Example process: Emergency Change Process

    The image is a flowchart depicting the process for an emergency change process

    When building your emergency change process, have your E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 handy.

    • Focus on the following requirements for an emergency process:
      • E-CAB protocol and scope: Does the SME need authorization first before working on the change or can the SME proceed if no E-CAB members respond?
      • Documentation and communication to stakeholders and CAB after the emergency change is completed.
      • Input from incident management.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    2.2.4 Create an Emergency Change Process

    Input

    • Current SOP/workflow library

    Output

    • Emergency change process

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Using the examples shown on the previous few slides, work as a group to determine the workflow for an emergency change, with particular attention to the following sub-processes:
      1. Request
      2. Assessment
      3. Plan
      4. Approve
    3. Ensure that the E-CAB protocol from activity 2.1.4 is considered when building your process.
    4. Document the resulting workflows in the Change Management Process Library and section 12 of your Change Management SOP.

    Case Study (part 2 of 4)

    Intel implemented a robust change management process.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Intel identified 37 different change processes and 25 change management systems of record with little integration.

    Software and infrastructure groups were also very siloed, and this no doubt contributed to the high number of changes that caused outages.

    The task was simple: standards needed to be put in place and communication had to improve.

    Results

    Once process ownership was assigned and the role of the Change Manager and CAB clarified, it was a simple task to streamline and simplify processes among groups.

    Intel designed a new, unified change management workflow that all groups would adopt.

    Automation was also brought into play to improve how RFCs were generated and submitted.

    Phase 3

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Your Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design the RFC

    3.2 Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Design the RFC
    • Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Step 3.1

    Design the RFC

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

    3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Step 3.1: Design the RFC

    Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A full RFC template and process that compliments the workflows for the three change categories

    A request for change (RFC) should be submitted for every non-standard change

    An RFC should be submitted through the formal change management practice for every change that is not a standard, pre-approved change (a change which does not require submission to the change management practice).

    • The RFC should contain all the information required to approve a change. Some information will be recorded when the change request is first initiated, but not everything will be known at that time.
    • Further information can be added as the change progresses through its lifecycle.
    • The level of detail that goes into the RFC will vary depending on the type of change, the size, and the likely impact of the change.
    • Other details of the change may be recorded in other documents and referenced in the RFC.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep the RFC form simple, especially when first implementing change management, to encourage the adoption of and compliance with the process.

    RFCs should contain the following information, at a minimum:

    1. Contact information for requester
    2. Description of change
    3. References to external documentation
    4. Items to be changed, reason for the change, and impact of both implementing and not implementing the change
    5. Change type and category
    6. Priority and risk assessment
    7. Predicted time frame, resources, and cost
    8. Backout or remediation plan
    9. Proposed approvers
    10. Scheduled implementation time
    11. Communications plan and post-implementation review

    3.1.1 Evaluate Your Existing RFC Process

    Input

    • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of changes to the current RFC form and RFC process

    Materials

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. If the organization is already using an RFC form, review it as a group now and discuss its contents:
      • Does this RFC provide adequate information for the Change Manager and/or CAB to review?
      • Should any additional fields be added?
    2. Show the participants Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template and compare it to the one the organization is currently using.
    3. As a group, finalize an RFC table of contents that will be used to formalize a new or improved RFC.
    4. Decide which fields should be filled out by the requester before the initial RFC is submitted to the Change Manager:
      • Many sections of the RFC are relevant for change assessment and review. What information does the Change Manager need when they first receive a request?
      • The Change Manager needs enough information to ensure that the change is in scope and has been properly categorized.
    5. Decide how the RFC form should be submitted and reviewed; this can be documented in section 5 of your Change Management SOP.

    Download the Request for Change Form Template.

    Design the RFC to encourage process buy-in

    • When building the RFC, split the form up into sections that follow the normal workflow (e.g. Intake, Assessment and Build, Approval, Implementation/PIR). This way the form walks the requester through what needs to be filled and when.
    • Revisit the form periodically and solicit feedback to continually improve the user experience. If there’s information missing on the RFC that the CAB would like to know, add the fields. If there are sections that are not used or not needed for documentation, remove them.
    • Make sure the user experience surrounding your RFC form is a top priority – make it accessible, otherwise change requesters simply will not use it.
    • Take advantage of your ITSM’s dropdown lists, automated notifications, CMDB integrations, and auto-generated fields to ease the process of filling the RFC

    Draft:

    • Change requester
    • Requested date of deployment
    • Change risk: low/medium/high
    • Risk assessment
    • Description of change
    • Reason for change
    • Change components

    Technical Build:

    • Assess change:
      • Dependencies
      • Business impact
      • SLA impact
      • Required resources
      • Query the CMS
    • Plan and test changes:
      • Test plan
      • Test results
      • Implementation plan
      • Backout plan
      • Backout plan test results

    CAB:

    • Approve and schedule changes:
      • Final CAB review
      • Communications plan

    Complete:

    • Deploy changes:
      • Post-implementation review

    Designing your RFC: RFC draft

    • Change requester – link your change module to the active directory to pull the change requester’s contact information automatically to save time.
    • A requested date of deployment gives approvers information on timeline and can be used to query the change calendar for possible conflicts
    • Information about risk assessment based on impact and likelihood questionnaires are quick to fill out but provide a lot of information to the CAB. The risk assessment may not be complete at the draft stage but can be updated as the change is built. Ensure this field is up-to- date before it reaches CAB.
    • If you have a technical review stage where changes are directed to the proper workflow and resourcing is assessed, the description, reason, and change components are high-level descriptors of the change that will aid in discovery and lining the change up with the business vision (viability from both a technical and business standpoint).
    • Change requester
    • Requested date of deployment
    • Change Risk: low/medium/high
    • Risk assessment
    • Description of change
    • Reason for change
    • Change components

    Use the RFC to point to documentation already gathered in the DevOps lifecycle to cut down on unnecessary manual work while maintaining compliance.

    Designing your RFC: technical build

    • Dependencies and CMDB query, along with the proposed implementation date, are included to aid in calendar deconfliction and change scheduling. If there’s a conflict, it’s easier to reschedule the proposed change early in the lifecycle.
    • Business, SLA impact, and required resources can be tracked to provide the CAB with information on the business resources required. This can also be used to prioritize the change if conflicts arise.
    • Implementation, test, and backout plans must be included and assessed to increase the probability that a change will be implemented without failure. It’s also useful in the case of PIRs to determine root causes of change-related incidents.
    • Assess change:
      • Dependencies
      • Business impact
      • SLA impact
      • Required resources
      • Query the CMS
    • Plan and test changes:
      • Test plan
      • Test results
      • Implementation plan
      • Backout plan
      • Backout plan test results

    Designing your RFC: approval and deployment

    • Documenting approval, rejection, and rescheduling gives the change requester the go-ahead to proceed with the change, rationale on why it was prioritized lower than another change (rescheduled), or rationale on rejection.
    • Communications plans for appropriate stakeholders can also be modified and forwarded to the communications team (e.g. service desk or business system owners) before deployment.
    • Post-implementation activities and reviews can be conducted if need be before a change is closed. The PIR, if filled out, should then be appended to any subsequent changes of the same nature to avoid making the same mistake twice.
    • Approve and schedule changes:
      • Final CAB review
      • Communications plan
    • Deploy changes:
      • Post-implementation review

    Standardize the request for change protocol

    1. Submission Standards
      • Electronic submission will make it easier for CAB members to review the documentation.
      • As the change goes through the assessment, plan, and test phase, new documentation (assessments, backout plans, test results, etc.) can be attached to the digital RFC for review by CAB members prior to the CAB meeting.
      • Change management software won’t be necessary to facilitate the RFC submission and review; a content repository system, such as SharePoint, will suffice.
    2. Designate the first control point
      • All RFCs should be submitted to a single point of contact.
      • Ideally, the Change Manager or Technical Review Board should fill this role.
      • Whoever is tasked with this role needs the subject matter expertise to ensure that the change has been categorized correctly, to reject out-of-scope requests, or to ask that missing information be provided before the RFC moves through the full change management practice.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Technical and SME contacts should be noted in each RFC so they can be easily consulted during the RFC review.

    3.1.2 Build the RFC Form

    Input

    • Current RFC form or stock ITSM RFC
    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of changes to the current RFC and RFC process

    Materials

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Use Info-Tech’s Request for Change Form Template as a basis for your RFC form.
    2. Use this template to standardize your change request process and ensure that the appropriate information is documented effectively each time a request is made. The change requester and Change Manager should consolidate all information associated with a given change request in this form. This form will be submitted by the change requester and reviewed by the Change Manager.

    Case Study (part 3 of 4)

    Intel implemented automated RFC form generation.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    One of the crucial factors that was impacting Intel’s change management efficiency was a cumbersome RFC process.

    A lack of RFC usage was contributing to increased ad hoc changes being put through the CAB, and rescheduled changes were quite high.

    Additionally, ad hoc changes were also contributing heavily to unscheduled downtime within the organization.

    Results

    Intel designed and implemented an automated RFC form generator to encourage end users to increase RFC usage.

    As we’ve seen with RFC form design, the UX/UI of the form needs to be top notch, otherwise end users will simply circumvent the process. This will contribute to the problems you are seeking to correct.

    Thanks to increased RFC usage, Intel decreased emergency changes by 50% and reduced change-caused unscheduled downtime by 82%.

    Step 3.2

    Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    Activities

    3.2.1 Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

    3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

    Define the RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    Step 3.1: Design RFC

    Step 3.2: Establish Post-Implementation Activities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Outcomes of this step

    • A formalized post-implementation process for continual improvement

    Why would the CAB reject a change that has been properly assessed and tested?

    Possible reasons the CAB would reject a change include:

    • The product being changed is approaching its end of life.
    • The change is too costly.
    • The timing of the change conflicts with other changes.
    • There could be compliance issues.
    • The change is actually a project.
    • The risk is too high.
    • There could be regulatory issues.
    • The peripherals (test, backout, communication, and training plans) are incomplete.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Many reasons for rejection (listed above) can be caught early on in the process during the technical review or change build portion of the change. The earlier you catch these reasons for rejection, the less wasted effort there will be per change.

    Sample RFCReason for CAP Rejection
    There was a request for an update to a system that a legacy application depends on and only a specific area of the business was aware of the dependency. The CAB rejects it due to the downstream impact.
    There was a request for an update to a non-supported application, and the vendor was asking for a premium support contract that is very costly. It’s too expensive to implement, despite the need for it. The CAB will wait for an upgrade to a new application.
    There was a request to update application functionality to a beta release. The risk outweighs the business benefits.

    Determine When the CAB Would Reject Tested Changes

    Input

    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of reasons to reject tested changes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Projector
    • Markers/pens
    • Laptop with ITSM admin access
    • Project Summary Template

    Participants

    • IT Director
    • Infrastructure Manager
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Avoid hand-offs to ensure a smooth implementation process

    The implementation phase is the final checkpoint before releasing the new change into your live environment. Once the final checks have been made to the change, it’s paramount that teams work together to transition the change effectively rather than doing an abrupt hand-off. This could cause a potential outage.

    1.

    • Deployment resources identified, allocated, and scheduled
    • Documentation complete
    • Support team trained
    • Users trained
    • Business sign-off
    • Target systems identified and ready to receive changes
    • Target systems available for installation maintenance window scheduled
    • Technical checks:
      • Disk space available
      • Pre-requisites met
      • Components/Services to be updated are stopped
      • All users disconnected
    • Download Info-Tech’sChange Management Pre-Implementation Checklist

    Implement change →

    2.

    1. Verification – once the change has been implemented, verify that all requirements are fulfilled.
    2. Review – ensure that all affected systems and applications are operating as predicted. Update change log.
    3. Transition – a crucial phase of implementation that’s often overlooked. Once the change implementation is complete from a technical point of view, it’s imperative that the team involved with the change inform and train the group responsible for managing the new change.

    Create a backout plan to reduce the risk of a failed change

    Every change process needs to plan for the potential for failure and how to address it effectively. Change management’s solution to this problem is a backout plan.

    A backout plan needs to contain a record of the steps that need to be taken to restore the live environment back to its previous state and maintain business continuity. A good backout plan asks the following questions:

    1. How will failure be determined? Who will make the determination to back out of a change be made and when?
    2. Do we fix on fail or do we rollback to the previous configuration?
    3. Is the service desk aware of the impending change? Do they have proper training?

    Notify the Service Desk

    • Notify the Service Desk about backout plan initiation.

    Disable Access

    • Disable user access to affected system(s).

    Conduct Checks

    • Conduct checks to all affected components.

    Enable User Access

    • Enable user access to affected systems.

    Notify the Service Desk

    • Notify the service desk that the backout plan was successful.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    As part of the backout plan, consider the turnback point in the change window. That is, the point within the change window where you still have time to fully back out of the change.

    Ensure the following post-implementation review activities are completed

    Service Catalog

    Update the service catalog with new information as a result of the implemented change.

    CMDB

    Update new dependencies present as a result of the new change.

    Asset DB

    Add notes about any assets newly affected by changes.

    Architecture Map

    Update your map based on the new change.

    Technical Documentation

    Update your technical documentation to reflect the changes present because of the new change.

    Training Documentation

    Update your training documentation to reflect any information about how users interact with the change.

    Use a post-implementation review process to promote continual improvement

    The post-implementation review (PIR) is the most neglected change management activity.

    • All changes should be reviewed to understand the reason behind them, appropriateness, and recommendations for next steps.
    • The Change Manager manages the completion of information PIRs and invites RFC originators to present their findings and document the lessons learned.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Review PIR reports at CAB meetings to highlight the root causes of issues, action items to close identified gaps, and back-up documentation required. Attach the PIR report to the relevant RFC to prevent similar changes from facing the same issues in the future.

    1. Why do a post-implementation review?
      • Changes that don’t fail but don’t perform well are rarely reviewed.
      • Changes may fail subtly and still need review.
      • Changes that cause serious failures (i.e. unplanned downtime) receive analysis that is unnecessarily in-depth.
    2. What are the benefits?
      • A proactive, post-implementation review actually uses less resources than reactionary change reviews.
      • Root-cause analysis of failed changes, no matter what the impact.
      • Insight into changes that took longer than projected.
      • Identification of previously unidentified risks affecting changes.

    Determine the strategy for your PIR to establish a standardized process

    Capture the details of your PIR process in a table similar to the one below.

    Frequency Part of weekly review (IT team meeting)
    Participants
    • Change Manager
    • Originator
    • SME/supervisor/impacted team(s)

    Categories under review

    Current deviations and action items from previous PIR:

    • Complete
    • Partially complete
    • Complete, late
    • Change failed, rollback succeeded
    • Change failed, rollback failed
    • Major deviation from implementation plan
    Output
    • Root cause or failure or deviation
    • External factors
    • Remediation focus areas
    • Remediation timeline (follow-up at appropriate time)
    Controls
    • Reviewed at next CAB meeting
    • RFC close is dependent on completion of PIR
    • Share with the rest of the technical team
    • Lessons learned stored in the knowledgebase and attached to RFC for easy search of past issues.

    3.2.2 Create a Post-Implementation Activity Checklist

    Input

    • Current SOP (if available)

    Output

    • List of reasons to reject tested changes

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
    2. Brainstorm duties to perform following the deployment of a change. Below is a sample list:
      • Example:
        • Was the deployment successful?
          • If no, was the backout plan executed successfully?
        • List change-related incidents
        • Change assessment
          • Missed dependencies
          • Inaccurate business impact
          • Incorrect SLA impact
          • Inaccurate resources
            • Time
            • Staff
            • Hardware
        • System testing
        • Integration testing
        • User acceptance testing
        • No backout plan
        • Backout plan failure
        • Deployment issues
    3. Record your results in the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist.

    Download the Change Management Post-Implementation Checklist

    Case Study

    Microsoft used post-implementation review activities to mitigate the risk of a critical Azure outage.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Jason Zander, Microsoft

    Challenge

    In November 2014, Microsoft deployed a change intended to improve Azure storage performance by reducing CPU footprint of the Azure Table Front-Ends.

    The deployment method was an incremental approach called “flighting,” where software and configuration deployments are deployed incrementally to Azure infrastructure in small batches.

    Unfortunately, this software deployment caused a service interruption in multiple regions.

    Solution

    Before the software was deployed, Microsoft engineers followed proper protocol by testing the proposed update. All test results pointed to a successful implementation.

    Unfortunately, engineers pushed the change out to the entire infrastructure instead of adhering to the traditional flighting protocol.

    Additionally, the configuration switch was incorrectly enabled for the Azure Blob storage Front-Ends.

    A combination of the two mistakes exposed a bug that caused the outage.

    Results

    Thankfully, Microsoft had a backout plan. Within 30 minutes, the change was rolled back on a global scale.

    It was determined that policy enforcement was not integrated across the deployment system. An update to the system shifted the process of policy enforcement from human-based decisions and protocol to automation via the deployment platform.

    Defined PIR activities enabled Microsoft to take swift action against the outage and mitigate the risk of a serious outage.

    Phase 4

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Define Change Management

    1.1 Assess Maturity

    1.2 Categorize Changes and Build Risk Assessment

    Establish Roles and Workflows

    2.1 Determine Roles and Responsibilities

    2.2 Build Core Workflows

    Define RFC and Post-Implementation Activities

    3.1 Design RFC

    3.2 Establish post-implementation activities

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    4.1 Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    4.2 Implement the Project

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar
    • Implement the Project

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Step 4.1

    Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Activities

    4.1.1 Create an Outline for Your Change Calendar

    4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

    4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Step 4.2: Implement the Project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clear definitions of change calendar content
    • Guidelines for change calendar scheduling
    • Defined metrics to measure the success of change management with associated reports, KPIs, and CSFs

    Enforce a standard method of prioritizing and scheduling changes

    The impact of not deploying the change and the benefit of deploying it should determine its priority.

    Risk of Not Deploying

    • What is the urgency of the change?
    • What is the risk to the organization if the change is not deployed right away?
    • Will there be any lost productivity, service disruptions, or missed critical business opportunities?
      • Timing
        • Does the proposed timing work with the approved changes already on the change schedule?
        • Has the change been clash checked so there are no potential conflicts over services or resources?
      • Once prioritized, a final deployment date should be set by the CAB. Check the change calendar first to avoid conflicts.

    Positive Impact of Deployment

    • What benefits will be realized once the change is deployed?
    • How significant is the opportunity that triggered the change?
    • Will the change lead to a positive business outcome (e.g. increased sales)?

    “The one who has more clout or authority is usually the one who gets changes scheduled in the time frame they desire, but you should really be evaluating the impact to the organization. We looked at the risk to the business of not doing the change, and that’s a good way of determining the criticality and urgency of that change.” – Joseph Sgandurra, Director, Service Delivery, Navantis

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid a culture where powerful stakeholders are able to push change deployment on an ad hoc basis. Give the CAB the full authority to make approval decisions based on urgency, impact, cost, and availability of resources.

    Develop a change schedule to formalize the planning process

    A change calendar will help the CAB schedule changes more effectively and increase visibility into upcoming changes across the organization.

    1. Establish change windows in a consistent change schedule:
      • Compile a list of business units that would benefit from a change.
      • Look for conflicts in the change schedule.
      • Avoid scheduling two or more major business units in a day.
      • Consider clients when building your change windows and change schedule.
    2. Gain commitments from key participants:
      • These individuals can confirm if there are any unusual or cyclical business requirements that will impact the schedule.
    3. Properly control your change calendar to improve change efficiency:
      • Look at the proposed start and end times: Are they sensible? Does the implementation window leave time for anything going wrong or needing to roll back the change?
      • Special considerations: Are there special circumstances that need to be considered? Ask the business if you don’t know.
      • The key principle is to have a sufficient window available for implementing changes so you only need to set up calendar freezes for sound business or technical reasons.

    Our mantra is to put it on the calendar. Even if it’s a preapproved change and doesn’t need a vote, having it on the calendar helps with visibility. The calendar is the one-stop shop for scheduling and identifying change dependencies.“ – Wil Clark, Director of Service and Performance Management, University of North Texas Systems

    Provide clear definitions of what goes on the change calendar and who’s responsible

    Roles

    • The Change Manager will be responsible for creating and maintaining a change calendar.
    • Only the Change Manager can physically alter the calendar by adding a new change after the CAB has agreed upon a deployment date.
    • All other CAB members, IT support staff, and other impacted stakeholders should have access to the calendar on a read-only basis to prevent people from making unauthorized changes to deployment dates.

    Inputs

    • Freeze periods for individual business departments/applications (e.g. finance month-end periods, HR payroll cycle, etc. – all to be investigated).
    • Maintenance windows and planned outage periods.
    • Project schedules, and upcoming major/medium changes.
    • Holidays.
    • Business hours (some departments work 9-5, others work different hours or in different time zones, and user acceptance testing may require business users to be available).

    Guidelines

    • Business-defined freeze periods are the top priority.
    • No major or medium normal changes should occur during the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day.
    • Vendor SLA support hours are the preferred time for implementing changes.
    • The vacation calendar for IT will be considered for major changes.
    • Change priority: High > Medium > Low.
    • Minor changes and preapproved changes have the same priority and will be decided on a case-by-case basis.

    The change calendar is a critical pre-requisite to change management in DevOps. Use the calendar to be proactive with proposed implementation dates and deconfliction before the change is finished.

    4.1.1 Create Guidelines for Your Change Calendar

    Input

    • Current change calendar guidelines

    Output

    • Change calendar inputs and schedule checklist

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Gather representatives from the change management team.
      • Example:
        • The change calendar/schedule includes:
          • Approved and scheduled normal changes.
          • Scheduled project work.
          • Scheduled maintenance windows.
          • Change freeze periods with affected users noted:
            • Daily/weekly freeze periods.
            • Monthly freeze periods.
            • Annual freeze periods.
            • Other critical business events.
    2. Create a checklist to run through before each change is scheduled:
      • Check the schedule and assess resource availability:
        • Will user productivity be impacted?
        • Are there available resources (people and systems) to implement the change?
        • Is the vendor available? Is there a significant cost attached to pushing change deployment before the regularly scheduled refresh?
        • Are there dependencies? Does the deployment of one change depend on the earlier deployment of another?
    3. Record your results in your Project Summary Template.

    Start measuring the success of your change management project using three key metrics

    Number of change-related incidents that occur each month

    • Each month, record the number of incidents that can be directly linked to a change. This can be done using an ITSM tool or manually by service desk staff.
    • This is a key success metric: if you are not tracking change-related incidents yet, start doing so as soon as possible. This is the metric that the CIO and business stakeholders will be most interested in because it impacts users directly.

    Number of unauthorized changes applied each month

    • Each month, record the number of changes applied without approval. This is the best way to measure adherence to the process.
    • If this number decreases, it demonstrates a reduction in risk, as more changes are formally assessed and approved before being deployed.

    Percentage of emergency changes

    • Each month, compare the number of emergency change requests to the total number of change requests.
    • Change requesters often designate changes as emergencies as a way of bypassing the process.
    • A reduction in emergency changes demonstrates that your process is operating smoothly and reduces the risk of deploying changes that have not been properly tested.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start simple. Metrics can be difficult to tackle if you’re starting from scratch. While implementing your change management practice, use these three metrics as a starting point, since they correlate well with the success of change management overall. The following few slides provide more insight into creating metrics for your change process.

    If you want more insight into your change process, measure the progress of each step in change management with metrics

    Improve

    • Number of repeat failures (i.e. making the same mistake twice)
    • Number of changes converted to pre-approved
    • Number of changes converted from pre-approved back to normal

    Request

    • What percentage of change requests have errors or lack appropriate support?
    • What percentage of change requests are actually projects, service requests, or operational tasks?
    • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?

    Assess

    • What percentage of change requests are out of scope?
    • What percentage of changes have been requested before (i.e. documented)?
    • What are the percentages of changes by category (normal, pre-approved, emergency)?

    Plan

    • What percentage of change requests are reviewed by the CAB that should have been pre-approved or emergency (i.e. what percentage of changes are in the wrong category)?

    Approve

    • Number of changes broken down by department (business unit/IT department to be used in making core/optional CAB membership more efficient)
    • Number of workflows that can be automated

    Implement

    • Number of changes completed on schedule
    • Number of changes rolled back
    • What percentage of changes caused an incident?

    Use metrics to inform project KPIs and CSFs

    Leverage the metrics from the last slide and convert them to data communicable to IT, management, and leadership

    • To provide value, metrics and measurements must be actionable. What actions can be taken as a result of the data being presented?
    • If the metrics are not actionable, there is no value and you should question the use of the metric.
    • Data points in isolation are mostly meaningless to inform action. Observe trends in your metrics to inform your decisions.
    • Using a framework to develop measurements and metrics provides a defined methodology that enables a mapping of base measurements through CSFs.
    • Establishing the relationship increases the value that measurements provide.

    Purposely use SDLC and change lifecycle metrics to find bottlenecks and automation candidates.

    Metrics:

    Metrics are easily measured datapoints that can be pulled from your change management tool. Examples: Number of changes implemented, number of changes without incident.

    KPIs:

    Key Performance Indicators are metrics presented in a way that is easily digestible by stakeholders in IT. Examples: Change efficiency, quality of changes.

    CSFs:

    Critical Success Factors are measures of the business success of change management taken by correlating the CSF with multiple KPIs. Examples: consistent and efficient change management process, a change process mapped to business needs

    List in-scope metrics and reports and align them to benefits

    Metric/Report (by team)Benefit
    Total number of RFCs and percentages by category (pre-approved, normal, emergency, escalated support, expedited)
    • Understand change management activity
    • Tracking maturity growth
    • Identifying “hot spots”
    Pre-approved change list (and additions/removals from the list) Workload and process streamlining (i.e. reduce “red tape” wherever possible)
    Average time between RFC lifecycle stages (by service/application) Advance planning for proposed changes
    Number of changes by service/application/hardware class
    • Identifying weaknesses in the architecture
    • Vendor-specific TCO calculations
    Change triggers Business- vs. IT-initiated change
    Number of RFCs by lifecycle stage Workload planning
    List of incidents related to changes Visible failures of the CM process
    Percentage of RFCs with a tested backout/validation plan Completeness of change planning
    List of expedited changes Spotlighting poor planning and reducing the need for this category going forward (“The Hall of Shame”)
    CAB approval rate Change coordinator alignment with CAB priorities – low approval rate indicates need to tighten gatekeeping by the change coordinator
    Calendar of changes Planning

    4.1.2 Determine Metrics, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Draw three tables for metrics, KPIs, and CSFs.
    2. Starting with the CSF table, fill in all relevant CSFs that your group wishes to track and measure.
    3. Next, work to determine relevant KPIs correlated with the CSFs and metrics needed to measure the KPIs. Use the tables included below (taken from section 14 of the Change Management SOP) to guide the process.
    4. Record the results in the tables in section 14 of your Change Management SOP.
    5. Decide on where and when to review the metrics to discuss your change management strategy. Designate and owner and record in the RACI and Communications section of your Change Management SOP.
    Ref #Metric

    M1

    Number of changes implemented for a time period
    M2 Number of changes successfully implemented for a time period
    M3 Number of changes implemented causing incidents
    M4 Number of accepted known errors when change is implemented
    M5 Total days for a change build (specific to each change)
    M6 Number of changes rescheduled
    M7 Number of training questions received following a change
    Ref#KPIProduct
    K1 Successful changes for a period of time (approach 100%) M2 / M1 x 100%
    K2 Changes causing incidents (approach 0%) M3 / M1 x 100%
    K3 Average days to implement a change ΣM5 / M1
    K4 Change efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M6 / M1)] x 100%
    K5 Quality of changes being implemented (approach 100%) [1 - (M4 / M1)] x 100%
    K6 Change training efficiency (approach 100%) [1 - (M7 / M1)] x 100%
    Ref#CSFIndicator
    C1 Successful change management process producing quality changes K1, K5
    C2 Consistent efficient change process K4, K6
    C3 Change process maps to business needs K5, K6

    Measure changes in selected metrics to evaluate success

    Once you have implemented a standardized change management practice, your team’s goal should be to improve the process, year over year.

    • After a process change has been implemented, it’s important to regularly monitor and evaluate the CSFs, KPIs, and metrics you chose to evaluate. Examine whether the process change you implemented has actually resolved the issue or achieved the goal of the critical success factor.
    • Establish a schedule for regularly reviewing the key metrics. Assess changes in those metrics and determine progress toward reaching objectives.
    • In addition to reviewing CSFs, KPIs, and metrics, check in with the release management team and end users to measure their perceptions of the change management process once an appropriate amount of time has passed.
    • Ensure that metrics are telling the whole story and that reporting is honest in order to be informative.

    Outcomes of standardizing change management should include:

    1. Improved efficiency, effectiveness, and quality of changes.
    2. Changes and processes are more aligned with the business needs and strategy.
    3. Improved maturity of change processes.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Make sure you’re measuring the right things and considering all sources of information. It’s very easy to put yourself in a position where you’re congratulating yourselves for improving on a specific metric such as number of releases per month, but satisfaction remains low.

    4.1.3 Track and Record Metrics Using the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • List of trackable metrics, KPIs and CSFs to be observed over the length of a year

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Tracking the progress of metrics is paramount to the success of any change management process. Use Info-Tech’s Change Management Metrics Tool to record metrics and track your progress. This tool is intended to be a substitute for organizations who do not have the capability to track change-related metrics in their ITSM tool.

    1. Input metrics from the previous activity to track over the course of a year.
    2. To record your metrics, open the tool and go to tab 2. The tool is currently primed to record and track five metrics. If you need more than that, you can edit the list in the hidden calculations tab.
    3. To see the progress of your metrics, move to tab 3 to view a dashboard of all metrics in the tool.

    Download the Change Management Metrics Tool

    Case Study

    A federal credit union was able to track maturity growth through the proper use of metrics.

    Industry: Federal Credit Union (anonymous)

    Source: Info-Tech Workshop

    Challenge

    At this federal credit union, the VP of IT wanted a tight set of metrics to engage with the business, communicate within IT, enable performance management of staff, and provide visibility into workload demands, among other requirements.

    The organization was suffering from “metrics fatigue,” with multiple reports being generated from all groups within IT, to the point that weekly/monthly reports were being seen as spam.

    Solution

    Stakeholders were provided with an overview of change management benefits and were asked to identify one key attribute that would be useful to their specific needs.

    Metrics were designed around the stakeholder needs, piloted with each stakeholder group, fine-tuned, and rolled out.

    Some metrics could not be automated off-the-shelf and were rolled out in a manual fashion. These metrics were subsequently automated and finally made available through a dashboard.

    Results

    The business received clear guidance regarding estimated times to implement changes across different elements of the environment.

    The IT managers were able to plan team workloads with visibility into upstream change activity.

    Architects were able to identify vendors and systems that were the leading source of instability.

    The VP of IT was able to track the maturity growth of the change management process and proactively engage with the business on identified hot spots.

    Step 4.2

    Implement the Project

    Activities

    4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

    4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

    Measure, Manage, and Maintain

    Step 4.1: Identify Metrics and Build the Change Calendar

    Step 3.2: Implement the Project

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Change Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • A communications plan for key messages to communicate to relevant stakeholders and audiences
    • A roadmap with assigned action items to implement change management

    Success of the new process will depend on introducing change and gaining acceptance

    Change management provides value by promptly evaluating and delivering changes required by the business and by minimizing disruption and rework caused by failed changes. Communication of your new change management process is key. If people do not understand the what and why, it will fail to provide the desired value.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Gather feedback from end users about the new process: if the process is too bureaucratic, end users are more likely to circumvent it.

    Main Challenges with Communication

    • Many people fail before they even start because they are buried in a mess created before they arrived – either because of a failed attempt to get change management implemented or due to a complicated system that has always existed.
    • Many systems are maintained because “that’s the way it’s always been done.”
    • Organizations don’t know where to start; they think change management is too complex a process.
    • Each group needs to follow the same procedure – groups often have their own processes, but if they don’t agree with one another, this could cause an outage.

    Educate affected stakeholders to prepare for organizational change

    An organizational change management plan should be part of your change management project.

    • Educate stakeholders about:
      • The process change (describe it in a way that the user can understand and is clear and concise).
        • IT changes will be handled in a standardized and repeatable fashion to minimize change-related incidents.
      • Who is impacted?
        • All users.
      • How are they impacted?
        • All change requests will be made using a standard form and will not be deployed until formal approval is received.
      • Change messaging.
        • How to communicate the change (benefits).
      • Learning and development – training your users on the change.
        • Develop and deliver training session on the Change Management SOP to familiarize users with this new method of handling IT change.

    Host a lunch-and-learn session

    • For the initial deployment, host a lunch-and-learn session to educate the business on the change management practice. Relevant stakeholders of affected departments should host it and cover the following topics:
    • What is change management (change management/change control)?
    • The value of change management.
    • What the Change Management SOP looks like.
    • Who is involved in the change management process (the CAB, etc.)?
    • What constitutes a pre-approved change and an emergency change?
    • An overview of the process, including how to avoid unauthorized changes.
    • Who should they contact in case of questions?

    Communicate the new process to all affected stakeholders

    Do not surprise users or support staff with changes. This will result in lost productivity and low satisfaction with IT services.

    • User groups and the business need to be given sufficient notice of an impending change.
    • This will allow them to make appropriate plans to accept the change, minimizing the impact of the change on productivity.
    • A communications plan will be documented in the RFC while the release is being built and tested.
    • It’s the responsibility of the change team to execute on the communications plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The success of change communication can be measured by monitoring the number of service desk tickets related to a change that was not communicated to users.

    Communication is crucial to the integration and overall implementation of your change management initiative. An effective communications plan will:

    • Gain support from management at the project proposal phase.
    • Create end-user buy-in once the program is set to launch.
    • Maintain the presence of the program throughout the business.
    • Instill ownership throughout the business from top-level management to new hires.

    Create your communications plan to anticipate challenges, remove obstacles, and ensure buy-in

    Management

    Technicians

    Business Stakeholders

    Provide separate communications to key stakeholder groups

    Why? What problems are you trying to solve?

    What? What processes will it affect (that will affect me)?

    Who? Who will be affected? Who do I go to if I have issues with the new process?

    When? When will this be happening? When will it affect me?

    How? How will these changes manifest themselves?

    Goal? What is the final goal? How will it benefit me?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Pay close attention to the medium of communication. For example, stakeholders on their feet all day would not be as receptive to an email communication compared to those who primarily work in front of a computer. Put yourself into various stakeholders’ shoes to craft a tailored communication of change management.

    4.2.1 Use a Communications Plan to Gain End User Buy-In

    Input

    • List of stakeholder groups for change management

    Output

    • Tailored communications plans for various stakeholder groups

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Using Info-Tech’s Change Management Communications Plan, identify key audiences or stakeholder groups that will be affected by the new change management practice.
    2. For each group requiring a communications plan, identify the following:
      • The benefits for that group of individuals.
      • The impact the change will have on them.
      • The best communication method(s) for them.
      • The time frame of the communication.
    3. Complete this information in a table like the one below:
    GroupBenefitsImpactMethodTimeline
    IT Standardized change process All changes must be reviewed and approved Poster campaign 6 months
    End Users Decreased wait time for changes Formal process for RFCs Lunch-and-learn sessions 3 months
    Business Reduced outages Increased involvement in planning and approvals Monthly reports 1 year
    1. Discuss the communications plan:
      • Will this plan ensure that users are given adequate opportunities to accept the changes being deployed?
      • Is the message appropriate for each audience? Is the format appropriate for each audience?
      • Does the communication include training where necessary to help users adopt any new functions/workflows being introduced?

    Download the Change Management Communications Plan

    Present your SOP to key stakeholders and obtain their approval

    Now that you have completed your Change Management SOP, the final step is to get sign-off from senior management to begin the rollout process.

    Know your audience:

    • Determine the service management stakeholders who will be included in the audience for your presentation.
    • You want your presentation to be succinct and hard hitting. Management’s time is tight and they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    • Briefly speak about the need for more formal change management and emphasize the benefits of implementing a more formal process with a SOP.
    • Present your current state assessment results to provide context before presenting the SOP itself.
    • As with any other foundational activity, be prepared with some quick wins to gain executive attention.
    • Be prepared to review with both technical and less technical stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The support of senior executive stakeholders is critical to the success of your SOP rollout. Try to wow them with project benefits and make sure they know about the risks/pain points.

    Download the Change Management Project Summary Template

    4.2.2 Create a Project Roadmap to Track Your Implementation Progress

    Input

    • List of implementation tasks

    Output

    • Roadmap and timeline for change management implementation

    Materials

    Participants

    • Change Manager
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Info-Tech’s Change Management Roadmap Tool helps you identify and prioritize tasks that need to be completed for the change management implementation project.
    2. Use this tool to identify each action item that will need to be completed as part of the change management initiative. Chart each action item, assign an owner, define the duration, and set a completion date.
    3. Use the resulting rocket diagram as a guide to task completion as you work toward your future state.

    Download the Change Management Roadmap Tool

    Case Study (part 4 of 4)

    Intel implemented a robust change management process.

    Industry: Technology

    Source: Daniel Grove, Intel

    Challenge

    Founded in 1968, the world’s largest microchip and semiconductor company employs over 100,000 people. Intel manufactures processors for major players in the PC market including Apple, Lenovo, HP, and Dell.

    Intel IT supports over 65,000 servers, 3.2 petabytes of data, over 70,000 PCs, and 2.6 million emails per day.

    Intel’s change management program is responsible for over 4,000 changes each week.

    Solution

    Intel had its new change management program in place and the early milestones planned, but one key challenge with any new project is communication.

    The company also needed to navigate the simplification of a previously complex process; end users could be familiar with any of the 37 different change processes or 25 different change management systems of record.

    Top-level buy-in was another concern.

    Results

    Intel first communicated the process changes by publishing the vision and strategy for the project with top management sponsorship.

    The CIO published all of the new change policies, which were supported by the Change Governance Council.

    Intel cited the reason for success as the designation of a Policy and Guidance Council – a group designed to own communication and enforcement of the new policies and processes put in place.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You now have an outline of your new change management process. The hard work starts now for an effective implementation. Make use of the communications plan to socialize the new process with stakeholders and the roadmap to stay on track.

    Remember as you are starting your implementation to keep your documents flexible and treat them as “living documents.” You will likely need to tweak and refine the processware and templates several times to continually improve the process. Furthermore, don’t shy away from seeking feedback from your stakeholders to gain buy-in.

    Lastly, keep an eye on your progress with objective, data-driven metrics. Leverage the trends in your data to drive your decisions. Be sure to revisit the maturity assessment not only to measure and visualize your progress, but to gain insight into your next steps.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic office in Toronto, Ontario, Canada to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.2 Complete a Change Management Maturity Assessment

    Run through the change management maturity assessment with tailored commentary for each action item outlining context and best practices.

    2.2.1 Plot the Process for a Normal Change

    Build a normal change process using Info-Tech’s Change Management Process Library template with an analyst helping you to right size the process for your organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Stabilize Release and Deployment Management

    Maintain both speed and control while improving the quality of deployments and releases within the infrastructure team.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Don’t let persistent problems govern your department.

    Select Bibliography

    AXELOS Limited. ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4th edition. TSO, 2019, pp. 118–120.

    Behr, Kevin and George Spafford. The Visible Ops Handbook: Implementing ITIL in 4 Practical and Auditable Steps. IT Revolution Press. 2013.

    BMC. “ITIL Change Management.” BMC Software Canada, 22 December 2016.

    Brown, Vance. “Change Management: The Greatest ROI of ITIL.” Cherwell Service Management.

    Cisco. “Change Management: Best Practices.” Cisco, 10 March 2008.

    Grove, Daniel. “Case Study ITIL Change Management Intel Corporation.” PowerShow, 2005.

    ISACA. “COBIT 5: Enabling Processes.” ISACA, 2012.

    Jantti, M. and M. Kainulainen. “Exploring an IT Service Change Management Process: A Case Study.” ICDS 2011: The Fifth International Conference on Digital Society, 23 Feb. 2011.

    Murphy, Vawns. “How to Assess Changes.” The ITSM Review, 29 Jan. 2016.

    Nyo, Isabel. “Best Practices for Change Management in the Age of DevOps.” Atlassian Engineering, 12 May 2021.

    Phillips, Katherine W., Katie A. Liljenquist, and Margaret A. Neale. “Better Decisions Through Diversity.” Kellogg Insight, 1 Oct. 2010.

    Pink Elephant. “Best Practices for Change Management.” Pink Elephant, 2005.

    Sharwood, Simon. “Google broke its own cloud by doing two updates at once.” The Register, 24 Aug. 2016.

    SolarWinds. “How to Eliminate the No: 1 Cause of Network Downtime.” SolarWinds Tech Tips, 25 Apr. 2014.

    The Stationery Office. “ITIL Service Transition: 2011.” The Stationary Office, 29 July 2011.

    UCISA. “ITIL – A Guide to Change Management.” UCISA.

    Zander, Jason. “Final Root Cause Analysis and Improvement Areas: Nov 18 Azure Storage Service Interruption.” Microsoft Azure: Blog and Updates, 17 Dec. 2014.

    Appendix I: Expedited Changes

    Employ the expedited change to promote process adherence

    In many organizations, there are changes which may not fit into the three prescribed categories. The reason behind why the expedited category may be needed generally falls between two possibilities:

    1. External drivers dictate changes via mandates which may not fall within the normal change cycle. A CIO, judge, state/provincial mandate, or request from shared services pushes a change that does not fall within a normal change cycle. However, there is no imminent outage (therefore it is not an emergency). In this case, an expedited change can proceed. Communicate to the change requester that IT and the change build team will still do their best to implement the change without issue, but any extra risk of implementing this expedited change (compared to an normal change) will be absorbed by the change requester.
    2. The change requester did not prepare for the change adequately. This is common if a new change process is being established (and stakeholders are still adapting to the process). Change requesters or the change build team may request the change to be done by a certain date that does not fall within the normal change cycle, or they simply did not give the CAB enough time to vet the change. In this case, you may use the expedited category as a metric (or a “Hall of Shame” example). If you identify a department or individual that frequently request expedited changes, use the expedited category as a means to educate them about the normal change to discourage the behavior moving forward.

    Two possible ways to build an expedited change category”

    1. Build the category similar to an emergency change. In this case, one difference would be the time allotted to fully obtain authorization of the change from the E-CAB and business owner before implementing the change (as opposed to the emergency change workflow).
    2. Have the expedited change reflect the normal change workflow. In this case, all the same steps of the normal change workflow are followed except for expedited timelines between processes. This may include holding an impromptu CAB meeting to authorize the change.

    Example process: Expedited Change Process

    The image is a flowchart, showing the process for Expedited Change.

    For the full process, refer to the Change Management Process Library.

    Appendix II: Optimize IT Change Management in a DevOps Environment

    Change Management cannot be ignored because you are DevOps or Agile

    But it can be right-sized.

    The core tenets of change management still apply no matter the type of development environment an organization has. Changes in any environment carry risk of degrading functionality, and must therefore be vetted. However, the amount of work and rigor put into different stages of the change life cycle can be altered depending on the maturity of the development workflows. The following are several stage gates for change management that MUST be considered if you are a DevOps or Agile shop:

    • Intake assessment (separation of changes from projects, service requests, operational tasks)
      • Within a DevOps or Agile environment, many of the application changes will come directly from the SDLC and projects going live. It does not mean a change must go through CAB, but leveraging the pre-approved category allows for an organization to stick to development lifecycles without being heavily bogged down by change bureaucracy.
    • Technical review
      • Leveraging automation, release contingencies, and the current SDLC documentation to decrease change risk allows for various changes to be designated as pre-approved.
    • Authorization
      • Define the authorization and dependencies of a change early in the lifecycle to gain authorization and necessary signoffs.
    • Documentation/communication
      • Documentation and communication are post-implementation activities that cannot be ignored. If documentation is required throughout the SDLC, then design the RFC to point to the correct documentation instead of duplicating information.

    "Understand that process is hard and finding a solution that fits every need can be tricky. With this change management process we do not try to solve every corner case so much as create a framework by which best judgement can be used to ensure maximum availability of our platforms and services while still complying with our regulatory requirements and making positive changes that will delight our customers.“ -IT Director, Information Cybersecurity Organization

    Five principals for implementing change in DevOps

    Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

    People

    The core differences between an Agile or DevOps transition and a traditional approach are the restructuring and the team behind it. As a result, the stakeholders of change management must be onboard for the process to work. This is the most difficult problem to solve if it’s an issue, but open avenues of feedback for a process build is a start.

    DevOps Lifecycles

    • Plan the dev lifecycle so people can’t skirt it. Ensure the process has automated checks so that it’s more work to skirt the system than it is to follow it. Make the right process the process of least resistance.
    • Plan changes from the start to ensure that cross-dependencies are identified early and that the proposed implementation date is deconflicted and visible to other change requesters and change stakeholders.

    Automation

    Automation comes in many forms and is well documented in many development workflows. Having automated signoffs for QA/security checks and stakeholders/cross dependency owner sign offs may not fully replace the CAB but can ease the burden on discussions before implementation.

    Contingencies

    Canary releases, phased releases, dark releases, and toggles are all options you can employ to reduce risk during a release. Furthermore, building in contingencies to the test/rollback plan decreases the risk of the change by decreasing the factor of likelihood.

    Continually Improve

    Building change from the ground up doesn’t meant the process has to be fully fledged before launch. Iterative improvements are possible before achieving an optimal state. Having the proper metrics on the pain points and bottlenecks in the process can identify areas for automation and improvement.

    Increasing the proportion of pre-approved changes

    Leverage the traditional change infrastructure to deploy changes quickly while keeping your risk low.

    • To designate a change as a pre-approved change it must have a low risk rating (based on impact and likelihood). Fortunately, many of the changes within the Agile framework are designed to be small and lower risk (at least within application development). Putting in the work ahead of time to document these changes, template RFCs, and document the dependencies for various changes allows for a shift in the proportion of pre-approved changes.
    • The designation of pre-approved changes is an ongoing process. This is not an overnight initiative. Measure the proportion of changes by category as a metric, setting goals and interim goals to shift the change proportion to a desired ratio.

    The image is a bar graph, with each bar having 3 colour-coded sections: Emergency, Normal, and Pre-Approved. The first bar is before, where the largest change category is Normal. The second bar is after, and the largest change category is Pre-Approved.

    Turn your CAB into a virtual one

    • The CAB does not have to fully disappear in a DevOps environment. If the SDLC is built in a way that authorizes changes through peer reviews and automated checks, by the time it’s deployed, the job of the CAB should have already been completed. Then the authorization stage-gate (traditionally, the CAB) shifts to earlier in the process, reducing the need for an actual CAB meeting. However, the change must still be communicated and documented, even if it’s a pre-approved change.
    • As the proportion of changes shifts from a high degree of normal changes to a high degree of pre-approved changes, the need for CAB meetings should decrease even further. As an end-state, you may reserve actual CAB meetings for high-profile changes (as defined by risk).
    • Lastly, change management does not disappear as a process. Periodic reviews of change management metrics and the pre-approved change list must still be completed.

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}546|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,184 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Organizations have been trying to promote equality for many years. Diversity and inclusion strategies and a myriad of programs have been implemented in companies across the world. Despite the attempts, many organizations still struggle to ensure that their workforce is representative of the populations they support or want to support.
    • IT brings another twist. Many IT companies and departments are based on the culture of white males, and underrepresented ethnic communities find it more of a challenge to fit in.
    • This sometimes means that talented minorities are less incentivized to join or stay in technology.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Diversity and inclusion cannot be a one-time campaign or a one-off initiative.
    • For real change to happen, every leader needs to internalize the value of creating and retaining diverse teams.

    Impact and Result

    • To stay competitive, IT leaders need to be more involved and commit to a plan to recruit and retain people of color in their departments and organizations. A diverse team is an answer to innovation that can differentiate your company.
    • Treat recruiting and retaining a diverse team as a business challenge that requires full engagement. Info-Tech offers a targeted solution that will help IT leaders build a plan to attract, recruit, engage, and retain people of color.

    Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should recruit and retain people of color in your IT department or organization, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in this endeavor.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Recruit people of color in IT

    Diverse teams are necessary to foster creativity and guide business strategies. Overcome limitations by recruiting people of color and creating a diverse workforce.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 1: Recruit People of Color in IT
    • Support Plan
    • IT Behavioral Interview Question Library

    2. Retain people of color in IT

    Underrepresented employees benefit from an expansive culture. Create an inclusive environment and retain people of color and promote value within your organization.

    • Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT – Phase 2: Retain People of Color in IT

    Infographic

    Workshop: Recruit and Retain People of Color in IT

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Setting the Stage

    The Purpose

    Introduce challenges and concerns around recruiting and retaining people of color.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a sense of direction.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction to diversity conversations.

    1.2 Assess areas to focus on and determine what is right, wrong, missing, and confusing.

    1.3 Obtain feedback from your team about the benefits of working at your organization.

    1.4 Establish your employee value proposition (EVP).

    1.5 Discuss and establish your recruitment goals.

    Outputs

    Current State Analysis

    Right, Wrong, Missing, Confusing Quadrant

    Draft EVP

    Recruitment Goals

    2 Refine Your Recruitment Process

    The Purpose

    Identify areas in your current recruitment process that are preventing you from hiring people of color.

    Establish a plan to make improvements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimized recruitment process

    Activities

    2.1 Brainstorm and research community partners.

    2.2 Review current job descriptions and equity statement.

    2.3 Update job description template and equity statement.

    2.4 Set team structure for interview and assessment.

    2.5 Identify decision-making structure.

    Outputs

    List of community partners

    Updated job description template

    Updated equity statement

    Interview and assessment structure

    Behavioral Question Library

    3 Culture and Management

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for an inclusive culture where your managers are supported.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Awareness of how to better support employees of color.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss engagement and belonging.

    3.2 Augment your onboarding materials.

    3.3 Create an inclusive culture plan.

    3.4 Determine how to support your management team.

    Outputs

    List of onboarding content

    Inclusive culture plan

    Management support plan

    4 Close the Loop

    The Purpose

    Establish mechanisms to gain feedback from your employees and act on them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the plan to create your diverse and inclusive workforce.

    Activities

    4.1 Ask and listen: determine what to ask your employees.

    4.2 Create your roadmap.

    4.3 Wrap-up and next steps.

    Outputs

    List of survey questions

    Roadmap

    Completed support plan

    Cost Optimization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}14|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}14|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}14|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Financial Management
    • Parent Category Link: /financial-management
    Minimize the damage of IT cost cuts

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}568|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Digital Marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Impact and Result

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy

    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    • Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Create an Effective SEO Keyword Strategy
    Update your on-page SEO strategy with competitively relevant keywords.

    Analyst Perspective

    Most marketers fail in their SEO efforts because they focus on creating content for computers, not people.

    Leading search engine optimization methods focus on creating and posting relevant keyword-rich content, not just increasing page rank. Content and keywords should move a buyer along their journey, close a sale, and develop long-term relationships. Unfortunately, many SEO specialists focus on computers, not the buyer. What's even more concerning is that up to 70% of SaaS businesses have already been impacted by outdated and inefficient SEO techniques. Poor strategies often focus on ballooning SEO metrics in the short-term instead of building the company's long-term PageRank.

    Best-in-class digital marketers stop chasing the short-term highs and focus on long-term growth. This starts with developing a competitive keyword strategy and updating website content with the new keywords.

    SEO is a large topic, so we have broken the strategy into small, easy-to-implement steps, taking the guesswork out of how to use the data from SEO tools and giving CMOs a solid path to increase their SEO results.

    This is a picture of Terra Higginson

    Terra Higginson
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Digital marketers working with an outdated or bad SEO strategy often see:

    • Declining keyword ranking and traffic
    • Poor keyword strategy
    • On-page errors

    Search algorithms change all the time, which means that the strategy is often sitting on the sifting sands of technology, making SEO strategies quickly outdated.

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and implementing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • SEO practitioners that focus on gaming the system
    • Ever-changing SEO technology
    • Lack of understanding of the best SEO techniques
    • SEO techniques focus on the needs of computers, not people
    • Lack of continued investment

    SoftwareReviews' Approach

    Using the SoftwareReviews methodology, digital marketers are able to break up their SEO project and data into bite-sized, actionable steps that focus on long-term improvement. Our methodology includes:

    • Competitive keyword research and identification of opportunities
    • On-page keyword strategy

    Our methodology will take a focused step-by-step strategy in a series of phases that will increase PageRank and competitive positioning.

    SoftwareReviews' SEO Methodology

    In this blueprint, we will cover:

    Good SEO vs. Poor SEO Techniques

    The difference between good and bad SEO techniques.

    Common Good
    SEO Techniques

    Common Poor
    SEO Techniques

    • Writing content for people, not machines.
    • Using SEO tools to regularly adjust and update SEO content, keywords, and backlinks.
    • Pillar and content cluster strategy in addition to a basic on- and off-page strategy.
    • Keyword stuffing and content duplication.
    • A strategy that focuses on computers first and people second.
    • Low-quality or purchased backlinks.

    Companies With Great SEO…

    Keyword Strategy

    • Have identified a keyword strategy that carves out targets within the white space available between themselves and the competition.

    Error-Free Site

    • Have error-free sites without duplicate content. Their URLs and redirects are all updated. Their site is responsive, and every page loads in under two seconds.

    Pillar & Content Clusters

    • Employ a pillar and content cluster strategy to help move the buyer through their journey.

    Authentic Off-Page Strategy

    • Build an authentic backlink strategy that incorporates the right information on the right sites to move the buyer through their journey.

    SEO Terms Defined

    A glossary to define common Phase 1 SEO terms.

    Search Volume: this measures the number of times a keyword is searched for in a certain time period. Target keywords with a volume of between 100-100,000. A search volume greater than 100,000 will be increasingly difficult to rank (A Beginner's Guide to Keyword Search Volume, 2022, Semrush).

    Keyword Difficulty: the metric that quantifies how difficult it will be to rank for a certain keyword. The keyword difficulty percentage includes the number of competitors attempting to rank for the same keyword, the quality of their content, the search intent, backlinks, and domain authority (Keyword Difficulty: What Is It and Why Is It Important? 2022, Semrush).

    Intent: this metric focuses on the intent of the user's search. All search intent is categorized into Informational, Commercial, Navigational, and Transactional (What Is Search Intent? A Complete Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    On-Page SEO: refers to the practice of search engine optimizing elements of your site such as title tags, internal links, HTML code, URL optimization, on-page content, images, and user experience.

    Off-Page SEO: refers to the practice of optimizing brand awareness (What Is Off-Page SEO? A Comprehensive Guide, 2022, Semrush).

    H1: HTML code that tells a search engine the title of the page (neilpatel.com).

    SEO Tool: A subscription-based all-in-one search engine optimization MarTech tool.

    Google's mission is to organize the world's information and make it universally accessible and useful… We believe Search should deliver the most relevant and reliable information available.
    – An excerpt from Google's mission statement

    Your Challenge

    Google makes over 4.5k algorithm changes per year1, directly impacting digital marketing search engine optimization efforts.

    Digital marketers with SEO problems will often see the following issues:

    • Keyword ranking – A decline in keyword ranking is alarming and results in decreased PageRank.
    • Bounce rate – Attracting the wrong audience to your site will increase the bounce rate because the H1 doesn't resonate with your audience.
    • Outdated keywords – Many companies are operating on a poor keyword strategy, or even worse, no keyword strategy. In addition, many marketers haven't updated their strategy to include pillar and cluster content.
    • Errors – Neglected sites often have a large number of errors.
    • Bad backlinks – Neglected sites often have a large number of toxic backlinks.

    The best place to hide a dead body is on page two of the search results.
    – Huffington Post

    Common Obstacles

    Digital marketers are responsible for developing and executing a competitive SEO strategy but increasingly encounter the following obstacles:

    • Inefficient and ineffective SEO practitioners.
    • Changing SEO technology and search engine algorithms.
    • Lack of understanding of the best-in-class SEO techniques.
    • Lack of a sustainable plan to manage the strategy and invest in SEO.

    SEO is a helpful activity when it's applied to people-first content. However, content created primarily for search engine traffic is strongly correlated with content that searchers find unsatisfying.
    – Google Search Central Blog

    Benefits of Proper SEO

    A good SEO keyword strategy will create long-term, sustainable SEO growth:

    • Write content for people, not algorithms – Good SEO prioritizes the needs of humans over the needs of computers, being ever thoughtful of the meaning of content and keywords.
    • Content that aligns with intent – Content and keyword intent will align with the buyer journey to help move prospects through the funnel.
    • Competitive keyword strategy – Find keyword white space for your brand. Keywords will be selected to optimize your ranking among competition with reasonable and sustainable targets.
    • Actionable and impactful fixes – By following the SoftwareReviews phases of SEO, you will be able to take a very large task and divide it into conquerable actions. Small improvements everyday lead to very large improvements over time.

    Digital Marketing SEO Stats

    61%
    61% of marketers believe that SEO is the key to online success.
    Source: Safari Digital

    437%
    Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimised one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
    Source: Safari Digital

    Good SEO Aligns With Search Intent

    What type of content is the user searching for? Align your keyword to the logical search objective.

    Informational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to inform or educate themselves on a specific topic.

    Commercial

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to do research before making a purchase.

    Transactional

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to purchase something.

    Navigational

    This term categorizes search intent for when a user wants to find a specific page.

    SoftwareReviews' Methodology toCreate an Effective SEO Strategy

    1. Competitive Analysis & Keyword Discovery 2. On-Page Keyword Optimization
    Phase Steps
    1. Make a list of keywords in your current SEO strategy – including search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, intent.
    2. Research the keywords of top competitors.
    3. Make a list of target keywords you would like to own – including the search volume, keyword difficulty percentage, and intent. Make sure that these keywords align with your buyer persona.
    1. List product and service pages, along with the URL and current ranking(s) for the keyword(s) for that URL.
    2. Create a new individual page strategy for each URL. Record the current keyword, rank, title tag, H1 tag, and meta description. Then, with keyword optimization in mind, develop the new title tag, new H1 tag, and new meta description. Build the target keywords into the pages and tags.
    3. Record the current ranking for the pages' keywords then reassess after three to six months.
    Phase Outcomes
    • Understanding of competitive landscape for SEO
    • A list of target new keywords
    • Keyword optimized product and service pages

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify your current SEO keyword strategy.

    Call #2: Discuss how to start a competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #4: Discuss how to build the list of target keywords.

    Call #6: Discuss keyword optimization of the product & services pages.

    Call #8: (optional)

    Schedule a call to update every three to six months.

    Call #3: Discuss the results of the competitive keyword analysis.

    Call #5: Discuss which pages to update with new target keywords.

    Call #7: Review final page content and tags.

    Call #9: Schedule a call for SEO Phase 2: On-Page Technical Refinement.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    SoftwareReviews offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    Included Within an Advisory Membership Optional Add-Ons
    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Insight Summary

    People-First Content

    Best-in-class SEO practitioners focus on people-first content, not computer-first content. Search engine algorithms continue to focus on how to rank better content first, and a strategy that moves your buyers through the funnel in a logical and cohesive way will beat any SEO trick over the long run.

    Find White Space

    A good SEO strategy uses competitive research to carve out white space and give them a competitive edge in an increasingly difficult ranking algorithm. An understanding of the ideal client profile and the needs of their buyer persona(s) sit as a pre-step to any good SEO strategy.

    Optimize On-Page Keywords

    By optimizing the on-page strategy with competitively relevant keywords that target your ideal client profile, marketers are able to take an easy first step at improving the SEO content strategy.

    Understand the Strategy

    If you don't understand the strategy of your SEO practitioner, you are in trouble. Marketers need to work hand in hand with their SEO specialists to quickly uncover gaps, create a strategy that aligns with the buyer persona(s), and execute the changes.

    Quality Trumps Quantity

    The quality of the prospect that your SEO efforts bring to your site is more important than the number of people brought to your site.

    Stop Here and Ask Yourself:

    • Do I have an updated (completed within the last two years) buyer persona and journey?
    • Do I know who the ICP (ideal client profile) is for my product or company?

    If not, stop here, and we can help you define your buyer persona and journey, as well as your ideal client profile before moving forward with SEO Phase 1.

    The Steps to SEO Phase 1

    The Keyword Strategy

    1. Current Keywords
      • Identify the keywords your SEO strategy is currently targeting.
    2. Competitive Analysis
      • Research the keywords of competitor(s). Identify keyword whitespace.
    3. New Target Keywords
      • Identify and rank keywords that will result in more quality leads and less competition.
    4. Product & Service Pages
      • Identify your current product and service pages. These pages represent the easiest content to update on your site.
    5. Individual Page Update
      • Develop an SEO strategy for each of your product and service pages, include primary target keyword, H1, and title tags, as well as keyword-rich description.

    Resources Needed for Search Engine Optimization

    Consider the working skills required for search engine optimization.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    • SEO
    • Web development
    • Competitive analysis
    • Content creation
    • Understanding of buyer persona and journey
    • Digital marketing

    Suggested Titles

    • SEO Analyst
    • Competitive Intelligence Analyst
    • Content Marketing Manager
    • Website Developer
    • Digital Marketing Manager

    Digital Marketing Software

    • CMS that allows you to easily access and update your content

    SEO Software

    • SEO tool

    Step 1: Current Keywords

    Use this sheet to record your current keyword research.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify current keywords.

    Step 2: Competitive Analysis

    Use this sheet to guide the research on your competitors' keywords.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Top organic keywords
    2. Ranking of keywords
    3. Domain authority and trust
    4. Position changes

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to perform an competitive analysis

    Step 3: New Target Keywords

    Use this sheet to record target keywords that have a good volume but are less competitive. The new target keywords should align with your buyer persona and their journey.

    Use your SEO tool to research keywords and find the following:
    Use a quality tool like SEMRush to obtain SEO data.

    1. Keyword difficulty
    2. Search volume
    3. Search intent

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, which can be used to identify new target keywords.

    Step 4: Product & Service Pages

    Duplicate this page so that you have a separate page for each URL from Step 4

    Use this sheet to identify your current product and service pages.

    Use your SEO tool to find the following:

    1. Current rank
    2. Current keywords

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, showing where you can display product and service pages.

    Step 5: Individual Page Strategy

    Develop a keyword strategy for each of your product and service pages. Use a fresh page for each URL.

    Date last optimized:
    mm/dd/yyyy

    This is a screenshot of the SEO tool SEMRush, with an example of how you can use an individual page strategy to develop a keyword strategy.

    Bibliography

    Council, Y. "Council Post: The Rundown On Black Hat SEO Techniques And Why You Should Avoid Them." Forbes, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    "Our approach – How Google Search works." Google Search. Accessed September 2022.

    "The Best Place to Hide a Dead Body is Page Two of Google." HuffPost, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Patel, Neil. "How to Create the Perfect H1 Tag for SEO." neilpatel.com. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Schwartz, B. "Google algorithm updates 2021 in review: Core updates, product reviews, page experience and beyond." Search Engine Land, 2022. Accessed September 2022.

    Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}508|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Application Development
    • Parent Category Link: /application-development
    • You have identified that a change to your sourcing strategy is required, based on market and company factors.
    • You are ready to select a new sourcing partner to drive innovation, time to market, increased quality, and improved financial performance.
    • Taking on a new partner is a significant investment and risk, and you must get it right the first time.
    • You need to make a change now to prevent losing clients and falling further behind your performance targets and your market.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Selecting a sourcing partner is a function of matching complex factors to your own firm. It is not a simple RFP exercise; it requires significant introspection, proactive planning, and in-depth investigation of potential partners to choose the right fit.

    Impact and Result

    Choosing the right sourcing partner is a four-step process:

    1. Assess your companies' skills and processes in the key areas of risk to sourcing initiatives.
    2. Based on the current situation, define a profile for the matching sourcing partner.
    3. Seek matching partners from the market, either in terms of vendor partners or in terms of sourcing locations.
    4. Based on the choice of partner, build a plan to implement the partnership, define metrics to measure success, and a process to monitor.

    Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Storyboard – Use this presentation to select a partner to best fit your sourcing needs and deliver long-term value.

    This project helps select a partner for sourcing of your development team so that you can realize the benefits from changing your sourcing strategy.

    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Storyboard

    2. Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation Template – Use this template to build a presentation to detail your decision on a sourcing partner for your development team.

    This presentation template is designed to capture the results from the exercises within the storyboard and allow users to build a presentation to leadership showing how selection was done.

    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation Template

    3. Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation Example – Use this as a completed example of the template.

    This presentation template portrays what the completed template looks like by showing sample data in all tables. It allows members to see how each exercise leads to the final selection of a partner.

    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Example Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Application Development Team

    Choose the right partner to enable your firm to maximize the value realized from your sourcing strategy.

    Analyst Perspective

    Selecting the right partner for your sourcing needs is no longer a cost-based exercise. Driving long-term value comes from selecting the partner who best matches your firm on a wide swath of factors and fits your needs like a glove.

    Sourcing in the past dealt with a different kind of conversation involving two key questions:

    Where will the work be done?

    How much will it cost?

    How people think about sourcing has changed significantly. People are focused on gaining a partner, and not just a vendor to execute a single transaction. They will add skills your team lacks, and an ability to adapt to your changing needs, all while ensuring you operate within any constraints based on your business.

    Selecting a sourcing partner is a matching exercise that requires you to look deep into yourself, understand key factors about your firm, and then seek the partner who best meets your profile.

    The image contains a picture of Dr. Suneel Ghei.

    Dr. Suneel Ghei
    Principal Research Director, Application Development
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • You have identified that a change to your sourcing strategy is required based on market and company factors.
    • You are ready to select a new sourcing partner to drive innovation, time to market, increased quality, and improve financial performance.
    • Taking on a new partner is a significant investment and risk, and you must get it right the first time.
    • You need to make a change now to avoid falling further behind your performance targets and your market, and losing clients.

    Almost half of all sourcing initiatives do not realize the projected savings, and the biggest reason is the choice of partner.

    The market for Application Development partners has become more diverse, increasing choice and the risk of making a costly mistake by choosing the wrong partner.

    Firms struggle with how best to support the sourcing partner and allocate resources with the right skills to maximize success, increasing the cost and time to implement, and limiting benefits.

    Making the wrong choice means inferior products, and higher costs and losing both clients and reputation.

    • Choosing the right sourcing partner is a four-step process:
    1. Assess your company's skills and processes in the key areas of risk to sourcing initiatives.
    2. Based on the current situation, define a profile for the matching sourcing partner.
    3. Seek matching partners from the market, either in terms of vendor partners or in terms of sourcing locations.
    4. Based on your choice of partner, build a plan to implement the partnership, and define metrics to measure success and a process to monitor.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Successfully selecting a sourcing partner is not a simple RFP exercise to choose the lowest cost. It is a complex process of introspection, detailed examination of partners and locations, and matching the fit. It requires you to seek a partner that is the Yin to your Yang, and failure is not an option.

    You need a new source for development resources

    You are facing immediate challenges that require a new approach to development resourcing.

    • Your firm is under fire; you are facing pressures financially from clients and your competitors.
    • Your pace of innovation and talent sourcing is too slow and too limiting.
    • Your competition is moving faster and your clients are considering their options.
    • Revenues and costs of development are trending in the wrong direction.
    • You need to act now to avoid spiraling further.

    Given how critical our applications are to the business and our clients, there is no room for error in choosing our partner.

    A study of 121 firms outsourcing various processes found that 50% of those surveyed saw no gains from the outsourcing arrangement, so it is critical to make the right choice the first time.

    Source: Zhang et al

    Big challenges await you on the journey

    The road to improving sourcing has many potholes.

    • In a study of 121 firms who moved development offshore, almost 50% of all outsourcing and offshoring initiatives do not achieve the desired results.
    • In another study focused on large corporations, it was shown that 70% of respondents saw negative outcomes from offshoring development.
    • Globalization of IT Services and the ability to work from anywhere have contributed to a significant increase in the number of development firms to choose from.
    • Choosing and implementing a new partner is costly, and the cost of choosing the wrong partner and then trying to correct your course is significant in dollars and reputation:
      • Costs to find a new partner and transition
      • Lost revenue due to product issues
      • Loss of brand and reputation due to poor choice
    • The wrong choice can also cost you in terms of your own resources, increasing the risk of losing more knowledge and skills.

    A survey of 25 large corporate firms that outsourced development offshore found that 70% of them had negative outcomes.

    (Source: University of Oregon Applied Information Management, 2019)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Selecting the right partner is a matching exercise.

    Selecting the right partner is a complex exercise with many factors

    1. Look inward. Assess your culture, your skills, and your needs.
    • Market
    • People
    • Culture
    • Technical aspects
  • Create a profile for the perfect partner to fit your firm.
    • Sourcing Strategy
    • Priorities
    • Profile
  • Find the partner that best fits your needs
    • Define RFx
    • Target Partners
    • Evaluate
  • Implement the partner and put in metrics and process to manage.
    • Contract Partner
    • Develop Goals
    • Create Process and Metrics

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Assess your own organization’s characteristics and capabilities in four key areas.
    2. Based on these characteristics and the sourcing strategy you are seeking to implement, build a profile for your perfect partner.
    3. Define an RFx and assessment matrix to survey the market and select the best partner.
    4. Implement the partner with process and controls to manage the relationship, built collaboratively and in place day 1.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Successfully selecting a sourcing partner is not a simple RFP exercise to choose the lowest cost. It is a complex process of introspection, detailed examination of partners and locations, and matching the fit. It requires you to seek a partner that is the Yin to your Yang, and failure is not an option.

    Phase 1 insight

    Fitting each of these pieces to the right partner is key to building a long-term relationship of value.

    Selecting a partner requires you to look at your firm in depth from a business, technical, and organizational culture perspective.

    Phase 2 insight

    The factors we have defined serve to build us a profile for the ideal partner to engage in sourcing our development team. This profile will lead us to be able to define our RFP / RFI and assess respondents.

    Phase 3/4 insight

    Implement the relationship the same way you want it to work, as one team. Work together on contract mechanism, shared goals, metrics, and performance measurement. By making this transparent you hasten the development of a joint team, which will lead to long-term success.

    Tactical insight

    Ensure you assess not just where you are but where you are going, in choosing a partner. For example, you must consider future markets you might enter when choosing the right sourcing, or outsourcing location to maintain compliance.

    Tactical insight

    Sourcing is not a replacement for your full team. Skills must be maintained in house as well, so the partner must be willing to work with the in-house team to share knowledge and collaborate on deliverables.

    Addressing the myth – Single country offshoring or outsourcing

    Research shows that a multi-country approach has a higher chance of success.

    • Research shows that firms trying their own captive development centers fail 20% of the time. ( Journal of Information Technology, 2008)
    • Further, the overall cost of ownership for an offshore center has shown to be significantly higher than the cost of outsourcing, as the offshore center requires more internal management and leadership.
    • Research shows that offshoring requires the offshore location to also house business team members to allow key relationships to be built and ensure more access to expertise. (Arxiv, 2021)
    • Given the specificity of employment laws, cultural differences, and leadership needs, it is very beneficial to have a Corporate HR presence in countries where an offshore center is being set up. (Arxiv, 2021)
    • Lastly, given the changing climate on security, geopolitical changes, and economic factors, our research with service providers and corporate clients shows a need to have more diversity in provider location than a single center can provide.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Long-term success of sourcing requires more than a development center. It requires a location that houses business and HR staff to enable the new development team to learn and succeed.

    Addressing the myth – Outsourcing is a simple RFP for skills and lowest cost

    Success in outsourcing is an exercise in finding a match based on complex factors.

    • In the past, outsourcing was a simple RFP exercise to find the cheapest country with the skills.
    • Our research shows this is no longer true; the decision is now more complex.
    • Competition has driven costs higher, while time business integration and security constraints have served to limit the markets available.
    • Company culture fit is key to the ability to work as one team, which research shows is a key element in delivery of long-term value. (University of Oregon, 2019).
    • These are some of the many factors that need to be considered as you choose your outsourcing partner.
    • The right decision is to find the vendor that best matches the current state of your culture, meets your market constraints, and will allow for best integration to your team – it's not about cheapest or pure skills. (IEEE Access, 2020)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Finding the right outsourcing vendor is an exercise in knowing yourself and then finding the best match to align with your key traits. It's not just costs and skills, but the partner who best matches with your ability to mitigate the risks of outsourcing.

    Phase 1

    Look inward to gain insight on key factors

    Introspection

    1.1 Assess your market factors

    1.2 Determine your people factors

    1.3 Review your current culture

    1.4 Document your technical factors

    Profiling

    2.1 Recall your sourcing strategy

    2.2 Prioritize your company factors

    2.3 Create target profile

    Partner selection

    3.1 Review your RFx

    3.2 Identify target vendors

    3.3 Evaluate vendor

    responses

    Implementation

    4.1 Engage partner to choose contract mechanism

    4.2 Engage partner team to define goals

    4.3 Choose your success

    metrics

    This phase will walk you through assessing and documenting the key driving factors about your firm and the current situation.

    By defining these factors, you will be able to apply this information in the matching process to select the best fit in a partner.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Line of Business leaders

    Technology leaders

    Key criteria to assess your firm

    Research shows firms must assess themselves in different areas.

    Market factors

    • Who are your clients and your competitors, and what legal constraints do you face?

    People / Process factors

    • What employee skills are you seeking, what is your maturity in product management and stakeholder engagement, and what languages are spoken most predominantly?

    Cultural factors

    • What is your culture around communications, collaboration, change management, and conflict resolution?

    Technical factors

    • What is your current / future technical platform, and what is the maturity of your applications?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When assessing these areas, consider where you are today and where you want to go tomorrow, as choosing a partner is a long-term endeavor.

    Step 1.1

    Assess your market factors

    Activities

    1.1.1 Review your client list and future projections to determine your market factors.

    1.1.2 Review your competitive analysis to determine your competitive factors

    This step involves the following participants:

    Business leaders

    Product Owners

    Technology leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Details of key market factors that will drive the selection of the right partner.

    Market factors

    The Market has a lot to say about the best match for your application development partner.

    Research in the space has defined key market-based factors that are critical when selecting a partner.

    1. Market sectors you service or plan to service – This is critical, as many market sectors have constraints on where their data can be accessed or stored. These restrictions also change over time, so they must be consistently reviewed.
    • E.g. Canadian government data must be stored and only accessed in Canada.
    • E.g. US Government contracts require service providers to avoid certain countries.
  • Your competitors – Your competitors can often seize on differences and turn them to differentiators; for example, offshoring to certain countries can be played up as a risk by a competitor who does all their work in a particular country.
  • Your clients – Research shows that clients can have very distinct views on services being performed in certain countries due to perceived risk, culture, and geopolitical factors. Understanding the views of major clients on globalization of services is a key factor in maintaining client satisfaction.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your current and future market factors ensure that your business can not only be successful with the chosen partner today, but also in the future.

    1.1.1 Assess your market factors

    30 min

    Market factors

    1. Group your current client list into three categories:
      1. Those that have no restrictions on data security, privacy or location.
      2. Those that ask for assurances on data security, privacy and location.
      3. Those clients who have compliance restrictions related to data security, privacy, and location.
    2. Categorize future markets into the same three categories.
    3. Based on revenue projections, estimate the revenue from each category as a percentage of your total revenue.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output
    • Current client list
    • Future market plans
    • Competitive analysis
    • Completion of the Market Factors chart in the Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team template
    Materials Participants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Line of business leaders
    • Finance leaders

    Assess your market factors

    Market and sector

    Market share and constraints

    Market category

    Sector – Public, private or both

    Market share of category

    Key areas of concern

    Not constrained by data privacy, security or location

    Private

    50%

    Require assurances on data security, privacy or location

    Public

    45%

    Data access

    Have constraints that preclude choices related to data security, privacy and location

    Public

    5%

    Data residency

    1.1.2 Review your competitive factors

    30 min

    Competitive factors

    1. List your largest competitors.
    2. Document their sourcing strategies for their development team – are they all onshore or nearshore? Do they outsource?
    3. Based on this, identify competitive threats based on changing sourcing strategies.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output
    • Current client list
    • Future market plans
    • Competitive analysis
    • Completion of the Market Factors chart in the Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team template
    Materials Participants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Line of business leaders
    • Finance leaders

    Review your competitive factors

    Competitors

    Competitor sourcing strategy

    Competitive threats

    Competitor

    Where is the market?

    Is this onshore / near shore / offshore?

    Data residency

    How could competitors take advantage of a change in our sourcing strategy?

    Competitor X

    Canada / US

    All work done in house and onshore

    Kept in Canada / US

    If we source offshore, we will face a Made in Canada / US threat

    Step 1.2

    Consider your people-related factors

    Activities

    1.2.1 Define your people factors

    1.2.2 Assess your process factors

    This step involves the following participants:

    Technical leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Details of key people factors that will drive the selection of the right partner.

    People / process factors

    People and process have a large hand in the success or failure of a partner relationship.

    • Alignment of people and process are critical to the success of the partner relationship over the long term.
    • In research on outsourcing / offshoring, Rahman et al identified ten factors that directly impact success or failure in offshoring or outsourcing of development.
    • Key among them are the following:
      • Employee skills
      • Project management
      • Maturity of process concerning product and client management
      • Language barrier

    Info-Tech Insight

    People are a critical resource in any sourcing strategy. Making sure the people and the processes will mesh seamlessly is how to ensure success.

    1.2.1 Define your people factors

    30 min

    Skills Inventory

    1. List skills needed in the development team to service current needs.
    2. Based on future innovation and product direction, add skills you foresee needing in the next 12-24 months. Where do you see a new technology platform (e.g. move from .NET to Java) or innovation (addition of Mobile)?
    3. List current skills present in the team.
    4. Identify skills gaps.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Product plans for current and future products
    • Technology platform plans for current products
    • Future innovation plans
    • People- and process-related factors that influence sourcing decisions
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Solution architects

    Assess your people - Skills inventory

    Skills required

    Strategic value

    Skills present

    Skill you are seeking

    Required today or in the future

    Rate the skill level required in this area

    Is this a strategic focus for the firm for future targets?

    Is this skill present in the team today?

    Rate current skill level (H/M/L)

    Java Development

    Future

    High

    Yes

    No

    Low

    .Net Development

    Today

    Med

    No

    Yes

    High

    1.2.2 Assess your process factors

    30 min

    Process factors

    1. Do you have a defined product ownership practice?
    2. How mature is the product ownership for the product you are seeking to change sourcing for (H/M/L)?
    3. Do you have project management principles and governance in place for software releases?
    4. What is the relative maturity / skill in the areas you are seeking sourcing for (H/M/L)?

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Product plans for current and future products
    • Technology platform plans for current products
    • Future innovation plans
    • People- and process-related factors that influence sourcing decisions
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Solution architects

    Assess your process factors

    Product ownership

    Project management

    Product where sourcing is being changed

    Product ownership in place?

    Skills / maturity rating (H/M/L)

    Project management / governance in place for software releases

    Rate current maturity / skill level (H/M/L)

    ABC

    Yes

    High

    Yes

    High

    SQW

    No

    Low

    Yes

    High

    Step 1.3

    Review your current culture

    Activities

    1.3.1 Assess your communications factors

    1.3.2 Assess your conflict resolution factors

    This step involves the following participants:

    Technical leaders

    Product owners

    Project managers

    Outcomes of this step

    Details of key culture factors that will drive the selection of the right partner.

    Cultural factors

    Organization culture fit is a driver of collaboration between the teams, which drives success.

    • In their study of country attractiveness for sourcing development, Kotlarsky and Oshri point to the ability of the client and their sourcing partner to work as one team as a key to success.
    • This requires synergies in many cultural factors to avoid costly miscommunications and misinterpretations that damage collaboration.
    • Key factors in achieving this are:
      • Communications methodology and frequency; managing and communicating to the teams as one team vs two, and communicating at all levels, vs top down.
      • Managing the team as one integrated team, with collaboration enabled between all resources, rather than the more adversarial client vs partner approach.
      • Conflict resolution strategies must align so all members of the extended team work together to resolve conflict vs the traditional “Blame the Contractors”.
      • Strong change management is required to keep all team members aligned.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Synergy of culture is what enables a good partner selection to become a long-term relationship of value.

    1.3.1 Assess your communications factors

    30 min

    1. List all the methods you use to communicate with your development team – face to face, email, conference call, written.
    2. For each form of communication confirm frequency, medium, and audience (team vs one-on-one)
    3. Confirm if these communications take into account External vs Internal resources and different time zones, languages, and cultures.
    4. Is your development team broken up into teams by function, by location, by skill, etc., or do you operate as one team?

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output
    • Communication process with existing development team
    • Examples of how external staff have been integrated into the process
    • Examples of conflicts and how they were resolved
    • Documentation of key cultural characteristics that need to be part of provider profiling
    Materials Participants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Project managers

    Assess your communications strategy

    Communications

    Type

    Frequency

    Audience

    One communication or one per audience?

    Level of two-way dialogue

    Face-to-face team meetings

    Weekly

    All developers

    One

    High

    Daily standup

    Daily

    Per team

    One per audience

    Low

    1.3.2 Assess your conflict resolution factors

    30 min

    1. How does your organization handle the following types of conflict? Rate from 1-5, with 1 being hierarchical and 5 being openly collaborative.
      1. Developers on a team disagree.
      2. Development team disagrees with manager.
      3. Development team disagrees with product owner.
      4. Development team disagrees with line of business.
    2. Rate each conflict resolution strategy based on effectiveness.
    3. Confirm if this type of strategy is used for internal and external resources, or internal only.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Communication process with existing development team
    • Examples of how external staff have been integrated into the process
    • Examples of conflicts and how they were resolved
    • Documentation of key cultural characteristics that need to be part of provider profiling
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Product owners
    • Project managers

    Assess your conflict resolution strategy

    Conflict

    Resolution strategy

    Effectiveness

    Audience

    Conflict type

    Rate the resolution strategy from hierarchical to collaborative (1-5)

    How effective is this method of resolution from 1-5?

    Is this strategy used for external parties as well as internal?

    Developer to product owner

    44

    Yes

    Developer to manager

    12

    Yes

    Step 1.4

    Document your technical factors

    Activities

    1.4.1 Document your product / platform factors

    1.4.2 Document your environment details

    This step involves the following participants:

    Technical leaders

    Product owners

    Outcomes of this step

    Details of key technical factors that will drive the selection of the right partner.

    Technical factors

    Technical factors are still the foundation for a Development sourcing relationship.

    • While there are many organizational factors to consider, the matching of technological factors is still the root on which the sourcing relationship is built; the end goal is to build better software.
    • Key technical Items that need to be aligned based on the research are:
      • Technical infrastructure
      • Development environments
      • Development methodology and tools
      • Deployment methodology and tools
      • Lack of/poor-quality technical documentation
    • Most RFPs focus purely on skills, but without alignment on the above items, work becomes impossible to move forward quickly, limiting the chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Technical factors are the glue that enables teams to function together. Ensuring that they are fully integrated is what enables team integration; seams in that integration represent failure points.

    1.4.1 Document your product / platform factors

    30 mins

    1. How many environments does each software release go through from the start of development through release to production?
    2. What is the infrastructure and development platform?

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Development process
    • Deployment process
    • Operations process
    • IT security policies
    • Documentation of key technical characteristics that need to be part of provider profiling
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Development leaders
    • Deployment team leaders
    • Infrastructure leaders
    • IT operations leaders
    • Product owners
    • Project managers

    Document your product / platform

    Product / Platform

    Product you are seeking a sourcing solution for

    What is the current infrastructure platform?

    How many environments does the product pass through?

    What is the current development toolset?

    ABC

    Windows

    Dev – QA – Preprod - Prod

    .Net / Visual Studio

    1.4.2 Document your environment details

    30 min

    For each environment detail the following:

    1. Environment on premises or in cloud
    2. Access allowed to external parties
    3. Production data present and unmasked
    4. Deployment process: automated or manual
    5. Tools used for automated deployment
    6. Can the environment be restored to last known state automatically?
    7. Does documentation exist on the environment, processes and procedures?

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Development process
    • Deployment process
    • Operations process
    • IT security policies
    • Documentation of key technical characteristics that need to be part of provider profiling
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Development leaders
    • Deployment team leaders
    • Infrastructure leaders
    • IT operations leaders
    • Product owners
    • Project managers

    Document Your Environment Details

    Environment

    Location

    Access

    Deployment

    Data

    Name of Environment

    Is the environment on premises or in the cloud (which cloud)?

    Is external access allowed?

    Is deployment automated or manual?

    Tool used for deployment

    Is reset automated?

    Does the environment contain unmasked production data?

    Dev

    Cloud

    Yes

    Automated

    Azure DevOps

    Yes

    No

    QA

    Cloud

    Yes

    Automated

    Azure DevOps

    Yes

    No

    Preprod

    On Premises

    No

    Manual

    N/A

    No

    Yes

    Phase 2

    Introspection

    1.1 Assess your market factors

    1.2 Determine your people factors

    1.3 Review your current culture

    1.4 Document your technical factors

    Profiling

    2.1 Recall your sourcing strategy

    2.2 Prioritize your company factors

    2.3 Create target profile

    Partner selection

    3.1 Review your RFx

    3.2 Identify target vendors

    3.3 Evaluate vendor

    responses

    Implementation

    4.1 Engage partner to choose contract mechanism

    4.2 Engage partner team to define goals

    4.3 Choose your success

    metrics

    This phase will help you to build a profile of the partner you should target in your search for a sourcing partner.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Technology leaders

    Procurement leaders

    Product owners

    Project managers

    Build a profile for the right partner

    • Finding the perfect partner is a puzzle to solve, an exercise between the firm and the partners.
    • It is necessary to be able to prioritize and to identify opportunities where you can adapt to create a fit.
    • You must also bring forward the sourcing model you are seeking and prioritize factors based on that; for example, if you are seeking a nearshore partner, language may be less of a factor.

    Review factors based on sourcing choice

    Different factors are more important depending on whether you are insourcing or outsourcing.

    Key risks for insourcing

    • Alignment on communication strategy and method
    • Ability to align culturally
    • Need for face-to-face relationship building
    • Need for coaching skills

    Key risks for outsourcing

    • Giving control to the vendor
    • Legal and regulatory issues
    • Lack of knowledge at the vendor
    • Language and cultural fit

    Assessing your firm's position

    • The model you derived from the Sourcing Strategy research will inform the prioritization of factors for matching partners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To find the best location for insourcing, or the best vendor for outsourcing, you need to identify your firm's positions on key risk areas.

    Step 2.1

    Recall your sourcing strategy

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define the key factors in your sourcing strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    Technology Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Documentation of the Sourcing Strategy you arrived at in the Define a Sourcing Strategy exercises

    Choosing the right model

    The image contains a screenshot of the legend that will be used down below. The legend contains circles, from the left there is a empty circle, a one quarter filled circle, half filled circle, three-quarter filled circle , and a fully filled in circle.

    Determinant

    Key Questions to Ask

    Onshore

    Nearshore

    Offshore

    Outsource role(s)

    Outsource team

    Outsource product(s)

    Business dependence

    How much do you rely on business resources during the development cycle?

    The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the empty circle to demonstrate low.

    Absorptive capacity

    How successful has the organization been at bringing outside knowledge back into the firm?

    The image contains a screenshot of the empty circle to demonstrate low. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high.

    Integration complexity

    How many integrations are required for the product to function – fewer than 5, 5-10, or more than 10?

    The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the empty circle to demonstrate low.

    Product ownership

    Do you have full-time product owners in place for the products? Do product owners have control of their roadmaps?

    The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high. The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high.

    Organization culture fit

    What are your organization’s communication and conflict resolution strategies? Is your organization geographically dispersed?

    The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high.

    Vendor mgmt skills

    What is your skill level in vendor management? How old are your longest-standing vendor relationships?

    The image contains a screenshot of the empty circle to demonstrate low. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the one-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium low. The image contains a screenshot of the half filled circle to demonstrate medium. The image contains a screenshot of the three-quarter filled circle to demonstrate medium high. The image contains a screenshot of the filled in whole circle to demonstrate high.

    2.1.1 Define the key factors in your sourcing strategy

    30 min

    For each product you are seeking a sourcing strategy for, document the following:

    1. Product or team name.
    2. Sourcing strategy based on Define a Sourcing Strategy.
    3. The primary drivers that led to this selection – Business Dependence, Absorptive Capacity, Integration Complexity, Product Ownership, Culture or Vendor Management.
    4. The reasoning for the selection based on that factor – e.g. we chose nearshoring based on high business dependence by our development team.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output
    • Sourcing Strategy from Define a Sourcing Strategy for your Development Team
    • Reasoning that drove the sourcing strategy selection
    Materials Participants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leadership

    Define sourcing strategy factors

    Sourcing strategy

    Factors that led to selection

    Product you are seeking a sourcing solution for

    Strategy defined

    Key factors that led to that choice

    Reasoning

    ABC

    Outsourcing - Offshore

    • Product ownership
    • Business integration
    • Product maturity
    • Technical environment

    Mature product ownership and low requirement for direct business involvement.

    Mature product with lower environments in cloud.

    Step 2.2

    Prioritize your company factors

    Activities

    2.2.1 Prioritize the factors from your sourcing strategy and confirm if mitigation or adaptation are possible.

    This step involves the following participants:

    IT Leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    Prioritized list of key factors

    2.2.1 Prioritize your sourcing strategy factors

    30 min

    1. For each of the factors listed in exercise 2.1, prioritize them by importance to the firm.
    2. For each factor, please confirm if there is room to drive change internally to overcome the lack of a match – for example, if the culture being changed in language and conflict resolution is an option, then say Yes for that factor.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Sourcing Strategy factors from 2.1
    • Prioritized list of sourcing strategy factors
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders

    Sourcing strategy factors and priority

    Sourcing strategy

    Factors that led to selection

    Priority of factor in decision

    Change possible

    Product you are seeking a sourcing solution for

    Strategy defined

    Key factors that led to your choice

    Reasoning

    Priority of factor 1-x

    Is there an opportunity to adapt this factor to a partner?

    ABC

    Outsourcing - offshore

    • Product ownership
    • Business integration
    • Product maturity
    • Technical environment

    Mature product ownership

    Low requirement for direct business involvement

    Mature product with lower environments in cloud

    2

    1

    3

    N

    N

    Y

    Step 2.3

    Create target profile

    Activities

    2.3.1 Profile your best fit

    This step involves the following participants:

    IT Leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    Profile of the target partner

    Profiling your best fit

    Creating a target profile will help you determine which partners should be included in the process.

    Given the complexity of all the factors and trying to find the best fit from a multitude of partners, Info-Tech recommends forming a target profile for your best fit of partner.

    This profile provides a detailed assessment matrix to use to review potential partners.

    Profile should be created based on priority; "must haves" are high priority, while properties that have mitigation opportunities are optional or lower priority.

    Criteria

    Priority

    Some US Govt contracts – data and staff in NATO

    1

    Windows environment – Azure DEVOPS

    2

    Clients in FS

    3

    Agile SDLC

    4

    Collaborative communication and conflict resolution

    5

    Mature product management

    6

    Languages English and Spanish

    7

    Partner Profile

    • Teams in NATO and non-NATO countries
    • Windows skills with Azure
    • Financial Services experience
    • Utilize Agile and willing to plug into our teams
    • Used to collaborating with clients in one team environment
    • One centre in Latin / South America

    Info-Tech Insight

    The factors we have defined serve to build us a profile for the ideal partner to engage in sourcing our development team. This profile will lead us to be able to define our RFP / RFI and assess respondents.

    Case study: Cognizant is partnering with clients on product development

    INDUSTRY: Technology Services

    SOURCE: Interview with Jay MacIsaac, Cognizant

    Cognizant is driving quality solutions for clients

    • Strives to be primarily an industry-aligned organization that delivers multiple service lines in multiple geographies.
    • Seeks to carefully consider client culture to create one team.
    • Value proposition is a consultative approach bringing thought leadership and mutually adding value to the relationship vs the more traditional order taker development partner
    • Wants to share in solution development to facilitate shared successes. Geographic alignment drives knowledge of the client and their challenges, not just about time zone and supportability.
    • Offers one of the largest offshore capabilities in the world, supported by local and nearshore resources to drive local knowledge.
    • Realizes today’s clients don’t typically want a black box, they are sophisticated and want transparency around the process and solution, to have a partner.
    • Understands that clients do want to know where the work is being delivered from and how it's being delivered, and want to help manage expectations and overall risk.

    Synergy with Info-Tech’s approach

    • Best relationship comes when teams operate as one.
    • Clients are seeking value, not a development black box.
    • Clients want to have a partner they can engage with, not just an order taker.
    • Goal is a one-team culture with shared goals and delivering business value.
    • Ideal is a partner that will add to their thinking, not echo it.

    Results of this approach

    • Cognizant is continuing to deliver double-digit growth and continues to strive for top quartile performance.
    • Growth in the client base has seen the company grow to over 340,000 associates worldwide.

    Case study: Cabot Technology Solutions uses industry knowledge to drive successful partnerships

    INDUSTRY: Technology Services

    SOURCE: Interview with Shibu Basheer, Cabot Technology Solutions

    Cabot Technology Solutions findings

    • Cabot Technology Solutions looks to partner with clients and deliver expertise and value, not just application development.
      • Focus on building deep knowledge in their chosen vertical, Healthcare.
      • Focus on partnering with clients in this space who are seeking a partner to provide industry knowledge and use this to propel them forward.
      • Look to work with clients seeking a one team philosophy.
      • Avoid clients looking for a cheap provider.
    • Recognizing the initial apprehension to India as a location, they have built a practice in Ontario that serves as a bridge for their offshore team.
    • Cabot overcame initial views and built trust, while integrating the India team in parallel.

    Synergy with Info-Tech approach

    • Preference is partners, not a client/vendor relationship.
    • Single country model is set aside in favor of mix of near and offshore.
    • Culture is a one team approach, not the more adversarial order-taker approach.
    • Goal is to build long-term relationships of value, not task management.

    Results of this approach

    • Cabot is a recognized as a top software development company in many markets across the USA.
    • Cabot continues to drive growth and build referenceable client relationships across North America.

    2.3.1 Profile your best fit

    30 min

    1. Document the list of skills you are seeking from the People Factors – Skills Inventory in Section 1.2 – these represent the skills you are seeking in a partner.
    2. Document the culture you are looking for in a partner with respect to communications and conflict resolution in the culture section of the requirements – this comes from Section 1.3.
    3. Confirm the type of partner you are seeking – nearshore, offshore, or outsourcing based on the sourcing strategy priorities in Section 2.2.
    4. Confirm constraints that the partner must work under based on constraints from your market and competitor factors in Section 1.1.
    5. Confirm your technical requirements in terms of environments, tools, and processes that the vendor must align to from Section 1.4.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output

    All exercises done in Steps 11-1.4 and 2.1-2.2

    Profile of a target partner to drive the RFx Criteria

    Materials Participants

    Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template

    Development leaders

    Deployment team leaders

    Infrastructure leaders

    IT operations leaders

    Product owners

    Project managers

    RFP skills requirement

    People skills required

    Product ownership

    Project management

    Skill

    Skill level required

    Tools / platform requirement

    Details of product management methodology and skills

    Details of firm's project management methodology

    .NET

    Medium

    Windows

    Highly mature, high skill

    Highly mature, high skill

    Java

    High

    Windows

    Low

    High

    RFx cultural characteristics

    Communication strategy

    Conflict resolution

    Organization / management

    Communication mediums supported

    Frequency of meetings expected

    Conflict resolutions strategies used at the firm

    Management methodology

    Face to face

    Weekly

    Collaborative

    Online

    Daily

    Hierarchical with manager

    Hierarchical

    RFx market constraints

    Constraints

    Partner proposal

    Constraint type

    Restrictions

    Market size required for

    Reasoning

    Data residency

    Data must stay in Canada for Canadian Gov't clients

    5% Canada public sector

    Competitive

    Offshoring dev means competition can take advantage

    95% Clients

    Need strategy to show data and leadership in NA, but delivering more innovation at lower cost by going offshore

    RFx technical requirements

    Technical environments

    Infrastructure

    Alignment of SDLC

    Tools required for development team

    Access control software required

    Infrastructure location

    Number of environments from development to production

    .Net Visual Studio

    Microsoft

    Azure

    4

    RFx scope of services

    Work being sourced

    Team sizing

    Work being sourced

    Skill level required

    Average size of release

    Releases per year

    Java development of new product

    High

    3-month development

    6

    .NET staff augmentation

    Medium

    ½-month development

    12

    Phase 3

    Choose the partner that will best enable you to move forward as one integrated team.

    Introspection

    1.1 Assess your market factors

    1.2 Determine your people factors

    1.3 Review your current culture

    1.4 Document your technical factors

    Profiling

    2.1 Recall your sourcing strategy

    2.2 Prioritize your company factors

    2.3 Create target profile

    Partner selection

    3.1 Review your RFx

    3.2 Identify target vendors

    3.3 Evaluate vendor

    responses

    Implementation

    4.1 Engage partner to choose contract mechanism

    4.2 Engage partner team to define goals

    4.3 Choose your success

    metrics

    For more details on Partner Selection, please refer to our research blueprint entitled Select an ERP Partner

    This phase will help you define your RFx for your provider search

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Vendor Management Team

    IT Leadership

    Finance Team

    Finding the right fit should always come before rates to determine value

    The right fit

    Determined in previous activities

    Negotiating will eventually bring the two together

    Value

    Rates

    Determined by skill and location

    Statement of Work (SOW) quality

    A quality SOW is the result of a quality RFI/RFP (RFx).

    The process up to now has been gathering the materials needed to build a quality RFx. Take this opportunity to review the outputs of the preceding activities to ensure that:

    • All the right stake holders have been engaged.
    • The requirements are complete.

    Info-Tech’s RFP Review as a Service looks for key items to ensure your RFx will generate quality responses and SOWs.

    • Is it well-structured with a consistent use of fonts and bullets?
    • Is it laid out in sections that are easily identifiable and progress from high-level to more detailed information?
    • Can a vendor quickly identify the ten (or fewer) things that are most important to you?

    The image contains a screenshot of the Request for Proposal Review as a Service.

    Step 3.1

    Review your RFx

    Activities

    3.1.1 Select your RFx template

    3.1.2 Finalize your RFx

    3.1.3 Weight each evaluation criteria

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Evaluation team
    • Vendor management team
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed RFx

    Info-Tech’s RFI/RFP process

    Info-Tech has well-established vendor management templates and practices

    • Identify Need
    • Define Business Requirements
    • Gain Business Authorization
    • Perform RFI/RFP
    • Negotiate Agreement
    • Purchase Goods and Services
    • Assess and Measure Performance

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    You’ll want to customize templates for your organization, but we strongly suggest that you take whatever you feel best meets your needs from both the long- and short-form RFPs presented in this blueprint.

    The secret to managing an RFP is to make it manageable. And the secret to making an RFP manageable is to treat it like any other aspect of business – by developing a process. With a process in place, you are better able to handle whatever comes your way, because you know the steps you need to follow to produce a top-notch RFP.

    Your RFP process should be tailored to fit the needs and specifics of your organization and IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Create a better RFP process using Info-Tech’s well-established templates and methodology.

    Create a Better RFP Process

    In a hurry? Consider an enhanced RFI instead of an RFP.

    While many organizations rarely use RFIs, they can be an effective tool in the vendor manager’s toolbox when used at the right time in the right way. RFIs can be deployed in competitive targeted negotiations. An enhanced RFI (ERFI) is a two-stage strategy that speeds up the typical RFP process. The first stage is like an RFI on steroids, and the second stage is targeted competitive negotiation.

    Stage 1:

    Create an RFI with all the customary components. Next, add a few additional RFP-like requirements (e.g. operational and technical requirements). Make sure you include a request for budgetary pricing and provide any significant features and functionality requirements so that the vendors have enough information to propose solutions. In addition, allow the vendors to ask questions through your single point of coordination and share answers with all the vendors. Finally, notify the vendors that you will not be doing an RFP – this is it!

    Stage 2:

    Review the vendors’ proposals and select the best two. Negotiate with both vendors and then make your decision.

    The ERFI shortens the typical RFP process, maintains leverage for your organization, and works great with low- to medium-spend items (however your organization defines them). You’ll get clarification on vendors’ competencies and capabilities, obtain a fair market price, and meet your internal clients’ aggressive timelines while still taking steps to protect your organization.

    RFI Template

    The image contains a screenshot of the RFI Template.

    Use this template to create your RFI baseline template. Be sure to modify and configure the template to your organization’s specifications.

    Request for Information Template

    Long-Form RFP Template

    Configure Info-Tech’s Long-Form RFP Template for major initiatives

    The image contains a screenshot of the long-form RFP Template.

    A long-form or major RFP is an excellent tool for more complex and complicated requirements. This example is for a baseline RFP.

    It starts with best-in-class RFP terms and conditions that are essential to maintaining your control throughout the RFP process. The specific requirements for the business, functional, technical, and pricing areas should be included in the exhibits at the end of the template. That makes it easier to tailor the RFP for each deal, since you and your team can quickly identify specific areas that need modification. Grouping the exhibits together also makes it convenient for both your team to review, and the vendors to respond.

    You can use this sample RFP as the basis for your template RFP, taking it all as is or picking and choosing the sections that best meet the mission and objectives of the RFP and your organization.

    Source: Info-Tech’s The Art of Creating a Quality RFP

    Short-Form RFP Template

    Configure Info-Tech’s Short-Form RFP Template for minor or smaller initiatives

    The image contains a screenshot of the Short-Form RFP Template.

    This example is for a less complex RFP that has relatively basic requirements and perhaps a small window in which the vendors can respond. As with the long-form RFP, exhibits are placed at the end of the RFP, an arrangement that saves time for both your team and the vendors. Of course, the short-form RFP contains fewer specific instructions, guidelines, and rules for vendors’ proposal submissions.

    We find that short-form RFPs are a good choice when you need to use something more than a request for quote (RFQ) but less than an RFP running 20 or more pages. It’s ideal, for example, when you want to send an RFP to only one vendor or to acquire items such as office supplies, contingent labor, or commodity items that require significant vendor's risk assessment.

    Source: The Art of Creating a Quality RFP

    3.1.1 Select your RFx template

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, download the RFx templates from the previous three slides.
    2. Review your RFx process as a group. Be sure to include the vendor management team.
    3. Be sure to consider organization-specific procurement guidelines. These can be included. The objective here is to find the template that is the best fit. We will finalize the template in the next activity.
    4. Determine the best template for this project.
    Input Output
    • RFx templates
    • The RFx template that will be used for this project
    Materials Participants
    • Info-Tech’s Enhanced RFI Template, Long-Form RFP Template, and Short-Form RFP Template
    • Vendor management team
    • Project team
    • Project manager

    Finalize your RFx

    Key insights

    Leverage the power of the RFP

    • Too often RFPs fail to achieve their intended purposes, and your organization feels the effects of a poorly created RFP for many years.
    • If you are faced with a single source vendor, you can perform an RFP to one to create the competitive leverage.

    Make the response and evaluation process easier

    • Being strategic in your wording and formatting makes it easier on both parties – easier for the vendors to submit meaningful proposals, and easier for customer teams to evaluate.
    • Create a level playing field to encourage competition. Without multiple proposals, your options are limited and your chances for a successful project plummet.

    Maximize the competition

    • Leverage a pre-proposal conference to resolve vendor questions and to ensure all vendors receive the same answers to all questions. No vendor should have an information advantage.

    Do’s

    • Leverage your team’s knowledge.
    • Document and explain your RFP process to stakeholders and vendors.
    • Include contract terms in your RFP.
    • Measure and manage performance after contract award.
    • Seek feedback from the RFP team on your process and improve it as necessary.

    Don'ts

    • Reveal your budget.
    • Do an RFP in a vacuum.
    • Send an RFP to a vendor your team is not willing to award the business to.
    • Hold separate conversations with candidate vendors during your RFP process.
    • Skimp on the requirements definition to speed the process.
    • Tell the vendor they are selected before negotiating.

    3.1.2 Finalize your RFx

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the selected RFI or RFP template.
    2. This is YOUR document. Modify it to suit the needs of the organization and even add sections from the other RFP templates that are relevant to your project.
    3. Use the Supplementary RFx Material as a guide.
    4. Add the content created in Steps 1 and 2.
    5. Add any organization-specific clauses or requirements.
    6. Have the project team review and comment on the RFP.
    7. Optional: Use Info-Tech’s RFP Review Concierge Service.

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Download the Supplementary RFx Material

    InputOutput
    • RFx template
    • Organizational specific guidelines
    • Materials from Steps 1 and 2
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • Finalized RFx
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Electronic RFP document for editing
    • Vendor management team
    • Project team
    • Project manager

    3.1.2 Bring it all together

    Supplementary RFx Material

    The image contains a screenshot of Supplementary RFx Material.

    Review the sample content to get a feel for how to incorporate the results of the activities you have worked through into the RFx template.

    RFx Templates

    Use one of our templates to build a ready-for-distribution implementation partner RFx tailored to the unique success factors of your implementation.

    Exercises in Steps 1 and 2

    The image contains a screenshot of Exercises in Steps 1 and 2

    Use the material gathered during each activity to inform and populate the implementation partner requirements that are specific for your organization and project.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Long Form RFx template.The image contains a screenshot of the Short Form RFx template.

    3.1.3 Weight each evaluation criteria

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the selected RFI or RFP template.
    2. This is your document. Modify it to suit the needs of the organization and even add sections from the other RFP templates that are relevant to your project.
    3. Use the Supplementary RFx Material as a guide.
    4. Utilize the content defined in Steps 1 and 2.
    5. Add any organization-specific clauses or requirements.
    6. Have the project team review and comment on the RFP.
    7. Optional: Use Info-Tech’s RFP Review Concierge Service.

    Download the Supplementary RFx Material

    InputOutput

    RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Exercises from Steps 1 and 2

    • Weighted scoring tool to evaluate responses
    MaterialsParticipants
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • Vendor management team
    • Project team
    • Project manager

    3.1.3 Apply weight to each evaluation criteria

    Use this tool to weight each critical success factor based on results of the activities within the vendor selection workbook for later scoring results.

    The image contains a screenshot of the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool.

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Step 3.2

    Identify target vendors

    Activities

    3.2.1 Identify target vendors

    3.2.2 Define your RFx timeline

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Vendor management team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Targeted vendor list
    • Initial RFx timeline

    3.2.1 Identify target vendors

    1-3 hours

    1. Based on the profile defined in Step 2.3, research potential partners that fit the profile, starting with those you may have used in the past. From this, build your initial list of vendors to target with your RFx.
    2. Break into smaller groups (or continue as a single group if it is already small) and review each shortlisted vendor to see if they will likely respond to the RFx.
    Input Output
    • Websites
    • Peers
    • Advisory groups
    • A shortlist of vendors to target with your RFx
    Materials Participants
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • CIO
    • Vendor management team
    • Project team
    • Evaluation team

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Define your RFx timeline

    Provider RFx timelines need to be clearly defined to keep the project and participants on track. These projects and processes can be long. Set yourself up for success by identifying the time frames clearly and communicating them to participants.

    1. Current
    • Concurrent ERP product selection
    • RFx preparation
    • Release of RFX
  • Near-term
    • Responses received
    • Scoring responses
    • Shortlisting providers
    • Provider interviews
    • Provider selection
    • Provider contract negotiations
    • Contract with provider
  • Future
    • Initiation of knowledge transfer
    • Joint development period
    • Cutover to provider team

    89% of roadmap views have at least some representation of time. (Roadmunk, n.d.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The true value of time horizons is in dividing your timeline and applying different standards and rules, which allows you to speak to different audiences and achieve different communication objectives.

    3.2.2 Define your RFx timeline

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group identify an appropriate timeline for your RFP process. Info-Tech recommends no less than three months from RFx release to contract signing.

      Keep in mind that you need to allow for time to engage the team and perform some level of knowledge transfer, and to seed the team with internal resources for the initial period.
    2. Leave enough time for vendor responses, interviews, and reference checks.
    3. Once the timeline is finalized, document it and communicate it to the organization.

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Input Output
    • RFx template
    • Provider RFx timeline
    Materials Participants
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Vendor management team
    • Project team
    • Project manager

    Define your RFx timeline

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of an RFx timeline.

    Step 3.3

    Evaluate vendor responses

    Activities

    3.3.1 Evaluate responses

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Evaluation team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Vendor submission scores

    3.3.1 Evaluate responses

    1-3 hours

    1. Use the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool to collect and record the evaluation team's scores for each vendor's response to your RFx.
    2. Then record and compare each team member's scores to rank the vendors' responses.
    3. The higher the score, the closer the fit.

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    InputOutput
    • Vendor responses
    • Vendor presentations
    • Vendor scores
    MaterialsParticipants
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    • Evaluation team

    3.3.1 Score vendor results

    Use the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool to score the vendors' responses to your RFx using the weighted scale from Activity 3.1.3.

    The image contains a screenshot of the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool.

    Download the RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool

    Phase 4

    Measuring the new relationship

    Introspection

    1.1 Assess your market factors

    1.2 Determine your people factors

    1.3 Review your current culture

    1.4 Document your technical factors

    Profiling

    2.1 Recall your sourcing strategy

    2.2 Prioritize your company factors

    2.3 Create target profile

    Partner selection

    3.1 Review your RFx

    3.2 Identify target vendors

    3.3 Evaluate vendor

    responses

    Implementation

    4.1 Engage partner to choose contract mechanism

    4.2 Engage partner team to define goals

    4.3 Choose your success

    metrics

    This phase will allow you to define the relationship with your newly chosen partner, including choosing the right contract mechanism, defining shared goals for the relationship, and selecting the metrics and processes to measure performance.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    IT leadership

    Procurement team

    Product owners

    Project managers

    Implementing the Partner

    Implementing the new partner is an exercise in collaboration

    • Successfully implementing your new partner is an exercise in working together
    1. Define a contract mechanism that is appropriate for the relationship, but is not meant as punitive, contract-based management – this sets you up for failure.
    2. Engage with your team and your partner as one team to build shared, measurable goals
    3. Work with the team to define the metrics and processes by which progress against these goals will be measured
  • Goals, metrics and process should be transparent to the team so all can see how their performance ties to success
  • Make sure to take time to celebrate successes with the whole team as one
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Implement the relationship the same way you want it to work: as one team. Work together on contract mechanism, shared goals, metrics, and performance measurement. This transparency and collaboration will build a one team view, leading to long-term success.

    Step 4.1

    Engage partner to choose contract mechanism

    Activities

    4.1.1 Confirm your contract mechanism

    This step involves the following participants:

    IT leadership

    Procurement team

    Vendor team

    Outcomes of this step

    Contract between the vendor and the firm for the services

    Negotiate agreement

    Evaluate your RFP responses to see if they are complete and if the vendor followed your instructions.

    Then:

    Plan negotiation(s) with one or more vendors based on your questions and opportunities identified during evaluation.

    Select finalist(s).

    Apply selection criteria.

    Resolve vendors' exceptions.

    Negotiate before you select your vendor:

    Negotiating with two or more vendors will maintain your competitive leverage while decreasing the time it takes to negotiate the deal.

    Perform legal reviews as necessary.

    Use sound competitive negotiations principles.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be certain to include any commitments made in the RFP, presentations, and proposals in the agreement, as the standard for an underperforming vendor.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Providing contract terms in an RFP can dramatically reduce time for this step by understanding the vendor’s initial contractual position for negotiation.

    Leverage ITRG's negotiation process research for additional information

    For more details on this process please see our research Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes with a Robust RFP Process

    4.1.1 Confirm your contract mechanism

    30 min

    1. Does the firm have prior experience with this type of sourcing arrangement?
    2. Does the firm have an existing services agreement with the selected partner?
    3. What contract mechanisms have been used in the past for these types of arrangements?
    4. What mechanism was proposed by the partner in their RFP response?

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    Input Output
    • Past sourcing agreements from Procurement
    • Proposed agreement from partner
    • Agreed upon contract mechanism
    Materials Participants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Vendor management group
    • Partner leaders

    Choose the appropriate contract method

    Work being sourced

    Partner proposal

    Agreed-upon mechanism

    Work being sourced

    Vendor management experience with type

    Partner proposed contract method

    Agreed-upon contract method

    Java development team to build new product

    Similar work done with fixed price with another vendor

    Time and materials per scrum team

    Time and materials per scrum team to avoid vendor conflicts inherent in fixed price which limit innovation

    Step 4.2

    Engage partner team to define shared goals

    Activities

    4.2.1 Define your shared goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    IT leadership

    Vendor leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    Shared goals for the team

    Define success and shared goals

    Work together to define how you will measure yourselves.

    One team

    • Treating the new center and the existing team as one team is critical to long-term success.
    • Having a plan that allows for teams to meet frequently face-to-face "get to know you" and "stay connected" sessions will help the team gel.

    Shared goals

    • New group must share common goals and measurements.

    Common understanding

    • New team must have a common understanding and culture on key facets such as:
      • Measurement of quality
      • Openness to feedback and knowledge sharing
      • Culture of collaboration
      • Issue and Risk Management

    4.2.1 Define your shared goals

    30 min

    1. List each item in the scope of work for the sourcing arrangement – e.g. development of product XXX.
    2. For each scope item, detail the benefit expected by the firm – e.g. development cost expected to drop by 10% per year, or customer satisfaction improvement.
    3. For each benefit define how you will measure success – e.g. track cost of development for the development team assigned, or track Customer Satisfaction Survey results.
    4. For each measure, define a target for this year – e.g. 10% decrease over last year's cost, or customer satisfaction improvement from 6 to 7.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Services being procured from RFx
    • Benefits expected from the sourcing strategy
    • Baseline scores for measurements
    • Shared goals agreed upon between team and partner
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Technology leaders
    • Partner leaders

    Define goals collaboratively

    Role and benefit

    Goals and objectives

    Role / work being sourced

    Benefit expected

    Measure of success

    Year over year targets

    Java development team to build new product

    New product to replace aging legacy

    Launch of new product

    Agree on launch schedule and MVP for each release / roadmap

    Step 4.3

    Choose your success metrics

    Activities

    4,3.1 Define metrics and process to monitor

    This step involves the following participants:

    IT leadership

    Product owners

    Project managers

    Vendor leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    Metrics and process to measure performance

    4.3.1 Define metrics and process to monitor

    30 min

    1. For each goal defined and measure of success, break down the measure into quantifiable, measurable factors – e.g. Development cost is defined as all the costs tracked to the project including development, deployment, project management, etc.
    2. For each factor choose the metric that can be reported on – e.g. project actuals.
    3. For each metric define the report and reporting frequency – e.g. monthly project actuals from project manager.

    Download the Select a Sourcing Partner Presentation Template

    InputOutput
    • Development process
    • Deployment process
    • Operations process
    • IT Security policies
    • Documentation of key technical characteristics that need to be part of provider profiling
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Select a Sourcing Partner for Your Development Team Presentation template
    • Development leaders
    • Deployment team leaders
    • Infrastructure leaders
    • IT operations leaders
    • Product owners
    • Project managers

    Agreed-upon metrics

    Goal

    Metrics and process

    Agreed-upon goal

    Year 1 target

    Metric to measure success

    Measurement mechanism

    Deliver roadmap of releases

    3 releases – MVP in roadmap

    Features and stories delivered

    Measure delivery of stories from Jira

    Research Contributor

    The image contains a picture of Alaisdar Graham.

    Alaisdar Graham

    Executive Counsellor

    Info-Tech Research Group

    During Alaisdar’s 35-year career in information and operational technology, Alaisdar has been CIO for public sector organizations and private sector companies. He has been an entrepreneur with his own consultancy and a founder or business advisor with four cyber-security start-ups, Alaisdar has developed experience across a broad range of industries within a number of different countries and become known for his ability to drive business benefits and improvements through the use of technology.

    Alaisdar has worked with CXO-level executives across different businesses. Whether undertaking a digital transformation, building and improving IT functions across your span of control, or helping you create and execute an integrated technology strategy, Alaisdar can provide insight while introducing you to Info-Tech Research Group’s experts. Alaisdar’s experience with organizational turn- around, governance, project, program and portfolio management, change management, risk and security will support your organization’s success.

    Research Contributor

    The image contains a picture of Richard Nachazel.

    Richard Nachazel

    Executive Counsellor

    Info-Tech Research Group

    • Richard has more than 40 years working in various Fortune 500 organizations. His specialties are collaborating with business and IT executives and senior stakeholders to define strategic goals and transform operational protocols, standards, and methodologies. He has established a reputation at multiple large companies for taking charge of critical, high-profile enterprise projects in jeopardy of failure and turning them around. Colleagues and peers recognize his ability to organize enterprise efforts, build, develop, and motivate teams, and deliver outstanding outcomes.
    • Richard has worked as a Global CISO & Head of IT Governance for a Swiss Insurance company, Richard developed and led a comprehensive Cyber-Security Framework that provided leadership and oversight of the cyber-security program. Additionally, he was responsible for their IT Governance Risk & Compliance Operation and the information data security compliance in a complex global environment. Richard’s experience with organizational turn around, governance, risk, and controls, and security supports technology delivery integration with business success. Richard’s ability to engage executive and senior management decision makers and champion vision will prove beneficial to your organization.

    Research Contributor

    The image contains a picture of Craig Broussard.

    Craig Broussard

    Executive Counsellor

    Info-Tech Research Group

    • Craig has over 35 years of IT experience including software development, enterprise system management, infrastructure, and cyber security operations. Over the last 20 years, his focus has been on infrastructure and security along with IT service management. He’s been an accomplished speaker and panelist at industry trade events over the past decade.
    • Craig has served as Global Infrastructure Director for NCH Corporation, VP of Information Technology at ATOS, and earlier in his career as the Global Head of Data Center Services at Nokia Siemens Networks. Craig also worked for MicroSolutions (a Mark Cuban Company). Additionally, Craig received formal consulting training while working for IBM Global Services.
    • Craig’s deep experience across many aspects of IT from Governance through Delivery makes him an ideal partner for Info-Tech members.

    Bibliography

    Offshore, Onshore or Hybrid–Choosing the Best IT Outsourcing Model. (n.d.).
    Offshore Dedicated Development Team – A Compelling Hiring Guide. (n.d.).
    The Three Non-Negotiables Of IT Offshoring. (n.d.). Forbes.
    Top Ten Countries For Offshoring. Forbes, 2004.
    Nearshoring in Europe: Choose the Best Country for IT Outsourcing - The World Financial Review. (n.d.).
    Select an Offshore Jurisdiction. The Best Countries for Business in 2021-2022! | InternationalWealth.info. (n.d.).
    How to Find the Best Country to Set Up an Offshore Company. (n.d.). biz30.
    Akbar, M. A., Alsanad, A., Mahmood, S., & Alothaim, A. (2021). Prioritization-based taxonomy of global software development challenges: A FAHP based analysis. IEEE Access, 9, 37961–37974
    Ali, S. (2018). Practices in Software Outsourcing Partnership: Systematic Literature Review Protocol with Analysis. Journal of Computers, (February), 839–861
    Baird Georgia, A. (2007). MISQ Research Curation on Health Information Technology 2. Progression of Health IT Research in MIS Quarterly. MIS Quarterly, 2007(June), 1–14.
    Akbar, M. A., Alsanad, A., Mahmood, S., & Alothaim, A. (2021). Prioritization-based taxonomy of global software development challenges: A FAHP based analysis. IEEE Access, 9, 37961–37974
    Ali, S. (2018). Practices in Software Outsourcing Partnership: Systematic Literature Review Protocol with Analysis. Journal of Computers, (February), 839–861
    Baird Georgia, A. (2007). MISQ Research Curation on Health Information Technology 2. Progression of Health IT Research in MIS Quarterly. MIS Quarterly, 2007(June), 1–14.
    Carmel, E., & Abbott, P. (2006). Configurations of global software development: offshore versus nearshore. … on Global Software Development for the Practitioner, 3–7.
    Hanafizadeh, P., & Zare Ravasan, A. (2018). A model for selecting IT outsourcing strategy: the case of e-banking channels. Journal of Global Information Technology Management, 21(2), 111–138.
    Ishizaka, A., Bhattacharya, A., Gunasekaran, A., Dekkers, R., & Pereira, V. (2019). Outsourcing and offshoring decision making. International Journal of Production Research, 57(13), 4187–4193.
    Jeong, J. J. (2021). Success in IT offshoring: Does it depend on the location or the company? Arxiv.
    Joanna Minkiewicz, J. E. (2009). Deakin Research Online Online. 2007, Interrelationships between Innovation and Market Orientation in SMEs, Management Research News, Vol. 30, No. 12, Pp. 878-891., 30(12), 878–891.

    Bibliography

    King, W. R., & Torkzadeh, G. (2016). Special Issue Information Systems Offshoring : Research Status and Issues. MIS Quarterly, 32(2), 205–225.
    Kotlarsky, J., & Oshri, I. (2008). Country attractiveness for offshoring and offshore outsourcing: Additional considerations. Journal of Information Technology, 23(4), 228–231.
    Lehdonvirta, V., Kässi, O., Hjorth, I., Barnard, H., & Graham, M. (2019). The Global Platform Economy: A New Offshoring Institution Enabling Emerging-Economy Microproviders. Journal of Management, 45(2), 567–599.
    Mahajan, A. (2018). Risks and Benefits of Using Single Supplier in Software Development. Oulu University of Applied Sciences. Retrieved from
    Murberg, D. (2019). IT Offshore Outsourcing: Best Practices for U.S.-Based Companies. University of Oregon Applied Information Management, 1277(800), 824–2714.
    Nassimbeni, G., Sartor, M., & Dus, D. (2012). Security risks in service offshoring and outsourcing. Industrial Management and Data Systems, 112(3), 405–440.
    Olson, G. M., & Olson, J. S. (2000). Distance matters. Human-Computer Interaction, 15(2–3), 139–178.
    Pilkova, A., & Holienka, M. (2018). Home-Based Business in Visegrad Countries: Gem Perspective. Innovation Management, Entrepreneurship and Sustainability 2018 Proceedings of the 6th International Conference.
    Rahman, H. U., Raza, M., Afsar, P., Alharbi, A., Ahmad, S., & Alyami, H. (2021). Multi-criteria decision making model for application maintenance offshoring using analytic hierarchy process. Applied Sciences (Switzerland), 11(18).
    Rahman, H. U., Raza, M., Afsar, P., Khan, H. U., & Nazir, S. (2020). Analyzing factors that influence offshore outsourcing decision of application maintenance. IEEE Access, 8, 183913–183926.
    Roadmunk. What is a product roadmap? Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed 12 Oct. 2021.
    Rottman, J. W., & Lacity, M. C. (2006). Proven practices for effectively offshoring IT work. MIT Sloan Management Review.
    Smite, D., Moe, N. B., Krekling, T., & Stray, V. (2019). Offshore Outsourcing Costs: Known or Still Hidden? Proceedings - 2019 ACM/IEEE 14th International Conference on Global Software Engineering, ICGSE 2019, 40–47.
    Welsum, D. Van, & Reif, X. (2005). Potential Offshoring: Evidence from Selected OECD Countries. Brookings Trade Forum, 2005(1), 165–194.
    Zhang, Y., Liu, S., Tan, J., Jiang, G., & Zhu, Q. (2018). Effects of risks on the performance of business process outsourcing projects: The moderating roles of knowledge management capabilities. International Journal of Project Management, 36(4), 627–639.

    Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes Q2-Q3 2023

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}297|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    At Info-Tech, we take pride in our research and have established the most rigorous publication standards in the industry. However, we understand that engaging with all our analysts to gauge the future may not always be possible. Hence, we have curated some compelling recently published research along with forthcoming research insights to assist you in navigating the next quarter.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    We offer a quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes deck that thoroughly summarizes our recently published research, supplying decision makers with valuable insights and best practices to make informed and effective decisions. Our research is supported by our team of seasoned analysts with decades of experience in the IT industry.

    By leveraging our research, you can stay updated with the latest trends and technologies, giving you an edge over the competition and ensuring the optimal performance of your IT department. This way, you can make confident decisions that lead to remarkable success and improved outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    • Enhance preparedness for future market trends and developments: Keep up to date with the newest trends and advancements in the IT sector to be better prepared for the future.
    • Enhance your decision making: Acquire valuable information and insights to make better-informed, confident decisions.
    • Promote innovation: Foster creativity, explore novel perspectives, drive innovation, and create new products or services.

    Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes Q2/Q3 2023 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Q3 2023 Deck – An overview of our Research Agenda Outcome for Q2 and Q3 of 2023.

    A guide to our top research published to date for 2023 (Q2/Q3).

    • Info-Tech Quarterly Research Agenda Outcomes for Q2/Q3 2023
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Featured Research Projects 2023 (Q2/Q3)

    “Here are my selections for the top research projects of the last quarter.”

    Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Gord Harrison
    Head of Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    CIO

    01
    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

    02
    CIO Priorities 2023

    Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

    03
    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    If integrated risk is your destination, your IT risk taxonomy is the road to get you there.

    04
    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

    05
    Effective IT Communications

    Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

    06
    Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT

    Select flexible work options that balance organizational and employee needs to drive engagement and improve attraction and retention.

    07
    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

    08
    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

    Applications

    09
    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Your implementation doesn't start with technology but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

    10
    Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy

    As you scale your business automations, focus on what matters most.

    11
    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    Security

    12
    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

    Adapt to changes in the cyber insurance market.

    13
    Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

    Focus first on business value.

    Infrastructure & Operations

    14
    Automate IT Asset Data Collection

    Acquire and use discovery tools wisely to populate, update, and validate the data in your ITAM database.

    Industry | Retail

    15
    Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail

    AI prominence across the enterprise value chain.

    Industry | Education

    16
    Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education

    Bans aren't the answer, but what is?

    Industry | Wholesale

    17
    Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture

    Business capability maps, value streams, and strategy maps for the wholesale industry.

    Industry | Retail Banking

    18
    Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking

    A strategy for modernizing mainframe systems to meet the needs of modern retail banking.

    Industry | Utilities

    19
    Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities

    Building upon the collective wisdom for the art of the possible.

    Build Your Generative AI Roadmap

    Generative AI is here, and it's time to find its best uses – systematically and responsibly.

    CIO
    Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Bill Wong, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Bill Wong
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Build Your Generative AI Roadmap' research.

    Sample of the 'Build Your Generative AI Roadmap' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    CIO Priorities 2023

    Engage cross-functional leadership to seize opportunity while protecting the organization from volatility.

    CIO
    Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Brian Jackson, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Brian Jackson
    Principal Research Director

    Download this report or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'CIO Priorities 2023' report.

    Sample of the 'CIO Priorities 2023' report.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    If integrated risk is your destination, your IT risk taxonomy is the road to get you there.

    CIO
    Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Donna Bales, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Build an IT Risk Taxonomy' research.

    Sample of the 'Build an IT Risk Taxonomy' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience

    Beyond the hype: How it can help you become more customer-focused?

    CIO
    Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Manish Jain, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Manish Jain
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience' research.

    Sample of the 'Navigate the Digital ID Ecosystem to Enhance Customer Experience' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Effective IT Communications

    Empower IT employees to communicate well with any stakeholder across the organization.

    CIO
    People & Leadership

    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director

    Photo of Diana MacPherson, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Effective IT Communications' research.

    Sample of the 'Effective IT Communications' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT

    Select flexible work options that balance organizational and employee needs to drive engagement and improve attraction and retention.

    CIO
    People & Leadership

    Photo of Jane Kouptsova, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Jane Kouptsova
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT' research.

    Sample of the 'Develop a Targeted Flexible Work Program for IT' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

    CIO
    Value & Performance

    Photo of Mike Tweedle, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Mike Tweedle
    Practice Lead

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Effectively Manage CxO Relations' research.

    Sample of the 'Effectively Manage CxO Relations' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

    CIO
    Value & Performance

    Photo of Diana MacPherson, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics' research.

    Sample of the 'Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook

    Your implementation doesn't start with technology but with an effective plan that the team can align on.

    Applications
    Business Processes

    Photo of Ricardo de Oliveira, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Ricardo de Oliveira
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook' research.

    Sample of the 'Build Your Enterprise Application Implementation Playbook' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy

    As you scale your business automations, focus on what matters most.

    Applications
    Business Processes

    Photo of Andrew Kum-Seun, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy' research.

    Sample of the 'Develop Your Value-First Business Process Automation Strategy' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment

    Agile and requirements management are complementary, not competitors.

    Applications
    Application Development

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment' research.

    Sample of the 'Manage Requirements in an Agile Environment' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy

    Adapt to changes in the cyber insurance market.

    Security
    Security Risk, Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Logan Rohde, Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Logan Rohde
    Senior Research Analyst

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy' research.

    Sample of the 'Assess Your Cybersecurity Insurance Policy' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

    Focus first on business value.

    Security
    Security Risk, Strategy & Governance

    Photo of Michel Hébert, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Michel Hébert
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program' research.

    Sample of the 'Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Automate IT Asset Data Collection

    Acquire and use discovery tools wisely to populate, update, and validate the data in your ITAM database.

    Infrastructure & Operations
    I&O Process Management

    Photo of Andrew Sharp, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Andrew Sharp
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Automate IT Asset Data Collection' research.

    Sample of the 'Automate IT Asset Data Collection' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail

    AI prominence across the enterprise value chain.

    Industry Coverage
    Retail

    Photo of Rahul Jaiswal, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rahul Jaiswal
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail' research.

    Sample of the 'Leveraging AI to Create Meaningful Insights and Visibility in Retail' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education

    Bans aren't the answer, but what is?

    Industry Coverage
    Education

    Photo of Mark Maby, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Mark Maby
    Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education' research.

    Sample of the 'Understand the Implications of Generative AI in Education' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture

    Business capability maps, value streams, and strategy maps for the wholesale industry.

    Industry Coverage
    Wholesale

    Photo of Rahul Jaiswal, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rahul Jaiswal
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture' research.

    Sample of the 'Wholesale Industry Business Reference Architecture' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking

    A strategy for modernizing mainframe systems to meet the needs of modern retail banking.

    Industry Coverage
    Retail Banking

    Photo of David Tomljenovic, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    David Tomljenovic
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking' research.

    Sample of the 'Mainframe Modernization for Retail Banking' research.

    Logo for Info-Tech.

    Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities

    Building upon the collective wisdom for the art of the possible.

    Industry Coverage
    Utilities

    Photo of Jing Wu, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Jing Wu
    Principal Research Director

    Download this research or book an analyst call on this topic

    Sample of the 'Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities' research.

    Sample of the 'Data Analytics Use Cases for Utilities' research.

    Sneak Peaks: Research coming in next quarter!

    “Next quarter we have a big lineup of reports and some great new research!”

    Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Gord Harrison
    Head of Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    1. Build MLOps and Engineering for AI and ML

      Enabling you to develop your Engineering and ML Operations to support your current & planned use cases for AI and ML.
    2. Leverage Gen AI to Improve Your Test Automation Strategy

      Enabling you to embed Gen AI to assist your team during testing broader than Gen AI compiling code.
    3. Make Your IT Financial Data Accessible, Reliable, and Usable

      This project will provide a recipe for bringing IT's financial data to a usable state through a series of discovery, standardization, and policy-setting actions.
    4. Implement Integrated AI Governance

      Enabling you to implement best-practice governance principles when implementing Gen AI.
    5. Develop Exponential IT Capabilities

      Enabling you to understand and develop your strategic Exponential IT capabilities.
    6. Build Your AI Strategy and Roadmap

      This project will provide step-by-step guidance in development of your AI strategy with an AI strategy exemplar.
    7. Priorities for Data Leaders in 2024 and Beyond

      This report will detail the top five challenges expected in the upcoming year and how you as the CDAO can tackle them.
    8. Deploy AIOps More Effectively

      This research is designed to assess the process maturity of your IT operations and help identify pain pains and opportunities for AI deployment within your IT operations.
    9. Design Your Edge Computing Architecture

      This research will provide deployment guidelines and roadmap to address your edge computing needs.
    10. Manage Change in the AI-Enabled Enterprise

      Managing change is complex with the disruptive nature of emerging tech like AI. This research will assist you from an organizational change perspective.
    11. Assess the Security and Privacy Impacts of Your AI Vendors

      This research will allow you to enhance transparency, improve risk management, and ensure the security and privacy of data when working with AI vendors.
    12. Prepare Your Board for AI Disruption

      This research will arm you with tools to educate your board on the impact of Gen AI, addressing the potential risks and the potential benefits.

    Info-Tech Research Leadership Team

    “We have a world-class team of experts focused on providing practical, cutting-edge IT research and advice.”

    Photo of Gord Harrison, Head of Research & Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Gord Harrison
    Head of Research & Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Photo of Jack Hakimian, Senior Vice President, Research Development, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President
    Research Development

    Photo of Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy Research, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Aaron Shum
    Vice President
    Security & Privacy Research

    Photo of Larry Fretz, Vice President, Industry Research, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Larry Fretz
    Vice President
    Industry Research

    Photo of Mark Tauschek, Vice President, Research Fellowships, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Mark Tauschek
    Vice President
    Research Fellowships

    Photo of Tom Zehren, Chief Product Officer, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Tom Zehren
    Chief Product Officer

    Photo of Rick Pittman, Vice President, Advisory Quality & Delivery, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Rick Pittman
    Vice President
    Advisory Quality & Delivery

    Photo of Nora Fisher, Vice President, Shared Services, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Nora Fisher
    Vice President
    Shared Services

    Photo of Becca Mackey, Vice President, Workshops, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Becca Mackey
    Vice President
    Workshops

    Photo of Geoff Nielson, Senior Vice President, Global Services & Delivery, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Geoff Nielson
    Senior Vice President
    Global Services & Delivery

    Photo of Brett Rugroden, Senior Vice President, Global Market Programs, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Brett Rugroden
    Senior Vice President
    Global Market Programs

    Photo of Hannes Scheidegger, Senior Vice President, Global Public Sector, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Hannes Scheidegger
    Senior Vice President
    Global Public Sector

    About Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Research Group produces unbiased and highly relevant research to help leaders make strategic, timely, and well-informed decisions. We partner closely with your teams to provide everything they need, from actionable tools to analyst guidance, ensuring they deliver measurable results for the organization.

    Sample of the IT Management & Governance Framework.

    Drive Measurable Results

    Our world-class leadership team is continually focused on building disruptive research and products that drive measurable results and save money.

    Info-Tech logo.

    Better Research Than Anyone

    Our team of experts is composed of the optimal mix of former CIOs, CISOs, PMOs, and other IT leaders and IT and management consultants as well as academic researchers and statisticians.

    Dramatically Outperform Your Peers

    Leverage Industry Best Practices

    We enable over 30,000 members to share their insights and best practices that you can use by having direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team.

    Become an Info-Tech influencer:

    • Help shape our research by talking with our analysts.
    • Discuss the challenges, insights, and opportunities in your chosen areas.
    • Suggest new topic ideas for upcoming research cycles.

    Contact
    Jack Hakimian
    jhakimian@infotech.com

    We interview hundreds of experts and practitioners to help ensure our research is practical and focused on key member challenges.

    Why participate in expert interviews?

    • Discuss market trends and stay up to date.
    • Influence Info-Tech's research direction with your practical experience.
    • Preview our analysts' perspectives and preliminary research.
    • Build on your reputation as a thought leader and research contributor.
    • See your topic idea transformed into practical research.

    Thank you!

    Join us at our webinars to discuss more topics.

    For information on Info-Tech's products and services and to participate in our research process, please contact:

    Jack Hakimian
    jhakimian@infotech.com

    Cost and Budget Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}8|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}8|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}8|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000
    • member rating average days saved: 5
    • Parent Category Name: Financial Management
    • Parent Category Link: /financial-management

    The challenge

    • IT is seen as a cost center in most organizations. Your IT spend is fuelled by negative sentiment instead of contributing to business value.

    • Budgetary approval is difficult, and in many cases, the starting point is lowering the cost-income ratio without looking at the benefits.
    • Provide the right amount of detail in your budgets to tell your investment and spending story. Align it with the business story. Too much detail only increases confusion, too little suspicion.

    Our advice

    Insight

    An effective IT budget complements the business story with how you will achieve the expected business targets.

    • Partner with the business to understand the strategic direction of the company and its future needs.
    • Know your costs and the value you will deliver.
    • Present your numbers and story clearly and credibly. Excellent delivery is part of good communication.
    • Guide your company by clearly explaining the implications of different choices they can make.

    Impact and results 

    • Get a head-start on your IT forecasting exercise by knowing the business strategy and what initiatives they will launch.
    • The coffee corner works! Pre-sell your ideas in quick chats.
    • Do not make innovation budgets bigger than they need to be. It undermines your credibility.
    • You must know your history to accurately forecast your IT operations cost and how it will evolve based on expected business changes.
    • Anticipate questions. IT discretionary proposals are often challenged. Think ahead of time about what areas your business partners will focus on and be ready with researched and credible responses.
    • When you have an optimized budget, tie further cost reductions to consequences in service delivery or deferred projects, or a changed operating model.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows you why you should develop a budget based on value delivery. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in completing this.

    Plan for budget success

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 1: Plan (ppt)
    • IT Budget Interview Guide (doc)

    Build your budget.

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 2: Build (ppt)
    • IT Cost Forecasting Tool (xls)

    Sell your budget

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 3: Sell (ppt)
    • IT Budget Presentation (ppt)

     

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}82|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Over 80% of CXOs experience frustration with IT’s failure to deliver business value.
    • Sixty percent of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.
    • Sixty percent of IT professionals know there is an opportunity to run applications more efficiently, eliminating wasteful or low-value activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations need to better align their application strategy with their business strategy as they proceed through tactical initiatives.
    • Application strategies provide guidance on how they will help the organization survive and thrive.

    Impact and Result

    Aligning your business with applications through your strategy will not only increase business satisfaction but also help to ensure you’re delivering applications that enable the organization’s goals.

    Review Your Application Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should have an application strategy and why you should use Info-Tech’s approach to review it. Learn how we can support you in completing this strategy and review.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review your strategy

    This review guide provides organizations with a detailed assessment of their application strategy, ensuring that the applications enable the business strategy so that the organization can be more effective.The assessment provides criteria and exercises to provide actionable outcomes.

    • Application Strategy Assessment Tool
    • Application Strategy Action Plan Report Template
    • Application Strategy Sample Action Plan Report
    [infographic]

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}196|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Global regulatory climate disclosure requirements are still evolving and are not consistent.
    • Sustainability is becoming a corporate imperative, but IT’s role is not fully clear.
    • The environmental, social, and governance (ESG) data challenge is large and continually expanding in scope.
    • Collecting the necessary data and managing ethical issues across supply chains is a daunting task.
    • Communicating long-term value is difficult when customer and employee expectations are shifting.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An organization's approach to ESG cannot be static or tactical. It is a moving landscape that requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. Cross-functional coordination is essential in order to be ready to respond to changing conditions.
    • Even though the ESG data requirements are large and continually expanding in scope, many organizations have well-established data frameworks and governance practices in place to meet regulatory obligations such as Sarbanes–Oxley that should used as a starting point.

    Impact and Result

    • Organizations will have greater success if they focus their ESG program efforts on the ESG factors that will have a material impact on their company performance and their key stakeholders.
    • Continually evaluating the evolving ESG landscape and its impact on key stakeholders will enable organizations to react quickly to changing conditions.
    • A successful ESG program requires a collaborative and integrated approach across key business stakeholders.
    • Delivering high-quality metrics and performance indicators requires a flexible and digital data approach, where possible, to enable data interoperability.

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Deck – Learn why sustainability is becoming a key measurement of corporate performance and how to set your organization up for success.

    Understand the foundational components and drivers of the broader concept of sustainability: environmental, social, and governance (ESG) and IT’s roles within an organization’s ESG program. Learn about the functional business areas involved, the roles they play and how they interact with each other to drive program success.

    • The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations Storyboard

    Infographic

    Further reading

    The ESG Imperative and Its Impact on Organizations

    Design to enable an active response to changing conditions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Environmental, social, and governance (ESG) is a corporate imperative that is tied to long-term value creation. An organization's social license to operate and future corporate performance depends on managing ESG factors well.

    Central to an ESG program is having a good understanding of the ESG factors that may have a material impact on enterprise value and key internal and external stakeholders. A comprehensive ESG strategy supported by strong governance and risk management is also essential to success.

    Capturing relevant data and applying it within risk models, metrics, and internal and external reports is necessary for sharing your ESG story and measuring your progress toward meeting ESG commitments. Consequently, the data challenges have received a lot of attention, and IT leaders have a role to play as strategic partner and enabler to help address these challenges. However, ESG is more than a data challenge, and IT leaders need to consider the wider implications in managing third parties, selecting tools, developing supporting IT architecture, and ensuring ethical design.

    For many organizations, the ESG program journey has just begun, and collaboration between IT and risk, procurement, and compliance will be critical in shaping program success.

    This is a picture of Donna Bales, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Global regulatory climate disclosure requirements are still evolving and are not consistent.
    • Sustainability is becoming a corporate imperative, but IT's role is not fully clear.
    • The ESG data challenge is large and continually expanding in scope.
    • Collecting the necessary data and managing ethical issues across supply chains is a daunting task.
    • Communicating long-term value is difficult when customer and employee expectations are shifting.

    Common Obstacles

    • The data necessary for data-driven insights and accurate disclosure is often hampered by inaccurate and incomplete primary data.
    • Other challenges include:
      • Approaching ESG holistically and embedding it into existing governance, risk, and IT capabilities.
      • Building knowledge and adapting culture throughout all levels of the organization.
      • Monitoring stakeholder sentiment and keeping strategy aligned to expectations.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use this blueprint to educate yourself on ESG factors and the broader concept of sustainability.
    • Learn about Info-Tech's ESG program approach and use it as a framework to begin your ESG program journey.
    • Identify changes that may be needed in your organizational operating model, strategy, governance, and risk management approach.
    • Discover areas of IT that may need to be prioritized and resourced.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An organization's approach to ESG cannot be static or tactical. ESG is a moving landscape that requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. It must become part of the way you work and enable an active response to changing conditions.

    This is an image of Info-Tech's thoughtmap for eight steps of the ESG Program Journey

    Putting ESG in context

    ESG has moved beyond the tipping point to corporate table stakes

    • In recent years, ESG issues have moved from voluntary initiatives driven by corporate responsibility teams to an enterprise-wide strategic imperative.
    • Organizations are no longer being measured by financial performance but by how they contribute to a sustainable and equitable future, such as how they support sustainable innovation through their business models and their focus on collaboration and inclusion.
    • A corporation's efforts toward sustainability is measured by three components: environmental, social, and governance.

    Sustainability

    The ability of a corporation and broader society to endure and survive over the long term by managing adverse impacts well and promoting positive opportunities.

    This is an image of the United Nation's 17 sustainable goals.

    Source: United Nations

    Putting "E," "S," and "G" in context

    Corporate sustainability depends on managing ESG factors well

    • Environmental, social, and governance are the component pieces of a sustainability framework that is used to understand and measure how an organization impacts or is affected by society as a whole.
    • Human activities, particularly fossil fuel burning since the mid twentieth century, have increased greenhouse gas concentration, resulting in observable changes to the atmosphere, ocean, cryosphere, and biosphere.
    • The E in ESG relates to the positive and negative impacts an organization may have on the environment, such as the energy it takes in and the waste it discharges.
    • The S in ESG is the most ambiguous component in the framework, as social impact relates not only to risks but also prosocial behaviour. It's the most difficult to measure but can have significant financial and reputational impact on corporations if material and poorly managed.
    • The G in ESG is foundational to the realization of S and E. It encompasses how well an organization integrates these considerations into the business and how well the organization engages with key stakeholders, receives feedback, and is transparent with its intentions.

    Common examples of ESG issues include: Environmental: Climate change, greenhouse gas emissions (CHG), deforestation, biodiversity, pollution, water, waste, extended producer responsibility, etc. Social: Customer relations, employee relations, labor, human rights, occupational health and safety, community relations, supply chains, etc. Governance: Board management practices, succession planning, compensation, diversity, equity and inclusion, regulatory compliance, corruption, fraud, data hygiene and security, etc. Source: Getting started with ESG - Sustainalytics

    Understanding the drivers behind ESG

    $30 trillion is expected to be transferred from the baby boomers to Generation Z and millennials over the next decade
    – Accenture

    Drivers

    • The rapid rise of ESG investing
    • The visibility of climate change is driving governments, society, and corporations to act and to initiate and support net zero goals.
    • A younger demographic that has strong convictions and financial influence
    • A growing trend toward mandatory climate and diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) disclosures required by global regulators
    • Recent emphasis by regulators on board accountability and fiduciary duty
    • Greater societal awareness of social issues and sustainability
    • A new generation of corporate leadership that is focused on sustainable innovation

    The evolving regulatory landscape

    Global regulators are mobilizing toward mandatory regulatory climate disclosure

    Canada

    • Canadian Securities Administrators (CSA) NI 51-107 Disclosure of Climate-related Matters

    Europe

    • European Commission, Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation (SFDR)
    • European Commission, EU Supply Chain Act
    • Germany – The German Supply Chain Act (GSCA)
    • Financial Conduct Authority UK, Proposal (DP 21/4) Sustainability Disclosure Requirements and investment labels
    • UK Modern Slavery Act, 2015

    United States

    • Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) 33-11042– The Enhancement and Standardization of Climate-Related Disclosures for Investors
    • SEC 33-11038 Cybersecurity Risk Management, Strategy, Governance, and Incident Disclosure
    • Nasdaq Board Diversity Rule (5605(f))

    New Zealand

    • New Zealand, The Financial Sector (Climate-related Disclosures and Other Matters) Amendment Act 2021

    Begin by setting your purpose

    Consider your role as a corporation in society and your impact on key stakeholders

    • The impact of a corporation can no longer be solely measured by financial impact but also its impact on social good. Corporations have become real-world actors that impact and are affected by the environment, people, and society.
    • An ESG program should start with defining your organization's purpose in terms of corporate responsibility, the role it will play, and how it will endure over time through managing adverse impacts and promoting positive impacts.
    • Corporations should look inward and outward to assess the material impact of ESG factors on their organization and key internal and external stakeholders.
    • Once stakeholders are identified, consider how the ESG factors might be perceived by delving into what matters to stakeholders and what drives their behavior.

    Understanding your stakeholder landscape is essential to achieving ESG goals

    Internal Stakeholders: Board; Management; Employees. External Stakeholders: Activists; Regulators; Customers; Lenders; Government; Investors; Stakeholders; Community; Suppliers

    Assess ESG impact

    Materiality assessments help to prioritize your ESG strategy and enable effective reporting

    • The concept of materiality as it relates to ESG is the process of gaining different perspectives on ESG issues and risks that may have significant impact (both positive and negative) on or relevance to company performance.
    • The objective of a materiality assessment is to identify material ESG issues most critical to your organization by looking a broad range of social and environmental factors. Its purpose is to narrow strategic focus and enable an organization to assess the impact of financial and non-financial risks aggregately.
    • It helps to make the case for ESG action and strategy, assess financial impact, get ahead of long-term risks, and inform communication strategies.
    • Organizations can leverage assessment tools from Sustainalytics or SASB Standards to help assess ESG risks or use guidance or benchmarking information from industry associations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Survey key stakeholders to obtain a more holistic viewpoint of expectations and the industry landscape and gain credibility through the process.

    Use a materiality matrix to understand ESG exposure

    This is an image of a materiality matrix used to understand ESG exposure.

    Example: Beverage Company

    Follow a holistic approach

    To deliver on your purpose, sustainability must be integrated throughout the organization

    • An ESG program cannot be implemented in a silo. It must be anchored on its purpose and supported by a strong governance structure that is intertwined with other functional areas.
    • Effective governance is essential to instill trust, support sound decision making, and manage ESG.
    • Governance extends beyond shareholder rights to include many other factors, such as companies' interactions with competitors, suppliers, and governments. More transparency is sought on:
      • Corporate behavior, executive pay, and oversight of controls.
      • Board diversity, compensation, and skill set.
      • Oversight of risk management, particularly risks related to fraud, product, data, and cybersecurity

    "If ESG is the framework of non-financial risks that may have a material impact on the company's stakeholders, corporate governance is the process by which the company's directors and officers manage those risks."
    – Zurich Insurance

    A pyramid is depicted. The top of the pyramid is labeled Continual Improvement, and the following terms are inside this box. Governance: Strategy; Risk Management; Metrics & Targets. At the bottom of the pyramid is a box with right facing arrows, labeled Transparency and Disclosure. This is Informed by the TCFD Framework

    Governance and organization approach

    There is no one-size-fits-all approach

    47% of companies reported that the full board most commonly oversees climate related risks and opportunities while 20% delegate to an existing board governance committee (EY Research, 2021).

    • The organizational approach to ESG will differ across industry segments and corporations depending on material risks and their upstream and downstream value change. However, the accountability for ESG sits squarely at the CEO and board level.
    • Some organizations have taken the approach of hiring a Chief Sustainability Officer to work alongside the CEO on execution of ESG goals and stakeholder communication, while others use other members of the strategic leadership to drive the desired outcomes.
    Governance Layer Responsibilities
    Board
    • Overall accountability lies with the full board. Some responsibilities may be delegated to newly formed dedicated ESG governance committee.
    Oversight
    Executive leadership
    • Accountable for sustainability program success and will work with CEO to set ESG purpose and goals.
    Oversight and strategic direction
    Management
    • Senior management drives execution; sometimes led by a cross-functional committee.
    Execution

    Strategy alignment

    "74% of finance leaders say that investors increasingly use nonfinancial information in their decision-making."

    – "Aligning nonfinancial reporting..." EY, 2020

    • Like any journey, the ESG journey requires knowing where you are starting from and where you are heading to.
    • Once your purpose is crystalized, identify and surface gaps between where you want to go as an organization (your purpose and goals) and what you need to deliver as an organization to meet the expectations of your internal and external stakeholders (your output).
    • Using the results of the materiality assessment, weigh the risk, opportunities, and financial impact to help prioritize and determine vulnerabilities and where you might excel.
    • Finally, evaluate and make changes to areas of your business that need development to be successful (culture, accountability and board structure, ethics committee, etc.)

    Gap analysis example for delivering reporting requirements

    Organizational Goals

    • Regulatory Disclosure
      • Climate
      • DEI
      • Cyber governance
    • Performance Tracking/Annual Reporting
      • Corporate transparency on ESG performance via social, annual circular
    • Evidence-Based Business Reporting
      • Risk
      • Board
      • Suppliers

    Risk-size your ESG goals

    When integrating ESG risks, stick with a proven approach

    • Managing ESG risks is central to making sound organizational decisions regarding sustainability but also to anticipating future risks.
    • Like any new risk type, ESG risk should be interwoven into your current risk management and control framework via a risk-based approach.
    • Yet ESG presents some new risk challenges, and some risk areas may need new control processes or enhancements.
    NET NEW ENHANCEMENT
    Climate disclosure Data quality management
    Assurance specific to ESG reporting Risk sensing and assessment
    Supply chain transparency tied back to ESG Managing interconnections
    Scenario analysis
    Third-party ratings and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    Integrate ESG risks early, embrace uncertainty by staying flexible, and strive for continual improvement.

    A funnel chart is depicted. The inputs to the funnel are: Strategy - Derive ESG risks from strategy, and Enterprise Risk Appetite. Inside the funnel, are the following terms: ESG; Data; Cyber. The output of the funnel is: Evidence based reporting ESG Insights & Performance metrics

    Managing supplier risks

    Suppliers are a critical input into an organization's ESG footprint

    "The typical consumer company's supply chain ... [accounts] for more than 80% of greenhouse-gas emissions and more than 90% of the impact on air, land, water, biodiversity, and geological resources."
    – McKinsey & Company, 2016

    • Although companies are accustomed to managing third parties via procurement processes, voluntary due-diligence, and contractual provisions, COVID-19 surfaced fragility across global supply chains.
    • The mismanagement of upstream and downstream risks of supply chains can harm the reputation, operations, and financial performance of businesses.
    • To build resiliency to and visibility of supply chain risk, organizations need to adapt current risk management programs, procurement practices, and risk assessment tools and techniques.
    • Procurement departments have an enhanced function, effectively acting as gatekeepers by performing due diligence, evaluating performance, and strengthening the supplier relationship through continual feedback and dialogue.
    • Technologies such as blockchain and IoT are starting to play a more dominant role in supply chain transparency.

    Raw materials are upstream and consumers are downstream.

    "Forty-five percent of survey respondents say that they either have no visibility into their upstream supply chain or that they can see only as far as their first-tier suppliers."
    – "Taking the pulse of shifting supply chains," McKinsey & Company, 2022

    Metrics and targets

    Metrics are key to stakeholder transparency, measuring performance against goals, and surfacing organizational blind spots

    • ESG metrics are qualitative or quantitative insights that measure organizations' performance against ESG goals. Along with traditional business metrics, they assist investors with assessing the long-term performance of companies based on non-financial ESG risks and opportunities.
    • Metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), and key risk indicators (KRIs) are used to measure how ESG factors affect an organization and how an organization may impact any of the underlying issues related to each ESG factor.
    • There are several reporting standards that offer specific ESG performance metrics, such as the Global Reporting Institute (GRI), Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB), and World Economic Forum (WEF).
    • For climate-related disclosures, global regulators are converging on the Task Force for Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD) and the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB).

    Example metrics for ESG factors

    Example metrics for environment include greenhouse gas emissions, water footprint, renewable energy share, and % of recycled material. Example social metrics include rates of injury, proportion of spend on local supplies, and percentage of gender or ethnic groups in management roles. Example governance metrics include annual CEO compensation compared to median, number of PII data breaches, and completed number of supplier assessments.

    The impact of ESG on IT

    IT plays a critical role in achieving ESG goals

    • IT groups have a critical role to play in helping organizations develop strategic plans to meet ESG goals, measure performance, monitor risks, and deliver on disclosure requirements.
    • IT's involvement extends from the CIO providing input at a strategic level to leading the charge within IT to instill new goals and adapt the culture toward one focused on sustainability.
    • To set the tone, CIOs should begin by updating their IT governance structure and setting ESG goals for IT.
    • IT leaders will need to think about resource use and efficiency and incorporate this into their IT strategy.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT leaders need to work collaboratively with risk management to optimize decision making and continually improve ESG performance and disclosure.

    "A great strategy meeting is a meeting of the minds."
    – Max McKeown

    The data challenge

    The ESG data requirement is large and continually expanding in scope

    • To meet ESG objectives, corporations are challenged with collecting non-financial data from across functional business and geographical locations and from their supplier base and supply chains.
    • One of the biggest impediments to ESG implementation is the lack of high-quality data and of mature processes and tools to support data collection.
    • The data challenge is compounded by the availability and usability of data, immature and fragmented standards that hinder comparability, and workflow integration.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep your data model flexible and digital where possible to enable data interoperability.

    A flow chart is depicted. the top box is labeled ESG Program. Below that are Boxes labeled Tactical and Strategic. Below the Tactical Box, is a large X showing a lack of connection to the following points: Duplicative; Inefficient/Costly. Below the box labeled Strategic are the following terms: Data-Driven; Reusable; Digital.

    "You can have data without information, but you cannot have information without data."
    – Daniel Keys Moran

    It's more than a data challenge

    Organizations will rely on IT for execution, and IT leaders will need to be ready

    Data Management: Aggregated Reporting; Supplier Management; Cyber Management; Operational Management; Ethical Design(AI, Blockchain); IT Architecture; Resource Efficiency; Processing & Tooling; Supplier Assessment.

    Top impacts on IT departments

    1. ESG requires corporations to keep track of ESG-related risks of third parties. This will mean more robust assessments and monitoring.
    2. Many areas of ESG are new and will require new processes and tools.
    3. The SEC has upped the ante recently, requiring more rigorous accountability and reporting on cyber incidents.
    4. New IT systems and architecture may be needed to support ESG programs.
    5. Current reporting frameworks may need updating as regulators move to digital.
    6. Ethical design will need to be considered when AI is used to support risk/data management and when it is used as part of product solutions.

    Key takeaways

    • It's critical for organizations to look inward and outward to assess the material impact of ESG factors on their organization and key internal and external stakeholders.
    • ESG requires a flexible, holistic approach across the organization. It must become part of the way you work and enable an active response to changing conditions.
    • ESG introduces new risks that should not be viewed in isolation but interwoven into your current risk management and control framework via a risk-based approach.
    • Identify and integrate risks early, embrace uncertainty by staying flexible, and strive for continual improvement.
    • Metrics are key to telling your ESG story. Place the appropriate importance on the information that will be reported.
    • Recognize that the data challenge is complex and evolving and design your data model to be flexible, interoperable, and digital.
    • IT's role is far reaching, and IT will have a critical part in managing third parties, selecting tools, developing supporting IT architecture, and using ethical design.

    Definitions

    TERM DEFINITON
    Corporate Social Responsibility Management concept whereby organizations integrate social and environmental concerns in their operations and interactions with their stakeholders.
    Chief Sustainability Officer Steers sustainability commitments, helps with compliance, and helps ensure internal commitments are met. Responsibilities may extend to acting as a liaison with government and public affairs, fostering an internal culture, acting as a change agent, and leading delivery.
    ESG An acronym that stands for environment, social, and governance. These are the three components of a sustainability program.
    ESG Standard Contains detailed disclosure criteria including performance measures or metrics. Standards provide clear, consistent criteria and specifications for reporting. Typically created through consultation process.
    ESG Framework A broad contextual model for information that provides guidance and shapes the understanding of a certain topic. It sets direction but does not typically delve into the methodology. Frameworks are often used in conjunction with standards.
    ESG Factors The factors or issues that fall under the three ESG components. Measures the sustainability performance of an organization.
    ESG Rating An aggregated score based on the magnitude of an organization's unmanaged ESG risk. Ratings are provided by third-party rating agencies and are increasingly being used for financing, transparency to investors, etc.
    ESG Questionnaire ESG surveys or questionnaires are administered by third parties and used to assess an organization's sustainability performance. Participation is voluntary.
    Key Risk Indicator (KRI) A measure to indicate the potential presence, level, or trend of a risk.
    Key Performance Indicator (KPI) A measure of deviation from expected outcomes to help a firm see how it is performing.
    Materiality Material topics are topics that have a direct or indirect impact on an organization's ability to create, preserve, or erode economic, environment and social impact for itself and its stakeholder and society as a whole
    Materiality Assessment A materiality assessment is a tool to identify and prioritize the ESG issues most critical to the organization.
    Risk Sensing The range of activities carried out to identify and understand evolving sources of risk that could have a significant impact on the organization (e.g. social listening).
    Sustainability The ability of an organization and broader society to endure and survive over the long term by managing adverse impacts well and promoting positive opportunities.
    Sustainalytics Now part of Morningstar. Sustainalytics provides ESG research, ratings, and data to institutional investors and companies.
    UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) provide an essential methodological foundation for how impacts across all dimensions should be assessed.

    Reporting & standard frameworks

    STANDARD DEFINITION AND FOCUS
    CDP CDP has created standards and metrics for comparing sustainability impact. Focuses on environmental data (e.g. carbon, water, and forests) and on data disclosure and benchmarking.
    (Formally Carbon Disclosure Project) Audience: All stakeholders
    Dow Jones Sustainability Indices (DJSI) Heavy on corporate governance and company performance. Equal balance of economic, environmental, and social.
    Audience: All stakeholders
    Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) International standards organization that has a set of standards to help organizations understand and communicate their impacts on climate change and social responsibility. The standard has a strong emphasis on transparency and materiality, especially on social issues.
    Audience: All stakeholders
    International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) Standard-setting board that sits within the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation. The IFRS Foundation is a not-for-profit, public-interest organization established to develop high-quality, understandable, enforceable, and globally accepted accounting and sustainability disclosure standards.
    Audience: Investor-focused
    United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (UNSDG) Global partnership across sectors and industries to achieve sustainable development for all (17 Global Goals)
    Audience: All stakeholders
    Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB) Industry-specific standards to help corporations select topics that may impact their financial performance. Focus on material impacts on financial condition or operating performance.
    Audience: Investor-focused
    Task Force Of Climate-related Disclosures (TCFD; created by the Financial Stability Board) Standards framework focused on the impact of climate risk on financial and operating performance. More broadly the disclosures inform investors of positive and negative measures taken to build climate resilience and make transparent the exposure to climate-related risk.
    Audience: Investors, financial stakeholders

    Bibliography

    Anne-Titia Bove and Steven Swartz, McKinsey, "Starting at the source: Sustainability in supply chains", 11 November 2016

    Accenture, "The Greater Wealth Transfer – Capitalizing on the intergenerational shift in wealth", 2012

    Beth Kaplan, Deloitte, "Preparing for the ESG Landscape, Readiness and reporting ESG strategies through controllership playbook", 15 February 2022

    Bjorn Nilsson et al, McKinsey & Company, "Financial institutions and nonfinancial risk: How corporates build resilience," 28 February 2022

    Bolden, Kyle, Ernst and Young, "Aligning nonfinancial reporting with your ESG strategy to communicate long-term value", 18 Dec. 2020

    Canadian Securities Administrators, "Canadian securities regulators seek comment on climate-related disclosure requirements", 18 October 2021

    Carol A. Adams et al., Global Risk Institute, "The double-materiality concept, Application and issues", May 2021

    Dunstan Allison-Hope et al, BSR, "Impact-Based Materiality, Why Companies Should-Focus Their Assessments on Impacts Rather than Perception", 3 February 2022

    EcoVadis, "The World's Most Trusted Business Sustainability Ratings",

    Ernst and Young, "Four opportunities for enhancing ESG oversight", 29 June 2021

    Federal Ministry of Labour and Social Affairs, The Act on Corporate Due Diligence Obligations in Supply Chains (Gesetz über die unternehmerischen Sorgfaltspflichten in Lieferketten)", Published into Federal Law Gazette, 22, July 2021

    "What Every Company Needs to Know", Sustainalytics

    Global Risk Institute, The GRI Perspective, "The materiality madness: why definitions matter", 22 February 2022

    John P Angkaw "Applying ERM to ESG Risk Management", 1 August 2022

    Hillary Flynn et al., Wellington Management, "A guide to ESG materiality assessments", June 2022

    Katie Kummer and Kyle Lawless, Ernst and Young, "Five priorities to build trust in ESG", 14 July 2022

    Knut Alicke et al., McKinsey & Company, "Taking the pulse of shifting supply chains", 26 August 2022

    Kosmas Papadopoulos and Rodolfo Arauj. The Harvard School Forum on Corporate Governance, "The Seven Sins of ESG Management", 23 September 2020

    KPMG, Sustainable Insight, "The essentials of materiality assessment", 2014

    Lorraine Waters, The Stack, "ESG is not an environmental issue, it's a data one", 20 May 2021

    Marcel Meyer, Deloitte, "What is TCFD and why does it matter? Understanding the various layers and implications of the recommendations",

    Michael W Peregnne et al., "The Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, The Important Legacy of the Sarbanes Oxley Act," 30 August 2022

    Michael Posner, Forbes, "Business and Human Rights: Looking Ahead To The Challenges Of 2022", 15 December 2021

    Myles Corson and Tony Kilmas, Ernst and Young, "How the CFO can balance competing demands and drive future growth", 3 November 2020

    Novisto, "Navigating Climate Data Disclosure", 2022

    Novisto, "XBRL is coming to corporate sustainability reporting", 17 April 2022

    "Official Journal of the European Union, Regulation (EU) 2019/2088 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 November 2019 on sustainability-related disclosures in the financial services sector", 9 December 2019

    Osler, "ESG and the future of sustainability", Podcast, 01 June 2022

    Osler, "The Rapidly Evolving World of ESG Disclosure: ISSB draft standards for sustainability and climate related disclosures", 19 May 2022

    Sarwar Choudhury and Zach Johnston, Ernst and Young "Preparing for Sox-Like ESG Regulation", 7 June 2022

    Securities and Exchange Commission, "The Enhancement and Standardization of Climate-related Disclosures for Investors", 12 May 2022

    "Securities and Exchange Commission, SEC Proposes Rules on Cybersecurity, Risk Management, Strategy, Governance, and Incident Disclosure by Public Companies, 9 May 2022

    Sean Brown and Robin Nuttall, McKinsey & Company, "The role of ESG and purpose", 4 January 2022

    Statement by Chair Gary Gensler, "Statement on ESG Disclosure Proposal", 25 May 2022

    Svetlana Zenkin and Peter Hennig, Forbes, "Managing Supply Chain Risk, Reap ESG Rewards", 22 June 2022

    Task Force on Climate Related Financial Disclosures, "Final Report, Recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures", June 2017

    World Economic Forum, "Why sustainable governance and corporate integrity are crucial for ESG", 29 July 2022

    World Economic Forum (in collaboration with PwC) "How to Set Up Effective Climate Governance on Corporate Boards, Guiding Principles and questions", January 2019

    World Economic Forum, "Defining the "G" in ESG Governance Factors at the Heart of Sustainable Business", June 2022

    World Economic Forum, "The Risk and Role of the Chief Integrity Officer: Leadership Imperatives in and ESG-Driven World", December 2021

    World Economic Forum, "How to Set Up Effective Climate Governance on Corporate Boards Guiding principles and questions", January 2019

    Zurich Insurance, "ESG and the new mandate for corporate governance", 2022

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}103|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    New technologies such as generative AI, quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics are ushering in an exciting new era of business transformation. By adopting an exponential IT mindset, IT leaders will be able to lead the autonomization of business capabilities.

    To capitalize on this upcoming opportunity, exponential IT leaders will have to become business advisors who unlock exponential value for the business and help mitigate exponential risk.

    Adopt a renewed focus on business outcomes to achieve autonomization

    An exponential IT mindset means that IT leaders will need to take a lead role in transforming business capabilities.

    • Embrace an expanded role as business advisors: CIOs will be tasked with greater responsibility for determining business strategy alongside the C-suite.
    • Know the rewards and mitigate the risks: New value chain opportunities and efficiency gains will create significant ROI. Protect these returns by mitigating higher risks to business continuity, information security, and delivery performance.
    • Plan to fully leverage technologies such as AI: It will be integral for IT to enable autonomous technologies in this new era of exponential technology progress.

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Deck – An introduction to IT’s role in the autonomization era

    The role of IT has evolved throughout the past couple generations to enable fundamental business transformations. In the autonomization era, it will have to evolve again to lead the business through a world of exponential opportunity.

    • Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset Storyboard

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    Thrive through the next paradigm shift

    Executive Summary

    For more than 40 years, information technology has significantly transformed businesses, from the computerization of operations to the digital transformation of business models. As technological disruption accelerates exponentially, a world of exponential business opportunity is within reach.

    Newly emerging technologies such as generative AI, quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics are enabling autonomous business capabilities.

    The role of IT has evolved throughout the past couple generations to enable business transformations. In the autonomization era, it will have to evolve again. IT will have a new mission, an adapted governance structure, innovative capabilities, and an advanced partnership model.

    CIOs embracing exponential IT require a new mindset. Their IT practices will need to progress to the top of the maturity ladder as they make business outcomes their own.

    Over the past two generations, we have witnessed major technology-driven business transformations

    1980s

    Computerization

    The use of computer devices, networks, and applications became widespread in the enterprise. The focus was on improving the efficiency of back-office tasks.

    2000s

    Digitalization

    As the world became connected through the internet, new digitally enabled business models emerged in the enterprise. Orders were now being received online, and many products and services were partially or fully digitized for online fulfillment.

    Recent pandemic measures contributed to a marked acceleration in the digitalization of organizations

    The massive disruption resulting from pandemic measures led businesses to shift to more digital interactions with customers.

    The global average share of customer interactions that are digital went from 36% in December 2019 to 58% in July 2020.

    The global average share of customer interactions that are digital went from 36% to 58% in less than a year.*

    Moreover, companies across business areas have accelerated the digitization of their offerings.

    The global average share of partially or fully digitized products went from 35% in 2019 to 55% in July 2020.

    The global average share of partially or fully digitized products went from 35% to 55% in the same period.*

    The adoption of digitalized business models has accelerated during the pandemic. Post-pandemic, it is unlikely for adoption to recede.

    With more business applications ported to the cloud and more data available online, “digital-first” organizations started to envisage a next wave of automation.

    *Source: “How COVID-19 has pushed companies over the technology tipping point—and transformed business forever,” McKinsey & Company, 2020

    A majority of IT leaders plan to use artificial intelligence within their organizations in 2023

    In August 2022, Info-Tech surveyed 506 IT leaders and asked which tasks would involve AI in their organizations in 2023.

    Graph showing tasks that would involve AI in organizations in 2023.

    We found that 63% of IT leaders plan to use AI within their organizations to automate repetitive, low-level tasks by the end of 2023.

    With the release of the ChatGPT prototype in November 2022, setting a record for the fastest user growth (reaching 100 million active users just two months after launch), we foresee that AI adoption will accelerate significantly and its use will extend to more complex tasks.

    Newly emerging technologies and business realities are ushering in the next business transformation

    1980s

    Computerization

    2000s

    Digitalization

    2020s

    Autonomization

    As digitalization accelerates, a post-pandemic world with a largely online workforce and digitally transformed enterprise business models now enters an era where more business capabilities become autonomous, with humans at the center of a loop* that is gradually becoming larger.

    Deep Learning, Quantum Computing, 5G Networks, Robotics

    * Download Info-Tech’s CIO Trend Report 2019 – Become a Leader in the Loop

    The role of IT needs to evolve as it did through the previous two generations

    1980s

    Computerization

    IT professionals gathered functional requirements from the business to help automate back-office tasks and improve operational efficiency.

    2000s

    Digitalization

    IT professionals acquired business analysis skills and leveraged the SMAC (social, mobile, analytics, and cloud) stack to accelerate the automation of the front office and enable the digital transformation of business models.

    2020s

    Autonomization

    IT professionals will become business advisors and enable the establishment of autonomous yet differentiated business processes and capabilities.

    The autonomization era brings enormous opportunity for organizations, coupled with enormous risk

    Graph of Risk Severity versus Value Opportunity. Autonomization has a high value of opportunity and high risk severity.

    While some analysts have been quick to announce the demise of the IT department and the transition of the role of IT to the business, the budgets that CIOs control have continued to rise steadily over time.

    In a high-risk, high-reward endeavor to make business processes autonomous, the role of IT will continue to be pivotal, because while everyone in the organization will rush to seize the value opportunity, the technology risk will be left for IT to manage.

    Exponential IT represents a necessary change in a CIO’s focus to lead through the next paradigm shift

    EXPONENTIAL RISK

    Autonomous processes will integrate with human-led processes, creating risks to business continuity, information security, and quality of delivery. Supplier power will exacerbate business risks.

    EXPONENTIAL REWARD

    The efficiency gains and new value chains created through artificial intelligence, robotics, and additive manufacturing will be very significant. Most of this value will be realized through the augmentation of human labor.

    EXPONENTIAL DEMAND

    Autonomous solutions for productivity and back-office applications will eventually become commoditized and provided by a handful of large vendors. There will, however, be a proliferation of in-house algorithms and workflows to autonomize the middle and front office, offered by a busy landscape of industry-centric capability vendors.

    EXPONENTIAL IT

    Exponential IT involves IT leading the cognitive reengineering of the organization with evolved practices for:

    • IT governance
    • Asset management
    • Vendor management
    • Data management
    • Business continuity management
    • Information security management

    To succeed, IT will have to adopt different priorities in its mission, governance, capabilities, and partnerships

    Digitalization

    A Connected World

    Progressive IT

    • Mission

      Enable the digital transformation of the business
    • Governance

      Service metrics, security perimeters, business intelligence, compliance management
    • Capabilities

      Service management, business analysis, application portfolio management, data management
    • Partnerships

      Management of technology service agreements

    Autonomization

    An Exponential World

    Exponential IT

    • Mission

      Lead the business through autonomization.
    • Governance

      Outcome-based metrics, zero trust, ESG reporting, digital trust
    • Capabilities

      Experience management, business advisory, enterprise innovation, data differentiation
    • Partnerships

      Management of business capability agreements

    Fortune favors the bold: The CIO now has an opportunity to cement their role as business leader

    Levels of digital maturity.  From bottom: Unstable - inability to consistently deliver basic services, Firefighter - Reliable infrastructure and IT service desk, Trusted Operator - Enablement of business through applications and work orders, Business Partner - Effective delivery of strategic business projects, Innovator - Information and technology as a competitive advantage.

    Research has shown that companies that are more digitally mature have higher growth than the industry average. In these companies, the CIO is part of the executive management team.

    And while the role of the CIO is generally tied to their mandate within the organization, we have seen their role progress from doer to leader as IT climbs the maturity ladder.

    As companies strive to succeed in the next phase of technology-driven transformation, CIOs have an opportunity to demonstrate their business leadership. To do so, they will have to provide exceptionally mature services while owning business targets.

    Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}126|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $61,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Continuous and disruptive database design updates while trying to have one design pattern to fit all use cases.
    • Sub-par performance while loading, retrieving, and querying data.
    • You want to shorten time-to-market of the projects aimed at data delivery and consumption.
    • Unnecessarily complicated database design limits usability of the data and requires knowledge of specific data structures for their effective use.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Evolve your data architecture. Data pipeline is an evolutionary break away from the enterprise data warehouse methodology.
    • Avoid endless data projects. Building centralized all-in-one enterprise data warehouses takes forever to deliver a positive ROI.
    • Facilitate data self-service. Use-case optimized data delivery repositories facilitate data self-service.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand your high-level business capabilities and interactions across them – your data repositories and flows should be just a digital reflection thereof.
    • Divide your data world in logical verticals overlaid with various speed data progression lanes, i.e. build your data pipeline – and conquer it one segment at a time.
    • Use the most appropriate database design pattern for a given phase/component in your data pipeline progression.

    Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Build your data pipeline using the most appropriate data design patterns.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand data progression

    Identify major business capabilities, business processes running inside and across them, and datasets produced or used by these business processes and activities performed thereupon.

    • Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics – Phase 1: Understand Data Progression

    2. Identify data pipeline components

    Identify data pipeline vertical zones: data creation, accumulation, augmentation, and consumption, as well as horizontal lanes: fast, medium, and slow speed.

    • Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics – Phase 2: Identify Data Pipeline Components

    3. Select data design patterns

    Select the right data design patterns for the data pipeline components, as well as an applicable data model industry standard (if available).

    • Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics – Phase 3: Select Data Design Patterns
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Data Progression

    The Purpose

    Identify major business capabilities, business processes running inside and across them, and datasets produced or used by these business processes and activities performed thereupon.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Indicates the ownership of datasets and the high-level data flows across the organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Review & discuss typical pitfalls (and their causes) of major data management initiatives.

    1.2 Discuss the main business capabilities of the organization and how they interact.

    1.3 Discuss the business processes running inside and across business capabilities and the datasets involved.

    1.4 Create the Enterprise Business Process Model (EBPM).

    Outputs

    Understanding typical pitfalls (and their causes) of major data management initiatives.

    Business capabilities map

    Business processes map

    Enterprise Business Process Model (EBPM)

    2 Identify Data Pipeline Components

    The Purpose

    Identify data pipeline vertical zones: data creation, accumulation, augmentation, and consumption, as well as horizontal lanes: fast, medium, and slow speed.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design the high-level data progression pipeline.

    Activities

    2.1 Review and discuss the concept of a data pipeline in general, as well as the vertical zones: data creation, accumulation, augmentation, and consumption.

    2.2 Identify these zones in the enterprise business model.

    2.3 Review and discuss multi-lane data progression.

    2.4 Identify different speed lanes in the enterprise business model.

    Outputs

    Understanding of a data pipeline design, including its zones.

    EBPM mapping to Data Pipeline Zones

    Understanding of multi-lane data progression

    EBPM mapping to Multi-Speed Data Progression Lanes

    3 Develop the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Select the right data design patterns for the data pipeline components, as well as an applicable data model industry standard (if available).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Use of appropriate data design pattern for each zone with calibration on the data progression speed.

    Activities

    3.1 Review and discuss various data design patterns.

    3.2 Discuss and select the data design pattern selection for data pipeline components.

    3.3 Discuss applicability of data model industry standards (if available).

    Outputs

    Understanding of various data design patterns.

    Data Design Patterns mapping to the data pipeline.

    Selection of an applicable data model from available industry standards.

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}456|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Organizations have service duplications for unique needs. These duplications increase business expenditure.
    • Lack of collaboration between business units to share their services increases business cost and reduces business units’ faith to implement shared services.
    • Transitioning infrastructure to shared services is challenging for many organizations. It requires an accurate planning and efficient communication between participating business units.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify your current process, tool, and people capabilities before implementing shared services. Understand the financial compensations prior to implementation and assess if your organization is ready for transitioning to shared services model.
    • Do not implement shared services when the nature of the services differs greatly between business units.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand benefits of shared services for the business and determine whether transitioning to shared services would benefit the organization.
    • Identify the best implementation plan based on goals, needs, and services.
    • Build a shared-services process to manage the plan and ensure its success.

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services Research & Tools

    Start here – Read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement shared services, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Conduct gap analysis

    Identify benefits of shared services to your organization and define implementation challenges.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 1: Conduct Gap Analysis
    • Shared Services Implementation Executive Presentation
    • Shared Services Implementation Business Case Template
    • Shared Services Implementation Assessment Tool

    2. Choose the right path

    Identify your process and staff capabilities and discover which services will be transitioned to shared services plan. It will also help you to figure out the best model to choose.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 2: Choose the Right Path
    • Sample Enterprise Services

    3. Plan the transition

    Discuss an actionable plan to implement shared services to track the project. Walk through a communication plan to document the goals, progress, and expectations with customer stakeholders.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 3: Plan the Transition
    • Shared Services Implementation Roadmap Tool
    • Shared Services Implementation Customer Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Challenges

    The Purpose

    Establish the need for change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set a clear understanding about benefits of shared services to your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your organization’s main drivers for using a shared services model.

    1.2 Define if it is beneficial to implement shared services.

    Outputs

    Shared services mission

    Shared services goals

    2 Assess Your Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Become aware of challenges to implement shared services and your capabilities for such transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discover the primary challenges for transitioning to shared services, eliminate resistance factors, and identify your business potentials for implementation.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify your organization’s resistance to implement shared services.

    2.2 Assess process and people capabilities.

    Outputs

    Shared Services Business Case

    Shared Services Assessment

    3 Define the Model

    The Purpose

    Determine the shared services model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the core services to be shared and the best model that fits your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Define core services that will be moved to shared services.

    3.2 Assess different models of shared services and pick the one that satisfies your goals and needs.

    Outputs

    List of services to be transferred to shared services

    Shared services model

    4 Implement and Communicate

    The Purpose

    Define and communicate the tasks to be delivered.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confidently approach key stakeholders to make the project a reality.

    Activities

    4.1 Define the roadmap for implementing shared services.

    4.2 Make a plan to communicate changes.

    Outputs

    List of initiatives to reach the target state, strategy risks, and their timelines

    Draft of a communication plan

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}493|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourced projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and the quality of support. 
    • Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and a decrease of end-user satisfaction.
    • A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and return the confidence of end users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Outsourcing is easy. Realizing the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.
    • You don’t need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.
    • If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that it comes at a cost. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don’t end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Impact and Result

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gain.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Deck – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a strategy for efficient service desk outsourcing.

    This storyboard will help you craft a project charter, create an RFP, and outline strategies to build a long-term relationship with the vendor.

    • Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk – Storyboard
    • Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    2. Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template and Requirements Library – Best-of-breed templates to help you determine processes and build a strategy to outsource them.

    These templates will help you determine your service desk requirements and document your proposed service desk outsourcing strategy.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template

    3. Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template – A structured document to help you outline expectations and communicate requirements to managed service providers.

    This template will allow you to create a detailed RFP for your outsourcing agreement, document the statement of work, provide service overview, record exit conditions, and document licensing model and estimated pricing.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    4. Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template and Scoring Tool – Materials to help you conduct efficient briefings and select the best vendor to fulfill your service desk requirements.

    Use the Reference Interview Template to outline a list of questions for interviewing current/previous customers of your candidate vendors. These interviews will help you with unbiased vendor scoring. The RFP Vendor Scoring Tool will help you facilitate vendor briefings with your list of questions and score candidate vendors efficiently through quantifying evaluations.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Outsource services with your eyes wide open.

    Cost reduction has traditionally been an incentive for outsourcing the service desk. This is especially the case for organizations that don't have minimal processes in place and those that need resources and skills to fill gaps.

    Although cost reduction is usually the main reason to outsource the service desk, in most cases service desk outsourcing increases the cost in a short run. But without a proper model, you will only outsource your problems rather than solving them. A successful outsourcing strategy follows a comprehensive plan that defines objectives, assigns accountabilities, and sets expectations for service delivery prior to vendor outreach.

    For outsourcing the service desk, you should plan ahead, work as a group, define requirements, prepare a strong RFP, and contemplate tension metrics to ensure continual improvement. As you build a project charter to outline your strategy for outsourcing your IT services, ensure you focus on better customer service instead of cost optimization. Ensure that the outsourcer can support your demands, considering your long-term achievement.

    Think about outsourcing like a marriage deed. Take into account building a good relationship before beginning the contract, ensure to include expectations in the agreement, and make it possible to exit the agreement if expectations are not satisfied or service improvement is not achieved.

    This is a picture of Mahmoud Ramin, PhD, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourcing projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and quality of support.

    Common Obstacles

    Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and the decrease of end-user satisfaction.

    A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and reestablish the confidence of end users.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gains.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that need to:

    • Outsource the service desk or portions of service management to improve service delivery.
    • Improve and repatriate existing outsourcing outcomes by becoming more engaged in the management of the function. Regular reviews of performance metrics, staffing, escalation, knowledge base content, and customer satisfaction are critical.
    • Understand the impact that outsourcing would have on the service desk.
    • Understand the potential benefits that outsourcing can bring to the organization.

    This image contains a donut chart with the following information: Salaries and Benefits - 68.50%; Technology - 9.30%; Office Space and Facilities Expense - 14.90%; Travel, Training, and Office Supplies - 7.30%

    Source: HDI 2017

    About 68.5% of the service desk fund is allocated to agent salaries, while only 9.3% of the service desk fund is spent on technology. The high ratio of salaries and expenses over other expense drives organizations to outsource their service desk without taking other considerations into account.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The outsourcing contract must preserve your control, possession, and ownership of the intellectual property involved in the service desk operation. From the beginning of the process, repatriation should be viewed as a possibility and preserved as a capability.

    Your challenge

    This research helps organizations who would like to achieve these goals:

    • Determine objectives and requirements to outsource the service desk.
    • Develop a project charter and build an outsourcing strategy to efficiently define processes to reduce risk of failure.
    • Build an outsourcing RFP and conduct interviews to identify the best candidate for service delivery.
    • Build a long-term relationship with an outsourcing vendor, making sure the vendor is able to satisfy all requirements.
    • Include a continual improvement plan in the outsourcing strategy and contain the option upon service delivery dissatisfaction.

    New hires require between 10 and 80 hours of training (Forward Bpo Inc., 2019).

    A benchmark study by Zendesk from 45,000 companies reveals that timely resolution of issues and 24/7 service are the biggest factors in customer service experience.

    This image contains a bar graph with the following data: Timely issue resolution; 24/7 support; Friendly agent; Desired contact method; Not to repeat info; Proactive support; Self-serve; Call back; Rewards & freebies

    These factors push many businesses to consider service desk outsourcing to vendors that have capabilities to fulfill such requirements.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • In most cases, organizations must perform significant administrative work before they can make a move. Those that fail to properly prepare impede a smooth transition, the success of the vendor, and the ability to repatriate.
    • Successful outsourcing comes from the recognition that an organization is experiencing complete turnover of its service desk staff. These organizations engage the vendor to transition knowledge and process to ensure continuity of quality.
    • IT realizes the most profound hidden costs of outsourcing when the rate of ticket escalation increases, diminishing the capacity of senior technical staff for strategic project work.

    Many organizations may not get the value they expect from outsourcing in their first year.

    Common Reasons:

    • Overall lack of due diligence in the outsourcing process
    • Unsuitable or unclear service transition plan
    • Poor service provider selection and management

    Poor transition planning results in delayed benefits and a poor relationship with your outsourcing service provider. A poor relationship with your service provider results in poor communication and knowledge transfer.

    Key components of a successful plan:

    1. Determine goals and identify requirements before developing an RFP.
    2. Finalize your outsourcing project charter and get ready for vendor evaluation.
    3. Assess and select the most appropriate provider; manage the transition and vendor relationship.

    Outsource the service desk properly, and you could see a wide range of benefits

    Service Desk Outsourcing: Ability to scale up/down; Reduce fixed costs; Refocus IT efforts on core activities; Access to up-to-date technology; Adhere to  ITSM best practices; Increased process optimization; Focus IT efforts on advanced expertise; Reframe to shift-left;

    Info-Tech Insight

    In your service desk outsourcing strategy, rethink downsizing first-level IT service staff. This can be an opportunity to reassign resources to more valuable roles, such as asset management, development or project backlog. Your current service desk staff are most likely familiar with the current technology, processes, and regulations within IT. Consider the ways to better use your existing resources before reducing headcount.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Determine Goals

    Conduct activities in the blueprint to pinpoint your current challenges with the service desk and find out objectives to outsource customer service.

    Define Requirements

    You need to be clear about the processes that will be outsourced. Considering your objectives, we'll help you discover the processes to outsource, to help you achieve your goals.

    Develop RFP

    Your expectations should be documented in a formal proposal to help vendors provide solid information about how they will satisfy your requirements and what their plan is.

    Build Long-Term Relationship

    Make sure to plan for continual improvement by setting expectations, tracking the services with proper metrics, and using efficient communication with the provider. Think about the rainy day and include exit conditions for ending the relationship if needed.

    Info-Tech's methodology

    1. Define the Goal

    2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    3. Develop an RFP and Make a Long-Term Relationship

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    Phase Outcomes

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vision and Goals

    Service Desk Processes to Outsource

    Outsourcing Roles and Responsibilities

    Outsourcing Risks and Constraints

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP

    Continual Improvement Plan

    Exit Strategy

    This is an image of the strategy which you will use to build your requirements for outsourcing the service desk.  it includes: 1. Define the Goal; 2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy; 3. Develop RFP and long-term relationship.

    Insight summary

    Focus on value

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Define outsourcing requirements

    You don't need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.

    Don't focus on cost

    If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that there will be other challenges. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don't end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Emphasize on customer service

    A bad outsourcer relationship will result in low business satisfaction with IT overall. The service desk is the face of IT, and if users are dissatisfied with the service desk, then they are much likelier to be dissatisfied with IT overall.

    Vendors are not magicians

    They have standards in place to help them succeed. Determine ITSM best practices, define your requirements, and adjust process workflows accordingly. Your staff and end users will have a much easier transition once outsourcing proceeds.

    Plan ahead to guarantee success

    Identify outsourcing goals, plan for service and system integrations, document standard incidents and requests, and track tension metrics to make sure the vendor does the work efficiently. Aim for building a long-term relationship but contemplate potential exit strategy.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Use this library to guide you through processes to outsource

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Use this template to craft a proposal for outsourcing your service desk

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Use this template to verify vendor claims on service delivery with pervious or current customers

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Use this tool to evaluate RFP submissions

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the key deliverable, Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Document your project scope and outsourcing strategy in this template to organize the project for efficient resource and requirement allocation

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Determine current challenges with the service desk and identify services to outsource.
    • Make the project charter for an efficient outsourcing strategy that will lead to higher satisfaction from IT.
    • Select the best outsource vendor that will satisfy most of the identified requirements.
    • Reduce the risk of project failure with efficient planning.
    • Understand potential feasibility of service desk outsourcing and its possible impact on business satisfaction.
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through a better service delivery.
    • Conduct more efficient resource allocation with outsourcing customer service.
    • Develop a long-term relationship between the enterprise and vendor through a continual improvement plan.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope your specific challenges and objectives

    Call #3: Identify project stakeholders, and potential risks and constraints

    Call #5: Create a detailed RFP

    Call #6: Identify strategy risks.

    Call #2: Assess outsourcing feasibility and processes to outsourceCall #4: Create a list of metrics to ensure efficient reporting

    Call #7: Prepare for vendor briefing and scoring each vendor

    Call #8: Build a communication plan

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Define the goal

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analysis outsourcing objectives
    • Assess outsourcing feasibility
    • Identify services and processes to outsource

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 1.1

    Identify goals and objectives

    Activities

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1.1.2 Document the benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1.1.3 Identify your outsourcing vision and goals

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure your mission statement

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach your outsourcing objectives

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of strengths and weaknesses of the service desk
    • Challenges with the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk outsourcing vision and goals
    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk
    • Mission statement

    What is your rationale to outsource the service desk?

    Potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk:

    • Bring in the expertise and knowledge to manage tickets according to best-practice guidelines
    • Reduce the timeline to response and resolution
    • Improve IT productivity
    • Enhance IT services and improve performance
    • Augment relationship between IT and business through service-level improvement
    • Free up the internal team and focus IT on complex projects and higher priority tasks
    • Speed up service desk optimization
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through efficient IT services
    • Reduce impact of incidents through effective incident management
    • Increase service consistency via turnover reduction
    • Expand coverage hour and access points
    • Expand languages to service different geographical areas

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1 hour

    Service desk is the face of IT. Service desk improvement increases IT efficiency, lowers operation costs, and enhances business satisfaction.

    Common challenges that result in deciding to outsource the service desk are:

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    ChallengeExample
    Lack of tier 1 supportStartup does not have a dedicated service desk to handle incidents and provide services to end users.
    Inefficient ticket handlingMTTR is very high and end users are frustrated with their issues not getting solved quickly. Even if they call service desk, they are put on hold for a long time. Due to these inefficiencies, their daily work is greatly impacted.
    Restricted service hoursCompany headquartered in Texas does not have resources to provide 24/7 IT service. When users in the East Asia branch have a laptop issue, they must wait until the next day to get response from IT. This has diminished their satisfaction.
    Restricted languagesCompany X is headquartered in New York. An end user not fluent in English from Madrid calls in for support. It takes five minutes for the agent to understand the issue and log a ticket.
    Ticket backlogIT is in firefighting mode, very busy with taking care of critical incidents and requests from upper management. Almost no one is committed to the SLA because of their limited availability.

    Brainstorm your challenges with the service desk. Why have you decided to outsource your service desk? Use the above table as a sample.

    1.1.2 Document benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1 hour

    1. Review the challenges with your current service desk identified in activity 1.1.1.
    2. Discuss possible ways to tackle these challenges. Be specific and determine ways to resolve these issues if you were to do it internally.
    3. Determine potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk to IT, business, and end users.
    4. For each benefit, describe dependencies. For instance, to reduce the number of direct calls (benefit), users should have access to service desk as a single point of contact (dependency).
    5. Document this activity in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Input

    • List of challenges with the current service desk from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Why should you not consider cost reduction as a primary incentive to outsourcing the service desk?

    Assume that some of the costs will not go away with outsourcing

    When you outsource, the vendor's staff tend to gradually become less effective as:

    • They are managed by metrics to reduce costs by escalating sooner, reducing talk time, and proposing questionable solutions.
    • Turnover results in new employees that get insufficient training.

    You must actively manage the vendor to identify and resolve these issues. Many organizations find that service desk management takes more time after they outsource.

    You need to keep spending on service desk management, and you may not get away from technology infrastructure spending.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In their first year, almost 42% of Info-Tech's clients do not get the real value of outsourcing services as expected. This iss primarily because of misalignment of organizational goals with outcomes of the outsourced services.

    Consider the hidden costs of outsourcing

    Expected Costs

    Unexpected Costs

    Example

    Transition CostsSeverance and staff retention
    • Cost to adapt to vendor standards
    • Training cost of vendor staff
    • Lost productivity
    • Format for requirements
    • Training report developers to work with vendor systems
    FeesPrice of the engagement
    • Extra fees for additional services
    • Extra charges for uploading data to cloud storage
    • Portal access
    Management CostsTime directing account
    • Time directly managing vendor staff
    • Checking deliverables for errors
    • Disputing penalty amounts
    Rework CostsDowntime, defect rate, etc. (quality metrics measured in SLAs)
    • Time spent adapting deliverables for unanticipated requirements
    • Time spent assuring the quality and usefulness of deliverables
    • Completing quality assurance and updating knowledgebase articles
    • Adapting reporting for presentation to stakeholders

    Determine strategies to avoid each hidden cost

    Costs related to transitioning into the engagementAdapting to standards and training costs

    Adapting to standards: Define the process improvements you will need to work with each potential vendor.

    Training costs for vendor staff: Reduce training costs by keeping the same vendor staff on all of your projects.

    Fee-related costs

    Fees for additional services (that you thought were included)

    Carefully review each proposed statement of work to identify and reduce extra fees. Understand why extra fees occur in the SLA, the contract, and the proposed statement of work, and take steps to protect yourself and the vendor.

    Management-related costs

    Direct management of vendor staff and dispute resolution

    Direct management of vendor staff: Avoid excessive management costs by defining a two-tier management structure on both sides of the engagement.

    Time spent resolving disputes: Avoid prolonged resolution costs by defining terms of divorce for the engagement up front.

    Rework costs

    Unanticipated requirements and integration with existing systems

    Unanticipated requirements: Use a two-stage process to define requirements, starting with business people and then with review by technical staff.

    Integration with existing systems: Obtain a commitment from vendors that deliverables will conform to standards at points of integration with your systems.

    Your outsourcing strategy should address the reasons you decided to outsource

    A clear vision of strategic objectives prior to entering an outsourcing agreement will allow you to clearly communicate these objectives to the Managed Service Provider (MSP) and use them as a contracted basis for the relationship.

    • Define the business' overall approach to outsourcing along with the priorities, rules, and principles that will drive the outsourcing strategy and every subsequent outsourcing decision and activity.
    • Define specific business, service, and technical goals for the outsourcing project and relevant measures of success.

    "People often don't have a clear direction around what they're trying to accomplish. The strategic goals should be documented. Is this a cost-savings exercise? Is it because you're deficient in one area? Is it because you don't have the tools or expertise to run the service desk yourself? Figure out what problem you're trying to solve by outsourcing, then build your strategy around that.
    – Jeremy Gagne, Application Support Delivery Manager, Allegis Group

    Most organizations are driven to consider outsourcing their service desk hoping to improve the following:

    • Ability to scale (train people and acquire skills)
    • Focus on core competencies
    • Decrease capital costs
    • Access latest technology without large investment
    • Resolve labor force constraints
    • Gain access to special expertise without paying a full salary
    • Save money overall

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use your goals and objectives as a management tool. Clearly outline your desired project outcomes to both your in-house team and the vendor during implementation and monitoring. It will allow a common ground to unite both parties as the project progresses.

    Mitigate pitfalls that lay in the way of desired outcomes of outsourcing

    Desired outcomePitfalls to overcome
    IT can focus on core competencies and strategic initiatives rather than break-fix tasks.Escalation to second- and third-level support usually increases when the first level has been outsourced. Outsourcers will have less experience with your typical incidents and will give up on trying to solve some issues more quickly than your internal level-one staff.
    Low outsourcing costs compared to the costs needed to employ internal employees in the same role. Due to lack of incentive to decrease ticket volume, costs are likely to increase. As a result, organizations often find themselves paying more overall for an outsourced service desk than if they had a few dedicated IT service desk employees in-house.
    Improved employee morale as a result of being able to focus on more interesting tasks.Management often expects existing employee morale to increase as a result of shifting their focus to core and strategic tasks, but the fear of diminished job security often spreads to the remaining non-level-one employees.

    1.1.3 Identify outsourcing vision and goals

    Identify the goals and objectives of outsourcing to inform your strategy.

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    1-2 hours

    1. Meet with key business stakeholders and the service desk staff who were involved in the decision to outsource.
    2. As a group, review the results from activity 1.1.1 (challenges with current service desk operations) and identify the goals and objectives of the outsourcing initiative.
    3. Determine the key performance indicator (KPI) for each goal.
    4. Identify the impacted stakeholder/s for each goal.
    5. Discuss checkpoint schedule for each goal to make sure the list stays updated.

    Use the sample table as a starting point:

    1. Document your table in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.
    IDGoal DescriptionKPIImpacted StakeholdersCheckpoint Schedule
    1Provide capacity to take calls outside of current service desk work hours
    • Decreased in time to response
    • Decreased time to resolve
    • IT Entire organization
    • Every month
    2Take calls in different languages
    • Improved service delivery in different geographical regions
    • Improved end-user satisfaction
    • End users
    • Every month
    3Provide field support at remote sites with no IT presence without having to fly out an employee
    • 40% faster incident resolution and request fulfillment
    • Entire organization
    • Every month
    4Improve ease of management by vendor helping with managing and optimizing service desk tasks
    • Improved service management efficiency
    • Entire organization
    • Every 3 months

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Evaluate organizational demographics to assess outsourcing rationale

    The size, complexity, and maturity of your organization are good indicators of service desk direction with regards to outsourcing.

    Organization Size

    • As more devices, applications, systems, and users are added to the mix, vendor costs will increase but their ability to meet business needs will decrease.
    • Small organizations are often either rejected by vendors for being too small or locked into a contract that is overkill for their actual needs (and budget).

    Complexity

    • Highly customized environments and organizations with specialized applications or stringent regulatory requirements are very difficult to outsource for a reasonable cost and acceptable quality.
    • In these cases, the vendor is required to train skilled support or ends up escalating more tickets back to second- and third-level support.

    Requirements

    • Organizations looking to outsource must have defined outsourcing requirements before looking at vendors.
    • Without a requirement assessment, the vendor won't have guidelines to follow and you won't be able to measure their adherence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although less adherence to service desk best practices can be one of the main incentives to outsourcing the service desk, IT should have minimal processes in place to be able to set expectations with targeting vendors.

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure mission statement

    0.5-1 hour

    The evaluation process for outsourcing the service desk should be done very carefully. Project leaders should make sure they won't panic internal resources and impact their performance through the transition period.

    If the outsourcing process is rushed, it will result in poor evaluation, inefficient decision making, and project failure.

    1. Refer to results in activity 1.1.3. Discuss the service desk outsourcing goals once again.
    2. Brainstorm the most important objectives. Use sticky notes to prioritize the items from the most important to the least important.
    3. Edit the order accordingly.

    Input

    • Project goals from activity 1.1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized list of outsourcing goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach outsourcing objectives

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager

    0.5-1 hour

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statement should use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Can be described as:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample mission statements:

    • To help fulfill organizational goals, IT has decided to empower business stakeholders with outsourcing the service desk.
    • To support efficient IT service provision, better collaboration, and effective communication, [Company Name] has decided to outsource the service desk.
    • [Company Name] plans to outsource the service desk so it can identify bottlenecks and inefficiencies with current service desk processes and enable [Company Name] to innovate and support business growth.
    • Considering the goals and benefits determined in the previous activities, outline a mission statement.
    • Document your outsourcing mission statement in the "Project Overview" section of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Assess outsourcing feasibility

    Activities

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    1.2.2 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    1.2.3 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    1.2.4 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk tasks and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user satisfaction with the service desk
    • List of processes and services to outsource

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    Solicit targeted department feedback on IT's core service capabilities, communications, and business enablement from end users. Use this feedback to assess end-user satisfaction with each service, broken down by department and seniority level.

    1. Complete an end-user satisfaction survey to define the current state of your IT services, including service desk (timeliness and effectiveness). With Info-Tech's end-user satisfaction program, an analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and will go through the report with you.
    2. Evaluate survey results.
    3. Communicate survey results with team leads and discuss the satisfaction rates and comments of the end users.
    4. Schedule to launch another survey one year after outsourcing the service desk.
    5. Your results will be compared to the following year's results to analyze the overall success/failure of your outsourcing project.

    A decrease of business and end-user satisfaction is a big drive to outsourcing the service desk. Conduct a customer service survey to discover your end-user experience prior to and after outsourcing the service desk.

    Don't get caught believing common misconceptions: outsourcing doesn't mean sending away all the work

    First-time outsourcers often assume they are transferring most of the operations over to the vendor, but this is often not the case.

    1. Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.
    2. Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.
    3. The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications (and for customized applications if you'll pay for it). However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite, and that service is very expensive to outsource.
    4. Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Switching to a vendor won't necessarily improve your service desk maturity

    You should have minimal requirements before moving.

    Whether managing in-house or outsourcing, it is your job to ensure core issues have been clarified, processes defined, and standards maintained. If your processes are ad-hoc or non-existent right now, outsourcing won't fix them.

    You must have the following in place before looking to outsource:

    • Defined reporting needs and plans
    • Formalized skill-set requirements
    • Problem management and escalation guidelines
    • Ticket templates and classification rules
    • Workflow details
    • Knowledge base standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you expect your problems to disappear with outsourcing, they might just get worse.

    Define long-term requirements

    Anticipate growth throughout the lifecycle of your outsourcing contract and build that into the RFP

    • Most outsourcing agreements typically last three to five years. In that time, you risk outgrowing your service provider by neglecting to define your long-term service desk requirements.
    • Outgrowing your vendor before your contract ends can be expensive due to high switching costs. Managing multiple vendors can also be problematic.
    • It is crucial to define your service desk requirements before developing a request for proposal to make sure the service you select can meet your organization's needs.
    • Make sure that the business is involved in this planning stage, as the goals of IT need to scale with the growth strategy of the business. You may select a vendor with no additional capacity despite the fact that your organization has a major expansion planned to begin two years from now. Assessing future requirements also allows you to culture match with the vendor. If your outlooks and practices are similar, the match will likely click.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't select a vendor for what your company is today – select a vendor for what your company will be years from now. Define your future service desk requirements in addition to your current requirements and leave room for growth and development.

    You can't outsource everything

    Manage the things that stay in-house well or suffer the consequences.

    "You can't outsource management; you can only outsource supervision." Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    What can be the vendor in charge of?

    What stays in-house?

    • Call and email answering
    • Ongoing daily ticket creation and tracking
    • Tier 1 support
    • Internal escalation to Level 2 support
    • External escalation to specialized Level 2 and Level 3 support
    • Knowledge base article creation
    • Service desk-related hardware acquisition and maintenance
    • Service desk software acquisition and maintenance
    • Security and access management
    • Disaster recovery
    • Staff acquisition
    • Facilities
    • The role of the Service Desk Manager
    • Skills and training standards
    • Document standardization
    • Knowledge base quality assurance and documentation standardization
    • Self-service maintenance, promotion, and ownership
    • Short and long-term tracking of vendor performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    The need for a Service Desk Manager does not go away when you outsource. In fact, the need becomes even stronger and never diminishes.

    Assess current service desk processes before outsourcing

    Process standards with areas such as documentation, workflow, and ticket escalation should be in place before the decision to outsource has been made.

    Every effective service desk has a clear definition of the services that they are performing for the end user. You can't provide a service without knowing what the services are.

    MSPs typically have their own set of standards and processes in play. If your service desk is not at a similar level of maturity, outsourcing will not be pleasant.

    Make sure that your metrics are reported consistently and that they tell a story.

    "Establish baseline before outsourcing. Those organizations that don't have enough service desk maturity before outsourcing should work with the outsourcer to establish the baseline."
    – Yev Khobrenkov, Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing vendors are not service desk builders; they're service desk refiners. Switching to a vendor won't improve your maturity; you must have a certain degree of process maturity and standardization before moving.

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Cleaning Supplies

    SOURCE: PicNet

    Challenge

    • Reckitt Benckiser of Australia determined that its core service desk needed to be outsourced.
    • It would retain its higher level service desk staff to work on strategic projects.
    • The MSP needed to fulfill key requirements outlined by Reckitt Benckiser.

    Solution

    • Reckitt Benckiser recognized that its rapidly evolving IT needs required a service desk that could fulfill the following tasks:
    • Free up internal IT staff.
    • Provide in-depth understanding of business apps.
    • Offer efficient, cost-effective support onsite.
    • Focus on continual service improvement (CSI).

    Results

    • An RFP was developed to support the outsourcing strategy.
    • With the project structure outlined and the requirements of the vendor for the business identified, Reckitt Benckiser could now focus on selecting a vendor that met its needs.

    1.2.1 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    2-3 hours

    Review your prioritized project goals from activity 1.1.4.

    Brainstorm requirements and use cases for each goal and describe each use case. For example: To improve service desk timeliness, IT should improve incident management, to resolve incidents according to the defined SLA and based on ticket priority levels.

    Discuss if you're outsourcing just incident management or both incident management and request fulfillment. If both, determine what level of service requests will be outsourced? Will you ask the vendor to provide a service catalog? Will you outsource self-serve and automation?

    Document your findings in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library.

    Input

    • Outsourcing project goals from activity 1.1.4

    Output

    • List of processes to outsource

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    1.2.2 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Infrastructure manager

    2-3 hours

    Most successful service desk outsourcing engagements have a primary goal of freeing up their internal resources to work on complex tasks and projects. The key outsourcing success factor is to find out internal services and processes that are standardized or should be standardized, and then determine if they can be outsourced.

    1. Review the list of identified service desk processes from activity 1.2.1.
    2. Discuss the maturity level of each process (low, medium, high) and document under the maturity column of the Outsource the Service Desk Requirements Database Library.
    3. Use the following decision matrix for each process. Discuss which tasks are important to strategic objectives, which ones provide competitive advantage, and which ones require specialized in-house knowledge.
    4. Identify processes that receive high vendor's performance advantage. For instance, access to talent, lower cost at scale, and access to technology.
    5. In your outsourcing assessment, consider a narrow scope of engagement and a broad view of what is important to business outcome.
    6. Based on your findings, determine the priority of each process to be outsourced. Document results in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library, and section 4.1 of the service desk outsourcing project charter.
    • Important to strategic objectives
    • Provides competitive advantage
    • Specialized in-house knowledge required

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis, where the X axis is labeled Vendor's Performance Advantage, and the Y axis is labeled Importance to Business Outcomes.

    • Talent/access to skills
    • Economies of scale/lower cost at scale
    • Access to technology

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Maintain staff and training: you need to know who is being hired, how, and why

    Define documentation rules to retain knowledge

    • Establish a standard knowledge article template and list of required information.
    • Train staff on the requirements of knowledge base creation and management. Help them understand the value of the time spent recording their work.
    • It is your responsibility to assure the quality of each knowledge article. Outline accountabilities for internal staff and track for performance evaluations.

    For information on better knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Expect to manage stringent skills and training standards

    • Plan on being more formal about a Service Manager position and spending more time than you allocated previously.
    • Complete a thorough assessment of the skills you need to keep the service desk running smoothly.
    • Don't forget to account for any customized or proprietary systems. How will you train vendor staff to accommodate your needs? What does their turnaround look like: would it be more likely that you acquire a dependable employee in-house?
    • Staffing requirements need to be actively monitored to ensure the outsourcer doesn't have degradation of quality or hiring standards. Don't assume that things run well – complete regular checks and ask for access to audit results.
    • Are the systems and data being accessed by the vendor highly sensitive or subject to regulatory requirements? If so, it is your job to ensure that vendor staff are being screened appropriately.

    Does your service desk need to integrate to other IT services?

    A common challenge when outsourcing multiple services to more than one vendor is a lack of collaboration and communication between vendors.

    • Leverage SIAM capabilities to integrate service desk tasks to other IT services, if needed.
    • "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) is a management methodology that can be applied in an environment that includes services sourced from a number of service providers" (Scopism Limited, 2020).
    • SIAM supports cross-functional integrations. Organizations that look for a single provider will be less likely to get maximum benefits from SIAM.

    There are three layers of entities in SIAM:

    • Customer Organization: The customer who receives services, who defines the relationship with service providers.
    • Service Integrator: End-to-end service governance and integration is done at this layer, making sure all service providers are committed to their services.
    • Service Provider: Responsible party for service delivery according to contract. It can be combination of internal provider, managed by internal agreements, and external provider, managed by SLAs between providers and customer organization.

    Use SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    In the SIAM model, the customer organization keeps strategic, governance, and business activities, while integrating other services (either internally or externally).

    This is an image of the SIAM model

    SIAM Layers. Source: SIAM Foundation BoK

    Utilize SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    SIAM reduces service duplication and improves service delivery via managing internal and external service providers.

    To utilize the SIAM model, determine the following components:

    • Service providers
    • Service consumers
    • Service outcomes
    • Service obstacles and boundaries
    • Service dependencies
    • Technical requirements and interactions for each service
    • Service data and information including service levels

    To learn more about adopting SIAM, visit Scopism.

    1.2.3 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    1-2 hours

    • Discuss principles and goals of SIAM and how integrating other services can apply within your processes.
    • Review the list of service desk processes and tasks to be outsourced from activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.
    • Brainstorm a list of other services that are outsourced/need to be outsourced.
    • Determine providers of each service (both internal and external). Document the other services to be integrated in the project charter template and requirements database library.

    Input

    • SIAM objectives
    • List of service desk processes to outsource

    Output

    • List of other services to outsource and integrate in the project

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Establish requirements for problem management in the outsourcing plan

    Your MSP should not just fulfill SLAs – they should be a proactive source of value.

    Problem management is a group effort. Make sure your internal team is assisted with sufficient and efficient data by the outsourcer to conduct a better problem management.

    Clearly state your organization's expectations for enabling problem management. MSPs may not necessarily need, and cannot do, problem management; however, they should provide metrics to help you discover trends, define recurring issues, and enable root cause analysis.

    For more information on problem management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Improve Incident and Problem Management.

    PROBLEM MANAGEMENT

    INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: Ticket data from incident management is needed for incident matching to identify problems. Critical Incidents are also a main input to problem management.

    EVENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: SMEs and operations teams monitoring system health events can identify indicators of potential future issues before they become incidents.

    APPLICATION, INFRASTRUCTURE, and SECURITY TEAMS

    ACTION: Problem tickets require investigation from relevant SMEs across different IT teams to identify potential solutions or workarounds.

    CHANGE MANAGEMENT

    OUTPUT: Problem resolution may need to go through Change Management for proper authorization and risk management.

    Outline problem management protocols to gain value from your service provider

    • For example, with a deep dive into ticket trend analysis, your MSP should be able to tell you that you've had a large number of tickets on a particular issue in the past month, allowing you to look into means to resolve the issue and prevent it from reoccurring.
    • A proactive MSP should be able to help your service levels improve over time. This should be built into the KPIs and metrics you ask for from the outsourcer.

    Sample Scenario

    Your MSP tracks ticket volume by platform.

    There are 100 network tickets/month, 200 systems tickets/month, and 5,000 end-user tickets/month.

    Tracking these numbers is a good start, but the real value is in the analysis. Why are there 5,000 end-user tickets? What are the trends?

    Your MSP should be providing a monthly root-cause analysis to help improve service quality.

    Outcomes:

    1. Meeting basic SLAs tells a small part of the story. The MSP is performing well in a functional sense, but this doesn't shed any insight on what kind of knowledge or value is being added.
    2. The MSP should provide routine updates on ticket trends and other insights gained through data analysis.
    3. A commitment to continual improvement will provide your organization with value throughout the duration of the outsourcing agreement.

    Phase 2

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify roles and responsibilities
    • Determine potential risks of outsourcing the service desk
    • Build a list of metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 2.1

    Identify project stakeholders

    Activity

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk roles
    • Service desk outsourcing goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcome of this step

    • Outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an outsourcing strategy to capture the vision of your service desk

    An outsourcing strategy is crucial to the proper accomplishment of an outsourcing project. By taking the time to think through your strategy beforehand, you will have a clear idea of your desired outcomes. This will make your RFP of higher quality and will result in a much easier negotiation process.

    Most MSPs are prepared to offer a standard proposal to clients who do not know what they want. These are agreements that are doomed to fail. A clearly defined set of goals (discussed in Phase 1), risks, and KPIs and metrics (covered in this phase) makes the agreement more beneficial for both parties in the long run.

    1. Identify goals and objectives
    2. Determine mission statement
    3. Define roles and responsibilities
    4. Identify risks and constraints
    5. Define KPIs and metrics
    6. Complete outsourcing strategy

    A successful outsourcing initiative depends on rigorous preparation

    Outsourcing is a garbage in, garbage out initiative. You need to give your service provider the information they need to provide an effective product.

    • Data quality is critical to your outsourcing initiative's success.
    • Your vendor will be much better equipped to help you and to better price its services if it has a thorough understanding of your IT environment.
    • This means more than just building a catalog of your hardware and software. You will need to make available documented policies and processes so you and your vendor can understand where they fit in.
    • Failure to completely document your environment can lead to a much longer time to value as your provider will have to spend much more time (and thus much more money) getting their service up and running.

    "You should fill the gap before outsourcing. You should make sure how to measure tickets, how to categorize, and what the cost of outsourcing will be. Then you'll be able to outsource the execution of the service. Start your own processes and then outsource their execution."
    – Kris Krishan, Head of IT and business systems, Waymo

    Case Study

    Digital media company built an outsourcing strategy to improve customer satisfaction

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media

    SOURCE: Auxis

    Challenge

    A Canadian multi-business company with over 13,000 employees would like to maintain a growing volume of digital content with their endpoint management.

    The client operated a tiered model service desk. Tier 1 was outsourced, and tier 2 tasks were done internally, for more complex tasks and projects.

    As a result of poor planning and defining goals, the company had issues with:

    • Low-quality ticket handling
    • High volume of tickets escalated to tier 2, restraining them from working on complex tickets
    • High turn over and a challenge with talent retention
    • Insufficient documentation to train external tier 1 team
    • Long resolution time and low end-user satisfaction

    Solution

    The company structured a strategy for outsourcing service desk and defined their expectations and requirements.

    They engaged with another outsourcer that would fulfill their requirements as planned.

    With the help of the outsourcer's consulting team, the client was able to define the gaps in their existing processes and system to:

    • Implement a better ticketing system that could follow best-practices guidelines
    • Restructure the team so they would be able to handle processes efficiently

    Results

    The proactive planning led to:

    • Significant improvement in first call resolution (82%).
    • MTTR improvement freed tier 2 to focus on business strategic objectives and allowed them to work on higher-value activities.
    • With a better strategy around outsourcing planning, the company saved 20% of cost compared to the previous outsourcer.
    • As a result of this partnership, the company is providing a 24/7 structure in multiple languages, which is aligned with the company's growth.
    • Due to having a clear strategy built for the project, the client now has better visibility into metrics that support long-term continual improvement plans.

    Define roles and responsibilities for the outsourcing transition to form the base of your outsourcing strategy

    There is no "I" in outsource; make sure the whole team is involved

    Outsourcing is a complete top-to-bottom process that involves multiple levels of engagement:

    • Management must make high-level decisions about staffing and negotiate contract details with the vendor.
    • Service desk employees must execute on the documentation and standardization of processes in an effort to increase maturity.
    • Roles and responsibilities need to be clearly defined to ensure that all aspects of the transition are completed on time.
    • Implement a full-scale effort that involves all relevant staff. The most common mistake is to have the project design follow the same top-down pattern as the decision-making process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The service desk doesn't operate in isolation. The service desk interfaces with many other parts of the organization (such as finance, purchasing, field support, etc.), so it's important to ensure you engage stakeholders from other departments as well. If you only engage the service desk staff in your discussions around outsourcing strategy and RFP development, you may miss requirements that will come up when it's too late.

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    2 hours

    1. The sample RACI chart in section 5 of the Project Charter Template outlines which positions are responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each major task within the outsourcing project.
    2. Responsible, is the group that is responsible for the execution and oversight of activities for the project. Accountable is the owner of the task/process, who is accountable for the results and outcomes. Consulted is the subject matter expert (SME) who is actively involved in the task/process and consulted on decisions. Informed is not actively involved with the task/process and is updated about decisions around the task/process.
    3. Make sure that you assign only one person as accountable per process. There can be multiple people responsible for each task. Consulted and Informed are optional for each task.
    4. Complete the RACI chart with recommended participants, and document in your service desk outsourcing project charter, under section 5.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 2.2

    Outline potential risks and constraints

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outsourcing objectives
    • Potential risks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mitigation strategy for each risk
    • Service desk metrics

    Know your constraints to reduce surprises during project implementation

    No service desk is perfect; know your limits and plan accordingly

    Define your constraints to outsourcing the service desk.

    Consider all types of constraints and opportunities, including:

    • Business forces
    • Economic cycles
    • Disruptive tech
    • Regulation and compliance issues
    • Internal organizational issues

    Within the scope of a scouring decision, define your needs and objectives, measure those as much as possible, and compare them with the "as-is" situation.

    Start determining what alternative approaches/scenarios the organization could use to fill the gaps. Start a comparison of scenarios against drivers, goals, and risks.

    Constraints

    Goals and objectives

    • Budget
    • Maturity
    • Compliance
    • Regulations
    • Outsourcing Strategy

    Plan ahead for potential risks that may impede your strategy

    Risk assessment must go hand-in-hand with goal and objective planning

    Risk is inherent with any outsourcing project. Common outsourcing risks include:

    • Lack of commitment to the customer's goals from the vendor.
    • The distraction of managing the relationship with the vendor.
    • A perceived loss of control and a feeling of over-dependence on your vendor.
    • Managers may feel they have less influence on the development of strategy.
    • Retained staff may feel they have become less skilled in their specialist field.
    • Unanticipated expenses that were assumed to be offered by the vendor.
    • Savings only result from high capital investment in new projects on the part of the customer.

    Analyze the risks associated with a specific scenario. This analysis should identify and understand the most common sourcing and vendor risks using a risk-reward analysis for selected scenarios. Use tools and guidelines to assess and manage vendor risk and tailor risk evaluation criteria to the types of vendors and products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Plan for the worst to prevent it from happening. Evaluating risk should cover a wide variety of scenarios including the worst possible cases. This type of thinking will be crucial when developing your exit strategy in a later exercise.

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    1-3 hours

    1. Brainstorm any potential risks that may arise through the outsourcing project. Describe each risk and categorize both its probability of occurring and impact on the organization as high (H), medium (M), or low (L), using the table below:
    Risk Description

    Probability(H/M/L)

    Impact(H/M/L)Planned Mitigation
    Lack of documentationMMUse cloud-based solution to share documents.
    Knowledge transferLMDetailed knowledge-sharing agreement in place in the RFP.
    Processes not followedLHClear outline and definition of current processes.
    1. Identify any constraints for your outsourcing strategy that may restrict, limit, or place certain conditions on the outsourcing project.
      • This may include budget restrictions or staffing limitations.
      • Identifying constraints will help you be prepared for risks and will lessen their impact.
    2. Document risks and constraints in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Define service tiers and roles to develop clear vendor SLAs

    Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.

    Define the tiers and/or services that will be the responsibility of the MSP, as well as escalations and workflows across tiers. A sample outsourced structure is displayed here:

    External Vendor

    Tickets beyond the scope of the service desk staff need to be escalated back to the vendor responsible for the affected system.

    Tier 3

    Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Tier 2

    The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications. However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite as that service is very expensive to outsource.

    Tier 1

    Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you outsource everything, you'll be at the mercy of consultancy or professional services shops later on. You won't have anyone in-house to help you deploy anything; you're at the mercy of a consultant to come in and tell you what to do and how much to spend. Keep your highly skilled people in-house to offset what you'd have to pay for consultancy. If you need to repatriate your service desk later on, you will need skills in-house to do so.

    Don't become obsessed with managing by short-term metrics – look at the big picture

    "Good" metric results may simply indicate proficient reactive fixing; long-term thinking involves implementing proactive, balanced solutions.

    KPIs demonstrate that you are running an effective service desk because:

    • You close an average of 300 tickets per week
    • Your first call resolution is above 90%
    • Your talk time is less than five minutes
    • Surveys reveal clients are satisfied

    While these results may appear great on the surface, metrics don't tell the whole story.

    The effort from any support team seeks to balance three elements:

    FCR: Time; Resources; Quality

    First-Contact Resolution (FCR) Rate

    Percentage of tickets resolved during first contact with user (e.g. before they hang up or within an hour of submitting ticket). Could be measured as first-contact, first-tier, or first-day resolution.

    End-User Satisfaction

    Perceived value of the service desk measured by a robust annual satisfaction survey of end users and/or transactional satisfaction surveys sent with a percentage of tickets.

    Ticket Volume and Cost Per Ticket

    Monthly operating expenses divided by average ticket volume per month. Report ticket volume by department or ticket category, and look at trends for context.

    Average Time to Resolve (incidents) or Fulfill (service requests)

    Time elapsed from when a ticket is "open" to "resolved." Distinguish between ticket resolution vs. closure, and measure time for incidents and service requests separately.

    Focus on tension metrics to achieve long-term success

    Tension metrics help create a balance by preventing teams from focusing on a single element.

    For example, an MSP built incentives around ticket volume for their staff, but not the quality of tickets. As a result, the MSP staff rushed through tickets and gamed the system while service quality suffered.

    Use metrics to establish baselines and benchmarking data:

    • If you know when spikes in ticket volumes occur, you can prepare to resource more appropriately for these time periods
    • Create KB articles to tackle recurring issues and assist tier 1 technicians and end users.
      • Employ a root cause analysis to eliminate recurring tickets.

    "We had an average talk time of 15 minutes per call and I wanted to ensure they could handle those calls in 15 minutes. But the behavior was opposite, [the vendor] would wrap up the call, transfer prematurely, or tell the client they'd call them back. Service levels drive behavior so make sure they are aligned with your strategic goals with no unintended consequences."
    – IT Services Manager, Banking

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your metrics work cooperatively. Metrics should be chosen that cause tension on one another. It's not enough to rely on a fast service desk that doesn't have a high end-user satisfaction rate or runs at too high a cost; there needs to be balance.

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    1-3 hours

    1. Define KPIs and metrics that will be critical to service desk success.
    2. Distribute sticky notes of different colors to participants around the table.
    3. Select a space to place the sticky notes – a table, whiteboard, flip chart, etc. – and divide it into three zones.
    4. Refer to your defined list of goals and KPIs from activity 1.1.3 and discuss metrics to fulfill each KPI. Note that each goal (critical success factor, CSF) may have more than one KPI. For instance:
      1. Goal 1: Increase end-user satisfaction; KPI 1: Improve average transactional survey score. KPI 2: Improve annual relationship survey score.
      2. Goal 2: Improve service delivery; KPI 1: Reduce time to resolve incidents. KPI 2: Reduce time to fulfill service requests.
    5. Recall that tension metrics must form a balance between:
      1. Time
      2. Resources
      3. Quality
    6. Record the results in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • Service desk outsourcing goals
    • Service desk outsourcing KPIs

    Output

    • List of service desk metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Phase 3

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build your outsourcing RFP
    • Set expectations with candidate vendors
    • Score and select your vendor
    • Manage your relationship with the vendor

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 3.1

    Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk processes and requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge management and technology requirements
    • Self-service requirements

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Create a detailed RFP to ensure your candidate vendor will fulfill all your requirements

    At its core, your RFP should detail the outcomes of your outsourcing strategy and communicate your needs to the vendor.

    The RFP must cover business needs and the more detailed service desk functions required. Many enterprises only consider the functionality they need, while ignoring operational and selection requirements.

    Negotiate a supply agreement with the preferred outsourcer for delivery of the required services. Ensure your RFP covers:

    1. Service specification
    2. Service levels
    3. Roles and responsibilities
    4. Transition period and acceptance
    5. Prices, payment, and duration
    6. Agreement administration
    7. Outsourcing issues

    In addition to defining your standard requirements, don't forget to take into consideration the following factors when developing your RFP:

    • Employee onboarding and hardware imaging for new users
    • Applications you need current and future support for
    • Reporting requirements
    • Self-service options
    • Remote support needs and locations

    Although it may be tempting, don't throw everything over the wall at your vendor in the RFP. Evaluate your service desk functions in terms of quality, cost effectiveness, and the value provided from the vendor. Organizations should only outsource functions that the vendor can operate better, faster, or cheaper.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Involve the right stakeholders in developing your RFP, not just service desk. If only service desk is involved in RFP discussion, the connection between tier 1 and specialists will be broken, as some processes are not considered from IT's point of view.

    Identify ITSM solution requirements

    Your vendor probably uses a different tool to manage their processes; make sure its capabilities align with the vision of your service desk.

    Your service desk and outsourcing strategy were both designed with your current ITSM solution in mind. Before you hand the reins to an MSP, it is crucial that you outline how your current ITSM solution is being used in terms of functionality.

    Find out if it's better to have the MSP use their own ITSM tools or your ITSM solution.

    Benefits of operating within your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    Disadvantages of using your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    • If you provide the service catalog, it's easier to control your ITSM tool yourself.
    • Using your own ITSM and giving access to the outsourcer will allow you to build your dashboard and access your operational metrics rather than relying on the MSP to provide you with metrics.
    • Usage of the current tool may be extended across multiple departments, so it may be in the best interest of your business to have the vendor adopt usage of the current tool.
    • While many ITSM solutions have similar functions, innate differences do exist between them. Outsourcers mostly want to operate in their own ticketing solution. As other departments besides IT may be using the service management tool, you will need to have the same tool across the organization. This makes purchasing the new ITSM license very expensive, unless you operate in the same ITSM as the outsourcer.
    • You need your vendor to be able to use the system you have in order to meet your requirements, which will limit your options in the market.
    • If the outsourcer is using your ITSM, you should provide training to them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defining your tool requirements can be a great opportunity to get the tool functionality you always wanted. Many MSPs offer enterprise-level ITSM tools and highly mature processes that may tempt you to operate within their ITSM environment. However, first define your goals for such a move, as well as pros and cons of operating in their service management tool to weigh if its benefits overweigh its downfalls.

    Case Study

    Lone Star College learned that it's important to select a vendor whose tool will work with your service desk

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: ServiceNow

    Challenge

    Lone Star College has an end-user base of over 100,000 staff and students.

    The college has six campuses across the state of Texas, and each campus was using its own service desk and ITSM solution.

    Initially, the decision was to implement a single ITSM solution, but organizational complexity prevented that initiative from succeeding.

    A decision was made to outsource and consolidate the service desks of each of the campuses to provide more uniform service to end users.

    Solution

    Lone Star College selected a vendor that implemented FrontRange.

    Unfortunately, the tool was not the right fit for Lone Star's service and reporting needs.

    After some discussion, the outsourcing vendor made the switch to ServiceNow.

    Some time later, a hybrid outsourced model was implemented, with Lone Star and the vendor combining to provide 24/7 support.

    Results

    The consolidated, standardized approach used by Lone Star College and its vendor has created numerous benefits:

    • Standardized reporting
    • High end-user satisfaction
    • All SLAs are being met
    • Improved ticket resolution times
    • Automated change management.

    Lone Star outsourced in order to consolidate its service desks quickly, but the tools didn't quite match.

    It's important to choose a tool that works well with your vendor's, otherwise the same standardization issues can persist.

    Design your RFP to help you understand what the vendor's standard offerings are and what it is capable of delivering

    Your RFP should be worded in a way that helps you understand what your vendor's standard offerings are because that's what they're most capable of delivering. Rather than laying out all your requirements in a high level of detail, carefully craft your questions in a probing way. Then, understand what your current baseline is, what your target requirements are, and assess the gap.

    Design the RFP so that responses can easily be compared against one another.

    It is common to receive responses that are very different – RFPs don't provide a response framework. Comparing vastly different responses can be like comparing apples to oranges. Not only are they immensely time consuming to score, their scores also don't end up accurately reflecting the provider's capabilities or suitability as a vendor.

    If your RFP is causing a ten minute printer backlog, you're doing something wrong.

    Your RFP should not be hundreds of pages long. If it is, there is too much detail.

    Providing too much detail can box your responses in and be overly limiting on your responses. It can deter potentially suitable provider candidates from sending a proposal.

    Request
    For
    Proposal

    "From bitter experience, if you're too descriptive, you box yourself in. If you're not descriptive enough, you'll be inundated with questions or end up with too few bidders. We needed to find the best way to get the message across without putting too much detail around it."
    – Procurement Manager, Utilities

    Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template contains nine sections

    1. Statement of work
      • Purpose, coverage, and participation ààInsert the purpose and goals of outsourcing your service desk, using steps 1.1 findings in this blueprint as reference.
    2. General information
      • Information about the document, enterprise, and schedule of events ààInsert the timeline you developed for the RFP issue and award process in this section.
    3. Proposal preparation instructions
      • The vendor's understanding of the RFP, good faith statement, points of contact, proposal submission, method of award, selection and notification.
    4. Service overview
      • Information about organizational perspective, service desk responsibility matrix, vendor requirements, and service level agreements (SLAs).
    5. Scope of work, specifications and requirements
      • Technical and functional requirements à Insert the requirements gathered in Phase 1 in this section of the RFP. Remember to include both current and future requirements.
    6. Exit conditions
      • Overview of exit strategy and transition process.
    7. Vendor qualifications and references
    8. Account management and estimated pricing
    9. Vendor certification
    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    The main point of focus in this document is defining your requirements (discussed in Phase 1) and developing proposal preparation instructions.

    The rest of the RFP consists mostly of standard legal language. Review the rest of the RFP template and adapt the language to suit your organization's standards. Check with your legal departments to make sure the RFP adheres to company policies.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    1-2 hours

    1. Review the outsourcing goals you identified in Phase 1 (activity 1.1.3).
    2. For each goal, divide the defined requirements from your requirements database library (activity 1.2.1) into three areas:
      1. People Requirements
      2. Process Requirements
      3. Technical Requirements
    3. Group your requirements based on characteristics (e.g. recovery capabilities, engagement methodology, personnel, etc.).
    4. Validate these requirements with the relevant stakeholders.
    5. Document your results in section 4 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Refined requirements to input into the RFP

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Assess knowledge management and technology requirements to enable the outsourcer with higher quality work

    Retain ownership of the knowledgebase to foster long-term growth of organizational intelligence

    With end users becoming more and more tech savvy, organizational intelligence is becoming an increasingly important aspect of IT support. Modern employees are able and willing to troubleshoot on their own before calling into the service desk. The knowledgebase and FAQs largely facilitate self-serve trouble shooting, both of which are not core concerns for the outsource vendor.

    Why would the vendor help you empower end users and decrease ticket volume when it will lead to less revenue in the future? Ticket avoidance is not simply about saving money by removing support. It's about the end-user community developing organizational intelligence so that it doesn't need as much technical support.

    Organizational intelligence occurs when shared knowledge and insight is used to make faster, better decisions.

    When you outsource, the flow of technical insight to your end-user community slows down or stops altogether unless you proactively drive it. Retain ownership of the knowledgebase and ensure that the content is:

    1. Validated to ensure it accurately describes the best solution.
    2. Actionable to ensure it prescribes repeatable, verifiable steps.
    3. Contextual to ensure the reader knows when NOT to apply the knowledge.
    4. Maintained to ensure the solution remains current.
    5. Applied, since knowledge is a cost with no benefit unless you apply it and turn it into organizational intelligence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include knowledge management process in your ticket handling workflows to make sure knowledge is transferred to the MSP and end users. For more information on knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's Standardize the Service Desk and Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy blueprints.

    Assess self-service requirements in your outsourcing plan

    When outsourcing the service desk, determine who will take ownership of the self-service portal.

    Nowadays, outsourcers provide innovative services such as self-serve options. However, bear in mind that the quality of such services is a differentiating factor. A well-maintained portal makes it easy to:

    • Report incidents efficiently via use-case-based forms
    • Place requests via a business-oriented service catalog
    • Automate request processes
    • Give visibility on ticket status
    • Access knowledgebase articles
    • Provide status on critical systems
    • Look for services by both clicking service lists and searching them
    • Provide 24/7 service via interactive communication with live agent and AI-powered machine
    • Streamline business process in multiple departments rather than only IT

    In the outsourcing process, determine your expectations from your vendor on self-serve options and discuss how they will fulfill these requirements. Similar to other processes, work internally to define a list of services your organization is providing that you can pass over to the outsourcer to convert to a service catalog.

    Use Info-Tech's Sample Enterprise Services document to start determining your business's services.

    Assess admin rights in your outsourcing plan to give access to the outsourcer while you keep ownership

    Provide accessibility to account management to improve self-service, which enables:

    • Group owners to be named who can add or remove people from their operating units
    • Users to update attributes such as photos, address, phone number
    • Synchronization with HRIS (Human Resource Information Systems) to enable two-way communication on attribute updates
    • Password reset self-service

    Ensure the vendor has access rights to execute regular clean up to help:

    • Find stale and inactive user and computer accounts (inactive, expired, stale, never logged in)
    • Bulk move and disable capabilities
    • Find empty groups and remove
    • Find and assess NTFS permissions
    • Automated tasks to search and remediate

    Give admin rights to outsourcer to enable reporting and auditing capabilities, such as:

    • Change tracking and notifications
    • Password reset attempts, account unlocks, permission and account changes
    • Anomaly detection and remediation
    • Privilege abuse, such as password sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Provide your MSP with access rights to enable the service desk to have account management without giving too much authentication. This way you'll enable moving tickets to the outsourcer while you keep ownership and supervision.

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    1-2 hours

    This activity is an expansion to the outcomes of activity 1.2.1, where you determined the outsourcing requirements and the party to deliver each requirement.

    1. Add your identified tasks from the requirements database library to the service desk responsibility matrix (section 4.2 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template).
    2. Break each task down into more details. For instance, incident management may include tier 1, tier 2/3, KB creation and update, reporting, and auditing.
    3. Refer to section 4.1 of your Project Charter to review the responsible party for each use case.
    4. Considering the use cases, assess whether your organization, the MSP, or both parties will be responsible for the task.
    5. Document the results in section 4.2 of the RFP.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Responsible party to deliver each task

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Step 3.2

    Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    Activities

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    3.2.4 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews and evaluate responses for each vendor

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk outsourcing RFP
    • List of service desk outsourcing requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk SLA
    • RFP scores

    Don't rush to judgment; apply due diligence when selecting your vendor

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    1. Call around to get referrals for each vendor
    2. Create a shortlist
    3. Review SLAs and contract terms
    4. Select your vendor

    Recognize warning signs in the MSP's proposal to ensure a successful negotiation

    Vendors often include certain conditions in their proposals that masquerade as appealing but may spell disaster. Watch for these red flags:

    1. Discounted Price
      • Vendors know the market value of their competitors' services. Price is not what sets them apart; it's the type of services offered as well as the culture present.
      • A noticeably low price is often indicative of a desperate organization that is not focused on quality managed services.
    2. No Pushback
      • Vendors should work to customize their proposal to suit both their capabilities and your needs. No pushback means they are not invested in your project as deeply as they should be.
      • You should be prepared for and welcome negotiations; they're a sign that both sides are reaching a mutually beneficial agreement.
    3. Continual SLA Improvement
      • Continual improvement is a good quality that your vendor should have, but it needs to have some strategic direction.
      • Throwing continual SLA improvement into the deal may seem great, but make sure that you'll benefit from the value-added service. Otherwise, you'll be paying for services that you don't actually need.

    Clearly define core vendor qualities before looking at any options

    Vendor sales and marketing people know just what to say to sway you: don't talk to them until you know what you're looking for.

    Geography

    Do you prefer global or local data centers? Do you need multiple locations for redundancy in case of disaster? Will language barriers be a concern?

    Contract Length

    Ensure you can terminate a poor arrangement by having shorter terms with optional renewals. It's better to renew and renegotiate if one side is losing in the deal in order to keep things fair. Don't assume that proposed long-term cost savings will provide a satisfactory service.

    Target Market

    Vendors are aiming at different business segments, from startups to large enterprises. Some will accept existing virtual machines, and others enforce compliance to appeal to government and health agencies.

    SLA

    A robust SLA strengthens a vendor's reliability and accountability. Agencies with special needs should have room in negotiations for customization. Providers should also account for regular SLA reviews and updates. Vendors should be tracking call volume and making projections that should translate directly to SLAs.

    Support

    Even if you don't need a vendor with 24/7 availability, vendors who cannot support this timing should be eliminated. You may want to upgrade later and will want to avoid the hassle of switching.

    Maturity

    Vendors must have the willingness and ability to improve processes and efficiencies over time. Maintaining the status-quo isn't acceptable in the constantly evolving IT world.

    Cost

    Consider which model makes the most sense: will you go with per call or per user pricing? Which model will generate vendor motivation to continually improve and meet your long-term goals? Watch out for variable pricing models.

    Define your SLA requirements so your MSP can create a solution that fits

    SLAs ensure accountability from the service provider and determine service price

    SLAs define the performance of the service desk and clarify what the provider and customer can expect in their outsourcing relationship.

    • Service categories
    • The acceptable range of end-user satisfaction
    • The scope of what functions of the service desk are being measured (availability, time to resolve, time to respond, etc.)
    • Credits and penalties for achieving or missing targets
    • Frequency of measurement/reporting
    • Provisions and penalties for ending the contractual relationship early
    • Management and communication structure
    • Escalation protocol for incidents relating to tiers 2 or 3

    Each MSP's RFP response will help you understand their basic SLA terms and enhanced service offerings. You need to understand the MSP's basic SLA terms to make sure they are adequate enough for your requirements. A well-negotiated SLA will balance the requirements of the customer and limit the liability of the provider in a win/win scenario.

    For more information on defining service level requirements, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements.

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    2-3 hours

    • As a team, review your current service desk SLA for the following items:
      • Response time
      • Resolution time
      • Escalation time
      • End-user satisfaction
      • Service availability
    • Use the sample table as a starting point to determine your current incident management SLA:
    • Determine your SLA expectations from the outsourcer.
    • Document your SLA expectations in section 4.4 of the RFP template.

    Participants: IT Managers, Service Desk Manager, Project Team

    Response
    PriorityResponse SLOResolution SLOEscalation Time
    T1
    Severity 1CriticalWithin 10 minutes4 hours to resolveImmediate
    Severity 2HighWithin 1 business hour8 business hours to resolve20 minutes
    Severity 3MediumWithin 4 business hours24 business hours to resolveAfter 20 minutes without progress
    Severity 4LowSame day (8 hours)72 business hours to resolve After 1 hour without progress
    SLO ResponseTime it takes for service desk to respond to service request or incident. Target response is 80% of SLO
    SLO ResolutionTime it takes to resolve incident and return business services to normal. Target resolution is 80% of SLO

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Get a detailed plan from your selected vendor before signing a contract

    Build a standard process to evaluate candidate vendors

    Use section 5 of Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template for commonly used questions and requirements for outsourcing the service desk. Ask the right questions to secure an agreement that meets your needs. If you are already in a contract with an MSP, tale the opportunity of contract renewal to improve the contract and service.

    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Add your finalized assessment questions into Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool to aggregate responses in one repository for comparison. Since the vendors are asked to respond in a standard format, it is easier to bring together all the responses to create a complete view of your options.

    This is an image of the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    1-2 hours

    Include the right requirements for your organization and analyze candidate vendors on their capability to satisfy them.

    1. Use section 5 of the RFP template to convert your determined requirements into questions to address in vendor briefings.
    2. Review the questions in the context of near- and long-term service desk outsourcing needs. In the template, we have separated requirements into 7 categories:
      • Vendor Requirements (VR)
      • Vendor Qualifications/Engagement/Administration Capabilities (VQ)
      • Service Operations (SO)
      • Service Support (SS)
      • Service Level Agreement (SLA)
      • Transition Processes (TP)
      • Account Management (AM)
    3. Define the priority for each question:
      • Required
      • Desired
      • Optional
    4. Leave the compliance and comments to when you brief with vendors.

    Input

    • Technical and functional requirements

    Output

    • Priority level for each requirement
    • Completed list of requirement questions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    2-3 hours

    1. Enter the requirements questions into the RFP Scoring Tool and use it during vendor briefings.
    2. Copy the Required and Desired priority requirements from the previous activity into the RFP Questions column.
    3. Evaluate each RFP response against the RFP criteria based on the scoring scale.
    4. The Results section in the tool shows the vendor ranking based on their overall scores.
    5. Compare potential outsourcing partners considering scores on individual requirements categories and based on overall scores.

    Input

    • Completed list of requirement questions
    • Priority level for each requirement

    Output

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Director/CIO

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.3 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews, and evaluate responses for each vendor

    1. Outline a list of questions to conduct reference interviews with past/present clients of your candidate vendors.
    2. Use the reference interview template as a starting point. As a group review the questions and edit them to a list that will fulfill your requirements.
    3. Ask your candidate vendors to provide you with a list of three to five clients that have/had used their services. Make sure that vendors enforce the interview will be kept anonymous and names and results won't be disclosed.
    4. Ask vendors to book a 20-30 minute call with you and their client.
    5. Document your interview comments in your updated reference interview template.
    6. Update the RFP scoring tool accordingly.

    Input

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Output

    • Updated list of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Compare pricing models of outsourcing services

    It's a common sales tactic to use a low price as an easy solution. Carefully evaluate the vendors on your short-list and ensure that SLAs, culture, and price all match to your organization.

    Research different pricing models and accurately assess which model fits your organization. Consider the following pricing models:

    Pay per technician

    In this model, a flat rate is allocated to agents tackling your service desk tickets. This is a good option for building long-term relationship with outsourcer's agents and efficient knowledge transfer to the external team; however, it's not ideal for small organizations that deal with few tickets. This is potentially an expensive model for small teams.

    Pay per ticket

    This model considers the number of tickets handled by the outsourcer. This model is ideal if you only want to pay for your requirement. Although the internal team needs to have a close monitoring strategy to make sure the outsourcer's efficiency in ticket resolution.

    Pay per call

    This is based on outbound and inbound calls. This model is proper for call centers and can be less expensive than the other models; however, tracking is not easy, as you should ensure service desk calls result in efficient resolution rather than unnecessary follow-up.

    Pay per time (minutes or hours)

    The time spent on tickets is considered in this model. With this model, you pay for the work done by agents, so that it may be a good and relatively cheap option. As quicker resolution SLA is usually set by the organization, customer satisfaction may drop, as agents will be driven to faster resolution, not necessarily quality of work.

    Pay per user

    This model is based on number of all users, or number of users for particular applications. In this model, correlation between number of users and number of tickets should be taken into account. This is an ideal model if you want to deal with impact of staffing changes on service price. Although you should first track metrics such as mean time to resolve and average number of tickets so you can prevent unnecessary payment based on number of users when most users are not submitting tickets.

    Step 3.3

    Manage the outsource relationship

    Activities

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk SLA
    • List of impacted stakeholder groups
    • List of impacts and benefits of the outsourced service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Vendor management strategy

    Ensure formality of your vendor management practice

    A service desk outsourcing project is an ongoing initiative. Build a relationship plan to make sure the outsourcer complies with the agreement.

    This is an iamge of the cycle of relationship management and pre-contract management.

    Monitor Vendor Performance

    Key Activity:

    Measure performance levels with an agreed upon standard scorecard.

    Manage Vendor Risk

    Key Activity:

    Periodical assessment of the vendors to ensure they are meeting compliance standards.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Manage the contracts and renewal dates, the level of demand for the services/products provided, and the costs accrued.

    COMPLETE Identify and Evaluate Vendors

    Key Activity:
    Develop a plan with procurement and key internal stakeholders to define clear, consistent, and stable requirements.

    COMPLETE Select a Vendor

    Key Activity:
    Develop a consistent and effective process for selecting the most appropriate vendor.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Contracts are consistently negotiated to ensure the vendor and the client have a documented and consistent understanding of mutual expectations.

    Expect the vendor to manage processes according to your standards

    You need this level of visibility into the service desk process, whether in-house or outsourced

    Each of these steps requires documentation – either through standard operating procedures, SLAs, logs, or workflow diagrams.

    • Define key operating procedures and workflows
    • Record, classify, and prioritize tickets
    • Verify, approve, and fulfill tickets
    • Investigate, diagnose, and allocate tickets
    • Resolve, recover, and close tickets
    • Track and report

    "Make sure what they've presented to you is exactly what's happening."
    – Service Desk Manager, Financial Services

    Manage the vendor relationship through regular communication

    Regular contact with your MSP provides opportunities to address issues that emerge

    Designate a relationship manager to act as a liaison at the business to be a conduit between the business and the MSP.

    • The relationship manager will take feedback from the MSP and relate it back to you to bridge the technical and business gap between the two.

    Who should be involved

    • Routine review meetings should involve the MSP and your relationship manager.
    • Technical knowledge may be needed to address specific issues, but business knowledge and relationship management skills are absolutely required.
    • Other stakeholders and people who are deeply invested in the vendor relationship should be invited or at least asked to contribute questions and concerns.

    What is involved

    • Full review of the service desk statistics, escalations, staffing changes, process changes, and drivers of extra billing or cost.
    • Updates to key documentation for the issues listed above and changes to the knowledgebase.
    • Significant drivers of customer satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
    • Changes that have/are being proposed that can impact any of the above.

    Communicate changes to end users to avoid push back and get buy-in

    Top-down processes for outsourcing will leave end users in the dark

    • Your service desk staff has been involved in the outsourcing process the entire time, but end users are affected all the same.
    • The service desk is the face of IT. A radical shift in service processes and points of contact can be detrimental to not only the service desk, but all of IT.
    • Communicating the changes early to end users will both help them cope with the change and help the MSP achieve better results.
      • An internal communication plan should be rolled out in order to inform and educate end users about the changes associated with outsourcing the service desk.
    • Your relationship manager should be tasked with communicating the changes to end users. The focus should be on addressing questions or concerns about the transition while highlighting the value gained through outsourcing to an MSP.
    • Service quality is a two-way street; the end user needs to be informed of proper protocols and points of contact so that the service desk technicians can fulfill their duties to the best of their ability.

    "When my company decided to outsource, I performed the same role but for a different company. There was a huge disruption to the business flow and a lack of communication to manage the change. The transition took weeks before any end users figured out what the new processes were for submitting a ticket and who to ask for help, and from a personal side, it became difficult to maintain relationships with colleagues."
    – IT Specialist for a financial institution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Educate the enterprise on expectations and processes that are handled by the MSP. Identify stakeholder groups affected by the outsourced processes then build a communication plan on what's been changed, what the benefits are, and how they will be impacted. Determine a timeline for communicating these initiatives and how these announcements will be made. Use InfoTech's Sample Communication Plan as a starting point.

    Build a continual improvement plan to make sure your MSP is efficiently delivering services according to expectations

    Ensure that your quality assurance program is repeatable and applicable to the outsourced services

    1. Design a QA scorecard that can help you assess steps the outsourcer agents should follow. Keep the questionnaire high level but specific to your environment. The scorecard should include questions that follow the steps to take considering your intake channels. For instance, if end users can reach the service desk via phone, chat, and email, build your QA around assessing customer service for call, chat, and ticket quality.
    2. Build a training program for agents: Develop an internal monitoring plan to relay detailed feedback to your MSP. Assess performance and utilize KBs as training materials for coaching agents on challenging transactions.
    3. Everything that goes to your service desk has to be documented; there will be no organic transfer of knowledge and experience.
    4. You need to let your MSP know how their efforts are impacting the performance of your organization. Measure your internal performance against the external performance of your service desk.
    5. Constant internal check-ins ensure that your MSP is meeting the SLAs outlined in the RFP.
    6. Routine reporting of metrics and ticket trends allow you to enact problem management. Otherwise, you risk your MSP operating your service desk with no internal feedback from its owner.
    7. Use metrics to determine the service desk functionality.

    Consider the success story of your outsourced service desk

    Build a feedback program for your outsourced services. Utilize transactional surveys to discover and tell outsourcing success to the impacted stakeholders.

    Ensure you apply steps for providing feedback to make sure processes are handled as expected. Service desk is the face of IT. Customer satisfaction on ticket transactions reflects satisfaction with IT and the organization.

    Build customer satisfaction surveys and conduct them for every transaction to get a better sense of outsourced service desk functionality. Collaborate with the vendor to make sure you build a proper strategy.

    • Build a right list of questions. Multiple and lengthy questions may lead to survey taking fatigue. Make sure you ask the right questions and give an option to the customer to comment any additional notes.
    • Give the option to users to rate the transaction. Make the whole process very seamless and doable in a few seconds.
    • Ensure to follow-up on negative feedback. This will help you find gaps in services and provide training to improve customer service.

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    1 hour

    1. In this project, you determined the KPIs based on your service desk objectives (activity 2.2.2).
    2. Refer to your list of metrics in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter.
    3. Think about what story you want to tell and determine what factors will help move the narrative.
    4. Discuss how often you would like to track these metrics. Determine the audience for each metric.
    5. Provide the list to the MSP to create reports with auto-distribution.

    Input

    • Determined CSFs and KPIs

    Output

    • List of metrics to track, including frequency to report and audience to report to

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Reward the MSP for performance instead of "punishing" them for service failure

    Turn your vendor into a true partner by including an "earn back" condition in the contract

    MSPs often offer clients credit requests (service credits) for their service failures, which are applied to the previous month's monthly recurring charge. They are applied to the last month's MRC (monthly reoccurring charges) at the end of term and then the vendor pays out the residual.

    However, while common, service credits are not always perceived to be a strong incentive for the provider to continually focus on improvement of mean-time-to-respond/mean-time-to-resolve.

    • Engage the vendor as a true partner within a relationship only based upon Service Credits.
    • Suggest the vendor include a minor change to the non-performance processes within the final agreement: the vendor implements an "earn back" condition in the agreement.
    • Where a bank of service credits exists because of non-performance, if the provider exceeds the SLA performance metrics for a number of consecutive months (two is common), then an amount of any prior credits received by client is returned to the provider as an earn back for improved performance.
    • This can be a useful mechanism to drive improved performance.

    Measure the outsourced service desk ROI constantly to drive efficient decisions for continual improvement or an exit plan

    Efficient outsourced service desk causes positive impacts on business satisfaction. To address the true value of the services outsourced, you should evaluate the return on investment (ROI) in these areas: Emotional ROI, Time ROI, Financial ROI

    Emotional ROI

    Service desk's main purpose should be to provide topnotch services to end users. Build a customer experience program and leverage transactional surveys and relationship surveys to constantly analyze customer feedback on service quality.

    Ask yourself:

    • How have the outsourced services improved customer satisfaction?
    • How has the service desk impacted the business brand?
    • Have these services improved agents' job satisfaction?
    • What is the NPS score of the service desk?
    • What should we do to reduce the detractor rate and improve satisfaction leveraging the outsourced service desk?

    Time ROI

    Besides customer satisfaction, SLA commitment is a big factor to consider when conducting ROI analysis.

    Ask these questions:

    • Have we had improvement in FCR?
    • What are the mean time to resolve incidents and mean time to fulfill requests?
    • Is the cost incurred to outsourced services worth improvement in such metrics?

    Financial ROI

    As already mentioned in Phase 1, the main motivation for outsourcing the service desk should not be around cost reduction, but to improve performance. Regardless, it's still important to understand the financial implications of your decision.

    To evaluate the financial impact of your outsourced service desk, ask these questions:

    • How much have the outsourced services impacted our business financially?
    • How much are we paying compared to when it was done internally?
    • Considering the emotional, time, and effort factors, is it worth bringing the services in house or changing the vendor?

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3-4 hours

    1. Refer to the results of activity 2.2.2. for the list of metrics and the metrics dashboard over the past quarter.
    2. Consider emotional and time ROI, assess end-user satisfaction and SLA, and run a report comparison with the baseline that you built prior to outsourcing the service desk.
    3. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you stay with the vendor.
    4. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you switch the vendor.
    5. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you repatriate the service desk.
    6. Estimate the non-recurring costs associated with the move, such as the penalty for early contract termination, data center moving costs, and cost of potential business downtime during the move. Sum them to determine the investment.
    7. Calculate the return on investment. Discuss and decide whether the organization should consider rehabilitating the vendor agreement or ending the partnership.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    For more information on conducting this activity, refer to InfoTech's blueprint Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    Define exit conditions to complete your contract with your MSP

    The end of outsourcing is difficult. Your organization needs to maintain continuity of service during the transition. Your MSP needs to ensure that its resources can be effectively transitioned to the next deployment with minimal downtime. It is crucial to define your exit conditions so that both sides can prepare accordingly.

    • Your exit conditions must be clearly laid out in the contract. Create a list of service desk functions and metrics that are important to your organization's success. If your MSP is not meeting those needs or performance levels, you should terminate your services.
    • Most organizations accomplish this through a clear definition of hard and measurable KPIs and metrics that must be achieved and what will happen in the case these metrics are not being regularly met. If your vendor doesn't meet these requirements as defined in your contract, you then have a valid reason and the ability to leave the agreement.

    Examples of exit conditions:

    • Your MSP did not meet their SLAs on priority 1 or 2 tickets two times within a month.
    • If they didn't meet the SLA twice in that 30 days, you could terminate the contract penalty-free.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If things start going south with your MSP, negotiate a "get well plan." Outline your problems to the MSP and have them come back to you with a list of how they're going to fix these problems to get well before you move forward with the contract.

    Try to rehabilitate before you repatriate

    Switching service providers or ending the contract can be expensive and may not solve your problems. Try to rehabilitate your vendor relationship before immediately ending it.

    You may consider terminating your outsourcing agreement if you are dissatisfied with the current agreement or there has been a change in circumstances (either the vendor has changed, or your organization has changed).

    Before doing so, consider the challenges:

    1. It can be very expensive to switch providers or end a contract.
    2. Switching vendors can be a large project involving transfer of knowledge, documentation, and data.
    3. It can be difficult to maintain service desk availability, functionality, and reliability during the transition.

    Diagnose the cause of the problem before assuming it's the MSP's fault. The issue may lie with poorly defined requirements and processes, lack of communication, poor vendor management, or inappropriate SLAs. Re-assess your strategy and re-negotiate your contract if necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There are many reasons why outsourcing relationships fail, but it's not always the vendor's fault.

    Clients often think their MSP isn't doing a great job, but a lot of the time the reason comes back to the client. They may not have provided sufficient documentation on processes, were not communicating well, didn't have a regular point of contact, and weren't doing regular service reviews. Before exiting the relationship, evaluate why it's not working and try to fix things first.

    Don't stop with an exit strategy, you also need to develop a transition plan

    Plan out your transition timeline, taking into account current contract terms and key steps required. Be prepared to handle tickets immediately upon giving notice.

    • Review your outsourcing contract with legal counsel to identify areas of concern for lock-in or breech.
    • Complete a cost/benefit analysis.
    • Bring intellectual property (including ticket data, knowledge base articles, and reports) back in-house (if you'd like to repatriate the service desk) or transfer to the next service desk vendor (if you're outsourcing to another MSP).
    • Review and update service desk standard processes (escalation, service levels, ticket templates, etc.).
    • Procure service desk software, licenses, and necessary hardware as needed.
    • Train the staff (internal for repatriating the service desk, or external for the prospective MSP).
    • Communicate the transition plan and be prepared to start responding to tickets immediately.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Develop a transition plan about six months before the contract notice date. Be proactive by constantly tracking the MSP, running ROI analyses and training staff before moving the services to the internal team or the next MSP. This will help you manage the transition smoothly and handle intake channels so that upon potential exit, users won't be disrupted.

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    3-4 hours

    Create a plan to be prepared in case you need to end your contract with the MSP early.

    Your exit strategy should encompass both the conditions under which you would need to end your contract with the MSP and the next steps you will take to transition your services.

    1. Define the exit conditions you plan to negotiate into your contract with the MSP:
      • Identify the performance levels you will require your MSP to meet.
      • Identify the actions you expect the MSP to take if they fail to meet these performance levels.
      • Identify the conditions under which you would leave the contract early.
    2. Develop a strategy for transitioning services in the event you need to leave your contract with the MSP:
      • Will you hand the responsibility to a new MSP or repatriate the service desk back in-house?
      • How will you maintain services through the transition?
    3. Document your exit strategy in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now re-envisioned your service desk by building a solid strategy for outsourcing it to a vendor. You first analyzed your challenges with the current service desk and evaluated the benefits of outsourcing services. Then you went through requirements assessment to find out which processes should be outsourced. Thereafter, you developed an RFP to communicate your proposal and evaluate the best candidates.

    You have also developed a continual improvement plan to ensure the outsourcer provides services according to your expectations. Through this plan, you're making sure to build a good relationship through incentivizing the vendor for accomplishments rather than punishing for service failures. However, you've also contemplated an exit plan in the RFP for potential consistent service failures.

    Ideally, this blueprint has helped you go beyond requirements identification and served as a means to change your mindset and strategy for outsourcing the service desk efficiently to gain long-term benefits.

    if you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    This is a picture of Info-Tech analyst Mahmoud Ramin

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot of activity 1.2.1 found in this blueprint

    Identify Processes to Outsource
    Identify service desk tasks that will provide the most value upon outsourcing.

    This is a screenshot of activity 3.2.2 found in this blueprint

    Score Candidate Vendors
    Evaluate vendors on their capabilities for satisfying your service desk requirements.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    • Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    • There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    • There must be 50 ways to leave your vendor.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yev Khovrenkov; Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Kamil Salagan; I&O Manager, Bartek Ingredients

    Satish Mekerira; VP of IT, Coherus BioSciences

    Kris Krishan; Head of IT and Business Systems, Waymo

    Kris Arthur; Infra & Security Director, SEKO Logistics

    Valance Howden; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sandi Conrad; Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham Price; Senior Director of Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Barry Cousins; Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Tauschek; VP of I&O Research, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin Stahl; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Yong; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    A special thank-you to five anonymous contributors

    Bibliography

    Allnutt, Charles. "The Ultimate List of Outsourcing Statistics." MicroSourcing, 2022. Accessed July 2022.
    "Considerations for outsourcing the service desk. A guide to improving your service desk and service delivery performance through outsourcing." Giva. Accessed May 2022.
    Hurley, Allison. "Service Desk Outsourcing | Statistics, Challenges, & Benefits." Forward BPO Inc., 2019. Accessed June 2022.
    Mtsweni, Patricia, et al. "The impact of outsourcing information technology services on business operations." South African Journal of Information Management, 2021, Accessed May 2022.
    "Offshore, Onshore or Hybrid–Choosing the Best IT Outsourcing Model." Calance, 2021. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) Foundation Body of Knowledge." Scopism, 2020. Accessed May 2022.
    Shultz, Aaron. "IT Help Desk Outsourcing Pricing Models Comparison." Global Help Desk Services. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Shultz, Aaron. "4 Steps to Accurately Measure the ROI of Outsourced Help Desk Services" Global Help Desk Services, Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Sunberg, John. "Great Expectations: What to Look for from Outsourced Service Providers Today." HDI. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Walters, Grover. "Pivotal Decisions in outsourcing." Muma Case Review, 2019. Accessed May 2022.
    Wetherell, Steve. "Outsourced IT Support Services: 10 Steps to Better QA" Global Held Desk Services. Accessed May 2022. Web.

    Improve Email Security

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}272|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture

    As the sophistication of malicious attacks increases, it has become more difficult to ensure applications such as email software are properly protected and secured. The increase in usage and traffic of email exacerbates the security risks to the organization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Email has changed. Your email security needs to evolve as well to ensure you are protecting your organization’s communication.

    Impact and Result

    • Gain an understanding of the importance of email security and steps to secure your corporate email.
    • Develop holistic guidelines on implementing best practices to modernize your organization’s email security.

    Improve Email Security Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Improve Email Security Storyboard – A guide to best practices for improving an organization’s email security.

    This research provides guidelines to assist organizations in identifying controls to secure their emails along with recommendations on the most common and effective controls to secure and protect corporate emails.

    • Improve Email Security Storyboard

    2. Email Security Checklist – A checklist tool that enables organizations to monitor their progress in implementing controls to improve their email security.

    This checklist of common email security categories and their associated controls helps ensure organizations are following best practices.

    • Email Security Checklist
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Improve Email Security

    Follow the latest best practices for email security to mitigate evolving threats.

    Analyst Perspective

    Protecting your organization’s digital assets begins with securing your email communication.

    As organizations increasingly rely on email communication for day-to-day business operations, threat actors are exploiting the increased traction to develop and implement more sophisticated email-based attacks. Furthermore, the lack of investment in measures, tools, and technologies for an organization’s email security exacerbates the vulnerabilities at hand.

    Effective use of security procedures and techniques can mitigate and minimize email-based threats have been shown to reduce the ability of these attacks to infiltrate the email inbox. These guidelines and best practices will help your organization conduct due diligence to protect the contents of the email, its transit, and its arrival to the authorized recipient.

    Ahmad Jowhar, Research Specialist, Security & Privacy

    Ahmad Jowhar
    Research Specialist, Security & Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
    • As malicious attacks get increasingly sophisticated, it has become more difficult to ensure applications such as email software are properly protected and secured.
    • The increased usage and traffic of emails, as well as their contents, exacerbates security risks to the organization.
    • Given the variety of email security controls, it can be complicated to identify the most important techniques for improving your organization’s email security.
    • Understand the importance of implementing email security for your organization.
    • Develop a holistic guideline for implementing best practices to secure your organization’s emails.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Email has changed. Your email security must evolve to ensure the safety of your organization’s communication.

    Your Challenge

    As a security leader, you need to modernize your email security services so you can protect business communications and prevent security incidents.

    • Various factors must be considered when deciding how best to safeguard your organization’s communication chain. This includes the frequency of email traffic and the contents of emails.
    • The increased number of email-based cyberattacks reveals the sophistication of threat actors in leveraging an organization’s lack of email security to infiltrate their business.
    • As organizations continue to rely heavily on email communication, email-based threats will become increasingly prevalent.

    75% of organizations have experienced an increase in email-based threats.

    97% of security breaches are due to phishing attacks.

    82% of companies reported a higher volume of email in 2022.

    Source: Mimecast, 2023.

    Modern email security controls framework for security leaders

    Email has changed. Your email security must evolve to ensure the safety of your organization’s communication.

    Modern email security controls framework for security leaders

    Understand the best practices in securing your organization’s emails

    Enhance your security posture by modernizing your email security
    Email has changed. Your email security must evolve to ensure the safety of your organization’s communication.

    Deploy an added layer of defense by preventing the contents of your email from being intercepted.

    Encrypting your email communication will provide an additional layer of protection which only allows authorized users to read the email.

    Leverage triple-threat authentication controls to strengthen your email security.

    Leveraging SPF, DKIM, and DMARC enables you to have the proper authentication controls in place, ensuring that only legitimate users are part of the email communication.

    Protect the contents of your email through data classification and data loss prevention.

    Having tools and technologies in place to ensure that data is classified and backed up will enable better storage, analysis, and processing of the email.

    Implement email policies for a holistic email security protection.

    Policies ensure acceptable standards are in place to protect the organization’s assets, including the creation, attachment, sending, and receiving of emails.

    User awareness and training
    Training employees on protecting their corporate emails adds an extra layer of defense by ensuring end users are aware of various email-based threats and can confidently safeguard their organizations from attacks.

    Email encryption

    Deploy an added layer of defense by preventing the contents of your email from being intercepted.

    • Protecting your organization’s emails begins by ensuring only the appropriate recipients can receive and read the email’s contents.
    • This process includes encrypting the email’s contents to protect sensitive information from being read by unauthorized recipients.
    • This protects the contents even if the email is intercepted by anyone besides the intended recipient.
    • Other benefits of email encryption include:
      • Reducing any risks associated with regulatory violations.
      • Enabling business to confidently communicate sensitive information via email.
      • Ensuring protective measures taken to prevent data loss and corporate policy violations.

    Along with the increased use of emails, organizations are seeing an increase in the number of attacks orchestrating from emails. This has resulted in 74% of organizations seeing an increase in email-based threats.

    Source: Mimecast, 2023.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Encrypting your email communication will provide an additional layer of protection which only allows authorized users to read the email.

    Implementing email encryption

    Leverage these protocols and tools to help encrypt your email.

    • The most common email encryption protocols and tools include:
      • Transport Layer Security (TLS): A cryptographic protocol designed to securely deliver data via the internet, which prevents third parties from intercepting and accessing the data.
      • Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (S/MIME): A protocol for sending digitally signed and encrypted messages by leveraging public key encryption to provide at-rest and in-transit data protection.
      • Secure Email Gateway: An email security solution that inspects emails for malicious content prior to it reaching the corporate system. The solution is positioned between the public internet and corporate email servers. An email gateway solution would be provided by a third-party vendor and can be implemented on-premises, through the cloud, or hybrid.
    • Email encryption policies can also be implemented to ensure processes are in place when sending sensitive information through emails.
    • Email encryption ensures end-to-end privacy for your email and is especially important when the email requires strict content privacy.

    Email authentication

    Three authentication controls your organization should leverage to stay secure.

    • Along with content encryption, it’s important to authenticate both the sender and recipient of an email to ensure that only legitimate users are able to send and receive it.
    • Implementing email authentication techniques prevents unsolicited email (e.g. spam) from entering your mailbox.
    • This also prevents unauthorized users from sending email on your organization’s behalf.
    • Having these standards in place would safeguard your organization from spam, spoofing, and phishing attacks.
    • The three authentication controls include:
      • Sender Policy Framework (SPF): Email validation control that verifies that the incoming email is from an authorized list of IP addresses provided by the sender’s domain administrator.
      • DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM): Enables recipients to verify that an email from a specific domain was authorized by the domain’s owner. This is conducted through cryptographic authentication by adding a digital signature to the message headers of outbound emails.
      • Domain Message Authentication Reporting & Conformance (DMARC): Provides domain-level protection of email channel by publishing DMARC records in the organization’s domain name system (DNS) and creates policies which prompts actions to take if an email fails authentication.

    Although these authentication controls are available for organizations to leverage, the adoption rate remains low. 73% of survey respondents indicated they didn’t deploy email authentication controls within their organization.

    Source: Mimecast, 2023.

    Email authentication controls

    All three authentication controls should be implemented to effectively secure your organization’s email. They ensure the emails you send and receive are securely authorized and legitimate.

    SPF DKIM DMARC

    Creating an SPF record identifies which IP addresses are allowed to send emails from your domain. Steps to implement SPF include the following:

    1. Create an SPF record by identifying the IP addresses that are authorized to send emails.
    2. Publish your SPF record into your DNS by creating a TXT record on your domain.

    Implementing DKIM helps prevent attackers from sending emails that pretend to come from your domain. Steps to implement DKIM include the following:

    1. Identify and enable domains you wish to configure DKIM to create DKIM keys.
    2. Copy the canonical names (CNAMEs) that are provided.
    3. Publish the CNAME records to your DNS service provider.

    Setting up DMARC ensures emails are validated and defines actions to take if an email fails authentication. These include:

    • None: Message is delivered to recipient and a DMARC report is sent to domain owner.
    • Quarantine: Message moved to quarantine folder and recipient is notified.
    • Reject: Message is not delivered to the recipient.
    • Steps to implement DMARC include:
    1. Create a DMARC record by including your organization’s email domain and IP addresses.
    2. Form a DMARC TXT record for your domain to include policies and publish it to your DNS.

    For more information:

    Data classification

    Ensure sensitive data is securely processed, analyzed, and stored.

    • Besides authenticating the legitimacy of an email and its traffic to the recipient, it’s important to have procedures in place to protect the contents of an email.
    • Data classification is found not only in databases and spreadsheets, but also in the email messages being communicated. Examples of data most commonly included in emails:
      • Personal identifiable information (PII): social security number, financial account number, passcodes/passwords
    • Applying data classification to your email can help identify the sensitivity of the information it contains. This ensures any critical data within an email message is securely processed and protected against unauthorized use, theft, and loss.
    • Emails can be classified based on various sensitivity levels. such as:
      • Top secret, public, confidential, internal

    Discover and Classify Your Data

    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for guidelines on implementing a data classification program for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Having tools and technologies in place to ensure that data is classified and backed up will enable better storage, analysis, and processing of the email.

    Data loss prevention (DLP)

    Protect your data from being lost/stolen.

    • Protecting an email’s contents through data classification is only one approach for improving email security. Having a data loss prevention solution would further increase security by minimizing the threat of sensitive information leaving your organization’s email network.
    • Examples of tools embedded in DLP solutions that help monitor an organization's email communication:
      • Monitoring data sent and received from emails: This ensures the data within an email communication is protected with the necessary encryption based on its sensitivity.
      • Detecting suspicious email activity: This includes analyzing users’ email behavior regarding email attachments and identifying irregular behaviors.
      • Flagging or blocking email activities which may lead to data loss: This prevents highly sensitive data from being communicated via email and reduces the risk of information being intercepted.
    • The types of DLP technologies that can be leveraged include:
      • Rule-based: Data that has been tagged by admins as sensitive can be blocklisted, which would flag and/or block data from being sent via email.
      • Machine learning: Data on users’ email behavior is collected, processed, and trained to understand the employee’s normal email behavior and detect/flag suspicious activities.
    • Implementing DLP solutions would complement your data classification techniques by ensuring proper measures are in place to secure your organization’s assets through policies, technology, and tools.

    48% of employees have accidently attached the wrong file to an email.

    39% of respondents have accidently sent emails that contained security information such as passwords and passcodes.

    Source: Tessian, 2021.

    User awareness & training

    A strong security awareness & training program is an important element of strengthening your email security.

    • Having all these tools and techniques in place to improve your email security will not be effective unless you also improve your employees’ awareness.
    • Employees should participate in email security training, especially since the majority utilize this channel of communication for day-to-day operations.
    • User awareness and training should go beyond phishing campaigns and should highlight the various types of email-based threats, the characteristics of these threats, and what procedures they can follow to minimize these threats.
    • 95% of data breaches are caused by human error. It can take nine months to discover and contain them, and they are expected to cost $8 trillion this year (Mimecast, 2023).
    • Investments in employee awareness and training would mitigate these risks by ensuring employees recognize and report suspicious emails, remain mindful of what type of data to share via email, and improve their overall understanding of the importance of email security.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users

    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for assistance on creating various user training materials and empower your employees to become a main line of defense for your organization.

    64% of organizations conduct formal training sessions (in-person or computer-based).

    74% of organizations only focus on providing phishing-based training.

    Source: Proofpoint, 2021.

    Examples of email-based threats

    Phishing
    Email sent by threat actors designed to manipulate end user into providing sensitive information by posing as a trustworthy source

    Business Email Compromise
    Attackers trick a user into sending money or providing confidential information

    Spam
    Users receive unsolicited email, usually in bulk, some of which contains malware

    Spear Phishing
    A type of phishing attack where the email is sent to specific and targeted emails within the organization

    Whaling
    A type of phishing attack similar to spear phishing, but targeting senior executives within the organization

    Password/Email Exposure
    Employees use organizational email accounts and passwords to sign up for social media, leaving them susceptible to email and/or password exposure in a social media breach

    Email policies

    Having policies in place will enable these controls to be implemented.

    Developing security policies that are reasonable, auditable, enforceable, and measurable ensures proper procedures are followed and necessary measures are implemented to protect the organization. Policies relating to email security can be categorized into two groups:

    • User policy: Policies employees must adhere to when using their corporate email. Examples:
      • User acceptance of technology: Acknowledgment of legitimate and restrictive actions when using corporate email
      • Security awareness and training: Acknowledging completion of email security training
    • Administrator-set policy: Policies that are implemented by IT and/or security admins. Examples:
      • Email backup: Policy on how long emails should be archived and processes for disposing of them
      • Log retention: Policy on how to retain, process, and analyze logs created from email servers
      • Throttling: Policies that limit the number of emails sent by a sender and the number of recipients per email and per day depending on the employee’s grouping

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for assistance on developing and deploying actionable policies and creating an overall policy management lifecycle to keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Policies ensure acceptable standards are in place to protect the organization’s assets, including the creation, attachment, sending, and receiving of emails.

    Email security technologies & tools (SoftwareReviews)

    SoftwareReviews, a division of Info-Tech Research Group, provides enterprise software reviews to help organizations make more efficient decisions during the software selection process. Reviews are provided by authenticated IT professionals who have leveraged the software and provide unbiased insights on different vendors and their products.

    Learn from the collective knowledge of real IT professionals.

    • Know the products and features available.
    • Explore modules and detailed feature-level data.
    • Quickly understand the market.

    Evaluate market leaders through vendor rankings and awards.

    • Convince stakeholders with professional reports.
    • Avoid pitfalls with unfiltered data from real users.
    • Choose software with confidence.

    Cut through misleading marketing material.

    • Negotiate contracts based on data.
    • Know what to expect before you sign.
    • Effectively manage the vendor.

    Email security technologies & tools

    Leverage these tools for an enhanced email security solution.

    Email Security Checklist

    Follow these guidelines to ensure you are implementing best practices for securing your organization’s emails.

    • The Email Security Checklist is a tool to assess the current and future state of your organization’s email security and provides a holistic understanding on monitoring your progress within each category and associated controls.
    • The status column allows you to select the feature’s current implementation status, which includes the following options:
      • Enabled: The feature is deployed within the organization’s network.
      • Implemented: The feature is implemented within the organization’s network, but not yet deployed.
      • Not implemented: The feature has not been enabled or implemented.
    • Comments can be added for each feature to provide details such as indicating the progress on enabling/implementing a feature and why certain features are not yet implemented.

    Email Security Checklist

    Download the Email Security Checklist tool

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Discover and Classify Your Data
    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for guidelines on implementing a data classification program for your organization.

    Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users
    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for assistance on creating various user training materials and empower your employees to become a main line of defense for your organization.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies
    Leverage this Info-Tech blueprint for assistance on developing and deploying actionable policies and creating an overall policy management lifecycle to keep your policies current, effective, and compliant.

    Bibliography

    “10 Best Practices for Email Security in 2022.” TitanFile, 22 Sept. 2022. Web.

    “2021 State of the Phish.” Proofpoint, 2021. Web.

    Ahmad, Summra. “11 Email Security Best Practices You Shouldn't Miss (2023).” Mailmunch, 9 Mar. 2023. Web.

    “Blumira's State of Detection and Response.” Blumira, 18 Jan. 2023. Web.

    Clay, Jon. “Email Security Best Practices for Phishing Prevention.” Trend Micro, 17 Nov. 2022. Web.

    Crane, Casey. “6 Email Security Best Practices to Keep Your Business Safe in 2019.” Hashed Out by The SSL Store™, 7 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Hateb, Seif. “Basic Email Security Guide.” Twilio Blog, Twilio, 5 Dec. 2022. Web.

    “How DMARC Advances Email Security.” CIS, 9 July 2021. Web.

    Pal, Suryanarayan. “10 Email Security Best Practices You Should Know in 2023.” Mailmodo, 9 Feb. 2023. Web.

    Pitchkites, Max. “Email Security: A Guide to Keeping Your Inbox Safe in 2023.” Cloudwards, 9 Dec. 2022. Web.

    Rudra, Ahona. “Corporate Email Security Checklist.” PowerDMARC, 4 July 2022. Web.

    “Sender Policy Framework.” Mimecast, n.d. Web.

    Shea, Sharon, and Peter Loshin. “Top 15 Email Security Best Practices for 2023: TechTarget.” TechTarget, 14 Dec. 2022. Web.

    “The Email Security Checklist: Upguard.” UpGuard, 16 Feb. 2022. Web.

    “The State of Email Security 2023.” Mimecast, 2023. Web.

    Wetherald, Harry. “New Product - Stop Employees Emailing the Wrong Attachments.” Tessian, 16 Sept. 2021. Web.

    “What Is DMARC? - Record, Verification & More: Proofpoint Us.” Proofpoint, 9 Mar. 2023. Web.

    “What Is Email Security? - Defining Security of Email: Proofpoint Us.” Proofpoint, 3 Mar.2023. Web.

    Wilton, Laird. “How to Secure Email in Your Business with an Email Security Policy.” Carbide, 31 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Leading Through Uncertainty Workshop Overview

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}474|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $123,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs

    As the world around us changes there is a higher risk that IT productivity and planned priorities will be derailed.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    To meet the challenges of uncertainty head on IT leaders must adapt so their employees are supported and IT departments continue to operate successfully.

    Impact and Result

    • Clearly define and articulate the current and future priorities to provide direction and cultivate hope for the future.
    • Recognize and manage your own reactions to be conscious of how you are showing up and the perceptions others may have.
    • Incorporate the 4Cs of Leading Through Uncertainty into your leadership practice to make sense of the situation and lead others through it.
    • Build tactics to connect with your employees that will ensure employee engagement and productivity.

    Leading Through Uncertainty Workshop Overview Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Workshop Overview

    Read our concise Workshop Overview to find out how this program can support IT leaders when managing teams through uncertain times.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Leading Through Uncertainty (LTU) Workshop Overview
    [infographic]

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}78|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,750 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Enterprise is grappling with the challenges of existing business models and strategies not leading to desired outcomes.
    • Enterprise is struggling to remain competitive.
    • Enterprise wants to understand how to leverage platform strategies and a digital platform.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    To remain competitive enterprises must renew and refresh their business model strategies and design/develop digital platforms – this requires enterprises to:

    • Understand how digital-native enterprises are using platform business models and associated strategies.
    • Understand their core assets and strengths and how these can be leveraged for transformation.
    • Understand the core characteristics and components of a digital platform so that they can design digital platform(s) for their enterprise.
    • Ask if the client’s digital transformation (DX) strategy is aligned with a digital platform enablement strategy.
    • Ask if the enterprise has paid attention to the structure, culture, principles, and practices of platform teams.

    Impact and Result

    Organizations that implement this project will gain benefits in five ways:

    • Awareness and understanding of various platform strategies.
    • Application of specific platform strategies within the context of the enterprise.
    • Awareness of their existing business mode, core assets, value proposition, and strengths.
    • Alignment between DX themes and platform enablement themes so enterprises can develop roadmaps that gauge successful DX.
    • Design of a digital platform, including characteristics, components, and team characteristics, culture, principles, and practices.

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should consider the platform business model and a digital platform to remain competitive.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set goals for your platform business model

    Understand the platform business model and strategies and then set your platform business model goals.

    • Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies – Phase 1: Set Goals for Your Platform Business Model
    • Business Platform Playbook

    2. Configure digital platform

    Define design goals for your digital platform. Align your DX strategy with digital platform capabilities and understand key components of the digital platform.

    • Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies – Phase 2: Configure Your Digital Platform
    • Digital Platform Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Platform Business Model and Strategies

    The Purpose

    Understand existing business model, value proposition, and key assets.

    Understand platform business model and strategies.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding the current assets helps with knowing what can be leveraged in the new business model/transformation.

    Understanding the platform strategies can help the enterprise renew/refresh their business model.

    Activities

    1.1 Document the current business model along with value proposition and key assets (that provide competitive advantage).

    1.2 Transformation narrative.

    1.3 Platform model canvas.

    1.4 Document the platform strategies in the context of the enterprise.

    Outputs

    Documentation of current business model along with value proposition and key assets (that provide competitive advantage).

    Documentation of the selected platform strategies.

    2 Planning for Platform Business Model

    The Purpose

    Understand transformation approaches.

    Understand various layers of platforms.

    Ask fundamental and evolutionary questions about the platform.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the transformational model so that the enterprise can realize the differences.

    Understanding of the organization’s strengths and weaknesses for a DX.

    Extraction of strategic themes to plan and develop a digital platform roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss and document decision about DX approach and next steps.

    2.2 Discuss and document high-level strategic themes for platform business model and associated roadmap.

    Outputs

    Documented decision about DX approach and next steps.

    Documented high-level strategic themes for platform business model and associated roadmap.

    3 Digital Platform Strategy

    The Purpose

    Understand the design goals for the digital platform.

    Understand gaps between the platform’s capabilities and the DX strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design goals set for the digital platform that are visible to all stakeholders.

    Gap analysis performed between enterprise’s digital strategy and platform capabilities; this helps understand the current situation and thus informs strategies and roadmaps.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss and document design goals for digital platform.

    3.2 Discuss DX themes and platform capabilities – document the gaps.

    3.3 Discuss gaps and strategies along with timelines.

    Outputs

    Documented design goals for digital platform.

    Documented DX themes and platform capabilities.

    DX themes and platform capabilities map.

    4 Digital Platform Design: Key Components

    The Purpose

    Understanding of key components of a digital platform, including technology and teams.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of the key components of a digital platform and designing the platform.

    Understanding of the team structure, culture, and practices needed for successful platform engineering teams.

    Activities

    4.1 Confirmation and discussion on existing UX/UI and API strategies.

    4.2 Understanding of microservices architecture and filling of microservices canvas.

    4.3 Real-time stream processing data pipeline and tool map.

    4.4 High-level architectural view.

    4.5 Discussion on platform engineering teams, including culture, structure, principles, and practices.

    Outputs

    Filled microservices canvas.

    Documented real-time stream processing data pipeline and tool map.

    Documented high-level architectural view.

    Performance Measurement

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}24|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}24|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $19,436
    • member rating average days saved: 23
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Reinforce service orientation in your IT organization through IT metrics that make value-driven behavior happen..

    TY Advisory Services

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    What is our TY advisory service?

    The TY advisory service is tailored to your needs. It combines the best of traditional IT consulting expertise with the analysis and remedial solutions of an expert bureau.

    When you observe specific symptoms, TY analyses the exact areas that contribute to these symptoms.

    TY specializes in IT Operations and goes really deep in that area.  We define IT Operations as the core service you deliver to your clients:

    When you see your operation running smoothly, it looks obvious and simple, but it is not. IT Operations is a concerto, under the leadership of a competent IT Ops Conductor-Manager. IT Ops keeps the lights on and ensures your reputation with your clients and the market as a whole as a predictable and dependable business partner. And we help you achieve this, based on more than 30 years of IT Ops experience.

    As most companies' business services are linked at the hip with IT, your IT Operations, in other words, are your key to a successful business.

    Value Consulting

    That is why we work via a simple value-based proposition. We discuss your wants and together discover your needs. Once we all agree, only then do we make our proposal. Anything you learned on the way, is yours to keep and use. 

    This means a fixed agreement to deliver the value we promise. No time and material, no extensions, no unforeseen charges.

    How can we deliver this?

    Gert has advised clients on what to do before issues happen. We have also worked to bring companies back from the brink after serious events. TY has brought services back after big incidents.

    You need to get it done, not in theory, but via actionable advice and if required, via our actions and implementation prowess. It's really elementary. Anyone can create a spreadsheet with to-do lists and talk about how resilience laws like DORA and NIS2 need to be implemented.

    It's not the talk that counts, it's the walk. Service delivery is in our DNA. Resilience is our life.

    Efficient policies, procedures and guidelines

    Good governance directly ensures happy clients because staff knows what to do when and allows them leeway in improving the service. And this governance will satisfy auditors.

    • Incident management

      Incidents erode client confidence in your service and company. You must get them fixed in accordance with their importance,  

    • Problem management

      You don't want repeat incidents! Tackle the root causes and fix issues permanently. Save money by doing this right. 

    • Change management

      You must update your services to stay the best in your field. Do it in a controlled yet efficient way. Lose overhead where you can, add the right controls where you must.

    • Configuration management

      The base for most of your processes. You gotta know what you have and how it works together to provide the services to your clients.

    • Monitoring

      IT monitoring delivers business value by catching issues before they become problems. With real-time insights into system performance and security, you can minimize downtime, improve efficiency, and make better decisions that keep your operations strong and your customers happy.

    • Service management

      Bring all the IT Operations services together and measure how they perform versus set business relevant KPI's 

    • Disaster Recovery

      Disaster recovery is your company's safety net for getting critical systems and data back up and running after a major disruption, focusing on fast IT recovery and minimizing financial and operational losses, whereas business continuity ensures the entire business keeps functioning during and after the crisis.

    • Business Continuity

      Business continuity is keeping your company running smoothly during disruptions by having the right plans, processes, and backups in place to minimize downtime and protect your operations, customers, and reputation. We go beyond disaster recovery and make sure your critical processes can continue to function. 

    • Exit Plans

      Hope for the best, but plan for the worst. When you embark on a new venture, know how to get out of it. Planning to exit is best done in the very beginning, but better late than when it is too late.

      Get up to speed

    Your biggest asset, the people who execute your business services

    We base our analysis on over 30 years experience in corporate and large volume dynamic services.  Unique to our service is that we take your company culture into account, while we adjust the mindset of the experts working in these areas.

    Your people are what will make these processes work efficiently. We take their ideas, hard capabilities and leadership capabilities into account and improve upon where needed. That helps your company and the people themselves. 

    We look at the existing governance and analyse where they are best in class or how we can make them more efficient. We identify the gaps and propose remedial updates. Our updates are verified through earlier work, vetted by first and second line and sometimes even regulators 

    Next we decide with you on how to implement the updates to the areas that need them. 

    How does the TY advisory service work?

    • 1. Contact TY

      Please schedule your complimentary 30-minute discovery call below.

    • 2. Discovery call

      There is no financial commitment required from you. During this meeting we discus further in detail the issue at hand and the direction of the ideal solution and the way of working.

    • 3. TY consolidates and prepares roadmap

      We take in the information of our talks and prepare the the roadmap to the individualized solution for you.

    • 4. Second meeting to finalize roadmap

      By now, TY has a good idea of how we can help you, and we have prepared a roadmap to solving the issue. In this meeting we present the way forward our way of working and what it will require from you.

      If you decide this is not what you expected, you are free to take the information provided so far and work with it yourself. 

    • 5. We get to work

      After the previous meeting and agreement in principle, you will have by now received our offer.

      When you decide to work together, we start our partnership and solve the issue. We work to ensure you are fully satisfied with the result.

    Let's get started

    Continue reading

    The MVP Major Incident Manager

    The time has come to hire a new major incident manager. How do you go about that? How do you choose the right candidate? Major incident managers must have several typically conflicting traits, so how do you pick the right person? Let's dive into that.

    Register to read more …

    Corporate security consultancy

    Corporate security consultancy

    Based on experience
    Implementable advice
    human-based and people-oriented

    Engage our corporate security consultancy firm to discover any weaknesses within your company’s security management. Tymans Group has extensive expertise in helping small and medium businesses set up clear security protocols to safeguard their data and IT infrastructure. Read on to discover how our consulting firm can help improve corporate security within your company.

    Why should you hire a corporate security consultancy company?

    These days, corporate security includes much more than just regulating access to your physical location, be it an office or a store. Corporate security increasingly deals in information and data security, as well as general corporate governance and responsibility. Proper security protocols not only protect your business from harm, but also play an important factor in your overall success. As such, corporate security is all about setting up practical and effective strategies to protect your company from harm, regardless of whether the threat comes from within or outside. As such, hiring a security consulting firm to improve corporate security and security management within your company is not an unnecessary luxury, but a must.

    Security and risk management

    Our security and risk services

    Security strategy

    Security Strategy

    Embed security thinking through aligning your security strategy to business goals and values

    Read more

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Create a disaster recovey plan that is right for your company

    Read more

    Risk Management

    Risk Management

    Build your right-sized IT Risk Management Program

    Read more

    Check out all our services

    Improve your corporate security with help from our consulting company

    As a consultancy firm, Tymans Group can help your business to identify possible threats and help set up strategies to avoid them. However, as not all threats can be avoided, our corporate security consultancy firm also helps you set up protocols to mitigate and manage them, as well as help you develop effective incident management protocols. All solutions are practical, people-oriented and based on our extensive experience and thus have proven effectiveness.

    Hire our experienced consultancy firm

    Engage the services of our consulting company to improve corporate security within your small or medium business. Contact us to set up an appointment on-site or book a one-hour talk with expert Gert Taeymans to discuss any security issues you may be facing. We are happy to offer you a custom solution.

    Register to read more …

    M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}60|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • I&O is often the last to be informed of an impending M&A deal.
    • The business doesn’t understand the necessary requirements or timeline for integration.
    • It’s hard to prioritize when you’re buried under a mountain of work.
    • Documentation may be lacking or nonexistent, and members of the target organization may be uncooperative.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Manage expectations. The business often expects integration in days or weeks, not months or years. You need to set them straight.
    • Open your checkbook and prepare to hire. Integration will require a temporary increase in resources.
    • Tackle organizational and cultural change. People are harder to integrate than technology. Culture change is the hardest part, and the integration plan should address it.

    Impact and Result

    • Tailor your approach based on the business objectives of the merger or acquisition.
    • Separate the must-haves from the nice-to-haves.
    • Ensure adequate personnel and budget.
    • Plan for the integration into normal operations.

    M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to partner with the business to conquer the challenges in your next merger or acquisition.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish goals

    Partner with the business to determine goals and establish high-level scope.

    • M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations – Phase 1: Establish Goals
    • I&O M&A Project Napkin

    2. Conduct discovery

    Find out what the target organization’s I&O looks like.

    • M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations – Phase 2: Conduct Discovery
    • I&O M&A Discovery Letter Template
    • I&O M&A Discovery Template
    • I&O M&A Workbook
    • I&O M&A Risk Assessment Tool

    3. Plan short-term integration

    Build a plan to achieve a day 1 MVP.

    • M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations – Phase 3: Plan Short-Term Integration
    • I&O M&A Short-Term Integration Capacity Assessment Tool

    4. Map long-term integration

    Chart a roadmap for long-term integration.

    • M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations – Phase 4: Map Long-Term Integration
    • I&O M&A Long-Term Integration Portfolio Planning Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: M&A Runbook for Infrastructure and Operations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 High-Level Scope

    The Purpose

    Establish goals and conduct discovery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment with business goals

    Documentation of target organization’s current state

    Activities

    0.1 Consult with stakeholders.

    0.2 Establish M&A business goals.

    0.3 Conduct target discovery.

    0.4 Document own environment.

    0.5 Clarify goals.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder communication plan

    M&A business goals

    I&O M&A Discovery Template

    Current state of organization

    2 Target Assessment

    The Purpose

    Assess risk and value of target organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Accurate scope of I&O integration

    Risk mitigation plans

    Value realization strategies

    Activities

    1.1 Scope I&O M&A project.

    1.2 Assess risks.

    1.3 Assess value.

    Outputs

    I&O M&A Project Napkin

    Risk assessment

    Value assessment

    3 Day 1 Integration Project Plan

    The Purpose

    Establish day 1 integration project plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Smoother day 1 integration

    Activities

    2.1 Determine Day 1 minimum viable operating model post M&A.

    2.2 Identify gaps.

    2.3 Build day 1 project plan.

    2.4 Estimate required resources.

    Outputs

    Day 1 project plan

    4 Long-Term Project Plan

    The Purpose

    Draw long-term integration roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved alignment with M&A goals

    Greater realization of the deal’s value

    Activities

    3.1 Set long-term future state goals.

    3.2 Create a long-term project plan.

    3.3 Consult with business stakeholders on the long-term plan.

    Outputs

    Long-term integration project plan

    5 Change Management and Continual Improvement

    The Purpose

    Prepare for organization and culture change.

    Refine M&A I&O integration process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Smoother change management

    Improved M&A integration process

    Activities

    4.1 Complete a change management plan.

    4.2 Conduct a process post-mortem.

    Outputs

    Change management plan

    Process improvements action items

    Tame the Project Backlog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}439|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • Unmanaged project backlogs can become the bane of IT departments, tying IT leaders and PMO staff down to an ever-growing receptacle of project ideas that provides little by way of strategic value and that typically represents a lack of project intake and approval discipline.
    • Decision makers frequently use the backlog to keep the peace. Lacking the time to assess the bulk of requests, or simply wanting to avoid difficult conversations with stakeholders, they “approve” everything and leave it to IT to figure it out.
    • As IT has increasing difficulty assessing – let alone starting – any of the projects in the backlog, stakeholder relations suffer. Requestors view inclusion in the backlog as a euphemism for “declined,” and often characterize the backlog as the place where good project ideas go to die.
    • Faced with these challenges, you need to make your project backlog more useful and reliable. The backlog may contain projects worth doing, but in its current untamed state, you have difficulty discerning, let alone capitalizing upon, those instances of value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Project backlogs are an investment and need to be treated as such. Incurring a cost impact that can be measured in terms of time and money, the backlog needs to be actively managed to ensure that you’re investing wisely and getting a good return in terms of strategic value and project throughput.
    • Unmanageable project backlogs are rooted in bad habits and poorly-defined processes. Identifying the sources that fuel backlog growth is key to long-term success. Unless the problem is addressed at the root, any gains made in the near-term will simply fade away as old, unhealthy habits re-emerge and take hold.
    • Backlog management should facilitate executive awareness about the status of backlog items as new work is being approved. In the long run, this ongoing executive engagement will not only help to keep the backlog manageable, but it will also help to bring more even workloads to IT project staff.

    Impact and Result

    • Keep the best, forget the rest. Develop a near-term approach to limit the role of the backlog to include only those items that add value to the business.
    • Shine a light. Improve executive visibility into the health and status of the backlog so that the backlog is taken into account when decision makers approve new work.
    • Evolve the organizational culture. Effectively employ organizational change management practices to evolve the culture that currently exists around the project backlog in order to ensure customer-service needs are more effectively addressed.
    • Ensure long-term sustainability. Institute processes to make sure that your list of pending projects – should you still require one after implementing this blueprint – remains minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

    Tame the Project Backlog Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a more disciplined approach to managing your project backlog can help you realize increased value and project throughput.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a project backlog battle plan

    Calculate the cost of the project backlog and assess the root causes of its unmanageability.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 1: Create a Backlog Battle Plan
    • Project Backlog ROI Calculator

    2. Execute a near-term backlog cleanse

    Increase the manageability of the backlog by updating stale requests and removing dead weight.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 2: Execute a Near-Term Backlog Cleanse
    • Project Backlog Management Tool
    • Project Backlog Stakeholder Communications Template

    3. Ensure long-term backlog manageability

    Develop and maintain a manageable backlog growth rate by establishing disciplined backlog management processes.

    • Tame the Project Backlog – Phase 3: Ensure Long-Term Backlog Manageability
    • Project Backlog Operating Plan Template
    • Project Backlog Manager
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Tame the Project Backlog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Create a Project Backlog Battle Plan

    The Purpose

    Gauge the manageability of your project backlog in its current state.

    Calculate the total cost of your project backlog investments.

    Determine the root causes that contribute to the unmanageability of your project backlog.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the organizational need for more disciplined backlog management.

    Visibility into the costs incurred by the project backlog.

    An awareness of the sources that feed the growth of the project backlog and make it a challenge to maintain.

    Activities

    1.1 Calculate the sunk and marginal costs that have gone into your project backlog.

    1.2 Estimate the throughput of backlog items.

    1.3 Survey the root causes of your project backlog.

    Outputs

    The total estimated cost of the project backlog.

    A project backlog return-on-investment score.

    A project backlog root cause analysis.

    2 Execute a Near-Term Project Backlog Cleanse

    The Purpose

    Identify the most organizationally appropriate goals for your backlog cleanse.

    Pinpoint those items that warrant immediate removal from the backlog and establish a game plan for putting a bullet in them.

    Communicate backlog decisions with stakeholders in a way that minimizes friction and resistance. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An effective, achievable, and organizationally right-sized approach to cleansing the backlog.

    Criteria for cleanse outcomes and a protocol for carrying out the near-term cleanse.

    A project sponsor outreach plan to help ensure that decisions made during your near-term cleanse stick. 

    Activities

    2.1 Establish roles and responsibilities for the near-term cleanse.

    2.2 Determine cleanse scope.

    2.3 Develop backlog prioritization criteria.

    2.4 Prepare a communication strategy.

    Outputs

    Clear accountabilities to ensure the backlog is effectively minimized and outcomes are communicated effectively.

    Clearly defined and achievable goals.

    Effective criteria for cleansing the backlog of zombie projects and maintaining projects that are of strategic and operational value.

    A communication strategy to minimize stakeholder friction and resistance.

    3 Ensure Long-Term Project Backlog Manageability

    The Purpose

    Ensure ongoing backlog manageability.

    Make sure the executive layer is aware of the ongoing status of the backlog when making project decisions.

    Customize a best-practice toolkit to help keep the project backlog useful. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of pending projects that is minimal, maintainable, and of high value.

    Executive engagement with the backlog to ensure intake and approval decisions are made with a view of the backlog in mind.

    A backlog management tool and processes for ongoing manageability. 

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a project backlog management operating model.

    3.2 Configure a project backlog management solution.

    3.3 Assign roles and responsibilities for your long-term project backlog management processes.

    3.4 Customize a project backlog management operating plan.

    Outputs

    An operating model to structure your long-term strategy around.

    A right-sized management tool to help enable your processes and executive visibility into the backlog.

    Defined accountabilities for executing project backlog management responsibilities.

    Clearly established processes for how items get in and out of the backlog, as well as for ongoing backlog review.

    Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}131|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • The data and analytics landscape comprises many disciplines and components; organizations may find themselves unsure of where to start or what data topic or area they should be addressing.
    • Organizations want to better understand the components of the data and analytics landscape and how they are connected.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • This deck will provide a base understanding of the core data disciplines and will point to the various Info-Tech blueprints that dive deeper into each of the areas.

    Impact and Result

    • This deck will provide a base understanding of the core disciplines of the data and analytics landscape and will point to the various Info-Tech blueprints that dive deeper into each of the areas.

    Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the data and analytics landscape

    Get an overview of the core disciplines of the data and analytics landscape.

    • Understand the Data and Analytics Landscape Storyboard

    Infographic

    Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}495|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • IT suffers from a lack of strategy and plan for transitioning support processes to the service desk.
    • Lack of effective communication between the project delivery team and the service desk, leads to an inefficient knowledge transfer to the service desk.
    • New service is not prioritized and categorized, negatively impacting service levels and end-user satisfaction.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Make sure to build a strong knowledge management strategy to identify, capture, and transfer knowledge from project delivery to the service desk.

    Impact and Result

    • Build touchpoints between the service desk and project delivery team and make strategic points in the project lifecycles to ensure service support is done effectively following the product launch.
    • Develop a checklist of action items on the initiatives that should be done following project delivery.
    • Build a training plan into the strategy to make sure service desk agents can handle tickets independently.

    Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk – A guideline to walk you through transferring project support to the service desk.

    This storyboard will help you craft a project support plan to document information to streamline service support.

    • Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk Storyboard

    2. Project Handover and Checklist – A structured document to help you record information on the project and steps to take to transfer support.

    Use these two templates as a means of collaboration with the service desk to provide information on the application/product, and steps to take to make sure there are efficient service processes and knowledge is appropriately transferred to the service desk to support the service.

    • Project Handover Template
    • Service Support Transitioning Checklist
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Transition Projects Over to the Service Desk

    Increase the success of project support by aligning your service desk and project team.

    Analyst Perspective

    Formalize your project support plan to shift customer service to the service desk.

    Photo of Mahmoud Ramin, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    As a service support team member, you receive a ticket from an end user about an issue they’re facing with a new application. You are aware of the application release, but you don’t know how to handle the issue. So, you will need to either spend a long time investigating the issue via peer discussion and research or escalate it to the project team.

    Newly developed or improved services should be transitioned appropriately to the support team. Service transitioning should include planning, coordination, and communication. This helps project and support teams ensure that upon a service failure, affected end users receive timely and efficient customer support.

    At the first level, the project team and service desk should build a strategy around transitioning service support to the service desk by defining tasks, service levels, standards, and success criteria.

    In the second step, they should check the service readiness to shift support from the project team to the service desk.

    The next step is training on the new services via efficient communication and coordination between the two parties. The project team should allocate some time, according to the designed strategy, to train the service desk on the new/updated service. This will enable the service desk to provide independent service handling.

    This research walks you through the above steps in more detail and helps you build a checklist of action items to streamline shifting service support to the service desk.

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD

    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • IT suffers from a lack of strategy and planning for transitioning support processes to the service desk.
    • Lack of effective communication between the project delivery team and the service desk leads to an inefficient knowledge transfer to the service desk.
    • New service is not prioritized and categorized, negatively impacting service levels and end-user satisfaction.

    Common Obstacles

    • Building the right relationship between the service desk and project team is challenging, making support transition tedious.
    • The service desk is siloed; tasks and activities are loosely defined. Service delivery is inconsistent, which impacts customer satisfaction.
    • Lack of training on new services forces the service desk to unnecessarily escalate tickets to other levels and delays service delivery.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Build touchpoints between the service desk and project delivery team and make strategic points in the project lifecycles to ensure service support is done effectively following the product launch.
    • Develop a checklist of action items on the initiatives that should be done following project delivery.
    • Build a training plan into the strategy to make sure service desk agents can handle tickets independently.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure to build a strong knowledge management strategy to identify, capture, and transfer knowledge from project delivery to the service desk.

    A lack of formal service transition process presents additional challenges

    When there is no formal transition process following a project delivery, it will negatively impact project success and customer satisfaction.

    Service desk team:

    • You receive a request from an end user to handle an issue with an application or service that was recently released. You are aware of the features but don’t know how to solve this issue particularly.
    • You know someone in the project group who is familiar with the service, as he was involved in the project. You reach out to him, but he is very busy with another project.
    • You get back to the user to let them know that this will be done as soon as the specialist is available. But because there is no clarity on the scope of the issue, you cannot tell them when this will be resolved.
    • Lack of visibility and commitment to the service recovery will negatively impact end-user satisfaction with the service desk.

    Project delivery team:

    • You are working on an exciting project, approaching the deadline. Suddenly, you receive a ticket from a service desk agent asking you to solve an incident on a product that was released three months ago.
    • Given the deadline on the current project, you are stressed, thinking about just focusing on the projects. On the other hand, the issue with the other service is impacting multiple users and requires much attention.
    • You spend extra time handling the issue and get back to your project. But a few days later the same agent gets back to you to take care of the same issue.
    • This is negatively impacting your work quality and causing some friction between the project team and the service desk.

    Link how improvement in project transitioning to the service desk can help service support

    A successful launch can still be a failure if the support team isn't fully informed and prepared.

    • In such a situation, the project team sends impacted users a mass notification without a solid plan for training and no proper documentation.
    • To provide proper customer service, organizations should involve several stakeholder groups to collaborate for a seamless transition of projects to the service desk.
    • This shift in service support takes time and effort; however, via proper planning there will be less confusion around customer service, and it will be done much faster.
      • For instance, if AppDev is customizing an ERP solution without considering knowledge transfer to the service desk, relevant tickets will be unnecessarily escalated to the project team.
    • On the other hand, the service desk should update configuration items (CIs) and the service catalog and related requests, incidents, problems, and workarounds to the relevant assets and configurations.
    • In this transition process, knowledge transfer plays a key role. Users, the service desk, and other service support teams need to know how the new application or service works and how to manage it when an issue arises.
    • Without a knowledge transfer, service support will be forced to either reinvent the wheel or escalate the ticket to the development team. This will unnecessarily increase the time for ticket handling, increase cost per ticket, and reduce end-user satisfaction.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Involve the service desk in the transition process via clear communication, knowledge transfer, and staff training.

    Integrate the service desk into the project management lifecycle for a smooth transition of service support

    Service desk involvement in the development, testing, and maintenance/change activity steps of your project lifecycle will help you logically define the category and priority level of the service and enable service level improvement accordingly after the project goes live.

    Project management lifecycle

    As some of the support and project processes can be integrated, responsibility silos should be broken

    Processes are done by different roles. Determine roles and responsibilities for the overlapping processes to streamline service support transition to the service desk.

    The project team is dedicated to projects, while the support team focuses on customer service for several products.

    Siloed responsibilities:

    • Project team transfers the service fully to the service desk and leaves technicians alone for support without a good knowledge transfer.
    • Specialists who were involved in the project have deep knowledge about the product, but they are not involved in incident or problem management.
    • Service desk was not involved in the planning and execution processes, which leads to lack of knowledge about the product. This leaves the support team with some vague knowledge about the service, which negatively impacts the quality of incident and problem management.

    How to break the silos:

    Develop a tiered model for the service desk and include project delivery in the specialist tier.

    • Use tier 1 (service desk) as a single point of contact to support all IT services.
    • Have tier 2/3 as experts in technology. These agents are a part of the project team. They are also involved in incident management, root-cause analysis, and change management.

    Determine the interfaces

    At the project level, get a clear understanding of support capabilities and demands, and communicate them to the service desk to proactively bring them into the planning step.

    The following questions help you with an efficient plan for support transition

    Questions for support transition

    Clear responsibilities help you define the level of involvement in the overlapping processes

    Conduct a stakeholder analysis to identify the people that can help ensure the success of the transition.

    Goal: Create a prioritized list of people who are affected by the new service and will provide support.

    Why is stakeholder analysis essential?

    Why is stakeholder analysis essential

    Identify the tasks that are required for a successful project handover

    Embed the tasks that the project team should deliver before handing support to the service desk.

    Task/Activity Example

    Conduct administrative work in the application

    • New user setup
    • Password reset

    Update documentation

    • Prepare for knowledge transfer>
    Service request fulfillment/incident management
    • Assess potential bugs
    Technical support for systems troubleshooting
    • Configure a module in ITSM solution

    End-user training

    • FAQs
    • How-to questions
    Service desk training
    • Train technicians for troubleshooting

    Support management (monitoring, meeting SLAs)

    • Monitoring
    • Meeting SLAs

    Report on the service transitioning

    • Transition effectiveness
    • Four-week warranty period
    Ensure all policies follow the transition activities
    • The final week of transition, the service desk will be called to a meeting for final handover of incidents and problems

    Integrate project description and service priority throughout development phase

    Include the service desk in discussions about project description, so it will be enabled to define service priority level.

    • Project description will be useful for bringing the project forward to the change advisory board (CAB) for approval and setting up the service in the CMDB.
    • Service priority is used for adding the next layer of attributes to the CMDB for the service and ensuring the I&O department can set up systems monitoring.
    • This should be done early in the process in conjunction with the project manager and business sponsors.
    • It should be done as the project gets underway and the team can work on specifically where that milestone will be in each project.
    • What to include in the project description:
      • Name
      • Purpose
      • Publisher
      • Departments that will use the service
      • Service information
      • Regulatory constrains
    • What to include in the service priority information:
      • Main users
      • Number of users
      • Service requirements
      • System interdependencies
      • Criticality of the dependent systems
      • Service category
      • Service SME and support backup
      • System monitoring resources
      • Alert description and flow

    Document project description and service priority in the Project Handover Template.

    Embed service levels and maintenance information

    Include the service desk in discussions about project description, so it will be enabled to define service priority level.

    • Service level objectives (SLOs) will be added to CMDB to ensure the product is reviewed for business continuity and disaster recovery and that the service team knows what is coming.
    • This step will be good to start thinking about training agents and documenting knowledgebase (KB) articles.
    • What to include in SLO:
      • Response time
      • Resolution time
      • Escalation time
      • Business owner
      • Service owner
      • Vendor(s)
      • Vendor warranties
      • Data archiving/purging
      • Availability list
      • Business continuity/recovery objectives
      • Scheduled reports
      • Problem description
    • Maintenance and change requirements: You should add maintenance windows to the change calendar and ensure the maintenance checklist is added to KB articles and technician schedules.
    • What to include in maintenance and change requirements:
      • Scheduled events for the launch
      • Maintenance windows
      • Module release
      • Planned upgrades
      • Anticipated intervals for changes and trigger points
      • Scheduled batches

    Document service level objectives and maintenance in the Project Handover Template.

    Enhance communication between the project team and the service desk

    Communicating with the service desk early and often will ensure that agents fully get a deep knowledge of the new technology.

    Transition of a project to the service desk includes both knowledge transfer and execution transfer.

    01

    Provide training and mentoring to ensure technical knowledge is passed on.

    02

    Transfer leadership responsibilities by appointing the right people.

    03

    Transfer support by strategically assigning workers with the right technical and interpersonal skills.

    04

    Transfer admin rights to ensure technicians have access rights for troubleshooting.

    05

    Create support and a system to transfer work process. For example, using an online platform to store knowledge assets is a great way for support to access project information.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A communication plan and executive presentation will help project managers outline recommendations and communicate their benefits.

    Communicate reasons for projects and how they will be implemented

    Proactive communication of the project to affected stakeholders will help get their buy-in for the new technology and feedback for better support.

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The message should:

    • Explain why the change or new application is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed due to the new or updated product.
    • Explain how the application will be implemented.
    • Address how this will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the project successful.
    • Communicate the supporting roles in the early implementation stages and later on.

    Five elements of communicating change

    Implement knowledge transfer to the service desk to ensure tickets won’t be unnecessarily escalated

    The support team usually uses an ITSM solution, while the project team mostly uses a project management solution. End users’ support is done and documented in the ITSM tool.

    Even terminologies used by these teams are different. For instance, service desk’s “incident” is equivalent to a project manager’s “defect.” Without proper integration of the development and support processes, the contents get siloed and outdated over time.

    Potential ways to deal with this challenge:

    Use the same platform for both project and service support

    This helps you document information in a single platform and provides better visibility of the project status to the support team as well. It also helps project team find out change-related incidents for a faster rollback.

    Note: This is not always feasible because of the high costs incurred in purchasing a new application with both ITSM and PM capabilities and the long time it takes for implementing such a solution.

    Integrate the PM and ITSM tools to improve transition efficiency

    Note: Consider the processes that should be integrated. Don’t integrate unnecessary steps in the development stage, such as design, which will not be helpful for support transition.

    Build a training plan for the new service

    When a new system is introduced or significant changes are applied, describe the steps and timeline for training.

    Training the service desk has two-fold benefits:
    Improve support:
    • Support team gets involved in user acceptance testing, which will provide feedback on potential bugs or failures in the technology.
    • Collaboration between specialists and tier 1 technicians will allow the service desk to gather information for handling potential incidents on the application.
    Shift-left enablement:
    • At the specialist level, agents will be more focused on other projects and spend less time on application issues, as they are mostly handled by the service desk.
    • As you shift service support left:
      • Cost per ticket decreases as more of the less costly resources are doing the work.
      • Average time to resolve decreases as the ticket is handled by the service desk.
      • End-user satisfaction increases as they don’t need to wait long for resolution.

    Who resolves the incident

    For more information about shift-left enablement, refer to InfoTech’s blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Integrate knowledge management in the transition plan

    Build a knowledge transfer process to streamline service support for the newly developed technology.

    Use the following steps to ensure the service desk gets trained on the new project.

    1. Identify learning opportunities.
    2. Prioritize the identified opportunities based on:
    • Risk of lost knowledge
    • Impact of knowledge on support improvement
  • Define ways to transfer knowledge from the project team to the service desk. These could be:
    • One-on-one meetings
    • Mentoring sessions
    • Knowledgebase articles
    • Product road test
    • Potential incident management shadowing
  • Capture and transfer knowledge (via the identified means).
  • Support the service desk with further training if the requirement arises.
  • Info-Tech Insight

    Allocate knowledge transfer within ticket handling workflows. When incident is resolved by a specialist, they will assess if it is a good candidate for technician training and/or a knowledgebase article. If so, the knowledge manager will be notified of the opportunity to assign it to a SME for training and documentation of an article.

    For more information about knowledge transfer, refer to phase 3 of Info-Tech’s blueprint Standardize the Service Desk.

    Focus on the big picture first

    Identify training functions and plan for a formal knowledge transfer

    1. Brainstorm training functions for each group.
    2. Determine the timeline needed to conduct training for the identified training topics.
    RoleTraining FunctionTimeline

    Developer/Technical Support

    • Coach the service desk on the new application
    • Document relevant KB articles
    Business Analysts
    • Conduct informational interviews for new business requirements

    Service Desk Agents

    • Conduct informational interviews
    • Shadow incident management procedures
    • Document lessons learned
    Vendor
    • Provide cross-training to support team

    Document your knowledge transfer plan in the Project Handover Template.

    Build a checklist of the transition action items

    At this stage, the project is ready to go live and support needs to be independently done by the service desk.

    Checklist of the transition action items

    Info-Tech Insight

    No matter how well training is done, specialists may need to work on critical incidents and handle emergency changes. With effective service support and transition planning, you can make an agreement between the incident manager, change manager, and project manager on a timeline to balance critical incident or emergency change management and project management and define your SLA.

    Activity: Prepare a checklist of initiatives before support transition

    2-3 hours

    Document project support information and check off each support transition initiative as you shift service support to the service desk.

    1. As a group, review the Project Handover Template that you filled out in the previous steps.
    2. Download the Service Support Transitioning Checklist, and review the items that need to be done throughout the development, testing, and deployment steps of your project.
    3. Brainstorm at what step service desk needs to be involved.
    4. As you go through each initiative and complete it, check it off to make sure you are following the agreed document for a smooth transition of service support.
    Input Output
    • Project information
    • Support information for developed application/service
    • List of transitioning initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Project Handover Template
    • Service Support Transitioning Checklist
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Lead

    Download the Project Handover Template

    Download the Service Support Transitioning Checklist

    Define metrics to track the success of project transition

    Consider key metrics to speak the language of targeted end users.

    You won’t know if transitioning support processes are successful unless you measure their impact. Find out your objectives for project transition and then track metrics that will allow you to fulfill these goals.

    Determine critical success factors to help you find out key metrics:

    High quality of the service

    Effectiveness of communication of the transition

    Manage risk of failure to help find out activities that will mitigate risk of service disruption

    Smooth and timely transition of support to the service desk

    Efficient utilization of the shared services and resources to mitigate conflicts and streamline service transitioning

    Suggested metrics:

    • Time to fulfill requests and resolve incidents for the new project
    • Time spent training the service desk
    • Number of knowledgebase articles created by the project team
    • Percentage of articles used by the service desk that prevented ticket escalation
    • First-level resolution
    • Ratio of escalated tickets for the new project
    • Problem ticket volume for the new project
    • Average customer satisfaction with the new project support
    • SLA breach rate

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Following the steps outlined in this research has helped you build a strategy to shift service support from the project team to the service desk, resulting in an improvement in customer service and agent satisfaction.

    You have also developed a plan to break the silo between the service desk and specialists and enable knowledge transfer so the service desk will not need to unnecessarily escalate tickets to developers. In the meantime, specialists are also responsible for service desk training on the new application.

    Efficient communication of service levels has helped the project team set clear expectations for managers to create a balance between their projects and service support.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    The best type of service desk ticket is the one that doesn’t exist.

    Tailor IT Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects

    Right-size PMBOK for all of your IT projects.

    Works Cited

    Brown, Josh. “Knowledge Transfer: What it is & How to Use it Effectively.” Helpjuice, 2021. Accessed November 2022.

    Magowan, Kirstie. “Top ITSM Metrics & KPIs: Measuring for Success, Aiming for Improvement.” BMC Blogs, 2020. Accessed November 2022.

    “The Complete Blueprint for Aligning Your Service Desk and Development Teams (Process Integration and Best Practices).” Exalate, 2021. Accessed October 2022.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2010. Web.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}386|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
    • Security remains a large impediment to realizing cloud benefits. Numerous concerns still exist around the ability for data privacy, confidentiality, and integrity to be maintained in a cloud environment.
    • Even if adoption is agreed upon, it becomes hard to evaluate vendors that have strong security offerings and even harder to utilize security controls that are internally deployed in the cloud environment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The cloud can be secure despite unique security threats.
    • Securing a cloud environment is a balancing act of who is responsible for meeting specific security requirements.
    • Most security challenges and concerns can be minimized through our structured process (CAGI) of selecting a trusted cloud security provider (CSP) partner.

    Impact and Result

    • The business is adopting a cloud environment and it must be secured, which includes:
      • Ensuring business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
      • Maintaining privacy of data and other information.
      • Securing the network connection points.
    • Determine your balancing act between yourself and your CSP; through contractual and configuration requirements, determine what security requirements your CSP can meet and cover the rest through internal deployment.
    • This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors.

    Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should prioritize security in the cloud, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Determine your cloud risk profile

    Determine your organization’s rationale for cloud adoption and what that means for your security obligations.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 1: Determine Your Cloud Risk Profile
    • Secure Cloud Usage Policy

    2. Identify your cloud security requirements

    Use the Cloud Security CAGI Tool to perform four unique assessments that will be used to identify secure cloud vendors.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 2: Identify Your Cloud Security Requirements
    • Cloud Security CAGI Tool

    3. Evaluate vendors from a security perspective

    Learn how to assess and communicate with cloud vendors with security in mind.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 3: Evaluate Vendors From a Security Perspective
    • IaaS and PaaS Service Level Agreement Template
    • SaaS Service Level Agreement Template
    • Cloud Security Communication Deck

    4. Implement your secure cloud program

    Turn your security requirements into specific tasks and develop your implementation roadmap.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 4: Implement Your Secure Cloud Program
    • Cloud Security Roadmap Tool

    5. Build a cloud security governance program

    Build the organizational structure of your cloud security governance program.

    • Ensure Cloud Security in IaaS, PaaS, and SaaS Environments – Phase 5: Build a Cloud Security Governance Program
    • Cloud Security Governance Program Template
    [infographic]

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}593|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Managers are responsible for driving the best performance out of their staff while still developing individuals professionally.
    • Micromanaging tasks is an ineffective, inefficient way to get things done and keep employees engaged at the same time.
    • Both managers and employees view goal setting as a cumbersome process that never materializes in day-to-day work.
    • Without a consistent and agile goal-setting environment that pervades every day, managers risk low productivity and disengaged employees.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Effective performance management occurs throughout the year, on a daily and weekly basis, not just at annual performance review time. Managers must embrace this reality and get into the habit of setting agile short-term goals to drive productivity.
    • Employee empowerment is one of the most significant contributors to employee engagement, which is a proven performance driver. Short-term goal setting, which is ultimately employee-owned, develops and nurtures a strong sense of employee empowerment.
    • Micromanaging employee tasks will get managers nowhere quickly. Putting in the effort to collaboratively define goals that benefit both the organization and the employee will pay off in the long run.
    • Goal setting should not be a cumbersome activity, but an agile, rolling habit that ensures employees are focused, supported, and given appropriate feedback to continue to drive performance.

    Impact and Result

    • Managers who have daily meetings to set goals are 17% more successful in terms of employee performance than managers who set goals annually.
    • Managers must be agile goal-setting role models, or risk over a third of their staff being confused about productivity expectations.
    • Managers that allow tracking of goals to be an inhibitor to goal setting are most likely to have a negative effect on employee performance success. In fact, tracking goals should not be a priority in the short-term.

    Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn the agile, short-term goal-setting process

    Implement agile goal setting with your team right away and drive performance.

    • Storyboard: Leverage Agile Goal Setting for Improved Employee Engagement & Performance
    [infographic]

    Exit Plans: Escape from the black hole

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: Highly Valued
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    In early April, I already wrote about exit plans and how they are the latest burning platform.

    As of the end of May 2025, we have both Microsoft and Google reassuring European clients about their sovereign cloud solutions. There are even air-gapped options for military applications. These messages come as a result of the trade war between the US and the rest of the world.

    There is also the other, more mundane example of over-reliance on a single vendor: the Bloomberg-terminal outage of May 21st, 2025. That global outage severely disrupted financial markets. It caused traders to lose access to real-time data, analytics, and pricing information for approximately 90 minutes. This widespread system failure delayed critical government bond auctions in the UK, Portugal, Sweden, and the EU.

    It serves as a reminder of the heavy reliance on the Bloomberg Terminal, which is considered an industry standard despite its high annual cost. While some Bloomberg services like instant messaging remained functional, allowing limited communication among traders, the core disruption led to significant frustration and slowed down trading activities.

    You want to think about this for a moment. Bloomberg is, just like Google and Microsoft are, cornerstones in their respective industries. MS, Google, and Amazon even in many more industries. 

    So the issue goes beyond the “panic of the day.” Every day, there will be some announcement that sends markets reeling and companies fearing. Granted, the period we go through today can have grave consequences, but at the same time, it may be over in the coming months or years.

    Contractual cover

    Let's take a step back and see if we can locate the larger issue at stake. I dare to say that the underlying issue is trust. We are losing trust in one another at a fast pace. Not between business partners, meaning companies who are, in a transaction or relationship, are more or less equal. Regardless of their geolocation, people are keen to do business together in a predictable, mutually beneficial way. And as long as that situation is stable, there is little need, beyond compliance and normal sound practices, to start to distrust each other.

    Trouble brews when other factors come into play. I want to focus on two of them in this article.

    1. Market power
    2. Government interference

    Market Power

    The past few years have seen a large increase in power of the cloud computing platforms. The pandemic of 2019 through to 2023 changed our way of working and gave a big boost to these platforms. Of course, they were already establishing their dominance in the early 2010s.

    Amazon launched SQS in 2004 with S3 (storage)  and EC2 (compute) in 2006. Azure launched in 2008 as a PaaS platform for .NET developers, and became really available in 2010. Since then, it grew into the IaaS (infrastructure as a service) platform we know today. Google's Cloud Platform (GCP) launched in 2008 and added components such as BigQuery, Compute Engine and Storage in the 2010s.

    Since the pandemic, we've seen another boost to their popularity. These platforms solidified their lead through several vectors:

    • Remote working
    • Business continuity and resilience promises
    • Acceleration of digital transformation
    • Scalability
    • Cost optimization 

    Companies made decisions on these premises. A prime example is the use of native cloud functions. These make life easier for developers. Native functions allow for serverless functionality to be made available to clients, and to do so in a non-infra-based way. It gives the impression of less complexity to the management. They are also easily scalable. 

    This comes at a cost, however. The cost is vendor lock-in. And with vendor lock-in, comes increased pricing power for the vendor.

    For a long time, it seems EU companies' attitude was: “It won't be such an issue, after all, there are multiple cloud vendors and if all else fails, we just go back.” The reality is much starker, I suspect that cloud providers with this level of market power will increase their pricing significantly.

     Government interference

    in come two elements:

    • EU laws
    • US laws and unpredictability
    EU laws

     The latest push to their market power came as an unintended consequence of EU Law: DORA. That EU law requires companies to have testable exit plans in place. But it goes well beyond this. The EU has increased the regulatory burden on companies significantly. BusinessEurope, a supranational organization, estimates that in the past five years, the Eu managed to release over 13,000 legislative acts. This is compared to 3,500 in the US.

    Coming back to DORA, this law requires EU companies to actually test their exit plans and show proof of it to the EU ESAs (European Supervisory Agency).  The reaction I have seen in industry representative organizations is complacency. 

    The cost of compliance is significant; hence, companies try to limit their exposure to the law as much as possible. They typically do this by limiting the applicability scope of the law to their business, based on the wording of the law. And herein lies the trap. This is not lost on the IT providers. They see that companies do the heavy lifting for them. What do I mean by that?  Several large providers are looked at by the EU as systemic providers. They fall under direct supervision by the ESAs. 

    For local EU providers, it is what it is, but for non-EU providers, they get to show their goodwill, using sovereign IT services.  I will come back to this in the next point, US unpredictability and laws. But the main point is: we are giving them more market power, and we have less contractual power. Why? Because we are showing them that we will go to great lengths to keep using their services.

    US laws and unpredictability

    US companies must comply with US law. So far, so good. Current US legislation also already requires US companies to share data on non-US citizens.

    • Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA), particularly Section 702
    • The CLOUD (Clarifying Lawful Overseas Use of Data) Act of 2018
    • The USA PATRIOT Act (specifically relevant sections like 215 and 314(a)/314(b))
    • Executive Order 14117 and related DOJ Final Rule (Preventing Access to U.S. Sensitive Personal Data and Government-Related Data by Countries of Concern)

    This last one is of particular concern. Not so much because of its contents, but because it is an Executive Order.

    We know that the current (May 2025) US government mostly works through executive orders. Let's not forget that executive orders are a legitimate way to implement policy, This means that the US government could use access to cloud services as a lever to obtain more favorable trade rules.

    The EU responds to this (the laws and executive order) by implementing several sovereignty countermeasures like GDPR, DORA, Digital markets Act (DMA), Data Governance Act (DGA), Cybersecurity Act and the upcoming European Health Data Act (EHDS). This is called the “Brussels Effect.”

    EU Answers

    Europe is also investing in several strategic initiatives such as

    This points to a new dynamic between the EU and the US, EU-based companies simply cannot trust their US counterparts anymore to the degree they could before. The sad thing is, that there is no difference on the interpersonal level. It is just that companies must comply with their respective laws.

    Hence, Microsoft, Google, and AWS and any other US provider cannot legally provide sovereign cloud services. In a strict legal sense, Microsoft and Google cannot absolutely guarantee that they can completely insulate EU companies and citizens from all US law enforcement requests for data, despite their robust efforts and sovereign cloud offerings. This is because they are US companies, subject to US law and US jurisdiction. The CLOUD act and FISA section 702 compel US companies to comply. 

    Moreover, there is the nature of sovereign cloud offerings:

    • Increased Control, Not Absolute Immunity: Services like Microsoft's EU Data Boundary and Google's Cloud for Sovereignty are designed to provide customers with greater control over data residency, administrative access (e.g., limiting access to EU-based personnel), and encryption keys
    • Customer-Managed Keys (CMEK): If an EU customer controls their encryption keys, and the data remains encrypted at rest and in transit, it theoretically makes it harder for the cloud provider to provide plaintext data if compelled. However, metadata and other operational data might still be accessible, and the extent to which US authorities could compel a US company to decrypt data remains a point of contention and legal ambiguity.
    • Partnerships and Local Entities: Some “sovereign cloud” models involve partnerships with local EU entities (e.g., Google's partnership with S3NS in France, or Microsoft's with Capgemini and Orange). While this might create a legal buffer, if the core cloud infrastructure and controlling entity are still ultimately US-based, the risk of US legal reach persists.
    • “Limited Security Instances”: Even with the EU Data Boundary, Microsoft explicitly states, “in limited security instances that require a coordinated global response, essential data may be transferred with robust protections that safeguard customer data.” This phrasing acknowledges that some data may still leave the EU boundary under certain circumstances.

     And lastly, there are the legal challenges to the EU data privacy Framework (DPF)

    • Ongoing Scrutiny: The DPF is the current legal basis for EU-US data transfers, but it is under continuous scrutiny and is highly likely to face further legal challenges in the CJEU (a “Schrems III” case is widely anticipated). This uncertainty means that the current framework's longevity and robustness are not guaranteed.
    • Fundamental Conflict: The core legal conflict between the broad scope of US surveillance laws and the EU's fundamental right to privacy has not been fully resolved by the DPF, according to many EU legal experts and privacy advocates.

    This all means that while the cloud providers are doing everything they can, and I'm assuming they are acting in good faith. The fact that they are US entities means however that they are subject to all US legislation and executive orders.  And we cannot trust this last part. Again, this is why the EU is pursuing its digital sovereignty initiatives and why some highly sensitive EU public sector entities are gravitating towards truly EU-owned and operated cloud solutions.

    Bankruptcy

    If your provider goes bankrupt, you do not have a leg to stand on. Most jurisdictions, including the EU and US, have the following elements regarding bankruptcy:

    • Automatic Stay: Upon a bankruptcy filing (in most jurisdictions, including the US and EU), an “automatic stay” is immediately imposed. This is a court order that stops most collection activities against the debtor. For you as a customer, this can mean you might be prevented from:

      • Terminating the contract immediately, even if your contract allows it.
      • Initiating legal proceedings against the provider.
      • Trying to recover your data directly without court permission.
    • Debtor's Estate and Creditor Priority

      • Property of the Estate: All the bankrupt provider's assets become part of the “bankruptcy estate,” to be managed by a court-appointed trustee or receiver. The crucial question becomes: Is your data considered the property of the estate, or does ownership remain unequivocally with you? While most cloud contracts explicitly state that the customer owns their data, a bankruptcy court might still view the possession of that data by the provider as an asset of the estate, potentially subject to monetization to pay off creditors.
      • Secured vs. Unsecured Creditors: You, as a customer seeking to retrieve your data or continue services, are likely to be an “unsecured creditor.” Secured creditors (e.g., banks with liens on assets) get paid first. Your claim for data or service continuity will be far down the priority list, meaning you might recover little, if anything, in compensation.
    • Executory contracts and the Trustee's power
      • Assumption or Rejection: Bankruptcy law generally allows the trustee (or debtor in possession in a Chapter 11 case) to assume (continue) or reject (terminate) “executory contracts” – those where both parties still have significant performance obligations.
      • Trustee's Discretion: The trustee will make this decision based on what benefits the bankruptcy estate and the creditors. If your contract is loss-making for the provider, or if continuing it is not in the best interest of the creditors, the trustee can reject it, even if it has a termination clause unfavorable to them.
      • No Customer Right to Demand Continuation: You typically cannot compel the trustee to continue the service if they choose to reject the contract. Your recourse would then be a claim for damages, which, as noted, is usually a low-priority claim.
    • The practical challenges of data retrieval
        • Even if your contract has strong data return clauses, the practicalities of a bankrupt provider make enforcement difficult. The provider's staff might be laid off, systems might be shut down, and there might be no one left with the technical knowledge or resources to facilitate data export. Not to mention that the trustee may simply refuse to honor the agreement (which is completely within the legal rights of the trustee.)
        • The receiver's priority is liquidation and asset sale, not customer service. They may limit data export speeds or volumes, or prioritize the sale of the business, which might include your data, making retrieval a slow and arduous process.

    Conclusion

    So, while I understand the wait and see stance in regard to exit plans, given where we are, it is in my opinion the wrong thing to do. Companies must make actionable exit plans and prepare beforehand for the exit. That means that you have to:

    1. Design your architecture so that you can port your applications to somewhere else.
    2. Prioritize your data portability and data ownership.
    3. Develop and practice your exit strategy and plans.
    4. Maintain your in-house expertise, especially for all critical business services.
    5. Continuously monitor your vendors and update your risk assessments.

      If you want more detailed steps on how to get there, feel free to contact me.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}322|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Businesses prioritize speed to market over secure coding and testing practices in the development lifecycle. As a result, vulnerabilities exist naturally in software.
    • To improve overall system security, organizations are leveraging external security researchers to identify and remedy vulnerabilities, so as to mitigate the overall security risk.
    • A primary challenge to developing a coordinated vulnerability disclosure (CVD) program is designing repeatable procedures and scoping the program to the organization’s technical capacity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program is likely to be tomorrow’s law. With pressures from federal government agencies and recommendations from best-practice frameworks, it is likely that a CVD will be mandated in the future to encourage organizations to be equipped and prepared to respond to externally disclosed vulnerabilities.
    • CVD programs such as bug bounty and vulnerability disclosure programs (VDPs) may reward differently, but they have the same underlying goals. As a result, you don't need dramatically different process documentation.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program that reflects business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop a program that aligns your resources with the scale of the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s vulnerability disclosure methodology by leveraging our policy, procedure, and workflow templates to get you started.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess goals

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 1: Assess Goals
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Formalize the program

    Equip your organization for coordinated vulnerability disclosure with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 2: Formalize the Program
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Policy
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Plan
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (Visio)
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}486|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,246 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project, but also a process improvement opportunity.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool, but they will not fix your processes for you.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data.
    • ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices.
    • Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope.

    Impact and Result

    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project.
    • Improved project management, and therefore, better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront.

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Deck – An implementation guide that walks you through the steps to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical for the success of the implementation project.

    • Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan – Phases 1-3

    2. ITSM Tool Project Charter Template – A charter to document your project scope, milestones, stakeholders, risks etc. to kick-off and manage your project.

    This project charter document summarizes the Project Overview (Description, background, drivers, and objectives), Governance and Management (Project stakeholders/roles, budget, and dependencies), and Risk, Assumptions, and Constraints (Known and potential risks and mitigation strategy).

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    3. ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist – A tool to help identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    The checklists in this tool identify the most common decisions and preparation you will need to make to support the implementation for the ITSM modules that we recommend are set up first: incident management and service requests; change management; and asset management. Use these checklists as a model to follow for any additional ITSM modules you plan to implement, and refer to Info-Tech's blueprints for each service management topic for additional guidance.

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    4. ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template – A tool to help prioritize and prepare for tool rollout plan.

    This deployment plan documents the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool, and the details to execute the cutover to a live environment, including how, when, where.

    • ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    5. ITSM Tool Training Schedule – Use the tool to create your new tool training roadmap.

    This template is a guide for creating a training and communication plan as part of the implementation project for your ITSM tool. Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    • ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    Plan ahead with a step-by-step approach to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Take control of the wheel or you might end up in a ditch.

    The image contains a picture of Frank Trovato.

    An ITSM tool implementation is a complex project with direct impact on IT’s ability to support the business. With that level of risk, you need to take control early on.

    Yes, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation, but they depend on you to tell them how to configure ITSM parameters and workflows that affect user interface, the ability to manage incidents, and governance over assets and IT changes.

    If you leave the configuration completely to the vendor, at best you might get the same setup as in your old tool (and not realize the benefits that leadership is expecting). At worst you end up with default values that don’t fit your process needs, i.e., confusion and not realizing expected benefits.

    A successful implementation requires early planning from a wide range of resources including ITSM tool experts (supported by the vendor), process experts, and a project manager to methodically step through the hundreds of parameters you will need to define before implementation.

    Frank Trovato
    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Leadership has invested significantly in a new ITSM tool and expects to see the benefits they were promised by the vendor and the procurement team.

    The ITSM project team needs to balance leadership expectations with the direct impact this project will have on IT staff and end users.

    Implementing an ITSM tool is a large project that is often highly complex in part because it requires input from a wide range of stakeholders: IT staff, end users, senior management, and vendors.

    A new ITSM tool will change how IT staff work and how users are serviced, and change is always difficult.

    Finally, implementing the new tool requires a migration from an existing tool without a pause in IT service availability. Incidents don’t take a week off while you execute the final product rollout.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical to:

    • Identify the necessary stakeholders to provide input into implementation decisions.
    • Properly define scope and timelines.
    • Take advantage of the opportunity to review and improve processes as part of defining what will need to be configured in the new ITSM tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As with any large project, a key step is tackling it one bite at a time – but also understanding the size of the whole meal. This is where organizations often fail with ITSM implementations: not understanding upfront the volume of work required for a successful implementation.

    Your Challenge

    Organizations implementing a new ITSM tool often face these pitfalls:

    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project but also a process improvement opportunity. You will need to configure ITSM parameters and workflows in the new tool – which directly affects processes. Take advantage of that opportunity to fix pain points. For example, if your existing ticket categories are not effective, implement a better categorization scheme rather than just configure the same old, ineffective scheme.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool but they will not fix your processes for you. On installation day, if you are not prepared with the categories, ticket templates, and so on that you wish to configure, your vendor will just go with the default or migrate your old parameters from your old ITSM tool.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment. That takes planning and must be defined well before the vendor is ready to implement your tool.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    A survey of implementation challenges for ServiceNow’s customers

    26% Resistance to change

    43% Lacked a clear roadmap

    38% Planning for resources

    Source: Acorio, 2019

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Divide the implementation project into controllable phases for an effective implementation.

    Plan

    Define the scope of your project, identify and get buy-in from your stakeholders, and establish a timeframe for the implementation.

    Design & Build

    Identify existing process challenges and design workflows and ticket management to improve processes. Make decisions on data migrations and integrations for your new tool.

    Deploy & Train

    Create a rollout plan and communicate changes and improvements to users. Plan for the new tool deployment and monitor your solution.

    STOP: Use this blueprint after you have selected an ITSM solution

    Leverage our SoftwareReviews service and related blueprints to assist with ITSM tool selection, and then use this blueprint to plan the implementation.

    1. Evaluate solutions

    2. Select and purchase

    3. Implement (use this blueprint)

    Use our SoftwareReviews resources to evaluate solutions and vendors based on criteria such as features and customer service. Below are links to our ITSM software reviews:

    Use the following resources to help you make the case for funding and execute the purchase process:

    Your ITSM vendor or systems integrator will lead the technical implementation (e.g. software install and integration).

    As a result, your implementation plan needs to focus on preparing the information needed for implementation (e.g. ticket categories, workflow requirements) and organizational change management.

    This blueprint provides a methodology, checklist, and supporting templates to prepare for the implementation.

    Info-Tech’s methodology to build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    1. Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    2. Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    3. Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Document define scope

    1.2 Define roles and responsibilities

    1.3 Identify preliminary timeline

    2.1 Review your existing solution and challenges

    2.2 Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    2.3 Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations

    2.4 Plan the module rollout

    3.1 Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    3.2 Create a training plan

    3.3 Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Phase Outcomes

    • RACI chart outlining high-level accountability and responsibilities for the project
    • Documenting timeline and team for the implementation project
    • ITSM tool implementation checklist
    • Strategy and identified opportunities to implement incident and service request modules
    • Documented communications and targeted training plan
    • Completed rollout plan and prepared to monitor your success metrics

    Insight summary

    Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data

    ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices

    Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope

    We all love data. We love being able to run reports showing trends, measuring changes over time, and highlighting pain points – but is your data from five years ago relevant to those assessments? Can you get by with just migrating open tickets and perhaps just the last year of critical tickets?

    Be ruthless in deciding what really needs to be in your active system to support incident matching, troubleshooting, or ongoing reporting.

    If you can’t make a strong case, don’t waste your time on old data. Remember, you can still save an exported copy or report of your old data if the need arises to search historical records.

    For organizations lacking process maturity, the tool’s default settings will often provide a good starting point. For example, a good ITSM tool will typically already be configured to follow best practices such as:

    • Separating incidents from service requests
    • Assigning resolution codes to solved tickets
    • Enabling routing based on categories

    Within those defaults, you will still need to decide your specific parameters – e.g. what your categories and resolution codes should be – so don’t blindly follow default settings but use them as a starting point.

    Start with the incident management and service requests modules. Those are typically the core of IT service management operations, so that should help realize benefits from the new tool sooner. In addition, incident management and service requests processes will support other ITSM processes such as asset management and problem management.

    Once those modules are implemented successfully (from a technology and process perspective), then start to implement your next core module (e.g. asset or change management), and continue to build from there.

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint includes tools and templates to help you accomplish your goals:

    ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    Identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    ITSM Tool Project Charter Template

    Review and edit the template to suit your project requirements

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Project Charter Template.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist.

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Prioritize and prepare tool rollout plan

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Use the checklist to create your new tool training roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Blueprint benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Checklists and templates to support a smoother transition to the new ITSM tool.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project. A new tool with the same old processes will not achieve expected benefits.
    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Better planning means better results – specifically, ensuring that the implementation takes into account targeted business benefits.
    • Improved project management, and therefore better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront. This also provides the opportunity to re-scope or adjust timelines based on estimated effort.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction by executing a well-organized ITSM tool implementation.

    Measured value from using this blueprint

    Use this guide as an example to calculate your total cost savings from the ITSM tool implementation project.

    Phase 1

    Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to define scope and plan your project

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to build your solution strategy and determine configurations

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 8 days * $80,000/year = $5,400/-

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective communications roadmap and deploy tool

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Total Savings

    Total Savings

    Phase 1 + Phase 2 + Phase 3 = $13,400

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Define scope, roles, responsibilities and timeline.

    Call #2: Review your existing solution and challenges.

    Call #3: Plan ticket management and workflow implementation.

    Call #4: Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations.

    Call #5: Plan the module rollout.

    Call #6: Create a communication plan.

    Call #7: Create a training plan.

    Call #8: Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Define scope
    2. Define roles and responsibilities
    3. Identify preliminary timeline

    Step 1.1

    Define scope

    Activities

    1.1.1

    Use the Project Charter Template to capture project parameters

    1.1.2

    Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    1.1.3

    Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    1.1.4

    Interview ITSM staff to identify current tool challenges and support organizational change management

    1.1.5

    Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    1.1.6

    Determine if data migration is required

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the scope of the implementation project
    • Establish the future processes and functionalities the tool will support

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the implementation project
    • Identifying the business units that are needed to support the project
    • Defining the ongoing and future service management processes the tool will support

    1.1.1 Use the Project Charter Template to capture scope, stakeholders, and timeline as outlined in Phase 1

    Follow the instructions in Phase 1 (step 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) to gather information needed to create a project charter to define project parameters.

    Specific subsections are listed below and described in more detail in the remainder of this phase.

    1. Project Overview: Includes deliverables, scope, milestones, and success metrics.
    2. Governance and Management: Includes roles, responsibilities, and resource requirements.
    3. Project Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints: Includes risks and mitigation strategies as well as any assumptions and constraints.
    4. Project Sign-Off: Includes IT and executive sign-off (if required).

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    1.1.2 Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    The checklist tabs align to each phase of this blueprint.

    • Phase 1 (Tab 1) – Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline
    • Phase 2 (Tab 2) – Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules
    • Phase 3 (Tabs 3+4) – Prepare to Implement Additional ITSM Modules (e.g. Change Management)
    • Phase 4 (deployment section in each tab) – Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    The image contains screenshots from the Implementation Checklist.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    1.1.3 Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    Identify the triggers for the selection and implementation of your new ITSM tool.

    Whether this is your first ITSM tool or a replacement for your old tool, the project was likely triggered by pain points that must be addressed by the new tool to improve your service desk. Having a clear understanding of these pain points throughout the implementation of your new tool will help to prevent them from reoccurring.

    Common ITSM pain points include:

    1. Poor communication with end users on ticket status.
    2. Lack of SLA automation to escalate issues to the appropriate channels.
    3. Poor self-service options for end users to perform simple requests on their own.
    4. Undeveloped knowledgebase for users to find answers to common issues.
    5. Lack of reporting or mistrust in reporting data.
    6. Lack of automation, including ticket templates.
    7. Overcomplicated ticket categories resulting in categories being misused.
    8. Overconfiguration prevents future upgrades.
    9. Lack of integration with other tools.

    If you haven't already selected an ITSM tool, leverage the IT Service Management Selection Guide to select the right tool.

    Download the IT Service Management Selection Guide

    1.1.4 Plan to interview staff to support organizational change management

    Identify challenges with the existing tool and processes as well as potential objections to the new tool.

    Incorporate this feedback in the implementation to drive buy-in and a successful rollout.

    Implementing a new ITSM tool will force changes in how IT staff do their work:

    • At a minimum, it means learning a new interface.
    • It could also mean leveraging features that improve IT operations but could change the process or tasks for the staff.
    • Their input on the current tool and process challenges can be critical for the project.
    • Solving at least some of their challenges can help bring them onboard to use this tool properly and follow associated process changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep management in the loop through every stage of the implementation process. They are the ones who are paying for the software, so they need to be informed throughout implementation and feel that their needs and feedback are being heard to prevent pushback further into the implementation.

    1.1.5 Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    Consider these factors when deciding what modules and features you want to implement:

    • Specific ITSM modules based on the recommended order and any unique business requirements
    • Key features that drove the tool purchase and address key issues
    • High-level process changes needed to address challenges and realize expected benefits from the new ITSM tool (e.g. if a key goal was automated ticket routing based on categories, then the project needs to include developing a good categorization scheme)

    Recommended order for implementation:

    1. Incident Management and Service Request
    2. This is the core of service management and typically has the highest impact on the organization. Include knowledgebase development as part of this implementation.

    3. Change Management
    4. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to minimize disruptions to IT services when making changes to services and critical systems.

    5. Asset Management
    6. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to track their assets’ locations, how they are used, and when changes are made to them.

    1.1.6 Determine if data migration is required

    If you are switching from a previous ITSM tool, carefully weigh the pros and cons as well as the necessity of migrating historical transactional data before deciding to import it into the new tool.

    Importing your old transactional data will allow you to track metrics over time, which can be valuable for data analysis and reporting purposes.

    However, ask yourself what the true value of your data is before you import it.

    You will not get value out of migrating the old data if:

    • You have incomplete or inaccurate data (a high percentage of incidents did not have tickets created in the old system).
    • The categorization of your old tickets was not useful or was used inconsistently.
    • You plan on changing the ticket categorization in the new system.

    “Don’t debate whether you can import your old data until you’ve made sure that you should.”

    – Barry Cousins, Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you decide to migrate your data, keep in mind that it can be a complex process and proper time should be budgeted for planning, structuring the data, and importing and testing it.

    Step 1.2

    Define roles and responsibilities

    Activities

    1.2.1

    Key internal roles and responsibilities

    1.2.2

    Key external roles and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decision on whether to hire professional services for the implementation
    • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the project

    1.2.1 Identify key internal roles and responsibilities

    Review the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist to help you identify appropriate roles and specific staff that will be needed to execute this project.

    Project Role

    Description

    RACI

    Assigned To

    Executive Sponsor

    Liaison with the executive team (the CIO would be a good candidate for this role).

    Accountable for project completion.

    Approves resource allocation and funding.

    A, C

    Name(s)

    Project Manager

    Manages the project schedule, tasks, and budget.

    May act as a liaison between executives and the project-level team.

    R

    Name(s)

    Product Owner

    Liaison with the vendor.

    SME for the new tool.

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages the tool post-implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Process Owners

    Define current processes.

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address and potential changes as part of the new tool implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Service Desk Manager

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages and trains service desk agents to use new tool and processes.

    R

    Name(s)

    ITSM Tool Core Users (e.g. Service Desk Technicians)

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address.

    Provide input to tool configuration decisions.

    C

    Name(s)

    RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

    Assign individuals to roles through each step of the implementation project in the governance and management chart in the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.2.2 Key external roles and responsibilities

    Determine whether you will engage professional services for the implementation.

    There are three main ways to implement your ITSM tool

    Implemented in-house by own staff

    Implemented using a combination of your own staff and your ITSM tool vendor

    Implemented by professional services and your ITSM tool vendor

    DIY Implementation

    Adopting a DIY implementation approach can save money but could draw out your implementation timeline and increase the likelihood of errors. Carefully consider your integration environment to determine your resourcing capabilities and maturity.

    Vendor Implementation

    In most cases, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation based on your requirements. Use this blueprint to help you define those requirements.

    Professional Services

    Opting for professional services may result in a shorter implementation period and fewer errors but may also deny your IT staff the opportunity to develop the skills necessary to maintain and configure the solution in the future.

    Clarify the role of the professional services vendor before acquiring their services to make sure your expectations are aligned. For example, are you hiring the vendor for tool installation, tool configuration, or tool customization or for training your end users?

    Step 1.3

    Identify preliminary timeline

    Activities

    1.3.1

    Identify preliminary internal target dates

    1.3.2

    Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the target dates for the implementation project

    1.3.1 Identify preliminary internal target dates

    Identify high-level start and end dates based on the following:

    • Existing process maturity
    • Process changes required (to address process issues or to realize targeted benefits from the new tool)
    • Data migration requirements (if any)
    • Information to prepare for the implementation (review the Checklist Tool)
    • Vendor availability to support implementation
    • Executive mandates that have established specific milestone dates

    Create an initial project schedule:

    • Review the remaining phases of this blueprint for more details on the implementation planning steps.
    • Review and update the Checklist Tool to suit your implementation goals and requirements.
    • Assign task owners and target dates in the Checklist Tool.

    Note: This is a preliminary schedule. Monitor progress as well as requirement changes, and adjust the scope or schedule as needed.

    Update the columns in the Checklist Tool to plan and keep track of your implementation project.

    1.3.2 Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    Plan when you'll be ready for the vendor and identify the key points for when the vendor will come in.

    Are dates already scheduled for tool installation/configuration/customization?

    If yes:

    • Clarify vendor expectations for those target dates (i.e. what do you have to have prepared in advance?).
    • Determine options to adjust dates if needed.

    If no:

    • Defer scheduling until you have reviewed and updated the Implementation Checklist. The checklist will help you determine your readiness for vendor involvement.

    Consider if the vendor will implement the ITSM tool in one go or if they will help setup the tool in stages. Keep in mind that ITSM implementation projects typically take anywhere from 9 weeks to 16 months and plan accordingly depending on the maturity of your processes and the modules and features you plan to implement.

    Use your internal target dates to estimate when you'll be ready for the vendor to set up the tool and implement the setting that you've defined.

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    • Review your existing solution and challenges
    • Plan ticket management and workflow implementation
    • Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations
    • Plan the module rollout

    Additional Info-Tech Research

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in these blueprints.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    Step 2.1

    Review your existing solution and challenges

    Activities

    2.1.1

    Configure, don’t customize, your solution to minimize risk

    2.1.2

    Review your existing process and solution challenges for opportunities for improvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    2.1.1 Configure your tool, don’t customize it

    Your tool may require at least some basic configurations to align with your processes, but in most cases customization of the tool is not recommended.

    Configuration

    Customization

    • Creating settings and recording reference data in the tool within the normal functionality of the tool.
    • Does not require changes to source code.

    Documentation of configurations is key.

    Failure to document configurations and the reasons for specific configurations will lead to:

    • Difficulty diagnosing incidents and problems.
    • Difficulty reconstructing the tool in the case of disaster recovery.
    • One administrator having all of the knowledge of configurations and taking it with them if they leave the organization.
    • Configurations that become useless in the future are maintained and lead to unnecessary work if documentation is not regularly reviewed.
    • Extending the functionality of the tool beyond what it was originally intended to do.
    • Requires manual changes to source code.

    Carefully consider whether a customization is necessary.

    • Over-customization of your ITSM tool code may lock you into your current version of the software by preventing future patches and upgrades, leaving you with outdated software.
    • Over-customization becomes particularly risky when your ITSM solution is integrated with other tools, as a loss in functionality of your ITSM tool resulting from over-customization may cause disruptions across the business.
    • If your selected ITSM solution doesn’t do something you think you need it to do, carefully evaluate whether you really need that customization and if the trade-off of potentially limiting future innovation is worth it.

    Case Study

    Consider the consequences of over-customizing your solution.

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: IT Director

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    A few years ago, the service management office at the university decided to switch ITSM tools, from Computer Associates to ServiceNow.

    They wanted the new tool to behave similarly to what they had previously, so they made a lot of customized code changes to ServiceNow during implementation.

    As a result of the customizations, much of the functionality of the tool was restricted, and the upgrades were not compatible with the solution.

    The external consultants who performed the customizations and backend work did not document their changes, leaving the service management team without an understanding of why they did what they did.

    The service management team is working with ServiceNow to slowly unravel the custom code to try to get the solution back to having out-of-the-box functionality, with the ability to be upgraded.

    It has been challenging to do this work without disrupting the functionality of the tool.

    Over-customization led to the organization paying for features they couldn’t use and spending more time and resources down the road to try to reverse the changes.

    2.1.2 Review your existing process to identify opportunities for improvement

    Documenting your existing processes is an effective method for also reviewing those processes and identifying inefficiencies. Take advantage of this project to fix your process issues.

    1. Document your existing workflows for incident management and service requests.
    2. Review your workflows to identify opportunities to optimize through process refinement (e.g. clarifying escalation guidelines) or by leveraging features in your new ITSM tool (e.g. improved workflow automation).
    3. Similarly, review the challenges identified through stakeholder interviews: is there an opportunity address those challenges through process changes or leveraging your new ITSM tool?
    4. Address those challenge and issues as you execute the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist Tool. For example, if inconsistent ticket routing was identified as a challenge due to a vague categorization scheme, that’s a driver to review and update your scheme rather than just carry forward your existing scheme.

    Regardless of your existing ITSM maturity, this is an opportunity to review and optimize existing processes. Even the most-mature organizations can typically find an area to improve.

    Case Study

    Reviewing and defining processes before the implementation can be a project in itself.

    INDUSTRY: Defense

    SOURCE: Anonymous

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    The organization was switching to a new ITSM tool. To prepare for the implementation, they gathered stakeholders, held steering committee meetings, and broke down key processes, teams, and owners before even meeting with the larger group.

    They used a software tool called InDesign to visibly map service requests and incidents and determine who owned each process and where the handoffs were.

    The service catalog also needed to be built out as they were performing certain services that didn’t relate to anything in the catalog.

    The goal for the implementation was to have it completed within a year, but it ended up going over, taking 15 to 16 months to complete.

    Most of the time was spent identifying processes upfront before configuring the tool. There were difficulties defining processes as well as agreeing on who owned a process or service.

    There were also difficulties agreeing upon who the valid stakeholders were for processes, as groups were siloed.

    The major obstacles to implementation were therefore people and process, not the product.

    New processes were introduced, and boundaries were placed around processes that were being done in the past that weren’t necessary.

    Once the groups were able to agree upon process owners, the tool configuration and implementation itself did not pose any major difficulties.

    After the implementation, the tool was continually improved and sharpened to adapt to processes.

    Step 2.2

    Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    Activities

    2.2.1

    Define ticket classification values

    2.2.2

    Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    2.2.3

    Plan your ticket intake channels

    2.2.4

    Design a self-service portal

    2.2.5

    Plan your knowledgebase implementation in the new tool

    2.2.6

    Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    2.2.7

    Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/ service groups

    2.2.8

    Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    2.2.9

    Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Tool is designed and configured to support service desk processes and organization needs.

    Checklist overview

    The ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist will help you estimate resources required to support demand, based on your ticket volume.

    TAB 2

    TAB 3

    TAB 4

    Incident and Service Modules Checklist

    Change Management Modules

    Asset Management Modules

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 2. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 3. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 4.

    How to follow this section:

    The following slides contain a table that explains why each task in the module matters and what needs to be considered. Complete the checklist modules referring to this section.

    2.2.1 Define ticket classification values

    Ticket classification improves reporting, workflow automation, and problem identification.

    Review your existing ticket classification values to identify what to carry forward, drop, or change. For example, if your categorization scheme has become too complex, this is your opportunity to fix it; don’t perpetuate ineffective classification in the new tool.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Ticket Types (e.g. incident, service request, change)

    In particular, separating incidents from service requests supports appropriate ticket prioritization and resourcing; for example, an incident typically should be prioritized, and service requests can be scheduled.

    Categories (e.g. network, servers)

    An effective categorization scheme can help identify ticket assignment and escalation (e.g. network tickets would be escalated to the network team), and potentially automate ticket routing.

    Resolution Codes

    Indicates how the ticket was resolved (e.g. configuration change). Supports another layer of trends reporting and data to support problem identification.

    Status Values

    Shows what status the ticket is currently in (e.g. if the ticket has been opened or assigned to an agent, if it is in progress or has been resolved).

    2.2.2 Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    Ticket templates are the backbone of automation. A common complaint is that tickets take too much time. However, a little planning can reduce the time it takes to create a ticket to less than a minute.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify common recurring tickets that would be good candidates for using ticket templates (e.g. common service requests and incidents).

    Some common recurring tickets such as password reset, new laptop, and login requests would be great candidates to create ticket templates for. Building a deck of standard rules to follow for common tickets saves time and reduces the number of tickets generated.

    Design ticket templates and workflows for common tickets (e.g. fields to auto-populate as well as routing and secondary tickets for onboarding requests).

    Differentiating between recurring ticket types and building pre-defined templates not just saves time but can also have major impact on how service is delivered as this will also help separate tickets. Creating these templates beforehand will also let you communicate effectively with the users at a time when all hands need to be on deck.

    2.2.3 Plan your ticket intake channels

    Consider possible ticket intake channels and evaluate their relevance to your organization.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Decide on ticket intake channels (e.g. phone, email, portal, walk-ups).

    Each standard intake channel serves its own purposes and can be extremely valuable under different circumstances. For example, walk-ins may be inefficient but necessary for critical incidents.

    If using email, identify/create the email account and appropriate permissions.

    Email works well if it automatically creates a ticket in your ticketing system, but users often don’t provide enough information in unstructured emails. Use required fields and ticket templates to ensure the ticket is properly categorized.

    If using phone, identify/create the phone number and appropriate integrations.

    Maintain the phone for users from other locations and for critical incidents but encourage users who call in to submit a ticket through the portal.

    If using a portal, determine if you will leverage the tool's portal or an existing portal.

    The web portal is the most efficient intake method, but ensure it is user friendly before promoting it.

    If using chat, determine whether you will use the tool's chat or an existing chat mechanism and whether integrations are needed.

    Another way to improve support experience for your customers is through live chat. This gives your customers an easy way to reach you at the exact moment they have questions or issues they can't fix.

    2.2.4 Design a self-service portal

    Map your processes to the tool by defining your ticket input, categories, escalations, and workflows.

    Don’t forget about the client-facing side of the solution. It is important to build a self-serve portal that has an easy-to-use interface where the user can easily find the category for the help they’re looking for. It is also necessary to educate the users on where to find the portal or how to access it.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify components to include (e.g. service request, incident, knowledgebase).

    Identify the categories you want the users to be able to access in the portal. Finding the right balance of components to include is very important to make it easy for your users to find all the relevant information they are looking for. This could mean fewer tickets.

    Plan the input form for service requests and incidents (e.g. mandatory fields, optional fields, drop-down lists).

    Having relevant and specific fields helps to narrow down your user’s issues and provides more information on how to allocate these tasks among the service desk resources and reduce time to further investigate the issues.

    If service catalog will be attached to the ITSM tool, define routing and workflows; if there is no existing service catalog, start a separate project to define it (e.g. services, SLAs).

    A centrally defined guide enables a uniform quality in service and clarifies the responsible tier for the ticket. Identify services that will be included in the catalog, and if the information is attached to the ITSM tool, plan for how will the routing and workflows be structured.

    Plan design requirements (e.g. company branding).

    Ensure that the portal is aligned with the company’s theme and access format. Work with the vendor to customize the branding on the tool, design requirements, images.

    2.2.5 Plan your knowledgebase (KB) implementation in the new tool

    Evaluate how onerous KB migration will be for you. Is this an opportunity to improve how the KB is organized?

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define knowledgebase categories and structure.

    Establishing knowledgebase structures or having them separated into categories makes it easy for your clients to find them (e.g. do they align with ticket categories?).

    Identify existing knowledgebase articles to add to the new tool.

    Review existing knowledgebase articles at a high level (e.g. Do you carry forward all existing articles? Take an opportunity to retire old articles?).

    Define knowledgebase article templates.

    Having standardized templates makes it an easy read and will increase its usage (e.g. all knowledgebase articles for recurring incidents will follow the same template).

    Build knowledgebase article creation, usage, and revision workflows.

    Decide how new knowledgebase articles will be built and added to the tool, how it will be accessed and used, and also any steps necessary to update the articles.

    Plan a knowledgebase feedback system.

    For example, include a comments section, like buttons, and who will get notified about feedback.

    2.2.6 Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify triggers for status notifications. Balance the need for keeping users informed versus notifications being treated as spam.

    Identify when and where the users are informed to make sure you are not under or over communicating with them. Status notifications and alerts are a great way to set or reset expectations to your users on the delivery or resolution on their tickets. For example, auto-response for a new ticket, or status updates to users when the ticket is assigned, solved, and closed.

    If using email notifications, design email templates for each type of notification.

    Creating notification templates is a great way to provide standardized service to your clients and it saves time when a ticket is raised. For example, email templates for new ticket, ticket updated, or ticket closed.

    Plan how you will enable users to validate the ticket or resolve request without causing the ticket to reopen.

    For example, in the ticket solved template, provide a link to close the ticket, and ask the user to reply only if they wish to re-open the ticket (i.e. if it's not resolved). May require consulting with the ITSM tool vendor.

    Decide if customer satisfaction surveys will be sent to end users after their ticket has been closed.

    Discuss if this data would be useful to you if captured to improve/modify your service.

    If customer satisfaction surveys will be used, design the survey.

    Discuss what data would be useful to you if captured and create survey questionnaires to capture that data from your clients. For example, how many questions, types of questions, whether sent for every ticket or randomly.

    2.2.7 Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/service groups

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define Tier 1, 2, and 3 roles and their associated access levels.

    Having pre-established roles for different tiers and teams is a great way to boost accountability and also helps identify training requirements for each tier. For example, knowledgebase training for tier 1 & 2, reporting/analytics for IT manager.

    Identify skill groups or support teams.

    Establishing accountability for all the support practices in the service desk is important for the tickets to be effectively distributed among the functional individuals and teams. Identifying the responsibilities of groups help execute shift-left strategy.

    Identify required email permissions for each role.

    For example, define which roles get permissions to include status updates or other ticket information in their emails or to support automated notifications and other integrations with email.

    Determine how you will import users into the new tool.

    Identify the best way to migrate your users to the new tool whether it be by importing from Active Directory or the old ITSM tool, etc.

    2.2.8 Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review it to make sure it’s accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows by leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.2.9 Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    Documentation of key metrics of service desk performance and end-user satisfaction that you wish to improve through the new solution is key to evaluate the success of your implementation.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define the metrics you will track in the new ITSM tool.

    It is critical to ensure that your tool will be able to track necessary metrics on KPIs from the start and that this data is accurate and reliable so that reporting will be relevant and meaningful to the business. Whether you use your own tool for tracking metrics or an external tool, ensure that you can get the internal data you need from the ITSM tool. This may include measures of Productivity (e.g. time to respond, time to resolve), Service (e.g. incident backlog, customer satisfaction), and Proactiveness (e.g. number of knowledgebase articles per week).

    Determine what reports you want to generate from data collected through the tool.

    It’s not enough to simply set up metrics, you have to actually use the information. Reports should be analyzed regularly and used to manage costs and productivity, improve services, and identify issues. Ensure that your service desk team contributes to the usefulness of reporting by following processes such as creating tickets for every incident and request, categorizing it properly, and closing it after it’s resolved with the proper resolution code.

    Identify the information and metrics to include in the ITSM tool's dashboards.

    A dashboard helps drive accountability across the team through greater visibility. Decide what will be reported on the dashboard. For example, average time to resolution, number of open tickets with subtotals for each priority, problem ticket aging.

    Step 2.3

    Plan data migration and integrations

    Activities

    2.3.1

    Create a data migration and archiving plan

    2.3.2

    Identify and plan required integrations

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decisions made around data migration, integrations, automation, and reporting.
    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    2.3.1 Create a data migration and archiving plan

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review them to make sure they’re accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor-intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.3.2 Identify and plan required integrations

    Consider and plan for any necessary integrations with other systems.

    A major component of the implementation that should be carefully considered throughout is if and how to integrate your ITSM tool with other applications in the environment.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify the systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool (e.g. asset discovery tools, reporting systems).

    Regardless of whether your solution will be configured and installed on-premises or as a SaaS, you need to consider the underlying technology to determine how you will integrate it with other tools where necessary.

    Businesses may need to integrate their ITSM tool with other systems including asset management, network monitoring, and reporting systems to make the organization more efficient.

    Determine how data will flow between systems.

    Carefully evaluate the purpose of each integration. Clients often want their ITSM tool to be integrated with all of the available data in another application when they only need a subset of that data to be integrated.

    Consider not only which systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool but also who the owners of those systems are and which way the data needs to flow.

    Plan the development, configuration, and testing of integrations.

    As with other aspects of the implementation, configure and test the integrations before going live with the tool.

    Step 2.4

    Plan the module rollout

    Activities

    2.4.1

    Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    2.4.2

    Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify and plan for additional modules and features to be implemented

    2.4.1 Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    The preparation completed in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provide a foundation for additional ITSM modules.

    This blueprint starts with the incident management and service request modules as those are typically implemented first since they are the most impactful to day-to-day IT service management.

    In addition, the methodology outlined in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provides a model to follow for additional ITSM modules:

    • If you did not already account for additional modules in Phase 1, then repeat the steps in Phase 1 to define scope, stakeholders, and timeline.
    • The Implementation Checklist Tool provides tabs for Change Management and Asset Management to outline the specific details for those topic areas, but they follow the same high-level steps as Phase 2 (e.g. review existing processes, design relevant workflows).
    • If you are planning to implement other modules (e.g. Problem Management), create additional tabs in the Implementation Checklist Tool as needed, using the existing tabs as a base.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM checklists.

    2.4.2 Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in the blueprints below.

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Create an SOP and associated process workflows to streamline and standardize hardware asset management.

    Implement Software Asset Management

    Build on a strong hardware asset management program to also properly track and manage software assets. This includes managing software licensing, finding opportunities to reduce costs, and improving your software audit readiness.

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)
    2. Create a training plan
    3. Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Use the deployment plan template to document the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Download the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Step 3.1

    Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    Activities

    3.1.1

    Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    3.1.2

    Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance

    3.1.3

    Communicate new processes with business leaders and end users to improve positive customer feedback

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. CIO/IT Director
    2. IT Manager
    3. Service Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Plan for communicating the change with business executives, service desk agents, and end users.

    3.1.1 Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    A common contributing factor for unsuccessful implementation is a lack of communication around training, transitioning, and deploying the new tool.

    Common Pitfall:

    Organizational communication and change management should have been ongoing and tightly monitored throughout the project. However, cut-over is a time in which critical communication regarding deployment and proper user training can be derailed when last-minute preparations take priority. Not only will general user frustration increase, but unintended process workarounds will emerge, eroding system effectiveness.

    Mitigating Actions:

    Deliver training for end users that will be engaged in testing. For all other users, deliver training prior to go-live to avoid the risk of training too early (where materials may not be ready or users are likely to forget what was learned). If possible, host quick refresher training a week or two prior to go-live.

    Aim to communicate the upcoming go-live. The purpose of communication here is to reiterate expectations, complexities, and ramifications on business going forward. Alleviate performance anxiety by clearly stating that temporary drops in productivity are to be expected and that there will be appropriate assistance throughout the transition period.

    Transition: Have the project/program manager remain on the project team for some time after deployment to oversee and assure smooth transition for the organization.

    Complete training: Have a clear plan for training those users that were missed in the first round of training as well as a plan for ongoing training for those that require refresher training, for new joiners to your organization, and for any training requirements that result from subsequent upgrades.

    3.1.2 Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve

    It’s important to communicate the change ahead of the implementation, but also to reinforce that communication after implementation to recover from any resistance that occurs through the implementation itself.

    Stages in a typical change curve:

    1. Change is announced. Some people are skeptical and resistant, but others are enthusiastic. Most people are fence sitters; if they trust senior leadership, they will give the benefit of the doubt and expect change to be good.
    2. Positive sentiment declines as implementation approaches. Training and other disruptions take people’s time and energy away from their work. Project setbacks and delays take credibility away from project leaders and seem to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics.
    3. Overall sentiment begins to improve as people adjust and see real progress made. Ideally, early successes or quick wins neutralize saboteurs and convert skeptics. At the very least, people will begin to accept and adapt to new realities.
    4. If the project is successful and communication is reinforced after implementation, sentiment will peak and level out over time as people move on to other projects.

    The image contains a diagram of a change curve.

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: Tentative support and enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): People realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or how soon they’ll be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: More optimism and support when people begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    3.1.3 Communicate new processes

    1. Communicate with business unit leaders and users:
    • Focus on the benefits for end users to encourage buy-in for the change.
    • Include preliminary instructions with a date for training sessions.
  • Train users:
    • Teach users how to contact the service desk and submit a ticket.
    • Set expectations for IT’s response.
    • Record all your training sessions so it can used for recursive training.
  • Enforce:
    • IT must point users toward the new process, but ad hoc requests should still be expected at first. Deal with these politely but encourage all employees to use the new service desk ticketing process, if applicable.
  • Measure success:
    • Continue to adjust communications if processes aren’t being followed to ensure SLAs can be met and improved.

    “Communicate with your end users in phase 1 to let them know what will be changing, get feedback and buy-in, and inform them that training will be happening, then ensure you train them once the tool is installed. A lot of times we’ll get our tool set up but people don’t know how to use it."

    – Director of ITSM Tools

    Info-Tech Insight

    If there is a new process for ticket input, consider using a reward system for users who submit a ticket through the proper channel ;(e.g. email or self-serve portal) instead of their old method (e.g. phone). However, if a significant cultural change is required, don’t expect it to happen right away.

    Step 3.2

    Create a training plan

    Activities

    3.2.1

    Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk, service groups, IT managers

    3.3.1

    Provide training (tool/portal and process changes)

    3.4.1

    Choose an appropriate training delivery method that will focus on both process and tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Training modules for different users of the tool.
    • Assignment of training modules to users and schedule for completion.

    3.2.1 Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk and IT staff

    Create targeted role-based training programs for your service desk analysts; they care about the portion of the solution they are responsible for, not the functionality that is irrelevant to their job.

    Create and execute a role-based training program by conducting training sessions for targeted groups of users, training them on the functions they require to perform their jobs.

    Use a table like this one to help identify which roles should be trained on which tasks within the ITSM tool.

    The image contains a table as an example of identifying which roles should be trained within the ITSM tool.

    The need for targeted training:

    • IT personnel may challenge the need for training. They may feel they don’t require training on the use of tools or that they don’t have time to dedicate to training when there is so much work to be done.
    • Providing targeted training focused on only the functions of the solution that each tier is responsible for can help to overcome that resistance.
    • Targeted training may include basic training for level 1 technicians and more advanced in-depth training for administrators, power users, or level 2/3 technicians.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Properly trained users promote adoption and improve results. Always keep training materials updated and available. New employees, new software integration, and internal promotions create opportunities for training employees to align the ITSM tool with their roles and responsibilities.

    3.2.2 Provide training

    Training must take place before deployment to ensure that both your service desk agents and end users will use the tool in the way it was intended and improve end-user satisfaction.

    • Implementing a new ITSM tool will likely bring with it at least some degree of organizational and cultural change. It’s important to manage that change through proper training. Your training needs will vary depending on the maturity of the organization and the amount of cultural and process change being implemented.
    • If this is your first ITSM solution with many new changes for staff to take on board, it will be important to dedicate training time not only before deployment but also several months after the initial installation, to allow staff to gain more experience with the new tool and processes and formulate questions they may not think to ask during implementation.
    • A training plan should take into account not only training needs for the implementation project but also any ongoing training requirements that may be required. This may include:
      • Training for new personnel.
      • Training on any changes to the tool.
      • Training on any new processes the tool will support.
    • Better agent training will lead to better performance and improved end-user satisfaction.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate training hours and first contact resolution.

    The blue graph line charts new-agent training hours against first contact resolution and the orange graph line charts the trendline for the dataset.

    Source: MetricNet, 2012

    3.2.3 Choose an appropriate training delivery method

    Training should include use cases that focus on not only how the tool’s interface works but also how the tool should be used to support process activities.

    1. Training through use cases highlights how the tool will support the user in role-based tasks.
    2. If new processes are being introduced along with the tool, training should cover both in an integrated way.
    3. Team leadership and management commitment ensures that all agents take their training seriously and are prepared for all use cases by the deployment date.

    Trainer-led sessions:

    Self-taught sessions:

    • May take the form of onsite or video training.
    • Vendor may train administrators or managers, who will later train remaining staff.
    • Allows for interaction with the trainer and greater opportunity to ask questions.
    • Difficult for large organizations with many users to be trained.
    • Delivered via computer-based training applications, typically through a web browser.
    • May include voice training sessions combined with exercises and quizzes.
    • More feasible for large, distributed organizations with less flexible schedules.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Ensure that the training demonstrates not only how the tool should be used, but also the benefits it will provide your staff in terms of improved efficiency and productivity. Users who can clearly see the benefits the tool will provide for their daily work will accept the tool more readily and promote it across the organization.

    Step 3.3

    Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Activities

    3.3.1

    Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    3.3.2

    Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    3.3.3

    Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    3.3.4

    Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    3.3.5

    Monitor success metrics defined in Phase 1

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Deployment plan, including a plan for cut-over from the old tool (if applicable), release of the new tool, and post-deployment support and maintenance of the tool.

    3.3.1 Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    If you will have a transitional period during which the current tool will be used alongside the new tool, develop a clear plan for the transition to ensure continued service for your end users.

    • If there will be an interim period during which only some aspects of the new ITSM tool are functional, you will need to determine how the new system and old systems will work together for that period of time. This may require creating interfaces as well as providing user documentation and/or SOPs on how the business processes will operate during the interim period.
    • Cut-over is the period during which the changeover to the new system occurs. Cut-over activities need to be tightly choreographed for a successful deployment. If improperly planned, chaos may erupt when unforeseen issues are encountered during deployment, the deployment may be jeopardized, and the organization may encounter costly interruptions to its daily operations.
    • Many organizations may leave any open tickets in the old tool until they are closed, which requires that tool run alongside the new tool for a transitional period. In this case, it is necessary to create guidelines around how long the open tickets will remain in the old system and ensure there is clear communication around these processes.

    Be prepared for the transition:

    1. Create a robust cut-over plan that includes when the old tool will be decommissioned, what activities are necessary during the cut-over, and what the contingency plan is in case of unforeseen issues.
    2. Plan for and perform mock cut-overs to establish the timeline and dependencies for all steps that need to be performed to successfully complete the changeover. Do this to avoid any surprises or delays during the true cut-over period.
    3. Establish cut-over logistics: Create a schedule for resources to work in shifts to avoid burn-out during cut-over, which can lead to lapses in judgment and easily avoidable mistakes. Allocate dedicated workspaces for cut-over activities, e.g. “war rooms” for the triage of issues.

    3.3.2 Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    Approaches and insights from three case studies

    Case Study #1

    Case Study #2

    Case Study #3

    On day one we started recording all new incidents in the new tool, and everything that was open in the old tool remained open for about one month. At that point we transferred over some open incidents but closed old incidents with the view that if anyone really wanted something done that hadn’t been yet, they could re-submit a ticket.

    – Brett Andrews,

    Managing Director at BAPTISM Consultancy

    It made sense for us to start fresh with the new system. We left all of the old tickets in the old system and started the new system with ticket #1. We only had about a dozen open tickets in the old system so we left them there and ran the two tools side by side until those were closed.

    – CIO, Publishing

    It depends on the client and the size of their service desk as well as the complexity of their data and whether they need their old data for reporting. If there are only a dozen open tickets, they can manually move those over easily, and decide whether they want to migrate their historical data for reporting purposes.

    – Scott Walling,

    Co-Founder at Monitor 24-7 Inc.

    3.3.3 Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    Follow a deployment plan for introducing new processes alongside the new tool to ensure changes to both process and technology are adopted simultaneously.

    If you’re introducing new processes alongside the new tool, it’s important to maintain the link between process and tool. Typically, the processes and tool should be deployed simultaneously unless there is a strong reason not to do so.

    Deployment can be done as a big-bang or phased approach. The decision to employ a phased deployment depends on the number and size of business units the tool will support, as well as the organization’s geography and infrastructure (deployment locations).

    Before deployment, conduct readiness assessments to understand whether:

    The people are ready to accept the new system (have received the proper training and communications and understand how their jobs will change when the switch is flipped).

    The technology is ready (test results are favorable, workarounds and a plan for closure have been identified for any open defects, and the system is performing as expected).

    The data is ready (data for final conversion has been cleansed, and all conversions have been rehearsed).

    The post-deployment support model is ready (infrastructure and technical support is in place, sites are ready, knowledge transfer has been conducted with the support organization, and end users understand procedures for escalation of issues).

    3.3.4 Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    Ensure that strong internal support for the project and tool will continue after deployment.

    The stabilization period after a new software deployment can last between three and nine months, during which there may be continued training needs and fine-tuning of processes. Internal support from project leaders within your organization will be critical to recover from any dip in operational efficiency and deliver the benefits of the tool.

    Consider the following to prepare better for your support plan:

    What are the roles and responsibilities for ongoing tool administration support?

    What level of support will exist to assist service desk staff after deployment?

    How much time will project team resources devote to tackling upcoming issues and assisting with ongoing support?

    Who will be responsible for ongoing training needs and documentation?

    If your organization is spread across multiple locations, what level of support/assistance will be available at each site?

    How will new code releases or system upgrades be managed and communicated?

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Deployment is only the first step in the system lifecycle. Full benefit realization from the tool requires ongoing investment and learning to be sustained. Unless processes and training are updated on an ongoing basis, benefits gained will start to decrease over time. If your service desk efficiency stagnates at the level it was at prior to implementation, the tool has failed to serve its objective.

    Establish ongoing tool maintenance, improvement structures, and processes

    People, processes, and organizations change over time, and your ITSM tool will need to change to meet expectations.

    Develop and execute a plan for the maintenance of the solution and its infrastructure components.

    Include periodic reviews against business needs and operational requirements (e.g. patches, upgrades, and risk and security requirements).

    For maintenance updates, use the change management process and assess how an activity will impact solution design, functionality, and business processes.

    For major changes that result in significant change in current designs, functionality, and/or business processes, follow the development process used for new systems.

    Ensure that maintenance activities are periodically analyzed for abnormal trends indicating underlying quality or performance problems, cost/benefit of major upgrade, or replacement in lieu of maintenance.

    Assign responsibility for ongoing maintenance. Hold regular meetings for the following activities:

    1. Inspect data and reports.
    2. Assess whether you’re meeting SLAs.
    3. Predict any upcoming changes that may impact ticket volume (e.g. a new operating system or security patch).
    4. Create new ticket templates for recurring or upcoming issues.
    5. Create new knowledgebase articles.
    6. Determine whether ticket categories are being used correctly.
    7. Ask team if there are any problems with the tool.

    3.3.5 Monitor success metrics defined in Project Charter

    Revisit your goals for the solution and assess if they are being met by evaluating current metrics. If your goals have not yet been met, re-evaluate how to ensure the tool will deliver value.

    Sample High-Level Goals:

    1. Improved service desk efficiency
    2. Improved end-user satisfaction
    3. Improved self-service options for end users
    4. Improved data and reporting capabilities

    Sample Metric Descriptions

    Baseline Metric

    Goal

    Current Metric

    Increased ticket input through email versus phone

    50% of tickets submitted through phone

    10% of tickets submit through phone

    Reduced ticket volume (through improved self-serve capabilities)

    1,500 tickets per month

    1,200 tickets per month

    Improved first call resolution (through increased efficiency and automation)

    50% FCR

    60% FCR

    Improved ability to meet SLAs (through automated escalations and prioritization)

    5 minutes to log a ticket

    1 minute to log a ticket

    Improved time to produce reports

    3 business days

    1 business day

    Improved end-user satisfaction

    60% satisfied with services

    75% satisfied

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    IT Service Management Selection Guide

    Identify the best-of-breed solution to make the most of your investment and engage the right stakeholders to define success.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Develop a framework to track metrics, clean data, and put your data to use for pre-defined timelines.

    Bibliography

    Adiga, Siddanth. “10 Reasons Why ITSM Implementations Fail.” Could Strategy, 6 May 2015. Web.

    Hastie, Shane, and Stéphane Wojewoda. “Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” InfoQ, 4 October 2015. Web.

    “How to Manage Change in the Implementation of an ITSM Software.” C2, 20 April 2015. Web.

    Lockwood, Meghan. “First Look: Annual ServiceNow Insight and Vision Executive Summary [eBook].” Acorio, 31 October 2019. Web.

    Mainville, David. “7 Steps to a Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” Navvia, 2012. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Preparing for ITSM Tool Implementation.” Joe the IT Guy, 24 June 2015. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” BrightTALK, 9 May 2013. Webcast.

    Rumburg, Jeffrey. “Metric of the Month: Agent Training Hours.” MetricNet, 2012. Web.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}350|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,858 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Your on-premises Dynamics CRM or AX needs updating or replacing, and you’re not sure whether to upgrade or transition to the cloud with the new Microsoft Dynamics 365 platform. You’re also uncertain about what the cost might be or if there are savings to be had with a transition to the cloud for your enterprise resource planning system.
    • The new license model, Apps vs. Plans and Dual Use Rights in the cloud, includes confusing terminology and licensing rules that don’t seem to make sense. This makes it difficult to purchase proper licensing that aligns with your current on-premises setup and to maximize your choices in transition licenses.
    • There are different licensing programs for Dynamics 365 in the cloud. You need to decide on the most cost effective program for your company, for now and for the future.
    • Microsoft is constantly pressuring you to move to the cloud, but you don’t understand the why. You're uncertain if there's real value in such a strategic move right now, or if should you wait awhile.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. Do a thorough current state assessment of your hardware and software needs and consider what will be required in the near future (one to four years).
    • Educate yourself. You should have a good understanding of your options from staying on-premises vs. an interim hybrid model vs. a lift and shift to the cloud.
    • Consider the overall picture. There might not be hard cost savings to be realized in the near term, given the potential increase in licensing costs over a CapEx to OpEx savings.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding the best time to transition, from a licensing perspective, could save you significant dollars over the next one to four years.
    • Planning and effectively mapping your current licenses to the new cloud user model will maximize your current investment into the cloud and fully leverage all available Microsoft incentives in the process.
    • Gaining the knowledge required to make the most informed transition decision, based on best timing, most appropriate licensing program, and maximized cost savings in the near term.
    • Engaging effectively with Microsoft and a competent Dynamics partner for deployment or licensing needs.

    Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should learn about Microsoft Dynamics 365 user-based cloud licensing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Timing

    Review to confirm if you are eligible for Microsoft cloud transition discounts and what is your best time to move to the cloud.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 1: Timing
    • Microsoft License Agreement Summary Tool
    • Existing CRM-AX License Summary Worksheet

    2. Licensing

    Begin with a review to understand user-based cloud licensing, then move to mapping your existing licenses to the cloud users and plans.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 2: Licensing
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 On-Premises License Transition Mapping Tool
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 User License Assignment Tool
    • Microsoft Licensing Programs Brief Overview

    3. Cost review

    Use your cloud mapping activity as well your eligible discounts to estimate your cloud transition licensing costs.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 3: Cost Review
    • Microsoft Dynamics 365 Cost Estimator

    4. Analyze and decide

    Start by summarizing your choice license program, decide on the ideal time, then move on to total cost review.

    • Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud – Phase 4: Analyze and Decide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Microsoft Dynamics 365: Understand the Transition to the Cloud

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand What You Own and What You Can Transition to the Cloud

    The Purpose

    Understand what you own and what you can transition to the cloud.

    Learn which new cloud user licenses to transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    All your licenses in one summary.

    Eligible transition discounts.

    Mapping of on-premises to cloud users.

    Activities

    1.1 Validate your discount availability.

    1.2 Summarize agreements.

    1.3 Itemize your current license ownership.

    1.4 Review your timing options.

    1.5 Map your on-premises licenses to the cloud-based, user-based model.

    Outputs

    Current agreement summary

    On-premises to cloud user mapping summary

    Understanding of cloud app and plan features

    2 Transition License Cost Estimate and Additional Costs

    The Purpose

    Estimate cloud license costs and other associated expenses.

    Summarize and decide on the best timing, users, and program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Good cost estimate of equivalent cloud user-based licenses.

    Understanding of when and how to move your on-premises licensing to the new Dynamics 365 cloud model.

    Activities

    2.1 Estimate cloud user license costs.

    2.2 Calculate additional costs related to license transitions.

    2.3 Review all activities.

    2.4 Summarize and analyze your decision.

    Outputs

    Cloud user licensing cost modeling

    Summary of total costs

    Validation of costs and transition choices

    An informed decision on your Dyn365 timing, licensing, and costs

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}172|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,542 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor:

    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot outsource application strategy.
    • Modern software options have lessened the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. But your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require centralized oversight to ensure the best overall return on investment.
    • Application portfolio management is the mechanism to ensure that the applications in your enterprise are delivering value and support for your value streams and business capabilities. Understanding value, satisfaction, technical health, and total cost of ownership are critical to digital transformation, modernization, and roadmaps.

    Impact and Result

    Build an APM program that is actionable and fit for size:

    • Understand your current state, needs, and goals for your application portfolio management.
    • Create an application and platform inventory that is built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps with business priorities and communicate risk in operational terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support your applications.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Deck – A guide that helps you establish your core application inventory, simplified rationalization, redundancy comparison, and modernization roadmap.

    Enterprises have more applications than they need and rarely apply oversight to monitor the health, cost, and relative value of applications to ensure efficiency and minimal risk. This blueprint will help you build a streamlined application portfolio management process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations – Phases 1-4

    2. Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool – A tool that assesses your current application portfolio.

    Visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices will help inform and guide your next steps.

    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    3. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook – A template that builds your application portfolio management playbook.

    Capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    4. Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool – A tool that stores application information and allows you to execute rationalization and build a portfolio roadmap.

    This tool is the central hub for the activities within Application Portfolio Management Foundations.

    • Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Work with key corporate stakeholders to come to a shared understanding of the benefits and aspects of application portfolio management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the goals of APM.

    Set the scope of APM responsibilities.

    Establish business priorities for the application portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Define goals and metrics.

    1.2 Define application categories.

    1.3 Determine steps and roles.

    1.4 Weight value drivers.

    Outputs

    Set short- and long-term goals and metrics.

    Set the scope for applications.

    Set the scope for the APM process.

    Defined business value drivers.

    2 Improve Your Inventory

    The Purpose

    Gather information on your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Populated inventory based on your and your team’s current knowledge.

    Understanding of outstanding data and a plan to collect it.

    Activities

    2.1 Populate inventory.

    2.2 Assign business capabilities.

    2.3 Review outstanding data.

    Outputs

    Initial application inventory

    List of areas of redundancy

    Plan to collect outstanding data

    3 Gather Application Information

    The Purpose

    Work with the application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dispositions for individual applications

    Application rationalization framework

    Activities

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.3 Assess TCO.

    3.4 Assess technical health.

    3.5 Assess redundancies.

    3.6 Determine dispositions.

    Outputs

    Business value score for individual applications

    End-user satisfaction scores for individual applications

    TCO score for individual applications

    Technical health scores for individual applications

    Feature-level assessment of redundant applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual applications

    4 Gather, Assess, and Select Dispositions

    The Purpose

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized initiatives

    Initial application portfolio roadmap

    Ongoing structure of APM

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives

    4.2 Populate roadmap.

    4.3 Determine ongoing APM cadence.

    4.4 Build APM action plan.

    Outputs

    Prioritized new potential initiatives.

    Built an initial portfolio roadmap.

    Established an ongoing cadence of APM activities.

    Built an action plan to complete APM activities.

    Further reading

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Analyst Perspective

    You can’t outsource accountability.

    Many lack visibility into their overall application portfolio, focusing instead on individual projects or application development. Inevitably, application sprawl creates process and data disparities, redundant applications, and duplication of resources and stands as a significant barrier to business agility and responsiveness. The shift from strategic investment to application maintenance creates an unnecessary constraint on innovation and value delivery.

    With the rise and convenience of SAAS solutions, IT has an increasing need to discover and support all applications in the organization. Unmanaged and unsanctioned applications can lead to increased reputational risk. What you don’t know WILL hurt you.

    You can outsource development, you can even outsource maintenance, but you cannot outsource accountability for the portfolio. Organizations need a holistic dashboard of application performance and dispositions to help guide and inform planning and investment discussions. Application portfolio management (APM) can’t tell you why something is broken or how to fix it, but it is an important tool to determine if an application’s value and performance are up to your standards and can help meet your future goals.

    The image contains a picture of Hans Eckman.

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group


    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing your application portfolio is essential regardless of its size or whether your software is purchased or developed in house. Each organization must have some degree of application portfolio management to ensure that applications deliver value efficiently and that their risk or gradual decline in technical health is appropriately limited.

    Your APM goals

    If this describes your primary goal(s)

    • We are building a business case to determine where and if APM is needed now.
    • We want to understand how well supported are our business capabilities, departments, or core functions by our current applications.
    • We want to start our APM program with our core or critical applications.
    • We want to build our APM inventory for less than 150 applications (division, department, operating unit, government, small enterprise, etc.).
    • We want to start simple with a quick win for our 150 most important applications.
    • We want to start with an APM pilot before committing to an enterprise APM program.
    • We need to rationalize potentially redundant and underperforming applications to determine which to keep, replace, or retire.
    • We want to start enterprise APM, with up to 150 critical applications.
    • We want to collect and analyze detailed information about our applications.
    • We need tools to help us calculate total cost of ownership (TCO) and value.
    • We want to customize our APM journey and rationalization.
    • We want to build a formal communication strategy for our APM program.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor.
    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.
    • APM implies taking a holistic approach and compiling multiple priorities and perspectives.
    • Organizations have limited time to act strategically or proactively and need to be succinct.
    • Uncertainties on business value prevent IT from successfully advising software decision making.
    • IT knows its technical debt but struggles to get the business to act on technical risks.
    • Attempts at exposing these problems rarely gain buy-in and discourage the push for improvement.
    • Think low priority over no priority.
    • Integrate these tasks into your mixed workload.
    • Create an inventory built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps in accordance with business priorities and communicate risks on their terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support an application.
    • Build your APM process fit for size.

    Info-Tech Insight: You can’t outsource strategy.

    Modern software options have decreased the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. Your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require a centralized IT oversight to ensure the best return on investment.

    The top IT challenges for SE come from app management

    #1 challenge small enterprise owners face in their use of technology:

    Taking appropriate security precautions

    24%

    The costs of needed upgrades to technology

    17%

    The time it takes to fix problems

    17%

    The cost of maintaining technology

    14%

    Lack of expertise

    9%

    Breaks in service

    7%
    Source: National Small Business Association, 2019

    Having more applications than an organization needs means unnecessarily high costs and additional burden on the teams who support the applications. Especially in the case of small enterprises, this is added pressure the IT team cannot afford.

    A poorly maintained portfolio will eventually hurt the business more than it hurts IT.

    Legacy systems, complex environments, or anything that leads to a portfolio that can’t adapt to changing business needs will eventually become a barrier to business growth and accomplishing objectives. Often the blame is put on the IT department.

    56%

    of small businesses cited inflexible technology as a barrier to growth

    Source: Salesforce as quoted by Tech Republic, 2019

    A hidden and inefficient application portfolio is the root cause of so many pains experienced by both IT and the business.

    • Demand/Capacity Imbalance
    • Overspending
    • Security and Business Continuity Risk
    • Delays in Delivery
    • Barriers to Growth

    APM comes at a justified cost

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate APM and the costs.

    The benefits of APM

    APM identifies areas where you can reduce core spending and reinvest in innovation initiatives.

    Other benefits can include:

    • Fewer redundancies
    • Less risk
    • Less complexity
    • Improved processes
    • Flexibility
    • Scalability

    APM allows you to better understand and set the direction of your portfolio

    Application Inventory

    The artifact that documents and informs the business of your application portfolio.

    Application Rationalization

    The process of collecting information and assessing your applications to determine recommended dispositions.

    Application Alignment

    The process of revealing application information through interviewing stakeholders and aligning to business capabilities.

    Application Roadmap

    The artifact that showcases the strategic directions for your applications over a given timeline.

    Application Portfolio Management (APM):

    The ongoing practice of:

    • Providing visibility into applications across the organization.
    • Recommending corrections or enhancements to decision makers.
    • Aligning delivery teams on priority.
    • Showcasing the direction of applications to stakeholders.

    Create a balanced approach to value delivery

    Enterprise Agility and Value Realization

    Product Lifecycle Management

    Align your product and service improvement and execution to enterprise strategy and value realization in three key areas: defining your products and services, aligning product/service owners, and developing your product vision.

    Product Delivery Lifecycle (Agile DevOps)

    Enhance business agility by leveraging an Agile mindset and continuously improving your delivery throughput, quality, value realization, and adaptive governance.

    Application Portfolio Management

    Transform your application portfolio into a cohesive service catalog aligned to your business capabilities by discovering, rationalizing, and modernizing your applications while improving application maintenance, management, and reuse.

    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on the Application Department Strategy.


    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on Accelerate Your Transition to Product Delivery.

    Every organization experiences some degree of application sprawl

    The image contains a screenshot of images to demonstrate application sprawl.

    Causes of Sprawl

    • Poor Lifecycle Management
    • Turnover & Lack of Knowledge Transfer
    • Siloed Business Units & Decentralized IT
    • Business-Managed IT
    • (Shadow IT)
    • Mergers & Acquisitions

    Problems With Sprawl

    • Redundancy and Inefficient Spending
    • Disparate Apps & Data
    • Obsolescence
    • Difficulties in Prioritizing Support
    • Barriers to Change & Growth

    Application Sprawl:

    Inefficiencies within your application portfolio are created by the gradual and non-strategic accumulation of applications.

    You have more apps than you need.

    Only 34% of software is rated as both IMPORTANT and EFFECTIVE by users.

    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision

    Build your APM journey map

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine Scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio.

    1.2 Determine narrative.

    1.3 Define goals and metrics.

    1.4 Define application categories.

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC).

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    2.1 Populate your inventory.

    2.2 Align to business capabilities.

    *Repeat

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess technical health.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership.

    *Repeat

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results.

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results.

    4.3 Determine dispositions.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional).

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional).

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.7 Determine ongoing cadence.

    *Repeat

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Retail

    SOURCE: Deloitte, 2017

    Supermarket Company

    The grocer was a smaller organization for the supermarket industry with a relatively low IT budget. While its portfolio consisted of a dozen applications, the organization still found it difficult to react to an evolving industry due to inflexible and overly complex legacy systems.

    The IT manager found himself in a scenario where he knew the applications well but had little awareness of the business processes they supported. Application maintenance was purely in keeping things operational, with little consideration for a future business strategy.

    As the business demanded more responsiveness to changes, the IT team needed to be able to react more efficiently and effectively while still securing the continuity of the business.

    The IT manager found success by introducing APM and gaining a better understanding of the business use and future needs for the applications. The organization started small but then increased the scope over time to produce and develop techniques to aid the business in meeting strategic goals with applications.

    Results

    The IT manager gained credibility and trust within the organization. The organization was able to build a plan to move away from the legacy systems and create a portfolio more responsive to the dynamic needs of an evolving marketplace.

    The application portfolio management initiative included the following components:

    Train teams and stakeholders on APM

    Model the core business processes

    Collect application inventory

    Assign APM responsibilities

    Start small, then grow

    Info-Tech’s application portfolio management methodology

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    Phase Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    • Extract key business priorities.
    • Set your goals.
    • Define scope of APM effort.

    Gather information on your own understanding of your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Work with application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    This template allows you to capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    This tool stores all relevant application information and allows you to assess your capability support, execute rationalization, and build a portfolio roadmap.

    The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook. The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint Storyboard

    This is the PowerPoint document you are viewing now. Follow this guide to understand APM, learn how to use the tools, and build a repeatable APM process that will be captured in your playbook.

    The image contains a screenshot of the blueprint storyboard.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI for on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Establish goals and foundations for your APM practice.

    Call #2:

    Initiate inventory and determine data requirements.

    Call #3:

    Initiate rationalization with group of applications.

    Call #4:

    Review result of first iteration and perform retrospective.

    Call #5:

    Initiate your roadmap and determine your ongoing APM practice.

    Note: The Guided Implementation will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our right-sized best practices in your organization. A typical GI, using our materials, is 3 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Post Workshop Steps

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your current
    application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    • Complete in-progress deliverables from the previous four days.
    • Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss the next steps.

    Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Agree on key terms and set the scope for your APM effort

    Work with your applications team to:

    1. Build a detailed inventory
    2. Identify areas of redundancy

    Work with the SMEs for a subset of applications to:

    1. Define your rationalization criteria, descriptions, and scoring
    2. Evaluate each application using rationalization criteria

    Work with application delivery specialists to:

    1. Determine the appropriate disposition for your apps
    2. Build an initial application portfolio roadmap
    3. Establish an ongoing cadence of APM activities

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. APM Snapshot and Foundations Toolset
    3. Action plan

    Note: The workshop will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    Workshop Options

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Outcomes

    1-Day Snapshot

    3-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Key Apps)

    4-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Pilot Area)

    APM Snapshot

    • Align applications to business capabilities
    • Evaluate application support for business capabilities

    APM Foundations

    • Define your APM program and cadence
    • Rationalize applications using weighted criteria
    • Define application dispositions
    • Build an application roadmap aligned to initiatives

    Establish APM practice with a small sample set of apps and capabilities.

    Establish APM practice with a pilot group of apps and capabilities.

    Blueprint Pre-Step: Get the right stakeholders to the right exercises

    The image contains four steps and demonstrates who should be handling each exercise. 1. Lay Your Foundations, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Key Corporate Stakeholders. 2. Improve Your Inventory, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Applications Subject Matter Experts. 3. Rationalize Your Apps, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Applications Subject Matter Experts, and the Delivery Leads. 4. Populate Your Roadmap, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Key Corporate Stakeholders, and the Delivery Leads.

    APM Lead/Owner (Recommended)

    ☐ Applications Lead or the individual responsible for application portfolio management, along with any applications team members, if available

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Depending on size and structure, participants could include:

    ☐ Head of IT (CIO, CTO, IT Director, or IT Manager)

    ☐ Head of shared services (CFO, COO, VP HR, etc.)

    ☐ Compliance Officer, Steering Committee

    ☐ Company owner or CEO

    Application Subject Matter Experts

    Individuals who have familiarity with a specific subset of applications

    ☐ Business owners (product owners, Head of Business Function, power users)

    ☐ Support owners (Operations Manager, IT Technician)

    Delivery Leads

    ☐ Development Managers

    ☐ Solution Architects

    ☐ Project Managers

    Understand your APM tools and outcomes

    1.Diagnostic The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.

    5. Foundations: Chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Chart APM tool.

    2. Data Journey

    The image contains a screenshot of the data journey APM tool.

    6. App Comparison

    The image contains a screenshot of the App Comparison APM tool.

    3. Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the snapshot APM tool.

    7. Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap APM tool.

    4. Foundations: Results

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Results APM Tool.

    Examples and explanations of these tools are located on the following slides and within the phases where they occur.

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM snapshots results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    ARE YOU READY TO GET STARTED?

    Phase 1

    Lay Your Foundations

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Applications Lead

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Additional Resources

    APM supports many goals

    Building an APM process requires a proper understanding of the underlying business goals and objectives of your organization’s strategy. Effectively identifying these drivers is paramount to gaining buy-in and the approval for any changes you plan to make to your application portfolio.

    After identifying these goals, you will need to ensure they are built into the foundations of your APM process.

    “What is most critical?” but also “What must come first?”

    Discover

    Improve

    Transform

    Collect Inventory

    Uncover Shadow IT

    Uncover Redundancies

    Anticipate Upgrades

    Predict Retirement

    Reduce Cost

    Increase Efficiency

    Reduce Applications

    Eliminate Redundancy

    Limit Risk

    Improve Architecture

    Modernize

    Enable Scalability

    Drive Business Growth

    Improve UX

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s diagnostic tool

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. This tool provides visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices.
    2. Based on your assessment, you should gain a better understanding of whether the appropriate next steps are in application discovery, rationalization, or roadmapping.
    3. Complete the “Data Entry” worksheet in the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool (Excel).
    4. Review the “Results” worksheet to help inform and guide your next steps.

    Download the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    Input Output
    • Current APM program
    • Application landscape
    • APM current-state assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool
    • Applications Lead

    1.1 Understanding the diagnostic results

    • Managed Apps are your known knowns and most of your portfolio.
    • Unmanaged and Unsanctioned Apps are known but have unknown risks and compliance. Bring these under IT support.
    • Unknown Apps are high risk and noncompliant. Prioritize these based on risk, cost, and use.
    The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.
    • APM is more than an inventory and assessment. A strong APM program provides ongoing visibility and insights to drive application improvement and value delivery.
    • Use your Sprawl Factors to identify process and organizational gaps that may need to be addressed.
    • Your APM inventory is only as good as the information in it. Use this chart to identify gaps and develop a path to define missing information.
    • APM is an iterative process. Use this state assessment to determine where to focus most of your current effort.

    Understand potential motivations for APM

    The value of APM is defined by how the information will be used to drive better decisions.

    Portfolio Governance

    Transformative Initiatives

    Event-Driven Rationalization

    Improves:

    • Spending efficiency
    • Risk
    • Retirement of aged and low-value applications
    • Business enablement

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Less urgent
    • As rigorous as appropriate
    • Apply in-depth analysis as needed

    Enables:

    • Data migration or harmonization
    • Legacy modernization
    • Infrastructure/cloud migration
    • Standardizing platforms
    • Shift to cloud and SAAS

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time sensitive
    • Scope on impacted areas
    • Need to determine specific dispositions
    • Outcomes need to include detailed and actionable steps

    Responds to:

    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Regulatory and compliance change
    • New applications
    • Application retirement by vendors
    • Changes in business operations
    • Security risks and BC/DR

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time constrained
    • Lots of discovery work
    • Primary focus on duplication
    • Increased process and system understanding

    Different motivations will influence the appropriate approach to and urgency of APM or, specifically, rationalizing the portfolio. When rationalizing is directly related to enabling or in response to a broader initiative, you will need to create a more structured approach with a formal budget and resources.

    1.2 Determine narrative

    Estimated time: 30 minutes-2 hours

    1. Open the “Narrative” tab in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    2. Start by listing your prevailing IT pain points with the application portfolio. These will be the issues experienced predominantly by the IT team and not necessarily by the stakeholders. Be sure to distinguish pain points from their root causes.
    3. Determine an equivalent business pain point for each IT pain point. This should be how the problem manifests itself to business stakeholders and should include potential risks to the organization is exposed to.
    4. Determine the business goal for each business pain point. Ideally, these are established organizational goals that key decision-makers will recognize. These goals should address the business pain points you have documented.
    5. Determine the technical objective for each business goal. These speak to the general corrections or enhancements to the portfolio required to accomplish the business goals.
    6. Use the “Narrative - Matrix” worksheet to group items into themes if needed.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Familiarity with application landscape
    • Organizational context and strategic artifacts
    • Narrative for application portfolio transformation
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Application Portfolio Manager

    Connect your pains to what the business cares about to find the most effective narrative

    Root Cause

    IT Pain Points

    Business Pain Points

    Business Goals

    Narrative

    Technical Objectives

    Sprawl

    Shadow IT/decentralized oversight

    Neglect over time

    Poor delivery processes

    Back-End Complexity

    Disparate Data/Apps

    Poor Architectural Fit

    Redundancy

    Maintenance Demand/
    Resource Drain

    Low Maintainability

    Technical Debt

    Legacy, Aging, or Expiring Apps

    Security Vulnerabilities

    Unsatisfied Customers

    Hurdles to Growth/Change

    Poor Business Analytics

    Process Inefficiency

    Software Costs

    Business Continuity Risk

    Data Privacy Risk

    Data/IP Theft Risk

    Poor User Experience

    Low-Value Apps

    Scalability

    Flexibility/Agility

    Data-Driven Insights

    M&A Transition

    Business Unit Consolidation/ Centralization

    Process Improvement

    Process Modernization

    Cost Reduction

    Stability

    Customer Protection

    Security

    Employee Enablement

    Business Enablement

    Innovation

    Create Strategic Alignment

    Identify specific business capabilities that are incompatible with strategic initiatives.

    Reduce Application Intensity

    Highlight the capabilities that are encumbered due to functional overlaps and complexity.

    Reduce Software Costs

    Specific business capabilities come at an unnecessarily or disproportionately high cost.

    Mitigate Business Continuity Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk of interruption or stoppages due to unresolved back-end issues.

    Mitigate Security Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk due to unmitigated security vulnerabilities or breaches.

    Increase Satisfaction Applications

    Specific business capabilities are not achieving their optimal business value.

    Platform Standardization

    Platform Standardization Consolidation

    Data Harmonization

    Removal/Consolidation of Redundant Applications

    Legacy Modernization

    Application Upgrades

    Removal of Low-Value Applications

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Determine the motivations behind APM. You may want to collect and review any of the organization’s strategic documents that provide additional context on previously established goals.
    2. With the appropriate stakeholders, discuss the goals of APM. Try to label your goals as either:
      1. Short term: Refers to immediate goals used to represent the progress of APM activities. Likely these goals are more IT-oriented
      2. Long term: Refers to broader and more distant goals more related to the impact of APM. These goals tend to be more business-oriented.
    3. To help clearly define your goals, discuss appropriate metrics for each goal. Often these metrics can be expressed as:
      1. Leading indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your short-term goals and the progress of APM activities.
      2. Lagging indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your long-term goals.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Overarching organizational strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Defined goals and metrics for APM
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.3 Define goals and metrics: Example

    Goals

    Metric

    Target

    Short Term

    Improve ability to inform the business

    Leading Indicators

    • Application inventory with all data fields completed
    • Applications with recommended dispositions
    • 80% of portfolio

    Improve ownership of applications

    • Applications with an assigned business and technical owner
    • 80% of portfolio

    Reduce costs of portfolio

    • TCO of full application portfolio
    • The number of recovered/avoided software licenses from retired apps
    • Reduce by 5%
    • $50,000

    Long Term

    Migrate platform

    Lagging Indicators

    • Migrate all applications
    • Total value change in on-premises apps switched to SaaS
    • 100% of applications
    • Increase 50%

    Improve overall satisfaction with portfolio

    • End-user satisfaction rating
    • Increase 25%

    Become more customer-centric

    • Increased sales
    • Increased customer experience
    • Increase 35%

    “Application” doesn’t have the same meaning to everyone

    The image contains a picture of Martin Fowler.

    Code: A body of code that's seen by developers as a single unit.

    Functionality: A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    Funding: An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    ?: What else?

    “Essentially applications are social constructions.

    Source: Martin Fowler

    APM focuses on business applications.

    “Software used by business users to perform a business function.”

    – ServiceNow, 2020

    Unfortunately, that definition is still quite vague.

    You must set boundaries and scope for “application”

    1. Many individual items can be considered applications on their own or components within or associated with an application.

    2. Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    • Interface
    • Software Component
    • Supporting Software
    • Platform
    • Presentation Layer
    • Middleware
    • Micro Service
    • Database
    • UI
    • API
    • Data Access/ Transfer/Load
    • Operating System

    Apps can be categorized by generic categories

    • Enterprise Applications
    • Unique Function-Specific Applications
    • Productivity Tools
    • Customer-Facing Applications
    • Mobile Applications

    Apps can be categorized by bought vs. built or install types

    • Custom
    • On-Prem
    • Off the Shelf
    • SaaS
    • Hybrid
    • End-User-Built Tools

    Apps can be categorized by the application family

    • Parent Application
    • Child Application
    • Package
    • Module
    • Suite
    • Component (Functional)

    Apps can be categorized by the group managing them

    • IT-Managed Applications
    • Business-Managed Applications (Shadow IT)
    • Partner/External Applications

    Apps can be categorized by tiers

    • Mission Critical
    • Tier 2
    • Tier 3

    Set boundaries on what is an application or the individual unit that you’re making business decisions on. Also, determine which categories of applications are in scope and how they will be included in the activities and artifacts of APM. Use your product families defined in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to help define your application categories, groups, and boundaries.

    1.4 Define application categories

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Review the items listed on the previous slide and consider what categories provide the best initial grouping to help organize your rationalization and dispositions. Update the category list to match your application groupings.
    2. Identify the additional categories you need to manage in your application portfolio.
    3. For each category, establish or modify a description or definition and provide examples that exist in your current portfolio.
    4. For each category, answer:
      1. Will these be documented in the application inventory?
      2. Will these be included in application rationalization? Think about if this item will be assigned a TCO, value score, and, ultimately, a disposition.
      3. Will these be listed in the application portfolio roadmap?
    5. If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families to help define your application categories.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Working list of applications
    • Definitions and guidelines for which application categories are in scope for APM
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    1.4 Define application categories: Example

    Category

    Definition/Description

    Examples

    Documented in your application inventory?

    Included in application rationalization?

    Listed in your application portfolio roadmap?

    Business Application

    End-user facing applications that directly enable specific business functions. This includes enterprise-wide and business-function-specific applications. Separate modules will be considered a business application when appropriate.

    ERP system, CRM software, accounting software

    Yes

    Yes. Unless currently in dev. TCO of the parent application will be divided among child apps.

    Yes

    Software Components

    Back-end solutions are self-contained units that support business functions.

    ETL, middleware, operating systems

    No. Documentation in CMDB. These will be listed as a dependency in the application inventory.

    No. These will be linked to a business app and included in TCO estimates and tech health assessments.

    No

    Productivity Tools

    End-user-facing applications that enable standard communication of general document creation.

    MS Word, MS Excel, corporate email

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    End-User- Built Microsoft Tools

    Single instances of a Microsoft tool that the business has grown dependent on.

    Payroll Excel tool, Access databases

    No. Documentation in Business Tool Glossary.

    No No

    Partner Applications

    Partners or third-party applications that the business has grown dependent on but are internally owned or managed.

    Supplier’s ERP portal, government portal

    No No

    Yes

    Shadow IT

    Business-managed applications.

    Downloaded tools

    Yes

    Yes. However, just from a redundancy perspective.

    Yes

    The roles in APM rarely exist; you need to adapt

    Application Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for the health and evolution of the application portfolio.
    • Facilitates the rationalization process.
    • Compiles and assesses application information and recommends and supports key decisions regarding the direction of the applications.
    • This is rarely a dedicated role even in large enterprises. For small enterprises, this should be an IT employee at a manager level – an IT manager or operations manager.

    Business Owner

    • Responsible for managing individual applications on a functional level and approves and prioritizes projects.
    • Provides business process or functional subject matter expertise for the assessment of applications.
    • For small enterprises, this role is rarely defined, but the responsibility should exist. Consider the head of a business unit or a process owner as the owner of the application.

    Support Owner

    • Responsible for the maintenance and management of individual applications.
    • Provides technical information and subject matter expertise for the assessment of an application.
    • For small enterprises, this would be those responsible for maintaining the application and those responsible for its initial implementation. Often support responsibilities are external, and this role will be more of a vendor manager.

    Project Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for intake, planning, and coordinating the resources that deliver any changes.
    • The body that consumes the results of rationalization and begins planning any required action or project.
    • For small enterprises, the approval process can come from a steering committee but it is often less formal. Often a smaller group of project managers facilitates planning and coordination and works closely with the delivery leads.

    Corner-of-the-Desk Approach

    • No one is explicitly dedicated to building a strategy or APM practices.
    • Information is collected whenever the applications team has time available.
    • Benefits are pushed out and the value is lost.

    Dedicated Approach

    • The initiative is given a budget and formal agenda.
    • Roles and responsibilities are assigned to team members.

    The high-level steps of APM present some questions you need to answer

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    • Who will build the inventory?
    • Do you know all your applications (Shadow IT)?
    • Do you know your applications’ functionality?
    • Do you know where your applications overlap?
    • Who do you need to consult with to fill in the gaps?
    • Who will provide specific application information?

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    • Who will collect and compile the data points for rationalization?
    • What are the specific data points?
    • Are some of the data points currently documented?
    • Who will provide specific data points on technical health, cost, performance, and business value?
    • Who will determine what business value is?

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    • Who will apply a rationalization tool or decision-making framework to generate dispositions for the applications?
    • Who will modify the tool or framework to ensure results align to the goals of the organization?
    • Who will define any actions or projects that result from the rationalization? And who needs to be consulted to assess the feasibility of any potential project?

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    • Who will present the recommended disposition, corrective action, or new project to the appropriate decision maker?
    • Who is the appropriate decision maker for application changes or project approval?
    • What format is recommended (idea, proposal, business case) and what extra analysis is required?
    • Who needs to be consulted regarding the potential changes?

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Begin by comparing Info-Tech’s list of common APM roles to the roles that exist in your organization with respect to application management and ownership.
    2. There are four high-level steps for APM: build inventory, collect & compile, assess & recommend, and validate & roadmap. Apply the SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer) model by completing the following for each step:
      1. In the Process column, modify the description, if necessary. Identify who is responsible for performing the step.
      2. In the Inputs column, modify the list of inputs.
      3. In the Suppliers column, identify who must be included to provide the inputs.
      4. In the Outputs column, modify the list of outputs.
      5. In the Customers column, identify who consumes the outputs.
    3. (Optional) Outline how the results of APM will be consumed. For example, project intake or execution, data or platform migration, application or product management, or whichever is appropriate.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Existing function and roles regarding application delivery, management, and ownership
    • Scope of APM
    • Responsibilities assigned to your roles
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • “Supporting Activities – SIPOC” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.5 Determine steps and roles

    Suppliers

    Inputs

    Process

    Outputs

    Customers

    • Applications Manager
    • Operations Manager
    • Business Owners
    • IT Team
    • List of applications
    • Application attributes
    • Business capabilities

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    Resp: Applications Manager & IT team member

    • Application inventory
    • Identified redundancies
    • Whole organization
    • Applications SMEs
    • Business Owners
    • Support Owners & Team
    • End Users
    • Application inventory
    • Existing documentation
    • Additional collection methods
    • Knowledge of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    Resp: IT team member

    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application
    • Applications Manager
    • Applications Manager
    • Defined application rationalization framework and toolset
    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Awareness of goals and priorities
    • Awareness of existing projects and resources capacity

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Application portfolio roadmap
    • Confirmed disposition for each application
    • Project request submission
    • Whole organization
    • Applications Manager
    • Solutions Engineer
    • Business Owner
    • Project request submission
    • Estimated cost
    • Estimated value or ROI

    Project Intake

    Build business case for project request.

    Resp: Project Manager

    • Approved project
    • Steering Committee

    Planning your APM modernization journey steps

    Discovery Rationalization Disposition Roadmap

    Enter your pilot inventory.

    • Optional Snapshot: Populate your desired snapshot grouping lists (departments, functions, groups, capabilities, etc.).

    Score your pilot apps to refine your rationalization criteria and scoring.

    • Score 3 to 9 apps to adjust and get comfortable with the scoring.
    • Validate scoring with the remaining apps in your pilot group. Refine and finalize the criteria and scoring descriptions.
    • Optional Snapshot: Use the Group Alignment Matrix to match your grouping list to select which apps support each grouping item.

    Determine recommended disposition for each application.

    • Review and adjust the disposition recommendations on the “Disposition Options” worksheet and set your pass/fail threshold.
    • Review your apps on the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update (override) the recommended disposition and priority if needed.

    Populate your application roadmap.

    • Indicate programs, projects, initiatives, or releases that are planned for each app.
    • Update the priority based on the initiative.
    • Use the visual roadmap to show high-level delivery phases.

    Phase 2

    Improve Your Inventory

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Applications Team

    Additional Resources

    Document Your Business Architecture

    Industry Reference Architectures

    Application Capability Template

    Pre-step: Collect your applications

    1. Consult with your IT team and leverage any existing documentation to gather an initial list of your applications.
    2. Build an initial working list of applications. This is just meant to be a starting point. Aim to include any new applications in procurement, implementation, or development.
    3. The rationalization and roadmapping phases are best completed when iteratively focusing on manageable groups of applications. Group your applications into subsets based on shared subject matter experts. Likely this will mean grouping applications by business units.
    4. Select a subset to be the first group of applications that will undergo the activities of rationalization and roadmapping to refine your APM processes, scoring, and disposition selection.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more information you plan to capture, the larger the time and effort, especially as you move along toward advanced and strategic items. Capture the information most aligned to your objectives to make the most of your investment.

    If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families and products to help define your applications.

    Learn more about automated application discovery:
    High Application Satisfaction Starts With Discovering Your Application Inventory

    Discover your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per group

    1. Review Info-Tech’s list of application inventory attributes.
    2. Open the “Application Inventory Details” tab of the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool. Modify, add, or omit attributes.
    3. For each application, populate your prioritized data fields or any fields you know at the time of discovery. You will complete all the fields in future iterations.
    4. Complete this the best you can based on your team’s familiarity and any readily available documentation related to these applications.
    5. Use the drop-down list to select Enabling, Redundant/Overlapping, and Dependent apps. This will be used to help determine dispositions and comparisons.
    6. Highlight missing information or placeholder values that need to be verified.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Working list of applications
    • Determined attributes for inventory
    • Populated inventory
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Why is the business capability so important?

    For the purposes of an inventory, business capabilities help all stakeholders gain a sense of the functionality the application provides.

    However, the true value of business capability comes with rationalization.

    Upon linking all the organization’s applications to a standardized and consistent set of business capabilities, you can then group your applications based on similar, complementary, or overlapping functionality. In other words, find your redundancies and consolidation opportunities.

    Important Consideration

    Defining business capabilities and determining the full extent of redundancy is a challenging undertaking and often is a larger effort than APM all together.

    Business capabilities should be defined according to the unique functions and language of your organization, at varying levels of granularity, and ideally including target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy.

    This blueprint provides a simplified and generic list for the purpose of categorizing similar functionality. We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture to help in the business capability defining process, especially when visibility into your portfolio and knowledge of redundancies is poor.

    The image contains a screenshot of the business capability scenarios.

    For a more detailed capability mapping, use the Application Portfolio Snapshot and the worksheets in your current workbook.

    What is a business capability map?

    The image contains a screenshot of a business capability map.

    A business capability map (BCM) is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They are typically defined at varying levels of granularity and include target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy. These are the people, process, and tool units that deliver value to your teams and customers.

    Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage and Reference Architectures give you a head start on producing a BCM fit for your organization. The visual to the left is an example of a reference architecture for the retail industry.

    These are the foundational piece for our Application Portfolio Snapshot. By linking capabilities to your supporting applications, you can better visualize how the portfolio supports the organization at a single glance. More specifically, you can highlight how issues with the portfolio are impacting capability delivery.

    Reminder: Best practices imply that business capabilities are methodologically defined by business stakeholders and business architects to capture the unique functions and language of your organization.

    The approach laid out in this service is about applying minimal time and effort to make the case for proper investment into the best practices, which can include creating a tailored BCM. Start with a good enough example to produce a useful visual and generate a positive conversation toward resourcing and analyses.

    We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture and the Application Portfolio Snapshot to understand the thorough methods and tactics for BCM.

    Why perform a high-level application alignment before rationalization?

    Having to address redundancy complicates the application rationalization process. There is no doubt that assessing applications in isolation is much easier and allows you to arrive at dispositions for your applications in a timelier manner.

    Rationalization has two basic steps: first, collect and compile information, and second, analyze that information and determine a disposition for each application. When you don’t have redundancy, you can analyze an application and determine a disposition in isolation. When you do have redundancies, you need to collect information for multiple applications, likely across departments or lines of business, then perform a comparative analysis.

    Most likely your approach will fall somewhere between the examples below and require a hybrid approach.

    Benefits of a high-level application alignment:

    • Review the degree of redundancy across your portfolio.
    • Understand the priority areas for rationalization and the sequence of information collection.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    2.2 Align apps to capabilities and functions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per grouping

    The APM tool provides up to three different grouping comparisons to assess how well your applications are supporting your enterprise. Although business capabilities are important, identify your organizational perspectives to determine how well your portfolio supports these functions, departments, or value streams. Each grouping should be a consistent category, type, or arrangement of applications.

    1. Enter the business capabilities, from either your own BCM or the Info-Tech reference architectures, into the Business Capability column under Grouping 1.
    2. Open the “Group 1 Alignment Matrix” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    3. For each application’s row, enter an “X” in the column of a capability that the application supports.
    4. Optionally, repeat these steps under Grouping 2 and 3 for each value stream, department, function, or business unit where you’d like to assess application support. Note: To use Grouping 3, unhide the columns on the “Application and Group Lists” worksheet and unhide the worksheet “Grouping 3 Alignment Matrix.”

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Application inventory
    • List of business capabilities, Info-Tech Reference Architecture capabilities, departments, functions, divisions, or value streams for grouping comparison
    • Assigned business capabilities to applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    2.2 Aligning applications to groups example

    Alignment Matrix: Identify applications supporting each capability or function.

    Capability, Department, or Function 1

    Capability, Department, or Function 2

    Capability, Department, or Function 3

    Capability, Department, or Function 4

    Capability, Department, or Function 5

    Capability, Department, or Function 6

    Application A

    x

    Application B

    x

    Application C

    x

    Application D

    x

    Application E

    x x

    Application F

    x

    Application G

    x

    Application H

    x

    Application I

    x

    Application J

    x

    In this example:

    BC 1 is supported by App A

    BC 2 is supported by App B

    BC 3 is supported by Apps C & D

    BCs 4 & 5 are supported by App E

    BC 6 is supported by Apps F-G. BC 6 shows an example of potential redundancy and portfolio complexity.

    The APM tool supports three different Snapshot groupings. Repeat this exercise for each grouping.

    Align application to capabilities – tool view

    The image contains screenshots of the align application to capabilities - tool view

    Phase 3

    Rationalize Your Applications

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Application SMEs

    Additional Resources

    Phase pre-step: Sequence rationalization assessments appropriately

    Use the APM Snapshot results to determine APM iterations

    • Application rationalization requires an iterative approach.
    • Review your application types and alignment from Phase 2 to begin to identify areas of overlapping or redundant applications.
    • Sequence the activities of Phase 3 based on whether you have a:
      • Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Complete the application functional analysis.
        • Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to aid your comparison of application subsets.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.
      • Non-Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    Phase pre-step: Are the right stakeholders present?

    Make sure you have the right people at the table from the beginning.

    • Application rationalization requires specific stakeholders to provide specific data points.
    • Ensure your application subsets are grouped by shared subject matter experts. Ideally, these are grouped by business units.
    • For each subset, identify the appropriate SMEs for the five areas of rationalization criteria.
    • Communicate and schedule interviews with groups of stakeholders. Inform them of additional information sources to have readily available.
    • (Optional) This phase’s activities follow the clockwise sequence of the diagram to the right. Reorder the sequence of activities based on overlaps of availability in subject matter expertise.

    Application

    Rationalization

    Additional Information Sources

    Ideal Stakeholders

    • KPIs

    Business Value

    • Business Application/Product Owners
    • Business Unit/ Process Owners
    • Survey Results

    End User

    • Business Application/ Product Owners
    • Key/Power Users
    • End Users
    • General Ledger
    • Service Desk
    • Vendor Contracts

    TCO

    • Operations/Maintenance Manager
    • Vendor Managers
    • Finance & Acct.
    • Service Desk
    • ALM Tools

    Technical Health

    • Operations/ Maintenance Manager
    • Solution Architect
    • Security Manager
    • Dev. Manager
    • Capability Maps
    • Process Maps

    Application Alignment

    • Business Unit/ Process Owners

    Rationalize your applications

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    One of the principal goals of application rationalization is determining dispositions

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or course of action for an application.

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    High-level examples:

    The image contains a screenshot of an image that demonstrates a directionless portfolio of applications.

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Modernize: Create a new project to address an inadequacy.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Consolidate: Create a new project to reduce duplicate functionality.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    3.1-3.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Assessing application business value

    The Business Business Value of Applications IT
    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the applications. Technical subject matter experts of the applications they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality applications are delivered to stakeholder expectations.

    First, the authorities on business value need to define and weigh their value drivers that describe the priorities of the organization.

    This will then allow the applications team to apply a consistent, objective, and strategically aligned evaluation of applications across the organization.

    In this context…business value is the value of the business outcome that the application produces and how effective the application is at producing that outcome.

    Business value IS NOT the user’s experience or satisfaction with the application.

    Review the value drivers of your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of a the business value matrix.

    Financial vs. Human Benefits

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward orientation refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward orientation refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increased Revenue

    Reduced Costs

    Enhanced Services

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    3.1 Assess business value

    Estimated time: 1 -4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s four quadrants of business value: increase revenue/value, reduce costs, enhance services, and reach customers. Edit your value drivers, description, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each value driver, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities. When editing the scoring descriptions, keep only the one you are using.
    2. (Optional) Add an additional value driver if your organization has distinct value drivers (e.g. compliance, sustainability, innovation, and growth).
    3. For each application, score on a scale of 0 to 5 how impactful the application is for each value driver. Use the indicators set in Phase 1 to guide your scoring.
    4. For each value driver, adjust the criteria weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of organizational priorities
    • (Optional) Existing mission, vision, and value statements
    • Scoring scheme for assessing business value
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    3.1 Weigh value drivers: Example

    The image contains a screenshot example of the weigh value drivers.

    For additional support in implementing a balanced value framework, refer to Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    Understand the back end and technical health of your applications

    Technical health identifies the extent of technology risk to the organization.

    MAINTAINABILITY (RAS)

    RAS refers to an app’s reliability, availability, and serviceability. How often, how long, and how difficult is it for your resources to keep an app functioning, and what are the resulting continuity risks? This can include root causes of maintenance challenges.

    SECURITY

    Applications should be aligned and compliant with ALL security policies. Are there vulnerabilities or is there a history of security incidents? Remember that threats are often internal and non-malicious.

    ADAPTABILITY

    How easily can the app be enhanced or scaled to meet changes in business needs? Does the app fit within the business strategy?

    INTEROPERABILITY

    The degree to which an app is integrated with current systems. Apps require comprehensive technical planning and oversight to ensure they connect within the greater application architecture. Does the app fit within your enterprise architecture strategy?

    BUSINESS CONTINUITY/DISASTER RECOVERY

    The degree to which the application is compatible with business continuity/disaster recovery (BC/DR) policies and plans that are routinely tested and verified.

    Unfortunately, the business only cares about what they can see or experience. Rationalization is your opportunity to get risk on the business’ radar and gain buy-in for the necessary action.

    3.2 Assess technical health

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested technical health criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of technical health perspective for applications within this subset
    • Maintenance history, architectural models
    • Technical health scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Technical SMEs
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    End users provide valuable perspective

    Your end users are your best means of determining front-end issues.

    Data Quality

    To what degree do the end users find the data quality sufficient to perform their role and achieve their desired outcome?

    Effectiveness

    To what degree do the end users find the application effective for performing their role and desired outcome?

    Usability

    To what degree do the end users find the application reliable and easy to use to achieve their desired outcome?

    Satisfaction

    To what degree are end users satisfied with the features of this application?

    What else matters to you?

    Tune your criteria to match your values and priorities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When facing large user groups, do not make assumptions or use lengthy methods of collecting information. Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to collect data by surveying your end users’ perspectives.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested end-user perspective criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of end user’s perspective for applications within this subset
    • User satisfaction scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Key Users
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Consider the spectrum of application cost

    An application’s cost extends past a vendor’s fee and even the application itself.

    LICENSING AND SUBSCRIPTIONS: Your recurring payments to a vendor.

    Many commercial off-the-shelf applications require a license on a per-user basis. Review contracts and determine costs by looking at per-user or fixed rates charged by the vendor.

    MAINTENANCE COSTS: Your internal spending to maintain an app.

    These are the additional costs to maintain an application such as support agreements, annual maintenance fees, or additional software or hosting expenses.

    INDIRECT COSTS: Miscellaneous expenses necessary for an app’s continued use.

    Expenses like end-user training, developer education, and admin are often neglected, but they are very real costs organizations pay regularly.

    RETURN ON INVESTMENT: Perceived value of the application related to its TCO.

    Some of our most valuable applications are the most expensive. ROI is an optional criterion to account for the value and importance of the application.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The TCO assessment is one area where what you are considering the ”application” matters quite a bit. An application’s peripherals or software components need to be considered in your estimates. For additional help calculating TCO, use the Application TCO Calculator from Build a Rationalization Framework.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested TCO criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity with the TCO for applications within this subset
    • Vendor contracts, maintenance history
    • TCO scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Vendor Managers, Operations Managers
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Phase 4

    Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    his phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Delivery Leads

    Additional Resources

    Review your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.1 Review your APM Snapshot results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. The APM Snapshot provides a dashboard to support your APM program’s focus and as an input to demand planning. Unhide the “Group 3” worksheet if you completed the alignment matrix.
    2. For each grouping area, review the results to determine underperforming areas. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis and demand planning. Use the key on the following slide to guide your analysis.
    3. Analysis guidance:
      1. Start with the quartile grouping to find areas scoring in Remediate or Critical Need and focus follow-up actions on these areas.
      2. Use the lens/category heat map to determine which lenses are underperforming. Use this to then look up the individual app scores supporting that group to identify application issues.
      3. Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to select and compare applications for the group to make your review and comparison easier.
      4. Work with teams in the group to provide root cause analysis for low scores.
      5. Build a plan to address any apps not supported by IT.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Application to Group mapping
    • Rationalization scores
    • Awareness of application support for each grouping

    Materials

    Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Snapshot with guides on how to interpret it.

    4.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Review your APM rationalization results

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.2 Review your APM Foundations results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    The APM Foundations Results dashboard (“App Rationalization Results” worksheet) provides a detailed summary of your relative app scoring to serve as input to demand planning.

    1. For each grouping, review the results to determine underperforming app support. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis using the individual criteria scores on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet.
    2. Use guidance on the following example slides to understand each area of the results.
    3. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    4. Use the column filters to compare a subset of applications or use the “App Comparison” worksheet to maintain an ongoing view by grouping, redundancy, or category.
    5. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Rationalization scores
    • Application awareness
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Modernize your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. The Recommended Disposition and Priority fields are prepopulated from your scoring thresholds and options on the “Disposition Options” worksheet. You can update any individual application disposition or priority using the drop-down menu and it will populate your selection on the “Roadmap” worksheet.
    2. Question if that disposition is appropriate. Be sure to consider:
      1. TCO – cost should come into play for any decisions.
      2. Alignment to strategic goals set for the overarching organizational, IT, technology (infrastructure), or application portfolio.
      3. Existing organizational priorities or funded initiatives impacting the app.
    3. Some dispositions may imply a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. You can use different dispositions and priorities on the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    4. Note: Modify the list of dispositions on the “Disposition Options” worksheet as appropriate for your rationalization initiative. Any modifications to the Disposition column will be automatically updated in the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    InputOutput
    • Rationalization results
    • Assigned dispositions for applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.3 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Redundancies require a different analysis and set of dispositions

    Solving application redundancy is a lot more complicated than simply keeping one application and eliminating the others.

    First, you need to understand the extent of the redundancy. The applications may support the same capability, but do they offer the same functions? Determine which apps offer which functions within a capability. This means you cannot accurately arrive at a disposition until you have evaluated all applications.

    Next, you need to isolate the preferred system. This is completed by comparing the same data points collected for rationalization and the application alignment analysis. Cost and coverage of all necessary functions become the more important factors in this decision-making process.

    Lastly, for the non-preferred redundant applications you need to determine: What will you do with the users? What will you do with the data? And what can you do with the functionality (can the actual coding be merged onto a common platform)?

    Disposition

    Description & Additional Analysis

    Call to Action (Priority)

    Keep & Absorb

    Higher value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These are the preferred apps to be kept. However, additional efforts are still required to migrate new users and data and potentially configure the app to new processes.

    Application or Process Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Shift & Retire

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These apps will be decommissioned alongside efforts to migrate users and data to the preferred system.

    *Confirm there are no unique and necessary features.

    Process Initiative & Decommission

    (Moderate)

    Merge

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives but still has some necessary unique features

    These apps will be merged with the preferred system onto a common platform.

    *Determine the unique and necessary features.

    *Determine if the multiple applications are compatible for consolidation.

    Application Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Compare groups of applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Estimated rime: 1 hour per group

    This exercise is best performed after aligning business capabilities to applications across the portfolio and identifying your areas of redundancy. At this stage, this is still an information collection exercise, and it will not yield a consolidation-based disposition until applied to all relevant applications. Lastly, this exercise may still be at too high a level to outline the full details of redundancy, but it is still vital information to collect and a starting point to determine which areas require more concentrated analysis.

    1. Determine which areas of redundancy or comparisons are desired. Duplicate the “App Comparison” worksheet for each grouping or comparison.
    2. Extend the comparison to better identify redundancy.
      1. For each area of redundancy, identify the high-level features. Aim to limit the features to ten, grouping smaller features if necessary. SoftwareReviews can be a resource for identifying common features.
      2. Label features using the MoSCoW model: must have, should have, could have, will not have.
      3. For each application, identify which features they support. You can use the grouping alignment matrix as a template for feature alignment comparison. Duplicate the worksheet, unlock it, and replace the grouping cell references with your list of features.
    Input Output
    • Areas of redundancy
    • Familiarity with features for applications within this subset
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Account Management

    Call Management

    Order/Transaction Processing

    Contract Management

    Lead/Opportunity Management

    Forecasting/Planning

    Customer Surveying

    Email Synchronization

    M M M M S S C W

    CRM 1

    CRM 2

    CRM 3

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    Estimated time: 1 hour per group

    1. Based on the feature-level assessment, determine if you can omit applications if they don’t truly overlap with other applications.
    2. Make a copy of the “App Comparison” worksheet and select the applications you want to compare based on your functional analysis.
    3. Determine the preferred application(s). Use the diagram to inform your decision. This may be the application closest to the top right (strong health and value). However, less expensive options or any options that provide a more complete set of features may be preferable.
    4. Open the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update your disposition for each application.
    5. Use these updated dispositions to determine a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. Update your roadmap with these initiatives in the next step.
    InputOutput
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    • Redundancy comparison
    • Assigned dispositions for redundant applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Roadmaps are used for different purposes

    Roadmaps are used for different communication purposes and at varying points in your application delivery practice. Some use a roadmap to showcase strategy and act as a feedback mechanism that allows stakeholders to validate any changes (process 1). Others may use it to illustrate and communicate approved and granular elements of a change to an application to inform appropriate stakeholders of what to anticipate (process 2).

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    Add to Roadmap

    Validate Direction

    Plan Project

    Execute Project

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    • Project Proposal
    • Feasibility/ Estimation
    • Impact Assessment
    • Business Case
    • Initial Design

    Approve Project

    Add to Roadmap

    Execute Project

    The steps between selecting a disposition and executing on any resulting project will vary based on the organization’s project intake standards (or lack thereof).

    This blueprint focuses on building a strategic portfolio roadmap prior to any in-depth assessments related to initiative/project intake, approval, and prioritization. For in-depth support related to intake, approval, prioritization, or planning, review the following resources.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver on your Digital Product Vision blueprint. The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    Determine what makes it onto the roadmap

    A roadmap should not be limited to what is approved or committed to. A roadmap should be used to present the items that need to happen and begin the discussion of how or if this can be put into place. However, not every idea should make the cut and end up in front of key stakeholders.

    The image contains a screenshot of steps to be taken to determine what makes it onto the roadmap.

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. This is a high-level assessment to provide a sense of feasibility, practicality, and priority as well as an estimated timeline of a given initiative. Do not get lost in granular estimations. Use this as an input to your demand planning process.
    2. Enter the specific name or type of initiative.
      1. Process Initiative: Any project or effort focused on process improvements without technical modification to an app (e.g. user migration, change in SLA, new training program). Write the application and initiative name on a blue sticky note.
      2. App Initiative: Any project or effort involving technical modification to an app (e.g. refactoring, platform migration, feature addition or upgrade). Write the application and initiative name on a yellow sticky note.
      3. Decommission Initiative: Any project and related efforts to remove an app (e.g. migrating data, removal from server). Write the application and initiative name on a red sticky note.
    3. Prioritize the initiative to aid in demand planning. This is prepopulated from your selected application disposition, but you can set a different priority for the initiative here.
    4. Select the Initiative Phase in the timeline to show the intended schedule and sequencing of the initiative.
    Input Output
    • Assigned dispositions
    • Rationalization results
    • Prioritized initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Delivery Leads
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.6 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    Create a recurring update plan

    • Application inventories become stale before you know it. Build steps in your procurement process to capture the appropriate information on new applications. Also, build in checkpoints to revisit your inventory regularly to assess the accuracy of inventory data.
    • Rationalization is not one and done; it must occur with an appropriate cadence.
      • Business priorities change, which will impact the current and future value of your apps.
      • Now more than ever, user expectations evolve rapidly.
      • Application sprawl likely won’t stop, so neither will shadow IT and redundancies.
      • Obsolescence, growing technical debt, changing security threats, or shifting technology strategies are all inevitable, as is the gradual decline of an app’s health or technical fit.
    • An application’s disposition changes quicker than you think, and rationalization requires a structured cadence. You need to plan to minimize the need for repeated efforts. Conversely, many use preceding iterations to increase the analysis (e.g. more thorough TCO projections or more granular capability-application alignment).
    • Portfolio roadmaps require a cadence for both updates and presentations to stakeholders. Updates are often completed semiannually or quarterly to gauge the business adjustments that affect the timeline of the domain-specific applications. The presentation of a roadmap should be completed alongside meetings or gatherings of key decision makers.
    • M&A or other restructuring events will prompt the need to address all the above.

    The image contains a screenshot of chart to help determine frequency of updating your roadmap.

    Build your APM maturity by taking the right steps at the right time

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the steps taken to build APM maturity.

    Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework provides additional TCO and value tools to help build out your portfolio strategy.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    • 1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio
    • 1.2 Determine narrative
    • 1.3 Define goals and metrics
    • 1.4 Define application categories
    • 1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    • 2.1 Populate your inventory
    • 2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    • 3.1 Assess business value
    • 3.2 Assess technical health
    • 3.3 Assess end-user perspective
    • 3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    • 4.1 Review APM Snapshot results
    • 4.2 Review APM Foundations results
    • 4.3 Determine dispositions
    • 4.4 Assess redundancies (Optional)
    • 4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (Optional)
    • 4.6 Prioritize initiatives
    • 4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Determine how frequently you will update or present the artifacts of your APM practice: Application Inventory, Rationalization, Disposition, and Roadmap.
    2. For each artifact, determine the:
      1. Owner: Who is accountable for the artifact and the data or information within the artifact and will be responsible for or delegate the responsibility of updating or presenting the artifact to the appropriate audience?
      2. Update Cadence: How frequently will you update the artifact? Include what regularly scheduled meetings this activity will be within.
      3. Update Scope: Describe what activities will be performed to keep the artifact up to date. The goal here is to minimize the need for a full set of activities laid out within the blueprint. Optional: How will you expand the thoroughness of your analysis?
      4. Audience: Who is the audience for the artifact or assessment results?
      5. Presentation Cadence: How frequently and when will you review the artifact with the audience?
    InputOutput
    • Initial experience with APM
    • Strategic meetings schedule
    • Ongoing cadence for APM activities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Artifact

    Owner

    Update Cadence

    Update Scope

    Audience

    Presentation Cadence

    Inventory

    Greg Dawson

    • As new applications are acquired
    • Annual review
    • Add new application data points (this is added to implementation standards)
    • Review inventory and perform a data health check
    • Validate with app’s SME
    • Whole organization
    • Always available on team site

    Rationalization Tool

    Judy Ng

    • Annual update
    • Revisit value driver weights
    • Survey end users
    • Interview support owners
    • Interview business owners
    • Update TCO based on change in operational costs; expand thoroughness of cost estimates
    • Rescore applications
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Annually alongside yearly strategy meeting

    Portfolio Roadmap

    Judy Ng

    • Monthly update alongside project updates
    • Shift the timeline of the roadmap to current day 1
    • Carry over project updates and timeline changes
    • Validate with PMs and business owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Quarterly alongside Steering Committee meetings
    • Upon request

    Appendices

    • Additional support slides
    • Bibliography

    The APM tool provides a single source of truth and global data sharing

    The table shows where source data is used to support different aspects of APM discovery, rationalization, and modernization.

    Worksheet Data Mapping

    Application and Capability List

    Group Alignment Matrix (1-3)

    Rationalization Inputs

    Group 1-3 Results

    Application Inventory Details

    App Rationalization Results

    Roadmap

    App Redundancy Comparison

    Application and Capability List

    App list, Groupings

    App list

    App list, Groupings

    App list, Categories

    App list, Categories

    App list

    App list

    Groups 1-3 Alignment Matrix

    App to Group Tracing

    Application Categories

    Category
    drop-down

    Category

    Category

    Rationalization Inputs

    Lens Scores (weighted input to Group score)

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    Disposition Options

    Disposition list, Priorities list, Recommended Disposition and Priority

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    App Rationalization Results

    Disposition

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Name Organization’s terminology used for the application. Auto-discovery tools will provide names for the applications they reveal. However, this may not be the organizational nomenclature. You may adapt the names by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    ID Unique identifiers assigned to the application (e.g. app number). Typically an identification system developed by the application portfolio manager.
    Description A brief description of the application, often referencing core capabilities. Typically completed by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    Business Units A list of all business units, departments, or user groups. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with business unit representatives. However, this doesn’t always expose hidden applications. Application-capability mapping is the most effective way to determine all the business units/user groups of an app.
    Business Capabilities A list of business capabilities the application is intended to enable. Application capability mapping completed via interviews with business unit representatives.
    Criticality A high-level grading of the importance of the application to the business, typically used for support prioritization purposes (i.e. critical, high, medium, low). Typically the criticality rating is determined by a committee representing IT and business leaders.
    Ownership The individual accountable for various aspect of the application (e.g. product owner, product manager, application support, data owner); typically includes contact information and alternatives. If application ownership is an established accountability in your organization, typically consulting appropriate business stakeholders will reveal this information. Otherwise, application capability mapping can be an effective means of identifying who that owner should be.
    Application SMEs Any relevant subject matter experts who can speak to various aspects of the application (e.g. business process owners, development managers, data architects, data stewards, application architects, enterprise architects). Technical SMEs should be known within an IT department, but shadow IT apps may require interviews with the business unit. Application capability mapping will determine the identity of those key users/business process SMEs.
    Type An indication of whether the application was developed in-house, commercial off-the-shelf, or a hybrid option. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or development managers.
    Active Status An indication of whether the application is currently active, out of commission, in repair, etc. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or operation managers.

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Vendor Information Identification of the vendor from whom the software was procured. May include additional items such as the vendor’s contact information. Consultation with business SMEs, end users, or procurement teams, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Links to Other Documentation Pertinent information regarding the other relevant documentation of the application (e.g. SLA, vendor contracts, data use policies, disaster recovery plan). Typically includes links to documents. Consultation with product owners, service providers, or SMEs, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Number of Users The current number of users for the application. This can be based on license information but will often require some estimation. Can include additional items of quantities at different levels of access (e.g. admin, key users, power users). Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or appropriate business SMEs or review of vendor contracts or license agreements. Auto-discovery tools can reveal this information.
    Software Dependencies List of other applications or operating components required to run the application. Consultation with application architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Hardware Dependencies Identification of any hardware or infrastructure components required to run the application (i.e. databases, platform). Consultation with infrastructure or enterprise architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Development Language Coding language used for the application. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with development managers or appropriate technical SMEs.
    Platform A framework of services that application programs rely on for standard operations. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with infrastructure or development managers.
    Lifecycle Stage Where an application is within the birth, growth, mature, end-of-life lifecycle. Consultation with business owners and technical SMEs.
    Scheduled Updates Any major or minor updates related to the application, including the release date. Consultation with business owners and vendor managers.
    Planned or In-Flight Projects Any projects related to the application, including estimated project timeline. Consultation with business owners and project managers.

    Bibliography

    ”2019 Technology & Small Business Survey.” National Small Business Association (NSBA), n.d. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    “Application Rationalization – Essential Part of the Process for Modernization and Operational Efficiency.” Flexera, 2015. Web.
    “Applications Rationalization during M&A: Standardize, Streamline, Simplify.” Deloitte Consulting, 2016. Web.
    Bowling, Alan. “Clearer Visibility of Product Roadmaps Improves IT Planning.” ComputerWeekly.com, 1 Nov. 2010. Web.
    Brown, Alex. “Calculating Business Value.” Agile 2014 Orlando, 13 July 2014. Scrum Inc. 2014. Web.
    Brown, Roger. “Defining Business Value.” Scrum Gathering San Diego 2017. Agile Coach Journal. Web.
    “Business Application Definition.” Microsoft Docs, 18 July 2012. Web.
    “Connecting Small Businesses in the US.” Deloitte Consulting, 2017. Accessed 1 April. 2020.
    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Web.
    Curtis, Bill. “The Business Value of Application Internal Quality.” CAST, 6 April 2009. Web.
    Fleet, Neville, Joan Lasselle, and Paul Zimmerman. “Using a Balance Scorecard to Measure the Productivity and Value of Technical Documentation Organizations.” CIDM, April 2008. Web.
    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Web.
    Harris, Michael. “Measuring the Business Value of IT.” David Consulting Group, 2007. Web.
    “How Application Rationalization Contributes to the Bottom Line.” LeanIX, 2017. Web.
    Jayanthi, Aruna. “Application Landscape Report 2014.” Capgemini, 4 March 2014. Web.
    Lankhorst, Marc., et al. “Architecture-Based IT Valuation.” Via Nova Architectura, 31 March 2010. Web.
    “Management of business application.” ServiceNow, Jan.2020. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    Mauboussin, Michael J. “The True Measures of Success.” HBR, Oct. 2012. Web.
    Neogi, Sombit., et al. “Next Generation Application Portfolio Rationalization.” TATA, 2011. Web.
    Riverbed. “Measuring the Business Impact of IT Through Application Performance.” CIO Summits, 2015. Web.
    Rouse, Margaret. “Application Rationalization.” TechTarget, March 2016. Web.
    Van Ramshorst, E.A. “Application Portfolio Management from an Enterprise Architecture Perspective.” Universiteit Utrecht, July 2013.
    “What is a Balanced Scorecard?” Intrafocus, n.d. Web.
    Whitney, Lance. “SMBs share their biggest constraints and great challenges.” Tech Republic, 6 May 2019. Web.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}316|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,346 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being re-victimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop and implement a security incident management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Equip your organization for incident response with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 1: Prepare
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Management Charter Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool

    2. Operate

    Act with efficiency and effectiveness as new incidents are handled.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 2: Operate
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Credential Compromise
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Distributed Denial of Service
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malicious Email
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Ransomware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Data Breach
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (PDF)
    • Data Breach Reporting Requirements Summary
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Third-Party Incident
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Blank Template

    3. Maintain and optimize

    Manage and improve the incident management process by tracking metrics, testing capabilities, and leveraging best practices.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 3: Maintain and Optimize
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Root-Cause Analysis Template
    • Security Incident Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare Your Incident Response Program

    The Purpose

    Understand the purpose of incident response.

    Formalize the program.

    Identify key players and escalation points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common understanding of the importance of incident response.

    Various business units becoming aware of their roles in the incident management program.

    Formalized documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current process, obligations, scope, and boundaries of the incident management program.

    1.2 Identify key players for the response team and for escalation points.

    1.3 Formalize documentation.

    1.4 Prioritize incidents requiring preparation.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the incident landscape

    An identified incident response team

    A security incident management charter

    A security incident management policy

    A list of top-priority incidents

    A general security incident management plan

    A security incident response RACI chart

    2 Develop Incident-Specific Runbooks

    The Purpose

    Document the clear response procedures for top-priority incidents.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As incidents occur, clear response procedures are documented for efficient and effective recovery.

    Activities

    2.1 For each top-priority incident, document the workflow from detection through analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident analysis.

    Outputs

    Up to five incident-specific runbooks

    3 Maintain and Optimize the Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure the response procedures are realistic and effective.

    Identify key metrics to measure the success of the program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Real-time run-through of security incidents to ensure roles and responsibilities are known.

    Understanding of how to measure the success of the program.

    Activities

    3.1 Limited scope tabletop exercise.

    3.2 Discuss key metrics.

    Outputs

    Completed tabletop exercise

    Key success metrics identified

    Further reading

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Create a scalable incident response program without breaking the bank.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Security incidents are going to happen whether you’re prepared or not. Ransomware and data breaches are just a few top-of-mind threats that all organizations deal with. Taking time upfront to formalize response plans can save you significantly more time and effort down the road. When an incident strikes, don’t waste time deciding how to remediate. Rather, proactively identify your response team, optimize your response procedures, and track metrics so you can be prepared to jump to action.

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Picture of Céline Gravelines

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For

    • A CISO who is dealing with the following:
      • Inefficient use of time and money when retroactively responding to incidents, negatively affecting business revenue and workflow.
      • Resistance from management to adequately develop a formal incident response plan.
      • Lack of closure of incidents, resulting in being re-victimized by the same vector.

    This Research Will Help You

    • Develop a consistent, scalable, and usable incident response program that is not resource intensive.
    • Track and communicate incident response in a formal manner.
    • Reduce the overall impact of incidents over time.
    • Learn from past incidents to improve future response processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business stakeholders who are responsible for the following:
    • Improving workflow and managing operations in the event of security incidents to reduce any adverse business impacts.
    • Ensuring that incident response compliance requirements are being adhered to.

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Efficiently allocate resources to improve incident response in terms of incident frequency, response time, and cost.
    • Effectively communicate expectations and responsibilities to users.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Security incidents are inevitable, but how they’re dealt with can make or break an organization. Poor incident response negatively affects business practices, including workflow, revenue generation, and public image.
    • The incident response of most organizations is ad hoc at best. A formal management plan is rarely developed or adhered to, resulting in ineffective firefighting responses and inefficient allocation of resources.

    Complication

    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being revictimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Resolution

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies (measured in USD)

    This is a bar graph showing the per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies(measured in USD). the companies are, in decreasing order of cost: Health; Financial; Services; Pharmaceutical; Technology; Energy; Education; Industrial; Entertainment; Consumer; Media; Transportation; Hospitality; Retail; Research; Public

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $148 (in 2018).
    (Source: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study)”

    % of systems impacted by a data breach
    1%
    No Impact
    19%
    1-10% impacted
    41%
    11-30% impacted
    24%
    31-50% impacted
    15%
    > 50% impacted
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    61% Lost
    < 20%
    21% Lost 20-40% 8% Lost
    40-60%
    6% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    58% Lost
    <20%
    25% Lost
    20-40%
    9% Lost
    40-60%
    5% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%

    Source: Cisco, “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report”

    Defining what is security incident management

    IT Incident

    Any event not a part of the standard operation of a service which causes, or may cause, the interruption to, or a reduction in, the quality of that service.

    Security Event:

    A security event is anything that happens that could potentially have information security implications.

    • A spam email is a security event because it may contain links to malware.
    • Organizations may be hit with thousands or perhaps millions of identifiable security events each day.
    • These are typically handled by automated tools or are simply logged.

    Security Incident:

    A security incident is a security event that results in damage such as lost data.

    • Incidents can also include events that don't involve damage but are viable risks.
    • For example, an employee clicking on a link in a spam email that made it through filters may be viewed as an incident.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    The increasing complexity and prevalence of threats have finally caught the attention of corporate leaders. Prepare for the inevitable with an incident response program.

    1. A formalized incident response program reduced the average cost of a data breach (per capita) from $148 to $134, while third-party involvement increased costs by $13.40.
    2. US organizations lost an average of $7.91 million per data breach as a result of increased customer attrition and diminished goodwill. Canada and the UK follow suit at $1.57 and $1.39 million, respectively.
    3. 73% of breaches are perpetrated by outsiders, 50% are the work of criminal groups, and 28% involve internal actors.
    4. 55% of companies have to manage fallout, such as reputational damage after a data breach.
    5. The average cost of a data breach increases by $1 million if left undetected for > 100 days.

    (Sources: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study”; Verizon, “2017 Data Breach Investigations Report”; Cisco, “Cisco 2018 Annual Cybersecurity Report”)

    Threat Actor Examples

    The proliferation of hacking techniques and commoditization of hacking tools has enabled more people to become threat actors. Examples include:
    • Organized Crime Groups
    • Lone Cyber Criminals
    • Competitors
    • Nation States
    • Hacktivists
    • Terrorists
    • Former Employees
    • Domestic Intelligence Services
    • Current Employees (malicious and accidental)

    Benefits of an incident management program

    Effective incident management will help you do the following:

    Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to increase process consistency across the incident response team and the program as a whole. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to innovating.

    Improve threat detection, prevention, analysis, and response
    Enhance your pressure posture through a structured and intelligence-driven incident handling and remediation framework.

    Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.

    Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Establish a clear level of accountability throughout the incident response program, and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.

    Control security costs
    Effective incident management operations will provide visibility into your remediation processes, enabling cost savings from misdiagnosed issues and incident reduction.

    Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increase visibility into current performance levels and accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement with a holistic measurement program.

    Impact

    Short term:
    • Streamlined security incident management program.
    • Formalized and structured response process.
    • Comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Detailed response runbooks that predefine necessary operational protocol.
    • Compliance and audit adherence.
    Long term:
    • Reduced incident costs and remediation time.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.
    • Preserved reputation and brand equity.

    Incident management is essential for organizations of any size

    Your incidents may differ, but a standard response ensures practical security.

    Certain regulations and laws require incident response to be a mandatory process in organizations.

    Compliance Standard Examples Description
    Federal Information Security Modernization Act (FISMA)
    • Organizations must have “procedures for detecting, reporting, and responding to security incidents” (2002).
    • They must also “inform operators of agency information systems about current and potential information security threats and vulnerabilities.”
    Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
    • “Organizations must: (i) establish an operational incident handling capability for organizational information systems that includes adequate preparation, detection, analysis, containment, recovery, and user response activities.”
    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS v3)
    • 12.5.3: “Establish, document, and distribute security incident response and escalation procedures to ensure timely and effective handling of all situations.”
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • 164.308: Response and Reporting – “Identify and respond to suspected or known security incidents; mitigate, to the extent practicable, harmful effects of security incidents that are known to the covered entity; and document security incidents and their outcomes.”

    Security incident management is applicable to all verticals

    Examples:
    • Finance
    • Insurance
    • Healthcare
    • Public administration
    • Education services
    • Professional services
    • Scientific and technical services

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operation, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s incident response blueprint is one of four security operations initiatives

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Threat Intelligence Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Threat Intelligence Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule Template
    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. These analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Operations Event Prioritization Tool
    • Security Operations Efficiency Calculator
    • Security Operations Policy
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • Seccrimewareurity Operations RACI Tool
    • Security Operations TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Incident Response (IR)
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. Incident response teams coordinate root cause and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    Security Incident Management Policy
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    Understand how incident response ties into related processes

    Info-Tech Resources:
    Business Continuity Plan Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    Disaster Recovery Plan Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Security Incident Management Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program
    Incident Management Incident and Problem Management
    Service Desk Standardize the Service Desk

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – project overview

    1. Prepare 2. Operate 3. Maintain and Optimize
    Best-Practice Toolkit 1.1 Establish the Drivers, Challenges, and Benefits.

    1.2 Examine the Security Incident Landscape and Trends.

    1.3 Understand Your Security Obligations, Scope, and Boundaries.

    1.4 Gauge Your Current Process to Identify Gaps.

    1.5 Formalize the Security Incident Management Charter.

    1.6 Identify Key Players and Develop a Call Escalation Tree.

    1.7 Develop a Security Incident Management Policy.

    2.1 Understand the Incident Response Framework.

    2.2 Understand the Purpose of Runbooks.

    2.3 Prioritize the Development of Incident-Specific Runbooks.

    2.4 Develop Top-Priority Runbooks.

    2.5 Fill Out the Root-Cause Analysis Template.

    2.6 Customize the Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool to Standardize Useful Questions for Lessons-Learned Meetings.

    2.7 Complete the Security Incident Report Template.

    3.1 Conduct Tabletop Exercises.

    3.2 Initialize a Security Incident Management Metrics Program.

    3.3 Leverage Best Practices for Continuous Improvement.

    Guided Implementations Understand the incident response process, and define your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Formalize the incident management charter, RACI, and incident management policy.
    Use the framework to develop a general incident management plan.

    Prioritize and develop top-priority runbooks.
    Develop and facilitate tabletop exercises.

    Create an incident management metrics program, and assess the success of the incident management program.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Prepare for Incident Response
    Module 2:
    Handle Incidents
    Module 3:
    Review and Communicate Security Incidents
    Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Formalized stakeholder support
  • Security Incident Management Policy
  • Security Incident Management Charter
  • Call Escalation Tree
  • Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A generalized incident management plan
    • A prioritized list of incidents
    • Detailed runbooks for top-priority incidents
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A formalized tracking system for benchmarking security incident metrics.
    • Recommendations for optimizing your security incident management processes.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Understand the benefits of security incident response management.
    • Formalize stakeholder support.
    • Assess your current process, obligations, and scope.
    • Develop RACI chart.
    • Define impact and scope.
    • Identify key players for the threat escalation protocol.
    • Develop a security incident response policy.
    • Develop a general security incident response plan.
    • Prioritize incident-specific runbook development.
    • Understand the incident response process.
    • Develop general and incident-specific call escalation trees.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your next top-priority incidents:
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Determine key metrics to track and report.
    • Develop post-incident activity documentation.
    • Understand best practices for both internal and external communication.
    • Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.
    • Present the security incident response program to key stakeholders.
    • Workshop executive presentation and debrief.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule subsequent Analyst Calls.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Security Incident Management Policy
    • General incident management plan
    • Security Incident Management Runbook
    • Development prioritization
    • Prioritized list of runbooks
    • Understanding of incident handling process
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Post-Incident Report Analysis Template
    • Root Cause Analysis Template
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Communication plans
    • Workshop summary documentation
  • All final deliverables
  • Measured value for Guided Implementations

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice – it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Purpose Measured Value
    Section 1: Prepare

    Understand the need for an incident response program.
    Develop your incident response policy and plan.
    Develop classifications around incidents.
    Establish your program implementation roadmap.

    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates: 2 FTEs*2 days*$80,000/year = $1,280
    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200

    Section 2: Operate

    Prioritize runbooks and develop the processes to create your own incident response program:

  • Detect
  • Analyze
  • Contain
  • Eradicate
  • Recover
  • Post-Incident Activity
  • Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    4 FTEs*10 days*$80,000/year = $12,800 (if done internally)

    Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    1 consultant*15 days*$2,000/day = $30,000 (if done by third party)
    Section 3: Maintain and Optimize Develop methods of proper reporting and create templates for communicating incident response to key parties. Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance, templates, and tabletop exercises:
    2 FTEs*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,920
    Total Costs To just get an incident response program off the ground. $49,200

    Insurance company put incident response aside; executives were unhappy

    Organization implemented ITIL, but formal program design became less of a priority and turned more ad hoc.

    Situation

    • Ad hoc processes created management dissatisfaction around the organization’s ineffective responses to data breaches.
    • Because of the lack of formal process, an entirely new security team needed to be developed, costing people their positions.

    Challenges

    • Lack of criteria to categorize and classify security incidents.
    • Need to overhaul the long-standing but ineffective program means attempting to change mindsets, which can be time consuming.
    • Help desk is not very knowledgeable on security.
    • New incident response program needs to be in alignment with data classification policy and business continuity.
    • Lack of integration with MSSP’s ticketing system.

    Next steps:

    • Need to get stakeholder buy-in for a new program.
    • Begin to establish classification/reporting procedures.

    Follow this case study to Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Prepare

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Phase 1: Prepare

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
    Prepare Operate Optimize

    This phase walks you through the following activities:

    1.1 Establish the drivers, challenges, and benefits.
    1.2 Examine the security incident landscape and trends.
    1.3 Understand your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    1.4 Gauge your current process to identify gaps.
    1.5 Formalize a security incident management charter.
    1.6 Identify key players and develop a call escalation tree.
    1.7 Develop a security incident management policy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security team
    • IT staff
    • Business leaders

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Formalized stakeholder support.
    • Security incident management policy.
    • Security incident management charter.
    • Call escalation tree.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare for Incident Response
    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 Weeks
    Step 1.1-1.3 Understand Incident Response Step 1.4-1.7 Begin Developing Your Program
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
  • Discuss your current incident management status.
  • Review findings with analyst:
  • Review documents.
  • Then complete these activities…
    • Establish your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Identify the drivers, challenges, and benefits of formalized incident response.
    • Review any existing documentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Discuss further incident response requirements.
    • Identify key players for escalation and notifications.
    • Develop the policy.
    • Develop the plan.

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Policy
    Security Incident Management Plan
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Ready-made incident response solutions often contain too much coverage: too many irrelevant cases that are not applicable to the organization are accounted for, making it difficult to sift through all the incidents to find the ones you care about. Develop specific incident use cases that correspond with relevant incidents to quickly identify the response process and eliminate ambiguity when handled by different individuals.

    Ice breaker: What is a security incident for your organization?

    1.1 Whiteboard Exercise – 60 minutes

    How do you classify various incident types between service desk, IT/infrastructure, and security?

    • Populate sticky notes with various incidents and assign them to the appropriate team.
      • Who owns the remediation? When are other groups involved? What is the triage/escalation process?
      • What other groups need to be notified (e.g. cyber insurance, Legal, HR, PR)?
      • Are there dependencies among incidents?
      • What are we covering in the scope of this project?

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}448|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $182,333 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 28 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy

    The cloud permeates the enterprise technology discussion. It can be difficult to separate the hype from the value. Should everything go to the cloud, or is that sentiment stoked by vendors looking to boost their bottom lines? Not everything should go to the cloud, but coming up with a systematic way to determine what belongs where is increasingly difficult as offerings get more complex.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t think about the cloud as an inevitable next step for all workloads. The cloud is merely another tool in the toolbox, ready to be used when appropriate and put away when it’s not needed. Cloud-first isn’t always the way to go.

    Impact and Result

    • Evaluate workloads’ suitability for the cloud using Info-Tech’s methodology to select the optimal migration (or non-migration) path based on the value of cloud characteristics.
    • Codify risks tied to workloads’ cloud suitability and plan mitigations.
    • Build a roadmap of initiatives for actions by workload and risk mitigation.
    • Define a cloud vision to share with stakeholders.

    Define Your Cloud Vision Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Your Cloud Vision – A step-by-step guide to generating, validating, and formalizing your cloud vision.

    The cloud vision storyboard walks readers through the process of generating, validating and formalizing a cloud vision, providing a framework and tools to assess workloads for their cloud suitability and risk.

    • Define Your Cloud Vision – Phases 1-4

    2. Cloud Vision Executive Presentation – A document that captures the results of the exercises, articulating use cases for cloud/non-cloud, risks, challenges, and high-level initiative items.

    The executive summary captures the results of the vision exercise, including decision criteria for moving to the cloud, risks, roadblocks, and mitigations.

    • Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    3. Cloud Vision Workbook – A tool that facilitates the assessment of workloads for appropriate service model, delivery model, support model, and risks and roadblocks.

    The cloud vision workbook comprises several assessments that will help you understand what service model, delivery model, support model, and risks and roadblocks you can expect to encounter at the workload level.

    • Cloud Vision Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define Your Cloud Vision

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Cloud

    The Purpose

    Align organizational goals to cloud characteristics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of how the characteristics particular to cloud can support organizational goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Generate corporate goals and cloud drivers.

    1.2 Identify success indicators.

    1.3 Explore cloud characteristics.

    1.4 Explore cloud service and delivery models.

    1.5 Define cloud support models and strategy components.

    1.6 Create state summaries for the different service and delivery models.

    1.7 Select workloads for further analysis.

    Outputs

    Corporate cloud goals and drivers

    Success indicators

    Current state summaries

    List of workloads for further analysis

    2 Assess Workloads

    The Purpose

    Evaluate workloads for cloud value and action plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan for each workload.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct workload assessment using the Cloud Strategy Workbook tool.

    2.2 Discuss assessments and make preliminary determinations about the workloads.

    Outputs

    Completed workload assessments

    Workload summary statements

    3 Identify and Mitigate Risks

    The Purpose

    Identify and plan to mitigate potential risks in the cloud project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of potential risks and plans to mitigate them.

    Activities

    3.1 Generate a list of risks and potential roadblocks associated with the cloud.

    3.2 Sort risks and roadblocks and define categories.

    3.3 Identify mitigations for each identified risk and roadblock

    3.4 Generate initiatives from the mitigations.

    Outputs

    List of risks and roadblocks, categorized

    List of mitigations

    List of initiatives

    4 Bridge the Gap and Create the Strategy

    The Purpose

    Clarify your vision of how the organization can best make use of cloud and build a project roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear vision and a concrete action plan to move forward with the project.

    Activities

    4.1 Review and assign work items.

    4.2 Finalize the decision framework for each of the following areas: service model, delivery model, and support model.

    4.3 Create a cloud vision statement

    Outputs

    Cloud roadmap

    Finalized task list

    Formal cloud decision rubric

    Cloud vision statement

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up

    The Purpose

    Complete your cloud vision by building a compelling executive-facing presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Simple, straightforward communication of your cloud vision to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    5.1 Build the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Outputs

    Completed cloud strategy executive presentation

    Completed Cloud Vision Workbook.

    Further reading

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Define your cloud vision before it defines you

    Analyst perspective

    Use the cloud’s strengths. Mitigate its weaknesses.

    The cloud isn’t magic. It’s not necessarily cheaper, better, or even available for the thing you want it to do. It’s not mysterious or a cure-all, and it does take a bit of effort to systematize your approach and make consistent, defensible decisions about your cloud services. That’s where this blueprint comes in.

    Your cloud vision is the culmination of this effort all boiled down into a single statement: “This is how we want to use the cloud.” That simple statement should, of course, be representative of – and built from – a broader, contextual strategy discussion that answers the following questions: What should go to the cloud? What kind of cloud makes sense? Should the cloud deployment be public, private, or hybrid? What does a migration look like? What risks and roadblocks need to be considered when exploring your cloud migration options? What are the “day 2” activities that you will need to undertake after you’ve gotten the ball rolling?

    Taken as a whole, answering these questions is difficult task. But with the framework provided here, it’s as easy as – well, let’s just say it’s easier.

    Jeremy Roberts

    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • You are both extrinsically motivated to move to the cloud (e.g. by vendors) and intrinsically motivated by internal digital transformation initiatives.
    • You need to define the cloud’s true value proposition for your organization without assuming it is an outsourcing opportunity or will save you money.
    • Your industry, once cloud-averse, is now normalizing the use of cloud services, but you have not established a basic cloud vision from which to develop a strategy at a later point.

    Common Obstacles

    • Organizations jump to the cloud before defining their cloud vision and without any clear plan for realizing the cloud’s benefits.
    • Many organizations have a foot in the cloud already, but these decisions have been made in an ad hoc rather than systematic fashion.
    • You lack a consistent framework to assess your workloads’ suitability for the cloud.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Evaluate workloads’ suitability for the cloud using Info-Tech’s methodology to select the optimal migration (or non-migration) path based on the value of cloud characteristics.
    • Codify risks tied to workloads’ cloud suitability and plan mitigations.
    • Build a roadmap of initiatives for actions by workload and risk mitigation.
    • Define a cloud vision to share with stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight: 1) Base migration decisions on cloud characteristics. If your justification for the migration is simply getting your workload out of the data center, think again. 2) Address the risks up front in your migration plan. 3) The cloud changes roles and calls for different skill sets, but Ops is here to stay.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who need to:

    • Identify workloads that are good candidates for the cloud.
    • Develop a consistent, cost-effective approach to cloud services.
    • Outline and mitigate risks.
    • Define your organization’s cloud archetype.
    • Map initiatives on a roadmap.
    • Communicate your cloud vision to stakeholders so they can understand the reasons behind a cloud decision and differentiate between different cloud service and deployment models.
    • Understand the risks, roadblocks, and limitations of the cloud.

    “We’re moving from a world where companies like Oracle and Microsoft and HP and Dell were all critically important to a world where Microsoft is still important, but Amazon is now really important, and Google also matters. The technology has changed, but most of the major vendors they’re betting their business on have also changed. And that’s super hard for people..” –David Chappell, Author and Speaker

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Organizations jump to the cloud before defining their cloud vision and without any clear plan for realizing the cloud’s benefits.
    • Many organizations already have a foot in the cloud, but the choice to explore these solutions was made in an ad hoc rather than systematic fashion. The cloud just sort of happened.
    • The lack of a consistent assessment framework means that some workloads that probably belong in the cloud are kept on premises or with hosted services providers – and vice versa.
    • Securing cloud expertise is remarkably difficult – especially in a labor market roiled by the global pandemic and the increasing importance of cloud services.

    Standard cloud challenges

    30% of all cloud spend is self-reported as waste. Many workloads that end up in the cloud don’t belong there. Many workloads that do belong in the cloud aren’t properly migrated. (Flexera, 2021)

    44% of respondents report themselves as under-skilled in the cloud management space. (Pluralsight, 2021)

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Goals and drivers

    • Service model
      • What type of cloud makes the most sense for workload archetypes? When does it make sense to pick SaaS over IaaS, for example?
    • Delivery model
      • Will services be delivered over the public cloud, a private cloud, or a hybrid cloud? What challenges accompany this decision?
    • Migration Path
      • What does the migration path look like? What does the transition to the cloud look like, and how much effort will be required? Amazon’s 6Rs framework captures migration options: rehosting, repurchasing, replatforming, and refactoring, along with retaining and retiring. Each workload should be assessed for its suitability for one or more of these paths.
    • Support model
      • How will services be provided? Will staff be trained, new staff hired, a service provider retained for ongoing operations, or will a consultant with cloud expertise be brought on board for a defined period? The appropriate support model is highly dependent on goals along with expected outcomes for different workloads.

    Highlight risks and roadblocks

    Formalize cloud vision

    Document your cloud strategy

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Determine the hypothesized value of cloud for your organization.
    2. Evaluate workloads with 6Rs framework.
    3. Identify and mitigate risks.
    4. Identify cloud archetype.
    5. Plot initiatives on a roadmap.
    6. Write action plan statement and goal statement.

    What is the cloud, how is it deployed, and how is service provided?

    Cloud Characteristics

    1. On-demand self-service: the ability to access reosurces instantly without vendor interaction
    2. Broad network access: all services delivered over the network
    3. Resource pooling: multi-tenant environment (shared)
    4. Rapid elasticity: the ability to expand and retract capabilities as needed
    5. Measured service: transparent metering

    Service Model:

    1. Software-as-a-Service: all but the most minor configuration is done by the vendor
    2. Platform-as-a-Service: customer builds the application using tools provided by the provider
    3. Infrastructure-as-a-Service: the customer manages OS, storage, and the application

    Delivery Model

    1. Public cloud: accessible to anyone over the internet; multi-tenant environment
    2. Private cloud: provisioned for a single organization with multiple units
    3. Hybrid cloud: two or more connected clouds; data is portage across them
    4. Community cloud: provisioned for a specific group of organizations

    (National Institute of Standards and Technology)

    A workload-first approach will allow you to take full advantage of the cloud’s strengths

    • Under all but the most exceptional circumstances, good cloud strategies will incorporate different service models. Very few organizations are “IaaS shops” or “SaaS shops,” even if they lean heavily in one direction.
    • These different service models (including non-cloud options like colocation and on-premises infrastructure) each have different strengths. Part of your cloud strategy should involve determining which of the services makes the most sense for you.
    • Own the cloud by understanding which cloud (or non-cloud!) offering makes the most sense for you given your unique context.

    Migration paths

    In a 2016 blog post, Amazon introduced a framework for understanding cloud migration strategies. The framework presented here is slightly modified – including a “relocate” component rather than a “retire” component – but otherwise hews close to the standard.

    These migration paths reflect organizational capabilities and desired outcomes in terms of service models – cloud or otherwise. Retention means keeping the workload where it is, in a datacenter or a colocation service, or relocating to a colocation or hosted software environment. These represent the “non-cloud” migration paths.

    In the graphic on the right, the paths within the red box lead to the cloud. Rehosting means lifting and shifting to an infrastructure environment. Migrating a virtual machine from your VMware environment on premises to Azure Virtual machines is a quick way to realize some benefits from the cloud. Migrating from SQL Server on premises to a cloud-based SQL solution looks a bit more like changing platforms (replatforming). It involves basic infrastructure modification without a substantial architectural component.

    Refactoring is the most expensive of the options and involves engaging the software development lifecycle to build a custom solution, fundamentally rewriting the solution to be cloud native and take advantage of cloud-native architectures. This can result in a PaaS or an IaaS solution.

    Finally, repurchasing means simply going to market and procuring a new solution. This may involve migrating data, but it does not require the migration of components.

    Migration Paths

    Retain (Revisit)

    • Keep the application in its current form, at least for now. This doesn’t preclude revisiting it in the future.

    Relocate

    • Move the workload between datacenters or to a hosted software/colocation provider.

    Rehost

    • Move the application to the cloud (IaaS) and continue to run it in more or less the same form as it currently runs.

    Replatform

    • Move the application to the cloud and perform a few changes for cloud optimizations.

    Refactor

    • Rewrite the application, taking advantage of cloud-native architectures.

    Repurchase

    • Replace with an alternative, cloud-native application and migrate the data.

    Support model

    Support models by characteristic

    Duration of engagement Specialization Flexibility
    Internal IT Indefinite Varies based on nature of business Fixed, permanent staff
    Managed Service Provider Contractually defined General, some specialization Standard offering
    Consultant Project-based Specific, domain-based Entirely negotiable

    IT services, including cloud services, can be delivered and managed in multiple ways depending on the nature of the workload and the organization’s intended path forward. Three high-level options are presented here and may be more or less valuable based on the duration of the expected engagement with the service (temporary or permanent), the skills specialization required, and the flexibility necessary to complete the job.

    By way of example, a highly technical, short-term project with significant flexibility requirements might be a good fit for an expensive consultant, whereas post-implementation maintenance of a cloud email system requires relatively little specialization and flexibility and would therefore be a better fit for internal management.

    There is no universally applicable rule here, but there are some workloads that are generally a good fit for the cloud and others that are not as effective, with that fit being conditional on the appropriate support model being employed.

    Risks, roadblocks, and strategy components

    No two cloud strategies are exactly alike, but all should address 14 key areas. A key step in defining your cloud vision is an assessment of these strategy components. Lower maturity does not preclude an aggressive cloud strategy, but it does indicate that higher effort will be required to make the transition.

    Component Description Component Description
    Monitoring What will system owners/administrators need visibility into? How will they achieve this? Vendor Management What practices must change to ensure effective management of cloud vendors?
    Provisioning Who will be responsible for deploying cloud workloads? What governance will this process be subject to? Finance Management How will costs be managed with the transition away from capital expenditure?
    Migration How will cloud migrations be conducted? What best practices/standards must be employed? Security What steps must be taken to ensure that cloud services meet security requirements?
    Operations management What is the process for managing operations as they change in the cloud? Data Controls How will data residency, compliance, and protection requirements be met in the cloud?
    Architecture What general principles must apply in the cloud environment? Skills and roles What skills become necessary in the cloud? What steps must be taken to acquire those skills?
    Integration and interoperability How will services be integrated? What standards must apply? Culture and adoption Is there a cultural aversion to the cloud? What steps must be taken to ensure broad cloud acceptance?
    Portfolio Management Who will be responsible for managing the growth of the cloud portfolio? Governing bodies What formal governance must be put in place? Who will be responsible for setting standards?

    Cloud archetypes – a cloud vision component

    Once you understand the value of the cloud, your workloads’ general suitability for cloud, and your proposed risks and mitigations, the next step is to define your cloud archetype.

    Your organization’s cloud archetype is the strategic posture that IT adopts to best support the organization’s goals. Info-Tech’s model recognizes seven archetypes, divided into three high-level archetypes.

    After consultation with your stakeholders, and based on the results of the suitability and risk assessment activities, define your archetype. The archetype feeds into the overall cloud vision and provides simple insight into the cloud future state for all stakeholders.

    The cloud vision itself is captured in a “vision statement,” a short summary of the overall approach that includes the overall cloud archetype.

    We can best support the organization's goals by:

    More Cloud

    Less Cloud

    Cloud Focused Cloud-Centric Providing all workloads through cloud delivery.
    Cloud-First Using the cloud as our default deployment model. For each workload, we should ask “why NOT cloud?”
    Cloud Opportunistic Hybrid Enabling the ability to transition seamlessly between on-premises and cloud resources for many workloads.
    Integrated Combining cloud and traditional infrastructure resources, integrating data and applications through APIs or middleware.
    Split Using the cloud for some workloads and traditional infrastructure resources for others.
    Cloud Averse Cloud-Light Using traditional infrastructure resources and limiting our use of the cloud to when it is absolutely necessary.
    Anti-Cloud Using traditional infrastructure resources and avoiding use of the cloud wherever possible.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for defining your cloud vision

    1. Understand the Cloud 2. Assess Workloads 3. Identify and Mitigate Risks 4. Bridge the Gap and Create the Vision
    Phase Steps
    1. Generate goals and drivers
    2. Explore cloud characteristics
    3. Create a current state summary
    4. Select workloads for analysis
    1. Conduct workload assessments
    2. Determine workload future state
    1. Generate risks and roadblocks
    2. Mitigate risks and roadblocks
    3. Define roadmap initiatives
    1. Review and assign work items
    2. Finalize cloud decision framework
    3. Create cloud vision
    Phase Outcomes
    1. List of goals and drivers
    2. Shared understanding of cloud terms
    3. Current state of cloud in the organization
    4. List of workloads to be assessed
    1. Completed workload assessments
    2. Defined workload future state
    1. List of risks and roadblocks
    2. List of mitigations
    3. Defined roadmap initiatives
    1. Cloud roadmap
    2. Cloud decision framework
    3. Completed Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Insight summary

    The cloud may not be right for you – and that’s okay!

    Don’t think about the cloud as an inevitable next step for all workloads. The cloud is merely another tool in the toolbox, ready to be used when appropriate and put away when it’s not needed. Cloud first isn’t always the way to go.

    Not all clouds are equal

    It’s not “should I go to the cloud?” but “what service and delivery models make sense based on my needs and risk tolerance?” Thinking about the cloud as a binary can force workloads into the cloud that don’t belong (and vice versa).

    Bottom-up is best

    A workload assessment is the only way to truly understand the cloud’s value. Work from the bottom up, not the top down, understand what characteristics make a workload cloud suitable, and strategize on that basis.

    Your accountability doesn’t change

    You are still accountable for maintaining available, secure, functional applications and services. Cloud providers share some responsibility, but the buck stops where it always has: with you.

    Don’t customize for the sake of customization

    SaaS providers make money selling the same thing to everyone. When migrating a workload to SaaS, work with stakeholders to pursue standardization around a selected platform and avoid customization where possible.

    Best of both worlds, worst of both worlds

    Hybrid clouds are in fashion, but true hybridity comes with additional cost, administration, and other constraints. A convoy moves at the speed of its slowest member.

    The journey matters as much as the destination

    How you get there is as important as what “there” actually is. Any strategy that focuses solely on the destination misses out on a key part of the value conversation: the migration strategy.

    Blueprint benefits

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    This presentation captures the results of the exercises and presents a complete vision to stakeholders including a desired target state, a rubric for decision making, the results of the workload assessments, and an overall risk profile.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    This workbook includes the standard cloud workload assessment questionnaire along with the results of the assessment. It also includes the milestone timeline for the implementation of the cloud vision.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • A consistent approach to the cloud takes the guesswork out of deployment decisions and makes it easier for IT to move on to the execution stage.
    • When properly incorporated, cloud services come with many benefits, including automation, elasticity, and alternative architectures (micro-services, containers). The cloud vision project will help IT readers articulate expected benefits and work towards achieving them.
    • A clear framework for incorporating organizational goals into cloud plans.

    Business benefits

    • Simple, well-governed access to high-quality IT resources.
    • Access to the latest and greatest in technology to facilitate remote work.
    • Framework for cost management in the cloud that incorporates OpEx and chargebacks/showbacks. A clear understanding of expected changes to cost modeling is also a benefit of a cloud vision.
    • Clarity for stakeholders about IT’s response (and contribution to) IT strategic initiatives.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Don’t take our word for it:

    • The cloud vision material in various forms has been offered for several years, and members have generally benefited substantially, both from cloud vision workshops and from guided implementations led by analysts.
    • After each engagement, we send a survey that asks members how they benefited from the experience. Of 30 responses, the cloud vision research has received an average score of 9.8/10. Real members have found significant value in the process.
    • Additionally, members reported saving between 2 and 120 days (for an average of 17), and financial savings ranged from $1,920 all the way up to $1.27 million, for an average of $170,577.90! If we drop outliers on both ends, the average reported value of a cloud vision engagement is $37, 613.
    • Measure the value by calculating the time saved from using Info-Tech’s framework vs. a home-brewed cloud strategy alternative and by comparing the overall cost of a guided implementation or workshop with the equivalent offering from another firm. We’re confident you’ll come out ahead.

    9.8/10 Average reported satisfaction

    17 Days Average reported time savings

    $37, 613 Average cost savings (adj.)

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Industry: Financial

    Source: Info-Tech workshop

    Anonymous financial institution

    A small East Coast financial institution was required to develop a cloud strategy. This strategy had to meet several important requirements, including alignment with strategic priorities and best practices, along with regulatory compliance, including with the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.

    The bank already had a significant cloud footprint and was looking to organize and formalize the strategy going forward.

    Leadership needed a comprehensive strategy that touched on key areas including the delivery model, service models, individual workload assessments, cost management, risk management and governance. The output had to be consumable by a variety of audiences with varying levels of technical expertise and had to speak to IT’s role in the broader strategic goals articulated earlier in the year.

    Results

    The bank engaged Info-Tech for a cloud vision workshop and worked through four days of exercises with various IT team members. The bank ultimately decided on a multi-cloud strategy that prioritized SaaS while also allowing for PaaS and IaaS solutions, along with some non-cloud hosted solutions, based on organizational circumstances.

    Bank cloud vision

    [Bank] will provide innovative financial and related services by taking advantage of the multiplicity of best-of-breed solutions available in the cloud. These solutions make it possible to benefit from industry-level innovations, while ensuring efficiency, redundancy, and enhanced security.

    Bank cloud decision workflow

    • SaaS
      • Platform?
        • Yes
          • PaaS
        • No
          • Hosted
        • IaaS
          • Other

    Non-cloud

    Cloud

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this crticial project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off imediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge the take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    • Call #1: Discuss current state, challenges, etc.
    • Call #2: Goals, drivers, and current state.

    Phase 2

    • Call #3: Conduct cloud suitability assessment for selected workloads.

    Phase 3

    • Call #4: Generate and categorize risks.
    • Call #5: Begin the risk mitigation conversation.

    Phase 4

    • Call #6: Complete the risk mitigation process
    • Call #7: Finalize vision statement and cloud decision framework.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Offsite day
    Understand the cloud Assess workloads Identify and mitigate risks Bridge the gap and create the strategy Next steps and wrap-up (offsite)
    Activities

    1.1 Introduction

    1.2 Generate corporate goals and cloud drivers

    1.3 Identify success indicators

    1.4 Explore cloud characteristics

    1.5 Explore cloud service and delivery models

    1.6 Define cloud support models and strategy components

    1.7 Create current state summaries for the different service and delivery models

    1.8 Select workloads for further analysis

    2.1 Conduct workload assessments using the cloud strategy workbook tool

    2.2 Discuss assessments and make preliminary determinations about workloads

    3.1 Generate a list of risks and potential roadblocks associated with the cloud

    3.2 Sort risks and roadblocks and define categories

    3.3 Identify mitigations for each identified risk and roadblock

    3.4 Generate initiatives from the mitigations

    4.1 Review and assign work items

    4.2 Finalize the decision framework for each of the following areas:

    • Service model
    • Delivery model
    • Support model

    4.3 Create a cloud vision statement

    5.1 Build the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation
    Deliverables
    1. Corporate goals and cloud drivers
    2. Success indicators
    3. Current state summaries
    4. List of workloads for further analysis
    1. Completed workload assessments
    2. Workload summary statements
    1. List of risks and roadblocks, categorized
    2. List of mitigations
    3. List of initiatives
    1. Finalized task list
    2. Formal cloud decision rubric
    3. Cloud vision statement
    1. Completed cloud strategy executive presentation
    2. Completed cloud vision workbook

    Understand the cloud

    Build the foundations of your cloud vision

    Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Understand the Cloud

    Phase 1

    1.1 Generate goals and drivers

    1.2 Explore cloud characteristics

    1.3 Create a current state summary

    1.4 Select workloads for analysis

    Phase 2

    2.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2.2 Determine workload future states

    Phase 3

    3.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    3.2 Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    3.3 Define roadmap initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review and assign work items

    4.2 Finalize cloud decision framework

    4.3 Create cloud vision

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Generate organizational goals

    1.1.2 Define cloud drivers

    1.1.3 Define success indicators

    1.3.1 Record your current state

    1.4.1 Select workloads for further assessment

    This phase involves the following participants:

    IT management, the core working group, security, infrastructure, operations, architecture, engineering, applications, non-IT stakeholders.

    It starts with shared understanding

    Stakeholders must agree on overall goals and what “cloud” means

    The cloud is a nebulous term that can reasonably describe services ranging from infrastructure as a service as delivered by providers like Amazon Web Services and Microsoft through its Azure platform, right up to software as a service solutions like Jira or Salesforce. These solutions solve different problems – just because your CRM would be a good fit for a migration to Salesforce doesn’t mean the same system would make sense in Azure or AWS.

    This is important because the language we use to talk about the cloud can color our approach to cloud services. A “cloud-first” strategy will mean something different to a CEO with a concept of the cloud rooted in Salesforce than it will to a system administrator who interprets it to mean a transition to cloud-hosted virtual machines.

    Add to this the fact that not all cloud services are hosted externally by providers (public clouds) and the fact that multiple delivery models can be engaged at once through hybrid or multi-cloud approaches, and it’s apparent that a shared understanding of the cloud is necessary for a coherent strategy to take form.

    This phase proceeds in four steps, each governed by the principle of shared understanding. The first requires a shared understanding of corporate goals and drivers. Step 2 involves coming to a shared understanding of the cloud’s unique characteristics. Step 3 requires a review of the current state. Finally, in Step 4, participants will identify workloads that are suitable for analysis as candidates for the cloud.

    Step 1.1

    Generate goals and drivers

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define organizational goals

    1.1.2 Define cloud drivers

    1.1.3 Define success indicators

    Generate goals and drivers

    Explore cloud characteristics

    Create a current state summary

    Select workloads for analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT management
    • Core working group
    • Security
    • Applications
    • Infrastructure
    • Service management
    • Leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of organizational goals
    • List of cloud drivers
    • Defined success indicators

    What can the cloud do for you?

    The cloud is not valuable for its own sake, and not all users derive the same value

    • The cloud is characterized by on-demand self-service, broad network access, resource pooling, rapid elasticity, and measured service. Any or all of those characteristics might be enough to make the cloud appealing, but in most cases, there is an overriding driver.
    • Multiple paths may lead to the cloud. Consider an organization with a need to control costs by showing back to business units, or perhaps by reducing capital expenditure – the cloud may be the most appropriate way to effect these changes. Conversely, an organization expanding rapidly and with a need to access the latest and greatest technology might benefit from the elasticity and pooled resources that major cloud providers can offer.
    • In these cases, the destination might be the same (a cloud solution) but the delivery model – public, private, or hybrid – and the decisions made around the key strategy components, including architecture, provisioning, and cost management, will almost certainly be different.
    • Defining goals, understanding cloud drivers, and – crucially – understanding what success means, are all therefore essential elements of the cloud vision process.

    1.1.1 Generate organizational goals

    1-3 hours

    Input

    • Strategy documentation

    Output

    • Organizational goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard (digital/physical)

    Participants

    • IT leadership
    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Security
    1. As a group, brainstorm organizational goals, ideally based on existing documentation
      • Review relevant corporate and IT strategies.
      • If you do not have access to internal documentation, review the standard goals on the next slide and select those that are most relevant for you.
    2. Record the most important business goals in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation. Include descriptions where possible to ensure wide readability.
    3. Make note of these goals. They should inform the answers to prompts offered in the Cloud Vision Workbook and should be a consistent presence in the remainder of the visioning exercise. If you’re conducting the session in person, leave the goals up on a whiteboard and make reference to them throughout the workshop.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Standard COBIT 19 enterprise goals

    1. Portfolio of competitive products and services
    2. Managed business risk
    3. Compliance with external laws and regulations
    4. Quality of financial information
    5. Customer-oriented service culture
    6. Business service continuity and availability
    7. Quality of management information
    8. Optimization of internal business process functionality
    9. Optimization of business process costs
    10. Staff skills, motivation, and productivity
    11. Compliance with internal policies
    12. Managed digital transformation programs
    13. Product and business innovation

    1.1.2 Define cloud drivers

    30-60 minutes

    Input

    • Organizational goals
    • Strategy documentation
    • Management/staff perspective

    Output

    • List of cloud drivers

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership
    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Security
    1. Cloud drivers sit at a level of abstraction below organizational goals. Keeping your organizational goals in mind, have each participant in the session write down how they expect to benefit from the cloud on a sticky note.
    2. Solicit input one at a time and group similar responses. Encourage participants to bring forward their cloud goals even if similar goals have been mentioned previously. The number of mentions is a useful way to gauge the relative weight of the drivers.
    3. Once this is done, you should have a few groups of similar drivers. Work with the group to name each category. This name will be the driver reported in the documentation.
    4. Input the results of the exercise into the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation, and include descriptions based on the constituent drivers. For example, if a driver is titled “do more valuable work,” the constituent drivers might be “build cloud skills,” “focus on core products,” and “avoid administration work where possible.” The description would be based on these components.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    1.1.3 Define success indicators

    1 hour

    Input

    • Cloud drivers
    • Organizational goals

    Output

    • List of cloud driver success indicators

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership
    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Security
    1. On a whiteboard, draw a table with each of the cloud drivers (identified in 1.1.2) across the top.
    2. Work collectively to generate success indicators for each cloud driver. In this case, a success indicator is some way you can report your progress with the stated driver. It is a real-world proxy for the sometimes abstract phenomena that make up your drivers. Think about what would be true if your driver was realized.
      1. For example, if your driver is “faster access to resources,” you might consider indicators like developer satisfaction, project completion time, average time to provision, etc.
    3. Once you are satisfied with your list of indicators, populate the slide in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation for validation from stakeholders.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Step 1.2

    Explore cloud characteristics

    Activities

    Understand the value of the cloud:

    • Review delivery models
    • Review support models
    • Review service models
    • Review migration paths

    Understand the Cloud

    Generate goals and drivers

    Explore cloud characteristics

    Create a current state summary

    Select workloads for analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • Architecture
    • Engineering
    • Security

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of cloud service models and value

    Defining the cloud

    Per NIST, the cloud has five fundamental characteristics. All clouds have these characteristics, even if they are executed in somewhat different ways between delivery models, service models, and even individual providers.

    Cloud characteristics

    On-demand self-service

    Cloud customers are capable of provisioning cloud resources without human interaction (e.g. contacting sales), generally through a web console.

    Broad network access

    Capabilities are designed to be delivered over a network and are generally intended for access by a wide variety of platform types (cloud services are generally device-agnostic).

    Resource pooling

    Multiple customers (internal, in the case of private clouds) make use of a highly abstracted shared infrastructure managed by the cloud provider.

    Rapid elasticity

    Customers are capable of provisioning additional resources as required, pulling from a functionally infinite pool of capacity. Cloud resources can be spun-down when no longer needed.

    Measured service

    Consumption is metered based on an appropriate unit of analysis (number of licenses, storage used, compute cycles, etc.) and billing is transparent and granular.

    Cloud delivery models

    The NIST definition of cloud computing outlines four cloud delivery models: public, private, hybrid, and community clouds. A community cloud is like a private cloud, but it is provisioned for the exclusive use of a like-minded group of organizations, usually in a mutually beneficial, non-competitive arrangement. Universities and hospitals are examples of organizations that can pool their resources in this way without impacting competitiveness. The Info-Tech model covers three key delivery models – public, private, and hybrid, and an overarching model (multi-cloud) that can comprise more than one of the other models – public + public, public + hybrid, etc.

    Public

    The cloud service is provisioned for access by the general public (customers).

    Private

    A private cloud has the five key characteristics, but is provisioned for use by a single entity, like a company or organization.

    Hybrid

    Hybridity essentially refers to interoperability between multiple cloud delivery models (public +private).

    Multi

    A multi-cloud deployment requires only that multiple clouds are used without any necessary interoperability (Nutanix, 2019).

    Public cloud

    This is what people generally think about when they talk about cloud

    • The public cloud is, well, public! Anyone can make use of its resources, and in the case of the major providers, capacity is functionally unlimited. Need to store exabytes of data in the cloud? No problem! Amazon will drive a modified shipping container to your datacenter, load it up, and “migrate” it to a datacenter.
    • Public clouds offer significant variety on the infrastructure side. Major IaaS providers, like Microsoft and Amazon, offer dozens of services across many different categories including compute, networking, and storage, but also identity, containers, machine learning, virtual desktops, and much, much more. (See a list from Microsoft here, and Amazon here)
    • There are undoubtedly strengths to the public cloud model. Providers offer the “latest and greatest” and customers need not worry about the details, including managing infrastructure and physical locations. Providers offer built-in redundancy, multi-regional deployments, automation tools, management and governance solutions, and a variety of leading-edge technologies that would not be feasible for organizations to run in-house, like high performance compute, blockchain, or quantum computing.
    • Of course, the public cloud is not all sunshine and rainbows – there are downsides as well. It can be expensive; it can introduce regulatory complications to have to trust another entity with your key information. Additionally, there can be performance hiccups, and with SaaS products, it can be difficult to monitor at the appropriate (per-transaction) level.

    Prominent examples include:

    AWS

    Microsoft

    Azure

    Salesforce.com

    Workday

    SAP

    Private cloud

    A lower-risk cloud for cloud-averse customers?

    • A cloud is a cloud, no matter how small. Some IT shops deploy private clouds that make use of the five key cloud characteristics but provisioned for the exclusive use of a single entity, like a corporation.
    • Private clouds have numerous benefits. Some potential cloud customers might be uncomfortable with the shared responsibility that is inherent in the public cloud. Private clouds allow customers to deliver flexible, measured services without having to surrender control, but they require significant overhead, capital expenditure, administrative effort, and technical expertise.
    • According to the 2021 State of the Cloud Report, private cloud use is common, and the most frequently cited toolset is VMware vSphere, followed by Azure Stack, OpenStack, and AWS Outposts. Private cloud deployments are more common in larger organizations, which makes sense given the overhead required to manage such an environment.

    Private cloud adoption

    The images shows a graph titled Private Cloud Adoption for Enterprises. It is a horizontal bar graph, with three segments in each bar: dark blue marking currently use; mid blue marking experimenting; and light blue marking plan to use.

    VMware and Microsoft lead the pack among private cloud customers, with Amazon and Red Hat also substantially present across private cloud environments.

    Hybrid cloud

    The best of both worlds?

    Hybrid cloud architectures combine multiple cloud delivery models and facilitate some level of interoperability. NIST suggests bursting and load balancing as examples of hybrid cloud use cases. Note: it is not sufficient to simply have multiple clouds running in parallel – there must be a toolset that allows for an element of cross-cloud functionality.

    This delivery model is attractive because it allows users to take advantage of the strengths of multiple service models using a single management pane. Bursting across clouds to take advantage of additional capacity or disaster recovery capabilities are two obvious use cases that appeal to hybrid cloud users.

    But while hybridity is all the rage (especially given the impact Covid-19 has had on the workplace), the reality is that any hybrid cloud user must take the good with the bad. Multiple clouds and a management layer can be technically complex, expensive, and require maintaining a physical infrastructure that is not especially valuable (“I thought we were moving to the cloud to get out of the datacenter!”).

    Before selecting a hybrid approach through services like VMware Cloud on AWS or Microsoft’s Azure Stack, consider the cost, complexity, and actual expected benefit.

    Amazon, Microsoft, and Google dominate public cloud IaaS, but IBM is betting big on hybrid cloud:

    The image is a screencap of a tweet from IBM News. The tweet reads: IBM CEO Ginni Rometty: Hybrid cloud is a trillion dollar market and we'll be number one #Think2019.

    With its acquisition of Red Hat in 2019 for $34 billion, Big Blue put its money where its mouth is and acquired a substantial hybrid cloud business. At the time of the acquisition, Red Hat’s CEO, Jim Whitehurst, spoke about the benefit IBM expected to receive:

    “Joining forces with IBM gives Red Hat the opportunity to bring more open source innovation to an even broader range of organizations and will enable us to scale to meet the need for hybrid cloud solutions that deliver true choice and agility” (Red Hat, 2019).

    Multi-cloud

    For most organizations, the multi-cloud is the most realistic option.

    Multi-cloud is popular!

    The image shows a graph titled Multi-Cloud Architectures Used, % of all Respondents. The largest percentage is Apps siloed on different clouds, followed by DAta integration between clouds.

    Multi-cloud solutions exist at a different layer of abstraction from public, private, and even hybrid cloud delivery models. A multi-cloud architecture, as the name suggests, requires the user to be a customer of more than one cloud provider, and it can certainly include a hybrid cloud deployment, but it is not bound by the same rules of interoperability.

    Many organizations – especially those with fewer resources or a lack of a use case for a private cloud – rely on a multi-cloud architecture to build applications where they belong, and they manage each environment separately (or occasionally with the help of cloud management platforms).

    If your data team wants to work in AWS and your enterprise services run on basic virtual machines in Azure, that might be the most effective architecture. As the Flexera 2021 State of the Cloud Report suggests, this architecture is far more common than the more complicated bursting or brokering architectures characteristic of hybrid clouds.

    NIST cloud service models

    Software as a service

    SaaS has exploded in popularity with consumers who wish to avail themselves of the cloud’s benefits without having to manage underlying infrastructure components. SaaS is simple, generally billed per-user per-month, and is almost entirely provider-managed.

    Platform as a service

    PaaS providers offer a toolset for their customers to run custom applications and services without the requirement to manage underlying infrastructure components. This service model is ideal for custom applications/services that don’t benefit from highly granular infrastructure control.

    Infrastructure as a service

    IaaS represents the sale of components. Instead of a service, IaaS providers sell access to components, like compute, storage, and networking, allowing for customers to build anything they want on top of the providers’ infrastructure.

    Cloud service models

    • This research focuses on five key service models, each of which has its own strengths and weaknesses. Moving right from “on-prem,” customers gradually give up more control over their environments to cloud service providers.
    • An entirely premises-based environment means that the customer is responsible for everything ranging from the dirt under the datacenter to application-level configurations. Conversely, in a SaaS environment, the provider is responsible for everything but those top-level application configurations.
    • A managed service provider or other third party can manage any or of the components of the infrastructure stack. A service provider may, for example, build a SaaS solution on top of another provider’s IaaS, or might offer configuration assistance with a commercially available SaaS.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all workloads fit well in the cloud. Many environments will mix service models (e.g. SaaS for some workloads, some in IaaS, some on-premises), and this can be perfectly effective. It must be consistent and intentional, however.

    On-prem Co-Lo IaaS PaaS SaaS
    Application Application Application Application Application
    Database Database Database Database Database
    Runtime/ Middleware Runtime/ Middleware Runtime/ Middleware Runtime/ Middleware Runtime/ Middleware
    OS OS OS OS OS
    Hypervisor Hypervisor Hypervisor Hypervisor Hypervisor
    Server Network Storage Server Network Storage Server Network Storage Server Network Storage Server Network Storage
    Facilities Facilities Facilities Facilities Facilities

    Organization has control

    Organization or vendor may control

    Vendor has control

    Analytics folly

    SaaS is good, but it’s not a panacea

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Info-Tech workshop

    Situation

    A healthcare analytics provider had already moved a significant number of “non-core workloads” to the cloud, including email, HRIS, and related services.

    The company CEO was satisfied with the reduced effort required by IT to manage SaaS-based workloads and sought to extend the same benefits to the core analytics platform where there was an opportunity to reduce overhead.

    Complication

    Many components of the health analytics service were designed to run specifically in a datacenter and were not ready to be migrated to the cloud without significant effort/refactoring. SaaS was not an option because this was a core platform – a SaaS provider would have been the competition.

    That left IaaS, which was expensive and would not bring the expected benefits (reduced overhead).

    Results

    The organization determined that there were no short-term gains from migrating to the cloud. Due to the nature of the application (its extensive customization, the fact that it was a core product sold by the company) any steps to reduce operational overhead were not feasible.

    The CEO recognized that the analytics platform was not a good candidate for the cloud and what distinguished the analytics platform from more suitable workloads.

    Migration paths

    In a 2016 blog post, Amazon Web Services articulated a framework for cloud migration that incorporates elements of the journey as well as the destination. If workload owners do not choose to retain or retire their workloads, there are four alternatives. These alternatives all stack up differently along five key dimensions:

    1. Value: does the workload stand to benefit from unique cloud characteristics? To what degree?
    2. Effort: how much work would be required to make the transition?
    3. Cost: how much money is the migration expected to cost?
    4. Time: how long will the migration take?
    5. Skills: what skills must be brought to bear to complete the migration?

    Not all migration paths can lead to all destinations. Rehosting generally means IaaS, while repurchasing leads to SaaS. Refactoring and replatforming have some variety of outcomes, and it becomes possible to take advantage of new IaaS architectures or migrate workloads over fully to SaaS.

    As part of the workload assessment process, use the five dimensions (expanded upon on the next slide) to determine what migration path makes sense. Preferred migration paths form an important part of the overall cloud vision process.

    Retain (Revisit)

    • Keep the application in its current form, at least for now. This doesn’t preclude revisiting it in the future.

    Retire

    • Get rid of the application completely.

    Rehost

    • Move the application to the cloud (IaaS) and continue to run it in more or less the same form as it currently runs.

    Replatform

    • Move the application to the cloud and perform a few changes for cloud optimizations.

    Refactor

    • Rewrite the application, taking advantage of cloud native architectures.

    Repurchase

    • Replace with an alternative, cloud-native application and migrate the data.

    Migration paths – relative value

    Migration path Value Effort Cost Time Skills
    Retain No real change in the absolute value of the workload if it is retained. No effort beyond ongoing workload maintenance. No immediate hard dollar costs, but opportunity costs and technical debt abound. No time required! (At least not right away…) Retaining requires the same skills it has always required (which may be more difficult to acquire in the future).
    Rehire A retired workload can provide no value, but it is not a drain! Spinning a service down requires engaging that part of the lifecycle. N/A Retiring the service may be simple or complicated depending on its current role. N/A
    Rehost Some value comes with rehosting, but generally components stay the same (VM here vs. a VM there). Minimal effort required, especially with automated tools. The effort will depend on the environment being migrated. Relatively cheap compared to other options. Rehosting infrastructure is the simplest cloud migration path and is useful for anyone in a hurry. Rehosting is the simplest cloud migration path for most workloads, but it does require basic familiarity with cloud IaaS.

    Replatform

    Replatformed workloads can take advantage of cloud-native services (SQL vs. SQLaaS). Replatforming is more effortful than rehosting, but less effortful than refactoring. Moderate cost – does not require fundamental rearchitecture, just some tweaking. Relatively more complicated than a simple rehost, but less demanding than a refactor. Platform and workload expertise is required; more substantial than a simple rehost.
    Refactor A fully formed, customized cloud-based workload that can take advantage of cloud-native architectures is generally quite valuable. Significant effort required based on the requirement to engage the full SDLC. Significant cost required to engage SDLC and rebuild the application/service. The most complicated and time-consuming. The most complicated and time-consuming.
    Repurchase Repurchasing is the quickest way to achieve cloud-native value. There are compromises, however (high cost, vendor-lock-in). Repurchasing is the quickest way to achieve cloud-native value. There are compromises, however (high cost, vendor-lock-in). Repurchasing is the quickest way to achieve cloud-native value. There are compromises, however (high cost, vendor-lock-in). Configuration – especially for massive projects – can be time consuming, but in general repurchasing can be quite fast. Buying software does require knowledge of requirements and integrations, but is otherwise quite simple.

    Where should you get your cloud skills?

    Cloud skills are certainly top of mind right now. With the great upheaval in both work patterns and in the labor market more generally, expertise in cloud-related areas is simultaneously more valuable and more difficult to procure. According to Pluralsight’s 2021 “State of Upskilling” report, 44% of respondents report themselves under-skilled in the cloud management area, making cloud management the most significant skill gap reported on the survey.

    Everyone left the office. Work as we know it is fundamentally altered for a generation or more. Cloud services shot up in popularity by enabling the transition. And yet there is a gap – a prominent gap – in skilling up for this critically important future. What is the cloud manager to do?

    Per the framework presented here, that manager has three essential options. They may take somewhat different forms depending on specific requirements and the quirks of the local market, but the options are:

    1. Train or hire internal resources: This might be easier said than done, especially for more niche skills, but makes sense for workloads that are critical to operations for the long term.
    2. Engage a managed service provider: MSPs are often engaged to manage services where internal IT lacks bandwidth or expertise.
    3. Hire a consultant: Consultants are great for time-bound implementation projects where highly specific expertise is required, such as a migration or implementation project.

    Each model makes sense to some degree. When evaluating individual workloads for cloud suitability, it is critical to consider the support model – both immediate and long term. What makes sense from a value perspective?

    Cloud decisions – summary

    A key component of the Info-Tech cloud vision model is that it is multi-layered. Not every decision must be made at every level. At the workload level, it makes sense to select service models that make sense, but each workload does not need its own defined vision. Workload-level decisions should be guided by an overall strategy but applied tactically, based on individual workload characteristics and circumstances.

    Conversely, some decisions will inevitably be applied at the environment level. With some exceptions, it is unlikely that cloud customers will build an entire private/hybrid cloud environment around a single solution; instead, they will define a broader strategy and fit individual workloads into that strategy.

    Some considerations exist at both the workload and environment levels. Risks and roadblocks, as well as the preferred support model, are concerns that exist at both the environment level and at the workload level.

    The image is a Venn diagram, with the left side titled Workload level, and the right side titled Environment Level. In the left section are: service model and migration path. On the right section are: Overall vision and Delivery model. In the centre section are: support model and Risks and roadblocks.

    Step 1.3

    Create a current state summary

    Activities

    1.3.1 Record your current state

    Understand the Cloud

    Generate goals and drivers

    Explore cloud characteristics

    Create a current state summary

    Select workloads for analysis

    This step involves the following participants: Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current state summary of cloud solutions

    1.3.1 Record your current state

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Knowledge of existing cloud workloads

    Output

    • Current state cloud summary for service, delivery, and support models

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Infrastructure team
    • Service owners
    1. On a whiteboard (real or virtual) draw a table with each of the cloud service models across the top. Leave a cell below each to list examples.
    2. Under each service model, record examples present in your environment. The purpose of the exercise is to illustrate the existence of cloud services in your environment or the lack thereof, so there is no need to be exhaustive. Complete this in turn for each service model until you are satisfied that you have created an effective picture of your current cloud SaaS state, IaaS state, etc.
    3. Input the results into their own slide titled “current state summary” in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation.
    4. Repeat for the cloud delivery models and support models and include the results of those exercises as well.
    5. Create a short summary statement (“We are primarily a public cloud consumer with a large SaaS footprint and minimal presence in PaaS and IaaS. We retain an MSP to manage our hosted telephony solution; otherwise, everything is handled in house.”

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Step 1.4

    Select workloads for current analysis

    Activities

    1.4.1 Select workloads for assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of workloads for assessment

    Understand the cloud

    Generate goals and drivers

    Explore cloud characteristics

    Create a current state summary

    Select workloads for analysis

    1.4.1 Select workloads for assessment

    30 minutes

    Input

    • Knowledge of existing cloud workloads

    Output

    • List of workloads to be assessed

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • IT management
    1. In many cases, the cloud project is inspired by a desire to move a particular workload or set of workloads. Solicit feedback from the core working group about what these workloads might be. Ask everyone in the meeting to suggest a workload and record each one on a sticky note or white board (virtual or physical).
    2. Discuss the results with the group and begin grouping similar workloads together. They will be subject to the assessments in the Cloud Vision Workbook, so try to avoid selecting too many workloads that will produce similar answers. It might not be obvious, but try to think about workloads that have similar usage patterns, risk levels, and performance requirements, and select a representative group.
    3. You should embrace counterintuition by selecting a workload that you think is unlikely to be a good fit for the cloud if you can and subjecting it to the assessment as well for validation purposes.
    4. When you have a list of 4-6 workloads, record them on tab 2 of the Cloud Vision Workbook.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Assess your cloud workloads

    Build the foundations of your cloud vision

    Phase 2

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Cloud Workloads

    Phase 1

    1.1 Generate goals and drivers

    1.2 Explore cloud characteristics

    1.3 Create a current state summary

    1.4 Select workloads for analysis

    Phase 2

    2.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2.2 Determine workload future states

    Phase 3

    3.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    3.2 Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    3.3 Define roadmap initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review and assign work items

    4.2 Finalize cloud decision framework

    4.3 Create cloud vision

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Conduct workload assessments
    • Determine workload future state

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Subject matter experts
    • Core working group
    • IT management

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Work from the bottom up and assess your workloads

    A workload-first approach will help you create a realistic vision.

    The concept of a cloud vision should unquestionably be informed by the nature of the workloads that IT is expected to provide for the wider organization. The overall cloud vision is no greater than the sum of its parts. You cannot migrate to the cloud in the abstract. Workloads need to go – and not all workloads are equally suitable for the transition.

    It is therefore imperative to understand which workloads are a good fit for the cloud, which cloud service models make the most sense, how to execute the migration, what support should look like, and what risks and roadblocks you are likely to encounter as part of the process.

    That’s where the Cloud Vision Workbook comes into play. You can use this tool to assess as many workloads as you’d like – most people get the idea after about four – and by the end of the exercise, you should have a pretty good idea about where your workloads belong, and you’ll have a tool to assess any net new or previously unconsidered workloads.

    It’s not so much about the results of the assessment – though these are undeniably important – but about the learnings gleaned from the collaborative assessment exercise. While you can certainly fill out the assessment without any additional input, this exercise is most effective when completed as part of a group.

    Introducing the Cloud Vision Workbook

    • The Cloud Vision Workbook is an Excel tool that answers the age old question: “What should I do with my workloads?”
    • It is divided into eight tabs, each of which offers unique value. Start by reading the introduction and inputting your list of workloads. Work your way through tabs 3-6, completing the suitability, migration, management, and risk and roadblock assessments, and review the results on tab 7.
    • If you choose to go through the full battery of assessments for each workload, expect to answer and weight 111 unique questions across the four assessments. This is an intensive exercise, so carefully consider which assessments are valuable to you, and what workloads you have time to assess.
    • Tab 8 hosts the milestone timeline and captures the results of the phase 3 risk and mitigation exercise.

    Understand Cloud Vision Workbook outputs

    The image shows a graphic with several graphs and lists on it, with sections highlighted with notes. At the top, there's the title Database with the note Workload title (populated from tab 2). Below that, there is a graph with the note Relative suitability of the five service models. The Risks and roadblocks section includes the note: The strategy components – the risks and roadblocks – are captured relative to one another to highlight key focus areas. To the left of that, there is a Notes section with the note Notes populated based on post-assessment discussion. At the bottom, there is a section titled Where should skills be procured?, with the note The radar diagram captures the recommended support model relative to the others (MSP, consultant, internal IT). To the right of that, there is a section titled Migration path, with the note that Ordered list of migration paths. Note: a disconnect here with the suggested service model may indicate an unrealistic goal state.

    Step 2.1

    Conduct workload assessments

    Activities

    2.1.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2.1.2 Interpret your results

    Phase Title

    Conduct workload assessments

    Determine workload future state

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • Workload subject matter experts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed workload assessments

    2.1.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2 hours per workload

    Input

    • List of workloads to be assessed

    Output

    • Completed cloud vision assessments

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Service owners/workload SMEs
    1. The Cloud Vision Workbook is your one stop shop for all things workload assessment. Open the tool to tab 2 and review the workloads you identified at the end of phase 1. Ensure that these are correct. Once satisfied, project the tool (virtually, if necessary) so that all participants can see the assessment questions.
    2. Work through tabs 3-6, answering the questions and assigning a multiplier for each one. A higher multiplier increases the relative weight of the question, giving it a greater impact on the overall outcome.
    3. Do your best to induce participants to offer opinions. Consensus is not absolutely necessary, but it is a good goal. Ask your participants if they agree with initial responses and occasionally take the opposite position (“I’m surprised you said agree – I would have thought we didn’t care about CapEx vs. OpEx”). Stimulate discussion.
    4. Highlight any questions that you will need to return to or run by someone not present. Include a placeholder answer, as the tool requires all cells to be filled for computation.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    2.1.2 Interpret your results

    10 minutes

    Input

    • Completed cloud vision assessments

    Output

    • Shared understanding of implications

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Service owners/workload SMEs
    1. Once you’ve completed all 111 questions for each workload, you can review your results on tab 7. On tab 7, you will see four populated graphics: cloud suitability, migration path, “where should skills be procured?”, and risks and roadblocks. These represent the components of the overall cloud vision that you will present to stakeholders.
    2. The “cloud suitability” chart captures the service model that the assessment judges to be most suitable for the workload. Ask those present if any are surprised by the output. If there is any disagreement, discuss the source of the surprise and what a more realistic outcome would be. Revisit the assessment if necessary.
    3. Conduct a similar exercise with each of the other outputs. Does it make sense to refactor the workload based on its cloud suitability? Does the fact that we scored so highly on the “consultant” support model indicate something about how we handle upskilling internally? Does the profile of risks and roadblocks identified here align with expectations? What should be ranked higher? What about lower?
    4. Once everyone is generally satisfied with the results, close the tool and take a break! You’ve earned it.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Understand the cloud strategy components

    Each cloud strategy will take a slightly different form, but all should contain echoes of each of these components. This process will help you define your vision and direction, but you will need to take steps to execute on that vision. The remainder of the cloud strategy, covered in the related blueprint Document Your Cloud Strategy comprises these fourteen topics divided across three categories: people, governance, and technology. The workload assessment covers these under risks and roadblocks and highlights areas that may require specific additional attention. When interpreting the results, think of these areas as comprising things that you will need to do to make your vision a reality.

    People

    • Skills and roles
    • Culture and adoption
    • Governing bodies

    Governance

    • Architecture
    • Integration and interoperability
    • Operations management
    • Cloud portfolio management
    • Cloud vendor management
    • Finance management
    • Security
    • Data controls

    Technology

    • Monitoring
    • Provisioning
    • Migration

    Strategy component: People

    People form the core of any good strategy. As part of your cloud vision, you will need to understand the implications a cloud transition will have on your staff and users, whether those users are internal or external.

    Component Description Challenges
    Skills and roles The move to the cloud will require staff to learn how to handle new technology and new operational processes. The cloud is a different way of procuring IT resources and may require the definition of new roles to handle things like cost management and provisioning. Staff may not have the necessary experience to migrate to a cloud environment or to effectively manage resources once the cloud transition is made. Cloud skills are difficult to hire for, and with the ever-changing nature of the platforms themselves, this shows no sign of abating. Redefining roles can also be politically challenging and should be done with due care and consideration.
    Culture and adoption If you build it, they will come…right? It is not always the case that a new service immediately attracts users. Ensuring that organizational culture aligns with the cloud vision is a critical success factor. Equally important is ensuring that cloud resources are used as intended. Those unfamiliar with cloud resources may be less willing to learn to use them. If alternatives exist (e.g. a legacy service that has not been shut down), or if those detractors are influential, this resistance may impede your cloud execution. Also, if the cloud transition involves significant effort or a fundamental rework (e.g. a DevOps transition) this role redefinition could cause some internal turmoil.
    Governing bodies A large-scale cloud deployment requires formal governance. Formal governance requires a governing body that is ultimately responsible for designing the said governance. This could take the form of a “center of excellence” or may rest with a single cloud architect in a smaller, less complicated environment. Governance is difficult. Defining responsibilities in a way that includes all relevant stakeholders without paralyzing the decision-making process is difficult. Implementing suggestions is a challenge. Navigating the changing nature of service provision (who can provision their own instances or assign licenses?) can be difficult as well. All these concerns must be addressed in a cloud strategy.

    Strategy component: Governance

    Without guardrails, the cloud deployment will grow organically. This has strengths (people tend to adopt solutions that they select and deploy themselves), but these are more than balanced out by the drawbacks that come with inconsistency, poor administration, duplication of services, suboptimal costing, and any number of other unique challenges. The solution is to develop and deploy governance. The following list captures some of the necessary governance-related components of a cloud strategy.

    Component Description Challenges
    Architecture Enterprise architecture is an important function in any environment with more than one interacting workload component (read: any environment). The cloud strategy should include an approach to defining and implementing a standard cloud architecture and should assign responsibility to an individual or group. Sometimes the cloud transition is inspired by the desire to rearchitect. The necessary skills and knowledge may not be readily available to design and transition to a microservices-based environment, for example, vs. a traditional monolithic application architecture. The appropriateness of a serverless environment may not be well understood, and it may be the case that architects are unfamiliar with cloud best practices and reference architectures.
    Integration and interoperability Many services are only highly functional when integrated with other services. What is a database without its front-end? What is an analytics platform without its data lake? For the cloud vision to be properly implemented, a strategy for handling integration and interoperability must be developed. It may be as simple as “all SaaS apps must be compatible with Okta” but it must be there. Migration to the cloud may require a fundamentally new approach to integration, moving away from a point-to-point integrations and towards an ESB or data lake. In many cases, this is easier said than done. Centralization of management may be appealing, but legacy applications – or those acquired informally in a one-off fashion – might not be so easy to integrate into a central management platform.
    Operations management Service management (ITIL processes) must be aligned with your overall cloud strategy. Migrating to the cloud (where applicable) will require refining these processes, including incident, problem, request, change, and configuration management, to make them more suitable for the cloud environment. Operations management doesn’t go away in the cloud, but it does change in line with the transition to shared responsibility. Responding to incidents may be more difficult on the cloud when troubleshooting is a vendor’s responsibility. Change management in a SaaS environment may be more receptive than staff are used to as cloud providers push changes out that cannot be rolled back.

    Strategy component: Governance (cont.)

    Component Description Challenges
    Cloud portfolio management This component refers to the act of managing the portfolio of cloud services that is available to IT and to business users. What requirements must a SaaS service meet to be onboarded into the environment? How do we account for exceptions to our IaaS policy? What about services that are only available from a certain provider? Rationalizing services offers administrative benefits, but may make some tasks more difficult for end users who have learned things a certain way or rely on niche toolsets. Managing access through a service catalog can also be challenging based on buy-in and ongoing administration. It is necessary to develop and implement policy.
    Cloud vendor management Who owns the vendor management function, and what do their duties entail? What contract language must be standard? What does due diligence look like? How should negotiations be conducted? What does a severing of the relationship look like? Cloud service models are generally different from traditional hosted software and even from each other (e.g. SaaS vs. PaaS). There is a bit of a learning curve when it comes to dealing with vendors. Also relevant: the skills that it takes to build and maintain a system are not necessarily the same as those required to coherently interact with a cloud vendor.
    Finance management Cloud services are, by definition, subject to a kind of granular, operational billing that many shops might not be used to. Someone will need to accurately project and allocate costs, while ensuring that services are monitored for cost abnormalities. Cloud cost challenges often relate to overall expense (“the cloud is more expensive than an alternative solution”), expense variability (“I don’t know what my budget needs to be this quarter”), and cost complexity (“I don’t understand what I’m paying for – what’s an Elastic Beanstalk?”).
    Security The cloud is not inherently more or less secure than a premises-based alternative, though the risk profile can be different. Applying appropriate security governance to ensure workloads are compliant with security requirements is an essential component of the strategy.

    Technical security architecture can be a challenge, as well as navigating the shared responsibility that comes with a cloud transition. There are also a plethora of cloud-specific security tools like cloud access security brokers (CASBs), cloud security posture management (CSPM) solutions, and even secure access services edge (SASE) technology.

    Data controls Data residency, classification, quality, and protection are important considerations for any cloud strategy. With cloud providers taking on outsized responsibility, understanding and governing data is essential. Cloud providers like to abstract away from the end user, and while some may be able to guarantee residency, others may not. Additionally, regulations may prevent some data from going to the cloud, and you may need to develop a new organizational backup strategy to account for the cloud.

    Strategy component: Technology

    Good technology will never replace good people and effective process, but it remains important in its own right. A migration that neglects the undeniable technical components of a solid cloud strategy is doomed to mediocrity at best and failure at worst. Understanding the technical implications of the cloud vision – particularly in terms of monitoring, provisioning, and migration – makes all the difference. You can interpret the results of the cloud workload assessments by reviewing the details presented here.

    Component Description Challenges
    Monitoring The cloud must be monitored in line with performance requirements. Staff must ensure that appropriate tools are in place to properly monitor cloud workloads and that they are capturing adequate and relevant data. Defining requirements for monitoring a potentially unfamiliar environment can be difficult, as can consolidating on a monitoring solution that both meets requirements and covers all relevant areas. There may be some upskilling and integration work required to ensure that monitoring works as required.
    Provisioning How will provisioning be done? Who will be responsible for ensuring the right people have access to the right resources? What tooling must be deployed to support provisioning goals? What technical steps must be taken to ensure that the provisioning is as seamless as possible? There is the inevitable challenge of assigning responsibility and accountability in a changing infrastructure and operations environment, especially if the changes are substantial (e.g. a fundamental operating model shift, reoriented around the cloud). Staff may also need to familiarize themselves with cloud-based provisioning tools like Ansible, Terraform, or even CloudFormation.
    Migration The act of migrating is important as well. In some cases, the migration is as simple as configuring the new environment and turning it up (e.g. with a net new SaaS service). In other cases, the migration itself can be a substantial undertaking, involving large amounts of data, a complicated replatforming/refactoring, and/or a significant configuration exercise.

    Not all migration journeys are created equal, and challenges include a general lack of understanding of the requirements of a migration, the techniques that might be necessary to migrate to a particular cloud (there are many) and the disruption/risk associated with moving large amounts of data. All of these challenges must be considered as part of the overall cloud strategy, whether in terms of architectural principles or skill acquisition (or both!).

    Step 2.2

    Determine workload future state

    Activities

    2.2.1 Determine workload future state

    Conduct workload assessments

    Determine workload future state

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT management
    • Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed workload assessments
    • Defined workload future state

    2.2.1 Determine workload future state

    1-3 hours

    Input

    • Completed workload assessments

    Output

    • Preliminary future state outputs

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook
    • Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Service owners
    • IT management
    1. After you’ve had a chance to validate your results, refer to tab 7 of the tool, where you will find a blank notes section.
    2. With the working group, capture your answers to each of the following questions:
      1. What service model is the most suitable for the workload? Why?
      2. How will we conduct the migration? Which of the six models makes the most sense? Do we have a backup plan if our primary plan doesn’t work out?
      3. What should the support model look like?
      4. What are some workload-specific risks and considerations that must be taken into account for the workload?
    3. Once you’ve got answers to each of these questions for each of the workloads, include your summary in the “notes” section of tab 7.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Paste the output into the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    • The Cloud Vision Workbook output is a compact, consumable summary of each workload’s planned future state. Paste each assessment in as necessary.
    • There is no absolutely correct way to present the information, but the output is a good place to start. Do note that, while the presentation is designed to lead with the vision statement, because the process is workload-first, the assessments are populated prior to the overall vision in a bottom-up manner.
    • Be sure to anticipate the questions you are likely to receive from any stakeholders. You may consider preparing for questions like: “What other workloads fit this profile?” “What do we expect the impact on the budget to be?” “How long will this take?” Keep these and other questions in mind as you progress through the vision definition process.

    The image shows the Cloud Vision Workbook output, which was described in an annotated version in an earlier section.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep your audience in mind. You may want to include some additional context in the presentation if the results are going to be presented to non-technical stakeholders or those who are not familiar with the terms or how to interpret the outputs.

    Identify and Mitigate Risks

    Build the foundations of your cloud vision

    PHASE 3

    Phase 3

    Identify and Mitigate Risks

    Phase 1

    1.1 Generate goals and drivers

    1.2 Explore cloud characteristics

    1.3 Create a current state summary

    1.4 Select workloads for analysis

    Phase 2

    2.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2.2 Determine workload future states

    Phase 3

    3.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    3.2 Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    3.3 Define roadmap initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review and assign work items

    4.2 Finalize cloud decision framework

    4.3 Create cloud vision

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Generate risks and roadblocks
    • Mitigate risks and roadblocks
    • Define roadmap initiatives

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • Workload subject matter experts

    You know what you want to do, but what do you have to do?

    What questions remain unanswered?

    There are workload-level risks and roadblocks, and there are environment-level risks. This phase is focused primarily on environment-level risks and roadblocks, or those that are likely to span multiple workloads (but this is not hard and fast rule – anything that you deem worth discussing is worth discussing). The framework here calls for an open forum where all stakeholders – technical and non-technical, pro-cloud and anti-cloud, management and individual contributor – have an opportunity to articulate their concerns, however specific or general, and receive feedback and possible mitigation.

    Start by soliciting feedback. You can do this over time or in a single session. Encourage anyone with an opinion to share it. Focus on those who are likely to have a perspective that will become relevant at some point during the creation of the cloud strategy and the execution of any migration. Explain the preliminary direction; highlight any major changes that you foresee. Remind participants that you are not looking for solutions (yet), but that you want to make sure you hear any and every concern as early as possible. You will get feedback and it will all be valuable.

    Before cutting your participants loose, remind them that, as with all business decisions, the cloud comes with trade-offs. Not everyone will have every wish fulfilled, and in some cases, significant effort may be needed to get around a roadblock, risks may need to be accepted, and workloads that looked like promising candidates for one service model or another may not be able to realize that potential. This is a normal and expected part of the cloud vision process.

    Once the risks and roadblocks conversation is complete, it is the core working group’s job to propose and validate mitigations. Not every risk can be completely resolved, but the cloud has been around for decades – chances are someone else has faced a similar challenge and made it through relatively unscathed. That work will inevitably result in initiatives for immediate execution. Those initiatives will form the core of the initiative roadmap that accompanies the completed Cloud Vision Executive Presentation.

    Step 3.1

    Generate risks and roadblocks

    Activities

    3.1.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    3.1.2 Generate mitigations

    Identify and mitigate risks

    Generate risks and roadblocks

    Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    Define roadmap initiatives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • IT management
    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Security
    • Architecture

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of risks and roadblocks

    Understand risks and roadblocks

    Risk

    • Something that could potentially go wrong.
    • You can respond to risks by mitigating them:
      • Eliminate: take action to prevent the risk from causing issues.
      • Reduce: take action to minimize the likelihood/severity of the risk.
      • Transfer: shift responsibility for the risk away from IT, towards another division of the company.
      • Accept: where the likelihood or severity is low, it may be prudent to accept that the risk could come to fruition.

    Roadblock

    • There are things that aren’t “risks” that we care about when migrating to the cloud.
    • We know, for example, that a complicated integration situation will create work items for any migration – this is not an “unknown.”
    • We respond to roadblocks by generating work items.

    3.1.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    1.5 hours

    Input

    • Completed cloud vision assessments

    Output

    • List of risks and roadblocks

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Service owners/workload SMEs
    • Anyone with concerns about the cloud
    1. Gather your core working group – and really anyone with an intelligent opinion on the cloud – into a single meeting space. Give the group 5-10 minutes to list anything they think could present a difficulty in transitioning workloads to the cloud. Write each risk/roadblock on its own sticky note. You will never be 100% exhaustive, but don’t let anything your users care about go unaddressed.
    2. Once everyone has had time to write down their risks and roadblocks, have everyone share one by one. Make sure you get them all. Overlap in risks and roadblocks is okay! Group similar concerns together to give a sort of heat map of what your participants are concerned about. (This is called “affinity diagramming.”)
    3. Assign names to these categories. Many of these categories will align with the strategy components discussed in the previous phase (governance, security, etc.) but some will be specific whether by nature or by degree.
    4. Sort each of the individual risks into its respective category, collapsing any exact duplicates, and leaving room for notes and mitigations (see the next slide for a visual).

    Understand risks and roadblocks

    The image is two columns--on the left, the column is titled Affinity Diagramming. Below the title, there are many colored blocks, randomly arranged. There is an arrow pointing right, to the same coloured blocks, now sorted by colour. In the right column--titled Categorization--each colour has been assigned a category, with subcategories.

    Step 3.2

    Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    Activities

    3.2.1 Generate mitigations

    Identify and mitigate risks

    Generate risks and roadblocks

    Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    Define roadmap initiatives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of mitigations

    Is the public cloud less secure?

    This is the key risk-related question that most cloud customers will have to answer at some point: does migrating to the cloud for some services increase their exposure and create a security problem?

    As with all good questions, the answer is “it depends.” But what does it depend on? Consider these cloud risks and potential mitigations:

    1. Misconfiguration: An error grants access to unauthorized parties (as happened to Capital One in 2019). This can be mitigated by careful configuration management and third-party tooling.
    2. Unauthorized access by cloud provider/partner employees: Though rare, it is possible that a cloud provider or partner can be a vector for a breach. Careful contract language, choosing to own your own encryption keys, and a hybrid approach (storing data on-premises) are some possible ways to address this problem.
    3. Unauthorized access to systems: Cloud services are designed to be accessed from anywhere and may be accessed by malicious actors. Possible mitigations include risk-based conditional access, careful identity access management, and logging and detection.

    “The cloud is definitely more secure in that you have much more control, you have much more security tooling, much more visibility, and much more automation. So it is more secure. The caveat is that there is more risk. It is easier to accidentally expose data in the cloud than it is on-premises, but, especially for security, the amount of tooling and visibility you get in cloud is much more than anything we’ve had in our careers on-premises, and that’s why I think cloud in general is more secure.” –Abdul Kittana, Founder, ASecureCloud

    Breach bests bank

    No cloud provider can protect against every misconfiguration

    Industry: Finance

    Source: The New York Times, CNET

    Background

    Capital One is a major Amazon Web Services customer and is even featured on Amazon’s site as a case study. That case study emphasizes the bank’s commitment to the cloud and highlights how central security and compliance were. From the CTO: “Before we moved a single workload, we engaged groups from across the company to build a risk framework for the cloud that met the same high bar for security and compliance that we meet in our on-premises environments. AWS worked with us every step of the way.”

    Complication

    The cloud migration was humming along until July 2019, when the bank suffered a serious breach at the hands of a hacker. That hacker was able to steal millions of credit card applications and hundreds of thousands of Social Security numbers, bank account numbers, and Canadian social insurance numbers.

    According to investigators and to AWS, the breach was caused by an open reverse proxy attack against a misconfigured web app firewall, not by an underlying vulnerability in the cloud infrastructure.

    Results

    Capital One reported that the breach was expected to cost it $150 million, and AWS fervently denied any blame. The US Senate got involved, as did national media, and Capital One’s CEO issued a public apology, writing, “I sincerely apologize for the understandable worry this incident must be causing those affected, and I am committed to making it right.”

    It was a bad few months for IT at Capital One.

    3.2.1 Generate mitigations

    3-4.5 hours

    Input

    • Completed cloud vision assessments

    Output

    • List of risks and roadblocks

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Core working group
    • Service owners/workload SMEs
    • Anyone with concerns about the cloud
    1. Recall the four mitigation strategies: eliminate, reduce, transfer, or accept. Keep these in mind as you work through the list of risks and roadblocks with the core working group. For every individual risk or roadblock raised in the initial generation session, suggest a specific mitigation. If the concern is “SaaS providers having access to confidential information,” a mitigation might be encryption, specific contract language, or proof of certifications (or all the above).
    2. Work through this for each of the risks and roadblocks, identifying the steps you need to take that would satisfy your requirements as you understand them.
    3. Once you have gone through the whole list – ideally with input from SMEs in particular areas like security, engineering, and compliance/legal – populate the Cloud Vision Workbook (tab 8) with the risks, roadblocks, and mitigations (sorted by category). Review tab 8 for an example of the output of this exercise.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Cloud Vision Workbook – mitigations

    The image shows a large chart titled Risks, roadblocks, and mitigations, which has been annotated with notes.

    Step 3.3

    Define roadmap initiatives

    Activities

    3.3.1 Generate roadmap initiatives

    Identify and mitigate risks

    Generate risks and roadblocks

    Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    Define roadmap initiatives

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined roadmap initiatives

    3.3.1 Generate roadmap initiatives

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of risk and roadblock mitigations

    Output

    • List of cloud initiatives

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Executing on your cloud vision will likely require you to undertake some key initiatives, many of which have already been identified as part of your mitigation exercise. On tab 8 of the Cloud Vision Workbook, review the mitigations you created in response to the risks and roadblocks identified. Initiatives should generally be assignable to a party and should have a defined scope/duration. For example, “assess all net new applications for cloud suitability” might not be counted as an initiative, but “design a cloud application assessment” would likely be.
    2. Design a timeline appropriate for your specific needs. Generally short-term (less than 3 months), medium-term (3-6 months), and long-term (greater than 6 months) will work, but this is entirely based on preference.
    3. Review and validate the parameters with the working group. Consider creating additional color-coding (highlighting certain tasks that might be dependent on a decision or have ongoing components).

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Bridge the gap and create the vision

    Build the foundations of your cloud vision

    Phase 4

    Phase 4

    Bridge the Gap and Create the Vision

    Phase 1

    1.1 Generate goals and drivers

    1.2 Explore cloud characteristics

    1.3 Create a current state summary

    1.4 Select workloads for analysis

    Phase 2

    2.1 Conduct workload assessments

    2.2 Determine workload future states

    Phase 3

    3.1 Generate risks and roadblocks

    3.2 Mitigate risks and roadblocks

    3.3 Define roadmap initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review and assign work items

    4.2 Finalize cloud decision framework

    4.3 Create cloud vision

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assign initiatives and propose timelines
    • Build a delivery model rubric
    • Build a service model rubric
    • Built a support model rubric
    • Create a cloud vision statement
    • Map cloud workloads
    • Complete the Cloud Vision presentation

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT management, the core working group, security, infrastructure, operations, architecture, engineering, applications, non-IT stakeholders

    Step 4.1

    Review and assign work items

    Activities

    4.1.1 Assign initiatives and propose timelines

    Bridge the gap and create the vision

    Review and assign work items

    Finalize cloud decision framework

    Create cloud vision

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • IT management

    Outcomes of this step

    • Populated cloud vision roadmap

    4.1.1 Assign initiatives and propose timelines

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of cloud initiatives

    Output

    • Initiatives assigned by responsibility and timeline

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Once the list is populated, begin assigning responsibility for execution. This is not a RACI exercise, so focus on the functional responsibility. Once you have determined who is responsible, assign a timeline and include any notes. This will form the basis of a more formal project plan.
    2. To assign the initiative to a party, consider 1) who will be responsible for execution and 2) if that responsibility will be shared. Be as specific as possible, but be sure to be consistent to make it easier for you to sort responsibility later on.
    3. When assigning timelines, we suggest including the end date (when you expect the project to be complete) rather than the start date, though whatever you choose, be sure to be consistent. Make use of the notes column to record anything that you think any other readers will need to be aware of in the future, or details that may not be possible to commit to memory.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Step 4.2

    Finalize cloud decision framework

    Activities

    4.2.1 Build a delivery model rubric

    4.2.2 Build a service model rubric

    4.2.3 Build a support model rubric

    Bridge the gap and create the vision

    Review and assign work items

    Finalize cloud decision framework

    Create cloud vision

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group

    Outcomes of this step

    • Cloud decision framework

    4.2.1 Build a delivery model rubric

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of cloud initiatives

    Output

    • Initiatives assigned by responsibility and timeline

    Materials

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Now that we have a good understanding of the cloud’s key characteristics, the relative suitability of different workloads for the cloud, and a good understanding of some of the risks and roadblocks that may need to be overcome if a cloud transition is to take place, it is time to formalize a delivery model rubric. Start by listing the delivery models on a white board vertically – public, private, hybrid, and multi-cloud. Include a community cloud option as well if that is feasible for you. Strike any models that do not figure into your vision.
    2. Create a table style rubric for each delivery model. Confer with the working group to determine what characteristics best define workloads suitable for each model. If you have a hybrid cloud option, you may consider workloads that are highly dynamic; a private cloud hosted on-premises may be more suitable for workloads that have extensive regulatory requirements.
    3. Once the table is complete, include it in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Vision for the cloud future state (example)

    Delivery model Decision criteria
    Public cloud
    • Public cloud is the primary destination for all workloads as the goal is to eliminate facilities and infrastructure management
    • Offers features, broad accessibility, and managed updates along with provider-managed facilities and hardware
    Legacy datacenter
    • Any workload that is not a good fit for the public cloud
    • Dependency (like a USB key for license validation)
    • Performance requirements (e.g. workloads highly sensitive to transaction thresholds)
    • Local infrastructure components (firewall, switches, NVR)

    Summary statement: Everything must go! Public cloud is a top priority. Anything that is not compatible (for whatever reason) with a public cloud deployment will be retained in a premises-based server closet (downgraded from a full datacenter). The private cloud does not align with the overall organizational vision, nor does a hybrid solution.

    4.2.2 Build a service model rubric

    1 hour

    Input

    • Output of workload assessments
    • Output of risk and mitigation exercise

    Output

    • Service model rubric

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. This next activity is like the delivery model activity, but covers the relevant cloud service models. On a whiteboard, make a vertical list of the cloud service models (SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, etc.) that will be considered for workloads. If you have an order of preference, place your most preferred at the top, your least preferred at the bottom.
    2. Describe the circumstances under which you would select each service model. Do your best to focus on differentiators. If a decision criterion appears for multiple service models, consider refining or excluding it. (For additional information, check out Info-Tech’s Reimagine IT Operations for a Cloud-First World blueprint.)
    3. Create a summary statement to capture your overall service model position. See the next slide for an example. Note: this can be incorporated into your cloud vision statement, so be sure that it reflects your genuine cloud preferences.
    4. Record the results in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Vision for the cloud future state (example)

    Service model Decision criteria
    SaaS

    SaaS first; opt for SaaS when:

    • A SaaS option exists that meets all key business requirements
    • There is a strong desire to have someone else (the vendor) manage infrastructure components/the platform
    • Not particularly sensitive to performance thresholds
    • The goal is to transition management of the workload outside of IT
    • SaaS is the only feasible way to consume the desired service
    PaaS
    • Highly customized service/workload – SaaS not feasible
    • Still preferable to offload as much management as possible to third parties
    • Customization required, but not at the platform level
    • The workload is built using a standard framework
    • We have the time/resources to replatform
    IaaS
    • Service needs to be lifted and shifted out of the datacenter quickly
    • Customization is required at the platform level/there is value in managing components
    • There is no need to manage facilities
    • Performance is not impacted by hosting the workload offsite
    • There is value in right-sizing the workload over time
    On-premises Anything that does not fit in the cloud for performance or other reasons (e.g. licensing key)

    Summary statement: SaaS will be the primary service model. All workloads will migrate to the public cloud where possible. Anything that cannot be migrated to SaaS will be migrated to PaaS. IaaS is a transitory step.

    4.2.3 Build a support model rubric

    1 hour

    Input

    • Results of the cloud workload assessments

    Output

    • Support model rubric

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. The final rubric covered here is that for the support model. Where will you procure the skills necessary to ensure the vision’s proper execution? Much like the other rubric activities, write the three support models vertically (in order of preference, if you have one) on a whiteboard.
    2. Next to each model, describe the circumstances under which you would select each support model. Focus on the dimensions: the duration of the engagement, specialization required, and flexibility required. If you have existing rules/practices around hiring consultants/MSPs, consider those as well.
    3. Once you have a good list of decision criteria, form a summary statement. This should encapsulate your position on support models and should mention any notable criteria that will contribute to most decisions.
    4. Record the results in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Vision for the cloud future state (example)

    Support model Decision criteria
    Internal IT

    The primary support model will be internal IT going forward

    • Chosen where the primary work required is administrative
    • Where existing staff can manage the service in the cloud easily and effectively
    • Where the chosen solution fits the SaaS service model
    Consultant
    • Where the work required is time-bound (e.g. a migration/refactoring exercise)
    • Where the skills do not exist in house, and where the skills cannot easily be procured (specific technical expertise required in areas of the cloud unfamiliar to staff)
    • Where opportunities for staff to learn from consultant SMEs are valuable
    • Where ongoing management and maintenance can be handled in house
    MSP
    • Where an ongoing relationship is valued
    • Where ongoing administration and maintenance are disproportionately burdensome on IT staff (or where this administration and maintenance is likely to be burdensome)
    • Where the managed services model has already been proven out
    • Where specific expertise in an area of technology is required but this does not rise to the need to hire an FTE (e.g. telephony)

    Summary statement: Most workloads will be managed in house. A consultant will be employed to facilitate the transition to micro-services in a cloud container environment, but this will be transitioned to in-house staff. An MSP will continue to manage backups and telephony.

    Step 4.3

    Create cloud vision

    Activities

    4.3.1 Create a cloud vision statement

    4.3.2 Map cloud workloads

    4.3.3 Complete the Cloud Vision Presentation

    Review and assign work items

    Finalize cloud decision framework

    Create cloud vision

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core working group
    • IT management

    Outcomes of this step

    Completed Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    4.3.1 Create a cloud vision statement

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of cloud initiatives

    Output

    • Initiatives assigned by responsibility and timeline

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Now that you know what service models are appropriate, it’s time to summarize your cloud vision in a succinct, consumable way. A good vision statement should have three components:
      • Scope: Which parts of the organization will the strategy impact?
      • Goal: What is the strategy intended to accomplish?
      • Key differentiator: What makes the new strategy special?
    2. On a whiteboard, make a chart with three columns (one column for each of the features of a good mission statement). Have the group generate a list of words to describe each of the categories. Ideally, the group will produce multiple answers for each category.
    3. Once you’ve gathered a few different responses for each category, have the team put their heads down and generate pithy mission statements that capture the sentiments underlying each category.
    4. Have participants read their vision statements in front of the group. Use the rest of the session to produce a final statement. Record the results in the Cloud Strategy Executive Presentation.

    Example vision statement outputs

    “IT at ACME Corp. hereby commits to providing clients and end users with an unparalleled, productivity-enabling technology experience, leveraging, insofar as it is possible and practical, cloud-based services.”

    “At ACME Corp. our employees and customers are our first priority. Using new, agile cloud services, IT is devoted to eliminating inefficiency, providing cutting-edge solutions for a fast-paced world, and making a positive difference in the lives of our colleagues and the people we serve.”

    As a global leader in technology, ACME Corp. is committed to taking full advantage of new cloud services, looking first to agile cloud options to optimize internal processes wherever efficiency gaps exist. Improved efficiency will allow associates to spend more time on ACME’s core mission: providing an unrivalled customer experience.”

    Scope

    Goal

    Key differentiator

    4.3.2 Map cloud workloads

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of workloads
    • List of acceptable service models
    • List of acceptable migration paths

    Output

    • Workloads mapped by service model/migration path

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Now that you have defined your overall cloud vision as well as your service model options, consider aligning your service model preferences with your migration path preferences. Draw a table with your expected migration strategies across the top (retain, retire, rehost, replatform, refactor, repurchase, or some of these) and your expected service models across the side.
    2. On individual sticky notes, write a list of workloads in your environment. In a smaller environment, this list can be exhaustive. Otherwise take advantage of the list you created as part of phase 1 along with any additional workloads that warrant discussion.
    3. As a group, go through the list, placing the sticky notes first in the appropriate row based on their characteristics and the decision criteria that have already been defined, and then in the appropriate column based on the appropriate migration path. (See the next slide for an example of what this looks like.)
    4. Record the results in the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation. Note: not every cell will be filled; some migration path/service model combinations are impossible or otherwise undesirable.

    Cloud Vision Executive Presentation

    Example cloud workload map

    Repurchase Replatform Rehost Retain
    SaaS

    Office suite

    AD

    PaaS SQL Database
    IaaS File Storage DR environment
    Other

    CCTV

    Door access

    4.3.3 Complete the Cloud Vision Presentation

    1 hour

    Input

    • List of cloud initiatives

    Output

    • Initiatives assigned by responsibility and timeline

    Materials

    • Cloud Vision Workbook

    Participants

    • Core working group
    1. Open the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation to the second slide and review the templated executive brief. This comprises several sections (see the next slide). Populate each one:
      • Summary of the exercise
      • The cloud vision statement
      • Key cloud drivers
      • Risks and roadblocks
      • Top initiatives and next steps
    2. Review the remainder of the presentation. Be sure to elaborate on any significant initiatives and changes (where applicable) and to delete any slides that you no longer require.

    Cloud Vision Workbook

    Sample cloud vision executive summary

    • From [date to date], a cross-functional group representing IT and its constituents met to discuss the cloud.
    • Over the course of the week, the group identified drivers for cloud computing and developed a shared vision, evaluated several workloads through an assessment framework, identified risks, roadblocks, and mitigations, and finally generated initiatives and next steps.
    • From the process, the group produced a summary and a cloud suitability assessment framework that can be applied at the level of the workload.

    Cloud Vision Statement

    [Organization] will leverage public cloud solutions and retire existing datacenter and colocation facilities. This transition will simplify infrastructure administration, support, and security, while modernizing legacy infrastructure and reducing the need for additional capital expenditure.

    Cloud Drivers Retire the datacenter Do more valuable work
    Right-size the environment Reduce CapEx
    Facilitate ease of mgmt. Work from anywhere
    Reduce capital expenditure Take advantage of elasticity
    Performance and availability Governance Risks and roadblocks
    Security Rationalization
    Cost Skills
    Migration Remaining premises resources
    BC, backup, and DR Control

    Initiatives and next steps

    • Close the datacenter and colocation site in favor of a SaaS-first cloud approach.
    • Some workloads will migrate to infrastructure-as-a-service in the short term with the assistance of third-party consultants.

    Document your cloud strategy

    You did it!

    Congratulations! If you’ve made it this far, you’ve successfully articulated a cloud vision, assessed workloads, developed an understanding (shared with your team and stakeholders) of cloud concepts, and mitigated risks and roadblocks that you may encounter along your cloud journey. From this exercise, you should understand your mission and vision, how your cloud plans will interact with any other relevant strategic plans, and what successful execution looks like, as well as developing a good understanding of overall guiding principles. These are several components of your overall strategy, but they do not comprise the strategy in its entirety.

    How do you fix this?

    First, validate the results of the vision exercise with your stakeholders. Socialize it and collect feedback. Make changes where you think changes should be made. This will become a key foundational piece. The next step is to formally document your cloud strategy. This is a separate project and is covered in the Info-Tech blueprint Document Your Cloud Strategy.

    The vision exercise tells you where you want to go and offers some clues as to how to get there. The formal strategy exercise is a formal documentation of the target state, but also captures in detail the steps you’ll need to take, the processes you’ll need to refine, and the people you’ll need to hire.

    A cloud strategy should comprise your organizational stance on how the cloud will change your approach to people and human resources, technology, and governance. Once you are confident that you can make and enforce decisions in these areas, you should consider moving on to Document Your Cloud Strategy. This blueprint, Define Your Cloud Vision, often serves as a prerequisite for the strategy documentation conversation(s).

    Appendix

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Additional Support

    Research Contributors

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Vendor Resources

    Bibliography

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now documented what you want from the cloud, what you mean when you say “cloud,” and some preliminary steps you can take to make your vision a reality.

    You now have at your disposal a framework for identifying and evaluating candidates for their cloud suitability, as well as a series of techniques for generating risks and mitigations associated with your cloud journey. The next step is to formalize your cloud strategy using the takeaways from this exercise. You’re well on your way to a completed cloud strategy!

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Generate drivers for cloud adoption

    Work with stakeholders to understand the expected benefits of the cloud migration and how these drivers will impact the overall vision.

    Conduct workload assessments

    Assess your individual cloud workloads for their suitability as candidates for the cloud migration.

    Bibliography

    “2021 State of the Cloud Report.” Flexera, 2021. Web.

    “2021 State of Upskilling Report.” Pluralsight, 2021. Web.

    “AWS Snowmobile.” Amazon Web Services, n.d. Web.

    “Azure products.” Microsoft, n.d. Web.

    “Azure Migrate Documentation.” Microsoft, n.d. Web.

    Bell, Harold. “Multi-Cloud vs. Hybrid Cloud: What’s the Difference?” Nutanix, 2019. Web.

    “Cloud Products.” Amazon Web Services, n.d. Web.

    “COBIT 2019 Framework: Introduction and Methodology.” ISACA, 2019. Web.

    Edmead, Mark T. “Using COBIT 2019 to Plan and Execute an Organization’s Transformation Strategy.” ISACA, 2020. Web.

    Flitter, Emily, and Karen Weise. “Capital One Data Breach Compromises Data of Over 100 Million.” The New York Times, 29 July 2019. Web.

    Gillis, Alexander S. “Cloud Security Posture Management (CSPM).” TechTarget, 2021. Web.

    “’How to Cloud’ with Capital One.” Amazon Web Services, n.d. Web.

    “IBM Closes Landmark Acquisition of Red Hat for $34 Billion; Defines Open, Hybrid Cloud Future.” Red Hat, 9 July 2019. Web.

    Mell, Peter, and Timothy Grance. “The NIST Definition of Cloud Computing.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, Sept. 2011. Web.

    Ng, Alfred. “Amazon Tells Senators it Isn't to Blame for Capital One Breach.” CNET, 2019. Web.

    Orban, Stephen. “6 Strategies for Migrating Applications to the Cloud.” Amazon Web Services, 2016. Web.

    Sullivan, Dan. “Cloud Access Security Broker (CASB).” TechTarget, 2021. Web.

    “What Is Secure Access Service Edge (SASE)?” Cisco, n.d. Web.

    Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}81|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $34,649 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • Digital investments often under deliver on expectations of return, and there is no cohesive approach to managing the flow of capital into digital.
    • The focus of the business has historically been to survive technological disruption rather than to thrive in it.
    • Strategy is based mostly on opinion rather than an objective analysis of the outcomes customers want from the organization.
    • Digital is considered a buzzword – nobody has a clear understanding of what it is and what it means in the organization’s context.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The purpose of going digital is getting one step closer to the customer. The mark of a digital organization lies in how they answer the question, “How does what we’re doing contribute to what the customer wants from us?”
    • The goal of digital strategy is digital enablement. An organization that is digitally enabled no longer needs a digital strategy, it’s just “the strategy.”

    Impact and Result

    • Focus strategy making on delivering the digital outcomes that customers want.
      • Leverage the talent, expertise, and perspectives within the organization to build a customer-centric digital strategy.
    • Design a balanced digital strategy that creates value across the five digital value pools:
      • Digital marketing, digital channels, digital products, digital supporting capabilities, and business model innovation.
    • Ask how disruption can be leveraged, or even become the disruptor.
      • Manage disruption through quick-win approaches and empowering staff to innovate.
    • Use a Digital Strategy-on-a-Page to spark the digital transformation.
      • Drive awareness and alignment on the digital vision and spark your organization’s imagination around digital.

    Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand how digital disruption is driving the need for transformation, and how Info-Tech’s methodology can help.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Scope the digital transformation

    Learn how to apply the Digital Value Pools thought model and scope strategy around them.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 1: Scope the Digital Transformation

    2. Design the digital future state vision

    Identify business imperatives, define digital outcomes, and define the strategy’s guiding principles.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 2: Design the Digital Future State Vision
    • Digital Strategy on a Page

    3. Define the digital roadmap

    Define, prioritize, and roadmap digital initiatives and plan contingencies.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 3: Define the Digital Roadmap

    4. Sustain digital transformation

    Create, polish, and socialize the Digital Strategy-on-a-Page.

    • Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page – Phase 4: Sustain Digital Transformation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Plan Your Digital Transformation on a Page

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope the Digital Transformation

    The Purpose

    Identify the need for and use of digital strategy and determine a realistic scope for the digital strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The digital strategy project is planned and scoped around a subset of the five digital value pools.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction to digital strategy.

    1.2 Establish motivation for digital.

    1.3 Discuss in-flight digital investments.

    1.4 Define the scope of digital.

    1.5 Identify stakeholders.

    1.6 Perform discovery interviews.

    1.7 Select two value pools to focus day 2, 3, and 4 activities.

    Outputs

    Business model canvas

    Stakeholder power map

    Discovery interview results

    Two value pools for focus throughout the workshop

    2 Design the Digital Future State Vision

    The Purpose

    Create guiding principles to help define future digital initiatives. Generate the target state with the help of strategic goals.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the basis for planning out the initiatives needed to achieve the target state from the current state.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify digital imperatives.

    2.2 Define key digital outcomes.

    2.3 Create a digital investment thesis.

    2.4 Define digital guiding principles.

    Outputs

    Corporate strategy analysis, PESTLE analysis, documented operational pain points (value streams)

    Customer needs assessment (journey maps)

    Digital investment thesis

    Digital guiding principles

    3 Define the Digital Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Understand the gap between the current and target state. Create transition options and assessment against qualitative and quantitative metrics to generate a list of initiatives the organization will pursue to reach the target state. Build a roadmap to plan out when each transition initiative will be implemented.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the initiatives the organization will use to achieve the target digital state. Create a roadmap to plan out the timing of each initiative and generate an easy-to-present document for digital strategy approval.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify initiatives to achieve digital outcomes.

    3.2 Align in-flight initiatives to digital initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize digital initiatives.

    3.4 Document architecturally significant requirements for high-priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Digital outcomes and KPIs

    Investment/value pool matrix

    Digital initiative prioritization

    Architecturally significant requirements for high-priority initiatives

    4 Define the Digital Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Plan your approach to socializing the digital strategy to help facilitate the cultural changes necessary for digital transformation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Plant the seed of digital and innovation to start making digital a part of the organization’s DNA.

    Activities

    4.1 Review and refine Digital Strategy on a Page.

    4.2 Assess company culture.

    4.3 Define high-level cultural changes needed for successful transformation.

    4.4 Define the role of the digital transformation team.

    4.5 Establish digital transformation team membership and desired outcomes.

    Outputs

    Digital Strategy on a Page

    Strategyzer Culture Map

    Digital transformation team charter

    Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}401|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $27,416 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 15 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • The volume of enterprise data is growing rapidly and comes from a wide variety of internal and external data sources (e.g. ERP, CRM). When data is located in different systems and applications, coupled with degradation and proliferation, this can lead to inaccurate, inconsistent, and redundant data being shared across departments within an organization.
    • Data kept in separate soiled sources can result in poor stakeholder decision making and inefficient business processes. Some common master data problems include:
      • The lack of a clean customer list results in poor customer service.
      • Hindering good analytics and business predictions, such as incorrect supply chain decisions when having duplicate product and vendor data between plants.
      • Creating cross-group consolidated reports from inconsistent local data that require too much manual effort and resources.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Everybody has master data (e.g. customer, product) but not master data problems (e.g. duplicate customers and products). MDM is complex in practice and requires investments in data governance, data architecture, and data strategy. Identifying business outcomes based on quality master data is essential before you pull the trigger on an MDM solution.

    Impact and Result

    This blueprint can help you:

    • Build a list of business-aligned data initiatives and capabilities that address master data problem and realize business strategic objectives.
    • Design a master data management practice based on the required business and data process.
    • Design a master data management platform based on MDM implementation style and prioritized technical capabilities.

    Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform Deck – A clear blueprint that provides a step-by-step approach to aid in the development of your MDM practice and platform.

    This blueprint will help you achieve a single view of your most important data assets by following our two-phase methodology:

  • Build a vision for MDM
  • Build an MDM practice and platform
    • Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform – Phases 1-2

    2. Master Data Management Readiness Assessment Tool – A tool to help you make the decision to stop the MDM project now or to continue the path to MDM.

    This tool will help you determine if your organization has a master data problem and if an MDM project should be undertaken.

    • Master Data Management Readiness Assessment Tool

    3. Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool – A tool to help you identify and document the various data sources in the organization and determine which data should be classified as master data.

    The tool will help you identify the sources of data within the business unit and use the typical properties of master data to determine which data should be classified as master data.

    • Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool

    4. Master Data Management Business Case Presentation Template – A template to communicate MDM basics, benefits, and approaches to obtain business buy-in for the MDM project.

    The template will help you communicate your organization's specific pains surrounding poor management of master data and identify and communicate the benefits of effective MDM. Communicate Info-Tech's approach for creating an effective MDM practice and platform.

    • Master Data Management Business Case Presentation Template

    5. Master Data Management Project Charter Template – A template to centralize the critical information regarding to objectives, staffing, timeline, and expected outcome of the project.

    The project charter will help you document the project sponsor of the project. Identify purpose, goals, and objectives. Identify the project risks. Build a cross-functional project team and assign responsibilities. Define project team expectations and meeting frequency. Develop a timeline for the project with key milestones. Identify metrics for tracking success. Receive approval for the project.

    • Master Data Management Project Charter Template

    6. Master Data Management Architecture Design Template – An architecture design template to effectively document the movement of data aligned with the business process across the organization.

    This template will assist you:

  • Document the current state and achieve a common understanding of the business process and movement of data across the company.
  • Identify the source of master data and what other systems will contribute to the MDM system.
  • Document the target architectural state of the organization.
    • Master Data Management Architecture Design Template

    7. Master Data Management Practice Pattern Template – Pre-built practice patterns to effectively define the key services and outputs that must be delivered by establishing core capabilities, accountabilities, roles, and governance for the practice.

    The master data management practice pattern describes the core capabilities, accountabilities, processes, essential roles, and the elements that provide oversight or governance of the practice, all of which are required to deliver on high value services and deliverables or output for the organization.

    • Master Data Management Practice Pattern Template

    8. Master Data Management Platform Template – A pre-built platform template to illustrate the organization’s data environment with MDM and the value MDM brings to the organization.

    This template will assist you:

  • Establish an understanding of where MDM fits in an organization’s overall data environment.
  • Determine the technical capabilities that is required based on organization’s data needs for your MDM implementation.
    • Master Data Management Platform Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop a Vision for the MDM Project

    The Purpose

    Identification of MDM and why it is important.

    Differentiate between reference data and master data.

    Discuss and understand the key challenges and pains felt by the business and IT with respect to master data, and identify the opportunities MDM can provide to the business.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of what is and is not master data.

    Understand the value of MDM and how it can help the organization better monetize its data.

    Knowledge of how master data can benefit both IT and the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Establish business context for master data management.

    1.2 Assess the value, benefits, challenges, and opportunities associated with MDM.

    1.3 Develop the vision, purpose, and scope of master data management for the business.

    1.4 Identify MDM enablers.

    1.5 Interview business stakeholders.

    Outputs

    High-level data requirements

    Identification of business priorities

    Project vision and scope

    2 Document the Current State

    The Purpose

    Recognize business drivers for MDM.

    Determine where master data lives and how this data moves within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Streamline business process, map the movement of data, and achieve a common understanding across the company.

    Identify the source of master data and what other systems will contribute to the MDM system.

    Activities

    2.1 Evaluate the risks and value of critical data.

    2.2 Map and understand the flow of data within the business.

    2.3 Identify master data sources and users.

    2.4 Document the current architectural state of the organization.

    Outputs

    Data flow diagram with identified master data sources and users

    Business data glossary

    Documented current data state.

    3 Document the Target State

    The Purpose

    Document the target data state of the organization surrounding MDM.

    Identify key initiatives and metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Recognition of four MDM implementation styles.

    Identification of key initiatives and success metrics.

    Activities

    3.1 Document the target architectural state of the organization.

    3.2 Develop alignment of initiatives to strategies.

    3.3 Consolidate master data management initiatives and strategies.

    3.4 Develop a project timeline and define key success measures.

    Outputs

    Documented target state surrounding MDM.

    Data and master data management alignment and strategies

    4 Develop an MDM Practice and Platform

    The Purpose

    Get a clear picture of what the organization wants to get out of MDM.

    Identify master data management capabilities, accountabilities, process, roles, and governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized master data management capabilities, accountabilities, process, roles, and governance.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify master data management capabilities, roles, process, and governance.

    4.2 Build a master data management practice and platform.

    Outputs

    Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    Further reading

    Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    Are you sure you have a master data problem?

    Analyst Perspective

    The most crucial and shared data assets inside the firm must serve as the foundation for the data maturing process. This is commonly linked to your master data (such as customers, products, employees, and locations). Every organization has master data, but not every organization has a master data problem.

    Don't waste time or resources before determining the source of your master data problem. Master data issues are rooted in the business practices of your organization (such as mergers and acquisitions and federated multi-geographic operations). To address this issue, you will require a master data management (MDM) solution and the necessary architecture, governance, and support from very senior champions to ensure the long-term success of your MDM initiative. Approaching MDM with a clear blueprint that provides a step-by-step approach will aid in the development of your MDM practice and platform.

    Ruyi Sun

    Ruyi Sun
    Research Specialist
    Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Rajesh Parab

    Rajesh Parab
    Research Director
    Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Your organization is experiencing data challenges, including:

    • Too much data volume, variety, and velocity, from more and more sources.
    • Duplicate and disorganized data across multiple systems and applications.
    • Master data is pervasive throughout the business and is often created and captured in highly disparate sources that often are not easily shared across business units and applications.

    MDM is useful in situations such as a business undergoing a merger or acquisition, where a unique set of master data needs to be created to act as a single source of truth. However, having a unified view of the definitions and systems of record for the most critical data in your organization can be difficult to achieve. An organization might experience some pain points:

    • Failure to identify master data problem and organization’s data needs.
    • Conflicting viewpoints and definitions of data assets across business units.
    • Recognize common business operating models or strategies with master data problems.
    • Identify the organization’s problem and needs out of its master data and align to strategic business needs.
    • Define the architecture, governance, and support.
    • Create a practice and platform for the organization’s MDM program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Everybody has master data (e.g. customer, product) but not a master data problem (e.g. duplicate customers and products). MDM is complex in practice and requires investments in data governance, data architecture, and data strategy. Identifying business outcomes based on quality master data is essential before you pull the trigger on an MDM solution.

    What is master data and master data management?

    • Master data domains include the most important data assets of an organization. For this data to be used across an enterprise in consistent and value-added ways, the data must be properly managed. Some common master data entities include customer, product, and employees.
    • Master data management (MDM) is the control over master data values to enable consistent, shared, contextual use across systems, of the most accurate, timely, and relevant version of truth about essential business entities (DAMA DMBOK).
    • The fundamental objective of MDM is to enable the business to see one view of critical data elements across the organization.
    • MDM systems will detect and declare relationships between data, resolve duplicate records, and make data available to the people, processes, and applications that need it. The end goal of an MDM implementation is to make sure your investment in MDM technology delivers the promised business results. By supplementing the technology with rules, guidelines, and standards around enterprise data you will ensure data continues to be synchronized across data sources on an ongoing basis.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Management Framework.

    Info-Tech’s Data Management Framework Adapted from DAMA-DMBOK and Advanced Knowledge Innovations Global Solutions. See Create a Data Management Roadmap blueprint for more information.

    Why manage master data?

    Master data drives practical insights that arise from key aspects of the business.

    Customer Intimacy

    Innovation Leadership

    Risk Management

    Operational Excellence

    Improve marketing and the customer experience by using the right data from the system of record to analyze complete customer views of transactions, sentiments, and interactions.

    Gain insights on your products, services, usage trends, industry directions, and competitor results, and use these data artifacts to support decisions on innovations, new products, services, and pricing.

    Maintain more transparent and accurate records and ensure that appropriate rules are followed to support audit, compliance, regulatory, and legal requirements. Monitor data usage to avoid fraud.

    Make sure the right solution is delivered rapidly and consistently to the right parties for the right price and cost structure. Automate processes by using the right data to drive process improvements.

    85% of customers expect consistent interactions across departments (Salesforce, 2022).

    Top-decile economic performers are 20% more likely to have a common source of data that serves as the single source of truth across the organization compared to their peers (McKinsey & Company, 2021).

    Only 6% of board members believe they are effective in managing risk (McKinsey & Company, 2018).

    32% of sales and marketing teams consider data inconsistency across platforms as their biggest challenge (Dun & Bradstreet, 2022).

    Your Challenge

    Modern organizations have unprecedented data challenges.

    • The volume of enterprise data is growing rapidly and comes from a wide variety of internal and external data sources (e.g. ERP, CRM). When data is located in different systems and applications, coupled with degradation and proliferation, this can lead to inaccurate, inconsistent, and redundant data being shared across departments within an organization.
    • For example, customer information may not be identical in the customer service system, shipping system, and marketing management platform because of manual errors or different name usage (e.g. GE or General Electric) when input by different business units.
    • Data kept in separate soiled sources can also result in poor stakeholder decision making and inefficient business processes. Some issues include:
      • The lack of clean customer list results in poor customer service.
      • Hindering good analytics and business predictions, such as incorrect supply chain decision when having duplicate product and vendor data between plants.
      • Creating cross-group consolidated reports from duplicate and inconsistent local data requires too much manual effort and resources.

    On average, 25 different data sources are used for generating customer insights and engagement.

    On average, 16 different technology applications are used to leverage customer data.

    Source: Deloitte Digital, 2020

    Common Obstacles

    Finding a single source of truth throughout the organization can be difficult.

    Changes in business process often come with challenges for CIOs and IT leaders. From an IT perspective, there are several common business operating models that can result in multiple sets of master data being created and held in various locations. Some examples could be:

    • Integrate systems following corporate mergers and acquisitions
    • Enterprise with multi-product line
    • Multinational company or multi-geographic operations with various ERP systems
    • Digital transformation projects such as omnichannel

    In such situations, implementing an MDM solution helps achieve harmonization and synchronization of master data and provide a single, reliable, and precise view of the organization. However, MDM is a complex system that requires more than just a technical solution. An organization might experience the following pain points:

    • Failure to identify master data problem and organization’s data needs.
    • Conflicting viewpoints and definitions of data assets that should reside in MDM across business units.

    Building a successful MDM initiative can be a large undertaking that takes some preparation before starting. Understanding the fundamental roles that data governance, data architecture, and data strategy play in MDM is essential before the implementation.

    “Only 3 in 10 of respondents are completely confident in their company's ability to deliver a consistent omnichannel experience.”

    Source: Dun & Bradstreet, 2022

    The image contains an Info-Tech Thought Model of the Develop a Master Data Management Practice & Platform.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Everybody has master data (e.g. customer, product) but not a master data problem (e.g. duplicate customers and products). MDM is complex in practice and requires investments in data governance, data architecture, and data strategy. Figuring out what the organization needs out of its master data is essential before you pull the trigger on an MDM solution.

    Phase 1 insight

    A master data management solution will assist you in solving master data challenges if your organization is large or complex, such as a multinational corporation or a company with multiple product lines, with frequent mergers and acquisitions, or adopting a digital transformation strategy such as omnichannel.

    Organizations often have trouble getting started because of the difficulty of agreeing on the definition of master data within the enterprise. Reference data is an easy place to find that common ground.

    While the organization may have data that fits into more than one master data domain, it does not necessarily need to be mastered. Determine what master data entities your organization needs.

    Although it is easy to get distracted by the technical aspects of the MDM project – such as extraction and consolidation rules – the true goal of MDM is to make sure that the consumers of master data (such as business units, sales) have access to consistent, relevant, and trusted shared data.

    Phase 2 insight

    An organization with activities such as mergers and acquisitions or multi-ERP systems poses a significant master data challenge. Prioritize your master data practice based on your organization’s ability to locate and maintain a single source of master data.

    Leverage modern capabilities such as artificial intelligence or machine learning to support large and complex MDM deployments.

    Blueprint Overview

    1. Build a Vision for MDM

    2. Build an MDM Practice and Platform

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess Your Master Data Problem
    2. Identify Your Master Data Domains
    3. Create a Strategic Vision
    1. Document Your Organization’s Current Data State
    2. Document Your Organization’s Target Data State
    3. Formulate an Actionable MDM Practice and Platform

    Phase Participants

    CIO, CDO, or IT Executive

    Head of the Information Management Practice

    Business Domain Representatives

    Enterprise Architecture Domain Architects

    Information Management MDM Experts

    Data Stewards or Data Owners

    Phase Outcomes

    This step identifies the essential concepts around MDM, including its definitions, your readiness, and prioritized master data domains. This will ensure the MDM initiatives are aligned to business goals and objectives.

    To begin addressing the MDM project, you must understand your current and target data state in terms of data architecture and data governance surrounding your MDM strategy. With all these considerations in mind, design your organizational MDM practice and platform.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    1. MDM Readiness Assessment ToolThe image contains a screenshot of the MDM Readiness Assessment Tool. 2. Business Needs Assessment Tool The image contains a screenshot of the Business Needs Assessment Tool.
    3. Business Case Presentation Template The image contains a screenshot of the Business Case Presentation Template. 4. Project Charter Template The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.
    5. Architecture Design Template The image contains a screenshot of the Architecture Design Template.

    Key deliverable:

    6. MDM Practice Pattern Template

    7. MDM Platform Template

    Define the intentional relationships between the business and the master data through a well-thought-out master data platform and practice.

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate the intentional relationships between the business and the master data.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Refine the metrics for the overall Master Data Management Practice and Platform.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context and master data needs.

    In phase 2, we will help you document the current and target state of your organization and develop a practice and platform so that master data is well managed to deliver on those defined metrics.

    Sample Metrics

    Method of Calculation

    Master Data Sharing Availability and Utilization

    # of Business Lines That Use Master Data

    Master Data Sharing Volume

    # of Master Entities

    # of Key Elements, e.g. # of Customers With Many Addresses

    Master Data Quality and Compliance

    # of Duplicate Master Data Records

    Identified Sources That Contribute to Master Data Quality Issues

    # of Master Data Quality Issues Discovered or Resolved

    # of Non-Compliance Issues

    Master Data Standardization/Governance

    # of Definitions for Each Master Entity

    # of Roles (e.g. Data Stewards) Defined and Created

    Trust and Satisfaction

    Trust Indicator, e.g. Confidence Indicator of Golden Record

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Identify master data problem and assess your organizational readiness for MDM.

    Call #2: Define master data domains and priorities.

    Call #3: Determine business requirements for MDM.

    Call #4: Develop a strategic vision for the MDM project.

    Call #5: Map and understand the flow of data within the business.

    Call #6: Document current architectural state.

    Call #7: Discover the MDM implementation styles of MDM and document target architectural state.

    Call #8: Create MDM data practice and platform.

    Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Develop a Vision for the MDM Project

    Document the
    Current State

    Document the
    Target State

    Develop a MDM Practice and Platform

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    • Establish business context for master data management.
    • Assess the readiness, value, benefits, challenges, and opportunities associated with MDM.
    • Develop the vision, purpose, and scope of master data management for the business.
    • Identify master data management enablers.
    • Interview business stakeholders.
    • Evaluate the risks and value of critical data.
    • Map and understand the flow of data within the business.
    • Identify master data sources and users.
    • Document the current architectural state of the organization
    • Document the target data state of the organization.
    • Develop alignment of initiatives to strategies.
    • Consolidate master data management initiatives and strategies.
    • Develop a project timeline and define key success measures.
    • Identify master data management capabilities, roles, process, and governance.
    • Build a master data management practice and platform.
    • Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    • Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. High-level data requirements
    2. Identification of business priorities
    3. Project vision and scope
    1. Data flow diagram with identified master data sources and users
    2. Business data glossary
    3. Documented current data state
    1. Documented target state surrounding MDM
    2. Data and master data management alignment and strategies
    1. Master Data Management Practice and Platform
    1. Master Data Management Strategy for continued success

    Phase 1: Build a Vision for MDM

    Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    Step 1.1

    Assess Your Master Data Problem

    Objectives

    1. Build a solid foundation of knowledge surrounding MDM.

    2. Recognize MDM problems that the organization faces in the areas of mergers and acquisitions, omnichannel, multi-product line, and multi-ERP setups.

    This step involves the following participants:

    CIO, CDO, or IT Executive

    Head of Information Management

    Outcomes of this step

    An understanding of master data, MDM, and the prerequisites necessary to create an MDM program.

    Determine if there is a need for MDM in the organization.

    Understand your data – it’s not all transactional

    Info-Tech analyzes the value of data through the lenses of its four distinct classes: Master, Transactional, Operational, and Reference.

    Master

    Transactional

    Operational

    Reference

    • Addresses critical business entities that fall into four broad groupings: party (customers, suppliers); product (products, policies); location (physical spaces and segmentations); and financial (contracts, transactions).
    • This data is typically critical to the organization, less volatile, and more complex in nature; it contains many data elements and is used across systems.
    • Transactional data refers to data generated when dealing with external parties, such as clients and suppliers.
    • Transactional data may be needed on a per-use basis or through several activities.
    • The data can also be accessed in real-time if needed.
    • Operational data refers to data that is used to support internal business activities, processes, or workflows.
    • This data is generated during a one-time activity or multiple times through a data hub or orchestration layer.
    • Depending on the need for speed, there can be a real-time aspect to the situation.
    • Examples: scheduling service data or performance data.
    • Reference data refers to simple lists of data that are typically static and help categorize other data using code tables.
    • Examples: list of countries or states, postal codes, general ledger chart of accounts, currencies, or product code.

    Recognize the fundamental prerequisites for MDM before diving into more specific readiness requirements

    Organizational buy-in

    • Ensure there is someone actively invested and involved in the progress of the project. Having senior management support, especially in the form of an executive sponsor or champion, is necessary to approve MDM budgets and resourcing.
    • MDM changes business processes and practices that affect many departments, groups, and people – this type of change may be disruptive so sponsorship from the top ensures your project will keep moving forward even during difficulties.
    • Consider developing a cross-functional master data team involving stakeholders from management, IT, and the business units. This group can ensure that the MDM initiative is aligned with and supports larger organizational needs and everyone understands their role.

    Understanding the existing data environment

    • Knowing the state of an organization’s data architecture, and which data sources are linked to critical business processes, is essential before starting an MDM project.
    • Identify the areas of data pain within your organization and establish the root cause. Determine what impact this is having on the business.

    Before starting to look at technology solutions, make sure you have organizational buy-in and an understanding of the existing data environment. These two prerequisites are the foundation for MDM success.

    Master data management provides opportunities to use data for analytical and operational purposes with greater accuracy

    MDM can be approached in two ways: analytical and operational.

    Think of it in the context of your own organization:

    • How will MDM improve the ability for accurate data to be shared across business processes (Operational MDM)?
    • How will MDM improve the quality of reports for management reporting and executive decision making (Analytical MDM)?

    An investment in MDM will improve the opportunities for using the organization’s most valuable data assets, including opportunities like:

    • Data is more easily shared across the organization’s environment with greater accuracy and trust.
    • Multiple instances of the same data are consistent.
    • MDM enables the ability to find the right data more quickly.

    9.5% of revenue was at risk when bad experiences were offered to customers.

    Source: Qualtrics XM Institute, 2022

    Master data management drives better customer experience

    85% In a survey of nearly 17,000 consumers and business buyers, 85% of customers expect consistent interactions across departments.

    Source: Salesforce, 2022

    Yet, 60% of customer say it generally feels like sales, service, and marketing teams do not share information.

    Source: Salesforce, 2022

    What is a business without the customer? Positive customer service experience drives customer retention, satisfaction, and revenue growth, and ultimately, determines the success of the organization. Effective MDM can improve customer experiences by providing consistent interactions and the ability to meet customer expectations.

    61% of customers say they would switch to a competitor after just one bad customer service experience.

    Source: Zendesk, 2022

    Common business operating models or strategies with master data problems

    Mergers and acquisitions (M&A)

    M&A involves activities related to the consolidation of two companies. From IT’s perspective, whether the organization maintains different IT systems and applications in parallel or undergoes data integration process, it is common to have multiple instances of the same customer or product entity across different systems between companies, leading to incomplete, duplicate, and conflicting data sets. The organization may face challenges in both operational and analytical aspects. For many, the objective is to create a list of master data to have a single view of the organization.

    Multiple-instance ERP or multinational organizations

    Multiple-instance ERP solutions are commonly used by businesses that operate globally to accommodate each country’s needs or financial systems (Brightwork Research). With MDM, having a single source of truth could be a great advantage in certain business units to collaborate globally, such as sharing inventory coding systems to allow common identity and productive resource allocation and shared customer information for analytical purposes.

    Common business operating models or strategies with master data problems (cont.)

    Multiple product lines of business

    An example for firms that sells multiple product lines could be Nike’s multiple product lines including footwear, clothing, and equipment. Keeping track of many product lines is a constant challenge for organizations in terms of inventory management, vendor database, and a tracking system. The ability to track and maintain your product data accurately and consistently is crucial for a successful supply chain (whether in a warehouse, distribution center, or retail office), which leads to improved customer satisfaction and increased sales.

    Info-Tech Insight
    A master data management solution will assist you in solving master data challenges if your organization is large or complex such as a multinational corporation or a company with multiple product lines, frequent mergers and acquisitions, or adopting a digital transformation strategy such as omnichannel.

    Omni-channel

    In e-commerce and retail industry, omnichannel means a business strategy that offers seamless shopping experiences across all channels, such as in-store, mobile, and online (Oracle). This also means the company needs to provide consistent information on orders, inventory, pricing, and promotions to customers and keep the customer records up to date. The challenges of omnichannel include having to synchronize data across channels and systems such as ERP, CRM, and social media. MDM becomes a solution for the success of an omnichannel strategy that refers to the same source of truth across business functions and channels.

    Assess business model using Info-Tech’s MDM Readiness Assessment Tool

    30 Minutes

    • The MDM Readiness Assessment Tool will help you make the decision to stop the MDM project now or to continue on the path to MDM.
    • Not all organizations need MDM. Don’t waste precious IT time and resources if your organization does not have a master data problem.

    The image contains screenshots of the MDM Readiness Assessment Tool.

    Download the MDM Readiness Assessment Tool

    Input Output
    • List of key MDM decision points
    • MDM readiness
    Materials Participants
    • Master Data Management Readiness Assessment Tool
    • Head of Information Management
    • CIO, CDO, or IT Executive

    Step 1.2

    Identify the Master Data Domains

    Objectives

    Determine which data domain contains the most critical master data in the organization for an MDM strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    Business Domain Representatives

    Data Stewards or Data Owners

    Information Management Team

    Outcomes of this step

    Determine the ideal data domain target for the organization based on where the business is experiencing the largest pains related to master data and where it will see the most benefit from MDM.

    Reference data makes tackling master data easier

    Reference data serves as a great starting place for an MDM project.

    • Reference data is the simple lists of data that are typically static and help categorize other data using code tables. Examples include lists of countries or states, postal codes, general ledger charts of accounts, currencies, or product codes.
    • Loading information into the warehouse or an MDM hub usually requires reconciling reference data from multiple sources. By getting reference data in order first, MDM will be easier to implement.
    • Reference data also requires a relatively small investment with good returns so the value of the project can easily be demonstrated to stakeholders.
    • One example of how reference data makes master data easier to tackle is a master list of an organization’s customers that needs an attribute of an address. By maintaining a list of postal codes or cities as reference data, this is made much easier to manage than simply allowing free text.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations often have trouble getting started because of the difficulty of agreeing on the definition of master data within the enterprise. Reference data is an easy place to find that common ground.

    There are several key considerations when defining which data is master data in the organization

    A successful implementation of MDM depends on the careful selection of the data element to be mastered. As departments often have different interests, establishing a standard set of data elements can lead to a lot of discussion. When selecting what data should be considered master data, consider the following:

    • Complexity. As the number of elements in a set increases, the likelihood that the data is master data also increases.
    • Volatility. Master data tends to be less volatile. The more volatile data is, the more likely it is transactional data.
    • Risk. The more likely data may have a risk associated with it, the more likely it should be managed with MDM.
    • Value. The more valuable a data set is to the organization, the greater the chance it is master data.
    • Sharing. If the data set is used in multiple systems, it likely should be managed with an MDM system.

    Begin by documenting the existing data sources within the organization.

    Use Info-Tech’s Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool to determine master data sources.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While the organization may have data that fits into more than one master data domain, it does not necessarily need to be mastered. Determine what master data entities your organization needs.

    Master data also fall into these four areas

    More perspectives to consider and define which data is your master data.

    Internally Created Entities

    Externally Created Entities

    Large Non-Recurring Transactions

    Categories/Relationships/ Hierarchies/Aggregational Patterns

    • Business objects and concepts at the core of organizational activities that are created and maintained only by this organization.
    • Examples: customers, suppliers, products, projects
    • Business objects and concepts at the core of organizational activities that are created outside of this organization, but it keeps its own master list of these entities with additional attributions.
    • Examples: equipment, materials, industry classifications
    • Factual records reflecting the organization’s activities.
    • Examples: large purchases, large sales, measuring equipment data, student academic performance
    • Lateral and hierarchical relationships across master entities.
    • Organization-wide standards for data / information organization and aggregation.
    • Examples: classifications of equipment and materials, legal relationships across legal entities, sales regions or sub-regions

    Master data types can be divided into four main domains

    Parties

    • Data about individuals, organizations, and the roles they play in business relationships.
    • In the commercial world this means customer, employee, vendor, partner, and competitor data.

    Product

    • Can focus on organization's internal products or services or the entire industry, including competitor products and services.
    • May include information about part/ingredient usage, versions, patch fixes, pricing, and bundles.

    Financial

    • Data about business units, cost centers, profit centers, general ledger accounts, budgets, projections, and projects
    • Typically, ERP systems serve as the central hub for this.

    Locations

    • Often seen as the domain that encompasses other domains. Typically includes geopolitical data such as sales territories.
    • Provides ability to track and share reference information about different geographies and create hierarchical relationships based on information.

    Single Domain vs. Multi-Domain

    • By focusing on a single master data domain, organizations can start with smaller, more manageable steps, rather than trying to tackle everything at once.
    • MDM solutions can be domain-specific or be designed to support multiple domains.
    • Multi-domain MDM is a solution that manages multiple types of master data in one repository. By implementing multi-domain from the beginning, an organization is better able to support growth across all dimensions and business units.

    Use Info-Tech’s Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool to determine master data priorities

    2 hours

    Use the Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool to assist you in determining the master data domains present in your organization and the suggested domain(s) for your MDM solution.

    The image contains screenshots of the Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool.

    Download the MDM Business Needs Assessment Tool

    Input Output
    • Current data sources within the organization
    • Business requirements of master data
    • Prioritized list of master data domains
    • Project scope
    Materials Participants
    • Master Data Management Business Needs Assessment Tool
    • Data Stewards or Data Custodians
    • Information Management Team

    Step 1.3

    Create a Strategic Vision for Your MDM Program

    Objectives

    1. Understand the true goal of MDM – ensuring that the needs of the master data users in the organization are fulfilled.

    2. Create a plan to obtain organizational buy-in for the MDM initiative.

    3. Organize and officialize your project by documenting key metrics, responsibilities, and goals for MDM.

    This step involves the following participants:

    CEO, CDO, or CIO

    Business Domain Representatives

    Information Management Team

    Outcomes of this step

    Obtain business buy-in and direction for the MDM initiative.

    Create the critical foundation plans that will guide you in evaluating, planning, and implementing your immediate and long-term MDM goals.

    MDM is not just IT’s responsibility

    Make sure the whole organization is involved throughout the project.

    • Master data is created for the organization as a whole, so get business input to ensure IT decisions fit with corporate goals and objectives.
    • The ownership of master data is the responsibility of the business. IT is responsible for the MDM project’s technology, support, platforms, and infrastructure; however, the ownership of business rules and standards reside with the business.
    • MDM requires IT and the business to form a partnership. While IT is responsible for the technical component, the business will be key in identifying master data.
    • MDM belongs to the entire organization – not a specific department – and should be created with the needs of the whole organization in mind. As such, MDM needs to be aligned with company’s overall data strategy. Data strategy planning involves identifying and translating business objectives and capability goals into strategies for improving data usage by the business and enhancing the capabilities of MDM.

    Keep the priorities of the users of master data at the forefront of your MDM initiative.

    • To fully satisfy the needs of the users of master data, you have to know how the data is consumed. Information managers and architects must work with business teams to determine how organizational objectives are achieved by using master data.
    • Steps to understanding the users of master data and their needs:
    1. Identify and document the users of master data – some examples include business units such as marketing, sales, and innovation teams.
    2. Interview those identified to understand how their strategic goals can be enabled by MDM. Determine their needs and expectations.
    3. Determine how changes to the master data management strategy will bring about improvements to information sharing and increase the value of this critical asset.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although it is easy to get distracted by the technical aspects of the MDM project – such as extraction and consolidation rules – the true goal of MDM is to make sure that the consumers of master data (such as business units, sales reps) have access to consistent, relevant, and trusted shared data.

    Interview business stakeholders to understand how IT’s implementation of MDM will enable better business decisions

    1 hours

    Instructions

    1. Identify which members of the business you would like to interview to gather an understanding of their current data issues and desired data usage. (Recommendation: Gather a diverse set of individuals to help build a broader and more holistic knowledge of data consumption wants or requirements.)
    2. Prepare your interview questions.
    3. Interview the identified members of the business.
    4. Debrief and document results.

    Tactical Tips

    • Include members of your team to help heighten their knowledge of the business.
    • Identify a team member to operate as the formal scribe.
    • Keep the discussion as free flowing as possible; it will likely enable the business to share more. Don’t get defensive – one of the goals of the interviews is to open communication lines and identify opportunities for change, not create tension between IT and the business.
    Input Output
    • Current master data pain points and issues
    • Desired master data usage
    • Prioritized list of master data management enablers
    • Understanding of organizational strategic plan
    Materials Participants
    • Interview questions
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Information Management Team
    • Business Line Representatives

    Info-Tech Insight

    Prevent the interviews from being just a venue for the business to complain about data by opening the discussion of having them share current concerns and then focus the second half on what they would like to do with data and how they see master data assets supporting their strategic plans.

    Ensure buy-in for the MDM project by aligning the MDM vision and the drivers of the organization

    MDM exists to enable the success of the organization as a whole, not just as a technology venture. To be successful in the MDM initiative, IT must understand how MDM will help the critical aspects of the business. Likewise, the business must understand why it is important to them to ensure long-term support of the project.

    The image contains a screenshot example of the text above.

    “If an organization only wants to look at MDM as a tech project, it will likely be a failure. It takes a very strong business and IT partnership to make it happen.”

    – Julie Hunt, Software Industry Analyst, Hub Designs Magazine

    Use Info-Tech’s Master Data Management Business Case Presentation Template to help secure business buy-in

    1-2 hours

    The image contains screenshots of the Master Data Management Business Case Presentation Template.

    Objectives

    • This presentation should be used to help obtain momentum for the ongoing master data management initiative and continued IT- business collaboration.
    • Master data management and the state of processes around data can be a sensitive business topic. To overcome issues of resistance from the operational or strategic levels, create a well-crafted business case.
    Input Output
    • Business requirements
    • Goals of MDM
    • Pain points of inadequate MDM
    • Awareness built for MDM project
    • Target data domains
    • Project scope
    Materials Participants
    • Master Data Management Business Case Presentation Template
    • Data Stewards or Data Custodians
    • CEO, CDO, or CIO
    • Information Management Team

    Download the MDM Business Case Presentation Template

    Use Info-Tech’s project charter to support your team in organizing their master data management plans

    Use this master document to centralize the critical information regarding the objectives, staffing, timeline, budget, and expected outcome of the project.

    1. MDM Vision and Mission

    Overview

    Define the value proposition behind addressing master data strategies and developing the organization's master data management practice.

    Consider

    Why is this project critical for the business?

    Why should this project be done now, instead of delayed further down the road?

    2. Goals or Objectives

    Overview

    Your goals and objectives should be practical and measurable. Goals and objectives should be mapped back to the reasons for MDM that we identified in the Executive Brief.

    Example Objectives

    Align the organization’s IT and business capabilities in MDM to the requirements of the organization’s business processes and the data that supports it.

    3. Expected Outcomes

    Overview

    Master data management as a concept can change based on the organization and with definitions and expectations varying heavily for individuals. Ensure alignment at the outset of the project by outlining and attaining agreement on the expectations and expected outcomes (deliverables) of the project.

    Recommended Outcomes

    Outline of an action plan

    Documented data strategies

    4. Outline of Action Plan

    Overview

    Document the plans for your project in the associated sections of the project charter to align with the outcomes and deliverables associated with the project. Use the sample material in the charter and the “Develop Your Timeline for the MDM Project” section to support developing your project plans.

    Recommended Project Scope

    Align master data MDM plan with the business.

    Document current and future architectural state of MDM.

    Download the MDM Project Charter Template

    5. Identify the Resourcing Requirements

    Overview

    Create a project team that has representation of both IT and the business (this will help improve alignment and downstream implementation planning).

    Business Roles to Engage

    Data owners (for subject area data)

    Data stewards who are custodians of business data (related to subject areas evaluated)

    Data scientists or other power users who are heavy consumers of data

    IT Roles to Engage

    Data architect(s)

    Any data management professionals who are involved in modeling data, managing data assets, or supporting the systems in which the data resides.

    Database administrators or data warehousing architects with a deep knowledge of data operations.

    Individuals responsible for data governance.

    Phase 2: Build the MDM Practice and Platform

    Develop a Master Data Management Practice and Platform

    Step 2.1

    Document the Current Data State

    Objectives

    1. Understand roles that data strategy, data governance, and data architecture play in MDM.

    2. Document the organization’s current data state for MDM.

    This step involves the following participants:

    Data Stewards or Data Custodians

    Data or Enterprise Architect

    Information Management Team

    Outcomes of this step

    Document the organization’s current data state, understanding the business processes and movement of data across the company.

    Effective data governance will create the necessary roles and rules within the organization to support MDM

    • A major success factor for MDM falls under data governance. If you don’t establish data governance early on, be prepared to face major obstacles throughout your project. Governance includes data definitions, data standards, access rights, and quality rules and ensures that MDM continues to offer value.
    • Data governance involves an organizational committee or structure that defines the rules of how data is used and managed – rules around its quality, processes to remediate data errors, data sharing, managing data changes, and compliance with internal and external regulations.
    • What is required for governance of master data? Defined roles, including data stewards and data owners, that will be responsible for creating the definitions relevant to master data assets.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Data Governance Key to Data Enablement.

    For more information, see Info-Tech Research Group’s Establish Data Governance blueprint.

    Ensure MDM success by defining roles that represent the essential high-level aspects of MDM

    Regardless of the maturity of the organization or the type of MDM project being undertaken, all three representatives must be present and independent. Effective communication between them is also necessary.

    Technology Representative

    Governance Representative

    Business Representative

    Role ensures:

    • MDM technology requirements are defined.
    • MDM support is provided.
    • Infrastructure to support MDM is present.

    Role ensures:

    • MDM roles and responsibilities are clearly defined.
    • MDM standards are adhered to.

    Role ensures:

    • MDM business requirements are defined.
    • MDM business matching rules are defined.

    The following roles need to be created and maintained for effective MDM:

    Data Owners are accountable for:

    • Data created and consumed.
    • Ensuring adequate data risk management is in place.

    Data Stewards are responsible for:

    • The daily and routine care of all aspects of data systems.
    • Supporting the user community.
    • Collecting, collating, and evaluating issues and problems with data.
    • Managing standard business definitions and metadata for critical data elements.

    Another crucial aspect of implementing MDM governance is defining match rules for master data

    • Matching, merging, and linking data from multiple systems about the same item, person, group, etc. attempts to remove redundancy, improve data quality, and provide information that is more comprehensive.
    • Matching is performed by applying inference rules. Data cleansing tools and MDM applications often include matching engines used to match data.
      • Engines are dependent on clearly defined matching rules, including the acceptability of matches at different confidence levels.
    • Despite best efforts, match decisions sometimes prove to be incorrect. It is essential to maintain the history of matches so that matches can be undone when they are discovered to be incorrect.
    • Artificial intelligence (AI) for match and merge is also an option, where the AI engine can automatically identify duplicate master data records to create a golden record.

    Match-Merge Rules vs. Match-Link Rules

    Match-Merge Rules

    • Match records and merge the data from these records into a single, unified, reconciled, and comprehensive record. If rules apply across data sources, create a single unique and comprehensive record in each database.
    • Complex due to the need to identify so many possible circumstances, with different levels of confidence and trust placed on data values in different fields from different sources.
    • Challenges include the operational complexity of reconciling the data and the cost of reversing the operation if there is a false merge.

    Match-Link Rules

    • Identify and cross-reference records that appear to relate to a master record without updating the content of the cross-referenced record.
    • Easier to implement and much easier to reverse.
    • Simple operation; acts on the cross-reference table and not the individual fields of the merged master data record, even though it may be more difficult to present comprehensive information from multiple records.

    Data architecture will assist in producing an effective data integration model for the technology underlying MDM

    Data quality is directly impacted by architecture.

    • With an MDM architecture, access, replication, and flow of data are controlled, which increases data quality and consistency.
    • Without an MDM architecture, master data occurs in application silos. This can cause redundant and inconsistent data.

    Before designing the MDM architecture, consider:

    • How the business is going to use the master data.
    • Architectural style (this is often dependent on the existing IT architecture, but generally, organizations starting with MDM find a hub architecture easiest to work with).
    • Where master data is entered, updated, and stored.
    • Whether transactions should be processed as batch or real-time.
    • What systems will contribute to the MDM system.
    • Implementation style. This will help ensure the necessary applications have access to the master data.

    “Having an architectural oversight and reference model is a very important step before implementing the MDM solutions.”

    – Selwyn Samuel, Director of Enterprise Architecture

    Document the organization’s data architecture to generate an accurate picture of the current data state

    2-3 hours

    Populate the template with your current organization's data components and the business flow that forms the architecture.

    Think about the source of master data and what other systems will contribute to the MDM system.

    The image contains a screenshot of the MDM Architecture Design Template.

    Input Output
    • Business process streamline
    • Current data state
    Materials Participants
    • MDM Architecture Design Template ArchiMate file
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect

    Download the MDM Architecture Design Template ArchiMate file

    Step 2.2

    Document the Target Data State

    Objectives

    1. Understand four implementation styles for MDM deployments.

    2. Document target MDM implementation systems.

    This step involves the following participants:

    Data Stewards or Data Custodians

    Data or Enterprise Architect

    Information Management Team

    Outcomes of this step

    Document the organization’s target architectural state surrounding MDM, identifying the specific MDM implementation style.

    How the organization’s data flows through IT systems is a convenient way to define your MDM state

    Understanding the data sources present in the organization and how the business organizes and uses this data is critical to implementing a successful MDM strategy.

    Operational MDM

    • As you manage data in an operational MDM system, the data gets integrated back into the systems that were the source of the data in the first place. The “best records” are created from a combination of data elements from systems that create relevant data (e.g. billing system, call center, reservation system) and then the data is sent back to the systems to update it to the best record. This includes both batch and real-time processing data.

    Analytical MDM

    • Generates “best records” the same way that operational MDM does. However, the data doesn’t go back to the systems that generated the data but rather to a repository for analytics, decision management, or reporting system purposes.

    Discovery of master data is the same for both approaches, but the end use is very different.

    The approaches are often combined by technologically mature organizations, but analytical MDM is generally more expensive due to increased complexity.

    Central to an MDM program is the implementation of an architectural framework

    Info-Tech Research Group’s Reference MDM Architecture uses a top-down approach.

    A top-down approach shows the interdependent relationship between layers – one layer of functionality uses services provided by the layers below, and in turn, provides services to the layers above.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Architectural Framework.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s Reference MDM Architecture can meet the unique needs of different organizations

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech Research Group's Reference MDM Architecture.

    The MDM service layers that make up the hub are:

    • Virtual Registry. The virtual registry is used to create a virtual view of the master data (this layer is not necessary for every MDM implementation).
    • Interface Services. The interface services work directly with the transport method (e.g. Web Service, Pub/Sub, Batch/FTP).
    • Rules Management. The rules management layer manages business rules and match rules set by the organization.
    • Lifecycle Management. This layer is responsible for managing the master data lifecycle. This includes maintaining relationships across domains, modeling classification and hierarchies within the domains, helping with master data quality through profiling rules, deduplicating and merging data to create golden records, keeping authoring logs, etc.
    • Base Services. The base services are responsible for managing all data (master, history, metadata, and reference) in the MDM hub.
    • Security. Security is the base layer and is responsible for protecting all layers of the MDM hub.

    An important architectural decision concerns where master data should live

    All MDM architectures will contain a system of entry, a system of record, and in most cases, a system of reference. Collectively, these systems identify where master data is authored and updated and which databases will serve as the authoritative source of master data records.

    System of Entry (SOE)

    System of Record (SOR)

    System of Reference (SORf)

    Any system that creates master data. It is the point in the IT architecture where one or more types of master data are entered. For example, an enterprise resource planning (ERP) application is used as a system of entry for information about business entities like products (product master data) and suppliers (supplier master data).

    The system designated as the authoritative data source for enterprise data. The true system of record is the system responsible for authoring and updating master data and this is normally the SOE. An ideal MDM system would contain and manage a single, up-to-date copy of all master data. This database would provide timely and accurate business information to be used by the relevant applications. In these cases, one or more SOE applications (e.g. customer relationship management or CRM) will be declared the SOR for certain types of data. The SOR can be made up of multiple physical subsystems.

    A replica of master data that can be synchronized with the SOR(s). It is updated regularly to resolve discrepancies between data sets, but will not always be completely up to date. Changes in the SOR are typically batched and then transmitted to the SORf. When a SORf is implemented, it acts as the authoritative source of enterprise data, given that it is updated and managed relative to the SOR. The SORf can only be used as a read-only source for data consumers.

    Central to an MDM program is the implementation of an architectural framework

    These styles are complementary and see increasing functionality; however, organizations do not need to start with consolidation.

    Consolidation

    Registry

    Coexistence

    Transactional

    What It Means

    The MDM is a system of reference (application systems serve as the systems of record). Data is created and stored in the applications and sent (generally in batch mode) to a centralized MDM system.

    The MDM is a system of reference. Master data is created and stored in the

    application systems, but key master data identifiers are linked with the MDM system, which allows a view of master data records to be assembled.

    The MDM is a system of reference. Master data is created and stored in application systems; however, an authoritative record of master data is also created (through matching) and stored in the MDM system.

    The MDM is a genuine source of record. All master data records are centrally authored and materialized in the MDM system.

    Use Case

    This style is ideal for:

    • Organizations that want to have access to master data for reporting.
    • Organizations that do not need real-time access to master data.

    This style is ideal for:

    • A view of key master data identifiers.
    • Near real-time master data reference.
    • Organizations that need access to key master data for operational systems.
    • Organizations facing strict data replication regulations.

    This style is ideal for:

    • A complete view of each master data entity.
    • Deployment of workflows for collaborative authoring.
    • A central reference system for master data.

    This style is ideal for:

    • Organizations that want true master data management.
    • Organizations that need complete, accurate, and consistent master data at all times.
    • Transactional access to master data records.
    • Tight control over master data.

    Method of Use

    Analytical

    Operational

    Analytical, operational, or collaborative

    Analytical, operational, or collaborative

    Consolidation implementation style

    Master data is created and stored in application systems and then placed in a centralized MDM hub that can be used for reference and reporting.

    The image contains a screenshot of the architectural framework and MDM hub.

    Advantages

    • Prepares master data for enterprise data warehouse and reporting by matching/merging.
    • Can serve as a basis for coexistence or transactional MDM.

    Disadvantages

    • Does not provide real-time reference because updates are sent to the MDM system in batch mode.
    • New data requirements will need to be managed at the system of entry.

    Registry implementation style

    Master data is created and stored in applications. Key identifiers are then linked to the MDM system and used as reference for operational systems.

    The image contains a screenshot of the architectural framework with a focus on registry implementation style.

    Advantages

    • Quick to deploy.
    • Can get a complete view of key master data identifiers when needed.
    • Data is always current since it is accessed from the source systems.

    Disadvantages

    • Depends on clean data at the source system level.
    • Can be complex to manage.
    • Except for the identifiers persisting in the MDM system, all master data records remain in the applications, which means there is not a complete view of all master data records.

    Coexistence implementation style

    Master data is created and stored in existing systems and then synced with the MDM system to create an authoritative record of master data.

    The image contains a screenshot of the architectural framework with a focus on the coexistence implementation style.

    Advantages

    • Easier to deploy workflows for collaborative authoring.
    • Creates a complete view for each master data record.
    • Increased master data quality.
    • Allows for data harmonization across systems.
    • Provides organizations with a central reference system.

    Disadvantages

    • Master data is altered in both the MDM system and source systems. Data may not be up to date until synchronization takes place.
    • Higher deployment costs because all master data records must be harmonized.

    Transactional implementation style

    All master data records are materialized in the MDM system, which provides the organization with a single, complete source of master data at all times.

    The image contains a screenshot of the architectural framework with a focus on the transactional implementation style.

    Advantages

    • Functions as a system of record, providing complete, consistent, accurate, and up-to-date data.
    • Provides a single location for updating and managing master data.

    Disadvantages

    • The implementation of this style may require changes to existing systems and business processes.
    • This implementation style comes with increased cost and complexity.

    All organizations are different; identify the architecture and implementation needs of your organization

    Architecture is not static – it must be able to adapt to changing business needs.

    • The implementation style an organization chooses is dependent on organizational factors such as the purpose of MDM and method of use.
    • Some master data domains may require that you start with one implementation style and later graduate to another style while retaining the existing data model, metadata, and matching rules. Select a starting implementation style that will best suit the organization.
    • Organizations with multi-domain master data may have to use multiple implementation styles. For example, data domain X may require the use of a registry implementation, while domain Y requires a coexistence implementation.

    Document your target data state surrounding MDM

    2-3 hours

    Populate the template with your target organization’s data architecture.

    Highlight new capabilities and components that MDM introduced based on MDM implementation style.

    The image contains a screenshot of the MDM Architecture Design Template.

    Input Output
    • Business process streamline
    • MDM architectural framework
    • Target data state
    Materials Participants
    • MDM Architecture Design Template ArchiMate File
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect
    • Head of Data

    Step 2.3

    Develop MDM Practice and Platform

    Objectives

    1. Review Info-Tech’s practice pattern and design your master data management practice.

    2. Design your master data management platform.

    3. Consider next steps for the MDM project.

    This step involves the following participants:

    Data Stewards or Data Custodians

    Data or Enterprise Architect

    Information Management Team

    Outcomes of this step

    Define the key services and outputs that must be delivered by establishing core capabilities, accountabilities, roles, and governance for the practice and platform.

    What does a master data management practice pattern look like?

    The master data management practice pattern describes the core capabilities, accountabilities, processes, and essential roles and the elements that provide oversight or governance of the practice, all of which are required to deliver on high-value services and deliverables or output for the organization.

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate the intentional relationships between the business and the master data.

    Download the Master Data Management Practice Pattern Template ArchiMate File

    Master data management data practice setup

    • Define the practice lead’s accountabilities and responsibilities.
    • Assign the practice lead.
    • Design the practice, defining the details of the practice (including the core capabilities, accountabilities, processes, and essential roles; the elements that provide oversight or governance of the practice; and the practice’s services and deliverables or output for the organization).
    • Define services and accountabilities:
    1. Define deployment and engagement model
    2. Define practice governance and metrics
    3. Define processes and deliverables
    4. Summarize capabilities
    5. Use activity slide to assign the skills to the role

    General approach to setting up data practices

    Guidelines for designing and establishing your various data practices.

    Understand master data management practice pattern

    A master data management practice pattern includes key services and outputs that must be delivered by establishing core capabilities, accountabilities, roles, and governance for the practice.

    Assumption:

    The accountabilities and responsibilities for the master data management practice have been established and assigned to a practice lead.

    1. Download and review Master Data Management Practice Pattern (Level 1 – Master Data Management Practice Pattern).
    2. Review and update master data management processes for your organization.

    Download the Master Data Management Practice Pattern Template ArchiMate File

    Info-Tech Insight

    An organization with heavy merger and acquisition activity poses a significant master data challenge. Prioritize your master data practice based on your organization’s ability to locate and maintain a single source of master data.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Master Data Management Process.

    Initiate your one-time master data management practice setup

    1. Ensure data governance committees are established.
    2. Align master data management working group responsibilities with data governance committee.
    3. Download and review Master Data Management Practice Pattern Setup (Level 1 – Master Data Management Practice Setup).
    4. Start establishing your master data practice:
    5. 4.1 Define services and accountabilities

      4.2 Define processes and deliverables by stakeholder

      4.3 Design practice operating model

      4.4 Perform skills inventory and design roles

      4.5 Determine practice governance and metrics

      4.6 Summarize practice capabilities

    6. Define key master data management deliverable and processes.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Process Template MDM Conflict Resolution.

    Download and Update:

    Process Template: MDM Conflict Resolution

    MDM operating model

    The operating model is a visualization of how MDM commonly operates and the value it brings to the organization. It illustrates the master data flow, which works from left to right, from source system to consumption layer. Another important component of the model is the business data glossary, which is part of your data governance plan, to define terminology and master data’s key characteristics across business units.

    The image contains a screenshot of the MDM Operating Model.

    Choosing the appropriate technology capabilities

    An MDM platform should include certain core technical capabilities:

    • Master data hub: Functions as a system of reference, providing an authoritative source of data in read-only format to systems downstream.
    • Data modeling: Ability to model complex relationships between internal application sources and other parties.
    • Workflow management: Ability to support flexible and comprehensive workflow-based capabilities.
    • Relationship and hierarchies: Ability to determine relationships and identify hierarchies within the same domain or across different domains of master data.
    • Information quality: Ability to profile, cleanse, match, link, identify, and reconcile master data in different data sources to create and maintain the “golden record.”
    • Loading, integration, synchronization: Ability to load data quality tools and integrate so there is a bidirectional flow of data. Enable data migration and updates that prevent duplicates within the incoming data and data found in the hub.
    • Security: Ability to control access of MDM and the ability to report on activities. Ability to configure and manage different rules and visibilities.
    • Ease of use: Including different user interfaces for technical and business roles.
    • Scalability and high performance/high availability: Ability to expand or shrink depending on the business needs and maintain a high service level.

    Other requirements may include:

    • MDM solution that can handle multiple domains on a single set of technology and hardware.
    • Offers a broad set of data integration connectors out of the box.
    • Offers flexible deployments (on-premises, cloud, as-a-service).
    • Supports all architectural implementation styles: registry, consolidation, coexistence, and transactional.
    • Data governance tools: workflow and business process management (BPM) functionality to link data governance with operational MDM.
    • Uses AI to automate MDM processes.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s MDM platform

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's MDM Platform.

    Info-Tech Research Group’s MDM platform summarizes an organization’s data environment and the technical capabilities that should be taken into consideration for your organization's MDM implementation.

    Design your master data management platform

    2-3 hours

    Instructions

    Download the Master Data Management Platform Template.

    The platform is not static. Adapt the template to your own needs based on your target data state, required technical capabilities, and business use cases.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's MDM Platform.

    Input Output
    • Technology capabilities
    • Target data state
    • Master Data Management Platform
    Materials Participants
    • Master Data Management Platform Template
    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Head of Data

    Download the MDM Platform Template

    Next steps for the MDM project

    There are several deployment options for MDM platforms; pick the one best suited to the organization’s business needs:

    On-Premises Solutions

    Cloud Solutions

    Hybrid Solutions

    Embrace the technology

    MDM has traditionally been an on-premises initiative. On-premises solutions have typically had different instances for various divisions. On-premises solutions offer interoperability and consistency.

    Many IT teams of larger companies prefer an on-premises implementation. They want to purchase a perpetual MDM software license, install it on hardware systems, configure and test the MDM software, and maintain it on an ongoing basis.

    Cloud MDM solutions can be application-specific or platform-specific, which involves using a software platform or web-based portal interface to connect internal and external data. Cloud is seen as a more cost-effective MDM solution as it doesn’t require a large IT staff to configure the system and can be paid for through a monthly subscription. Because many organizations are averse to storing their master data outside of their firewalls, some cloud MDM solutions manage the data where it resides (either software as a service or on-premises), rather than maintaining it in the cloud.

    MDM system resides both on premises and in the cloud. As many organizations have some applications on premises and others in the cloud, having a hybrid MDM solution is a realistic option for many. MDM can be leveraged from either on-premises or in the cloud solutions, depending on the current needs of the organization.

    • Vendor-supplied MDM solutions often provide complete technical functionality in the package and various deployment options.
    • Consider leverage Info-Tech’s SoftwareReviews to accelerate and improve your software selection process.

    Capitalizing on trends in the MDM technology space would increase your competitive edge

    AI improves master data management.

    • With MDM technology improving every year, there are a greater number of options to choose from than ever before. AI is one of the hottest trends in MDM.
    • By using machine learning (ML) techniques, AI can automate many activities surrounding MDM to ease manual processes and improve accuracy, such as automating master data profiling, managing workflow, identifying duplication, and suggesting match and merge proposals.
    • Some other powerful applications include product categorization and hierarchical management. The product is assigned to the correct level of the category hierarchy based on the probability that a block of words in a product title or description belongs to product categories (Informatica, 2021).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Leverage modern capabilities such as AI and ML to support large and complex MDM deployments.

    The image contains a screenshot of the AI Activities in MDM.

    Informatica, 2021

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    • Data needs to be good, but truly spectacular data may go unnoticed. Provide the right level of data quality, with the appropriate effort, for the correct usage. This blueprint will help you determine what “the right level of data quality” means and create a plan to achieve that goal for the business.

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • Optimizing data architecture requires a plan, not just a data model.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    • Formulate a data strategy that stitches all of the pieces together to better position you to unlock the value in your data.

    Build Your Data Practice and Platform

    • The true value of data comes from defining intentional relationships between the business and the data through a well-thought-out data platform and practice.

    Establish Data Governance

    • Establish data trust and accountability with strong governance.

    Research Authors and Contributors

    Authors:

    Name

    Position

    Company

    Ruyi Sun

    Research Specialist, Data & Analytics

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Rajesh Parab

    Research Director, Data & Analytics

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Contributors:

    Name

    Position

    Company

    Selwyn Samuel

    Director of Enterprise Architecture

    Furniture manufacturer

    Julie Hunt

    Consultant and Author

    Hub Designs Magazine and Julie Hunt Consulting

    David Loshin

    President

    Knowledge Integrity Inc.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Principal Advisory Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Irina Sedenko

    Advisory Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Anu Ganesh

    Principal Research Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Wayne Cain

    Principal Advisory Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Reddy Doddipalli

    Senior Workshop Director

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Imad Jawadi

    Senior Manager, Consulting

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy Neill

    Associate Vice President

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steve Wills

    Practice Lead

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    “DAMA Guide to the Data Management Body of Knowledge (DAMA-DMBOK Guide).” First Edition. DAMA International. 2009. Digital. April 2014.
    “State of the Connected Customer, Fifth Edition.” Salesforce, 2022. Accessed Jan. 2023.
    “The new digital edge: Rethinking strategy for the postpandemic era.” McKinsey & Company, 26 May. 2021. Assessed Dec. 2022.
    “Value and resilience through better risk management.” Mckinsey & Company, 1 Oct. 2018. Assessed Dec. 2022.
    “Plotting a course through turbulent times (9TH ANNUAL B2B SALES & MARKETING DATA REPORT)” Dun & Bradstreet, 2022. Assessed Jan. 2023.
    ““How to Win on Customer Experience.”, Deloitte Digital, 2020. Assessed Dec. 2022.
    “CX Trends 2022.”, Zendesk, 2022. Assessed Jan. 2023
    .”Global consumer trends to watch out for in 2023.” Qualtrics XM Institute, 8 Nov. 2022. Assessed Dec. 2022
    “How to Understand Single Versus Multiple Software Instances.” Brightwork Research & Analysis, 24 Mar. 2021. Assessed Dec. 2022
    “What is omnichannel?” Oracle. Assessed Dec. 2022
    “How AI Improves Master Data Management (MDM).” Informatica, 30 May. 2021. Assessed Dec. 2022

    Data Quality

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}19|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}19|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Big data after pandemic
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,100
    • member rating average days saved: 8
    • Parent Category Name: Data and Business Intelligence
    • Parent Category Link: /data-and-business-intelligence
    Restore trust in your data by aligning your data management approach to the business strategy

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}384|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage Business Relationships
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-business-relationships

    With the exponential pace of technological change, an organization's success will depend largely on how well CIOs can evolve from technology evangelists to strategic business partners. This will require CIOs to effectively broker relationships to improve IT's effectiveness and create business value. A confidential journal can help you stay committed to fostering productive relationships while building trust to expand your sphere of influence.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Highly effective executives have in common the ability to successfully balance three things: time, personal capabilities, and relationships. Whether you are a new CIO or an experienced leader, the relentless demands on your time and unpredictable shifts in the organization’s strategy require a personal game plan to deliver business value. Rather than managing stakeholders one IT project at a time, you need an action plan that is tailored for unique work styles.

    Impact and Result

    A personal relationship journal will help you:

    • Understand the context in which key stakeholders operate.
    • Identify the best communication approach to engage with different workstyles.
    • Stay committed to fostering relationships through difficult periods.

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Effectively Manage CxO Relations Storyboard – A guide to creating a personal action plan to help effectively manage relationships across key stakeholders.

    Use this research to create a personal relationship journal in four steps:

    • Effectively Manage CxO Relations Storyboard

    2. Personal Relationship Management Journal Template – An exemplar to help you build your personal relationship journal.

    Use this exemplar to build a journal that is readily accessible, flexible, and easy to maintain.

    • Personal Relationship Management Journal Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

    Analyst Perspective

    "Technology does not run an enterprise, relationships do." – Patricia Fripp

    As technology becomes increasingly important, an organization's success depends on the evolution of the modern CIO from a technology evangelist to a strategic business leader. The modern CIO will need to leverage their expansive partnerships to demonstrate the value of technology to the business while safeguarding their time and effort on activities that support their strategic priorities. CIOs struggling to transition risk obsolescence with the emergence of new C-suite roles like the Digital Transformation Officer, Chief Digital Officer, Chief Data Officer, and so on.

    CIOs will need to flex new social skills to accommodate diverse styles of work and better predict dynamic situations. This means expanding beyond their comfort level to acquire new social skills. Having a clear understanding of one's own work style (preferences, natural tendencies, motivations, and blind spots) is critical to identify effective communication and engagement tactics.

    Building trust is an art. Striking a balance between fulfilling your own goals and supporting others will require a carefully curated approach to navigate the myriad of personalities and work styles. A personal relationship journal will help you stay committed through these peaks and troughs to foster productive partnerships and expand your sphere of influence over the long term.

    Photo of Joanne Lee
    Joanne Lee
    Principal, Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In today's unpredictable markets and rapid pace of technological disruptions, CIOs need to create business value by effectively brokering relationships to improve IT's performance. Challenges they face:

    • Operate in silos to run the IT factory.
    • Lack insights into their stakeholders and the context in which they operate.
    • Competing priorities and limited time to spend on fostering relationships.
    • Relationship management programs are narrowly focused on associated change management in IT project delivery.

    Common Obstacles

    Limited span of influence.

    Mistaking formal roles in organizations for influence.

    Understanding what key individuals want and, more importantly, what they don't want.

    Lack of situational awareness to adapt communication styles to individual preferences and context.

    Leveraging different work styles to create a tangible action plan.

    Perceiving relationships as "one and done."

    Info-Tech's Approach

    A personal relationship journal will help you stay committed to fostering productive relationships while building trust to expand your sphere of influence.

    • Identify your key stakeholders.
    • Understand the context in which they operate to define a profile of their mandate, priorities, commitments, and situation.
    • Choose the most effective engagement and communication strategies for different work styles.
    • Create an action plan to monitor and measure your progress.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Highly effective executives have in common the ability to balance three things: time, personal capabilities, and relationships. Whether you are a new CIO or an experienced leader, the relentless demand on your time and unpredictable shifts in the organization's strategy will require a personal game plan to deliver business value. This will require more than managing stakeholders one IT project at a time: It requires an action plan that fosters relationships over the long term.

    Key Concepts

    Stakeholder Management
    A common term used in project management to describe the successful delivery of any project, program, or activity that is associated with organizational change management. The goal of stakeholder management is intricately tied to the goals of the project or activity with a finite end. Not the focus of this advisory research.

    Relationship Management
    A broad term used to describe the relationship between two parties (individuals and/or stakeholder groups) that exists to create connection, inclusion, and influence. The goals are typically associated with the individual's personal objectives and the nature of the interaction is seen as ongoing and long-term.

    Continuum of Commitment
    Info-Tech's framework that illustrates the different levels of commitment in a relationship. It spans from active resistance to those who are committed to actively supporting your personal priorities and objectives. This can be used to baseline where you are today and where you want the relationship to be in the future.

    Work Style
    A reference to an individual's natural tendencies and expectations that manifest itself in their communication, motivations, and leadership skills. This is not a behavior assessment nor a commentary on different personalities but observable behaviors that can indicate different ways people communicate, interact, and lead.

    Glossary
    CDxO: Chief Digital Officer
    CDO: Chief Data Officer
    CxO: C-Suite Executives

    The C-suite is getting crowded, and CIOs need to foster relationships to remain relevant

    The span of influence and authority for CIOs is diminishing with the emergence of Chief Digital Officers and Chief Data Officers.

    63% of CDxOs report directly to the CEO ("Rise of the Chief Digital Officer," CIO.com)

    44% of organizations with a dedicated CDxO in place have a clear digital strategy versus 22% of those without a CDxO (KPMG/Harvey Nash CIO Survey)

    The "good news": CIOs tend to have a longer tenure than CDxOs.

    A diagram that shows the average tenure of C-Suites in years.
    Source: "Age and Tenure of C-Suites," Korn Ferry

    The "bad news": The c-suite is getting overcrowded with other roles like Chief Data Officer.

    A diagram that shows the number of CDOs hired from 2017 to 2021.
    Source: "Chief Data Officer Study," PwC, 2022

    An image of 7 lies technology executives tell ourselves.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The digital evolution has created the emergence of new roles like the Chief Digital Officer and Chief Data Officer. They are a response to bridge the skill gap that exists between the business and technology. CIOs need to focus on building effective partnerships to better communicate the business value generated by technology or they risk becoming obsolete.

    Create a relationship journal to effectively manage your stakeholders

    A diagram of relationship journal

    Info-Tech's approach

    From managing relationships with friends to key business partners, your success will come from having the right game plan. Productive relationships are more than managing stakeholders to support IT initiatives. You need to effectively influence those who have the potential to champion or derail your strategic priorities. Understanding differences in work styles is fundamental to adapting your communication approach to various personalities and situations.

    A diagram that shows from 1.1 to 4.1

    A diagram of business archetypes

    Summary of Insights

    Insight 1: Expand your sphere of influence
    It's not just about gaining a volume of acquaintances. Figure out where you want to spend your limited time, energy, and effort to develop a network of professional allies who will support and help you achieve your strategic priorities.

    Insight 2: Know thyself first and foremost
    Healthy relationships start with understanding your own working style, preferences, and underlying motivations that drive your behavior and ultimately your expectations of others. A win/win scenario emerges when both parties' needs for inclusion, influence, and connection are met or mutually conceded.

    Insight 3: Walk a mile in their shoes
    If you want to build successful partnerships, you need to understand the context in which your stakeholder operates: their motivations, desires, priorities, commitments, and challenges. This will help you adapt as their needs shift and, moreover, leverage empathy to identify the best tactics for different working styles.

    Insight 4: Nurturing relationships is a daily commitment
    Building, fostering, and maintaining professional relationships requires a daily commitment to a plan to get through tough times, competing priorities, and conflicts to build trust, respect, and a shared sense of purpose.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Supplement your CIO journey with these related blueprints.

    Photo of First 100 Days as CIO

    First 100 Days as CIO

    Photo of Become a Strategic CIO

    Become a Strategic CIO

    Photo of Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Photo of Become a Transformational CIO

    Become a Transformational CIO

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Logo of Multicap Limited

    • Industry: Community Services
    • Source: Scott Lawry, Head of Digital

    Conversation From Down Under

    What are the hallmarks of a healthy relationship with your key stakeholders?
    "In my view, I work with partners like they are an extension of my team, as we rely on each other to achieve mutual success. Partnerships involve a deeper, more intimate relationship, where both parties are invested in the long-term success of the business."

    Why is it important to understand your stakeholder's situation?
    "It's crucial to remember that every IT project is a business project, and vice versa. As technology leaders, our role is to demystify technology by focusing on its business value. Empathy is a critical trait in this endeavor, as it allows us to see a stakeholder's situation from a business perspective, align better with the business vision and goals, and ultimately connect with people, rather than just technology."

    How do you stay committed during tough times?
    "I strive to leave emotions at the door and avoid taking a defensive stance. It's important to remain neutral and not personalize the issue. Instead, stay focused on the bigger picture and goals, and try to find a common purpose. To build credibility, it's also essential to fact-check assumptions regularly. By following these principles, I approach situations with a clear mind and better perspective, which ultimately helps achieve success."

    Photo of Scott Lawry, Head Of Digital at Multicap Limited

    Key Takeaways

    In a recent conversation with a business executive about the evolving role of CIOs, she expressed: "It's the worst time to be perceived as a technology evangelist and even worse to be perceived as an average CIO who can't communicate the business value of technology."

    This highlights the immense pressure many CIOs face when evolving beyond just managing the IT factory.

    The modern CIO is a business leader who can forge relationships and expand their influence to transform IT into a core driver of business value.

    Stakeholder Sentiment

    Identify key stakeholders and their perception of IT's effectiveness

    1.1 Identify Key Stakeholders

    A diagram of Identify Key Stakeholders

    Identify and prioritize your key stakeholders. Be diligent with stakeholder identification. Use a broad view to identify stakeholders who are known versus those who are "hidden." If stakeholders are missed, then so are opportunities to expand your sphere of influence.

    1.2 Understand Stakeholder's Perception of IT

    A diagram that shows Info-Tech's Diagnostic Reports and Hospital Authority XYZ

    Assess stakeholder sentiments from Info-Tech's diagnostic reports and/or your organization's satisfaction surveys to help identify individuals who may have the greatest influence to support or detract IT's performance and those who are passive observers that can become your greatest allies. Determine where best to focus your limited time amid competing priorities by focusing on the long-term goals that support the organization's vision.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understand which individuals can directly or indirectly influence your ability to achieve your priorities. Look inside and out, as you may find influencers beyond the obvious peers or executives in an organization. Influence can result from expansive connections, power of persuasion, and trust to get things done.

    Visit Info-Tech's Diagnostic Programs

    Activity: Identify and Prioritize Stakeholders

    30-60 minutes

    1.1 Identify Key Stakeholders

    Start with the key stakeholders that are known to you. Take a 360-degree view of both internal and external connections. Leverage external professional & network platforms (e.g. LinkedIn), alumni connections, professional associations, forums, and others that can help flush out hidden stakeholders.

    1.2 Prioritize Key Stakeholders

    Use stakeholder satisfaction surveys like Info-Tech's Business Vision diagnostic as a starting point to identify those who are your allies and those who have the potential to derail IT's success, your professional brand, and your strategic priorities. Review the results of the diagnostic reports to flush out those who are:

    • Resisters: Vocal about their dissatisfaction with IT's performance and actively sabotage or disrupt
    • Skeptics: Disengaged, passive observers
    • Ambassadors: Aligned but don't proactively support
    • Champions: Actively engaged and will proactively support your success

    Consider the following:

    • Influencers may not have formal authority within an organization but have relationships with your stakeholders.
    • Influencers may be hiding in many places, like the coach of your daughter's soccer team who rows with your CEO.
    • Prioritize, i.e. three degrees of separation due to potential diverse reach of influence.

    Key Output: Create a tab for your most critical stakeholders.

    A diagram that shows profile tabs

    Download the Personal Relationship Management Journal Template.

    Understand stakeholders' business

    Create a stakeholder profile to understand the context in which stakeholders operate.

    2.1 Create individual profile for each stakeholder

    A diagram that shows different stakeholder questions

    Collect and analyze key information to understand the context in which your stakeholders operate. Use the information to derive insights about their mandate, accountabilities, strategic goals, investment priorities, and performance metrics and challenges they may be facing.

    Stakeholder profiles can be used to help design the best approach for personal interactions with individuals as their business context changes.

    If you are short on time, use this checklist to gather information:

    • Stakeholder's business unit (BU) strategy goals
    • High-level organizational chart
    • BU operational model or capability map
    • Key performance metrics
    • Projects underway and planned
    • Financial budget (if available)
    • Milestone dates for key commitments and events
    • External platforms like LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter, Slack, Instagram, Meetup, blogs

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding what stakeholders want (and more importantly, what they don't) requires knowing their business and the personal and social circumstances underlying their priorities and behaviors.

    Activity: Create a stakeholder profile

    30-60 minutes

    2.1.0 Understand stakeholder's business context

    Create a profile for each of your priority stakeholders to document their business context. Review all the information collected to understand their mandate, core accountability, and business capabilities. The context in which individuals operate is a window into the motivations, pressures, and vested interests that will influence the intersectionality between their expectations and yours.

    2.1.1 Document Observable Challenges as Private Notes

    Crushing demands and competing priorities can lead to tension and stress as people jockey to safeguard their time. Identify some observable challenges to create greater situational awareness. Possible underlying factors:

    • Sudden shifts/changes in mandate
    • Performance (operations, projects)
    • Finance
    • Resource and talent gaps
    • Politics
    • Personal circumstances
    • Capability gaps/limitations
    • Capacity challenges

    A diagram that shows considerations of this activity.

    Analyze Stakeholder's Work Style

    Adapt communication styles to the situational context in which your stakeholders operate

    2.2 Determine the ideal approach for engaging each stakeholder

    Each stakeholder has a preferred modality of working which is further influenced by dynamic situations. Some prefer to meet frequently to collaborate on solutions while others prefer to analyze data in solitude before presenting information to substantiate recommendations. However, fostering trust requires:

    1. Understanding your preferred default when engaging others.
    2. Knowing where you need to expand your skills.
    3. Identifying which skills to activate for different professional scenarios.

    Adapting your communication style to create productive interactions will require a diverse arsenal of interpersonal skills that you can draw upon as situations shift. The ability to adapt your work style to dial any specific trait up or down will help to increase your powers of persuasion and influence.

    "There are only two ways to influence human behavior: you can manipulate it, or you can inspire it." – Simon Sinek

    Activity: Identify Engagement Strategies

    30 minutes

    2.2.0 Establish work styles

    Every individual has a preferred style of working. Determine work styles starting with self-awareness:

    • Express myself - How you communicate and interact with others
    • Expression by others - How you want others to communicate and interact with you

    Through observation and situational awareness, we can make inferences about people's work style.

    • Observations - Observable traits of other people's work style
    • Situations - Personal and professional circumstances that influence how we communicate and interact with one another

    Where appropriate and when opportunities arise, ask individuals directly about their preferred work styles and method for communication. What is their preferred method of communication? During a normal course of interaction vs. for urgent priorities?

    2.2.1 Brainstorm possible engagement strategies

    Consider the following when brainstorming engagement strategies for different work styles.

    A table of involvement, influence, and connection.

    Think engagement strategies in different professional scenarios:

    • Meetings - Where and how you connect
    • Communicating - How and what you communicate to create connection
    • Collaborating - What degree of involved in shared activities
    • Persuading - How you influence or direct others to get things done

    Expand New Interpersonal Skills

    Use the Business Archetypes to brainstorm possible approaches for engaging with different work styles. Additional communication and engagement tactics may need to be considered based on circumstances and changing situations.

    A diagram that shows business archetypes and engagement strategies.

    Communicate Effectively

    Productive communication is a dialogue that requires active listening, tailoring messages to fluid situations, and seeking feedback to adapt.

    A diagram of elements that contributes to better align intention and impact

    Be Relevant

    • Understand why you need to communicate
    • Determine what you need to convey
    • Tailor your message to what matters to the audience and their context
    • Identify the most appropriate medium based on the situation

    Be Consistent and Accurate

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say to avoid duplicity
    • Information should be accurate and complete
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news
    • Don't gossip

    Be Clear and Concise

    • Keep it simple and avoid excessive jargon
    • State asks upfront to set intention and transparency
    • Avoid ambiguity and focus on outcomes over details
    • Be brief and to the point or risk losing stakeholder's attention

    Be Attentive and Authentic

    • Stay engaged and listen actively
    • Be curious and inquire for clarification or explanation
    • Be flexible to adapt to both verbal and non-verbal cues
    • Be authentic in your approach to sharing yourself
    • Avoid "canned" approaches

    A diagram of listen, observe, reflect.


    "Good communication is the bridge between confusion and clarity."– Nat Turner (LinkedIn, 2020)

    Exemplar: Engaging With Jane

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Engaging With Jane

    Exemplar: Engaging With Ali

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Engaging With Ali

    Develop an Action Plan

    Moving from intent to action requires a plan to ensure you stay committed through the peaks and troughs.

    Create Your 120-Day Plan

    An action plan example

    Key elements of the action plan:

    • Strategic priorities – Your top focus
    • Objective – Your goals
    • 30-60-90-120 Day Topics – Key agenda items
    • Meeting Progress Notes – Key takeaways from meetings
    • Private Notes – Confidential observations

    Investing in relationships is a long-term process. You need to accumulate enough trust to trade or establish coalitions to expand your sphere of influence. Even the strongest of professional ties will have their bouts of discord. To remain committed to building the relationship during difficult periods, use an action plan that helps you stay grounded around:

    • Shared purpose
    • Removing emotion from the situation
    • Continuously learning from every interaction

    Photo of Angela Diop
    "Make intentional actions to set intentionality. Plans are good to keep you grounded and focused especially when relationship go through ups and down and there are changes: to new people and new relationships."
    – Angela Diop, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech & former VP of Information Services with Unity Health Care

    Activity: Design a Tailored Action Plan

    30-60 minutes

    3.1.0 Determine your personal expectations

    Establish your personal goals and expectations around what you are seeking from the relationship. Determine the strength of your current connection and identify where you want to move the relationship across the continuum of commitment.

    Use insights from your stakeholder's profile to explore their span of influence and degree of interest in supporting your strategic priorities.

    3.1.1 Determine what you want from the relationship

    Based on your personal goals, identify where you want to move the relationship across the continuum of commitment: What are you hoping to achieve from the relationship? How will this help create a win/win situation for both you and the key stakeholder?

    A diagram of Continuum of Commitment.

    3.1.2 Identify your metrics for progress

    Fostering relationships take time and commitment. Utilizing metrics or personal success criteria for each of your focus areas will help you stay on track and find opportunities to make each engagement valuable instead of being transactional.

    A graph that shows influence vs interest.

    Make your action plan impactful

    Level of Connection

    The strength of the relationship will help inform the level of time and effort needed to achieve your goals.

    • Is this a new or existing relationship?
    • How often do you connect with this individual?
    • Are the connections driven by a shared purpose or transactional as needs arise?

    Focus on Relational Value

    Cultivate your network and relationship with the goal of building emotional connection, understanding, and trust around your shared purpose and organization's vision through regular dialogue. Be mindful of transactional exchanges ("quid pro quo") to be strategic about its use. Treat every interaction as equally important regardless of agenda, duration, or channel of communication.

    Plan and Prepare

    Everyone's time is valuable, and you need to come prepared with a clear understanding of why you are engaging. Think about the intentionality of the conversation:

    • Gain buy-in
    • Create transparency
    • Specific ask
    • Build trust and respect
    • Provide information to clarify, clear, or contain a situation

    Non-Verbal Communication Matters

    Communication is built on both overt expressions and subtext. While verbal communication is the most recognizable form, non-lexical components of verbal communication (i.e. paralanguage) can alter stated vs. intended meaning. Engage with the following in mind:

    • Tone, pitch, speed, and hesitation
    • Facial expressions and gestures
    • Choice of channel for engagement

    Exemplar: Action Plan for VP, Digital

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Action Plan for VP, Digital

    Make Relationship Management a Daily Habit

    Management plans are living documents and need to be flexible to adapt to changes in stakeholder context.

    Monitor and Adjust to Communicate Strategically

    A diagram that shows Principles for Effective Communication and Key Measures

    Building trust takes time and commitment. Treat every conversation with your key stakeholders as an investment in building the social capital to expand your span of influence when and where you need it to go. This requires making relationship management a daily habit. Action plans need to be a living document that is your personal journal to document your observations, feelings, and actions. Such a plan enables you to make constant adjustments along the relationship journey.

    "Without involvement, there is no commitment. Mark it down, asterisk it, circle it, underline it."– Stephen Convey (LinkedIn, 2016)

    Capture some simple metrics

    If you can't measure your actions, you can't manage the relationship.

    An example of measures: what, why, how - metrics, and intended outcome.

    While a personal relationship journal is not a formal performance management tool, identifying some tangible measures will improve the likelihood of aligning your intent with outcomes. Good measures will help you focus your efforts, time, and resources appropriately.

    Keep the following in mind:

    1. WHAT are you trying to measure?
      Specific to the situation or scenario
    2. WHY is this important?
      Relevant to your personal goals
    3. HOW will you measure?
      Achievable and quantifiable
    4. WHAT will the results tell you?
      Intended outcome that is directional

    Summary of accomplishments

    Knowledge Gained

    • Relationship management is critical to a CIO's success
    • A personal relationship journal will help build:
      • Customized approach to engaging stakeholders
      • New communication skills to adapt to different work styles

    New Concepts

    • Work style assessment framework and engagement strategies
    • Effective communication strategies
    • Continuum of commitment to establish personal goals

    Approach to Creating a Personal Journal

    • Step-by-step approach to create a personal journal
    • Key elements for inclusion in a journal
    • Exemplar and recommendations

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Tech Trends and Priorities Research Centre

    Tech Trends and Priorities Research Centre

    Access Info-Tech's Tech Trend reports and research center to learn about current industry trends, shifts in markets, and disruptions that are impacting your industry and sector. This is a great starting place to gain insights into how the ecosystem is changing your business and the role of IT within it.

    Photo of Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Create a business relationship management (BRM) function in your program to foster a more effective partnership with the business and drive IT's value to the organization.

    Photo of Become a Transformational CIO

    Become a Transformational CIO

    Collaborate with the business to lead transformation and leave behind a legacy of growth.

    Appendix: Framework

    Content:

    • Adaptation of DiSC profile assessment
    • DiSC Profile Assessment
    • FIRO-B Framework
    • Experience Cube

    Info-Tech's Adaption of DiSC Assessment

    A diagram of business archetypes

    Info-Tech's Business Archetypes was created based on our analysis of the DiSC Profile and Myers-Briggs FIRO-B personality assessment tools that are focused on assessing interpersonal traits to better understand personalities.

    The adaptation is due in part to Info-Tech's focus on not designing a personality assessment tool as this is neither the intent nor the expertise of our services. Instead, the primary purpose of this adaptation is to create a simple framework for our members to base their observations of behavioral cues to identify appropriate communication styles to better interact with key stakeholders.

    Cautionary note:
    Business archetypes are personas and should not be used to label, make assumptions and/or any other biased judgements about individual personalities. Every individual has all elements and aspects of traits across various spectrums. This must always remain at the forefront when utilizing any type of personality assessments or frameworks.

    Click here to learn about DiSC Profile
    Click here learn about FIRO-B
    Click here learn about Experience Cube

    DiSC Profile Assessment

    A photo of DiSC Profile Assessment

    What is DiSC?

    DisC® is a personal assessment tool that was originally developed in 1928 by psychologist William Moulton Marston, who designed it to predict job performance. The tool has evolved and is now widely used by thousands of organizations around the world, from large government agencies and Fortune 500 companies to nonprofit and small businesses, to help improve teamwork, communication, and productivity in the workplace. The tool provides a common language people can use to better understand themselves and those they interact with - and use this knowledge to reduce conflict and improve working relationships.

    What does DiSC mean?

    DiSC is an acronym that stands for the four main personality profiles described in the Everything DiSC model: (D)ominance, (i)nfluence, (S)teadiness, (C)onscientiousness

    People with (D) personalities tend to be confident and emphasize accomplishing bottom-line results.
    People with (i) personalities tend to be more open and emphasize relationships and influencing or persuading others.
    People with (S) personalities tend to be dependable and emphasize cooperation and sincerity.
    People with (C) personalities tend to emphasize quality, accuracy, expertise, and competency.

    Go to this link to explore the DiSC styles

    FIRO-B® – Interpersonal Assessment

    A diagram of FIRO framework

    What is FIRO workplace relations?

    The Fundamental Interpersonal Relations Orientation Behavior (FIRO-B®) tool has been around for forty years. The tool assesses your interpersonal needs and the impact of your behavior in the workplace. The framework reveals how individuals can shape and adapt their individual behaviors, influence others effectively, and build trust among colleagues. It has been an excellent resource for coaching individuals and teams about the underlying drivers behind their interactions with others to effectively build successful working relationships.

    What does the FIRO framework measure?

    The FIRO framework addresses five key questions that revolve around three interpersonal needs. Fundamentally, the framework focuses on how you want to express yourself toward others and how you want others to behave toward you. This interaction will ultimately result in the universal needs for (a) inclusion, (b) control, and (c) affection. The insights from the results are intended to help individuals adjust their behavior in relationships to get what they need while also building trust with others. This will allow you to better predict and adapt to different situations in the workplace.

    How can FIRO influence individual and team performance in the workplace?

    FIRO helps people recognize where they may be giving out mixed messages and prompts them to adapt their exhibited behaviors to build trust in their relationships. It also reveals ways of improving relationships by showing individuals how they are seen by others, and how this external view may differ from how they see themselves. Using this lens empowers people to adjust their behavior, enabling them to effectively influence others to achieve high performance.

    In team settings, it is a rich source of information to explore motivations, underlying tensions, inconsistent behaviors, and the mixed messages that can lead to mistrust and derailment. It demonstrates how people may approach teamwork differently and explains the potential for inefficiencies and delays in delivery. Through the concept of behavioral flexibility, it helps defuse cultural stereotypes and streamline cross-cultural teams within organizations.

    Go to this link to explore FIRO-B for Business

    Experience Cube

    A diagram of experience cube model.

    What is an experience cube?

    The Experience Cube model was developed by Gervase Bushe, a professor of Leadership and Organization at the Simon Fraser University's school of Business and a thought leader in the field of organizational behavior. The experience cube is intended as a tool to plan and manage conversations to communicate more effectively in the moment. It does this by promoting self-awareness to better reduce anxiety and adapt to evolving and uncertain situations.

    How does the experience cube work?

    Using the four elements of the experience cube (Observations, Thoughts, Feelings, and Wants) helps you to separate your experience with the situation from your potential judgements about the situation. This approach removes blame and minimizes defensiveness, facilitating a positive discussion. The goal is to engage in a continuous internal feedback loop that allows you to walk through all four quadrants in the moment to help promote self-awareness. With heightened self-awareness, you may (1) remain curious and ask questions, (2) check-in for understanding and clarification, and (3) build consensus through agreement on shared purpose and next steps.

    Observations: Sensory data (information you take in through your senses), primarily what you see and hear. What a video camera would record.

    Thoughts: The meaning you add to your observations (i.e. the way you make sense of them, including your beliefs, expectations, assumptions, judgments, values, and principles). We call this the "story you make up."

    Feelings: Your emotional or physiological response to the thoughts and observations. Feelings words such as sad, mad, glad, scared, or a description of what is happening in your body.

    Wants: Clear description of the outcome you seek. Wants go deeper than a simple request for action. Once you clearly state what you want, there may be different ways to achieve it.

    Go to this link to explore more: Experience Cube

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Joanne Lee
    Joanne Lee
    Principal, Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joanne is a professional executive with over twenty-five years of experience in digital technology and management consulting spanning healthcare, government, municipal, and commercial sectors across Canada and globally. She has successfully led several large, complex digital and business transformation programs. A consummate strategist, her expertise spans digital and technology strategy, organizational redesign, large complex digital and business transformation, governance, process redesign, and PPM. Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Joanne was a Director with KPMG's CIO Advisory management consulting services and the Digital Health practice lead for Western Canada. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach to complex problems enabled by technology.

    Joanne holds a Master's degree in Business and Health Policy from the University of Toronto and a Bachelor of Science (Nursing) from the University of British Columbia.



    Photo of Gord Harrison
    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President, Research and Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Gord Harrison, SVP, Research and Consulting, has been with Info-Tech Research Group since 2002. In that time, Gord leveraged his experience as the company's CIO, VP Research Operations, and SVP Research to bring the consulting and research teams together under his current role, and to further develop Info-Tech's practical, tactical, and value-oriented research product to the benefit of both organizations.

    Prior to Info-Tech, Gord was an IT consultant for many years with a focus on business analysis, software development, technical architecture, and project management. His background of educational game software development, and later, insurance industry application development gave him a well-rounded foundation in many IT topics. Gord prides himself on bringing order out of chaos and his customer-first, early value agile philosophy keeps him focused on delivering exceptional experiences to our customers.



    Photo of Angela Diop
    Angela Diop
    Senior Director, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Angela has over twenty-five years of experience in healthcare, as both a healthcare provider and IT professional. She has spent over fifteen years leading technology departments and implementing, integrating, managing, and optimizing patient-facing and clinical information systems. She believes that a key to a healthcare organization's ability to optimize health information systems and infrastructure is to break the silos that exist in healthcare organizations.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech, Angela was the Vice President of Information Services with Unity Health Care. She has demonstrated leadership and success in this area by fostering environments where business and IT collaborate to create systems and governance that are critical to providing patient care and sustaining organizational health.

    Angela has a Bachelor of Science in Systems Engineering and Design from the University of Illinois and a Doctorate of Naturopathic Medicine from Bastyr University. She is a Certified CIO with the College of Healthcare Information Management Executives. She is a two-time Health Information Systems Society (HIMSS) Davies winner.



    Photo of Edison Barreto
    Edison Barreto
    Senior Director, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Edison is a dynamic technology leader with experience growing different enterprises and changing IT through creating fast-paced organizations with cultural, modernization, and digital transformation initiatives. He is well versed in creating IT and business cross-functional leadership teams to align business goals with IT modernization and revenue growth. Over twenty-five years of Gaming, Hospitality, Retail, and F&B experience has given him a unique perspective on guiding and coaching the creation of IT department roadmaps to focus on business needs and execute successful changes.

    Edison has broad business sector experience, including:
    Hospitality, Gaming, Sports and Entertainment, IT policy and oversight, IT modernization, Cloud first programs, R&D, PCI, GRDP, Regulatory oversight, Mergers acquisitions and divestitures.



    Photo of Mike Tweedie
    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michael Tweedie is the Practice Lead, CIO – IT Strategy at Info-Tech Research Group, specializing in creating and delivering client-driven, project-based, practical research, and advisory. He brings more than twenty-five years of experience in technology and IT services as well as success in large enterprise digital transformations.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech, Mike was responsible for technology at ADP Canada. In that role, Mike led several large transformation projects that covered core infrastructure, applications, and services and worked closely with and aligned vendors and partners. The results were seamless and transparent migrations to current services, like public cloud, and a completely revamped end-user landscape that allowed for and supported a fully remote workforce.

    Prior to ADP, Mike was the North American Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, with a focus on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management; he managed large, diverse global teams and had responsibilities for end-to-end P&L management.

    Mike holds a Bachelor's degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.



    Photo of Carlene McCubbin
    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Carlene McCubbin is a Research Lead for the CIO Advisory Practice at Info-Tech Research Group covering key topics in operating models & design, governance, and human capital development.

    During her tenure at Info-Tech, Carlene has led the development of Info-Tech's Organization and Leadership practice and worked with multiple clients to leverage the methodologies by creating custom programs to fit each organization's needs.

    Before joining Info-Tech, Carlene received her Master of Communications Management from McGill University, where she studied development of internal and external communications, government relations, and change management. Her education honed her abilities in rigorous research, data analysis, writing, and understanding the organization holistically, which has served her well in the business IT world.



    Photo of Anubhav Sharma
    Anubhav Sharma
    Research Director, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Anubhav is a digital strategy and execution professional with extensive experience in leading large-scale transformation mandates for organizations both in North America and globally, including defining digital strategies for leading banks and spearheading a large-scale transformation project for a global logistics pioneer across ten countries. Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, he held several industry and consulting positions in Fortune 500 companies driving their business and technology strategies. In 2023, he was recognized as a "Top 50 Digital Innovator in Banking" by industry peers.

    Anubhav holds an MBA in Strategy from HEC Paris, a Master's degree in Finance from IIT-Delhi, and a Bachelor's degree in Engineering.



    Photo of Kim Osborne-Rodriguez
    Kim Osborne-Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach to digital transformation, with a track record of supporting successful implementations.

    Kim holds a Bachelor's degree in Mechatronics Engineering from University of Waterloo.



    Photo of Amanda Mathieson
    Amanda Mathieson
    Research Director, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Amanda joined Info-Tech Research Group in 2019 and brings twenty years of expertise working in Canada, the US, and globally. Her expertise in leadership development, organizational change management, and performance and talent management comes from her experience in various industries spanning pharmaceutical, retail insurance, and financial services. She takes a practical, experiential approach to people and leadership development that is grounded in adult learning methodologies and leadership theory. She is passionate about identifying and developing potential talent, as well as ensuring the success of leaders as they transition into more senior roles.

    Amanda has a Bachelor of Commerce degree and Master of Arts in Organization and Leadership Development from Fielding Graduate University, as well as a post-graduate diploma in Adult Learning Methodologies from St. Francis Xavier University. She also has certifications in Emotional Intelligence – EQ-i 2.0 & 360, Prosci ADKAR® Change Management, and Myers-Briggs Type Indicator Step I and II.

    Bibliography

    Bacey, Christopher. "KPMG/Harvey Nash CIO Survey finds most organizations lack enterprise-wide digital strategy." Harvey Nash/KPMG CIO Survey. Accessed Jan. 6, 2023. KPMG News Perspective - KPMG.us.com

    Calvert, Wu-Pong Susanna. "The Importance of Rapport. Five tips for creating conversational reciprocity." Psychology Today Magazine. June 30, 2022. Accessed Feb. 10, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    Coaches Council. "14 Ways to Build More Meaningful Professional Relationships." Forbes Magazine. September 16, 2020. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. forbes.com/forbescoachescouncil

    Council members. "How to Build Authentic Business Relationships." Forbes Magazine. June 15, 2021. Accessed Jan. 15, 2023. Forbes.com/business council

    Deloitte. "Chief Information Officer (CIO) Labs. Transform and advance the role of the CIO." The CIO program. Accessed Feb. 5, 2021.

    Dharsarathy, Anusha et al. "The CIO challenge: Modern business needs a new kind of tech leader." McKinsey and Company. January 27, 2020. Accessed Feb 2023. Mckinsey.com

    DiSC profile. "What is DiSC?" DiSC Profile Website. Accessed Feb. 5, 2023. discprofile.com

    FIRO Assessment. "Better working relationships". Myers Brigg Website. Resource document downloaded Feb. 10, 2023. myersbriggs.com/article

    Fripp, Patricia. "Frippicisms." Website. Accessed Feb. 25, 2023. fripp.com

    Grossman, Rhys. "The Rise of the Chief Digital Officer." Russell Reynolds Insights, January 1, 2012. Accessed Jan. 5, 2023. Rise of the Chief Digital Officer - russellreynolds.com

    Kambil, Ajit. "Influencing stakeholders: Persuade, trade, or compel." Deloitte Article. August 9, 2017. Accessed Feb. 19, 2023. www2.deloitte.com/insights

    Kambil, Ajit. "Navigating the C-suite: Managing Stakeholder Relationships." Deloitte Article. March 8, 2017. Accessed Feb. 19, 2023. www2.deloitte.com/insights

    Korn Ferry. "Age and tenure in the C-suite." Kornferry.com. Accessed Jan. 6, 2023. Korn Ferry Study Reveals Trends by Title and Industry

    Kumthekar, Uday. "Communication Channels in Project". Linkedin.com, 3 March 2020. Accessed April 27, 2023. Linkedin.com/Pulse/Communication Channels

    McWilliams, Allison. "Why You Need Effective Relationships at Work." Psychology Today Magazine. May 5, 2022. Accessed Feb. 11, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    McKinsey & Company. "Why do most transformations fail? A conversation with Harry Robinson." Transformation Practice. July 2019. Accessed Jan. 10, 2023. Mckinsey.com

    Mind Tools Content Team. "Building Good Work Relationships." MindTools Article. Accessed Feb. 11, 2023. mindtools.com/building good work relationships

    Pratt, Mary. "Why the CIO-CFO relationship is key to digital success." TechTarget Magazine. November 11, 2021. Accessed Feb. 2023. Techtarget.com

    LaMountain, Dennis. "Quote of the Week: No Involvement, No Commitment". Linkedin.com, 3 April 2016. Accessed April 27, 2023. Linkedin.com/pulse/quote-week-involvement

    PwC Pulse Survey. "Managing Business Risks". PwC Library. 2022. Accessed Jan. 30, 2023. pwc.com/pulse-survey

    Rowell, Darin. "3 Traits of a Strong Professional Relationship." Harvard Business Review. August 8, 2019. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. hbr.org/2019/Traits of a strong professional relationship

    Sinek, Simon. "The Optimism Company from Simon Sinek." Website. Image Source. Accessed, Feb. 21, 2023. simonsinek.com

    Sinek, Simon. "There are only two ways to influence human behavior: you can manipulate it or you can inspire it." Twitter. Dec 9, 2022. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. twitter.com/simonsinek

    Whitbourne, Susan Krauss. "10 Ways to Measure the Health of Relationship." Psychology Today Magazine. Aug. 7, 2021. Accessed Jan. 30, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}1|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}1|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}1|upsells{/j2store}
    • Download01-Title: Asset Management Executive Brief
    • Download-01: Visit Link
    • member rating overall impact: 9.1/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,518
    • member rating average days saved: 19
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    Asset management has a clear impact on the financials of your company. Clear insights are essential to keep your spending at the right level.

    Asset Management

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}133|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data stewardship is a critical function in modern data governance. Every data-driven firm needs stewards who can tackle data issues and challenges rapidly. Data stewards help to reach agreement on data definition, quality, and usage. They direct efforts aimed at completing metadata, improving data quality, and ensuring regulatory compliance.
    • Stewards must also provide recommendations regarding data access, security, distribution, retention, archiving, and disposal.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • While the data steward role is crucial to establishing and sustaining effective governance of data, it is the role in the data governance operating structure that is often left ambiguous.
    • It is often perceived as requiring incremental IT skills and one with all new or unfamiliar functions.
    • In the ambition and haste to deliver on data governance, the various data governance role titles are communicated out to the wider organization, with data stewards especially left wondering: “Why am I being asked to be a data steward? What is expected of me? How will succeed in this role?”

    Impact and Result

    To establish effective and impactful data stewardship:

    • Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition.
    • Formally design and detail the data steward role, including functions, capabilities, etc.
    • Set up your data stewards for success: having a detailed role definition on paper is certainly not enough. Ensure you go the extra mile to deliver relevant training such as data stewardship onboarding, awareness program, etc.

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish Effective Data Stewardship Storyboard – Research that provides a step-by-step approach to aid in the successful establishment of data steward role.

    Use this deck to establish a solid data governance foundation in your organization. Start by defining the value of data stewardship and data governance and demystifying the role.

    • Establish Effective Data Stewardship – Phases 1-3

    2. Data Governance Role Accelerator Kit – A brief deck that defines the clear functions for different roles in data governance.

    This brief guide outlines how to adapt a data governance organizational structure for your organization and defines the roles of data owner, data steward, and data custodian.

    • Data Governance Roles Accelerator Kit
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Establish Effective Data Stewardship

    Leverage your organization's business subject matter experts to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Analyst perspective

    Leverage your organization's business subject matter experts to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Data stewards bring valuable expertise and knowledge about their business areas: priorities, business capabilities and processes, and challenges and opportunities with respect to data. Because this knowledge cannot be easily replicated, going outside your organization to hire a data steward is not the most effective route.

    While it may seem difficult, organizing internally to harvest the already existing institutional knowledge of your business subject matter experts (SMEs) will give a better – and faster – return when setting up and formalizing data stewardship.

    The role must be well defined and communicated. We cannot expect SMEs to wear a hat without understanding the expectations for their role. They must be set up for success – they must be empowered, recognized, and rewarded.

    Crystal Singh, Director, Research and Advisory, Data and Analytics Practice

    Crystal Singh
    Director, Research and Advisory, Data and Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 1: Data Stewardship Value Proposition

    • Define the value of data stewardship and data governance, their importance, and the relationship between them.
    • Determine where data stewards fit in the bigger data governance operating structure. The data steward role will not be effective without the other data governance roles.
    • Highlight the gains of effective data stewardship: e.g. data quality management, data definition, data sharing, and the ethical use and handling of data.

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 2: Data Steward Role Design

    • Who makes a good data steward? Important knowledge and skills include subject area expertise, institutional knowledge, collaborative skills, interpersonal, and political skills, an understanding of your organization's culture, and the ability to build good partnerships across business functions and with data management.
    • Seek out SMEs from within your organization. This may require you to mold and shape individuals to step up and into the role. An external hire will give capacity but will be more difficult (and time consuming) to ramp up.
    • Consult internally in your organization. For example, consult and liaise with Human Resources (HR) to determine if job descriptions need to be updated, if there would be any impact to compensation, etc.
    • Determine if this role needs to be a full-time role.
    • Demystify the role. Clarify that this is not an IT role and therefore will not require IT skills.
    • Leverage Info-Tech data governance patterns:
      • Data Stewardship in Action – Sample Data Quality Issue Resolution Process Template and Business Term and Data Definitions
      • Sample Data Steward (and Data Owner) to Data Domain Mapping

    Phase breakdown

    Phase 3: Strategies for Data Stewardship Success

    • Establish a solid data governance foundation in your organization.
    • Develop data stewardship onboarding: e.g. literacy and training, and frequently asked questions (FAQs).
    • Gain support from data owners, the director general (DG) committee, data leadership, and executive leaders/champions.
    • Set up rewards and recognition for the role.
    • Establish a feedback loop/mechanism for data stewards so the stewardship program can be adjusted accordingly.
    • Establish communication and create awareness of the role.

    Establishing effective data stewardship

    Leverage your organization's business SMEs to drive impactful data use and handling.

    Unlock the value of data through people.

    Data Steward Value Proposition
    Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition. What's in it for the person, their line of business or mandate, and your organization as a whole.

    Data Steward Role Design
    Formally design and define the role of a data steward, including the functions and capabilities.

    Strategies for Success
    Set up your data stewards for success. Having a detailed role definition on paper is not enough. Ensure that you go the extra mile to deliver the relevant training, such as data stewardship onboarding and an awareness program.

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    Data stewardship is a critical function in modern data governance. Every data-driven firm needs stewards who can rapidly tackle data issues and challenges. Data stewards help to reach agreement on data definition, quality, and usage. They direct efforts aimed at completing metadata, improving data quality, and ensuring regulatory compliance.
    Stewards must also provide recommendations regarding data access, security, distribution, retention, archiving, and disposal.
    While the data steward role is crucial to establishing and sustaining the effective governance of data, it is the role in the data governance operating structure that is often left unclear, ambiguous, and open to misinterpretation.
    It is often perceived as requiring incremental IT skills and one with all new or unfamiliar functions.
    In the ambition and haste to deliver on data governance, the various data governance role titles are communicated to the wider organization, often leaving data stewards wondering why they are being asked to be a data steward, what is expected of them, and how they will succeed in this role.
    Info-Tech's approach to establish effective and impactful data stewardship:
    • Clearly articulate the data stewardship value proposition.
    • Formally design and define the role of data steward, including the functions and capabilities.
    • Set up your data stewards for success. Having a detailed role definition on paper is not enough. Ensure that you go the extra mile to deliver the relevant training, such as data stewardship onboarding and an awareness program.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Effective data governance requires a solid foundation. Data stewards provide the foundation for data governance. The time and effort to define this role properly will yield sound data governance return.

    Phase 1: Data Stewardship Value Proposition

    What is the VALUE of a DATA STEWARD?

    Value of a Data Steward

    Improved Data Quality Management

    Clear and Consistent Data Definition

    Increased Data Sharing and Collaboration

    Ethical Handling of Data

    Define the strategic value of data in your organization

    Harness the value of data to power intelligent and transformative organizational performance.

    Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders.

    Respond to industry disruption.

    Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs.

    Manage operations and mitigate risk.

    Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across an organization.

    Data governance is:

    • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (CIO.com, 2021).
    • True business-IT collaboration that leads to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making

    If done correctly, data governance is not:

    • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done
    • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data

    Data governance is about putting guard rails in place to better support the use and handling of your organization's data.

    Is there a clear definition of data accountability and responsibility in your organization?

    2023-Q1 Research Agenda

    This 2023-Q1 research agenda slide deck provides you with a comprehensive overview of our most up-to-date published research. Each piece offers you valuable insights, allowing you to take effective decisions and informed actions. All TY|Info-tech research is backed by our team of expert analysts who share decades of IT and industry experience.

    Register to read more …

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}591|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $77,174 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Resource Planning
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-resource-planning
    • Enterprise application implementations are complex, and their success is critical to business operations.
    • Selecting the right software implementation partner is as important for the success of the ERP initiative as selecting the right software.
    • System implementation often thrusts the product into the spotlight, with the implementation partner being an afterthought, and all too often organizational needs are ignored altogether.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ERP implementation is not a one-and-done exercise. Most often it is the start of a multi-year working relationship between the software vendor or systems integrator and your organization. Take the time to find the right fit to ensure success.
    • The conventional approach to ERP implementation partner selection puts the ERP vendor and systems integrators in the driver's seat with little regard to your specific needs as an organization. You need to take an eyes-wide-open approach to your organization’s strengths and weaknesses to properly select and manage the implementation partner relationship.
    • Self-assessment is the critical first step in a successful implementation. Every organization has a unique combination of critical success factors (CSFs) that will be required to unlock the potential of their ERP. You must find the right partner or partners whose strengths complement your weaknesses to ensure your success.
    • Before you start knocking on vendors’ doors, ensure you have a holistic request that encompasses the strategic, tactical, operational, and commodity factors required for the success of your ERP implementation.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s implementation partner selection process to find the right fit for your organization.
    • Understand the enterprise application CSFs and determine the unique requirements of your organization through this lens.
    • Define your implementation partner requirements separately from your software requirements and allow vendors to respond to those specifically.
    • Use our assessment tools to score and assess the CSFs required to select the right software implementation partners.

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should focus on selecting the right implementation partner, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your strategic needs

    Review the CSFs that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    • Select an ERP Implementation Partner Workbook

    2. Review your tactical, commodity, and operational needs

    Review the CSFs that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    3. Build your RFx and evaluate the responses

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Organizational Strategic Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    ERP strategy model defined

    Strategic needs identified

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Build your ERP strategy model.

    1.3 Assess your strategic needs.

    Outputs

    ERP strategy model

    ERP strategy model

    Strategic needs analysis

    2 Review Your Tactical, Commodity, and Operational Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tactical, commodity, and operational needs identified

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your tactical needs.

    2.2 Assess your commodity needs.

    2.3 Assess your operational needs.

    Outputs

    Tactical needs analysis

    Commodity needs analysis

    Operational needs analysis

    3 Build Your RFx

    The Purpose

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    Activities

    3.1 Decide on an RFI or RFP.

    3.2 Complete the RFx with the needs analysis.

    3.3 Build a list of targeted vendors

    Outputs

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    4 Evaluate Vendors

    The Purpose

    Build a scoring template for use in vendor evaluation to ensure consistent comparison criteria are used.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consistent and efficient evaluation process

    Activities

    4.1 Assign weightings to the evaluation criteria.

    4.2 Run a vendor evaluation simulation to validate the process.

    Outputs

    Completed partner evaluation tool

    Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}389|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are facing challenges from explosive information growth in both volume and complexity, as well as the need to use more new sources of information for social media just to remain in business.
    • A lot of content can be created quickly, but managing those digital assets properly through metadata tagging that will be used consistently and effectively requires processes to be in place to create standardized and informational metadata at the source of content creation.
    • Putting these processes in place changes the way the organization handles its information, which may generate pushback, and requires socialization and proper management of the metadata strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Metadata is an imperative part of the organizations broader information management strategy. Some may believe that metadata is not needed anymore; Google search is not a magic act – it relies on information tagging that reflects cultural sentiment.
    • Metadata should be pliable. It needs to grow with the changing cultural and corporate vernacular and knowledge, and adapt to changing needs.
    • Build a map for your metadata before you dig for buried treasure. Implement metadata standards and processes for current digital assets before chasing after your treasure troves of existing artifacts.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a sustainable and effective digital asset management (DAM) program by understanding Info-Tech’s DAM framework and how the framework fits within your organization for better management of key digital assets.
    • Create an enterprise-wide metadata design principles handbook to keep track of metadata schemas and standards, as well as communicate the standards to the entire organization.
    • Gather requirements for your DAM program, as well as the DAM system and roles, by interviewing key stakeholders and identifying prevalent pains and opportunities. Understand where digital assets are created, used, and stored throughout the enterprise to gain a high-level perspective of DAM requirements.
    • Identify the organization’s current state of metadata management along with the target state, identify the gaps, and then define solutions to fill those gaps. Ensure business initiatives are woven into the mix.
    • Create a comprehensive roadmap to prioritize initiatives and delineate responsibilities.

    Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a digital asset management program focused on metadata, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a foundation for your DAM project

    Gain an in-depth understanding of what digital asset management is as well as how it is supported by Info-Tech’s DAM framework.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 1: Build a Foundation for Your DAM Project
    • DAM Design Principles Handbook
    • Where in the World Is My Digital Asset? Tool
    • Digital Asset Inventory Tool
    • DAM Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Dive into the DAM strategy

    Create a metadata program execution strategy and assess current and target states for the organization’s DAM.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 2: Dive Into the DAM Strategy
    • DAM Roadmap Tool
    • DAM Metadata Execution Strategy Document

    3. Create intuitive metadata for your DAM

    Design a governance plan for ongoing DAM and metadata management.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 3: Create Intuitive Metadata for Your Digital Assets
    • Metadata Manager Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Structure the Metadata Project

    The Purpose

    Develop a foundation of knowledge regarding DAM and metadata, as well as the best practices for organizing the organization’s information and digital assets for ideal findability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design standardized processes for metadata creation and digital asset management to help to improve findability of key assets.

    Gain knowledge of how DAM can benefit both IT and the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Build a DAM and metadata knowledge foundation.

    1.2 Kick-start creation of the organization’s DAM design principles handbook.

    1.3 Interview key business units to understand drivers for the program.

    1.4 Develop a DAM framework.

    Outputs

    DAM Design Principles Handbook

    DAM Execution Strategy Document

    2 Assess Requirements for the DAM Program

    The Purpose

    Inventory the organization’s key digital assets and their repositories.

    Gather the organization’s requirements for a full-time digital asset librarian, as well as the DAM system.  

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine clear and specific requirements for the organization from the DAM system and the people involved.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct a digital asset inventory to identify key assets to include in DAM.

    2.2 Prioritize digital assets to determine their risk and value to ensure appropriate support through the information lifecycle.

    2.3 Determine the requirements of the business and IT for the DAM system and its metadata.

    Outputs

    Digital Asset Inventory Tool

    DAM Requirements Gathering Tool

    3 Design Roadmap and Plan Implementation

    The Purpose

    Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organization to start enabling data-driven insights.

    Determine timing of the initiatives. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish a clear direction for the DAM program.

    Build a step-by-step outline of how to create effective metadata with true business-IT collaboration.

    Have prioritized initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

    Activities

    3.1 Assess current and target states of DAM in the organization.

    3.2 Brainstorm and document practical initiatives to close the gap.

    3.3 Discuss strategies rooted in business requirements to execute the metadata management program to improve findability of digital assets.

    Outputs

    DAM Roadmap Tool

    4 Establish Metadata Governance

    The Purpose

    Identify the roles required for effective DAM and metadata management.

    Create sample metadata according to established guiding principles and implement a feedback method to create intuitive metadata in the organization. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Metadata management is an ongoing project. Implementing it requires user input and feedback, which governance will help to support.

    By integrating metadata governance with larger information or data governance bodies, DAM and metadata management will gain sustainability. 

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss and assign roles and responsibilities for initiatives identified in the roadmap.

    4.2 Review policy requirements for the information assets in the organization and strategies to address enforcement.

    4.3 Integrate the governance of metadata into larger governance committees.

    Outputs

    DAM Execution Strategy

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}451|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Infrastructure and operations teams are managing deployments on- and off-premises, and across multiple infrastructure services providers.
    • Though automation tools speed up the delivery process, documentation is always pushed off so the team can meet urgent deadlines.
    • Without documented delivery processes, wait times are longer, controls are adequate but ad hoc, builds are non-standard, and errors are more likely to be introduced in production.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Prioritize in-demand services to add to the playbook. Pilot a few services to get value from the project quickly.
    • Do not get lost in automation or tooling. You do not need a complex tool or back-end automation to get value from this project.
    • Learn, then iterate. With a few completed service processes, it is much easier to identify opportunities for service automation.

    Impact and Result

    • Prioritize in-demand services for documentation and standardization.
    • Build service workflows and document service requirements in the services playbook.
    • Create a costing model and track costs to deliver defined services.
    • Leverage data on costs and service requirements to improve service delivery.

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to find out why you should create an infrastructure services playbook, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define and prioritize infrastructure services

    Produce a prioritized list of high-demand infrastructure services.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 1: Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services
    • Infrastructure Services Playbook

    2. Build workflows and an infrastructure services playbook

    Design workflows and create the first draft of the infrastructure services playbook.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 2: Build Workflows and an Infrastructure Services Playbook
    • Infrastructure Service Workflows (Visio)
    • Infrastructure Service Workflows (PDF)

    3. Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities

    Build a service rate sheet to track costs and develop better service capabilities.

    • Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook – Phase 3: Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities
    • Service Rate Sheet
    • Infrastructure Service Catalog Mind Map Example
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    The Purpose

    Define and prioritize infrastructure services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify candidate services for the Playbook.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the services you own.

    1.2 Prioritize infrastructure services.

    Outputs

    Affinity map of infrastructure services

    Service pain points and root causes

    A list of high-demand infrastructure services

    2 Build the Infrastructure Services Playbook

    The Purpose

    Build workflows and an infrastructure services playbook.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Produce a draft infrastructure services playbook.

    Activities

    2.1 Design workflow for service delivery.

    2.2 Add steps and requirements to the Services Playbook.

    Outputs

    Documented service workflows

    Infrastructure Services Playbook

    3 Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an infrastructure service rate sheet.

    Define next steps for infrastructure service capabilities.

    Activities

    3.1 Optimize infrastructure cost estimates.

    3.2 Mature your I&O organization into a service broker.

    Outputs

    Service Rate Sheet

    Master list of infrastructure services

    Action plan for Playbook implementation

    Further reading

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    Automation, SDI, and DevOps – build a cheat sheet to manage a changing Infrastructure & Operations environment.

    Table of contents

    Analyst Perspective

    Executive Summary

    Project Overview

    Summary and Conclusion

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Technology is changing how infrastructure services are delivered.

    "Managing a hybrid infrastructure environment is challenge enough. Add to this the pressure on IT Operations to deliver services faster and more continuously – it’s a recipe for boondoggle deployments, overcommitted staff, end-user frustration, and operational gridlock.

    It’s not every service you provide that causes problems, so prioritize a few in-demand, painful services. Build and maintain durable, flexible processes that enable your team to provide consistent, repeatable services at a standard cost. Identify opportunities to improve service delivery.

    You’ll save the business time and money and your own team significant grief." (Andrew Sharp, Research Manager, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Your infrastructure and operations team is a service provider; standardize, document, and communicate service capabilities

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CTOs and Infrastructure Managers
    • Service Level Managers
    • ITSM Managers and Process Owners

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Inventory services that IT Infrastructure & Operations (I&O) provides to the business (servers, storage, and network).
    • Standardize services and track costs.
    • Articulate the value of these services to business owners.
    • Develop a catalog of infrastructure services.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CIOs
    • Application Development Managers
    • Security Managers
    • Auditors

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the complexities of technical service delivery.
    • Make better strategic IT infrastructure decisions.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Infrastructure and operations teams are managing deployments on- and off-premises and across multiple infrastructure service providers.
    • Though automation tools speed up the delivery process, documentation is always pushed off so the team can meet urgent deadlines.

    Complication

    • Cloud providers have set the bar high for ease of access to stable infrastructure services.
    • Without documented delivery processes, wait times are longer, controls are adequate but ad hoc, builds are non-standard, and errors are more likely to be introduced in production.

    Resolution

    • Prioritize in-demand services for documentation and standardization.
    • Build service workflows and document service requirements in the services playbook.
    • Create a costing model and track costs to deliver defined services.
    • Leverage data on costs and service requirements to improve service delivery.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Keep it simple. Work through a few in-demand services to get early value from the project.
    2. Don’t get lost in automation or tooling. You don’t need a complex tool or back-end automation to get value from standardized services.
    3. Do then iterate. With a few completed service processes, it’s much easier to identify opportunities for service automation.

    Create an infrastructure services playbook to improve efficiency, support DevOps, and streamline service delivery

    Begin building an infrastructure services playbook by defining the services you provide. This will also help your team support changes to service delivery (e.g. more use of cloud services and the shift to DevOps).

    In this blueprint, the first step will be to document infrastructure services to:

    1. Clarify infrastructure capabilities and achievable service levels.

      Document infrastructure services to clarify achievable service levels with given resources and what you will need to meet service-level requirement gaps. Establishing your ability to meet customer demands is the first step toward becoming a broker of internal or external services.
    2. Standardize infrastructure service delivery.

      Sometimes, it’s extremely important to do the exact same thing every time (e.g. server hardening). Sometimes, your team needs room to deviate from the script. Create a playbook that allows you to standardize service delivery as needed.
    3. Make good strategic infrastructure decisions.

      Knowledge is power. Defined services and capabilities will help you make important strategic infrastructure decisions around capacity planning and when outsourcing is appropriate.

    Review and optimize infrastructure service delivery as you shift to more cloud-based services

    If you can’t standardize and streamline how you support cloud services, you risk AppDev and business leaders circumventing the I&O team.

    Logo for 'vmware'.

    Example:

    Create a new server resource in a virtual environment vs. public cloud

    In a virtualized environment, provisioning processes can still be relatively siloed.

    In a software-defined environment, many steps require knowledge across the infrastructure stack. Better documentation will help your team deliver services outside their area of specialty.

    Logo for 'Microsoft Azure'.
    • Identify CPU requirements for a virtual machine (VM)
    • Calculate VM memory requirements
    • Configure the floppy drive for a VM
    • Configure IDE devices for a VM
    • Configure SCSI adapters for a VM
    • Configure network adapters for a VM
    • Configure VM priority for host CPU resources
    • Server is live

    • Complete SDI code development & review, version control, build status, etc.
    • Identify software and specifications for the instance you want to use
    • Review configuration, storage, and security settings
    • Secure the instance with an existing key pair or create a new key pair
    • Update documentation – public IP address, physical & logical connections, data flows, etc.
    • Launch and connect to instance
    • Server is live

    Strengthen DevOps with an infrastructure playbook

    The purpose behind DevOps is to reduce friction and deliver faster, more continuous, more automated services through the use of cross-functional teams.

    DevOps: bridging Applications Development and Infrastructure & Operations by embracing a culture, practices, and tools born out of Lean and Agile methodologies.

    • Create a common language across functions.
    • Ensure that all service steps are documented.
    • Move towards more standard deployments.
    • Increase transparency within the IT department.
    • Cultivate trust across teams.
    • Build the foundation for automated services.
    A colorful visualization of the DevOps cycle. On the Development side is 'Feedback', Plan', 'Build', 'Integrate', then over to the Operations side is 'Deploy', and 'Operate', then back to Dev with 'Feedback', starting the cycle over again.

    "The bar has been raised for delivering technology products and services – what was good enough in previous decades is not good enough now." (Kim, Humble, Debois, Willis (2016))

    Leverage an infrastructure services playbook to improve service delivery, one step at a time

    Crawl

    • Prioritize infrastructure services that are good candidates for standardization.
    • Document the steps and requirements to deliver the service.
    • Use the playbook and workflows internally as you gather requirements and deliver on requests.
    • Track costs internally.

    Walk

    • Provide infrastructure clients with the playbook and allow them to make requests against it.
    • Update and maintain existing documentation.
    • Automate, where possible.
    • Showback costs to the business.

    Run

    • Provide infrastructure customers with scripts to provision infrastructure resources.
    • Audit requests before fulfilling them.
    • Chargeback costs, as needed.
    A turtle smiles happily on four legs, simply content to be alive. Another turtle moves quickly on two legs, seemingly in a runner's trance, eyes closed, oblivious to the fact that another turtle has beaten him to finish line.

    Focus on in-demand infrastructure services — PHASE 1

    Standardize in-demand, repeatable services first.

    Demand for infrastructure services is usually driven by external requests or operational requirements. Prioritize services based on criticality, durability, frequency, availability, and urgency requirements.

    Scheduling Delays
    • Dealing with a slew of capital projects driven by a major funding initiative, the IT team of a major US transit system is struggling to execute on basic operational tasks.

    • Action:
    • A brainstorming and prioritization exercise identifies web server deployment as their most in-demand service.
    • Identifying breakdowns in web server deployment helps free up resources for other tasks and addresses a serious pain point.
    Think outside the box
    • On a new project for a sporting goods client, the IT department for a marketing firm deploys and supports a “locker” kiosk that users engage with for a chance to win a gift.

    • Action:
    • As the campaign proves successful, the I&O Manager creates a playbook to guide kiosk support and deployment in the future, including required skills, timelines, success metrics, and costs.
    Keep it standard, keep it safe
    • An IT audit at a higher education institution finds that no standard process for server hardening has been defined or documented by the infrastructure team.

    • Action:
    • Improving IT security is a strategic priority for the department.
    • The infrastructure team decides to standardize and document processes, guidelines, and configurations for hardening OS, SCCM, SaltStack, scripting, and patching.

    Leverage service workflows to populate the playbook — PHASE 2

    Infrastructure as Code is breaking down traditional infrastructure silos and support models.

    1. Document the workflow to deliver the service. Identify pain points and target broken processes first.
      Provision –› Configure –› Run –› Quiesce –› Destroy
    2. Define logical expected results and metrics for problematic steps in the process. Identify challenges and possible improvements to each problematic step.
      Building and deploying toolsets is taking a long time
      Start
      • Create a baseline offering for common requests.
      • Make clear that non-standard requests will take time to fulfil.
      Stop
      • Move to just one web server.
      Continue
      • Use weekly drop-ins to communicate the change.
    3. Document skills and roles, approvers, and pre-requirements to fill out the documentation, as needed. Use the documented process to guide internal process and align with external expectations.

    Cross-silo knowledge is needed: In a software-defined environment, building and launching a new server requires knowledge across the stack.

    • Complete SDI code development & review, version control, build status, etc.
    • Identify software and specifications for the instance you want to use
    • Review configuration, storage, and security settings
    • Secure the instance with an existing key pair, or create a new key pair
    • Update documentation – public IP address, physical & logical connections, data flows, etc.
    • Launch and connect to the instance
    • Server is live

    Take a progressive approach to cost tracking — PHASE 3

    Infrastructure & Operations are bound by two metrics:

    1. Are systems up?
    2. Is technology delivered as efficiently as possible?

    Because tracking cost is integral to efficiency, cost and budget management, by proxy, is one of the most important Infrastructure & Operations metrics.

    Cost management is not a numbers game. It is an indicator of how well infrastructure is managed.

    Track costs in a practical way that delivers value to your organization:

    1. Build and leverage an internal rate sheet to help estimate cost to serve.
    2. Showback rate sheet to help managers and architects make better infrastructure decisions.
    3. Chargeback costs to defined cost centers.

    Project overview

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to get value faster from your infrastructure services playbook.

    Phases

    Phase 1: Define and prioritize infrastructure services Phase 2: Build the infrastructure services playbook Phase 3: Identify costs and mature service delivery capabilities

    Steps

    1.1 Define the services you own 2.1 Design workflows for service delivery 3.1 Estimate infrastructure service costs
    1.2 Prioritize infrastructure services 2.2 Add steps and requirements to the services playbook 3.2 Mature your I&O organization into a service broker

    Tools & Templates

    Infrastructure Services Playbook Infrastructure Service Workflows Service Rate Sheet

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation Overview

    Your Trusted Advisor is just a call away.

    Scoping
    (Call 1)

    Scope requirements, objectives, and stakeholders. Review the playbook toolset and methodology, and establish fit-for-need.

    Identify Services
    (Call 2)

    Brainstorm common infrastructure services your group provides. Consolidate the list and identify priority services.

    Create Service Workflows
    (Calls 3-4)

    Build Visio workflows for 2-3 priority services.

    Populate the Playbook
    (Calls 4-5)

    Add data to the playbook based on infrastructure service workflows

    Create a Rate Sheet for Costs
    (Call 6)

    Build a rate sheet that allows you to calculate costs for additional

    Your Guided Implementation will pair you with an advisor from our analyst team for the duration of your infrastructure services project.

    Workshop Overview

    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Module 1
    (Day 1)
    Offsite deliverables wrap-up (Day 5)
    Activities
    Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    1.1 Assess current maturity of services and standardization processes.

    1.2 Identify, group, and break out important infrastructure services.

    1.3 Define service delivery pain points and perform root-cause analysis.

    1.4 Prioritize services based on demand criteria.

    Build the Infrastructure Services Playbook

    2.1 Determine criteria for standard versus custom services.

    2.2 Document standard workflows for better alignment and consistent delivery.

    2.3 Build a flowchart for the identified high-demand service(s).

    2.4 Outline information as it relates to the service lifecycle in the Playbook template.

    Identify Costs and Mature Service Delivery Capabilities

    4.1 Gather information for the rate sheet.

    4.2 Choose an allocation method for overhead costs.

    4.3 Select the right approach in the crawl, walk, run model for your organization.

    4.4 Discuss the promotion plan and target revision dates for playbook and rate sheet.

    Deliverables
    1. High-demand infrastructure services list
    1. Right-sized criteria for standardization
    2. Service workflows
    3. Infrastructure Services Playbook
    1. Service Rate Sheet
    2. Deployment plan

    Develop an IT Infrastructure Services Playbook

    PHASE 1

    Define and Prioritize Infrastructure Services

    Step 1.1: Define the services you own

    PHASE 1

    Define and prioritize infrastructure services

    1.1

    Define the services you own

    1.2

    Prioritize infrastructure services

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define “infrastructure service”
    • Brainstorm service offerings
    • Consolidate services with affinity map

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure Manager
    • I&O SMEs

    Results & Insights

    • Results: Consolidated list of end-to-end services
    • Insights: Avoid analysis paralysis by brainstorming without restrictions. It is more effective to cut down in Step 1.2 rather than risk neglecting important services for the playbook.

    Consider a range of infrastructure services

    Your infrastructure team is a service provider to the applications team – and sometimes other users as well.

    Service Requests
    • A developer requests a new web server.
    • The marketing department asks for a database to support a six-month digital marketing campaign.
    Projects
    • A new service is promoted to production.
    Operations
    • Firewall rules are updated to support server, network, or security posture changes.
    • Standard practices are followed and maintained to harden a range of different operating systems.
    • Engineers follow a standard process to integrate new tools and entitlements into Active Directory.
    • Patches and firmware updates are applied to core infrastructure components as needed.
    Problems
    • A database batch job often breaks on overnight batch jobs and requires manual intervention to check and restart.
    A visualization of the word 'Infrastructure Services' being orbited by 'Service Requests', 'Projects', 'Operations', and 'Problems'.

    IT infrastructure & operations teams deliver services that fulfil requests, support projects, resolve problems, and operate systems.

    Craft a Customer-Driven Market Strategy With Unbiased Data

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}611|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Selection & Implementation
    • Parent Category Link: /selection-and-implementation
    • Market strategies are informed by gut feel and endless brainstorming instead of market data to take their product from concept to customer.
    • Hiring independent market research firms results in a lack of unbiased third-party data. Research firms tell vendors what they want to hear instead of offering an agnostic view of software trends.
    • Dissatisfied customers don’t tell you directly why they are leaving, so there is no feedback loop back into product improvements.
    • Often a market strategy is built after a product is developed to force the product’s fit in the market. The product marketing team has no say in the product vision or future improvements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Adopt the 5 P’s to building a winning market strategy: Proposition, Product, Pricing, Placement, and Promotion.
    • You can’t be everything to everyone. Testing your proposition in the market to see what sticks is a risky move. Promise future value using past successes by gaining a deeper understanding of which customers and submarkets truly align to your product.
    • Customers have learned to avoid shiny new objects but still expect rapid feature releases. Differentiating features require a closer look at the underpinning vendor capabilities. Having intentional feature releases requires a feedback loop into the product roadmap and increases influence by the product marketing team.
    • Price transparency and sensitivity should drive what you offer to customers. Negotiating solely on price is a race to the bottom.

    Impact and Result

    • Leverage this report to gain insights on the software selection process and what top vendors do best.
    • Gain a bird’s-eye view on customer purchasing behavior using over 40,000 data points on satisfaction and importance collected directly from the source.
    • Build a winning market strategy influenced by real customer data that drives vendor success.

    Craft a Customer-Driven Market Strategy With Unbiased Data Research & Tools

    Read the storyboard

    Read our storyboard to find out why you should leverage SoftwareReviews data to craft your market strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand unbiased customer data on software purchasing triggers.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Craft a Customer-Driven Market Strategy With Unbiased Data Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}214|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $5,039 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Your vendor contracts are unorganized and held in various cabinets and network shares. There is no consolidated list or view of all the agreements, and some are misplaced or lost as coworkers leave.
    • The contract process takes a long time to complete. Coworkers are unsure who should be reviewing and approving them.
    • You are concerned that you are not getting favorable terms with your vendors and not complying with your agreement commitments.
    • You are unsure what risks your organization could be exposed to in your IT vendor contacts. These could be financial, legal, or security risks and/or compliance requirements.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on what’s best for you. There are two phases to CLM. All stages within those phases are important, but choose to improve the phase that can be most beneficial to your organization in the short term. However, be sure to include reviewing risk and monitoring compliance.
    • Educate yourself. Understand the stages of CLM and how each step can rely on the previous one, like a stepping-stone model to success.
    • Consider the overall picture. Contract lifecycle management is the sum of many processes designed to manage contracts end to end while reducing corporate risk, improving financial savings, and managing agreement obligations. It can take time to get CLM organized and working efficiently, but then it will show its ROI and continuously improve.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    • Gain the knowledge required to implement a CLM that will be beneficial to all business units.
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings.
    • Effectively review, store, manage, comply with, and renew agreements with a collaborative process

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a contract management system will save money and time and mitigate contract risk, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Master the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand how the basic operational framework of CLM will ensure cost savings, improved collaboration, and constant CLM improvement.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of CLM
    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    • Contract Manager

    2. Understand the ten stages of contract lifecycle management.

    Understand the two phases of CLM and the ten stages that make up the entire process.

    • Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process – Phase 2: Understand the Ten Stages of CLM
    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool
    • CLM RASCI Diagram
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review Your CLM Process and Learn the Basics

    The Purpose

    Identify current CLM processes.

    Learn the CLM operational framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented overview of current processes and stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of CLM.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    Outputs

    Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    2 Learn More and Plan

    The Purpose

    Dive into the two phases of CLM and the ten stages of a robust system.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A deep understanding of the required components/stages of a CLM system.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity state.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    Outputs

    CLM Maturity Assessment

    CLM RASCI Diagram

    Further reading

    Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process

    Mitigate risk and drive value through robust best practices for contract lifecycle management.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • The CIO who depends on numerous key vendors for services
    • The CIO or Project Manager who wants to maximize the value delivered by vendors
    • The Director or Manager of an existing IT procurement or vendor management team
    • The Contracts Manager or Legal Counsel whose IT department holds responsibility for contracts, negotiation, and administration

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Implement and streamline the contract management process, policies, and procedures
    • Baseline and benchmark existing contract processes
    • Understand the importance and value of contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Minimize risk, save time, and maximize savings with vendor contracts

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • IT Service Managers
    • IT Procurement
    • Contract teams
    • Finance and Legal departments
    • Senior IT leadership

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Understand the required components of a CLM
    • Establish the current CLM maturity level
    • Implement a new CLM process
    • Improve on an existing or disparate process

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is a vital process for small and enterprise organizations alike. Research shows that all organizations can benefit from a contract management process, whether they have as few as 25 contracts or especially if they have contracts numbering in the hundreds.

    A CLM system will:

    • Save valuable time in the entire cycle of contract/agreement processes.
    • Save the organization money, both hard and soft dollars.
    • Mitigate risk to the organization.
    • Avoid loss of revenue.

    If you’re not managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investment with your vendors and are potentially exposing your organization to contract and monetary risk."

    - Ted Walker
    Principal Research Advisor, Vendor Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Most organizations have vendor overload and even worse, no defined process to manage the associated contracts and agreements. To manage contracts, some vendor management offices (VMOs) use a shared network drive to store the contracts and a spreadsheet to catalog and manage them. Yet other less-mature VMOs may just rely on a file cabinet in Procurement and a reminder in someone’s calendar about renewals. These disparate processes likely cost your organization time spent finding, managing, and renewing contracts, not to mention potential increases in vendor costs and risk and the inability to track contract obligations.

    Complication

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) is not an IT buzzword, and it’s rarely on the top-ten list of CIO concerns in most annual surveys. Until a VMO gets to a level of maturity that can fully develop a CLM and afford the time and costs of doing so, there can be several challenges to developing even the basic processes required to store, manage, and renew IT vendor contracts. As is always an issue in IT, budget is one of the biggest obstacles in implementing a standard CLM process. Until senior leadership realizes that a CLM process can save time, money, and risk, getting mindshare and funding commitment will remain a challenge.

    Resolution

    • Understand the immediate benefits of a CLM process – even a basic CLM implementation can provide significant cost savings to the organization; reduce time spent on creating, negotiating, and renewing contracts; and help identify and mitigate risks within your vendor contracts.
    • Budgets don’t always need to be a barrier to a standard CLM process. However, a robust CLM system can provide significant savings to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • If you aren’t managing your contracts, you aren’t capitalizing on your investments.
    • Even a basic CLM process with efficient procedures will provide savings and benefits.
    • Not having a CLM process may be costing your organization money, time, and exposure to unmitigated risk.

    What you can gain from this blueprint

    Why Create a CLM

    • Improved contract organization
    • Centralized and manageable storage/archives
    • Improved vendor compliance
    • Risk mitigation
    • Reduced potential loss of revenue

    Knowledge Gained

    • Understanding of the value and importance of a CLM
    • How CLM can impact many departments within the organization
    • Who should be involved in the CLM steps and processes
    • Why a CLM is important to your organization
    • How to save time and money by maximizing IT vendor contracts
    • How basic CLM policies and procedures can be implemented without costly software expenditure

    The Outcome

    • A foundation for a CLM with best-practice processes
    • Reduced exposure to potential risks within vendor contracts
    • Maximized savings with primary vendors
    • Vendor compliance and corporate governance
    • Collaboration, transparency, and integration with business units

    Contract management: A case study

    CASE STUDY
    Industry Finance and Banking
    Source Apttus

    FIS Global

    The Challenge

    FIS’ business groups were isolated across the organization and used different agreements, making contract creation a long, difficult, and manual process.

    • Customers frustrated by slow and complicated contracting process
    • Manual contract creation and approval processes
    • Sensitive contract data that lacked secure storage
    • Multiple agreements managed across divisions
    • Lack of central repository for past contracts
    • Inconsistent and inaccessible

    The Solution: Automating and Streamlining the Contract Management Process

    A robust CLM system solved FIS’ various contract management needs while also providing a solution that could expand into full quote-to cash in the future.

    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM)
    • Intelligent workflow approvals (IWA)
    • X-Author for Excel

    Customer Results

    • 75% cycle time reduction
    • $1M saved in admin costs per year
    • 49% increase in sales proposal volume
    • Automation on one standard platform and solution
    • 55% stronger compliance management
    • Easy maintenance for various templates
    • Ability to quickly absorb new contracts and processes via FIS’s ongoing acquisitions

    Track the impact of CLM with these metrics

    Dollars Saved

    Upfront dollars saved

    • Potential dollars saved from avoiding unfavorable terms and conditions
    • Incentives that encourage the vendor to act in the customer’s best interest
    • Secured commitments to provide specified products and services at firm prices
    • Cost savings related to audits, penalties, and back support
    • Savings from discounts found

    Time Saved

    Time saved, which can be done in several areas

    • Defined and automated approval flow process
    • Preapproved contract templates with corporate terms
    • Reduced negotiation times
    • Locate contracts in minutes

    Pitfalls Avoided

    Number of pitfalls found and avoided, such as

    • Auto-renewal
    • Inconsistencies between sections and documents
    • Security and data not being deleted upon termination
    • Improper licensing

    The numbers are compelling

    71%

    of companies can’t locate up to 10% of their contracts.

    Source: TechnologyAdvice, 2019

    9.2%

    of companies’ annual revenue is lost because of poor contract management practices.

    Source: IACCM, 2019

    60%

    still track contracts in shared drives or email folders.

    Source: “State of Contract Management,” SpringCM, 2018

    CLM blueprint objectives

    • To provide a best-practice process for managing IT vendor contract lifecycles through a framework that organizes from the core, analyzes each step in the cycle, has collaboration and governance attached to each step, and integrates with established vendor management practices within your organization.
    • CLM doesn’t have to be an expensive managed database system in the cloud with fancy dashboards. As long as you have a defined process that has the framework steps and is followed by the organization, this will provide basic CLM and save the organization time and money over a short period of time.
    • This blueprint will not delve into the many vendors or providers of CLM solutions and their methodologies. However, we will discuss briefly how to use our framework and contract stages in evaluating a potential solution that you may be considering.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process – project overview

    1. Master the Operational Framework

    2. Understand the Ten Stages of CLM

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Understand the operational framework components.

    1.2 Review your current framework.

    1.3 Create a plan to implement or enhance existing processes.

    2.1 Understand the ten stages of CLM.

    2.2 Review and document your current processes.

    2.3 Review RASCI chart and assign internal ownership.

    2.4 Create an improvement plan.

    2.5 Track changes for measurable ROI.

    Guided Implementations
    • Review existing processes.
    • Understand what CLM is and why the framework is essential.
    • Create an implementation or improvement plan.
    • Review the ten stages of CLM.
    • Complete CLM Maturity Assessment.
    • Create a plan to target improvement.
    • Track progress to measure savings.
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1: Review and Learn the Basics

    • Review and capture your current processes.
    • Learn the basic operational framework of contract management.

    Module 2 Results:

    • Understand the ten stages of effective CLM.
    • Create an improvement or implementation plan.
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A full understanding of your current CLM processes and where to focus your efforts for improvement or implementation.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2
    Activities

    Task – Review and Learn the Basics

    Task – Learn More and Plan

    1.1 Review and capture your current process.

    1.2 Identify current stakeholders.

    1.3 Learn the operational framework of contract lifecycle management.

    1.4 Identify current process gaps.

    2.1 Understand the two phases of CLM.

    2.2 Learn the ten stages of CLM.

    2.3 Assess your CLM maturity.

    2.4 Identify and assign stakeholders.

    2.5 Discuss ROI.

    2.6 Summarize and next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Internal interviews with business units
    2. Existing CLM Process Worksheet
    1. CLM Maturity Assessment
    2. RASCI Diagram
    3. Improvement Action Plan

    PHASE 1

    Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management
    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-4 weeks

    Step 1.1: Document your Current CLM Process

    Step 1.2: Read and Understand the Operational Framework

    Step 1.3: Review Solution Options

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand what your current process(es) is for each stage
    • Do a probative review of any current processes
    • Interview stakeholders for input

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the framework as the core of your plan
    • Review the gaps in your existing process
    • Understand how to prioritize next steps towards a CLM

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Establish ownership of the framework
    • Prioritize improvement areas or map out how your new CLM will look

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document the details of your process for each stage of CLM

    With these tools & templates:

    • Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Phase 1 Results:

    • A full understanding of what makes a comprehensive contract management system.

    What Is Contract Lifecycle Management?

    • Every contract has a lifecycle, from creation to time and usage to expiration. Organizations using a legacy or manual contract management process usually ask, “What is contract lifecycle management and how will it benefit my business?”
    • Contract lifecycle management (CLM) creates a process that manages each contract or agreement. CLM eases the challenges of managing hundreds or even thousands of important business and IT contracts that affect the day-to-day business and could expose the organization to vendor risk.
    • Managing a few contracts is quite easy, but as the number of contracts grows, managing each step for each contract becomes increasingly difficult. Ultimately, it will get to a point where managing contracts properly becomes very difficult or seemingly impossible.

    That’s where contract lifecycle management (CLM) comes in.

    CLM can save money and improve revenue by:

    • Improving accuracy and decreasing errors through standardized contract templates and approved terms and conditions that will reduce repetitive tasks.
    • Securing contracts and processes through centralized software storage, minimizing risk of lost or misplaced contracts due to changes in physical assets like hard drives, network shares, and file cabinets.
    • Using policies and procedures that standardize, organize, track, and optimize IT contracts, eliminating time spent on creation, approvals, errors, and vendor compliance.
    • Reducing the organization’s exposure to risks and liability.
    • Having contracts renewed on time without penalties and with the most favorable terms for the business.

    The Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Four Components of the Operational Framework

    1. Organization
    2. Analysis
    3. Collaboration and Governance
    4. Integration/Vendor Management
    • By organizing at the core of the process and then analyzing each stage, you will maximize each step of the CLM process and ensure long-term contract management for the organization.
    • Collaboration and governance as overarching policies for the system will provide accountability to stakeholders and business units.
    • Integration and vendor management are encompassing features in a well-developed CLM that add visibility, additional value, and savings to the entire organization.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Putting a contract manager in place to manage the CLM project will accelerate the improvements and provide faster returns to the organizations. Reference Info-Tech’s Contract Manager Job Description template as needed.

    The operational framework is key to the success, return on investment (ROI), cost savings, and customer satisfaction of a CLM process.

    This image depicts Info-Tech's Operational Framework.  It consists of a series of five concentric circles, with each circle a different colour.  On the outer circle, is the word Integration.  The next outermost circle has the words Collaboration and Governance.  The next circle has no words, the next circle has the word Analysis, and the very centre circle has the word Organization.

    1. Organization

    • Every enterprise needs to organize its contract documents and data in a central repository so that everyone knows where to find the golden source of contractual truth.
    • This includes:
      • A repository for storing and organizing contract documents.
      • A data dictionary for describing the terms and conditions in a consistent, normalized way.
      • A database for persistent data storage.
      • An object model that tracks changes to the contract and its prevailing terms over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Paper is still alive and doing very well at slowing down the many stages of the contract process.

    2. Analysis

    Most organizations analyze their contracts in two ways:

    • First, they use reporting, search, and analytics to reveal risky and toxic terms so that appropriate operational strategies can be implemented to eliminate, mitigate, or transfer the risk.
    • Second, they use process analytics to reveal bottlenecks and points of friction as contracts are created, approved, and negotiated.

    3. Collaboration

    • Throughout the contract lifecycle, teams must collaborate on tasks both pre-execution and post-execution.
    • This includes document collaboration among several different departments across an enterprise.
    • The challenge is to make the collaboration smooth and transparent to avoid costly mistakes.
    • For some contracting tasks, especially in regulated industries, a high degree of control is required.
    • In these scenarios, the organization must implement controlled systems that restrict access to certain types of data and processes backed up with robust audit trails.

    4. Integration

    • For complete visibility into operational responsibilities, relationships, and risk, an organization must integrate its golden contract data with other systems of record.
    • An enterprise contracts platform must therefore provide a rich set of APIs and connectors so that information can be pushed into or pulled from systems for enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), supplier relationship management (SRM), document management, etc.

    This is the ultimate goal of a robust contract management system!

    Member Activity: Document Current CLM Processes

    1.1 Completion Time: 1-5 days

    Goal: Document your existing CLM processes (if any) and who owns them, who manages them, etc.

    Instructions

    Interview internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and/or Procurement to understand what’s currently in place.

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to capture and document current CLM processes.
    2. Establish what processes, procedures, policies, and workflows, if any, are in place for pre-execution (Phase 1) contract stages.
    3. Do the same for post-execution (Phase 2) stages.
    4. Use this worksheet as reference for assessments and as a benchmark for improvement review six to 12 months later.
    This image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Existing CLM Process Discovery Worksheet

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    PHASE 2

    Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Design and Build an Effective CLM Process

    Phase 1: Master the Operational Framework of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of
    2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Understand the Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-10 weeks

    Step 2.1: Assess CLM Maturity

    Step 2.2: Complete a RASCI Diagram

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the importance of assessing the maturity of your current CLM processes
    • Discuss interview process for internal stakeholders
    • Use data from the Existing CLM Process Worksheet

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your maturity results
    • Identify stages that require immediate improvement
    • Prioritize improvement or implementation of process

    Then complete these activities…

    • Work through the maturity assessment process
    • Answer the questions in the assessment tool
    • Review the summary tab to learn where to focus improvement efforts

    Then complete these activities…

    • Using maturity assessment and existing process data, establish ownership for each process stage
    • Fill in the RASCI Chart based on internal review or existing processes

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM Maturity Assessment Tool

    With these tools & templates:

    • CLM RASCI Diagram

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • A full understanding of your current CLM process and where improvement is required
    • A mapping of stakeholders for each stage of the CLM process

    The Ten Stages of Contract Lifecycle Management

    There are ten key stages of contract lifecycle management.

    The steps are divided into two phases, pre-execution and post-execution.

      Pre-Execution (Phase 1)

    1. Request
    2. Create
    3. Review Risk
    4. Approve
    5. Negotiate
    6. Sign
    7. Post-Execution (Phase 2)

    8. Capture
    9. Manage
    10. Monitor Compliance
    11. Optimize

    Ten Process Stages Within the CLM Framework

    This image contains the CLM framework from earlier in the presentation, with the addition of the following ten steps: 1. Request; 2. Create Contract; 3. Review Risk; 4. Approve; 5. Negotiate; 6. Sign; 7. Capture; 8. Manage; 9. Monitor Compliance; 10. Optimize.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Contract lifecycle management begins with the contract requesting process, where one party requests for or initiates the contracting process and subsequently uses that information for drafting or authoring the contract document. This is usually the first step in CLM.

    Requests for contracts can come from various sources:

    • Business units within the organization
    • Vendors presenting their contract, including renewal agreements
    • System- or process-generated requests for renewal or extension

    At this stage, you need to validate if a non-disclosure agreement (NDA) is currently in place with the other party or is required before moving forward. At times, adequate NDA components could be included within the contract or agreement to satisfy corporate confidentiality requirements.

    Stage 1: Request or Initiate

    Stage Input

    • Information about what the contract needs to contain, such as critical dates, term length, coverage, milestones, etc.
    • Some organizations require that justification and budget approval be provided at this stage.
    • Request could come from a vendor as a pre-created contract.
    • Best practices recommend that a contract request form or template is used to standardize all required information.

    Stage Output

    • Completed request form, stored or posted with all details required to move forward to risk review and contract creation.
    • Possible audit trails.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    • At the creation or drafting stage, the document is created, generated, or provided by the vendor. The document will contain all clauses, scope, terms and conditions, and pricing as required.
    • In some cases, a vendor-presented contract that is already prepared will go through an internal review or redlining process by the business unit and/or Legal.
    • Both internal and external review and redlining are included in this stage.
    • Also at this stage, the approvers and signing authorities are identified and added to the contract. In addition, some audit trail features may be added.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    For a comprehensive list of terms and conditions, see our Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool within Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements.

    Stage 2: Create Contract

    Stage Input

    • Contract request form, risk review/assessment.
    • Vendor- or contractor-provided contract/agreement, either soft copy, electronic form, or more frequently, “clickwrap” web-posted document.
    • Could also include a renewal notification from a vendor or from the CLM system or admin.

    Stage Output

    • Completed draft contract or agreement, typically in a Microsoft Word or Adobe PDF format with audit trail or comment tracking.
    • Redlined document for additional revision and or acceptance.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 1 of 2

    The importance of risk review can not be understated. The contract or agreement must be reviewed by several stakeholders who can identify risks to the organization within the contract.

    Three important definitions:

    1. Risk is the potential for a negative outcome. A risk is crossing the street while wearing headphones and selecting the next track to play on your smartphone. A negative outcome is getting hit by an oncoming person who, unremarkably, was doing something similar at the same time.
    2. Risk mitigation is about taking the steps necessary to minimize both the likelihood of a risk occurring – look around both before and while crossing the street – and its impact if it does occur – fall if you must, but save the smartphone!
    3. Contract risk is about any number of situations that can cause a contract to fail, from trivially – the supplier delivers needed goods late – to catastrophically – the supplier goes out of business without having delivered your long-delayed orders.

    Stage 3: Review Risk 2 of 2

    • Contracts must be reviewed for business terms and conditions, potential risk situations from a financial or legal perspective, business commitments or obligations, and any operational concerns.
    • Mitigating contract risk requires a good understanding of what contracts are in place, how important they are to the success of the organization, and what data they contain.

    Collectively, this is known as contract visibility.

    • Risk avoidance and mitigation are also a key component in the ROI of a CLM system and should be tracked for analysis.
    • Risk-identifying forms or templates can be used to maintain consistency with corporate standards.

    Stage 3: Review Risk

    Stage Input

    • All details of the proposed contract so that a proper risk analysis can be done as well as appropriate review with stakeholders, including:
      • Finance
      • Legal
      • Procurement
      • Security
      • Line-of-business owner
      • IT stakeholders

    Stage Output

    • A list of identified concerns that could expose the business unit or organization.
    • Recommendations to minimize or eliminate identified risks.

    Stage 4: Approve

    The approval stage can be a short process if policies and procedures are already in place. Most organizations will have defined delegation of authority or approval authority depending on risk, value of the contract, and other corporate considerations.

    • Defined approval levels should be known within the organization and can be applied to the approval workflow, expediting the approval of drafted terms, conditions, changes, and cost/spend within the contract internally.
    • Tracking and flexibility needs to considered in the approval process.
    • Gates need to be in place to ensure that a required approver has approved the contract before it moves to the next approver.
    • Flexibility is needed in some situations for ad hoc approval tasks and should include audit trail as required.
    • Approvers can include business units, Finance, Legal, Security, and C-level leaders

    Stage 4: Approve

    Stage Input

    • Complete draft contract with all terms and conditions (T&Cs) and approval trail.
    • Amendment or addendum to existing contract.

    Stage Output

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    • At this stage, there should be an approved draft of the contract that can be presented to the other party or vendor for review.
    • Typically organizations will negotiate their larger deals for terms and conditions with the goal of balancing the contractual allocation of risk with the importance of the vendor or agreement and its value to the business.
    • Several people on either side are typically involved and will discuss legal and commercial terms of the contract. Throughout the process, negotiators may leverage a variety of tools, including playbooks with preferred and fallback positions, clause libraries, document redlines and comparisons, and issue lists.
    • Audit trails or tracking of changes and acceptances is an important part of this stage. Tracking will avoid duplication and lost or missed changes and will speed up the entire process.
    • A final, clean document is created at this point and readied for execution.

    Stage 5: Negotiate

    Stage Input

    • Approved draft contract ready to move to the next step of negotiating with the vendor.
    • Approved amendment or addendum to existing or renewal agreement.

    Stage Output

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Saving the different versions of a contract during negotiations will save time, provide reassurance of agreed terms as you move through the process, and provide reference for future negotiations with the vendor.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    • At this stage in the process, all the heavy lifting in a contract’s creation is complete. Now it’s signature time.
    • To finalize the agreement, both parties need to the sign the final document. This can be done by an in-person wet ink signature or by what is becoming more prevalent, digital signature through an e-signature process.
    • Once complete, the final executed documents are exchanged or received electronically and then retained by each party.

    Stage 6: Sign or Execute

    Stage Input

    • A finalized and approved contract or amendment with agreed-upon terms and conditions ready for signatures.

    Stage Output

    • An executed contract or amendment ready to move to the next stage of CLM, capturing in the repository.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Process flow provisions should made for potential rejection of the contract by signatories, looping the contract back to the appropriate stage for rework or revision.

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 1 of 2

    • This is one of the most important stages of a CLM process. Executed agreements need to be stored in a single manageable, searchable, reportable, and centralized repository.
    • All documents should to be captured electronically, reviewed for accuracy, and then posted to the CLM repository.
    • The repository can be in various formats depending on the maturity, robustness, and budget of the CLM program.

    Most repositories are some type of database:

    • An off-the-shelf product
    • A PaaS cloud-based solution
    • A homegrown, internally developed database
    • An add-on module to your ERP system

    Stage 7: Capture in Database/Repository 2 of 2

    Several important features of an electronic repository should be considered:

    • Consistent metadata tagging of clauses, terms, conditions, dates, etc.
    • Centralized summary view of all contracts
    • Controlled access for those who need to review and manage the contracts

    Establishing an effective repository will be key to providing measurable value to the organization and saving large amounts of time for the business unit.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Planning for future needs by investing a little more money into a better, more robust repository could pay bigger dividends to the VMO and organization while providing a higher ROI over time as advanced functionality is deployed.

    Stage 8: Manage

    • Once an agreement is captured in the repository, it needs to be managed from both an operational and a commitment perspective.
    • Through a summary view or master list, contracts need to be operationally managed for end dates and renewals, vendor performance, discounts, and rebates.
    • Managing contracts for commitment and compliance will ensure all contract requirements, rights, service-level agreements (SLAs), and terms are fulfilled. This will eliminate the high costs of missed SLAs, potential breaches, or missed renewals.
    • Managing contracts can be improved by adding metadata to the records that allow for easier search and retrieval of contracts or even proactive notification.
    • The repository management features can and should be available to business stakeholders, or reporting from a CLM admin can also alert stakeholders to renewals, pricing, SLAs, etc.
    • Also important to this stage is reporting. This can be done by an admin or via a self-serve feature for stakeholders, or it could even be automated.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 1 of 2

    • At this stage, the contracts or agreements need to be monitored for the polices within them and the purpose for which they were signed.
    • This is referred to as obligation management and is a key step to providing savings to the organization and mitigating risk.
    • Many contracts contain commitments by each party. These can include but are not limited to SLAs, service uptime targets, user counts, pricing threshold discounts and rebates, renewal notices to vendors, and training requirements.
    • All of these obligations within the contracts should be summarized and monitored to ensure that all commitments are delivered on. Managing obligations will mitigate risks, maximize savings and rebates to the organization, and minimize the potential for a breach within the contract.

    Stage 9: Monitor Compliance 2 of 2

    • Monitoring and measuring vendor commitments and performance will also be a key factor in maximizing the benefits of the contract through vendor accountability.
    • Also included in this stage is renewal and/or disposition of the contract. If renewal is due, it should go back to the business unit for submission to the Stage 1: Request process. If the business unit is not going to renew the contract, the contract must be tagged and archived for future reference.

    Stage 10: Optimize

    • The goal of this stage is to improve the other stages of the process as well as evaluate how each stage is integrating with the core operational framework processes.
    • With more data and improved insight into contractual terms and performance, a business can optimize its portfolio for better value, greater savings, and lower-risk outcomes.
    • For high-performance contract teams, the goal is a continuous feedback loop between the contract portfolio and business performance. If, for example, the data shows that certain negotiation issues consume a large chunk of time but yield no measurable difference in risk or performance, you may tweak the playbook to remedy those issues quickly.

    Additional optimization tactics:

    • Streamlining contract renewals with auto-renew
    • Predefined risk review process or template, continuous review/improvement of negotiation playbook
    • Better automation or flow of approval process
    • Better signature delegation process if required
    • Improving repository search with metadata tagging
    • Automating renewal tracking or notice process
    • Tracking the time a contract spends in each stage

    Establish Your Current CLM Maturity Position

    • Sometimes organizations have a well-defined pre-execution process but have a poor post-signature process.
    • Identifying your current processes or lack thereof will provide you with a starting point in developing a plan for your CLM. It’s possible that most of the stages are there and just need some improvements, or maybe some are missing and need to be implemented.
    • It’s not unusual for organizations to have a manual pre-execution process and an automated backend repository with compliance and renewal notices features.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Use the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool to outline where your organization is at each stage of the process.

    Member Activity: Assess Current CLM Maturity

    2.1 Completion Time 1-2 days

    Goal: Identify and measure your existing CLM processes, if any, and provide a maturity value to each stage. The resulting scores will provide a maturity assessment of your CLM.

    Instructions

    1. Use the Existing CLM Process Worksheet to document current CLM processes.
    2. Using the CLM worksheet info, answer the questions in the CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.
    3. Review the results and scores on Tab 3 to see where you need to focus your initial improvements.
    4. Save the initial assessment for future reference and reassess in six to 12 months to measure progress.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM Maturity Assessment Tool.

    INPUT

    • Internal information from all CLM stakeholders

    OUTPUT

    • A summary of processes and owners currently in place in the organization

    Materials

    • Existing CLM processes from interviews

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Member Activity: Complete RASCI Chart

    2.2 Completion Time 2-6 hours

    Goal: Identify who in your organization is primarily accountable and involved in each stage of the CLM process.

    Instructions

    Engage internal business unit decision makers, stakeholders, Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, and Procurement as required to validate who should be involved in each stage.

    1. Using the information collected from internal reviews, assign a level in the CLM RASCI Diagram to each team member.
    2. Use the resulting RASCI diagram to guide you through developing or improving your CLM stages.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's CLM RASCI Diagram.

    INPUT

    • Internal interview information

    OUTPUT

    • Understanding of who is involved in each CLM stage

    Materials

    • Interview data
    • RASCI Diagram

    Participants

    • Finance, Legal, CIO, VMO, Sales, Procurement

    Applying CLM Framework and Stages to Your Organization

    • Understand what CLM process you currently do or do not have in place.
    • Review implementation options: automated, semi-automated, and manual solutions.
    • If you are improving an existing process, focus on one phase at a time, perfect it, and then move to the other phase. This can also be driven by budget and time.
    • Create a plan to start with and then move to automating or semi-automating the stages.
    • Building onto or enhancing an existing system or processes can be a cost-effective method to produce near-term measurable savings
    • Focus on one phase at a time, then move on to the other phase.
    • While reviewing implementation of or improvements to CLM stages, be sure to track or calculate the potential time and cost savings and risk mitigation. This will help in any required business case for a CLM.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 1 of 2

    • ROI can be easier to quantify and measure in larger organizations with larger CLM, but ROI metrics can be obtained regardless of the company or CLM size.
    • Organizations recognize their ROI through gains in efficiency across the entire business as well as within individual departments involved in the contracting process. They also do so by reducing the risk associated with decentralized and insecure storage of and access to their contracts, failure to comply with terms of their contracts, and missing deadlines associated with contracts.

    Just a few of the factors to consider within your own organization include:

    • The number of people inside and outside your company that touch your contracts.
    • The number of hours spent weekly, monthly, and annually managing contracts.
    • Potential efficiencies gained in better managing those contracts.
    • The total number of contracts that exist at any given time.
    • The average value and total value of those contract types.
    • The potential risk of being in breach of any of those contracts.
    • The number of places contracts are stored.
    • The level of security that exists to prevent unauthorized access.
    • The potential impact of unauthorized access to your sensitive contract data.

    CLM: An ROI Discussion 2 of 2

    Decision-Maker Apprehensions

    Decision-maker concerns arise from a common misunderstanding – that is, a fundamental failure to appreciate the true source of contract management value. This misunderstanding goes back many years to the time when analysts first started to take an interest in contract management and its automation. Their limited experience (primarily in retail and manufacturing sectors) led them to think of contract management as essentially an administrative function, primarily focused on procurement of goods. In such environments, the purpose of automation is focused on internal efficiency, augmented by the possibility of savings from reduced errors (e.g. failing to spot a renewal or expiry date) or compliance (ensuring use of standard terms).

    Today’s CLM systems and processes can provide ROI in several areas in the business.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Research on ROI of CLM software shows significant hard cost savings to an organization. For example, a $10 million company with 300 contracts valued at $3 million could realize savings of $83,400 and avoid up to $460,000 in lost revenues. (Derived from: ACCDocket, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 1 of 2

    Who should own and/or manage the CLM process within an organization? Legal, VMO, business unit, Sales?

    This is an often-discussed question. Research suggests that there is no definitive answer, as there are several variables.

    Organizations needs to review what makes the best business sense for them based on several considerations and then decide where CLM belongs.

    • Business unit budgets and time management
    • Available Administration personnel and time
    • IT resources
    • Security and access concerns
    • Best fit based on organizational structure

    35% of law professionals feel contract management is a legal responsibility, while 45% feel it’s a business responsibility and a final 20% are unsure where it belongs. (Source: “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics,” Apttus, 2018)

    Additional Considerations 2 of 2

    What type of CLM software or platform should we use?

    This too is a difficult question to answer definitively. Again, there are several variables to consider. As well, several solutions are available, and this is not a one-size-fits-all scenario.

    As with who should own the CLM process, organizations must review the various CLM software solutions available that will meet their current and future needs and then ask, “What do we need the system to do?”

    • Do you build a “homegrown” solution?
    • Should it be an add-on module to the current ERP or CRM system?
    • Is on-premises more suitable?
    • Is an adequate off-the-shelf (OTS) solution available?
    • What about the many cloud offerings?
    • Is there a basic system to start with that can expand as you grow?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When considering what type of solution to choose, prioritize what needs to been done or improved. Sometimes solutions can be deployed in phases as an “add-on” type modules.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Documented current CLM process
    • Core operational framework to build a CLM process on
    • Understanding of best practices required for a sustainable CLM

    Processes Optimized

    • Internal RASCI process identified
    • Existing internal stage improvements
    • Internal review process for risk mitigation

    Deliverables Completed

    • Existing CLM Processes Worksheet
    • CLM Maturity Assessment
    • CLM RASCI Chart
    • CLM improvement plan

    Project Step Summary

    Client Project: CLM Assessment and Improvement Plan

    1. Set your goals – what do you want to achieve in your CLM project?
    2. Assess your organization’s current CLM position in relation to CLM best practices and stages.
    3. Map your organization’s RASCI structure for CLM.
    4. Identify opportunities for stage improvements or target all low stage assessments.
    5. Prioritize improvement processes.
    6. Track ROI metrics.
    7. Develop a CLM implementation or improvement plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project can fit your organization’s schedule:

    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    CLM Blueprint Summary and Conclusion

    • Contract management is a vital component of a responsible VMO that will benefit all business units in an organization, save time and money, and reduce risk exposure.
    • A basic well-deployed and well-managed CLM will provide ROI in the short term.
    • Setting an improvement plan with concise improvements and potential cost savings based on process improvements will help your business case for CLM get approval and leadership buy-in.
    • Educating and aligning all business units and stakeholders to any changes to CLM processes will ensure that cost savings and ROI are achieved.
    • When evaluating a CLM software solution, use the operational framework and the ten process stages in this blueprint as a reference guide for CLM vendor functionality and selection.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Master Contract Review and Negotiation

    Optimize spend with significant cost savings and negotiate from a position of strength.

    Manage Your Vendors Before They Manage You

    Maximize the value of vendor relationships.

    Bibliography

    Burla, Daniel. “The Must Know Of Transition to Dynamics 365 on Premise.” Sherweb, 14 April 2017. Web.

    Anand, Vishal, “Strategic Considerations in Implementing an End-to-End Contract Lifecycle Management Solution.” DWF Mindcrest, 20 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Alspaugh, Zach. “10 Eye-Popping Contract Management Statistics from the General Counsel’s Technology Report.” Apttus, 23 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Bishop, Randy. “Contract Management is not just a cost center.” ContractSafe, 9 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Bryce, Ian. “Contract Management KPIs - Measuring What Matters.” Gatekeeper, 2 May 2019. Web.

    Busch, Jason. “Contract Lifecycle Management 101.” Determine. 4 Jan. 2018. Web.

    “Contract Management Software Buyer's Guide.” TechnologyAdvice, 5 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Dunne, Michael. “Analysts Predict that 2019 will be a Big Year for Contract Lifecycle Management.” Apttus, 19 Nov. 2018. Web.

    “FIS Case Study.” Apttus, n.d. Web.

    Gutwein, Katie. “3 Takeaways from the 2018 State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    “IACCM 2019 Benchmark Report.” IAACM, 4 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Linsley, Rod. “How Proverbial Wisdom Can Help Improve Contract Risk Mitigation.” Gatekeeper, 2 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Mars, Scott. “Contract Management Data Extraction.” Exari, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Rodriquez, Elizabeth. “Global Contract Life-Cycle Management Market Statistics and Trends 2019.” Business Tech Hub, 17 June 2017. Web.

    “State of Contract Management Report.” SpringCM, 2018. Web.

    Teninbaum, Gabriel, and Arthur Raguette. “Realizing ROI from Contract Management Technology.” ACCDocket.com, 29 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Wagner, Thomas. “Strategic Report on Contract Life cycle Management Software Market with Top Key Players- IBM Emptoris, Icertis, SAP, Apttus, CLM Matrix, Oracle, Infor, Newgen Software, Zycus, Symfact, Contract Logix, Coupa Software.” Market Research, 21 June 2019. Web.

    “What is Your Contract Lifecycle Management (CLM) Persona?” Spend Matters, 19 Oct. 2017. Web.

    Application Development Quality

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}26|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}26|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /applications
    Apply quality assurance across your critical development process steps to secure quality to product delivery

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}437|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • PPM suite deployments are complicated and challenging. Vendors and consultants can provide much needed expertise and assistance to organizations deploying new PPM suites.
    • While functional requirements are often defined during the procurement stage (for example, in an RFP), the level of detail during this stage is likely insufficient for actually configuring the solution to your specific PPM needs. Too many organizations fail to further develop these functional requirements between signing their contracts and the official start of their professional implementation engagement.
    • Many organizations fail to organize and record the PPM data they will need to populate the new PPM suite. In almost all cases, customers have the expertise and are in the best position to collect and organize their own data. Leaving this until the vendor or consultant arrives to help with the deployment can result in using your professional services in a suboptimal way.
    • Vendors and consultants want you to prepare for their implementation engagements so that you can make the best use of their expertise and assistance. They want you to deploy a PPM suite that can be sustainably adopted in the long term. All too often, however, they arrive onsite to find customers that are disorganized and underprepared.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Preparing for a professional implementation engagement allows you to make the best use of your professional services, as well as helping to ensure that the PPM suite is deployed according to your specific PPM needs.
    • Involving your internal resources in the preparation of data and in fully defining functional requirements for the PPM suite helps to establish stakeholder buy-in early on, helping to build internal ownership of the solution from the beginning. This avoids the solution being perceived as something the vendor/consultant “forced upon us.”
    • Vendors and consultants are happy when organizations are organized and prepared for their professional implementation engagements. Preparation ensures these engagements are positive experiences for everyone involved.

    Impact and Result

    • Ensure that the data necessary to deploy the new PPM suite is recorded and organized.
    • Make your functional requirements detailed enough to ensure that the new PPM suite can be configured/customized during the deployment engagement in a way that best fits the organization’s actual PPM needs.
    • Through carefully preparing data and fully defining functional requirements, you help the solution become sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why preparing for PPM deployment will ensure that organizations get the most value out of the implementation professional services they purchased and will help drive long-term sustainable adoption of the new PPM suite.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a preparation team and plan

    Engage in purposeful and effective PPM deployment planning by clearly defining what to prepare and when exactly it is time to move from planning to execution.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 1: Create a Preparation Team and Plan
    • Prepare to Deploy PPM Suite Project Charter Template
    • PPM Suite Functional Requirements Document Template
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Excel)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Project)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Communication Plan Template

    2. Prepare project-related requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific project-related functional requirements and collect the appropriate PPM data needed for an effective PPM suite deployment facilitated by vendors/consultants.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 2: Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Deployment Data Workbook
    • PPM Deployment Dashboard and Report Requirements Workbook

    3. Prepare PPM resource requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific resource management functional requirements and data and create a communication and training plan.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 3: Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Suite Transition Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Management Tool

    4. Provide preparation materials to the vendor and implementation professionals

    Plan how to engage vendors/consultants by communicating functional requirements to them and evaluating changes to those requirements proposed by them.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 4: Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan the Preparation Project

    The Purpose

    Select a preparation team and establish clear assignments and accountabilities.

    Establish clear deliverables, milestones, and metrics to ensure it is clear when the preparation phase is complete.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preparation activities will be organized and purposeful, ensuring that you do not threaten deployment success by being underprepared or waste resources by overpreparing.

    Activities

    1.1 Overview: Determine appropriate functional requirements to define and data to record in preparation for the deployment.

    1.2 Create a timeline.

    1.3 Create a charter for the PPM deployment preparation project: record lessons learned, establish metrics, etc.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Deployment Timeline

    Charter for the PPM Suite Preparation Project Team

    2 Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant project-related data so that you are ready to populate the new PPM suite when the vendor/consultant begins their professional implementation engagement with you.

    Clearly define project-related functional requirements to aid in the configuration/customization of the tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data.

    Avoidance of scrambling to find data at the last minute, risking importing out-of-date or irrelevant information into the new software.

    Clearly defined functional requirements that will ensure the suite is configured in a way that can be adoption in the long term.

    Activities

    2.1 Define project phases and categories.

    2.2 Create a list of all projects in progress.

    2.3 Record functional requirements for project requests, project charters, and business cases.

    2.4 Create a list of all existing project requests.

    2.5 Record the current project intake processes.

    2.6 Define PPM dashboard and reporting requirements.

    Outputs

    Project List (basic)

    Project Request Form Requirements (basic)

    Scoring/Requirements (basic)

    Business Case Requirements (advanced)

    Project Request List (basic)

    Project Intake Workflows (advanced)

    PPM Reporting Requirements (basic)

    3 Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant resource-related data.

    Clearly define resource-related functional requirements.

    Create a purposeful transition, communication, and training plan for the deployment period.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data that allows your vendor/consultant to get right to work at the start of the implementation engagement.

    Improved buy-in and adoption through transition, training, and communication activities that are tailored to the actual needs of your specific organization and users.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a portfolio-wide roster of project resources (and record their competencies and skills, if appropriate).

    3.2 Record resource management processes and workflows.

    3.3 Create a transition plan from existing PPM tools and processes to the new PPM suite.

    3.4 Identify training needs and resources to be leveraged during the deployment.

    3.5 Define training requirements.

    3.6 Create a PPM deployment training plan.

    Outputs

    Resource Roster and Competency Profile (basic)

    User Roles and Permissions (basic)

    Resource Management Workflows (advanced)

    Transition Approach and Plan (basic)

    Data Archiving Requirements (advanced)

    List of Training Modules and Attendees (basic)

    Internal Training Capabilities (advanced)

    Training Milestones and Deadlines (basic)

    4 Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals

    The Purpose

    Compile the data collected and the functional requirements defined so that they can be provided to the vendor and/or consultant before the implementation engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Deliverables that record the outputs of your preparation and can be provided to vendors/consultants before the implementation engagement.

    Ensures that the customer is an active and equal partner during the deployment by having the customer prepare their material and initiate communication.

    Vendors and/or consultants have a clear understanding of the customer’s needs and expectations from the beginning.

    Activities

    4.1 Collect, review, and finalize the functional requirements.

    4.2 Compile a functional requirements and data package to provide to the vendor and/or consultants.

    4.3 Discuss how proposed changes to the functional requirements will be reviewed and decided.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Functional Requirements Documents

    PPM Deployment Data Workbook

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}195|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize the organization’s ability to respond to risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establish a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Drive a risk-aware organization toward innovation and consider alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Research & Tools

    Integrated Risk Management Capstone – A framework for how IT risks can be integrated into your organization’s enterprise risk management program to enable strategic risk-informed decisions.

    This is a capstone blueprint highlighting the benefits of an integrated risk management program that uses risk information and data to inform strategic decision making. Throughout this research you will gain insight into the five core elements of integrating risk through assessing, governing, defining the program, defining the process, and implementing.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Capstone
    • Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    • Risk Register Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    Don’t fear IT risks, integrate them.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Having siloed risks is risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Petar Hristov Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance.
    Petar Hristov
    Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Ian Mulholland Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance.
    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Every organization has a threshold for risk that should not be exceeded, whether that threshold is defined or not.

    In the age of digital, information and technology will undoubtedly continue to expand beyond the confines of the IT department. As such, different areas of the organization cannot address these risks in silos. A siloed approach will produce different ways of identifying, assessing, responding to, and reporting on risk events. Integrated risk management is about embedding IT uncertainty to inform good decision making across the organization.

    When risk is integrated into the organization's enterprise risk management program, it enables a single view of all risks and the potential impact of each risk event. More importantly, it provides a consistent view of the risk event in relation to uncertainty that might have once been seemingly unrelated to IT.

    And all this can be achieved while remaining within the enterprise’s clearly defined risk appetite.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Most organizations fail to integrate IT risks into enterprise risks:

    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Common Obstacles

    IT leaders have to overcome these obstacles when it comes to integrating risk:

    • Making business leaders aware of, involved in, and able to respond to all enterprise risks.
    • A lack of data or information being used to support a holistic risk management process.
    • A low level of enterprise risk maturity.
    • A lack of risk management capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By leveraging the Info-Tech Integrated Risk approach, your business can better address and embed risk by:

    • Understanding gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establishing a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Driving a risk-aware organization toward innovation and considering alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Helping integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize its ability to respond to risk.

    What is integrated risk management?

    • Integrated risk management is the process of ensuring all forms of risk information, including information and technology, are considered and included in the enterprise’s risk management strategy.
    • It removes the siloed approach to classifying risks related to specific departments or areas of the organization, recognizing that each of those risks is a threat to the overarching enterprise.
    • Aggregating the different threats or uncertainty that might exist within an organization allows for informed decisions to be made that align to strategic goals and continue to drive value back to the business.
    • By holistically considering the different risks, the organization can make informed decisions on the best course of action that will reduce any negative impacts associated with the uncertainty and increase the overall value.

    Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)

    • IT
    • Security
    • Digital
    • Vendor/Third Party
    • Other

    Enterprise risk management is the practice of identifying and addressing risks to your organization and using risk information to drive better decisions and better opportunities.

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Your challenge

    Embedding IT risks into the enterprise risk management program is challenging because:

    • Most organizations classify risks based on the departments or areas of the business where the uncertainty is likely to happen.
    • Unnecessary expectations are placed on the IT department to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Risks are often only identified when conducting due diligence for a project or ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.

    Risk-mature organizations have a unique benefit in that they often have established an overarching governance framework and embedded risk awareness into the culture.

    35% — Only 35% of organizations had embraced ERM in 2020. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    12% — Only 12% of organizations are leveraging risk as a tool to their strategic advantage. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make integrating IT risks difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT risks are not seen as enterprise risks.
    • The organization’s culture toward risk is not defined.
    • The organization’s appetite and threshold for risk are not defined.
    • Each area of the organization has a different method of identifying, assessing, and responding to risk events.
    • Access to reliable and informative data to support risk management is difficult to obtain.
    • Leadership does not see the business value of integrating risk into a single management program.
    • The organization’s attitudes and behaviors toward risk contradict the desired and defined risk culture.
    • Skills, training, and resources to support risk management are lacking, let alone those to support integrated risk management.

    Integrating risks has its challenges

    62% — Accessing and disseminating information is the main challenge for 62% of organizations maturing their organizational risk management. (Source: OECD)

    20-28% — Organizations with access to machine learning and analytics to address future risk events have 20 to 28% more satisfaction. (Source: Accenture)

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in Enterprise Risk Management.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside Risk Focus

    A diagram titled 'Risk and Controls' beginning with 'Possible Sources' and a list of sources, 'Control Activities' to prevent, the 'RISK EVENT', 'Recovery Activities' to recover, and 'Possible Repercussions' with a list of ramifications.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside and Upside Risk

    Third-Party Risk Example

    Example of a third-party risk mapped onto the diagram on the previous slide, but with potential upsides mapped out as well. The central risk event is 'Vendor exposes private customer data'. Possible Sources of the downside are 'External Attack' with likelihood prevention method 'Define security standard requirements for vendor assessment' and 'Exfiltration of data through fourth-party staff' with likelihood prevention method 'Ensure data is properly classified'. Possible Sources of the upside are 'Application rationalization' with likelihood optimization method 'Reduce number of applications in environment' and 'Review vendor assessment practices' with likelihood optimization method 'Improve vendor onboarding'. Possible Repercussions on the downside are 'Organization unable to operate in jurisdiction' with impact minimization method 'Engage in-house risk mitigation responses' and 'Fines levied against organization' with impact minimization method 'Report incident to any regulators'. Possible Repercussions on the upside are 'Easier vendor integration and management' with impact utilization method 'Improved vendor onboarding practices' and 'Able to bid on contracts with these requirements' with impact utilization method 'Vendors must provide attestations (e.g. SOC or CMMC)'.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Stop fearing risk – integrate it. Integration leads to opportunities for organizations to embrace innovation and new digital technologies as well as reducing operational costs and simplifying reporting.

    Govern risk strategically

    Governance of risk management for information- and technology-related events is often misplaced. Just because it's classified as an IT risk does not mean it shouldn’t be owned by the board or business executive.

    Assess risk maturity

    Integrating risk requires a baseline of risk maturity at the enterprise level. IT can push integrating risks, but only if the enterprise is willing to adopt the attitudes and behaviors that will drive the integrated risk approach.

    Manage risk

    It is not a strategic decision to have different areas of the organization manage the risks perceived to be in their department. It’s the easy choice, but not the strategic one.

    Implement risk management

    Different areas of an enterprise apply risk management processes differently. Determining a single method for identification, assessment, response, and monitoring can ensure successful implementation of enterprise risk management.

    Tactical insight

    Good risk management will consider both the positives and negatives associated with a risk management program by recognizing both the upside and downside of risk event impact and likelihood.

    Integrated risk benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT executives have a responsibility but not accountability when it comes to risk. Ensure the right business stakeholders have awareness and ability to make informed risk decisions.
    • Controls and responses to risks that are within the “IT” realm will be funded and provided with sufficient support from the business.
    • The business respects and values the role of IT in supporting the enterprise risk program, elevating its role into business partner.

    Business Benefits

    • Business executives and boards can make informed responses to the various forms of risk, including those often categorized as “IT risks.”
    • The compounding severity of risks can be formally assessed and ideally quantified to provide insight into how risks’ ramifications can change based on scenarios.
    • Risk-informed decisions can be used to optimize the business and drive it toward adopting innovation as a response to risk events.
    • Get your organization insured against cybersecurity threats at the lowest premiums possible.

    Measure the value of integrating risk

    • Reduce Operating Costs

      • Organizations can reduce their risk operating costs by 20 to 30% by adopting enterprise-wide digital risk initiatives (McKinsey & Company).
    • Increase Cybersecurity Threat Preparedness

      • Increase the organization’s preparedness for cybersecurity threats. 79% of organizations that were impacted by email threats in 2020 were not prepared for the hit (Diligent)
    • Increase Risk Management’s Impact to Drive Strategic Value

      • Currently, only 3% of organizations are extensively using risk management to drive their unique competitive advantage, compared to 35% of companies who do not use it at all (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management).
    • Reduce Lost Productivity for the Enterprise

      • Among small businesses, 76% are still not considering purchasing cyberinsurance in 2021, despite the fact that ransomware attacks alone cost Canadian businesses $5.1 billion in productivity in 2020 (Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021).

    “31% of CIO’s expected their role to expand and include risk management responsibilities.” (IDG “2021 State of the CIO,” 2021)

    Make integrated risk management sustainable

    58%

    Focus not just on the preventive risk management but also the value-creating opportunities. With 58% of organizations concerned about disruptive technology, it’s an opportunity to take the concern and transform it into innovation. (Accenture)

    70%

    Invest in tools that have data and analytics features. Currently, “gut feelings” or “experience” inform the risk management decisions for 70% of late adopters. (Clear Risk)

    54%

    Align to the strategic vision of the board and CEO, given that these two roles account for 54% of the accountability associated with extended enterprise risk management. (Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020,” Deloitte)

    63%

    Include IT leaders in the risk committee to help informed decision making. Currently 63% of chief technology officers are included in the C‑suite risk committee. (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management)

    Successful adoption of integrated risk management is often associated with these key elements.

    Assessment

    Assess your organization’s method of addressing risk management to determine if integrated risk is possible

    Assessing the organization’s risk maturity

    Mature or not, integrated risk management should be a consideration for all organizations

    The first step to integrating risk management within the enterprise is to understand the organization’s readiness to adopt practices that will enable it to successfully integrate information.

    In 2021, we saw enterprise risk management assessments become one of the most common trends, particularly as a method by which the organization can consolidate the potential impacts of uncertainties or threats (Lawton, 2021). A major driver for this initiative was the recognition that information and technology not only have enterprise-wide impacts on the organization’s risk management but that IT has a critical role in supporting processes that enable effective access to data/information.

    A maturity assessment has several benefits for an organization: It ensures there is alignment throughout the organization on why integrated risk is the right approach to take, it recognizes the organization’s current risk maturity, and it supports the organization in defining where it would like to go.

    Pie chart titled 'Organizational Risk Management Maturity Assessment Results' showing just under half 'Progressing', a third 'Established', a seventh 'Emerging', and a very small portion 'Leading or Aspirational'.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understand the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Maturity should inform your approach to risk management

    The outcome of the risk maturity assessment should inform how risk management is approached within the organization.

    A row of waves starting light and small and becoming taller and darker in steps. The levels are 'Non-existent', 'Basic', 'Partially Integrated', 'Mostly Integrated', 'Fully Integrated', and 'Optimized'.

    For organizations with a low maturity, remaining superficial with risk will offer more benefits and align to the enterprise’s risk tolerance and appetite. This might mean no integrated risk is taking place.

    However, organizations that have higher risk maturity should begin to integrate risk information. These organizations can identify the nuances that would affect the severity and impact of risk events.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organization.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}596|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Many organizations have introduced mentoring programs without clearly defining and communicating the purpose and goals around having a program; they simply jumped on the mentoring bandwagon.
    • As a result, these programs have little impact. They don’t add value for mentors, mentees, or the organization.
    • It can be difficult to design a program that is well-suited to your organization, will be adopted by employees, and will drive the results you are looking for.
    • In particular, it is difficult to successfully match mentors and mentees so both derive maximum value from the endeavor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • As workforce composition shifts, there is a need for mentoring programs to move beyond the traditional senior–junior format option; organizational culture and goals will dictate the best approach.
    • An organization’s mentoring program doesn’t need to be restricted to one format; individual preferences and goals should also factor in. Be open to choosing format on a case-by-case basis.
    • Be sure to gain upper management buy-in and support early to ensure mentoring becomes a valued part of your organization.
    • Ensure that goal setting, communication, ongoing support for participants, and evaluation all play a role in your mentoring program.

    Impact and Result

    • Mentoring can have a significant positive impact on mentor, mentee, and organization.
    • Mentees gain guidance and advice on their career path and skill development. Mentors often experience re-engagement with their job and the satisfaction of helping another person.
    • Mentoring participants benefit from obtaining different perspectives of both the business and work-related problems. Participation in a mentoring program has been linked to greater access to promotions, pay raises, and increased job satisfaction.
    • Mentoring can have a number of positive outcomes for the organization, including breaking down silos, transferring institutional knowledge, accelerating leadership skills, fostering open communication and dialogue, and resolving conflict.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align the mentoring program with the organizational culture and goals

    Build a best-fit program that creates a learning culture.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High Performing Learning Organization

    2. Assess the organizational culture and current mentoring program

    Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    • Mentoring Program Diagnostic

    3. Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    Track project progress and have all program details defined in a central location.

    • Mentoring Project Plan Template
    • Peer Mentoring Guidelines
    • Mentoring Program Guidelines

    4. Gather feedback from the mentoring program participants

    Evaluate the success of the program.

    • Mentoring Project Feedback Surveys Template

    5. Get mentoring agreements in place

    Improve your mentoring capabilities.

    • Mentee Preparation Checklist
    • Mentoring Agreement Template
    [infographic]

    Modernize Your SDLC

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}148|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,263 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing backlog, jeopardizing product success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivery quality and throughput go hand in hand. Focus on meeting minimum process and product quality standards first. Improved throughput will eventually follow.
    • Business integration is not optional. The business must be involved in guiding delivery efforts, and ongoing validation and verification product changes.
    • The software development lifecycle (SDLC) must deliver more than software. Business value is generated through the products and services delivered by your SDLC. Teams must provide the required product support and stakeholders must be willing to participate in the product’s delivery.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of a successful product. Come to an organizational agreement of what defines a high-quality and successful product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
    • Clarify the roles, processes, and tools to support business value delivery and satisfy stakeholder expectations. Indicate where and how key roles are involved throughout product delivery to validate and verify work items and artifacts. Describe how specific techniques and tools are employed to meet stakeholder requirements.
    • Focus optimization efforts on most affected stages. Reveal the health of your SDLC from the value delivery, business and technical practice quality standards, discipline, throughput, and governance perspectives with a diagnostic. Identify and roadmap the solutions to overcome the root causes of your diagnostic results.

    Modernize Your SDLC Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your SDLC, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set your SDLC context

    State the success criteria of your SDLC practice through the definition of product quality and organizational priorities. Define your SDLC current state.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 1: Set Your SDLC Context
    • SDLC Strategy Template

    2. Diagnose your SDLC

    Build your SDLC diagnostic framework based on your practice’s product and process objectives. Root cause your improvement opportunities.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 2: Diagnose Your SDLC
    • SDLC Diagnostic Tool

    3. Modernize your SDLC

    Learn of today’s good SDLC practices and use them to address the root causes revealed in your SDLC diagnostic results.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 3: Modernize Your SDLC
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your SDLC

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your SDLC Context

    The Purpose

    Discuss your quality and product definitions and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

    Review your case for strengthening your SDLC practice.

    Review the current state of your roles, processes, and tools in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of products and quality that is accepted across the organization.

    Clear business and IT objectives and metrics that dictate your SDLC practice’s success.

    Defined SDLC current state people, process, and technologies.

    Activities

    1.1 Define your products and quality.

    1.2 Define your SDLC objectives.

    1.3 Measure your SDLC effectiveness.

    1.4 Define your current SDLC state.

    Outputs

    Product and quality definitions.

    SDLC business and technical objectives and vision.

    SDLC metrics.

    SDLC capabilities, processes, roles and responsibilities, resourcing model, and tools and technologies.

    2 Diagnose Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the components of your diagnostic framework.

    Review the results of your SDLC diagnostic.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    SDLC diagnostic framework tied to your SDLC objectives and definitions.

    Root causes to your SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Build your diagnostic framework.

    2.2 Diagnose your SDLC.

    Outputs

    SDLC diagnostic framework.

    Root causes to SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    3 Modernize Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the SDLC practices used in the industry.

    Review the scope and achievability of your SDLC optimization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness and efficiency of your SDLC.

    Realistic and achievable SDLC optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Learn and adopt SDLC good practices.

    3.2 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Optimization initiatives and target state SDLC practice.

    SDLC optimization roadmap, risks and mitigations, and stakeholder communication flow.

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}427|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Leadership Development Programs
    • Parent Category Link: /leadership-development-programs
    • Ninety-one percent of IT leaders believe that analytics is important for talent management but 59% use no workforce analytics at all, although those who use analytics are much more effective than those who don't.
    • The higher the level of analytics used, the higher the level of effectiveness of the department as a whole.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You don't need advanced metrics and analytics to see a return on people data. Begin by getting a strong foundation in place and showing the ROI on a pilot project.
    • Complex analyses will never make up for inadequate data quality. Spend the time up front to audit and improve data quality if necessary, no matter which stage of analytics proficiency you are at.
    • Ensure you collect and analyze only data that is essential to your decision making. More is not better, and excess data can detract from the overall impact of analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Build a small-scale foundational pilot, which will allow you to demonstrate feasibility, refine your costs estimate, and show the ROI on people analytics for your budgeting meeting.
    • Drive organizational change incrementally by identifying and communicating with the stakeholders for your people analytics pilot.
    • Choose basic analytics suitable for organizations of all sizes and understand the building blocks of data quality to support more further analytics down the line.

    Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically apply people analytics to your IT talent management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define the problem and apply the checklist

    From choosing the right data for the right problem to evaluating your progress toward data-driven people decisions, follow these steps to build your foundation to people analytics.

    • Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions – Phase 1: Define the Problem and Apply the Checklist
    • People Analytics Strategy Template
    • Talent Metrics Library
    [infographic]

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}176|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Through growth, both organic and acquisition, you have a significant footprint of projects and applications.
    • Projects and applications have little in common with one another, all with their own history and pedigree.
    • You need to look across your portfolio of applications and projects to see if they will collectively help the organization achieve its goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stakeholders don’t care about the minutia and activities involved in project and application portfolio management.
    • Timely delivery of effective and important applications that deliver value throughout their life are the most important factors driving business satisfaction with IT.

    Impact and Result

    • Define an organizing principle that will structure your projects and applications in a way that matters to your stakeholders.
    • Bridge application and project portfolio data using the organizing principle that matters to communicate with stakeholders across the organization.
    • Create a dashboard that brings together the benefits of both project and application portfolio management to improve visibility and decision making.

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should integrate your application and project portfolios, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the three ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define the principle that organizes your portfolios, objectives, and stakeholders

    To bring your portfolios together, you need to start with learning about your objectives, principles, and stakeholders.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 1: Define the Principle That Organizes Your Portfolios, Objectives, and Stakeholders
    • Integrated Portfolio Dashboard Tool
    • Integrated Portfolio Dashboard Tool – Example

    2. Take stock of what brings you closer to your goals

    Get a deeper understanding of what makes up your organizing principle before learning about your applications and projects that are aligned with your principles.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 2: Take Stock of What Brings You Closer to Your Goals

    3. Bring it all together

    Bound by your organizing principles, bring your projects and applications together under a single dashboard. Once defined, determine the rollout and communication plan that suits your organization.

    • Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value – Phase 3: Bring It All Together
    • Integrated Portfolio Communication and Roadmap Plan
    • Integrated Portfolio Communication and Roadmap Plan Example
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Looking at Your Principles

    The Purpose

    Determine your organizational objectives and organizing principle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear understanding of where you need to go as an organization.

    A clear way to enable all parts of your portfolio to come together.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine your organization’s objectives.

    1.2 Determine your key stakeholders.

    1.3 Define your organizing principle.

    1.4 Decompose your organizing principle into its core components.

    Outputs

    Determined organizing principle for your applications and projects

    2 Understanding Your Applications

    The Purpose

    Get a clear view of the applications that contribute to your organization’s objectives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A key element of IT value delivery is its applications. Gaining awareness allows you to evaluate if the right value is being provided.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your complete list of applications.

    2.2 Determine the health of your applications.

    2.3 Link your applications to the organization’s core components.

    Outputs

    List of applications

    Application list with health statistics filled in

    List of applications with health metrics bound to the organization’s core components

    3 Understanding Your Projects

    The Purpose

    Get a clear view of your project portfolio and how it relates to your applications and their organizing principle.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of your project portfolio.

    Activities

    3.1 List all in-flight projects and vital health statistics.

    3.2 Map out the key programs and projects in your portfolio to the application’s core components.

    Outputs

    List of projects

    List of projects mapped to applications they impact

    4 Rolling Out the New Dashboard

    The Purpose

    Bring together your application and project portfolios in a new, easy-to-use dashboard with a full rollout plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dashboard available for use

    Roadmap and communication plan to make dashboard implementable and tangible

    Activities

    4.1 Test the dashboard.

    4.2 Define your refresh cadence.

    4.3 Plan your implementation.

    4.4 Develop your communication plan.

    Outputs

    Validated dashboards

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}140|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.8/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $73,994 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • SAP has strict audit practices, which, in combination with 50+ types of user classifications and manual accounting for some licenses, make maintaining compliance difficult.
    • Mapping and matching SAP products to the environment can be highly complex, leading to overspending and an inability to reduce spend later.
    • Beware of indirect access to SAP applications from third-party applications (e.g. Salesforce).
    • Products that have been acquired by SAP may have altered licensing terms that are innocuously referred to in support renewal documents.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on needs first. Conduct a thorough requirements assessment and document the results. Well-documented license needs will be your core asset in navigating SAP licensing and negotiating your agreement.
    • Examine indirect access possibilities. Understanding how in-house or third-party applications may be accessing the SAP software is critical.
    • Know whats in the contract. Each customer agreement is different and there may be terms that are beneficial. Older agreements may provide both benefits and challenges when evaluating your SAP license position.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct an analysis to remove inactive and duplicate users as multiple logins may exist and could end up costing the organization license fees when audited.
    • Adopt a cyclical approach to reviewing your SAP licensing and create a reference document to track your software needs, planned licensing, and purchase negotiation points.
    • Learn the “SAP way” of conducting business, which includes a best-in-class sales structure, unique contracts and license use policies, and a hyper-aggressive compliance function. Conducting business with SAP is not typical compared to other vendors, and you will need different tools to emerge successfully from a commercial transaction.
    • Manage SAP support and maintenance spend and policies. Once an agreement has been signed, it can be very difficult to decrease spend, as SAP will reprice products if support is dropped.

    Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your SAP licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish licensing requirements

    Begin your proactive SAP licensing journey by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 1: Establish Licensing Requirements
    • SAP License Summary and Analysis Tool

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current licensing models and determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit your environment.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review SAP’s contract types and assess which best fit the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, and finalize a licensing management strategy.

    • Explore the Secrets of SAP Software Contracts to Optimize Spend and Reduce Compliance Risk – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    [infographic]

    Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}189|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $471,249 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 53 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • As an enterprise PMO leader, you need to evolve your PMO framework beyond an IT-centric model of project portfolio management (PPM) to optimize communication and coordination on enterprise-wide initiatives.
    • While senior leaders are demanding greater uniformity in strategic project execution, individual departments currently operate—to the detriment of the organization—as sovereign silos.
    • You know that the answer is a more strategically aligned enterprise PMO framework, but you’re unsure of how to start building the case for one, especially when the majority of upper management view PMOs as support entities rather than strategic partners.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An EPMO can’t simply be imposed on an organization. If it is not backed by an executive sponsor, then there needs to be an identifiable business value in implementing one, and you need to communicate this value to stakeholders throughout the enterprise.
    • EPMOs add value not by enforcing project or program governance, but by helping organizations achieve strategic goals and manage change.
    • EPMOs enable organizations to succeed on enterprise-wide initiatives by connecting the individual parts to the whole. They should serve as the coordinating mechanism that ensures the flow of information and resources across departments and programs.

    Impact and Result

    • Find the right balance between a command and control approach that dictates governance standards versus an approach that gives business units flexibility to manage projects, programs, and portfolios the way they see fit, as long as they meet certain reporting, process, and record keeping requirements.
    • Effectively define the EPMO’s role, reach, and authority in terms of Portfolio Governance, Project Leadership, and PPM Administration. An organizationally appropriate mix of these three practices will not only ensure stakeholder buy-in, but it will help foster the right conditions for EPMO success.
    • Build strong cross-departmental relationships upon soft or informal grounds by positioning your EPMO as your organization’s portfolio network, i.e. an enterprise hub that facilitates the flow of reliable information and enables timely responsiveness to change.

    Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how implementing an EPMO could help your organization achieve business goals, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and discover the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gather requirements

    Evaluate executive stakeholder needs and assess your current capabilities to ensure your implementation strategy sets realistic expectations.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 1: Gather Requirements
    • EPMO Capabilities Survey

    2. Define the plan

    Define an organizationally appropriate scope and mandate for your EPMO to ensure that your processes serve the needs of the whole.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 2: Define the Plan
    • EPMO Charter Template
    • EPMO Communication Planning Template

    3. Implement the plan

    Establish clearly defined and easy-to-follow EPMO processes that minimize project complexity and improve enterprise project results.

    • Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO – Phase 3: Implement the Plan
    • EPMO Process Guide and SOP Template
    • EPMO Communications Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Define and Deploy an Enterprise PMO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Identify breakdowns in the flow of portfolio data across the enterprise to pinpoint where and how an EPMO can best intervene.

    Assess areas of strength and opportunity in your PPM capabilities to help structure and drive the EPMO.

    Define stakeholder needs and expectations for the EPMO in order to cultivate capabilities and services that help drive informed and engaged project decisions at the executive level.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A current state picture of the triggers that are driving the need for an EPMO at your organization.

    A current state understanding of the strengths you bring to the table in constructing an EPMO as well as the areas you need to focus on in building up your capabilities.

    A target state set by stakeholder requirements and expectations, which will enable you to build out an implementation strategy that is aligned with the needs of the executive layer.

    Activities

    1.1 Map current enterprise PPM workflows.

    1.2 Conduct a SWOT analysis.

    1.3 Identify resourcing considerations and other implementation factors.

    1.4 Survey stakeholders to establish the right mix of EPMO capabilities.

    Outputs

    An overview of the flow of portfolio data and information across the organization

    An overview of current strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

    A preliminary assessment of internal and external factors that could impact the success of this implementation

    The ability to construct a project plan that is aligned with stakeholder needs and expectations

    2 Define the Plan

    The Purpose

    Define an appropriate scope for the EPMO and the deployment it services.

    Devise a plan for engaging and including the appropriate stakeholders during the implementation phase.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear purview for the EPMO in relation to the wider enterprise in order to establish appropriate expectations for the EPMO’s services throughout the organization.

    Engaged stakeholders who understand that they have a stake in the successful implementation of the EPMO.

    Activities

    2.1 Prepare your EPMO value proposition.

    2.2 Define the role and organizational reach of your EPPM capabilities.

    2.3 Establish a communication plan to create stakeholder awareness.

    Outputs

    A clear statement of purpose and benefit that can be used to help build the case for an EPMO with stakeholders

    A functional charter defining the scope of the EPMO and providing a statement of the services the EPMO will provide once established

    An engaged executive layer that understands the value of the EPMO and helps drive its success

    3 Implement the Plan

    The Purpose

    Establish clearly defined and easy-to-follow EPMO processes that minimize project complexity.

    Develop portfolio and project governance structures that feed the EPMO with the data decision makers require without overloading enterprise project teams with processes they can’t support.

    Devise a communications strategy that helps achieve organizational buy-in.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    The reduction of project chaos and confusion throughout the organization.

    Processes and governance requirements that work for both decision makers and project teams.

    Organizational understanding of the universal benefit of the EPMO’s processes to stakeholders throughout the enterprise. 

    Activities

    3.1 Establish EPMO roles and responsibilities.

    3.2 Document standard procedures around enterprise portfolio reporting, PPM administration, and project leadership.

    3.3 Review enterprise PPM solutions.

    3.4 Develop a stakeholder engagement and resistance plan.

    Outputs

    Clear lines of portfolio accountability

    A fully actionable EPMO Standard Operating Procedure document that will enable process clarity

    An informed understanding of the right PPM solution for your enterprise processes

    A communications strategy document to help communicate the organizational benefits of the EPMO

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}334|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,535 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • IT needs a method to pinpoint which contact center solution best aligns with business objectives, adapting to a post-COVID world of remote work, flexibility, and scalability.
    • Scoring RFP and RFQ proposals is a complex process, and it is difficult to map and gap without a clear view of the organization’s needs. SOWs can contain pitfalls that cause expensive headaches for the organization in the long run. Guidance through a SOW is required to best represent the organization’s interests.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “On-premises versus cloud” is a false dichotomy. Contact center architectures come in all shapes and sizes, and organizations should discern whether a hybrid option best meets their needs.
    • Contact centers should service customers – not capabilities. Capabilities must work for you, your agents, and your customers – not the other way around.
    • Deliverables and responsibilities should be a contract’s focal point. While organizations are right to focus on avoiding unanticipated license charges, it is more important to clearly define how deliverables and responsibilities will be divided among the organization, the vendor, and potential third parties.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess the array of contact center architectures with Info-Tech’s Contact Center Decision Points Tool to select a right-sized solution.
    • Build business requirements in a formalized process to achieve stakeholder buy-in.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool to evaluate and choose from a range of vendors.
    • Successfully navigate and avoid major pitfalls in a SOW construction.
    • Justify each stage of the process with this blueprint’s key deliverable: the Contact Center Playbook.

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to examine the current contact center marketspace, review Info-Tech’s methodology for choosing a right-sized contact center solution, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Contact Center Architectures

    Establish your project vision and metrics of success before shortlisting potential contact center architectures and deciding which is right-sized for the organization.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 1: Assess Contact Center Architectures
    • Contact Center Playbook
    • Contact Center Decision Points Tool

    2. Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors

    Build business requirements to achieve stakeholder buy-in, define key deliverables, and issue an RFP/RFQ to shortlisted vendors.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 2: Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors
    • Requirements Gathering Documentation Tool
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Contact Center Business Requirements Document
    • Request for Quotation Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template

    3. Score Vendors and Construct SOW

    Score RFP/RFQ responses and decide upon a vendor before constructing a SOW.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 3: Score Vendors and Construct SOW
    • Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool
    • Contact Center SOW Template and Guide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Architecture

    The Purpose

    Shortlist and decide upon a right-sized contact center architecture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level decision for a right-sized architecture

    Activities

    1.1 Define vision and mission statements.

    1.2 Identify infrastructure metrics of success.

    1.3 Confirm key performance indicators for contact center operations.

    1.4 Complete architecture assessment.

    1.5 Confirm right-sized architecture.

    Outputs

    Project outline

    Metrics of success

    KPIs confirmed

    Quickly narrow down right-sized architecture

    Decision on right-sized contact center architecture

    2 Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Build business requirements and define key deliverables to achieve stakeholder buy-in and shortlist potential vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key deliverables defined and a shortlist of no more than five vendors

    Sections 7-8 of the Contact Center Playbook completed

    Activities

    2.1 Hold focus groups with key stakeholders.

    2.2 Gather business, nonfunctional, and functional requirements.

    2.3 Define key deliverables.

    2.4 Shortlist five vendors that appear meet those requirements.

    Outputs

    User requirements identified

    Business Requirements Document completed

    Key deliverables defined

    Shortlist of five vendors

    3 Initial Vendor Scoring

    The Purpose

    Compare and evaluate shortlisted vendors against gathered requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a strong overview of which vendors are preferred for issuing RFP/RFQ

    Section 9 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    3.1 Input requirements to the Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool. Define which are mandatory and which are desirable.

    3.2 Determine which vendors best meet requirements.

    3.3 Compare requirements met with anticipated TCO.

    3.4 Compare and rank vendors.

    Outputs

    An assessment of requirements

    Vendor scoring

    A holistic overview of requirements scoring and vendor TCO

    An initial ranking of vendors to shape RFP process after workshop end

    4 SOW Walkthrough

    The Purpose

    Walk through the Contact Center SOW Template and Guide to identify how much time to allocate per section and who will be responsible for completing it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of a SOW that is designed to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    Section 10 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    4.1 Get familiar with the SOW structure.

    4.2 Identify which sections will demand greater time allocation.

    4.3 Strategize how to avoid potential pitfalls.

    4.4 Confirm reviewer responsibilities.

    Outputs

    A broad understanding of a SOW’s key sections

    A determination of how much time should be allocated for reviewing major sections

    A list of ways to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    A list of reviewers, the sections they are responsible for reviewing, and their time allocation for their review

    5 Communicate and Implement

    The Purpose

    Finalize deliverables and plan post-workshop communications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed Contact Center Playbook that justifies each decision of this workshop

    Activities

    5.1 Finalize deliverables.

    5.2 Support communication efforts.

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Contact Center Playbook delivered

    Post-workshop engagement to confirm satisfaction

    Follow-up research that complements the workshop or leads workshop group in relevant new directions

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}281|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • Organizations see the value of mobile applications in improving productivity and reach of day-to-day business and IT operations. This motivates leaders to begin the planning of their first application.
    • However, organizations often lack the critical foundational knowledge and skills to deliver and maintain high quality and valuable applications that meet business and user priorities and technical requirements.
    • Mobile technologies and trends are continually evolving and maturing. It is hard to predict which trends will make a significant impact and to prepare current mobile investments to harness their value of these trends.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mobile applications can stress the stability, reliability, and overall quality of your enterprise systems and services. They will also increase your security risks because of the exposure of your enterprise technology assets to unsecured networks and devices.
    • High costs of entry may restrict what built-in features your users can have in their mobile experience. Workarounds may not be sufficient to offset the costs of certain built-in feature needs.
    • Many operating models do not enable or encourage the collaboration required to fully understand user needs and behaviors and evaluate mobile opportunities and underlying operational systems from multiple perspectives.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Understand your mobile users by learning their needs, challenges, and behaviors. Discuss the current state of your systems and your high priority non-functional requirements to determine what to expect from your mobile applications.
    • Choose the right mobile platform approach and shortlist your mobile delivery solutions. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your mobile opportunities, including current mobile delivery capabilities and system compatibilities.
    • Create your mobile roadmap. Describe the gradual rollout of your mobile technologies through minimal valuable products (MVPs).

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Storyboard

    This blueprint helps you develop an approach to understand the mobile experience your stakeholders want your users to have and select the appropriate platform and delivery tools to meet these expectations.

    • Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools Storyboard

    2. Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template – Clearly communicate the goal and approach of your mobile application implementation in a language your audience understands.

    This template narrates a story to describe the need and expectations of your low- and no-code initiative to get buy-in from stakeholders and interested parties.

    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Choose Your Platform and Delivery Solution

    The Purpose

    Choose the right mobile platform.

    Shortlist your mobile delivery solution and desired features and services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A chosen mobile platform that meets user and enterprise needs.

    Candidate mobile delivery solutions that meet your delivery needs and capacity of your teams.

    Activities

    1.1 Select your platform approach.

    1.2 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution.

    1.3 Build your feature and service lists.

    Outputs

    Desired mobile platform approach.

    Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions.

    Desired list of vendor features and services.

    2 Create Your Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Design the mobile application minimal viable product (MVP).

    Create your mobile roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An achievable and valuable mobile application that is scalable for future growth.

    Clear intent of business outcome delivery and completing mobile delivery activities.

    Activities

    2.1 Define your MVP release.

    2.2 Build your roadmap.

    Outputs

    MVP design.

    Mobile delivery roadmap.

    3 Set the Mobile Context

    The Purpose

    Understand your user’s environment needs, behaviors, and challenges.

    Define stakeholder expectations and ensure alignment with the holistic business strategy.

    Identify your mobile application opportunities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough understanding of your mobile user and opportunities where mobile applications can help.

    Level set stakeholder expectations and establish targeted objectives.

    Prioritized list of mobile opportunities.

    Activities

    3.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps.

    3.2 Build your mobile application canvas.

    3.3 Build your mobile backlog.

    Outputs

    User personas.

    Mobile objectives and metrics.

    Mobile opportunity backlog.

    4 Identify Your Technical Needs

    The Purpose

    Define the mobile experience you want to deliver and the features to enable it.

    Understand the state of your current system to support mobile.

    Identify your definition of mobile application quality.

    List the concerns with mobile delivery.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear understanding of the desired mobile experience.

    Potential issues and risks with enabling mobile on top of existing systems.

    Grounded understanding of mobile application quality.

    Holistic readiness assessment to proceed with mobile delivery.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss your mobile needs.

    4.2 Conduct a technical assessment.

    4.3 Define mobile application quality.

    4.4 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications.

    Outputs

    List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience.

    System current assessment.

    Mobile application quality definition.

    Verification to proceed with mobile delivery.

    Further reading

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Maximize the value of your mobile investments by prioritizing technology decisions on user experience, business priorities, and system quality.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Mobile is the way of working.

    Workers require access to enterprise products, data, and services anywhere at anytime on any device. Give them the device-specific features, offline access, desktop-like interfaces, and automation capabilities they need to be productive.

    To be successful, you need to instill a collaborative business-IT partnership. Only through this partnership will you be able to select the right mobile platform and tools to balance desired outcomes with enterprise security, performance, integration, quality, and other delivery capacity concerns.

    This is a picture of Andrew Kum-Seun Senior Research Analyst, Application Delivery and Application Management Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Senior Research Analyst,
    Application Delivery and Application Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Organizations see the value of mobile applications in improving productivity and reach of day-to-day business and IT operations. This motivates leaders to begin the planning of their first application.
    • However, organizations often lack the critical foundational knowledge and skills to deliver and maintain high quality and valuable applications that meet business and user priorities and technical requirements.
    • Mobile technologies and trends are continually evolving and maturing. It is hard to predict which trends will make a significant impact and to prepare current mobile investments to harness the value of these trends.

    Common Obstacles

    • Mobile applications can stress the stability, reliability and overall quality of your enterprise systems and services. They will also increase your security risks because of the exposure of your enterprise technology assets to unsecured networks and devices.
    • High costs of entry may restrict what native features your users can have in their mobile experience. Workarounds may not be sufficient to offset the costs of certain native feature needs.
    • Many operating models do not enable or encourage the collaboration required to fully understand user needs and behaviors and evaluate mobile opportunities and underlying operational systems from multiple perspectives.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Establish the right expectations. Understand your mobile users by learning their needs, challenges, and behaviors. Discuss the current state of your systems and your high priority non-functional requirements to determine what to expect from your mobile applications.
    • Choose the right mobile platform approach and shortlist your mobile delivery solutions. Obtain a thorough view of the business and technical complexities of your mobile opportunities, including current mobile delivery capabilities and system compatibilities.
    • Create your mobile roadmap. Describe the gradual rollout of your mobile technologies through minimal valuable products (MVPs).

    Insight Summary

    Overarching Info-Tech Insight

    Treat your mobile applications as digital products. Digital products are continuously modernized to ensure they are fit-for-purpose, secured, accessible, and immersive. A successful mobile experience involves more than just the software and supporting system. It involves good training and onboarding, efficient delivery turnaround, and a clear and rational vision and strategy.

    Phase 1: Set the Mobile Context

    • Build applications your users need and desire – Design the right mobile application that enables your users to address their frustrations and productivity challenges.
    • Maximize return on your technology investments – Build your mobile applications with existing web APIs, infrastructure, and services as much as possible.
    • Prioritize mobile security, performance and integration requirements – Understand the unique security, performance, and integration influences has on your desired mobile user experience. Find the right balance of functional and non-functional requirements through business and IT collaboration.

    Phase 2: Define Your Mobile Approach

    • Start with a mobile web platform - Minimize disruptions to your existing delivery process and technical stack by building against common web standards. Select a hybrid platform or cross-platform if you need device hardware access or have complicated non-functional requirements.
    • Focus your mobile solution decision on vendor support and functional complexity – Verify that your solution is not only compatible with the architecture, data, and policies of existing business systems, but satisfies IT's concerns with access to restricted technology and data, and with IT's ability to manage and operate your applications.
    • Anticipate changes, defects & failures in your roadmap - Quickly shift your mobile roadmaps according to user feedback, delivery challenges, value, and stability.

    Mobile is how the business works today

    Mobile adoption continues to grow in part due to the need to be a mobile workforce, and the shift in customer behaviors. This reality pushed the industry to transform business processes and technologies to better support the mobile way of working.

    Mobile Builds Interests
    61%
    Mobile devices drove 61% of visits to U.S. websites
    Source: Perficient, 2021

    Mobile Maintains Engagement
    54%
    Mobile devices generated 54.4% of global website traffic in Q4 2021.
    Source: Statista, 2022

    Mobile Drives Productivity
    82%
    According to 82% of IT executives, smartphones are highly important to employee productivity
    Source: Samsung and Oxford Economics, 2022

    Mobile applications enable and drive your digital business strategy

    Organizations know the criticality of mobile applications in meeting key business and digital transformation goals, and they are making significant investments. Over half (58%) of organizations say their main strategy for driving application adoption is enabling mobile access to critical enterprise systems (Enterprise CIO, 2016). The strategic positioning and planning of mobile applications are key for success.

    Mobile Can Motivate, Support and Drive Progress in Key Activities Underpinning Digital Transformation Goals

    Goal: Enhance Customer Experience

    • A shift from paper to digital communications
    • Seamless, omni-channel client experiences across devices
    • Create Digital interactive documents with sections that customers can customize to better understand their communications

    Goal: Increase Workflow Throughput & Efficiency

    • Digitized processes and use of data to improve process efficiency
    • Modern IT platforms
    • Automation through robotic process automation (RPA) where possible
    • Use of AI and machine learning for intelligent automation

    Source: Broadridge, 2022

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Define Your Digital Business Strategy blueprint.

    Well developed mobile applications bring unique opportunities to drive more value

    Role

    Opportunities With Mobile Applications

    Expected Value

    Stationary Worker

    Design flowcharts and diagrams, while abandoning paper and desktop applications in favor of easy-to-use, drawing tablet applications.

    Multitask by checking the application to verify information given by a vendor during their presentation or pitch.

    • Reduce materials cost to complete administrative responsibilities.
    • Digitally and automatically store and archive frequently used documents.

    Roaming Worker
    (Engineer)

    Replace physical copies of service and repair manuals with digital copies, and access them with mobile applications.

    Scan or input product bar code to determine whether a replacement part is available or needs to be ordered.

    • Readily access and update corporate data anywhere at anytime.
    • Expand employee responsibilities with minimal skills impact.

    Roaming Worker
    (Nurse)

    Log patient information according to HIPAA standards and complete diagnostics live to propose medication for a patient.

    Receive messages from senior staff about patients and scheduling while on-call.

    • Quickly and accurately complete tasks and update patient data at site.
    • Be readily accessible to address urgent issues.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you build it, they may not come. Design and build the applications your user wants and needs, and ensure users are properly onboarded and trained. Learn how your applications are leveraged, capture feedback from the user and system dashboards, and plan for enhancements, fixes, and modernizations.

    Workers expect IT to deliver against their high mobile expectations

    Workers want sophisticated mobile applications like what they see their peers and competitors use.

    Why is IT considering building their own applications?

    • Complex and Unique Workflows: Canned templates and shells are viewed as incompatible to the workflows required to complete worker responsibilities outside the office, with the same level of access to corporate data as on premise.
    • Supporting Bring Your Own Device (BYOD): Developing your own mobile applications around your security protocols and standards can help mitigate the risks with personal devices that are already in your workforce.
    • Long-Term Architecture Misalignment: Outsourcing mobile development risks the mobile application misaligned with your quality standards or incompatible with other enterprise and third-party systems.

    Continuously meeting aggressive user expectations will not be easy

    Value Quickly Wears Off
    39.9% of users uninstall an application because it is not in use.
    40%
    Source: n=2,000, CleverTap, 2021

    Low Tolerance to Waiting
    Keeping a user waiting for 3 seconds is enough to dissatisfy 43% of users.
    43%
    Source: AppSamurai, 2018

    Quick Fixes Are Paramount
    44% of defects are found by users
    44%
    Source: Perfecto Mobile, 2014

    Mobile emphasizes the importance of good security, performance, and integration

    Today's mobile workers are looking for new ways to get more work done quickly. They want access to enterprise solutions and data directly on their mobile devices, which can reside on multiple legacy systems and in the cloud and third-party infrastructure. This presents significant performance, integration, and security risks.

    Cloud Solutions: Can I use my existing APIs?. Solutions in Corporate Networks: Do my legacy systems have the capacity to support mobile?; How do I integrate solutions and data from multiple sources into a single view?; Third Party Solutions: Will I have a significant performance bottleneck?; Single View on Mobile Devices: How is corporate data stored on the device?; What new technology dependencies must I account for in my architecture and operational support capabilities?

    Accept change as the norm

    IT is challenged with keeping up with disruptive technologies, such as mobile, which are arriving and changing faster and faster.

    What is the issue? Mobile priorities, concepts, and technologies do not remain static. For example, current Google's Pixels benefit from at least three versions of Android updates and at least three years of monthly security patches after their release (NextPit, 2022). Keeping up to date with anything mobile is difficult if you do not have the right delivery and product management practices in place.

    What is the impact on IT? Those who fail to prepare for changing requirements and technologies will quickly run into maintainability, extensibility, and flexibility issues. Mobile applications will quickly become stale and misaligned with the maturity of other enterprise infrastructure and applications.

    Continuously look at the trends, vendor roadmaps, and your user's feedback to envision where your mobile applications should be. Learning from your past attempts gives you insights on the opportunities and impacts changes will have on your people, process, and technology.

    How do I address this issue? A well-defined mobile vision and roadmap ensures your initiatives are aligned with your holistic business and technology strategies, the right problem is being solved, and resources are available to deliver high priority changes.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Address the difficulties in managing enterprise mobile technologies

    Adaptability During Development

    Teams must be ready to alter their mobile approach when new insights and issues arise during and after the delivery of your mobile application and its updates.

    High Cybersecurity Standards

    Cybersecurity should be a top priority given the high security exposure of mobiles and the sensitive data mobile applications need to operate. Role-based access, back-up systems, advanced scanning, and protection software and encryption should all be implemented.

    Integration with Other Systems

    Your application will likely be integrated with other systems to expand service offerings and optimize performance and user experience. Your enterprise integration strategy ensures all systems connect against a common pattern with compatible technologies.

    Finding the Right Mobile Developers

    Enterprise mobile delivery requires a broad skillset to build valuable applications against extensive non-functional requirements in complex and integration environments. The right resources are even harder to find when native applications are preferred over web-based ones.

    Source: Radoslaw Szeja, Netguru, 2022.

    Build and manage the right experience by treating mobile as digital products

    Digital products are continuously modernized to ensure they are fit-for-purpose, secured, insightful, accessible, and interoperable. A good experience involves more than just technology.

    First, deliver the experience end users want and expect by designing the application against digital application principles.

    Business Value

    Continuous modernization

    • Fit for purpose
    • User-centric
    • Adaptable
    • Accessible
    • Private and secured
    • Informative and insightful
    • Seamless application connection
    • Relationship and network building

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your Applications blueprint.

    Then, deliver a long-lasting experience by supporting your applications with key governance and management capabilities.

    • Product Strategy and Roadmap
    • External Relationships
    • User Adoption and Organizational Change Management
    • Funding
    • Knowledge Management
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Product Governance
    • Maintenance & Enhancement
    • User Support
    • Managing and Governing Data
    • Requirements Analysis and Design
    • Research & Development

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Make the Case for Product Delivery blueprint.

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    Maximize the value of your mobile investments by prioritizing technology decisions on user experience, business priorities, and system quality.

    WORKFLOW

    1. Capture Your User Personas and Journey workflow: Trigger: Step 1; Step 2; Step 3; Step 4; Outcome
    2. Select Your Platform Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.
    3. Shortlist Your Solutions A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Strategic Perspective
    Business and Product Strategies

    1. End-User Perspective

    End User Needs

    • Productivity
    • Innovation
    • Transformation

    Native User Experience

    • Anytime, Anywhere
    • Visually Pleasing & Fulfilling
    • Personalized & Insightful
    • Hands-Off & Automated
    • Integrated Ecosystem

    2. Platform Perspective

    Technical Requirements

    Security

    Performance

    Integration

    Mobile Platform

    3. Solution Perspective

    Vendor Support

    Services

    Stack Mgmt.

    Quality & Risk

    Mobile Delivery Solutions

    Make user experience (UX) the standard

    User experience (UX) focuses on a user's emotions, beliefs, and physical and psychological responses that occur before, during, or after interacting with a service or product.

    For a mobile application to be meaningful, the functions, aesthetics and content must be:

    • Usable
      • Users can intuitively navigate through your mobile application and complete their desired tasks.
    • Desirable
      • The application elements are used to evoke positive emotions and appreciation.
    • Accessible
      • Users can easily use your mobile application, including those with disabilities.
    • Valuable
      • Users find the content useful, and it fulfills a need.

    Enable a greater experience with UX-driven thinking

    Designing for a high-quality experience requires more than just focusing on the UI. It also requires the merging of multiple business, technical, and social disciplines in order to create an immersive, practical, and receptive application. The image on the right explains the disciplines involved in UX. This is critical for ensuring users have a strong desire to use the mobile application, it is adequately supported technically, and it supports business objectives.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice blueprint.

    A Venn diagram is depicted, demonstrating the inputs that lead to an interactive design, with interactive elements, usability, and accessibility. This work by Mark Roden is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License.

    Source: Marky Roden, Xomino, 2018

    Define the mobile experience your end users want

    • Anytime, Anywhere
      • The user can access, update and analyze data and corporate products and services whenever they want, in all networks, and on any device.
    • Hands-Off and Automated
      • The application can perform various workflows and tasks without the user's involvement and notify the user when specific triggers are hit.
    • Personalized and Insightful
      • Content presentation and subject are tailored for the user based on specific inputs from the user, device hardware, or predicted actions.
    • Integrated Ecosystem
      • The application supports a seamless experience across various third-party and enterprise applications and services the user needs.
    • Visually Pleasing and Fulfilling
      • The UI is intuitive and aesthetically gratifying, with little security and performance trade-offs to use the full breadth of its functions and services.

    Each mobile platform has its own take on the mobile native experience. The choice ultimately depends on whether the costs and effort are worth the anticipated value.

    Mobile value is dependent on the platform you choose

    What is a platform?

    "A platform is a set of software and a surrounding ecosystem of resources that helps you to grow your business. A platform enables growth through connection: its value comes not only from its own features, but from its ability to connect external tools, teams, data, and processes." (Source: Emilie Nøss Wangen, 2021) In the mobile context, applications in a platform execute and communicate through a loosely-coupled API architecture, whether the supporting system is managed and supported by your organization or by third-party providers.

    Web

    Mobile web applications are deployed and executed within the mobile web browser. They are often developed with a combination of web and scripting languages, such as HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. Web often takes two forms on mobile:

    • Progressive Web Applications (PWA)
    • Mobile Web Sites

    Hybrid

    Hybrid applications are developed with web technologies but are deployed as native applications. The code is wrapped using a framework so that it runs locally within a native container. It uses the device's browser runtime engine to support more sophisticated designs and features than to the web approach.

    Cross-Platform

    Cross-platform applications are developed within a distinct programming or scripting environment that uses its own scripting language (often like web languages) and APIs. The solution compiles the code into device-specific builds for native deployment.

    Native

    Native applications are developed and deployed to specific devices and OSs using platform-specific software development kits (SDKs) provided by the operating system vendors. The programming language and framework are dictated by the targeted device, such as Java for Android.

    Start mobile development on a mobile web platform

    Start with what you have: begin with a mobile web platform to minimize impacts to your existing delivery skill sets and technical stack while addressing business needs. Resort to a hybrid first. Then consider a cross-platform application if you require device access or need to meet specific non-functional requirements.

    Why choose a mobile web platform?

    Pros

    The latest versions of the most popular web languages (HTML5, CSS3, JavaScript) abstract away from the granular, physical components of the application, simplifying the development process. HTML5 offer some mobile features (e.g. geolocation, accelerometer) that can meet your desired experience without the need for native development skills. Native look-and-feel, high performance, and full device access are just a few tradeoffs of going with web languages.

    Cons

    Native mobile platforms depend on device-specific code which follows specific frameworks and leverages unique programming libraries, such as Objective C for iOS and Java for Android. Each language requires a high level of expertise in the coding structure and hardware of specific devices. This requires resources with specific skillsets and different tools to support development and testing.

    Other Notable Benefits with Web Languages

    • Modern browsers in most mobile devices can execute and render many mobile features developed in web languages, allowing for greater portability and sophistication of code across multiple devices. However, this flexibility comes at the cost of performance since the browser's runtime engine will not perform as well as a native engine.
    • Web languages are well known by developers, minimizing skills and resourcing impacts. Consequently, changes can be quickly accommodated and updated uniformly across all end users.

    Select your mobile platform

    Drive your mobile platform selection against user-centric needs (e.g. device access, aesthetics) and enterprise-centric needs (e.g. security, system performance).

    When does a platform makes sense to use?

    Web

    • Desire to maximize current web technologies investments (people, process, and technologies).
    • Use cases do not require significant computational resources on the device or are tightly constrained by non-functional requirements.
    • Limited budget to acquire mobile development resources.
    • Access to device hardware is not a high priority.

    Hybrid / Cross-Platform

    • The need to quickly spin up native-like applications for multiple platforms and devices.
    • Desire to leverage existing web development skills, but also a need for device access and meeting specific non-functional requirements.
    • Vendor support is needed for the entire mobile delivery process.

    Native

    • Developers are experts in the target programming language and with the device's hardware.
    • Strong need for high performance, security, and device-specific access and customizations.
    • Application use cases require significant computing resources.

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.

    Understand the common attributes of a mobile delivery solution

    • Source Code Management – Built-in or having the ability to integrate with code management solutions for branching, merging, and versioning. Debugging and coding assistance capabilities may be available.
    • Single Code Base – Capable of programming in a standard coding and scripting language for deployment into several platforms and devices. This code base is aligned to a common industry framework (e.g. AngularJS, Java) or a vendor-defined one.
    • Out-of-the-Box Connectors & Plug-ins – Pre-built APIs enhance the solution's capabilities with third-party tools and systems to deliver and manage high quality and valuable mobile applications.
    • Emulators – Ability to virtualize an application's execution on a target platform and device.
    • Support for Native Features – Supports plug-ins and APIs for access to device-specific features.

    What are mobile delivery solutions?

    A mobile delivery solution provides the tools, resources, and support to enable or build your mobile application. It can provide pre-built applications, vendor supported components to allow some configurations, or resources for full stack customizations. Solutions can be barebone software development kits (SDKs), or comprehensive suites offering features to support the entire software delivery lifecycle, such as:

    • Mobile application management
    • Testing and publishing to app stores
    • Content management
    • Cloud hosting
    • Application performance management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mobile enablement and development capabilities are already embedded in many common productivity tools and enterprise applications, such as Microsoft PowerApps and ERP modules. They can serve as a starting point in the initial rollout of new management and governance practices without the need to acquire new tools.

    Select your mobile delivery solutions

    1. Set the scope of your framework.
    • The initial context of this framework is based on the mobile functions needed to support your desired mobile experience and on the current state of your enterprise and 3rd party systems.
  • Define the decision factors for your solution selection.
    • Review the decision factors that will influence the selection of your mobile delivery solution for each mobile opportunity:
    • Stack Management – Who will be hosting and supporting your mobile application stack?
    • Workflows Complexity & Native Experience – How complex is your desired mobile experience and how will native device features be leveraged?
  • Select your solution type.
    • Mobile delivery solutions are broadly defined in the following groups:
    • Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) – Pre-built mobile applications requiring little to no configurations or implementation effort.
    • Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform – Back-end and mid-tier infrastructure and operational support are managed by a vendor.
    • Cross-Platform Development – Frameworks that transform a single code base into platform-specific builds.
    • Hybrid Development – Tools that wrap a single code base into a locally deployable build.
    • Custom Web Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile web applications.
    • Custom Native Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile native applications.
  • A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Optimize your software delivery process

    Mobile brings new delivery and management challenges that are often difficult for organizations that are tied to legacy systems, hindered by rigid and slow delivery lifecycles, and are unable to adopt leading-edge technologies. Many of these challenges stem from the fact that mobile is a significant shift from desktop development:

    • Mobile devices and operating systems are heavily fragmented, especially in the Android space.
    • Test coverage is significantly expanded to include physical environments and multiple network connections.
    • Mobile devices do not have the same performance capabilities and memory storage as their desktop counterparts.
    • The user interface must be strategically designed to accommodate the limited screen size.
    • Mobile applications are highly susceptible to security breaches.
    • Mobile users often expect quick turnaround time on fixes and enhancements due to continuously changing technology, business priorities, and user needs.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your SDLC blueprint.

    How should the process change?

    • Cross-functional collaboration – Bringing business and IT together at the most opportune times to clarify user needs and business priorities, and set realistic expectations given technology and capacity constraints. The appropriate tactics and techniques are used to improve decision making and delivery effectiveness according to the type of work.
    • Iterative delivery – Frequent delivery of progressive changes minimizes the risk of low-quality features by containing and simplifying scope, and enables responsive turnarounds of fixes, enhancements, and priority changes.
    • Feedback loops –Mobile application owners constantly review, update and refine their backlog of mobile features and changes to reflect user feedback and system performance metrics. Delivery teams proactively prepare the application for future scaling based on lessons and feedback learned from earlier releases.

    Achieve mobile success with MVPs

    By delivering mobile capabilities in small iterations, teams recognize value sooner and reduce accumulated risk. Both benefits are realized as the iteration enters validation testing and release.

    This image depicts a graph of the learn-build-measure cycle over time, adapted from Managing the Development of Large Software Systems, Dr. Winston W. Royce, 1970

    An MVP focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to:

    • Maximize learning.
    • Evaluate the value and acceptance of mobile applications.
    • Inform the building of a mobile delivery practice.

    The build-measure-learn loop suggests mobile delivery teams should perpetually take an idea and develop, test, and validate it with the mobile development solution, then expand on the MVP using the lessons learned and evolving ideas. In this sense the MVP is just the first iteration in the loop.

    Gauge the value with the right metrics

    Metrics are a powerful way to drive behavior change in your organization. But metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes so they must be used with great care. Use metrics judiciously to avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively blueprint.

    What should I measure?

    1. Mobile Application Engagement, Retention and User Satisfaction
      1. The activeness of users on the applications, the number of returning users, and the happiness of the users.
      2. Example: Number of tasks completed, number of active and returning users, session length and intervals, user satisfaction
    2. Value Driven from Mobile Applications
      1. The business value that the user directly or indirectly receives with the mobile application.
      2. Example: Mobile application revenue, business operational costs, worker productivity, business reputation and image
    3. Delivery Throughput and Quality
      1. The health and quality of your mobile applications throughout their lifespan and the speed to deliver working applications that meet stakeholder expectations.
      2. Example: Frequency of release, lead time, request turnaround, escaped defects, test coverage.

    Use Info-Tech's diagnostic to evaluate the reception of your mobile applications

    Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic is a canned end-user satisfaction survey used to evaluate your application portfolio health to support data-driven decisions.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic

    USE THE PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC TO:

    • Assess the importance and satisfaction of enterprise applications.
    • Solicit feedback from your end users on applications being used.
    • Understand the strengths and weaknesses of your current applications.
    • Perform a high-level application rationalization initiative.

    INTEGRATE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS TO:

    • Target which applications to analyze in greater detail.
    • Expand on the initial application rationalization results with a more comprehensive and business-value-focused criteria.

    Grow your mobile delivery practice

    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations

    You understand the opportunities and impacts mobile has on your business operations and its disruptive nature on your enterprise systems. Your software delivery lifecycle was optimized to incorporate the specific practices and requirements needed for mobile. A mobile platform was selected based on stakeholder needs that are weighed against current skillsets, high priority non-functional requirements, the available capacity and scalability of your stack, and alignment to your current delivery process.

    Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery

    New features and mobile use cases are regularly emerging in the industry. Ensuring your mobile platform and delivery process can easily scale to incorporate constantly changing mobile features and technologies is key. This can help minimize the impact these changes will have on your mobile stack and the resulting experience.

    Achieving this state requires three competencies: mobile security, performance optimization, and integration practices.

    Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    Many of today's mobile trends involve, in one form or another, hardware components on the mobile device (e.g., NFC receivers, GPS, cameras). You understand the scope of native features available on your end user's mobile device and the required steps and capabilities to enable and leverage them.

    Hit a home run with your stakeholders

    Use a data-driven approach to select the right tooling vendor for your needs – fast.

    Awareness Education & Discovery Evaluation Selection

    Negotiation & Configuration

    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization 2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends 3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics 4.1 Create a Weighted Selection Decision Model 5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation with Top Two Venders
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action 2.2 Discover Alternate Solutions & Conduct Market Education 3.2 Conduct a Data Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities 4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities with Top 2-4 Vendors 5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration

    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment

    2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application Portfolio Narrow the Field to Four Top Contenders 4.3 Validate Key Issues with Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks 5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation 2.4 Validate the Business Case 5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Investing time improving your software selection methodology has big returns.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you're looking to select. Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology in Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Pitch your mobile delivery approach with Info-Tech's template

    Communicate the justification of your approach to mobile applications with Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template:

    • Level set your mobile application goals and objectives by weighing end user expectations with technical requirements.
    • Define the high priority opportunities for mobile applications.
    • Educate decision makers of the limitations and challenges of delivering specific mobile experiences with the various mobile platform options.
    • Describe your framework to select the right mobile platform and delivery tools.
    • Lay out your mobile delivery roadmap and initiatives.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Info-Tech's methodology for mobile platform and delivery solution selection

    1. Set the Mobile Context

    2. Define Your Mobile Approach

    Phase Steps

    Step 1.1 Build Your Mobile Backlog

    Step 1.2 Identify Your Technical Needs

    Step 1.3 Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    Step 2.1 Choose Your Platform Approach

    Step 2.2 Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution

    Step 2.3 Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    Phase Outcomes

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Understand the case and motivators for mobile applications.

    Call #2: Discuss the end user and desired mobile experience.

    Call #5: Discuss the desired mobile platform.

    Call #8: Discuss your mobile MVP.

    Call #3: Review technical complexities and non-functional requirements.

    Call #6: Shortlist mobile delivery solutions and desired features.

    Call #9: Review your mobile delivery roadmap.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 9 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Post-Workshop
    Activities Set the Mobile Context Identify Your Technical Needs Choose Your Platform & Delivery Solution Create Your Roadmap Next Steps andWrap-Up (offsite)

    1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    2.1 Discuss your mobile needs

    2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    2.3 Define mobile application quality

    2.4 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    3.1 Select your platform approach

    3.2 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    3.3 Build your feature and service lists

    4.1 Define your MVP release

    4.2 Build your roadmap

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Verification to proceed with mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap
    • Completed workshop output deliverable
    • Next steps

    Phase 1

    Set the Mobile Context

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    • Step 1.1 – Build Your Mobile Backlog
    • Step 1.2 – Identify Your Technical Needs
    • Step 1.3 – Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Step 1.1

    Build Your Mobile Backlog

    Activities

    1.1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1.1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1.1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog

    Users expect your organization to support their mobile way of working

    Today, users expect sophisticated and personalized features, immersive interactions, and cross-platform capabilities from their mobile applications and be able to access information and services anytime, anywhere and on any device. These demands are pushing organizations to become more user-driven, placing greater importance on user experience (UX) with enterprise-grade technologies.

    How has technologies evolved to easily enable mobile capabilities?

    • Desktop-Like Features
      • Native-like features, such as geolocation and local caching, are supported through web language or third-party plugins and extensions.
    • Extendable & Scalable
      • Plug-and-play architecture is designed to allow software delivery teams to explore new use cases and mobile capabilities with out-of-the-box connectors and/or customizable REST APIs.
    • Low Barrier to Entry
      • Low- and no-code development tools, full-stack solutions, and plug-and-play architectures allow non-technical users to easily build and implement applications without direct IT involvement.
    • Templates & Shells
      • Vendors provide UI templates and application shells that contain pre-built native features and multiple aesthetic layouts in a publishing-friendly and configurable way.
    • Personalized Content
      • Content can be uniquely tailored to a user's preference or be automatically generated based on the user's profile or activity history.
    • Hands-Off Operations
      • Many mobile solutions operate in a as-a-service model where the underlying and integrated technologies are managed by the vendor and abstracted away.

    Make user experience (UX) the standard

    User experience (UX) focuses on a user's emotions, beliefs, and physical and psychological responses that occur before, during, or after interacting with a service or product.

    For a mobile application to be a meaningful experience, the functions, aesthetics and content must be:

    • Usable
      • Users can intuitively navigate through your mobile application and complete their desired tasks.
    • Desirable
      • The application elements are used to evoke positive emotions and appreciation.
    • Accessible
      • Users can easily use your mobile application, including those with disabilities.
    • Valuable
      • Users find the content useful, and it fulfills a need.

    Enable a greater experience with UX-driven thinking

    Designing for a high-quality experience requires more than just focusing on the UI. It also requires the merging of multiple business, technical, and social disciplines in order to create an immersive, practical, and receptive application. The image on the right explains the disciplines involved in UX. This is critical for ensuring users have a strong desire to use the mobile application, it is adequately supported technically, and it supports business objectives.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice blueprint.

    A Venn diagram is depicted, demonstrating the inputs that lead to an interactive design, with interactive elements, usability, and accessibility. This work by Mark Roden is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License.

    Source: Marky Roden, Xomino, 2018

    UX-driven mobile apps bring together a compelling UI with valuable functionality

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations often over-rotate on the UI. Receptive and satisfying applications require more than just pretty pictures, bold colors, and flashy animations. UX-driven mobile applications require the seamless merging of enticing design elements and valuable functions that are specifically tailored to the behaviors of the users. Take a deep look at how each design element and function is used and perceived by the user, and how your application can sufficiently support user needs.

    UI-Function Balance to Achieve Highly Satisfying Mobile Applications

    An application's UI and function both contribute to UX, but they do so in different ways.

    • The UI generates the visual, audio, and vocal cues to draw the attention of users to key areas of the application while stimulating the user's emotions.
    • Functions give users the means to satisfy their needs effortlessly.

    Finding the right balance of UI and function is dependent on the organization's understanding of user emotions, needs, and tendencies. However, these factors are often left out of an application's design. Having the right UX competencies is key in assuring user behaviors are appropriately accommodated early in the delivery process.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value blueprint.

    Focus your efforts on all items that drive high user experience and satisfaction

    UX-driven mobile applications involve all interaction points and system components working together to create an immersive experience while being actively supported by delivery and operations teams. Many organizations commonly focus on visual and content design to improve the experience, but this is only a small fraction of the total UX design. Look beyond the surface to effectively enhance your application's overall UX.

    Typical Focus of Mobile UX

    Aesthetics
    What Are the Colors & Fonts?

    Relevance & Modern
    Will Users Receive Up to Date Content and Trending Features?

    UI Design
    Where Are the Interaction Points?

    Content Layout
    How Is Content Organized?

    Critical Areas of Mobile UX That Are Often Ignored

    Web Infrastructure
    How Will Your Application Be Operationally Supported?

    Human Behavior
    What Do the Users Feel About Your Application?

    Coding Language
    What Is the Best Language to Use?

    Cross-Platform Compatibility
    How Does It Work in a Browser Versus Each Mobile Platform?

    Application Quality
    How are Functional and Non-Functional Needs Balanced?

    Adoption & Retention
    How Do I Promote Adoption and Maintain User Engagement?

    Application Support
    How Will My Requests and Issues Be Handled?

    Use personas to envision who will be using your mobile application

    What Are Personas?

    Personas are detailed descriptions of the targeted audience of your mobile application. It represents a type of user in a particular scenario. Effective personas:

    • Express and focus on the major needs and expectations of the most important user groups.
    • Give a clear picture of the typical user's behavior.
    • Aid in uncovering critical features and functionalities.
    • Describe real people with backgrounds, goals, and values.

    Why Are Personas Important to UX?

    They are important because they help:

    • Focus the development of mobile application features on the immediate needs of the intended audience.
    • Detail the level of customization needed to ensure content is valuable to and resonates with the user.
    • Describe how users may behave when certain audio and visual stimulus are triggered from the mobile application.
    • Outline the special design considerations required to meet user accessibility needs.

    Key Elements of a Persona:

    • Professional and Technical Skills and Experiences (e.g., knowledge of mobile applications, area of expertise)
    • Persona Group (e.g., executives)
    • Technological Environment of User (e.g., devices, browsers, network connection)
    • Demographics (e.g., nationality, age, language spoken)
    • Typical Behaviors and Tendencies (e.g., goes to different website when cannot find information in 20 seconds)
    • Purpose of Using the Mobile Application (e.g., search for information, submit registration form)

    Create empathy maps to gain a deeper understanding of stakeholder personas

    Empathy mapping draws out the characteristics, motivations, and mannerisms of a potential end user.

    This image contains an image of an empathy map from XPLANE, 2017. it includes the following list: 1. Who are we empathizing with; 2. What do they need to DO; 3. What do they SEE; 4. What do they SAY?; 5. What do they DO; 6. What do they HEAR; 7. What do they THINK and FEEL.

    Source: XPLANE, 2017

    Empathy mapping focuses on identifying the problems, ambitions, and frustrations they are looking to resolve and describes their motivations for wanting to resolve them. This analysis helps your teams:

    • Better understand the reason behind the struggles, frustrations and motivators through a user's perspective.
    • Verify the accuracy of assertions made about the user.
    • Pinpoint the specific problem the mobile application will be designed to solve and the constraints to its successful adoption and on-going use.
    • Read more about empathy mapping and download the empathy map PDF template here.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Use Experience Design to Drive Empathy with the Business blueprint.

    1.1.1 Generate user personas with empathy maps

    1-3 hours

    1. Download the Empathy Map Canvas and draw the map on a whiteboard or project it on the screen.
    2. Choose an end user to be the focus of your empathy map. Using sticky notes, fill out the sections of the empathy map in the following order:
      1. Start by filling out the goals section. State who the subject of the empathy map will be and what activity or task you would like them to do.
        1. Focus on activities and tasks that may benefit from mobile.
      2. Next, complete the outer sections in clockwise order (see, say, do, hear). The purpose of this is to think in terms of what the subject of your empathy map is observing, sensing, and experiencing.
        1. Indicate the mobile devices and OS users will likely use and the environments they will likely be in (e.g., places with poor connections)
        2. Discuss accessibility needs and how user prefer to consume content.
      3. Last, complete the inner circle of the empathy map (pains and gains). Since you spent the last step of the exercise thinking about the external influences on your stakeholder, you can think about how those stimuli affect their emotions.
    3. Document your end user persona into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • List of potential mobile application users
    • User personas
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.1.1 cont'd

    This image contains an image of an empathy map from XPLANE, 2017. it includes the following list: 1. Who are we empathizing with; 2. What do they need to DO; 3. What do they SEE; 4. What do they SAY?; 5. What do they DO; 6. What do they HEAR; 7. What do they THINK and FEEL.

    Download the Empathy Map Canvas

    Many business priorities are driving mobile

    Mobile Applications

    • Product Roadmap
      • Upcoming enterprise technology releases and updates offer mobile capabilities to expand its access to a broader userbase.
    • Cost Optimization
      • Maximizing business value in processes and technologies through disciplined and strategic cost and spending reduction practices with mobile applications.
    • Competitive Differentiation
      • Developing and optimizing your organization's distinct products and services quickly with mobile applications.
    • Digital Transformation
      • Transitioning processes, data and systems to a digital environment to broaden access to enterprise data and services anywhere at anytime.
    • Operational Efficiency
      • Improving software delivery and business process throughput by increasing worker productivity with mobile applications.
    • Other Business Priorities
      • New corporate products and services, business model changes, application rationalization and other priorities may require modernization, innovation and a mobile way of working.

    Focus on the mobile business and end user problem, not the solution

    People are naturally solution-focused. The onus isn't on them to express their needs in the form of a problem statement!

    When refining your mobile problem statement, attempt to answer the following four questions:

    • Who is impacted?
    • What is the (user or organizational) challenge that needs to be addressed?
    • Where does it happen?
    • Why does it matter?

    There are many ways of writing problem statements, a clear approach follows the format:

    • "Our (who) has the problem that (what) when (where). Our solution should (why)."
    • Example: "Our system analysts has the problem that new tickets take too long to update when working on user requests. Our approach should enable the analyst to focus on working with customers and not on administration."

    Adapted from: "Design Problem Statements – What and How to Frame Them"

    How to write a vision statement

    It's ok to dream a little!

    When thinking about a vision statement, think about:

    • Who is it for?
    • What does the customer need?
    • What can we do for them?
    • And why is this special?

    There are different statement templates available to help form your vision statements. Some include:

    1. For [our target customer], who [customer's need], the [product] is a [product category or description] that [unique benefits and selling points]. Unlike [competitors or current methods], our product [main differentiators]. (Crossing the Chasm)
    2. "We believe (in) a [noun: world, time, state, etc.] where [persona] can [verb: do, make, offer, etc.], for/by/with [benefit/goal].
    3. To [verb: empower, unlock, enable, create, etc.] [persona] to [benefit, goal, future state].
    4. Our vision is to [verb: build, design, provide], the [goal, future state], to [verb: help, enable, make it easier to...] [persona]."

    (Numbers 2-4 from: How to define a product vision)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A vision shouldn't be so far out that it doesn't feel real and so short term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding that right balance will take some trial and error and will be different depending on your organization.

    Ensure mobile supports ongoing value delivery and stakeholder expectations

    Success hinges on your team's ability to deliver business value. Well-developed mobile applications instill stakeholder confidence in ongoing business value delivery and stakeholder buy-in, provided proper expectations are set and met.

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit Generation – The revenue generated from a business capability with mobile applications.
    • Cost Reduction – The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with mobile applications.
    • Service Enablement – The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations with mobile applications.
    • Customer and Market Reach – Metrics measuring the improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    See our Build a Value Measurement Framework blueprint for more information about business value definition.

    This image contains a quadrant analysis with the following labels: Left - Improved Capabilities; Top - Outward; Right - Financial Benefit; Bottom - Inward. the quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Customer and Market Reach; Profit Generation; Service Enhancement; Cost Reduction

    Set realistic mobile goals

    Mobile applications enables the exploration of new and different ways to improve worker productivity and deliver business value. However, the realities of mobile applications may limit your ability to meet some of your objectives:

    • On the day of installation, the average retention rate for public-facing applications was 25.3%. By day 30, the retention rate drops to 5.7%. (Source: Statista, 2020)
    • 63% of 3,335 most popular Android mobile applications on the Google Play Store contained open-source components with known security vulnerabilities and other pervasive security concerns including exposing sensitive data (Source: Synopsys, 2021)
    • 62% of users would delete the application because of performance issues, such as crashes, freezes and other errors (Source: Intersog, 2021).

    These realities are not guaranteed to occur or impede your ability to deliver valuable mobile applications, but they can lead to unachievable expectations. Ensure your stakeholders are not oversold on advertised benefits and hold you accountable for unrealistic objectives. Recognize that the organization must also change how it works and operates to see the full benefit and adoption of mobile applications and overcome the known and unknown challenges and hurdles that often come with mobile delivery.

    Benchmarks present enticing opportunities, but should be used to set reasonable expectations

    66%
    Improve Market Reach
    66% of the global population uses a mobile device
    Source: DataReportal, 2021

    20%
    Connected Workers are More Productive
    Nearly 20 percent of mobile professionals estimate they miss more than three hours of working time a week not being able to get connected to the internet
    Source: iPass, 2017

    80%
    Increase Brand Recognition
    80% of smartphone users are more likely to purchase from companies whose mobile sites of apps help them easily find answers to their questions
    Source: Google, 2018

    Gauge the value with the right metrics

    Metrics are a powerful way to drive behavior change in your organization. But metrics are highly prone to creating unexpected outcomes so they must be used with great care. Use metrics judiciously to avoid gaming or ambivalent behavior, productivity loss, and unintended consequences.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively blueprint.

    What should I measure?

    1. Mobile Application Engagement, Retention and User Satisfaction
      • The activeness of users on the applications, the number of returning users, and the happiness of the users.
      • Example: Number of tasks completed, number of active and returning users, session length and intervals, user satisfaction
    2. Value Driven from Mobile Applications
      • The business value that the user directly or indirectly receives with the mobile application.
      • Example: Mobile application revenue, business operational costs, worker productivity, business reputation and image
    3. Delivery Throughput and Quality
      • The health and quality of your mobile applications throughout their lifespan and the speed to deliver working applications that meet stakeholder expectations.
      • Example: Frequency of release, lead time, request turnaround, escaped defects, test coverage.

    Use Info-Tech's diagnostic to evaluate the reception of your mobile applications

    Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic is a canned end user satisfaction survey used to evaluate your application portfolio health to support data-driven decisions.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) Diagnostic

    USE THE PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC TO:

    • Assess the importance and satisfaction of enterprise applications.
    • Solicit feedback from your end users on applications being used.
    • Understand the strengths and weaknesses of your current applications.
    • Perform a high-level application rationalization initiative.

    INTEGRATE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS TO:

    • Target which applications to analyze in greater detail.
    • Expand on the initial application rationalization results with a more comprehensive and business-value-focused criteria.

    Use a canvas to define key elements of your mobile initiative

    Mobile Application Initiative Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    Problem Statement

    Vision

    The problem or need mobile applications are addressing

    Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement

    Business Goals & Metrics

    Capabilities, Processes & Application Systems

    List of business objectives or goals for the mobile application initiative.

    List of business capabilities, processes and application systems related to this initiative.

    Personas/Customers/Users

    Stakeholders

    List of groups who consume the mobile application

    List of key resources, stakeholders, and teams needed to support the process, systems and services

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    1.1.2 Build your mobile application canvas

    1-3 hours

    1. Complete the following fields to build your mobile application canvas:
      • Mobile application initiative name
      • Mobile application owner
      • Parent initiative name
      • Problem that mobile applications are intending to solve and your vision. See the outcome from the previous exercise.
      • Mobile application business goals and metrics.
      • Capabilities, processes and application systems involved
      • Primary customers/users (For additional help with your product personas, download and complete to Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision.)
    2. Stakeholders
    3. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Business strategy
    • Problem and vision statements
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile application canvas
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.1.2 cont'd

    Mobile Application Initiative Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    Problem Statement

    Vision

    [Problem Statement]

    [Vision]

    Business Goals & Metrics

    Capabilities, Processes & Application Systems

    [Business Goal 1, Metric]
    [Business Goal 2, Metric]
    [Business Goal 3, Metric]

    [Business Capability]
    [Business Process]
    [Application System]

    Personas/Customers/Users

    Stakeholders

    [User 1]
    [User 2]
    [User 3]

    [Stakeholder 1]
    [Stakeholder 2]
    [Stakeholder 3]

    Create your mobile backlog

    Your backlog gives you a holistic understanding of the demand for mobile applications across your organization.

    Opportunities
    Trends
    MVP

    External Sources

    Internal Sources

    • Market Trends Analysis
    • Competitive Analysis
    • Regulations & Industry Standards
    • Customer & Reputation Analysis
    • Application Rationalization
    • Capability & Value Stream Analysis
    • Business Requests & Incidents
    • Discovery & Mining Capabilities

    A mobile application minimum viable product (MVP) focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to maximize learning, evaluate value and acceptance, and inform the development of a full-fledged mobile delivery practice.

    Find your mobile opportunities

    Modern mobile technologies enable users to access, analyze and change data anywhere with native device features, which opens the door to enhanced processes and new value sources.

    Examples of Mobile Opportunities:

    • Mobile Payment
      • Cost alternative to credit card transaction fees.
      • Loyalty systems are updated upon payment without need of a physical card.
      • Quicker completion of transactions.
    • Inventory Management
      • Update inventory database when shipments arrive or deliveries are made.
      • Inform retailers and consumers of current stock on website.
      • Alert staff of expired or outdated products.
    • Quick and Small Data Transfer
      • Embed tags into posters to transfer URIs, which sends users to sites containing product or location information.
      • Replace entry tags, fobs, or smart cards at doors.
      • Exchange contact details.
    • Location Sensitive Information
      • Proactively send promotions and other information (e.g. coupons, event details) to users within a defined area.
      • Inform employees of nearby prospective clients.
    • Supply Chain Management
      • Track the movement and location of goods and delivery trucks.
      • Direct drivers to the most optimal route.
      • Location-sensitive billing apps such as train and bus ticket purchases.
    • Education and Learning
      • Educate users about real-world objects and places with augmented books and by pushing relevant learning materials.
      • Visualize theories and other text with dynamic 3D objects.
    • Augmented Reality (AR)
      • Provide information about the user's surroundings and the objects in the environment through the mobile device.
      • Interactive and immersive experiences with the inclusion of virtual reality.
    • Architecture and Planning
      • Visualize historic buildings or the layout of structural projects and development plans.
      • Develop a digital tour with location-based audio initiated with location-based services or a camera.
    • Navigation
      • Provide directions to users to navigate and provide contextual travelling instructions.
      • Push traffic notifications and route changes to travelling users.
    • Tracking User Movement
      • Predict the future location of users based on historic information and traffic modelling.
      • Proactively push information to users before they reach their destination.

    1.1.3 Build your mobile backlog

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, discuss the use and value mobile already has within your organization for each persona.
      1. What are some of the apps being used?
      2. What enterprise systems and applications are already exposed to the web and accessible by mobile devices?
      3. How critical is mobile to business operations, marketing campaigns, etc.?
    2. Discuss how mobile can bring additional business value to other areas of your organization for each persona.
      1. Can mobile enhance your customer reach? Do your customers care that your services are offered through mobile?
      2. Are employees asking for better access to enterprise systems in order to improve their productivity?
    3. Write your mobile opportunities in the following form: As a [end user persona], I want to [process or capability to enable with mobile applications], so that [organizational benefit]. Prioritize each opportunity against feasibility, desirability, and viability.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • Problem and vision statements
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Mobile opportunities backlog
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Manage your mobile backlog

    Your backlog stores and organizes your mobile opportunities at various stages of readiness. It must be continuously refined to address new requests, maintenance and changing priorities.

    3 – IDEAS
    Composed of raw, vague, and potentially large ideas that have yet to go through any formal valuation.

    2 – QUALIFIED
    Researched and qualified opportunities awaiting refinement.

    1 READY
    Discrete, refined opportunities that are ready to be placed in your team's delivery plans.

    Adapted from Essential Scrum

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog

    • Detailed Appropriately: opportunities are broken down and refined as necessary
    • Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as opportunities are added and removed.
    • Estimated: The effort an opportunity requires is estimated at each tier.
    • Prioritized: The opportunity's value and priority are determined at each tier.

    (Source Perforce, 2018)

    See our Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision for more information on backlog practices.

    Step 1.2

    Identify Your Technical Needs

    Activities

    1.2.1 Discuss your mobile needs

    1.2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment

    Describe your desired mobile experiences with journey maps

    A journey map tells the story of the user's experience with an existing or prospective product or service, starting with a trigger, through the process of engagement, to create an outcome. Journey maps can focus on a particular part of the user's or the entire experience with your organization's products or services. All types of maps capture key interactions and motivations of the user in chronological order.

    Why are journey maps an important for mobile application delivery?

    Everyone has their own preferred method for completing their tasks on mobile devices – often, what differentiates one persona from another has to do with how users privately behave. Understand that the activities performed outside of IT's purview develop context for your persona's pain points and position IT to meet their needs with the appropriate solution.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Use Experience Design to Drive Empathy with the Business blueprint.

    Two charts are depicted, the first shows the path from Trigger, through steps 1-4, to the outcome, and the Activities and Touchpoints for each. The second chart shows the Expectation analysis, showing which steps are must-haves, nice-to-haves, and hidden-needs.

    Pinpoint specific mobile needs in your journey map

    Realize that mobile applications may not precisely fit with your personas workflow or align to their expectations due to device and system limitations and restrictions. Flag the mobile opportunities that require significant modifications to underlying systems.

    Consider these workflow scenarios that can influence your persona's desire for mobile:

    Workflow Scenarios Ask Yourself The Key Questions Technology Constraints or Restrictions to Consider Examples of Mobile Opportunities

    Data View – Data is queried, prepared and presented to make informed decisions, but it cannot be edited.

    Where is the data located and can it be easily gathered and prepared?

    Is the data sensitive and can it be locally stored?

    What is the level of detail in my view?

    Multi-factor authentication required.

    Highly sensitive data requires encryption in transit and at rest.

    Minor calculations and preparation needed before data view.

    Generate a status report.

    View social media channels.

    View contact information.

    Data Collection – Data is inputted directly into the application and updates back-end system or integrated 3rd party services.

    Do I need special permission to add, delete and overwrite data?

    How much data can I edit?

    Is the data automatically gathered?

    Bandwidth restrictions.

    Multi-factor authentication required.

    Native device access required (e.g., camera).

    Multiple types and formats of gathered data.

    Manual and automatic data gathering

    Book appointments with clients.

    Update inventory.

    Tracking movement of company assets.

    Data Analysis & Modification – Data is evaluated, manipulated and transformed through the application, back-end system or 3rd party service.

    How complex are my calculations?

    Can computations be offloaded?

    What resources are needed to complete the analysis?

    Memory and processing limitations on device.

    Inability to configure device and enterprise hardware to support system resource demand.

    Scope and precision of analysis and modifications.

    Evaluate and propose trends.

    Gauge user sentiment.

    Propose next steps and directions.

    Define the mobile experience your end users want

    Anytime, Anywhere
    The user can access, update and analyze data, and corporate products and services whenever they want, in all networks, and on any device.

    Hands-Off & Automated
    The application can perform various workflows and tasks without the user's involvement and notify the user when specific triggers are hit.

    Personalized & Insightful
    Content presentation and subject are tailored for the user based on specific inputs from the user, device hardware or predicted actions.

    Integrated Ecosystem
    The application supports a seamless experience across various 3rd party and enterprise applications and services the user needs.

    Visually Pleasing & Fulfilling
    The UI is intuitive and aesthetically gratifying with little security and performance trade-offs to use the full breadth of its functions and services.

    Each mobile platform has its own take on the mobile native experience. The choice ultimately depends on whether the costs and effort are worth the anticipated value.

    1.2.1 Discover your mobile needs

    1-3 hours

    1. Define the workflow of a high priority opportunity in your mobile backlog. This workflow can be pertaining to an existing mobile application or a workflow that can benefit with a mobile application.
      1. Indicate the trigger that will initiate the opportunity and the desired outcome.
      2. Break down the persona's desired outcome into small pieces of value that are realized in each workflow step.
    2. Identify activities and touchpoints the persona will need to complete to finish each step in the workflow. Indicate the technology used to complete the activity or to facilitate the touchpoint.
    3. Indicate which activities and touchpoints can be satisfied, complimented or enhanced with mobile.

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Desired mobile experience
    • List of mobile features
    • Journey map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Workflow

    Trigger

    Conduct initial analysis

    Get planning help

    Complete and submit RFP

    Design and implement solution

    Implement changes

    Activities, Channels, and Touchpoints

    Need is recognized in CIO council meeting

    See if we have a sufficient solution internally

    Seek planning help (various channels)

    *Meet with IT shared services business analyst

    Select the appropriate vendor

    Follow action plan

    Compliance rqmt triggered by new law

    See if we have a sufficient solution internally

    *Hold in-person initial meeting with IT shared services

    *Review and approve rqmts (email)

    Seek miscellaneous support

    Implement project and manage change

    Research potential solutions in the marketplace

    Excess budget identified for utilization

    Pick a "favorite" solution

    *Negotiate and sign statement of work (email)

    Prime organization for the change

    Create action plan

    If solution is unsatisfactory, plan remediation

    Current Technology

    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • ERP
    • IT asset management
    • Internet browser for research
    • Virtual environment to demonstrate solutions
    • Email
    • Vendor assessment and procurement solution
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • PDF documents and reader
    • Digital signature
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Meeting transcripts and recordings
    • PDF documents and reader
    • Digital signature
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Vendor assessment and procurement solution
    • Project management solution
    • Team collaboration solution
    • Email
    • Video conferencing
    • Phone
    • Project management solution
    • Team collaboration solution
    • Vendor's solution

    Legend:

    Bold – Touchpoint

    * – Activities or Touchpoints That Can Benefit with Mobile

    1.2.1 cont'd

    1-3 hours

    1. Analyze persona expectations. Identify the persona's must-haves, then nice-to-haves, and then hidden needs to effectively complete the workflow.
      1. Must-haves. The necessary outcomes, qualities, and features of the workflow step.
      2. Nice-to-haves. Desired outcomes, qualities, or features that your persona is able to articulate or express.
      3. Hidden needs. Outcomes, qualities, or features that your persona is not aware they have a desire for; benefits that they are pleasantly surprised to receive. These will usually be unknown for your first-iteration journey map.
    2. Indicate which persona expectations can be satisfied with mobile. Discuss what would the desired mobile experience be.
    3. Discuss feedback and experiences your team has heard from the personas they engage with regularly.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Example

    This image contains an example workflow for determining mobile needs.

    1.2.1 cont'd

    Template:

    Workflow

    TriggerStep 1Step 2Step 3Step 4

    Desired Outcome

    Journey Map

    Activities & Touch-points

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Must-Haves

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Nice-to-Haves

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Hidden Needs

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    Emotional Journey

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    If you need more than four steps in the workflow, duplicate this slide.

    Understand how mobile fits with your current system

    Evaluate the risks and impacts of your desired mobile features by looking at your enterprise system architecture from top to bottom. Is your mobile vision and needs compatible with your existing business capabilities and technologies?

    An architecture is usually represented by one or more architecture views that together provide a coherent description of the application system, including demonstrating the full impact mobile will have. A single, comprehensive model is often too complex to be understood and communicated in its most detailed form, and a model too high level hides the underlying complexity of an application's structure and deployment (The Open Group, TOGAF 8.1.1 - Developing Architecture Views). Obtain a complete understanding of your architecture by assessing it through multiple levels of views to reveal different sets of concerns:

    Application Architecture Views

    1. Use Case View
    • How does your business operate, and how will users interact with your mobile applications?
  • . Process View
    • What is the user workflow impacted by mobile, and how will it change?
  • Component View
    • How are my existing applications structured? What are its various components? How will mobile expand the costs of the existing technical debt?
  • Data View
    • What is the relationship of the data and information consumed, analyzed, and transmitted? Will mobile jeopardize the quality and reliability of the data?
  • Deployment View
    • In what environment are your mobile application components deployed? How will the existing systems operate with your mobile applications?
  • System View
    • How does your mobile application communicate with other internal and external systems? How will dependencies change with mobile?
  • See our Enhance Your Solution Architecture for more information.

    Ask key questions in your current system assessment

    • How do the various components of your system communicate with each other (e.g., web APIs, middleware, and point to point)?
    • What information is exchanged during the conversation?
    • How does the data flow from one component to the next? Is the data read-only or can application and users edit and modify it?
    • What are the access points to your mid- and back-tier systems (e.g., user access through web interface, corporate networks and third-party application access through APIs)?
    • Who has access to your enterprise systems?
    • Which components are managed and operated by third-party providers? What is your level of control?
    • What are the security protocols currently enforced in your system?
    • How often are your databases updated? Is it real-time or periodic extract, transfer, and load (ETL)?
    • What are the business rules?
    • Is your mobile stack dependent on other systems?
    • Is a mobile middleware, web server, or API gateway needed to help facilitate the integration between devices and your back-end support?

    1.2.2 Conduct a technical assessment

    1-3 hours

    1. Evaluate your current systems that will support the journey map of your mobile opportunities based on two categories: system quality and system management. Use the tables on the following slides and modify the questions if needed.
    2. Discuss if the current state of your system will impede your ability to succeed with mobile. Use this discussion to verify the decision to continue with mobile applications in your current state.
    3. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Journey map
    • Understanding of current system
    • Assessment of current system
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.2.2 cont'd

    Current State System Quality Assessment

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Fit-for-Purpose System functionalities, services and integrations are designed and implemented for the purpose of satisfying the end users' needs and technology compatibilities. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Response Rate The system completes computation and processing requests within acceptable timeframes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Data Quality The system delivers consumable, accurate, and trustworthy data. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Usability The system provides functionalities, services and integrations that are rewarding, engaging, intuitive, and emotionally satisfying. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Reliability The system is resilient or quickly recovers from issues and defects. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Accessible The system is available on demand and on the end user's preferred interface and device. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Secured End-user activity and data is protected from unauthorized access. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Adaptable The system can be quickly tailored to meet changing end-user and technology needs with reusable and customizable components. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)

    1.2.2 cont'd

    Current State System Management Assessment

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Documentation The system is documented, accurate, and shared in the organization. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Measurement The system is continuously measured against clearly defined metrics tied to business value. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Compliance The system is compliant with regulations and industry standards. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Continuous Improvement The system is routinely rationalized and enhanced. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Architecture There is a shared overview of how the process supports business value delivery and its dependencies with technologies and other processes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Ownership & Accountability The process has a clearly defined owner who is accountable for its risks and roadmap. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Support Resources are available to address adoption and execution challenges. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)
    Organizational Change Management Communication, onboarding, and other change management capabilities are available to facilitate technology and related role and process changes. 1 (Very Poor) – 2 – 3 (Fair) – 4 – 5 (Excellent)

    Step 1.3

    Define Your Non-Functional Requirements

    Activities

    1.3.1 Define mobile application quality

    1.3.2 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    Set the Mobile Context

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery

    Build a strong foundation of mobile application quality

    Functionality and aesthetics often take front seats in mobile application delivery. Applications are then frequently modified and changed, not because they are functionally deficient or visually displeasing, but because they are difficult to maintain or scale, too slow, vulnerable or compromised. Implementing clear quality principles (i.e., non-functional requirements) and strong quality assurance practices throughout delivery are critical to minimize the potential work of future maintenance and to avoid, mitigate and manage IT risks.

    What is Mobile Application Quality?

    • Quality requirements (i.e., non-functional requirements) are properties of a system or product that dictate how it should behave at runtime and how it should be designed, implemented, and maintained.
    • These requirements should be involved in decision making around architecture, UI and functional design changes.
    • Functionality should not dictate the level of security, availability, or performance of a product, thereby risking system quality. Functionality and quality are viewed orthogonally, and trade-offs are discussed when one impacts the other.
    • Quality attributes should never be achieved in isolation as one attribute can have a negative or positive impact on another (e.g. security and availability).

    Why is Mobile Quality Assurance Critical?

    • Quality assurance (QA) is a necessity for the validation and verification of mobile delivery, whether you are delivering applications in an Agile or Waterfall fashion. Effective QA practices implemented across the software development lifecycle (SDLC) are vital, as all layers of the mobile stack need to readily able to adjust to suddenly evolving and changing business and user needs and technologies without risking system stability and breaking business standards and expectations.
    • However, investments in QA optimizations are often afterthoughts. QA is commonly viewed as a lower priority compared to other delivery capabilities (e.g., design and coding) and is typically the first item cut when delivery is under pressure.

    See our Build a Software Quality Assurance Program for more information.

    Mobile emphasizes the importance of good security, performance and integration

    Today's mobile workforce is looking for new ways to get more work done quickly. They want access to enterprise solutions and data directly on their mobile device, which can reside on multiple legacy systems and in the cloud and third-party infrastructure. This presents significant performance, integration, and security risks.

    Cloud Solutions: Can I use my existing APIs?. Solutions in Corporate Networks: Do my legacy systems have the capacity to support mobile?; How do I integrate solutions and data from multiple sources into a single view?; Third Party Solutions: Will I have a significant performance bottleneck?; Single View on Mobile Devices: How is corporate data stored on the device?; What new technology dependencies must I account for in my architecture and operational support capabilities?

    Mobile risks opening and widening existing security gaps

    New mobile technologies and the continued expansion of the enterprise environment increase the number of entry points attackers to your corporate data and networks. The ever-growing volume, velocity, and variety of new threats puts significant pressure on mobile delivery teams who are responsible for implementing mobile security measures and maintaining alignment to your security policies and those of app stores.

    Mobile attacks can come from various vectors:

    Attack Surface: Mobile Device

    Attack Surface: Network

    Attack Surface: Data Center

    Browser:
    Phishing
    Buffer Overflow
    Data Caching

    System:
    No Passcode
    Jailbroken and Rooted OS
    No/Weak Encryption
    OS Data Caching

    Phone:
    SMSishing
    Radio Frequency Attacks

    Apps:
    Configuration Manipulation
    Runtime Injection
    Improper SSL Validation

    • Packet Sniffing
    • Session Hijacking
    • Man-in-the-Middle (circumvent password verification systems)
    • Fake SSL Certificate
    • Rogue Access Points

    Web Server:
    Cross-Site Scripting (XSS)
    Brute Force Attacks
    Server Misconfigurations

    Database:
    SQL Injection
    Data Dumping

    Understand the top web security risks and vulnerabilities seen in the industry

    Recognize mobile applications are exposed to the same risks and vulnerabilities as web applications. Learn of OWASP's top 10 web security risks.

    • Broken Access Control
      • Failures typically lead to unauthorized information disclosure, modification, or destruction of all data or performing a business function outside the user's limits.
    • Cryptographic Failures
      • Improper and incorrect protection of data in transit and at rest, especially proprietary and confidential data and those that fall under privacy laws.
    • Injection
      • Execution of malicious code and injection of hostile or unfiltered data on the mobile device via the mobile application.
    • Insecure Design
      • Missing or ineffective security controls in the application design. An insecure design cannot be fixed by a perfect implementation,. Needed security controls were never created to defend against specific attacks.
    • Security Misconfiguration
      • The security settings in the application are not securely set or configured, including poor security hardening and inadequate system upgrading practices.
    • Vulnerable and Outdated Components
      • System components are vulnerable because they are unsupported, out of date, untested or not hardened against current security concerns.
    • Identification and Authentication Failures
      • Improper or poor protection against authentication-related attacks, particularly to the user's identity, authentication and session management.
    • Software and Data Integrity Failures
      • Failures related to code and infrastructure that does not protect against integrity violations, such as an application relying upon plugins, libraries, or modules from untrusted sources, repositories, and content delivery networks
    • Security Logging and Monitoring Failures
      • Insufficient logging, detection, monitoring, and active response that hinders the ability to detect, escalate, and respond to active breaches.
    • Server-Side Request Forgery (SSRF)
      • SSRF flaws occur whenever a web application is fetching a remote resource without validating the user-supplied URL.

    Good mobile application performance drives satisfaction and value delivery

    Underperforming mobile applications can cause your users to be unproductive. Your mobile applications should always aim to satisfy the productivity requirements of your end users.

    Users quickly notice applications that are slow and difficult to use. Providing a seamless experience for the user is now heavily dependent on how well your application performs. Optimizing your mobile application's processing efficiency can help your users perform their jobs properly in various environment conditions.

    Productive Users Need
    Performant Mobile Applications

    Persona

    Mobile Application Use Case

    Optimized Mobile Application

    Stationary Worker

    • Design flowcharts and diagrams, while abandoning paper and desktop apps in favor of easy-to-use, drawing tablet applications.
    • Multitask by checking the application to verify information given by a vendor during their presentation or pitch.
    • Flowcharts and diagrams are updated in real time for team members to view and edit
    • Compare vendors under assessment with a quick look-up app feature

    Roaming Worker (Engineer)

    • Replace physical copies of service and repair manuals physically stored with digital copies and access them with mobile applications.
    • Scan or input product bar code to determine whether a replacement part is available or needs to be ordered.
    • Worker is capable of interacting with other features of the mobile web app while product bar code is being verified

    Enhance the performance of the entire mobile stack

    Due to frequently changing mobile hardware, users' high performance expectations and mobile network constraints, mobile delivery teams must focus on the entire mobile stack for optimizing performance.

    Fine tune your enterprise mobile applications using optimization techniques to improve performance across the full mobile stack.

    This image contains a bar graph ranking the importance of the following datapoints: Minimize render blocking resources; Configure the mobile application viewport; Determine the right image file format ; Determine above-the-fold content; Minimize browser reflow; Adopt UI techniques to improve perceived latency; Resource minification; Data compression; Asynchronous programming; Resource HTTP caching; Minimize network roundtrips for first time to render.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Some user performance expectations can be managed with clever UI design (e.g., spinning pinwheels to indicate loading in progress and directing user focus to quick loading content) and operational choices (e.g. graceful degradation and progressive enhancements).

    Create an API-centric integration strategy

    Mobile delivery teams are tasked to keep up with the changing needs of end users and accommodate the evolution of trending mobile features. Ensuring scalable APIs is critical in quickly releasing changes and ensuring availability of corporate services and resources.

    As your portfolio of mobile applications grows, and device platforms and browsers diversify, it will become increasingly complex to provide all the data and service capabilities your mobile apps need to operate. It is important that your APIs are available, reliable, reusable, and secure for multiple uses and platforms.

    Take an API-centric approach to retain control of your mobile development and ensure reliability.

    APIs are the underlying layer of your mobile applications, enabling remote access of company data and services to end users. Focusing design and development efforts on the maintainability, reliability and scalability of your APIs enables your delivery teams to:

    • Reuse tried-and-tested APIs to deliver, test and harden applications and systems quicker by standardizing on the use and structure of REST APIs.
    • Ensure a consistent experience and performance across different applications using the same API.
    • Uniformly apply security and access control to remain compliant to security protocols, industry standards and regulations.
    • Provide reliable integration points when leveraging third-party APIs and services.

    See our Build Effective Enterprise Integration on the Back of Business Process for more information.

    Guide your integration strategy with principles

    Craft your principles around good API management and integration practices

    Expose Enterprise Data And Functionality in API-Friendly Formats
    Convert complex on-premises application services into developer-friendly RESTful APIs

    Protect Information Assets Exposed Via APIs to Prevent Misuse
    Ensure that enterprise systems are protected against message-level attack and hijack

    Authorize Secure, Seamless Access for Valid Identities
    Deploy strong access control, identity federation and social login functionality

    Optimize System Performance and Manage the API Lifecycle
    Maintain the availability of backend systems for APIs, applications and end users

    Engage, Onboard, Educate and Manage Developers
    Give developers the resources they need to create applications that deliver real value

    Source: 5 Pillars of API Management, Broadcom, 2021

    Clarify your definition of mobile quality

    Quality does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of mobile quality. Each department, person and industry standard will have a different interpretation of quality, and they will perform certain activities and enforce policies that meet those interpretations. Misunderstanding of what is defined as a high quality mobile application within business and IT teams can lead to further confusion behind governance, testing priorities and compliance.

    Each interpretation of quality can lead to endless testing, guardrails and constraints, or lack thereof. Be clear on the priority of each interpretation and the degree of effort needed to ensure they are met.

    For example:

    Mobile Application Owner
    What does an accessible mobile application mean?

    Persona: Customer
    I can access it on mobile phones, tablets and the web browser

    Persona: Developer
    I have access to each layer of the mobile stack including the code & data

    Persona: Operations
    The mobile application is accessible 24/7 with 95% uptime

    Example: A School Board's Quality Definition

    Quality Attribute Definitions
    Usability The product is an intuitive solution. Usability is the ease with which the user accomplishes a desired task in the application system and the degree of user support the system provides. Limited training and documentation are required.
    Performance Usability and performance are closely related. A solution that is slow is not usable. The application system is able to meet timing requirements, which is dependent on stable infrastructure to support it regardless of where the application is hosted. Baseline performance metrics are defined and changes must result in improvements. Performance is validated against peak loads.
    Availability The application system is present, accessible, and ready to carry out its tasks when needed. The application is accessible from multiple devices and platforms, is available 24x7x365, and teams communicate planned downtimes and unplanned outages. IT must serve teachers international student's parents, and other users who access the application outside normal business hours. The application should never be down when it should be up. Teams must not put undue burden on end users accessing the systems. Reasonable access requirements are published.
    Security Applications handle both private and personal data, and must be able to segregate data based on permissions to protect privacy. The application system is able to protect data and information from unauthorized access. Users want it to be secure but seamless. Vendors need to understand and implement the District School Board's security requirements into their products. Teams ensure access is authorized, maintain data integrity, and enforce privacy.
    Reusability Reusability is the capability for components and subsystems to be suitable for use in other applications and in other scenarios. This attribute minimizes the duplication of components and implementation time. Teams ensure a modular design that is flexible and usable in other applications.
    Interoperability The degree to which two or more systems can usefully exchange meaningful information via interfaces in a particular context.

    Scalability

    There are two kinds of scalability:

    • Horizontal scalability (scaling out): Adding more resources to logical units, such as adding another server to a cluster of servers.
    • Vertical scalability (scaling up): Adding more resources to a physical unit, such as adding more memory to a single computer.

    Ease of maintenance and enhancements are critical. Additional care is given to custom code because of the inherent difficulty to make it scale and update.

    Modifiability The capability to manage the risks and costs of change, considering what can be changed, the likelihood of change, and when and who makes the change. Teams minimize the barriers to change, and get business buy in to keep systems current and valuable.
    Testability The ease with which software are made to demonstrate its faults through (typically execution-based) testing. It cannot be assumed that the vendor has already tested the system against District School Board's requirements. Testability applies to all applications, operating systems, and databases.
    Supportability The ability of the system to provide information helpful for identifying and resolving issues when it fails to work correctly. Supportability applies to all applications and systems within the District School Board's portfolio, whether that be custom developed applications or vendor provided solutions. Resource investments are made to better support the system.
    Cost Efficiency The application system is executed and maintained in such a way that each area of cost is reduced to what is critically needed. Cost efficiency is critical (e.g. printers cost per page, TCO, software what does downtime cost us), and everyone must understand the financial impact of their decisions.
    Self-Service End users are empowered to make configurations, troubleshoot and make changes to their application without the involvement of IT. The appropriate controls are in place to manage the access to unauthorized access to corporate systems.
    Modifiability The capability to manage the risks and costs of change, considering what can be changed, the likelihood of change, and when and who makes the change. Teams minimize the barriers to change, and get business buy in to keep systems current and valuable.
    Testability The ease with which software are made to demonstrate its faults through (typically execution-based) testing. It cannot be assumed that the vendor has already tested the system against District School Board's requirements. Testability applies to all applications, operating systems, and databases.
    Supportability The ability of the system to provide information helpful for identifying and resolving issues when it fails to work correctly. Supportability applies to all applications and systems within the District School Board's portfolio, whether that be custom developed applications or vendor provided solutions. Resource investments are made to better support the system.

    1.3.1 Define mobile application quality

    1-3 hours

    1. List 5 quality attributes that your organization sees as important for a successful mobile application.
    2. List the core personas that will support mobile delivery and that will consume the mobile application. Start with development, operations and support, and end user.
    3. Describe each quality attributes from the perspective of each persona by asking, "What does quality mean to you?".
    4. Review each description from each persona to come to an acceptable definition.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • User personas
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Journey map
    • Mobile application quality definition
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.3.1 cont'd

    Example: Info-Tech Guided Implementation with a Legal and Professional Services Organization

    Quality AttributeDeveloperOperations & Support TeamEnd Users

    Usability

    • Architecture and frameworks are aligned with industry best practices
    • Regular feedback through analytics and user feedback
    • Faster development and less technical debt
    • Pride in the product
    • Satisfaction that the product is serving its purpose and is actually being used by the user
    • Increased update of product use and feedback for future lifecycle
    • Standardization and positive perception of IT processes
    • Simpler to train users to adopt products and changes
    • Trust in system and ability to promote the product in a positive light
    • Trusted list of applications
    • Intuitive (easy to use, no training required)
    • Encourage collaboration and sharing ideas between end users and delivery teams
    • The information presented is correct and accurate
    • Users understand where the data came from and the algorithms behind it
    • Users learn features quickly and retain their knowledge longer, which directly correlates to decreased training costs and time
    • High uptake in use of the product
    • Seamless experience, use less energy to work with product

    Security

    • Secure by design approach
    • Testing across all layers of the application stack
    • Security analysis of our source code
    • Good approach to security requirement definition, secure access to databases, using latest libraries and using semantics in code
    • Standardized & clear practices for development
    • Making data access granular (not all or none)
    • Secure mission critical procedures which will reduce operational cost, improve compliance and mitigate risks
    • Auditable artifacts on security implementation
    • Good data classification, managed secure access, system backups and privacy protocols
    • Confidence of protection of user data
    • Encryption of sensitive data
    Availability
    • Good access to the code
    • Good access to the data
    • Good access to APIs and other integration technologies
    • Automatic alerts when something goes wrong
    • Self-repairing/recovering
    • SLAs and uptimes
    • Code documentation
    • Proactive support from the infrastructure team
    • System availability dashboard
    • Access on any end user device, including mobile and desktop
    • 24/7 uptime
    • Rapid response to reported defects or bugs
    • Business continuity

    1.3.2 Verify your decision to deliver mobile applications

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the various end user, business and technical expectations for mobile its achievability given the current state of your system and non-functional requirements.
    2. Complete the list of questions on the following slide as an indication for your readiness for mobile delivery.

    Input

    Output
    • Mobile application canvas
    • Assessment to proceed with mobile
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    1.3.2 cont'd

    Skill Sets
    Software delivery teams have skills in creating mobile applications that stakeholders are expecting in value and quality. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Architects look for ways to reuse existing technical asset and design for future growth and maturity in mobile. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Resources can be committed to implement and manage a mobile platform. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Software delivery teams and resources are adaptable and flexible to requirements and system changes. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Delivery Process
    My software delivery process can accommodate last minute and sudden changes in mobile delivery tasks. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business and IT requirements for the mobile are clarified through collaboration between business and IT representatives. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Mobile will help us fill the gaps and standardize our software delivery process process. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    My testing practices can be adapted to verify and validate the mobile functional and non-functional requirements. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Technical Stack
    My mid-tier and back-end support has the capacity to accommodate additional traffic from mobile. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    I have access to my web infrastructure and integration technologies, and I am capable of making configurations. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    My security approaches and capabilities can be enhanced address specific mobile application risks and vulnerabilities. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    I have a sound and robust integration strategy involving web APIs that gives me the flexibility to support mobile applications. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    Phase 2

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Step 2.1 – Choose Your Platform Approach
    • Step 2.2 – Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution
    • Step 2.3 – Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Step 2.1

    Choose Your Platform Approach

    Activities

    2.1.1 Select your platform approach

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Desired mobile platform approach

    Mobile value is dependent on the platform you choose

    What is a platform?

    "A platform is a set of software and a surrounding ecosystem of resources that helps you to grow your business. A platform enables growth through connection: its value comes not only from its own features, but from its ability to connect external tools, teams, data, and processes." (Source: Emilie Nøss Wangen, 2021) In the mobile context, applications in a platform execute and communicate through a loosely coupled API architecture whether the supporting system is managed and supported by your organization or by 3rd party providers.

    Web

    The mobile web often takes on one of the following two approaches:

    • Responsive websites – Content, UI and other website elements automatically adjusts itself according to the device, creating a seamless experience regardless of the device.
    • Progressive web applications (PWAs) – PWAs uses the browser's APIs and features to offer native-like experiences.

    Mobile web applications are often developed with a combination of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript languages.

    Hybrid

    Hybrid applications are developed with web technologies but are deployed as native applications. The code is wrapped using a framework so that it runs locally within a native container, and it uses the device's browser runtime engine to support more sophisticated designs and features compared to the web approach. Hybrid mobile solutions allows teams to code once and deploy to multiple platforms.

    Some notable examples:

    • Gmail
    • Instagram

    Cross-Platform

    Cross-platform applications are developed within a distinct programming or scripting environment that uses its own scripting language (often like web languages) and APIs. Then the solution will compile the code into device-specific builds for native deployment.

    Some notable examples:

    • Facebook
    • Skype
    • Slack

    Native

    Native applications are developed and deployed to specific devices and OSs using platform-specific software development kits (SDKs) provided by the operating system vendors. The programming language and framework are dictated by the targeted device, such as Java for Android.

    With this platform, developers have direct access to local device features allowing customized operations. This enables the use of local resources, such as memory and runtime engines, which will achieve a higher performance than hybrid and cross-platform applications.

    Each platform offers unique pros and cons depending on your mobile needs

    WebHybridCross-PlatformNative

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    • Modern browsers support the popular of web languages (HTML, CSS, and JavaScript).
    • Ubiquitous across multiple form factors and devices.
    • Mobile can be easily integrated into traditional web development processes and technical stacks.
    • Installations are not required, and updates are immediate.
    • Sensitive data can be wiped from memory after app is closed.
    • Limited access to local device hardware and software.
    • Local caching is available for limited offline capabilities, but the scope of tasks that can be completed in this scenario is restricted.
    • The browser's runtime engine is limited in computing power.
    • Not all browsers fully support the latest versions of HTML, CSS, or JavaScript.
    • Web languages can be used to develop a complete application.
    • Code can be reused for multiple platforms, including web.
    • Access to commonly-used native features that are not available through the web platform.
    • Quick delivery and maintenance updates compared to native and cross-platform platforms.
    • Consistent internet access is needed due to its reliance heavily reliance on web technologies to operate.
    • Limited ability to support complex workflows and features.
    • Sluggish performance compared to cross-platform and native applications.
    • Certain features may not operate the same across all platforms given the code once, deploy everywhere approach.
    • More cost-effective to develop than using native development approaches to gain similar features. Platform-specific developers are not needed.
    • Common codebase to develop applications on different applications.
    • Enables more complex application functionalities and technical customizations compared to hybrid applications.
    • Code is not portable across cross-platform delivery solutions.
    • The framework is tied to the vendor solution which presents the risk of vendor lock-in.
    • Deployment is dependent on an app store and the delivery solution may not guarantee the application's acceptance into the application store.
    • Significant training and onboarding may be needed using the cross-platform framework.
    • Tight integration with the device's hardware enables high performance and greater use of hardware features.
    • Computationally-intensive and complex tasks can be completed on the device.
    • Available offline access.
    • Apps are available through easy-to-access app stores.
    • Requires additional investments, such as app stores, app-specific support, versioning, and platform-specific extensions.
    • Developers skilled in a device-specific language are difficult to acquire and costly to train.
    • Testing is required every time a new device or OS is introduced.
    • Higher development and maintenance costs are tradeoffs for native device features.

    Start mobile development on a mobile web platform

    Start with what you have: begin with a mobile web platform to minimize impacts to your existing delivery skill sets and technical stack while addressing business needs. Resort to a hybrid first and then consider a cross-platform application if you require device access or the need to meet specific non-functional requirements.

    Why choose a mobile web platform?

    Pros

    The latest versions of the most popular web languages (HTML5, CSS3, JavaScript) abstract away from the granular, physical components of the application, simplifying the development process. HTML5 offer some mobile features (e.g., geolocation, accelerometer) that can meet your desired experience without the need for native development skills. Native look-and-feel, high performance, and full device access are just a few tradeoffs of going with web languages.

    Cons

    Native mobile platforms depend on device-specific code which follows specific frameworks and leverages unique programming libraries, such as Objective C for iOS and Java for Android. Each language requires a high level of expertise in the coding structure and hardware of specific devices requiring resources with specific skillsets and different tools to support development and testing.

    Other Notable Benefits with Web Languages

    • Modern browsers in most mobile devices are capable of executing and rendering many mobile features developed in web languages, allowing for greater portability and sophistication of code across multiple devices. However, this flexibility comes at the cost of performance since the browser's runtime engine will not perform as well as a native engine.
    • Web languages are well known by developers, minimizing skills and resourcing impacts. Consequently, changes can be quickly accommodated and updated uniformly across all end users.

    Do you need a native platform?

    Consider web workarounds if you choose a web platform but require some native experiences.

    The web platform does not give you direct access or sophisticated customizations to local device hardware and services, underlying code and integrations. You may run into the situation where you need some native experiences, but the value of these features may not offset the costs to undertake a native, hybrid or cross-platform application. When developing hybrid and cross-platform applications with a mobile delivery solution, only the APIs of the commonly used device features are available. Note that some vendors may not offer a particular native feature across all devices, inhibiting your ability to achieve feature parity or exploiting device features only available in certain devices. Workarounds are then needed.

    Consider the following workarounds to address the required native experiences on the web platform:

    Native Function Description Web Workaround Impact
    Camera Takes pictures or records videos through the device's camera. Create an upload form in the web with HTML5. Break in workflow leading to poor user experience (UX).
    Geolocation Detects the geographical location of the device. Available through HTML5. Not Applicable.
    Calendar Stores the user's calendar in local memory. Integrate with calendaring system or manually upload contacts. Costly integration initiative. Poor user experience.
    Contacts Stores contact information in local memory. Integrate app with contact system or manually upload contacts. Costly integration initiative. Poor user experience.
    Near Field Communication (NFC) Communication between devices by touching them together or bringing them into proximity. Manual transfer of data. A lot of time is consumed transferring simple information.
    Native Computation Computational power and resources needed to complete tasks on the device. Resource-intensive requests are completed by back-end systems and results sent back to user. Slower application performance given network constraints.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In many cases, workarounds are available when evaluating the gaps between web and native applications. For example, not having application-level access to the camera does not negate the user option to upload a picture taken by the camera through a web form. Tradeoffs like this will come down to assessing the importance of each platform gap for your organization and whether a workaround is good enough as a native-like experience.

    Architect and configure your entire mobile stack with a plan

    • Assess your existing technology stack that will support your mobile platform. Determine if it has the capacity to handle mobile traffic and the necessary integration between devices and enterprise and 3rd party systems are robust and reliable. Reach out to your IT teams and vendors if you are missing key mobile components, such as:
    • The acquisition and provisioning of physical or virtual mobile web servers and middleware from existing vendors.
    • Cloud services [e.g., Mobile Back-end as a Service (mBaaS)] that assists in the mobilization of back-end data sources with API SDKs, orchestration of data from multiple sources, transformation of legacy APIs to mobile formats, and satisfaction of other security, integration and performance needs.
    • Configure the services of your web server or middleware to facilitate the translation, transformation, and transfer of data between your mobile front-end and back-end. If your plan involves scripts, maintenance and other ongoing costs will likely increase.
    • Leverage the APIs or adapters provided by your vendors or device manufacturers to integrate your mobile front-end and back-end support to your web server or middleware. If you are reusing a web server, the back-end integration should already be in place. Remember, APIs implement business rules to maintain the integrity of data exchange within your mobile stack.
    • See Appendix A for examples of reference architectures of mobile platforms.

    See our Enhance Your Solution Architecture for more information.

    Do Not Forget Your Security and Performance Requirements

    Security: New threats from mobile put organizations into a difficult situation beyond simply responding to them in a timely matter. Be careful not to take the benefits of security out of the mobile context. You need to make security a first-order citizen during the scoping, design, and optimization of your systems supporting mobile. It must also be balanced with other functional and non-functional requirements with the right roles taking accountability for these decisions.

    See our Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications for more information.

    Performance: Within a distributed mobile environment, performance has a risk of diminishing due to limited device capacity, network hopping, lack of server scalability, API bottlenecks, and other device, network and infrastructure issues. Mobile web APIs suffer from the same pain points as traditional web browsing and unplanned API call management in an application will lead to slow performance.

    See our Develop Enterprise Mobile Applications With Realistic and Relevant Performance for more information.

    Enterprise platform selection requires a shift in perspective

    Your mobile platform selection must consider both user and enterprise (i.e., non-functional) needs. Use a two-step process for your analysis:

    Begin Platform Selection with a User-Centric Approach

    Organizations appealing to end users place emphasis on the user experience: the look and appeal of the user interface, and the satisfaction, ease of use, and value of its functionalities. In this approach, IT concerns and needs are not high priorities, but many functions are completed locally or isolated from mission critical corporate networks and sensitive data. Some needs include:

    • Performance: quick execution of tasks and calculations made on the device or offloaded to web servers or the cloud.
    • User Interface: cross-platform compatibility and feature-rich design and functionality. The right native experience is critical to the user adoption and satisfaction.
    • Device Access: use of local device hardware and software to complete app use cases, such as camera, calendar, and contact lists.

    Refine Platform Selection with an Enterprise-Centric Approach

    From the enterprise perspective, emphasis is on security, system performance, integration, reuse and other non-functional requirements as the primary motivations in the selection of a mobile platform. User experience is still a contributing factor because of the mobile application's need to drive value but its priority is not exclusive. Some drivers include:

    • Openness: agreed-upon industry standards and technologies that can be applied to serve enterprise needs which support business processes.
    • Integration: increase the reuse of legacy investments and existing applications and services with integration capabilities.
    • Flexibility: support for multiple data types from applications such as JSON format for mobile.
    • Capacity: maximize the utilization of your software delivery resources beyond the initial iteration of the mobile application.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Selecting a mobile platform should not solely be made on business requirements. Key technical stakeholders should be at the table in this discussion to provide insight on the implementation and ongoing costs and benefits of each platform. Both business and technical requirements should be considered when deciding on a final platform.

    Select your mobile platform

    Drive your mobile platform selection against user-centric needs (e.g. device access, aesthetics) and enterprise-centric needs (e.g. security, system performance).

    When does a platform makes sense to use?

    Web

    • Desire to maximize current web technologies investments (people, process, and technologies).
    • Use cases do not require significant computational resources on the device or are tightly constrained by non-functional requirements.
    • Limited budget to acquire mobile development resources.
    • Access to device hardware is not a high priority.

    Hybrid / Cross-Platform

    • The need to quickly spin up native-like applications for multiple platforms and devices.
    • Desire to leverage existing web development skills, but also a need for device access and meeting specific non-functional requirements.
    • Vendor support is needed for the entire mobile delivery process.

    Native

    • Developers are experts in the target programming language and with the device's hardware.
    • Strong need for high performance, security and device-specific access and customizations.
    • Application use cases requiring significant computing resources.

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform.

    2.1.1 Select your platform approach

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your mobile objectives, end user needs and non-functional requirements.
    2. Determine which mobile platform is appropriate for each mobile opportunity or use case by answering the following questions on the following slides against two factors: user-centric and enterprise-centric needs.
    3. Calculate an average score for user-centric and one for enterprise-centric. Then, map them on the matrix to indicate possible platform options. Consider all options around the plotted point.
    4. Further discuss which platforms should be the preferred choice.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Desired mobile experience
    • List of desired mobile features
    • Current state assessments
    • Mobile platform approach
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.1.1 cont'd

    User-Centric Needs: Functional Requirements

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Device Hardware Access The scope of access to native device hardware features. Basic features include those that are available through current web languages (e.g., geolocation) whereas comprehensive features are those that are device-specific. 1 (Basic) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Comprehensive)
    Customized Execution of Device Hardware The degree of changes to the execution of local device hardware to satisfy functional needs. 1 (Use as Is) – 2 – 3 (Configure) – 4 – 5 (Customize)
    Device Software Access The scope of access to software on the user's device, such as calendars and contact. 1 (Basic) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Comprehensive)
    Customized Execution of Device Software The degree of changes to the execution of local device software to satisfy functional needs. 1 (Use as Is) – 2 – 3 (Configure) – 4 – 5 (Customize)
    Use Case Complexity Workflow tasks and decisions are simple and straightforward. Complex computation is not needed to acquire the desired outcome. 1 (Strongly Agree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Disagree)
    Computational Resources The resources needed on the device to complete desired functional needs. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Use Case Ambiguity The mobile use case and technical requirements are well understood and documented. Changes to the mobile application is likely. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Mobile Application Access Enterprise systems and data are accessible to the broader organization through the mobile application. This factor does not necessarily mean that anyone can access it untracked. You may still need to identify yourself or log in, etc. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Scope of Adoption & Impact The extent to which the mobile application is leveraged in the organization. 1 (Enterprise) – 2 – 3 (Department) – 4 – 5 (Team)
    Installable The need to locally install the mobile application. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Targeted Devices & Platforms Mobile applications are developed for a defined set of mobile platform versions and types and device. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Output Audience The mobile application transforms an input into a valuable output for high-priority internal or external stakeholders. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    User-Centric Needs: Native User Experience Factors

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Immersive Experience The need to bridge physical world with the virtual and digital environment, such as geofencing and NFC. 1 (Internally Delivered) – 2 – 3 (3rd Party Supported) – 4 – 5 (Business Implemented)
    Timeliness of Content and Updates The speed of which the mobile application (and supporting system) responds with requested information, data and updates from enterprise systems and 3rd party services. 1 (Reasonable Delayed Response) – 2 – 3 (Partially Outsourced) – 4 – 5 (Fully Outsourced)
    Application Performance The speed of which the mobile application completes tasks is critical to its success. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Network Accessibility The needed ability to access and use the mobile application in various network conditions. 1 (Only Available When Online) – 2 – 3 (Partially Available When Online) – 4 – 5 (Available Online)
    Integrated Ecosystem The approach to integrate the mobile application with enterprise or 3rd party systems and services. 1 (Out-of-the-Box Connectors) – 2 – 3 (Configurable Connectors) – 4 – 5 (Customized Connectors)
    Desire to Have a Native Look-and-Feel The aesthetics and UI features (e.g., heavy animations) that are only available through native and cross-platform applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    User Tolerance to Change The degree of willingness and ableness for a user to change their way of working to maximize the value of the mobile application. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Mission Criticality The business could not execute its main strategy if the mobile application was removed. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business Value The mobile application directly adds business value to the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Industry Differentiation The mobile application provides a distinctive competitive advantage or is unique to your organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Enterprise-Centric Needs: Non-Functional Requirements

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Legacy Compatibility The need to integrate and operate with legacy systems. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Code Portability The need to enable the "code once and deploy everywhere" approach. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Vendor & Technology Lock-In The tolerance to lock into a vendor mobile delivery solution or technology framework. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Data Sensitivity The data used by the mobile application does not fall into the category of sensitive data – meaning nothing financial, medical, or personal identity (GDPR and worldwide equivalents). The disclosure, modification, or destruction of this data would cause limited harm to the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Data Policies Policies of the mobile application's data are mandated by internal departmental standards (e.g. naming standards, backup standards, data type consistency). Policies only mandated in this way usually have limited use in a production capacity. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Security Risks Mobile applications are connected to private data sources and its intended use will be significant if underlying data is breached. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    Business Continuity & System Integrity Risks The mobile application in question does not have much significance relative to the running of mission critical processes in the organization. 1 (Strongly Disagree) – 2 – 3 (Neutral) – 4 – 5 (Strongly Agree)
    System Openness Openness of enterprise systems to enable mobile applications from the user interface to the business logic and backend integrations and database. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Mobile Device Management The organization's policy for the use of mobile devices to access and leverage enterprise data and services. 1 (Bring-Your-Own-Device) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Corporate Devices)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Enterprise-Centric Needs: Delivery Capacity

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Ease of Mobile Delivery The desire to have out-of-the-box and packaged tools to expedite mobile application delivery using web technologies. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Solution Competency The capability for internal staff to and learn how to implement and administer mobile delivery tools and deliver valuable, high-quality applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Ease of Deployment The desire to have the mobile applications delivered by the team or person without specialized resources from outside the team. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Delivery Approach The capability to successfully deliver mobile applications given budgetary and costing, resourcing, and supporting services constraints. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Maintenance & Operational Support The capability of the resources to responsibly maintain and operate mobile applications, including defect fixes and the addition and extension of modules to base implementations of the digital product. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Domain Knowledge Support The availability and accessibility of subject and domain experts to guide facilitate mobile application implementation and adoption. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Delivery Urgency The desire to have the mobile application delivered quickly. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Reusable Components The desire to reuse UI elements and application components. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)

    2.1.1 cont'd

    Example:

    Score Factors (Average) Mobile Opportunity 1: Inventory Management Mobile Opportunity 2: Remote Support
    User-Centric Needs 4.25 3
    Functional Requirements 4.5 2.25
    Native User Experience Factors 4 1.75
    Enterprise-Centric Needs 4 2
    Non-Functional Requirements 3.75 3.25
    Delivery Capacity 4.25 2.75
    Possible Mobile Platform Cross-Platform Native PWA Hybrid

    Nine datapoints are arranged on a graph where the x axis s labeled: User Centric Needs; and the Y axis is labeled: Enterprise-centric needs. The datapoints are, in order from left to right, top to bottom: Hybrid; Cross- Platform; Native; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform; Cros-s Platform; Web; Web; Hybrid or Cross- Platform. Two yellow circles are overlaid, one containing the phrase: Remote Support - over the box containing Progressive Web Applications (PWA) or Hybrid; and a yellow circle containing the phrase Inventory MGMT, partly covering the box containing Native; and the box containing Cross-Platform.

    Build a scalable and manageable platform

    Long-term mobile success depends on the efficiency and reliability of the underlying operational platform. This platform must support the computational and performance demands in a changing business environment, whether it is composed of off-the-self or custom-developed solutions, or a single vendor or best-of-breed.

    • Application
      • The UI design and content language is standardized and consistently applied
      • All mobile configurations and components are automatically versioned
      • Controlled administration and tooling access, automation capabilities, and update delivery
      • Holistic portfolio management
    • Data
      • Automated data management to preserve data quality (e.g. removal of duplications)
      • Defined single source of truth
      • Adherence to data governance, and privacy and security policies
      • Good content management practices, governance and architecture
    • Infrastructure
      • Containers and sandboxes are available for development and testing
      • Self-healing and self-service environments
      • Automatic system scaling and load balancing
      • Comply to budgetary and licensing constraints
    • Integration
      • Backend database and system updates are efficient
      • Loosely coupled architecture to minimize system regressions and delivery effort
      • Application, system and data monitoring

    Step 2.2

    Shortlist Your Mobile Delivery Solution

    Activities

    2.2.1 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    2.2.2 Build your feature and service lists

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services

    Ask yourself: should I build or buy?

    Build Buy

    Multi-Source Best-of-Breed

    Vendor Add-Ons & Integrations

    Integrate various technologies that provide subset(s) of the features needed for supporting the business functions.

    Enhance an existing vendor's offerings by using their system add-ons either as upgrades, new add-ons or integrations.

    Pros

    • Flexibility in choice of tools.
    • In some cases, cost may be lower.
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams.

    Cons

    • Introduces tool sprawl.
    • Requires resources to understand tools and how they integrate.
    • Some of the tools necessary may not be compatible with each other.

    Pros

    • Reduces tool sprawl.
    • Supports consistent tool stack.
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier.
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower.

    Cons

    • Vendor Lock-In.
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability.

    Multi-Source Custom

    Single Source

    Integrate systems built in-house with technologies developed by external organizations.

    Buy an application/system from one vendor only.

    Pros

    • Flexibility in choice of tools.
    • In some cases, cost may be lower.
    • Easier to enhance with in-house teams.

    Cons

    • May introduce tool sprawl.
    • Requires resources to have strong technical skills
    • Some of the tools necessary may
    • not be compatible with each other.

    Pros

    • Reduces tool sprawl.
    • Supports consistent tool stack.
    • Vendor support can make enhancement easier.
    • Total cost of ownership may be lower.

    Cons

    • Vendor Lock-In.
    • The processes to enhance may require tweaking to fit tool capability.

    Weigh the pros and cons of mobile enablement versus development

    Mobile Enablement

    Mobile Development

    Description Mobile interfaces that heavily rely on enterprise or 3rd party systems to operate. Mobile does not expand the functionality of the system but complements it with enhanced access, input and consumption capabilities. Mobile applications that are custom built or configured in a way that can operate as a standalone entity, whether they are locally deployed to a user's device or virtually hosted.
    Mobile Platform Mobile web, locally installed mobile application provided by vendor Mobile web, hybrid, cross-platform, native
    Typical Audience Internal staff, trusted users Internal and external users, general public
    Examples of Tooling Flavors Enterprise applications, point solutions, robotic & process automation Mobile enterprise application platform, web development, low and no code development, software development kits (SDKs)
    Technical Skills Required Little to no mobile delivery experience and skillsets are needed, but teams must be familiar with the supporting system to understand how a mobile interface can improve the value of the system. Have good UX-driven and quality-first practices in the mobile context. In-depth coding, networking, system and UX design, data management and security skills are needed for complex designs, functions, and architectures.
    Architecture & Integration Architecture is standardized by the vendor or enterprise with UI elements that are often minimally configurable. Extensions and integrations must be done through the system rather than the mobile interface. Much of application stack and integration approach can be customized to meet the specific functional and non-functional needs. It should still leverage web and design standards and investments currently used.
    Functional Scope Functionality is limited to the what the underlying system allows the interface to do. This often is constrained to commodity web application features (e.g., reporting) or tied to minor configurations to the vendor-provided point solution Functionality is only constrained by the platform and the targeted mobile devices whether it is performance, integration, access or security related. Teams should consider feature and content parity across all products within the organization portfolio.
    Delivery Pipeline End-to-end delivery and automated pipeline is provided by the vendor to ensure parity across all interfaces. Many vendors provide cloud-based services for hosting. Otherwise, it is directly tied to the SDLC of the supporting system. End-to-end delivery and automated pipeline is directly tied to enterprise SDLC practices or through the vendor. Some vendors provide cloud-based services for hosting. Updates are manually or automatically (through a vendor) published to app stores and can be automatically pushed to corporate users through mobile application management capabilities.
    Standards & Guardrails Quality standards and technology governance are managed by the vendor or IT with limited capabilities to tailor them to be mobile specific. Quality standards and technology governance are managed by the mobile delivery teams. The degree of customizations to these standards and guardrails is dependent on the chosen platform and delivery team competencies.

    Understand the common attributes of a mobile delivery solution

    • Source Code Management – Built-in or having the ability to integrate with code management solutions for branching, merging, and versioning. Debugging and coding assistance capabilities may be available.
    • Single Code Base – Capable of programming in a standard coding and scripting language for deployment into several platforms and devices. This code base is aligned to a common industry framework (e.g., AngularJS, Java) or a vendor-defined one.
    • Out-of-the-Box Connectors & Plug-ins – Pre-built APIs enhance the solution's capabilities with 3rd party tools and systems to deliver and manage high quality and valuable mobile applications.
    • Emulators – Ability to virtualize an application's execution on a target platform and device.
    • Support for Native Features – Supports plug-ins and APIs for access to device-specific features.

    What are mobile delivery solutions?

    A mobile delivery solution gives you the tools, resources and support to enable or build your mobile application. They can provide pre-built applications, vendor supported components to allow some configurations, or resources for full stack customizations. Some solutions can be barebone software development kits (SDKs) or comprehensive suites offering features to support the entire software delivery lifecycle, such as:

    • Mobile application management
    • Testing and publishing to app stores
    • Content management
    • Cloud hosting
    • Application performance management

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mobile enablement and development capabilities are already embedded in many common productivity tools and enterprise applications, such as Microsoft PowerApps and ERP modules. They can serve as a starting point in the initial rollout of new management and governance practices without the need of acquiring new tools.

    Select your mobile delivery solutions

    1. Set the scope of your framework.
    • The initial context of this framework is based on the mobile functions needed to support your desired mobile experience and on the current state of your enterprise and 3rd party systems.
  • Define the decision factors for your solution selection.
    • Review the decision factors that will influence the selection of your mobile delivery solution for each mobile opportunity:
    • Stack Management – Who will be hosting and supporting your mobile application stack?
    • Workflows Complexity & Native Experience – How complex is your desired mobile experience and how will native device features be leveraged?
  • Select your solution type.
    • Mobile delivery solutions are broadly defined in the following groups:
    • Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) – Pre-built mobile applications requiring little to no configurations or implementation effort.
    • Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform – Back-end and mid-tier infrastructure and operational support are managed by a vendor.
    • Cross-Platform Development – Frameworks that transform a single code base into platform-specific builds.
    • Hybrid Development – Tools that wrap a single code base into a locally deployable build.
    • Custom Web Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile web applications.
    • Custom Native Development – Environment enabling full stack development for mobile native applications.
  • A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions

    Explore the various solution options

    Vendor Hosted Mobile Platform

    • Cloud Services (Mobile Backend-as-a-Service) (Amazon Amplify, Kinvey, Back4App, Google Firebase, Apache Usergrid)
    • Low Code Mobile Platforms (Outsystems, Mendix, Zoho Creator, IBM Mobile Foundation, Pega Mobile, HCL Volt MX, Appery)
    • Mobile Development via Enterprise Application (SalesForce Heroku, Oracle Application Accelerator MAX, SAP Mobile Development Kit, NetSuite Mobile)
    • Mobile Development via Business Process Automation (PowerApps, Appian, Nintex, Quickbase)

    Cross-Platform Development SDKs

    React Native, NativeScript, Xamarin Forms, .NET MAUI, Flutter, Kotlin Multiplatform Mobile, jQuery Mobile, Telerik, Temenos Quantum

    Custom Native Development Solutions

    • Native Development Languages and Environments (Swift, Java, Objective-C, Kotlin, Xcode, NetBeans, Android Studio, AppCode, Microsoft Visual Studio, Eclipse, DriodScript, Compose, Atom)
    • Mobile Application Utilities (Unity, MonoGame, Blender, 3ds Max Design, Maya, Unreal Engine, Amazon Lumberyard, Oculus)

    Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions

    • No Code Mobile Platforms (Swiftic, Betty Blocks, BuildFire, Appy Pie, Plant an App, Microsoft Power Apps, AppSheet, Wix, Quixy)
    • Mobile Application Point Solutions and Enablement via Enterprise Applications

    Hybrid Development SDKs

    Cordova Project, Sencha Touch, Electron, Ionic, Capacitor, Monaca, Voltbuilder

    Custom Web Development Solutions

    Web Development Frameworks (React, Angular, Vue, Express, Django, Rails, Spring, Ember, Backbone, Bulma, Bootstrap, Tailwind CSS, Blade)

    Get the most out of your solutions by understanding their core components

    While most of the heavy lifting is handled by the vendor or framework, understanding how the mobile application is built and operates can identify where further fine-tuning is needed to increase its value and quality.

    Platform Runtime

    Automatic provisioning, configurations, and tuning of organizational and 3rd party infrastructure for high availability, performance, security and stability. This can include cloud management and non-production environments.

    Extensions

    • Mobile delivery solutions can be extended to allow:
    • Custom development of back-end code
    • Customizable integrations and hooks where needed
    • Integrations with CI/CD pipelines and administrative services
    • Integrations with existing databases and authentication services

    Platform Services

    The various services needed to support mobile delivery and enable continuous delivery, such as:

    • Configuration & Change Management – Verifies, validates, and monitors builds, deployments and changes across all components.
    • Code Generator – Transforms UI and data models into native application components that are ready to be deployed.
    • Deployment Services – Deploys application components consistently across all target environments and app stores.
    • Application Services – Manages the mobile application at runtime, including executing scheduled tasks and instrumentation.

    Application Architecture

    Fundamentally, mobile application architecture is no different than any other application architecture so much of your design standards still applies. The trick is tuning it to best meet your mobile functional and non-functional needs.

    This image contains an example of mobile application architecture.

    Source: "HCL Volt MX", HCL.

    Build your shortlist decision criteria

    The decision on which type of mobile delivery solution to use is dependent on several key questions?

    Who is the Mobile Delivery Team?

    • Is it a worker, business or IT?
    • What skills and knowledge does this person have?
    • Who is supporting mobile delivery and management?
    • Are other skills and tools needed to support, extend or mature mobile delivery adoption?

    What are the Use Cases?

    • What is the value and priority of the use cases?
    • What native features do we need?
    • Who is the audience of the output and who is impacted?
    • What systems, data and services do I need access?
    • Is it best to build it or buy it?
    • What are the quality standards?
    • How strategic is the use case?

    How Complex is the System?

    • Is the mobile application a standalone or integrated with enterprise systems?
    • What is the system's state and architecture?
    • What 3rd party services do we need integrated?
    • Are integrations out-of-the-box or custom?
    • Is the data standardized and who can edit its definition?
    • Is the system monolithic or loosely coupled?

    How Much Can We Tolerate?

    • Risks: What are the business and technical risks involved?
    • Costs: How much can we invest in implementation, training and operations?
    • Change: What organizational changes am I expecting to make? Will these changes be accepted and adopted?

    2.2.1 Shortlist your mobile delivery solution

    1-3 hours

    1. Determine which mobile delivery solutions is appropriate for each mobile opportunity or use case by answering the following questions on the following slides against two factors: complexity of mobile workflows and native features and management of the mobile stack.
      1. Take the average of the enterprise-centric and user-centric scores from step 2.1 for your complexity of mobile workflows and native features scores.
    2. Calculate an average score for the management of the mobile stack. Then, map them on the matrix to indicate possible solution options alongside your user-centric scores. Consider all options around the plotted point.
    3. Further discuss which solution should be the preferred choice and compare those options with your selected platform approach.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Current state assessment
    • Mobile platform approach
    • Shortlist of mobile delivery solution
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.2.1 cont'd

    Stack Management

    Factors Definitions Survey Responses
    Cost of Delayed Delivery The expected cost if a vendor solution or update is delayed. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Vendor Negotiation Organization's ability to negotiate favorable terms from vendors. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Controllable Delivery Timeline Organization's desire to control when solutions and updates are delivered. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Solution Hosting The desired approach to host the mobile application. 1 (Fully Outsourced) – 2 – 3 (Partially Outsourced) – 4 – 5 (Internally Hosted)
    Vendor Lock-In The tolerance to be locked into a specific technology stack or vendor ecosystem. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Operational Cost Target The primary target of the mobile application's operational budget. 1 (External Resources) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Internal Resources)
    Platform Management The desired approach to manage the mobile delivery solution, platform or underlying technology. 1 (Decentralized) – 2 – 3 (Federated) – 4 – 5 (Centralized)
    Skill & Competency of Mobile Delivery Team The ability of the team to create and manage valuable and high-quality mobile applications. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Current Investment in Enterprise Technologies The need to maximize the ROI of current enterprise technologies or integrate with legacy technologies. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Ease of Extensibility Need to have out-of-the-box connectors and plug-ins to extend the mobile delivery solution beyond its base implementation. 1 (High) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (Low)
    Holistic Application Strategy Organizational priorities on the types of applications the portfolio should be comprised. 1 (Buy) – 2 – 3 (Hybrid) – 4 – 5 (Build)
    Control of Delivery Pipeline The desire to control the software delivery pipeline from design to development, testing, publishing and support. 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)
    Specific Quality Requirements Software and mobile delivery is constrained to your unique quality standards (e.g., security, performance, availability) 1 (Low) – 2 – 3 (Moderate) – 4 – 5 (High)

    2.2.1 cont'd

    Example:

    Score Factors (Average) Mobile Opportunity 1: Inventory Management Mobile Opportunity 2: Remote Support
    User-Centric & Enterprise Centric Needs (From Step 2.1) 4.125 2.5
    Stack Management 2 2.5
    Desired Mobile Delivery Solution Vendor-Hosted Mobile Platform

    Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solution

    Hybrid Development Solution

    A quadrant analysis is depicted. the top data is labeled Complex Mobile Features; the right side is labeled Organization-Managed Stack; the bottom is labeled Simple Mobile Features; and the left side is labeled Vendor-Managed Stack. The quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Vendor- Hosted Mobile Platform; Custom Native Development Solutions; Commercial-Off-the-Shelf Solutions; Custom Web Development Solutions. In the middle of the graph are the following, in order from top to bottom: Cross-Platform Development Solutions; Hybrid Development Solutions.

    Consider the following in your solution selection and implementation

    • Vendor lock in – Each solution has its own approach, frameworks, and data schemas to convert designs and logic into an executable build that is stable in the targeted environment. Consequently, moving application artifacts (e.g., code and designs) from one solution or environment to another may not be easily accomplished without significant modifications or the use of application modernization or migration services.
    • Conflicting priorities and viewpoints of good delivery practices – Mobile delivery solutions are very particular on how they generate applications from designs and configurations. The solution's approach may not accommodate your interpretation of high-quality code (e.g., scalability, maintainability, extensibility, security). Technical experts should be reviewing and refactoring the generated code.
    • Incompatibility with enterprise applications and systems – The true benefit of mobile delivery solutions is their ability to connect your mobile application to enterprise and 3rd party technologies and services. This capability often requires enterprise technologies and services to be architected in a way that is compatible with your delivery solution while ensuring data, security protocols and other standards and policies are consistently enforced.
    • Integration with current application development and management tools – Mobile delivery solutions should be extensions from your existing application development and management tools that provides the versioning, testing, monitoring, and deployment capabilities to sustain a valuable application portfolio. Without this integration, IT will be unable to:
      • Root cause issues found on IT dashboards or reported to help desk.
      • Rollback defective applications to a previous stable state.
      • Obtain a complete application portfolio inventory.
      • Execute comprehensive testing for high-risk applications.
      • Trace artifacts throughout the development lifecycle.
      • Generate reports of the status of releases.

    Enhance your SDLC to support mobile delivery

    What is the SDLC?

    The software development lifecycle (SDLC) is a process that ensures valuable software products are efficiently delivered to customers. It contains a repeatable set of activities needed to intake and analyze requirements to design, build, test, deploy, and maintain software products.

    How will mobile delivery influence my SDLC?

    • Cross-functional collaboration – Bringing business and IT together at the most opportune times to clarify user needs and business priorities, and set realistic expectations given technology and capacity constraints. The appropriate tactics and techniques are used to improve decision making and delivery effectiveness according to the type of work.
    • Iterative delivery – Frequent delivery of progressive changes minimizes the risk of low-quality features by containing and simplifying scope, and enables responsive turnarounds of fixes, enhancements, and priority changes.
    • Feedback loops –Mobile application owners constantly review, update and refine their backlog of mobile features and changes to reflect user feedback and system performance metrics. Delivery teams proactively prepare the application for future scaling based on lessons and feedback learned from earlier releases.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Modernize Your SDLC blueprint.

    Example: Low- & No-Code Mobile Delivery Pipeline

    Low Code

    Data Modeling & Configuration

    No Code

    Visual Interface with Complex Data Models

    Data Modeling & Configuration

    Visual Interfaces with Simple Data Models

    GUI Designer with Customizable Components & Entities

    UI Definition & Design

    GUI Designer with Canned Templates

    Visual Workflow and Custom Scripting

    Business Logic Rules and Workflow Specification

    Visual Workflow and Natural Language Scripting

    Out-of-the-Box Plugins & Custom Integrations

    Integration of External Services (via 3rd Party APIs)

    Out-of-the-Box Plugins

    Automated and Manual Build & Packaging

    Build & Package

    Automated Build & Packaging

    Automated & Manual Testing

    Test

    Automated Testing

    One-Click Push or IT Push to App Store

    Publish to App Store

    One-Click Push to App Store

    Use Info-Tech's research to address your delivery gaps

    Mobile success requires more than a set of good tools.

    Overcome the Common Challenges Faced with Building Mobile Applications

    Common Challenges with Digital Applications

    Suggested Solutions

    • Time & Resource Constraints
    • Buy-In From Internal Stakeholders
    • Rapidly Changing Requirements
    • Legacy Systems
    • Low-Priority for Internal Tools
    • Insufficient Data Access

    Source: DronaHQ, 2021

    Learn the differentiators of mobile delivery solutions

    • Native Program Languages – Supports languages other than web (Java, Ruby, C/C++/C#, Objective-C).
    • IDE Integration – Available plug-ins for popular development suites and editors.
    • Debugging Tools – Finding and eliminating bugs (breakpoints, single stepping, variable inspection, etc.).
    • Application Packaging via IDE – Digitally sign applications through the IDE for it to be packaged and published in app stores.
    • Automated Testing Tools – Native or integration with automated functional and unit testing tools.
    • Low- and No- Code Designer – Tools for designing graphical user interfaces and features and managing data with drag-and-drop functionalities.
    • Publishing and Deployment Capabilities – Automated deployment to mobile device management (MDM) systems, mobile application management (MAM) systems, mobile application stores, and web servers.
    • Third-Party and Open-Source Integration – Integration with proprietary and open-source third-party modules, development tools, and systems.
    • Developer Marketplace – Out-of-the-box plug-ins, templates, and integration are available through a marketplace.
    • Mobile Application Support Capabilities – Ability to gather, manage, and address application issues and defects.
    • API Gateway, Monitoring, and Management – Services that enable the creation, publishing, maintenance, monitoring, and securing of APIs through a common interface.
    • Mobile Analytics and Monitoring – View the adoption, usage, and performance of deployed mobile applications through graphical dashboards.
    • Mobile Content Management – Publish and manage mobile content through a centralized system.
    • Mobile Application Security – Supports the securing of application access and usage, data encryption, and testing of security controls.

    Define your mobile delivery vendor selection criteria

    Focus on the key vendor attributes and capabilities that enable mobile delivery scaling and growth in your organization

    Considerations in Mobile Delivery Vendor Selection
    Platform Features & Capabilities Price to Implement & Operate Platform
    Types of Mobile Applications That Can Be Developed Ease of IT Administration & Management
    User Community & Marketplace Size Security, Privacy & Access Control Capabilities
    SME in Industry Verticals & Business Functions Vendor Product Roadmap & Corporate Strategy
    Pre-Built Designs, Templates & Application Shells Scope of Device- and OS-Specific Compatibilities
    Regulatory & Industry Compliance Integration & Technology Partners
    Importing Artifacts From and Exporting to Other Solutions Platform Architecture & Underlying Technology
    End-to-End Support for the Entire Mobile SDLC Relevance to Current Mobile Trends & Practices

    Build your features list

    Incorporate different perspectives when defining the list of mandatory and desired features of your target solution.

    Appendix B contains a list of features for low- and no-code solutions that can be used as a starting point.

    Visit Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint.

    Mobile Developer

    • Visual, drag-and-drop models to define data models, business logic, and user interfaces.
    • One-click deployment.
    • Self-healing capabilities.
    • Vendor-managed infrastructure.
    • Active community and marketplace.
    • Pre-built templates and libraries.
    • Optical character recognition and natural language processing.
    • Knowledgebase and document management.
    • Business value, operational costs, and other KPI monitoring.
    • Business workflow automation.

    Mobile IT Professional

    • Audit and change logs.
    • Theme and template builder.
    • Template management.
    • Role-based access.
    • Regulatory compliance.
    • Consistent design and user experience across applications.
    • Application and system performance monitoring.
    • Versioning and code management.
    • Automatic application and system refactoring and recovery.
    • Exception and error handling.
    • Scalability (e.g. load balancing) and infrastructure management.
    • Real-time debugging.
    • Testing capabilities.
    • Security management.
    • Application integration management.

    2.2.2 Build your feature and service lists

    1-3 hours

    Review the key outcomes in the previous exercises to help inform the features and vendor support you require to support your mobile delivery needs:

    End user personas and desired mobile experience

    Objectives and expectations

    Desired mobile features and platform

    Mobile delivery solutions

    Brainstorm a list of features and functionalities you require from your ideal solution vendors. Prioritize these features and functionalities. See our Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint for more information on vendor procurement.

    Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Download the Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template

    Input

    Output
    • Shortlist of mobile solutions
    • Quality definitions
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • List of desired features and services of mobile delivery solution vendors
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Hit a home run with your stakeholders

    Use a data-driven approach to select the right tooling vendor for your needs – fast.

    AwarenessEducation & DiscoveryEvaluationSelection

    Negotiation & Configuration

    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics4.1 Create a Weighted Selection Decision Model5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation with Top Two Venders
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action2.2 Discover Alternate Solutions & Conduct Market Education3.2 Conduct a Data Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities with Top 2-4 Vendors5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration

    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment

    2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application PortfolioNarrow the Field to Four Top Contenders4.3 Validate Key Issues with Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation2.4 Validate the Business Case5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Investing time improving your software selection methodology has big returns.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you're looking to select. Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology in Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Step 2.3

    Create a Roadmap for Mobile Delivery

    Activities

    2.3.1 Define your MVP release

    2.3.2 Build your roadmap

    Define Your Mobile Approach

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    Achieve mobile success with MVPs

    By delivering mobile capabilities in small iterations, teams recognize value sooner and reduce accumulated risk. Both benefits are realized as the iteration enters validation testing and release.

    This image depicts a graph of the learn-build-measure cycle over time, adapted from Managing the Development of Large Software Systems, Dr. Winston W. Royce, 1970

    An MVP focuses on a small set of functions, involves minimal possible effort to deliver a working and valuable solution, and is designed to satisfy a specific user group. Its purpose is to:

    • Maximize learning.
    • Evaluate the value and acceptance of mobile applications.
    • Inform the building of a mobile delivery practice.

    The build-measure-learn loop suggests mobile delivery teams should perpetually take an idea and develop, test, and validate it with the mobile development solution, then expand on the MVP using the lessons learned and evolving ideas. In this sense the MVP is just the first iteration in the loop.

    Leverage a canvas to detail your MVP

    Use the release canvas to organize and align the organization around your MVP!

    This is an example of a release canvas which can be used to detail your MVP.

    2.3.1 Define your MVP release

    1-3 hours

    1. Create a list of high priority use cases slated for mobile application delivery. Brainstorm the various supporting activities required to implement your use cases including the shortlisting of mobile delivery tools.
    2. Prioritize these use cases based on business priority (from your canvas). Size the effort of these use cases through collaboration.
    3. Define your MVPs using a release canvas as shown on the following slide.
    4. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • High priority mobile opportunities
    • Mobile platform approach
    • Shortlist of mobile solutions
    • List of potential MVPs
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.3.1 cont'd

    MVP Name

    Owner:
    Parent Initiative:
    Updated:

    NAME
    LINK
    October 05, 2022

    MVP Theme/Goals

    [Theme / Goal]

    Use Cases

    Value

    Costs

    [Use Case 1]
    [Use Case 2]
    [Use Case 3]

    [Business Value 1]
    [Business Value 2]
    [Business Value 3]

    [Cost Item 1]
    [Cost Item 2]
    [Cost Item 3]

    Impacted Personas

    Impacted Workflows

    Stakeholders

    [Persona 1]
    [Persona 2]
    [Persona 3]

    [Workflow 1]
    [Workflow 2]
    [Workflow 3]

    [Stakeholder 1]
    [Stakeholder 2]
    [Stakeholder 3]

    Build your mobile roadmap

    It's more than a set of colorful boxes. It's the map to align everyone to where you are going

    Your mobile roadmap

    • Lays out a strategy for your mobile application, platform and practice implementation and scaling.
    • Is a statement of intent for your mobile adoption.
    • Communicates direction for the implementation and use of mobile delivery tools, mobile applications and supporting technologies.
    • Directly connects to the organization's goals

    However, it is not:

    • Representative of a hard commitment.
    • A simple combination of your current product roadmaps

    Roadmap your MVPs against your milestones and release dates

    This is an image of an example of a roadmap for your MVPS, with milestones across Jan 2022, Feb 2022, Mar 2022, Apr 2022. under milestones, are the following points: Points in the timeline when an established set of artifacts is complete (feature-based), or to check status at a particular point in time (time-based); Typically assigned a date and used to show progress; Plays an important role when sequencing different types of artifacts. Under Release Dates are the following points: Releases mark the actual delivery of a set of artifacts packaged together in a new version of processes and applications or new mobile application and delivery capabilities. ; Release dates, firm or not, allow stakeholders to anticipate when this is coming.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Understand what is communicated in your roadmap

    WHY is the work being done?

    Explains the overarching goal of work being done to a specific audience.

    WHO is doing the work?

    Categorizes the different groups delivering the work on the product.

    WHAT is the work being done?

    Explains the artifacts, or items of work, that will be delivered.

    WHEN is the work being done?

    Explains when the work will be delivered within your timeline.

    To learn more, visit Info-Tech's Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision blueprint.

    Pay attention to organizational changes

    Be prepared to answer:

    "How will mobile change the way I do my job?"

    • Plan how workers will incorporate mobile applications into their way of working and maximize the features it offers.
    • Address the human concerns regarding the transition to a digital world involving modern and mobile technologies and automation.
    • Accept changes, challenges and failures with open arms and instill tactics to quickly address them.
    • Build and strengthen business-IT trust, empowerment, and collaborative culture by adopting the right practices throughout the mobile delivery process.
    • Ensure continuous management and leadership support for business empowerment, operational changes, and shifts in role definitions to best support mobile delivery.
    • Establish a committee to manage the growth, adoption, and delivery of mobile as part of a grandeur digital application portfolio and address conflicts among business units and IT.

    Anticipate and prepare for changes and issues

    Verify and validate the flexibility and adaptability of your mobile applications, strategy and roadmap against various scenarios

    • Scenarios
      • Application Stores Rejecting the Application
      • Security Incidents & Risks
      • Low User Adoption, Retention & Satisfaction
      • Incompatibility with User's Device & Other Systems
      • Device & OS Patches & Updates
      • Changes in Industry Standards & Regulations

    Use the "Now, Next, Later" roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    Now

    What are you going to do now?

    Next

    What are you going to do very soon?

    Later

    What are you going to do in the future?

    This is a roadmap showing various points in the following categories: Now; Next; Later

    Adapted From: "Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples," Scrum.org, 2017

    2.3.2 Build your roadmap

    1-3 hours

    1. Identify the business outcomes your mobile application delivery and MVP is expected to deliver.
    2. Build your strategic roadmap by grouping each business outcome by how soon you need to deliver it:
      1. Now: Let's achieve this ASAP.
      2. Next: Sometime very soon, let's achieve these things.
      3. Later: Much further off in the distance, let's consider these things.
    3. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace mobile application delivery and deliver your MVP.
    4. Build your tactical roadmap by grouping each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
      1. Now: Let's do this ASAP.
      2. Next: Sometime very soon, let's do these things.
      3. Later: Much further off in the distance, let's consider these things.
    5. Document your findings and discussions into Info-Tech's Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template.

    Input

    Output
    • List of potential MVPs
    • Mobile roadmap
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Mobile Application Delivery Communication Template
    • Applications Manager
    • Product and Platform Owners
    • Software Delivery Teams
    • Business and IT Leaders

    2.3.2 cont'd

    Example: Tactical Roadmap

    Milestone 1

    • Modify the business processes of the MVP to best leverage mobile technologies. Streamline the business processes by removing the steps that do not directly support value delivery.
    • Develop UI templates using the material design framework and the organization's design standards. Ensure it is supported on mobile devices through the mobile browser and satisfy accessibility design standards.
    • Verify and validate current security controls against latest security risks using the W3C as a starting point. Install the latest security patches to maintain compliance.
    • Acquire the Ionic SDK and upskill delivery teams.

    Milestone 2

    • Update the current web framework and third-party libraries with the latest version and align web infrastructure to latest W3C guidelines.
    • Verify and validate functionality and stability of APIs with third-party applications. Begin transition to REST APIs where possible.
    • Make minor changes to the existing data architecture to better support the data volume, velocity, variety, and veracity the system will process and deliver.
    • Update the master data management with latest changes. Keep changes to a minimum.
    • Develop and deliver the first iteration of the MVP with Ionic.

    Milestone 3

    • Standardize the initial mobile delivery practice.
    • Continuously monitor the system and proactively address business continuity, system stability and performance, and security risks.
    • Deliver a hands-on and facilitated training session to end users.
    • Develop intuitive user manuals that are easily accessible on SharePoint.
    • Consult end users for their views and perspectives of suggested business model and technology changes.
    • Regularly survey end users and the media to gauge industry sentiment toward the organization.

    Pitch your roadmap initiatives

    There are multiple audiences for your pitch, and each audience requires a different level of detail when addressed. Depending on the outcomes expected from each audience, a suitable approach must be chosen. The format and information presented will vary significantly from group to group.

    Audience

    Key Contents

    Outcome

    Outcome

    • Costs or benefits estimates

    Sign off on cost and benefit projections

    Executives and decision makers

    • Business value and financial benefits
    • Notable business risks and impacts
    • Business rationale and strategic roadmap

    Revisions, edits, and approval

    IT teams

    • Notable technical and IT risks
    • IT rationale and tactical roadmap
    • Proposed resourcing and skills capacity

    Clarity of vision and direction and readiness for delivery

    Business workers

    • Business rationale
    • Proposed business operations changes
    • Application roadmap

    Verification on proposed changes and feedback

    Continuously measure the benefits and value realized in your mobile applications

    Success hinges on your team's ability to deliver business value. Well-developed mobile applications instill stakeholder confidence in ongoing business value delivery and stakeholder buy-in, provided proper expectations are set and met.

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit Generation – The revenue generated from a business capability with mobile applications.
    • Cost Reduction – The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with mobile applications.
    • Service Enablement – The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations with mobile applications.
    • Customer and Market Reach – Metrics measuring the improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    See our Build a Value Measurement Framework blueprint for more information about business value definition.

    Business Value Matrix

    This image contains a quadrant analysis with the following labels: Left - Improved Capabilities; Top - Outward; Right - Financial Benefit; Bottom - Inward. the quadrants are labeled the following, in order from left to right, top to bottom. Customer and Market Reach; Profit Generation; Service Enhancement; Cost Reduction

    Grow your mobile delivery practice

    We are Here
    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    You understand the opportunities and impacts mobile has on your business operations and its disruptive nature on your enterprise systems. Your software delivery lifecycle was optimized to incorporate the specific practices and requirements needed for mobile. A mobile platform was selected based on stakeholder needs that are weighed against current skillsets, high priority non-functional requirements, the available capacity and scalability of your stack, and alignment to your current delivery process.

    New features and mobile use cases are regularly emerging in the industry. Ensuring your mobile platform and delivery process can easily scale to incorporate constantly changing mobile features and technologies is key. This can help minimize the impact these changes will have on your mobile stack and the resulting experience.

    Achieving this state requires three competencies: mobile security, performance optimization, and integration practices.

    Many of today's mobile trends involve, in one form or another, hardware components on the mobile device (e.g., NFC receivers, GPS, cameras). You understand the scope of native features available on your end user's mobile device and the required steps and capabilities to enable and leverage them.

    Grow your mobile delivery practice (cont'd)

    Ask yourself the following questions:
    Level 1: Mobile Delivery Foundations Level 2: Scaled Mobile Delivery Level 3: Leading-Edge Mobile Delivery

    Checkpoint questions shown at the end of step 1.2 of this blueprint

    You should be at this point upon the successful delivery of your first mobile application.

    Security

    • Your mobile stack (application, data, and infrastructure) is updated to incorporate the security risks mobile apps will have on your systems and business operations.
    • Leading edge encryption, authentication management (e.g., multi-factor), and access control systems are used to bolster existing mobile security infrastructure.
    • Network traffic to and from mobile application is monitored and analyzed.

    Performance Optimization

    • Performance enhancements are made with the entire mobile stack in mind.
    • Mobile performance is monitored and assessed with both proactive (data flow) and retroactive (instrumentation) approaches.
    • Development and testing practices and technologies accommodate the performance differences between mobile and desktop applications.

    API Development

    • Existing web APIs are compatible with mobile applications, or a gateway / middleware is used to facilitate communication with backend and third-party services.
    • APIs are secured to prevent unauthorized access and misuse.
    • Web APIs are documented and standardized for reuse in multiple mobile applications.
    • Implementing APIs of native features in native and/or cross-platform and/or hybrid platforms is well understood.
    • All leading-edge mobile features are mapped to and support business requirements and objectives.
    • The new mobile use cases are well understood and account for the various scenarios/environments a user may encounter with the leading-edge mobile features.
    • The relevant non-mobile devices, readers, sensors, and other dependent systems are shortlisted and acquired to enable and support your new mobile capabilities.
    • Delivery teams are prepared to accommodate the various security, performance, and integration risks associated with implementing leading-edge mobile features. Practices and mechanisms are established to minimize the impact to business operations.
    • Metrics are used to measure the success of your leading-edge mobile features implementation by comparing its performance and acceptance against past projects.
    • Business stakeholders and development teams are up to date with the latest mobile technologies and delivery techniques.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Choose Your Mobile Platform and Tools

    • User personas
    • Mobile objectives and metrics
    • Mobile opportunity backlog
    • List of mobile features to enable the desired mobile experience
    • System current assessment
    • Mobile application quality definition
    • Readiness for mobile delivery
    • Desired mobile platform approach
    • Shortlisted mobile delivery solutions
    • Desired list of vendor features and services
    • MVP design
    • Mobile delivery roadmap

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is a picture of Chaim Yudkowsky, Chief Information Officer for The American Israel Public Affairs Committee

    Chaim Yudkowsky
    Chief Information Officer
    The American Israel Public Affairs Committee

    Chaim Yudkowsky is currently Chief information Officer for American Israel Public Affairs Committee (AIPAC), the DC headquartered not-for-profit focused on lobbying for a strong US-Israel relationship. In that role, Chaim is responsible for all traditional IT functions including oversight of IT strategy, vendor relationships, and cybersecurity program. In addition, Chaim also has primary responsibility for all physical security technology and strategy for US offices and event technology for the many AIPAC events.

    Bibliography

    "5 Pillars of API Management". Broadcom, 2021. Web.

    Bourne, James. "Apperian research shows more firms pushing larger numbers of enterprise apps". Enterprise CIO, 17 Feb 2016. Web.

    Ceci, L. "Mobile app user retention rate worldwide 2020, by vertical". Statista, 6 Apr 2022. Web.

    Clement, J. "Share of global mobile website traffic 2015-2021". Statista, 18 Feb 2022. Web

    DeVos, Jordan. "Design Problem Statements – What They Are and How to Frame Them." Toptal, n.d. Web.

    Enge, Eric. "Mobile vs. Desktop Usage in 2020". Perficient, 23 March 2021. Web.

    Engels, Antoine. "How many Android updates does Samsung, Xiaomi or OnePlus offer?" NextPit, Mar 2022. Web.

    "Fast-tracking digital transformation through next-gen technologies". Broadridge, 2022. Web.

    Gayatri. "The Pulse of Digital Transformation 2021 – Survey Results." DronaHQ, 2021. Web.

    Gray, Dave. "Updated Empathy Map Canvas." The XPLANE Collection, 15 July 2017. Web.

    "HCL Volt MX". HCL, n.d. Web.

    "iPass Mobile Professional Report 2017". iPass, 2017. Web.

    Karlsson, Johan. "Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products." Perforce, 2019. Web.

    Karnes, KC. "Why Users Uninstall Apps: 28% of People Feel Spammed [Survey]". CleverTap, 27 July 2021. Web.

    Kemp, Simon. "Digital 2021: Global Overview Report". DataReportal, 27 Jan 2021. Web.

    Kleinberg, Sara. "Consumers are always shopping and eager for your help". Google, Aug 2018. Web.

    MaLavolta, Ivano. "Anatomy of an HTML 5 mobile web app". University of L'Aquila, 16 Apr 2012. Web.

    "Maximizing Mobile Value: To BYOD or not to BYOD?" Samsung and Oxford Economics, 2022. Web.

    "Mobile App Performance Metrics For Crash-Free Apps." AppSamurai, 27 June 2018. Web.

    "Mobile Application Development Statistics: 5 Facts". Intersog, 23 Nov 2021. Web.

    Moore, Geoffrey A. "Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition: Marketing and Selling Disruptive Products to Mainstream Customers." Harper Business, 3rd edition, 2014. Book.

    "OWASP Top Ten". OWASP, 2021. Web.

    "Personas". Usability.gov, n.d. Web.

    Roden, Marky. "PSC Tech Talk: UX Design – Not just making things pretty". Xomino, 18 Mar 2018. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. "Managing the Development of Large Software Systems." USC Student Computing Facility, 1970. Web.

    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education, 2012. Book.

    Sahay, Apurvanand et al. "Supporting the understanding and comparison of low-code development platforms." Universit`a degli Studi dell'Aquila, 2020. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. "Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples." Scrum.org, 2017. Web.

    Strunk, Christian. "How to define a product vision (with examples)." Christian Strunk. n.d. Web.

    Szeja, Radoslaw. "14 Biggest Challenges in Mobile App Development in 2022". Netguru, 4 Jan 2022. Web.

    "Synopsys Research Reveals Significant Security Concerns in Popular Mobile Apps Amid Pandemic". Synopsys, 25 Mar 2021. Web.

    "TOGAF 8.1.1 Online, Part IV: Resource Base, Developing Architecture Views." The Open Group, n.d. Web.

    Wangen, Emilie Nøss. "What Is a Software Platform & How Is It Different From a Product?" HubSpot, 2021. Web.

    "Mobile App Retention Rate: What's a Good Retention Rate?" Localytics, July 2021. Web.

    "Why Mobile Apps Fail: Failure to Launch". Perfecto Mobile, 26 Jan 2014. Web.

    Appendix A

    Sample Reference Frameworks

    Reference Framework: Web Platform

    Most of the operations of the applications on a web platform are executed in the mid-tier or back-end servers. End users interact with the platform through the presentation layer, developed with web languages, in the browser.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Web Platform

    Reference Framework: Mobile Web Application

    Many mobile web applications are composed of JavaScript (the muscle of the app), HTML5 (the backbone of the app), and CSS (the aesthetics of the app). The user will make a request to the web server which will interact with the application to provide a response. Since each device has unique attributes, consider a device detection service to help adjust content for each type of device.

    this is an image of the Reference Framework: Mobile Web Application

    Source: MaLavolta, Ivono, 2012.

    Web Platform: Anatomy of a Web Server

    Web Server Services

    • Mediation Services: Perform transformation of data/messages.
    • Boundary Services: Provide interface protocol and data/message conversion capabilities.
    • Event Distribution: Provides for the enterprise-wide adoption of content and topic-based publish/subscribe event distribution.
    • Transport Services: Facilitate data transmission across the middleware/server.
    • Service Directory: Manages multiple service identifiers and locations.

    This image shows the relationships of the various web server services listed above

    Reference Framework: Hybrid Platform

    Unlike the mobile web platform, most of an application's operations on the hybrid platform is on the device within a native container. The container leverages the device browser's runtime engine and is based on the framework of the mobile delivery solution.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Hybrid Platform

    Reference Framework: Native Platform

    Applications on a native platform are installed locally on the device giving it access to native device hardware and software. The programming language depends on the operating system's or device's SDK.

    This is an image of the Reference Framework: Native Platform

    Appendix B

    List of Low- and No- Code Software Delivery Solution Features

    Supplementary List of Features

    Graphical user interface

    • Drag-and-drop designer - This feature enhances the user experience by permitting to drag all the items involved in making an app including actions, responses, connections, etc.
    • Point and click approach - This is similar to the drag-and-drop feature except it involves pointing on the item and clicking on the interface rather than dragging and dropping the item.
    • Pre-built forms/reports - This is off-the-shelf and most common reusable editable forms or reports that a user can use when developing an application.
    • Pre-built dashboards - This is off-the-shelf and most common dashboards that a user can use when developing an application.
    • Forms - This feature helps in creating a better user interface and user experience when developing applications. A form includes dashboards, custom forms, surveys, checklists, etc. which could be useful to enhance the usability of the application being developed.
    • Progress tracking - This features helps collaborators to combine their work and track the development progress of the application.
    • Advanced Reporting - This features enables the user to obtain a graphical reporting of the application usage. The graphical reporting includes graphs, tables, charts, etc.
    • Built-in workflows - This feature helps to concentrate the most common reusable workflows when creating applications.
    • Configurable workflows - Besides built-in workflows, the user should be able to customize workflows according to their needs.

    Interoperability support

    • Interoperability with external services - This feature is one of the most important features to incorporate different services and platforms including that of Microsoft, Google, etc. It also includes the interoperability possibilities among different low-code platforms.
    • Connection with data sources - This features connects the application with data sources such as Microsoft Excel, Access and other relational databases such as Microsoft SQL, Azure and other non-relational databases such as MongoDB.

    Security Support

    • Application security - This feature enables the security mechanism of an application which involves confidentiality, integrity and availability of an application, if and when required.
    • Platform security - The security and roles management is a key part in developing an application so that the confidentiality, integrity and authentication (CIA) can be ensured at the platform level.

    Collaborative development support

    • Off-line collaboration - Different developers can collaborate on the specification of the same application. They work off-line locally and then they commit to a remote server their changes, which need to be properly merged.
    • On-line collaboration - Different developers collaborate concurrently on the specification of the same application. Conflicts are managed at run-time.

    Reusability support

    • Built-in workflows - This feature helps to concentrate the most common reusable workflows in creating an application.
    • Pre-built forms/reports - This is off-the-shelf and most common reusable editable forms or reports that a user might want to employ when developing an application.
    • Pre-built dashboards - This is off-the-shelf and most common dashboards that a user might want to employ when developing an application.

    Scalability

    • Scalability on number of users - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the number of active users that are using that application at the same time.
    • Scalability on data traffic - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the volume of data traffic that are allowed by that application in a particular time.
    • Scalability on data storage - This features enables the application to scale-up with respect to the data storage capacity of that application.

    Business logic specification mechanisms

    • Business rules engine - This feature helps in executing one or more business rules that help in managing data according to user's requirements.
    • Graphical workflow editor - This feature helps to specify one or more business rules in a graphical manner.
    • AI enabled business logic - This is an important feature which uses Artificial Intelligence in learning the behavior of an attributes and replicate those behaviors according to learning mechanisms.

    Application build mechanisms

    • Code generation - According to this feature, the source code of the modeled application is generated and subsequently deployed before its execution.
    • Models at run-time - The model of the specified application is interpreted and used at run-time during the execution of the modeled application without performing any code generation phase.

    Deployment support

    • Deployment on cloud - This features enables an application to be deployed online in a cloud infrastructure when the application is ready to deployed and used.
    • Deployment on local infrastructures - This features enables an application to be deployed locally on the user organization's infrastructure when the application is ready to be deployed and used.

    Kinds of supported applications

    • Event monitoring - This kind of applications involves the process of collecting data, analyzing the event that can be caused by the data, and signaling any events occurring on the data to the user.
    • Process automation - This kind of applications focuses on automating complex processes, such as workflows, which can take place with minimal human intervention.
    • Approval process control - This kind of applications consists of processes of creating and managing work approvals depending on the authorization of the user. For example, payment tasks should be managed by the approval of authorized personnel only.
    • Escalation management - This kind of applications are in the domain of customer service and focuses on the management of user viewpoints that filter out aspects that are not under the user competences.
    • Inventory management - This kind of applications is for monitoring the inflow and outflow of goods and manages the right amount of goods to be stored.
    • Quality management - This kind of applications is for managing the quality of software projects, e.g., by focusing on planning, assurance, control and improvements of quality factors.
    • Workflow management - This kind of applications is defined as sequences of tasks to be performed and monitored during their execution, e.g., to check the performance and correctness of the overall workflow.

    Source: Sahay, Apurvanand et al., 2020

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}425|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,500 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive AWS bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for over architecting or overspending on AWS.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their AWS spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define processes for right-sizing, and define processes for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List

    Infographic

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on AWS

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles and responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Chargeback/showback model to provide clear accountability for costs.

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles and responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles and responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes and Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes and procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and Alerts

    4 Build Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement and improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}341|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Because ROI is a financial concept, it can be difficult to apply ROI to anything that produces intangible value.
    • It is a lot harder to apply ROI to functions like data and analytics than it is to apply it to functions like sales without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The standard ROI formula cannot be easily applied to data and analytics and other critical functions across the organization.
    • Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved.
    • The ROI score itself doesn’t have to be perfect. Key decision makers need to agree on the parameters and measures of success.

    Impact and Result

    • Agreed-upon ROI parameters
    • Defined measures of success
    • Optimized ROI program effectiveness by establishing an appropriate cadence between key stakeholders

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Data and Analytics ROI Strategy Deck – A guide for positioning ROI to maximize the value of data and analytics.

    This research is meant to ensure that data and analytics executives are aligned with the key business decision makers. Focus on the value you are trying to achieve rather than perfecting the ROI score.

    • Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics Storyboard

    2. Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map – An aligned ROI approach between key decision makers and data and analytics.

    A tool to be used by business and data and analytics decision makers to facilitate discussions about how to approach ROI for data and analytics.

    • Data and Analytics Service to Business ROI Map
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Position and Agree on ROI to Maximize the Impact of Data and Analytics

    Data and analytics ROI strategy is based on the business problem being solved and agreed-upon value being generated.

    Analyst Perspective

    Missing out on a significant opportunity for returns could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor.

    This research is directed to the key decision makers tasked with addressing business problems. It also informs stakeholders that have any interest in ROI, especially when applying it to a data and analytics platform and practice.

    While organizations typically use ROI to measure the performance of their investments, the key to determining what investment makes sense is opportunity cost. Missing out on a significant opportunity for return could be the biggest cost to the project and its sponsor. By making sure you appropriately estimate costs and value returned for all data and analytics activities, you can prioritize the ones that bring in the greatest returns.

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst,
    Data & Analytics Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Ben Abrishami-Shirazi
    Technical Counselor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary – ROI on Data and Analytics

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Return on investment (ROI) is a financial term, making it difficult to articulate value when trying to incorporate anything that produces something intangible.

    The more financial aspects there are to a professional function (e.g. sales and commodity-related functions), the easier it is to properly assess the ROI.

    However, for functions that primarily enable or support business functions (such as IT and data and analytics), it is a lot harder to apply ROI without misrepresenting its true purpose.

    • Apples and oranges – There is no simple way to apply the standard ROI formula to data and analytics among other critical functions across the organization.
    • Boiling the ocean – Obsession with finding a way to calculate a perfect ROI on data and analytics.
    • Not getting the big picture – Data and analytics teams suffer a skill set deficit when it comes to commercial acumen.
    • Not seeing eye to eye – ROI does not account for time in its calculation, making it prone to misalignment between stakeholders.

    Approach ROI for data and analytics appropriately:

    • Answer the following questions:
      • What is the business problem?
      • Whose business problem is it?
      • What is the objective?
    • Define measures of success based on the answers to the questions above.
    • Determine an appropriate cadence to continuously optimize the ROI program for data and analytics in collaboration with business problem owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    ROI doesn’t have to be perfect. Parameters and measures of success need to be agreed upon with the key decision makers.

    Glossary

    Return on Investment (ROI): A financial term used to determine how much value has been or will be gained or lost based on the total cost of investment. It is typically expressed as a percentage and is supported by the following formula:

    Payback: How quickly money is paid back (or returned) on the initial investment.
    Business Problem Owner (BPO): A leader in the organization who is accountable and is the key decision maker tasked with addressing a business problem through a series of investments. BPOs may use ROI as a reference for how their financial investments have performed and to influence future investment decisions.
    Problem Solver: A key stakeholder tasked with collaborating with the BPO in addressing the business problem at hand. One of the problem solver’s responsibilities is to ensure that there is an improved return on the BPO’s investments.
    Return Enhancers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly enhance the return of an investment.
    Cost Savers: A category for capabilities that directly or indirectly save costs in relation of an investment.
    Investment Opportunity Enablers: A category for capabilities that create or enable a new investment opportunity that may yield a potential return.
    Game Changing Components: The components of a capability that directly yield value in solving a business problem.

    ROI strategy on data and analytics

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the ROI strategy on data and analytics.

    ROI roles

    Typical roles involved in the ROI strategy across the organization

    CDOs and CAOs typically have their budget allocated from both IT and business units.

    This is evidenced by the “State of the CIO Survey 2023” reporting that up to 63% of CDOs and CAOs have some budget allocated from within IT; therefore, up to 37% of budgets are entirely funded by business executives.

    This signifies the need to be aligned with peer executives and to use mechanisms like ROI to maximize the performance of investments.

    Source: Foundry, “State of the CIO Survey 2023.”

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}110|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering, and how?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance, but basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.
    • Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.
    • While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

    Impact and Result

    • Avoid disintermediation.
    • Maintain compliance.
    • Leverage economies of scale.
    • Ensure architecture discipline.

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Cloud Brokerage Deck – A guide to help you start designing a cloud brokerage that delivers value beyond gatekeeping.

    Define the value, ecosystem, and metrics required to add value as a brokerage. Develop a brokerage value proposition that aligns with your audience and capabilities. Define and rationalize the ecosystem of partners and value-add activities for your brokerage. Define KPIs that allow you to maximize and balance both usability and compliance.

    • Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

    Considerations for implementing an institutional-focused cloud brokerage.

    Your Challenge

    Increasingly, large institutions and governments are adopting cloud-first postures for delivering IT resources. Combined with the growth of cloud offerings that are able to meet the certifications and requirements of this segment that has been driven by federal initiatives like Cloud-First in Canada and Cloud Smart in the United States, these two factors have left institutions (and the businesses that serve them) with the challenge of delivering cloud services to their users while maintaining compliance, control, and IT sanity.

    In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering and how?

    Navigating the Problem

    Not all cloud brokerages are the same. And while they can be an answer to cloud complexity, an ineffective brokerage can drain value and complicate operations even further. Cloud brokerages need to be designed:

    1. To deliver the right type of value to its users.
    2. To strike the balance between effective governance & security and flexibility & ease of use.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By defining your end goals, framing solutions based on the type of value and rigor your brokerage needs to deliver, and focusing on the right balance of security and flexibility, you can deliver a brokerage that delivers the best of all worlds.

    1. Define the brokerage value you want to deliver.
    2. Build the catalog and partner ecosystem.
    3. Understand how to maximize adoption and minimize disintermediation while maintaining architectural discipline and compliance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sometimes a brokerage delivery model makes sense, sometimes it doesn’t! Understanding the value addition you want your brokerage to provide before creating it allows you to not only avoid pitfalls and maximize benefits but also understand when a brokerage model does and doesn’t make sense in the first place.

    Project Overview

    Understand what value you want your brokerage to deliver

    Different institutions want brokerage delivery for different reasons. It’s important to define up front why your users need to work through a brokerage and what value that brokerage needs to deliver.

    What’s in the catalog? Is it there to consolidate and simplify billing and consumption? Or does it add value further up the technology stack or value chain? If so, how does that change the capabilities you need internally and from partners?

    Security and compliance are usually the highest priority

    Among institutions adopting cloud, a broker that can help deliver their defined security and compliance standards is an almost universal requirement. Especially in government institutions, this can mean the need to meet a high standard in both implementation and validation.

    The good news is that even if you lack the complete set of skills in-house, the high certification levels available from hyperscale providers combined with a growing ecosystem of service providers working on these platforms means you can usually find the right partner(s) to make it possible.

    The real goal: frictionless intermediation and enablement

    Ultimately, if end users can’t get what they need from you, they will go around you to get it. This challenge, which has always existed in IT, is further amplified in a cloud service world that offers users a cornucopia of options outside the brokerage. Furthermore, cloud users expect to be able to consume IT seamlessly. Without frictionless satisfaction of user demand your brokerage will become disintermediated, which risks your highest priorities of security and compliance.

    Understand the evolution: Info-Tech thought model

    While initial adoption of cloud brokerages in institutions was focused on ensuring the ability of IT to extend its traditional role as gatekeeper to the realm of cloud services, the focus has now shifted upstream to enabling ease of use and smart adoption of cloud services. This is evidenced clearly in examples like the US government’s renaming of its digital strategy from “Cloud First” to “Cloud Smart” and has been mirrored in other regions and institutions.

    Info-Tech Insights

    To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance.

    Basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.

    Exceed expectations! Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.

    • Security & Compliance
    • Frictionless Intermediation
    • Cloud-Enabling Brokerage

    Define the role of a cloud broker

    Where do brokers fit in the cloud model?

    • NIST Definition: An entity that manages the use, performance, and delivery of cloud services and negotiates relationships between cloud providers and cloud consumers.
    • Similar to a telecom master agent, a cloud broker acts as the middle-person and end-user point of contact, consolidating the management of underlying providers.
    • A government or institutional cloud broker (GCB) is responsible for the delivery of all cloud services consumed by the departments or agencies it supports or that are mandated to use it.

    Balancing governance and agility

    Info-Tech Insight

    While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

    Model brokerage drivers and benefits

    Reduced costs: Security through standardization: Frictionless consumption: Avoid disinter-mediation; Maintain compliance; Leverage economies of scale; Ensure architecture discipline

    Maintain compliance and ensure architecture discipline: Brokerages can be an effective gating point for ensuring properly governed and managed IT consumption that meets the specific regulations and compliances required for an institution. It can also be a strong catalyst and enabler for moving to even more effective cloud consumption through automation.

    Avoid disintermediation: Especially in institutions, cloud brokers are a key tool in the fight against disintermediation – that is, end users circumventing your IT department’s procurement and governance by consuming an ad hoc cloud service.

    Leverage economies of scale: Simply put, consolidation of your cloud consumption drives effectiveness by making the most of your buying power.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Understanding the importance of each benefit type to your brokerage audience will help you define the type of brokerage you need to build and what skills and partners will be required to deliver the right value.

    The brokerage landscape

    The past ten years have seen governments and institutions evolve from basic acceptance of cloud services to the usage of cloud as the core of most IT initiatives.

    • As part of this evolution, many organizations now have well-defined standards and guidance for the implementation, procurement, and regulation of cloud services for their use.
    • Both Canada (Strategic Plan for Information Management and Information Technology) and the United States (Cloud Smart – formerly known as Cloud First) have recently updated their guidance on adoption of cloud services. The Australian Government has also recently updated its Cloud Computing Policy.
    • AWS and Azure both now claim Full FedRAMP (Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program) certification.
    • This has not only enabled easy adoption of these core hyperscale cloud service by government but also driven the proliferation of a large ecosystem of FedRAMP-authorized cloud service providers.
    • This trend started with government at the federal level but has cascaded downstream to provincial and municipal governments globally, and the same model seems likely to be adopted by other governments and other institution types over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The ecosystem of platforms and tools has grown significantly and examples of best practices, especially in government, are readily available. Once you’ve defined your brokerage’s value stance, the building blocks you need to deliver often don’t need to be built from scratch.

    Address the unique challenges of business-led IT in institutions

    With the business taking more accountability and management of their own technology, brokers must learn how to evolve from being gatekeepers to enablers.

    This image This lists the Cons of IT acting as a gatekeeper providing oversight, and the Pros of IT acting as an Enabler in an IT Partnership.  the Cons are: Restrict System Access; Deliver & Monitor Applications; Own Organizational Risk; Train the Business.  The Pros are: Manage Role-Based Access; Deliver & Monitor Platforms; Share Organizational Risk; Coach & Mentor the Business

    Turn brokerage pitfalls into opportunities

    The greatest risks in using a cloud broker come from its nature as a single point of distribution for service and support. Without resources (or automation) to enable scale, as well as responsive processes for supporting users in finding the right services and making those services available through the brokerage, you will lose alignment with your users’ needs, which inevitably leads to disintermediation, loss of IT control, and broken compliance

    Info-Tech Insights

    Standardization and automation are your friend when building a cloud brokerage! Sometimes this means having a flexible catalog of options and configurations, but great brokerages can deliver value by helping their users redefine and evolve their workloads to work more effectively in the cloud. This means providing guidance and facilitating the landing/transformation of users’ workloads in the cloud, the right way.

    Challenges Impact
    • Single point of failure
    • Managing capacity
    • Alignment of brokerage with underlying agencies
    • Additional layer of complexity
    • Inability to deliver service
    • Disintermediation
    • Broken security/compliance
    • Loss of cost control/purchasing power

    Validate your cloud brokerage strategy using Info-Tech’s approach

    Value Definition

    • Define your brokerage type and value addition

    Capabilities Mapping

    • Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver

    Measuring Value

    • Define KPIs for both compliant delivery and frictionless intermediation

    Provide Cloud Excellence

    • Move from intermediation to enablement and help users land on the cloud the right way

    Define the categories for your brokerage’s benefit and value

    Depending on the type of brokerage, the value delivered may be as simple as billing consolidation, but many brokerages go much deeper in their value proposition.

    This image depicts a funnel, where the following inputs make up the Broker Value: Integration, Interface and Management Enhancement; User Identity and Risk Management/ Security & Compliance; Cost & Workload Efficiency, Service Aggregation

    Define the categories of brokerage value to add

    • Purchasing Agents save the purchaser time by researching services from different vendors and providing the customer with information about how to use cloud computing to support business goals.
    • Contract Managers may also be assigned power to negotiate contracts with cloud providers on behalf of the customer. In this scenario, the broker may distribute services across multiple vendors to achieve cost-effectiveness, while managing the technical and procurement complexity of dealing with multiple vendors.
      • The broker may provide users with an application program interface (API) and user interface (UI) that hides any complexity and allows the customer to work with their cloud services as if they were being purchased from a single vendor. This type of broker is sometimes referred to as a cloud aggregator.
    • Cloud Enablers can also provide the customer with additional services, such as managing the deduplication, encryption, and cloud data transfer and assisting with data lifecycle management and other activities.
    • Cloud Customizers integrate various underlying cloud services for customers to provide a custom offering under a white label or its own brand.
    • Cloud Agents are essentially the software version of a Contract Manager and act by automating and facilitating the distribution of work between different cloud service providers.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Remember that these categories are general guidelines! Depending on the requirements and value a brokerage needs to deliver, it may fit more than one category of broker type.

    Brokerage types and value addition

    Info-Tech Insights

    Each value addition your brokerage invests in delivering should tie to reinforcing efficiency, compliance, frictionlessness, or enablement.

    Value Addition Purchasing Agent Contract Manager Cloud Enabler Cloud Customizer Cloud Agent
    Underlying service selection

    Standard Activity

    Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
    Support and info Standard Activity

    Common Activity

    Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
    Contract lifecycle (pricing/negotiation) Standard Activity Common Activity Standard Activity
    Workload distribution (to underlying services) (aggregation) Common Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity
    Value-add or layered on services Standard Activity Common Activity
    Customization/integration of underlying services Standard Activity
    Automated workload distribution (i.e. software) Standard Activity

    Start by delivering value in these common brokerage service categories

    Security & Compliance

    • Reporting & Auditing
    • SIEM & SOC Services
    • Patching & Monitoring

    Cost Management

    • Right-Sizing
    • Billing Analysis
    • Anomaly Detection & Change Recommendations

    Data Management

    • Data Tiering
    • Localization Management
    • Data Warehouse/Lake Services

    Resilience & Reliability

    • Backup & Archive
    • Replication & Sync
    • DR & HA Management
    • Ransomware Prevention/Mitigation

    Cloud-Native & DevOps Enablement

    • Infrastructure as Code (IaC)
    • DevOps Tools & Processes
    • SDLC Automation Tools

    Design, Transformation, and Integration

    • CDN Integration
    • AI Tools Integration
    • SaaS Customizations

    Activity: Brokerage value design

    Who are you and who are you building this for?

    • Internal brokerage (i.e. you are a department in an organization that is tasked with providing IT resources to other internal groups)
      • No profit motivation
      • Primary goal is to maintain compliance and avoid disintermediation
    • Third-party brokerage (i.e. you are an MSP that needs to build a brokerage to provide a variety of downstream services and act as the single point of consumption for an organization)
      • Focus on value-addition to the downstream services you facilitate for your client
      • Increased requirement to quickly add new partners/services from downstream as required by your client

    What requirements and pains do you need to address?

    • Remember that in the world of cloud, users ultimately can go around IT to find the resources and tools they want to use. In short, if you don’t provide ease and value, they will get it somewhere else.
    • Assess the different types of cloud brokerages out there as a guide to what sort of value you want to deliver.

    Why are you creating a brokerage? There are several categories of driver and more than one may apply.

    • Compliance and security gating/validation
    • Cost consolidation and governance
    • Value-add or feature enhancement of raw/downstream services being consumed

    It’s important to clearly understand how best you can deliver unique value to ensure that they want to consume from you.

    This is an image of a Venn diagram between the following: Who are you trying to serve?; Why and how are you uniquely positioned to deliver?; What requirements do they have and what pain points can you help solve?.  Where all three circles overlap is the Brokerage Value Proposition.

    Understand the ecosystem you’ll require to deliver value

    GCB

    • Enabling Effectiveness
    • Cost Governance
    • Adoption and User Satisfaction
    • Security & Compliance

    Whatever value proposition and associated services your brokerage has defined, either internal resources or additional partners will be required to run the platform and processes you want to offer on top of the defined base cloud platforms.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Remember to always align your value adds and activities to the four key themes:

    • Efficiency
    • Compliance
    • Frictionlessness
    • Cloud Enablement

    Delivering value may require an ecosystem

    The additional value your broker delivers will depend on the tools and services you can layer on top of the base cloud platform(s) you support.

    In many cases, you may require different partners to fulfil similar functions across different base platforms. Although this increases complexity for the brokerage, it’s also a place where additional value can be delivered to end users by your role as a frictionless intermediary.

    Base Partner/Platform

    • Third-party software & platforms
    • Third-party automations & integrations
    • Third-party service partners
    • Internal value-add functions

    Build the ecosystem you need for your value proposition

    Leverage partners and automation to bake compliance in.

    Different value-add types (based on the category/categories of broker you’re targeting) require different additional platforms and partners to augment the base cloud service you’re brokering.

    Security & Config

    • IaC Tools
    • Cloud Resource Configuration Validation
    • Templating Tools
    • Security Platforms
    • SDN and Networking Platforms
    • Resilience (Backup/Replication/DR/HA) Platforms
    • Data & Storage Management
    • Compliance and Validation Platforms & Partners

    Cost Management

    • Subscription Hierarchy Management
    • Showback and Chargeback Logic
    • Cost Dashboarding and Thresholding
    • Governance and Intervention

    Adoption & User Satisfaction

    • Service Delivery SLAs
    • Support Process & Tools
    • Capacity/Availability Management
    • Portal Usability/UX

    Speed of Evolution

    • Partner and Catalog/Service Additions
    • Broker Catalog Roadmapping
    • User Request Capture (new services)
    • User Request Capture (exceptions)

    Build your features and services lists

    Incorporate your end user, business, and IT perspectives in defining the list of mandatory and desired features of your target solution.

    See our Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint for information on procurement practices, including RFP templates.

    End User

    • Visual, drag-and-drop models to define data models, business logic, and user interfaces
    • One-click deployment
    • Self-healing application
    • Vendor-managed infrastructure
    • Active community and marketplace
    • Prebuilt templates and libraries
    • Optical character recognition and natural language processing

    Business

    • Audit and change logs
    • Theme and template builder
    • Template management
    • Knowledgebase and document management
    • Role-based access
    • Business value, operational costs, and other KPI monitoring
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Consistent design and user experience across applications
    • Business workflow automation

    IT

    • Application and system performance monitoring
    • Versioning and code management
    • Automatic application and system refactoring and recovery
    • Exception and error handling
    • Scalability (e.g. load balancing) and infrastructure management
    • Real-time debugging
    • Testing capabilities
    • Security management
    • Application integration management

    Understand the stakeholders

    Hyperscale Platform/Base Platform: Security; Compliance and Validation;Portal/Front-End; Cost Governance; Broker Value Add(s)

    Depending on the value-add(s) you are trying to deliver, as well as the requirements from your institution(s), you will have a different delineation of responsibilities for each of the value-add dimensions. Typically, there will be at least three stakeholders whose role needs to be considered for each dimension:

    • Base Cloud Provider
    • Third-Party Platforms/Service Providers
    • Internal Resources

    Info-Tech Insights

    It’s important to remember that the ecosystem of third-party options available to you in each case will likely be dependent on if a given partner operates or supports your chosen base provider.

    Define the value added by each stakeholder in your value chain

    Value Addition Cost Governance Security & Compliance Adoption and User Satisfaction New Service Addition Speed End-User Cloud Effectiveness
    Base platform(s)
    Third party
    Internal

    A basic table of the stakeholders and platforms involved in your value stream is a critical tool for aligning activities and partners with brokerage value.

    Remember to tie each value-add category you’re embarking on to at least one of the key themes!

    Cost Governance → Efficiency

    Security & Compliance → Compliance

    Adoption & User Satisfaction → Frictionlessness

    New Service Addition Responsiveness → Frictionlessness, Enablement

    End-User Cloud Effectiveness → Enablement

    Info-Tech Insights

    The expectations for how applications are consumed and what a user experience should look like is increasingly being guided by the business and by the disintermediating power of the cloud-app ecosystem.

    “Enabling brokers” help embrace business-led IT

    In environments where compliance and security are a must, the challenges of handing off application management to the business are even more complex. Great brokers learn to act not just as a gatekeeper but an enabler of business-led IT.

    Business Empowerment

    Organizations are looking to enhance their Agile and BizDevOps practices by shifting traditional IT practices left and toward the business.

    Changing Business Needs

    Organizational priorities are constantly changing. Cost reduction opportunities and competitive advantages are lost because of delayed delivery of features.

    Low Barrier to Entry

    Low- and no-code development tools, full-stack solutions, and plug-and-play architectures allow non-technical users to easily build and implement applications without significant internal technical support or expertise.

    Democratization of IT

    A wide range of digital applications, services, and information are readily available and continuously updated through vendor and public marketplaces and open-source communities.

    Technology-Savvy Business

    The business is motivated to learn more about the technology they use so that they can better integrate it into their processes.

    Balance usability and compliance: accelerate cloud effectiveness

    Move to being an accelerator and an enabler! Rather than creating an additional layer of complexity, we can use the abstraction of a cloud brokerage to bring a wide variety of value-adds and partners into the ecosystem without increasing complexity for end users.

    Manage the user experience

    • Your portal is a great source of data for optimizing user adoption and satisfaction.
    • Understand the KPIs that matter to your clients or client groups from both a technical and a service perspective.

    Be proactive and responsive in meeting changing needs

    • Determine dashboard consumption by partner view.
    • Regularly review and address the gaps in your catalog.
    • Provide an easy mechanism for adding user-demanded services.

    Think like a service provider

    • You do need to be able to communicate and even market internally new services and capabilities as you add them or people won't know to come to you to use them.
    • It's also critical in helping people move along the path to enablement and knowing what might be possible that they hadn't considered.

    Provide cloud excellence functions

    Enablement Broker

    • Mentorship & Training
      • Build the skills, knowledge, and experiences of application owners and managers with internal and external expertise.
    • Organizational Change Leadership
      • Facilitate cultural, governance, and other organizational changes through strong relationships with business and IT leadership.
    • Good Delivery Practices & Thinking
      • Develop, share, and maintain a toolkit of good software development lifecycle (SDLC) practices and techniques.
    • Knowledge Sharing
      • Centralize a knowledgebase of up-to-date and accurate documentation and develop community forums to facilitate knowledge transfer.
    • Technology Governance & Leadership
      • Implement the organizational standards, policies, and rules for all applications and platforms and coordinate growth and sprawl.
    • Shared Services & Integrations
      • Provide critical services and integrations to support end users with internal resources or approved third-party providers and partners.

    Gauge value with the right metrics

    Focus your effort on measuring key metrics.

    Category

    Purpose

    Examples

    Business Value – The amount of value and benefits delivered. Justify the investment and impact of the brokerage and its optimization to business operations. ROI, user productivity, end-user satisfaction, business operational costs, error rate
    Application Quality – Satisfaction of application quality standards. Evaluate organizational effort to address and maximize user satisfaction and adoption rates. Adoption rate, usage friction metrics, user satisfaction metrics
    Delivery Effectiveness – The delivery efficiency of changes. Enable members to increase their speed to effective deployment, operation, and innovation on cloud platforms. Speed of deployment, landing/migration success metrics

    Determine measures that demonstrate the value of your brokerage by aligning it with your quality definition, value drivers, and users’ goals and objectives. Recognize that your journey will require constant monitoring and refinement to adjust to situations that may arise as you adopt new products, standards, strategies, tactics, processes, and tools.

    Activity Output

    Ultimately, the goal is designing a brokerage that can evolve from gatekeeping to frictionless intermediation to cloud enablement.

    Maintain focus on the value proposition, your brokerage ecosystem, and the metrics that represent enablement for your users and avoid pitfalls and challenges from the beginning.

    Activity: Define your brokerage type and value addition; Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver; Define KPIs for both delivery (compliance) and adoption (frictionlessness); Output: GCB Strategy Plan; Addresses: Why and when you should build a GCB; How to avoid pitfalls; How to maximize benefits; How to maximize responsiveness and user satisfaction; How to roadmap and add services with agility.

    Appendix

    Related blueprints and tools

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    This blueprint covers aligning your value proposition with general cloud requirements.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    Phase 1 of this research covers identifying value chains to be transformed.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Phase 1 of this research covers understanding the business-managed applications as a factor in developing a frictionless intermediary model.

    Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process

    This blueprint provides information on partner selection and procurement practices, including RFP templates.

    Bibliography

    “3 Types of Cloud Brokers That Can Save the Cloud.” Cloud Computing Topics, n.d. Web.

    Australian Government Cloud Computing Policy. Government of Australia, October 2014. Web.

    “Cloud Smart Policy Overview.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

    “From Cloud First to Cloud Smart.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

    Gardner, Dana. “Cloud brokering: Building a cloud of clouds.” ZDNet, 22 April 2011. Web.

    Narcisi, Gina. “Cloud, Next-Gen Services Help Master Agents Grow Quickly And Beat 'The Squeeze' “As Connectivity Commissions Decline.” CRN, 14 June 2017. Web.

    Smith, Spencer. “Asigra calls out the perils of cloud brokerage model.” TechTarget, 28 June 2019. Web.

    Tan, Aaron. “Australia issues new cloud computing guidelines.” TechTarget, 27 July 2020. Web.

    The European Commission Cloud Strategy. ec.europa.eu, 16 May 2019. Web.

    “TrustRadius Review: Cloud Brokers 2022.” TrustRadius, 2022. Web.

    Yedlin, Debbie. “Pros and Cons of Using a Cloud Broker.” Technology & Business Integrators, 17 April 2015. Web.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}351|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $133,318 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide to the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey your direction, strategy, and tactics to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    • Products require continuous additions and enhancements to sustain their value. This requires detailed, yet simple communication to a variety of stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A vision without tactics is an unsubstantiated dream, while tactics without a vision is working without a purpose. You need to have a handle on both to achieve outcomes that are aligned with the needs of your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up – lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built-in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a digital product vision that you can stand behind. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a digital product vision

    Define a digital product vision that takes into account your objectives, business value, stakeholders, customers, and metrics.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 1: Define a Digital Product Vision
    • Digital Product Strategy Template
    • Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Build a better backlog

    Build a structure for your backlog that supports your product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 2: Build a Better Backlog
    • Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    3. Build a product roadmap

    Define standards, ownership for your backlog to effectively communicate your strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 3: Build a Product Roadmap
    • Product Roadmap Tool

    4. Release and deliver value

    Understand what to consider when planning your next release.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 4: Release and Deliver Value

    5. Communicate the strategy – make it happen

    Build a plan for communicating and updating your strategy and where to go next.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 5: Communicate the Strategy – Make It Happen!

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Digital Product Vision

    The Purpose

    Understand the elements of a good product vision and the pieces that back it up.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals people can align to.

    Activities

    1.1 Build out the elements of an effective digital product vision

    Outputs

    Completed product vision definition for a familiar product via the product canvas

    2 Build a Better Backlog

    The Purpose

    Define the standards and approaches to populate your product backlog that support your vision and overall strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized backlog with quality throughout that enables alignment and the operationalization of the overall strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Introduction to key activities required to support your digital product vision

    2.2 What do we mean by a quality backlog?

    2.3 Explore backlog structure and standards

    2.4 Define backlog data, content, and quality filters

    Outputs

    Articulate the activities required to support the population and validation of your backlog

    An understanding of what it means to create a quality backlog (quality filters)

    Defining the structural elements of your backlog that need to be considered

    Defining the content of your backlog and quality standards

    3 Build a Product Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define standards and procedures for creating and updating your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Enable your team to create a product roadmap to communicate your product strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    Activities

    3.1 Disambiguating backlogs vs. roadmaps

    3.2 Defining audiences, accountability, and roadmap communications

    3.3 Exploring roadmap visualizations

    Outputs

    Understand the difference between a roadmap and a backlog

    Roadmap standards and agreed-to accountability for roadmaps

    Understand the different ways to visualize your roadmap and select what is relevant to your context

    4 Define Your Release, Communication, and Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Build a release plan aligned to your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what goes into defining a release via the release canvas.

    Considerations in communication of your strategy.

    Understand how to frame your vision to enable the communication of your strategy (via an executive summary).

    Activities

    4.1 Lay out your release plan

    4.2 How to introduce your product vision

    4.3 Communicate changes to your strategy

    4.4 Where do we get started?

    Outputs

    Release canvas

    An executive summary used to introduce other parties to your product vision

    Specifics on communication of the changes to your roadmap

    Your first step to getting started

    Build a Digital Workspace Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}294|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy
    • IT must figure out what a digital workspace is, why they’re building one, and what type they want.
    • Remote work creates challenges that cannot be solved by technology alone.
    • Focusing solely on technology risks building something the business doesn’t want or can’t use.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Building a smaller digital workspace doesn’t mean that the workspace will have a smaller impact on the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Partner with the business to create a team of digital workspace champions.
    • Empower employees with a tool that makes remote work easier.

    Build a Digital Workspace Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should partner with the business for building a digital workspace, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the digital workspace you want to build

    Create a list of benefits that the organization will find compelling and build a cross-functional team to champion the workspace.

    • Build a Digital Workspace Strategy – Phase 1: Identify the Digital Workspace You Want to Build
    • Digital Workspace Strategy Template
    • Digital Workspace Executive Presentation Template

    2. Identify high-level requirements

    Design the digital workspace’s value proposition to drive your requirements.

    • Build a Digital Workspace Strategy – Phase 2: Identify High-Level Requirements
    • Sample Digital Workspace Value Proposition
    • Flexible Work Location Policy
    • Flexible Work Time Policy
    • Flexible Work Time Off Policy
    • Mobile Device Remote Wipe Waiver Template
    • Mobile Device Connectivity & Allowance Policy
    • General Security – User Acceptable Use Policy

    3. Identify initiatives and a high-level roadmap

    Take an agile approach to building your digital workspace.

    • Build a Digital Workspace Strategy – Phase 3: Identify Initiatives and a High-Level Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Digital Workspace Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Digital Workspace You Want to Build

    The Purpose

    Ensure that the digital workspace addresses real problems the business is facing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined benefits that will address business problems

    Identified strategic business partners

    Activities

    1.1 Identify the digital workspace’s direction.

    1.2 Prioritize benefits and define a vision.

    1.3 Assemble a team of digital workspace champions.

    Outputs

    Vision statement

    Mission statement

    Guiding principles

    Prioritized business benefits

    Metrics and key performance indicators

    Service Owner, Business Owner, and Project Sponsor role definitions

    Project roles and responsibilities

    Operational roles and responsibilities

    2 Identify Business Requirements

    The Purpose

    Drive requirements through a well-designed value proposition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified requirements that are based in employees’ needs

    Activities

    2.1 Design the value proposition.

    2.2 Identify required policies.

    2.3 Identify required level of input from users and business units.

    2.4 Document requirements for user experiences, processes, and services.

    2.5 Identify in-scope training and culture requirements.

    Outputs

    Prioritized functionality requirements

    Value proposition for three business roles

    Value proposition for two service provider roles

    Policy requirements

    Interview and focus group plan

    Business process requirements

    Training and culture initiatives

    3 Identify IT and Service Provider Requirements

    The Purpose

    Ensure that technology is an enabler.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented requirements for IT and service provider technology

    Activities

    3.1 Identify systems of record requirements.

    3.2 Identify requirements for apps.

    3.3 Identify information storage requirements.

    3.4 Identify management and security integrations.

    3.5 Identify requirements for internal and external partners.

    Outputs

    Requirements for systems for record

    Prioritized list of apps

    Storage system requirements

    Data and security requirements

    Outsourcing requirements

    Cookie Notice

    Gert Taeymans BV wants to inform you about our cookie notice on the Gert Taeymans BV websites via this document. Please also see the privacy policy which you can find here.

    This website is owned by Gert Taeymans BV

    Contact details:
    Gert Taeymans BV
    Koning Albertstraat 136
    2070 Burcht
    Belgium
    Company number: 0685974694
    Phone: +32 3 289 41 09
    email: gtbvba@gerttaeymans.com

    Site Scope

    The websites in scope of this notice are:

    • tymansgroup.com
    • gerttaeymans.consulting
    • gerttaeymans.site
    • gerttaeymans.audio

    Cookie Types

    We differentiate 4 types of cookies

    • Necessary cookies
      Necessary cookies help make our website usable by enabling basic functions like page navigation and access to secure areas of the website. While you can decline them, The website cannot function properly without these cookies.
    • Preferences cookies
      Preference cookies enable our website to remember information that changes the way the website behaves or looks, like your preferred language or the region that you are in. They may include cookies from 3rd party providers whose content we show or reference on our site. Those cookies are outside of our control and these providers may change their terms and policies at any time.
    • Statistics cookies
      Statistic cookies help our company to understand how visitors interact with our website by collecting and reporting statistical information pseudonymously. That means that eg. your IP address is scrambled in such a way that it will always be the same upon each subsequent visit to our site, so that Google can process the visit as a return visit. This helps with basic statistics, but also is a factor in how well we rank in future searches. Many returning visitors means that you like our site and that is a ranking element.
      Due to the ECJ striking down the  EU-US Privacy Shield agreement, this leaves us with a open gap. The resulting implications and actions to take are not yet clear. However, when agreeing to statistics cookies, you agree that your data may be processed in the United States under less strict privacy laws and that your data will be exposed to all associated risks. Such risks include the US government being able to investigate you, simply for being a non-US citizen due to provision 702 of the FISA act, which they are able to do anyway, with or without the cookie. Also, the laws in the United States are less strict with regards to selling information to third parties.
    • Marketing cookies
      Marketing cookies are used to track you across websites. The intention is to display ads that are relevant and engaging for you and thereby more valuable for publishers and third party advertisers. At this point we do not allow ads to display on our site, so no third-party trackers are defined on our site. We may add a 1st party (us) tracker to our site at any time.

    Actual cookies used

    Necessary cookies (all sites in site scope)

    Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    Session cookie (displayed as a long series of numbers and letters) The active session ID When you close your broser, clear your cookie's cache in your browser or after 60 minutes of inactivity on the site. The cookie may remain in your machine but is no longer valid after the mentioned tile of inactivity    

    The browser cookie is simply a random string of characters to identify the visitor. There are no personally identifable details in the cookie and no real data of use at all. The cookie is marked as a 'session' type of cookie, which means it will expire (be deleted automatically) when the browser is closed or cleaned by the browser after a set period of non-use; for instance, you haven't visited a page on the site that has used the cookie for 1 week. This latter case is useful for people that leave their computer running and never close their browser.

    The use of a cookie is what gives your website a short-term memory. By providing it with each request, Joomla can look up the history of the current viewing session in the database record below.

    cookieconsent_status allow 1 year This cookie stores that you have consented to the use of cookies on our site. It is there to avoid that you have to give your consent again at every page load.

    Preferences cookies

    Site Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    gerttaeymans.consulting None at this stage N/A N/A   N/A
    tymansgroup.com None at this stage N/A N/A N/A
             
             

    Statistical cookies

    Site Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    All Scope _ga Google Analytics type and account identifier 2 years This cookie identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
    All Scope _gat_gtag_UA_140807308_3 Google Analytics type and account identifier 2 years This cookie also identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
    All Scope _gid Google Analytics type and account identifier 1 day This cookie also identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
             
             

    Marketing cookies

    Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    None at this stage N/A N/A N/A
           
           

     

    Managing cookies

    You are not required to accept any cookies . Our cookies toolbar allows you to fine tune which cookies you accespt or want to revoke consent for. The resulting experience may however be affected by your decision not to accept cookies.

    Eg. not accepting or revoking consent for the “Necessary” category cookies will result in your inability to log into the site, even if you have previously accepted the cookies and paid for service.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for “Preference” category cookies may impede on your ability to watch instructional videos on our site, even if you have previously accepted the cookies and paid for service.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for ‘Statistical” category cookies will result in us not seeing where visitors stay longer or shorter on our site. While the immediate experience will not degrade for you, it may impede us in better understanding where we need to improve our service, thereby denying you a potentially improved experience in the future.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for “Marketing” category cookies may result in you seeing irrelevant ads, if we make the decision to allow carefully selected partners to offer their services through our site.

    Removing cookies from your device

    You can delete all cookies that are already on your device by clearing the browsing history of your browser. This will remove all cookies from all websites you have visited.

    Be aware though that you may also lose some saved information (e.g. saved login details, site preferences).

    Managing site-specific cookies

    For more detailed control over site-specific cookies, check the privacy and cookie settings in your preferred browser

    Blocking cookies

    You can set most modern browsers to prevent any cookies being placed on your device, but you may then have to manually adjust some preferences every time you visit a site/page. And some services and functionalities may not work properly at all (e.g. profile logging-in).

    2021 Q3 Research Highlights

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: The Briefs
    • Parent Category Link: /the-briefs
    Our research team is a prolific bunch! Every quarter we produce lots of research to help you get the most value out of your organization. This PDF contains a selection of our most compelling research from the third quarter of 2021.

    Become a Strategic CIO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}80|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 15 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • As a CIO, you are currently operating in a stable and trusted IT environment, but you would like to advance your role to strategic business partner.
    • CIOs are often overlooked as a strategic partner by their peers, and therefore face the challenge of proving they deserve a seat at the table.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To become a strategic business partner, you must think and act as a business person that works in IT, rather than an IT person that works for the business.
    • Career advancement is not a solo effort. Building relationships with your executive business stakeholders will be critical to becoming a respected business partner.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy to accelerate your career and become a strategic business partner. For a CIO to be considered a strategic business partner, he or she must be able to:
      • Act as a business person that works in IT, rather than an IT person that works for the business. This involves meeting executive stakeholder expectations, facilitating innovation, and managing stakeholder relationships.
      • Align IT with the customer. This involves providing business stakeholders with information to support stronger decision making, keeping up with disruptive technologies, and constantly adapting to the ever-changing end-customer needs.
      • Manage talent and change. This involves performing strategic workforce planning, and being actively engaged in identifying opportunities to introduce change in your organization, suggesting ways to improve, and then acting on them.

    Become a Strategic CIO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should become a strategic CIO, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch

    Analyze strategic CIO competencies and assess business stakeholder satisfaction with IT using Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision Diagnostic and CXO-CIO Alignment Program.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 1: Launch

    2. Assess

    Evaluate strategic CIO competencies and business stakeholder relationships.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 2: Assess
    • CIO Strategic Competency Evaluation Tool
    • CIO Stakeholder Power Map Template

    3. Plan

    Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 3: Plan
    • CIO Personal Development Plan
    • CIO Stakeholder Management Strategy Template

    4. Execute

    Develop a scorecard to track personal development initiatives.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 4: Execute
    • CIO Strategic Competency Scorecard
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Become a Strategic CIO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Competencies & Stakeholder Relationships

    The Purpose

    Gather and review information from business stakeholders.

    Assess strategic CIO competencies and business stakeholder relationships.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gathered information to create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    Analyzed the information from diagnostics and determined the appropriate next steps.

    Identified and prioritized strategic CIO competency gaps.

    Evaluated the power, impact, and support of key business stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    1.2 Conduct CXO-CIO Alignment program

    1.3 Assess CIO competencies

    1.4 Assess business stakeholder relationships

    Outputs

    CIO Business Vision results

    CXO-CIO Alignment Program results

    CIO competency gaps

    Executive Stakeholder Power Map

    2 Take Control of Your Personal Development

    The Purpose

    Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    Track your personal development and establish checkpoints to revise initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified personal development and stakeholder engagement initiatives to bridge high priority competency gaps.

    Identified key performance indicators and benchmarks/targets to track competency development.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a personal development plan

    2.2 Create a stakeholder management strategy

    2.3 Establish key performance indicators and benchmarks/targets

    Outputs

    Personal Development Plan

    Stakeholder Management Strategy

    Strategic CIO Competency Scorecard

    2021 CIO Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}83|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • It is a new year, but the challenges of 2020 remain: COVID-19 infection rates continue to climb, governments continue to enforce lockdown measures, we continue to find ourselves in the worst economic crisis since the Great Depression, and civil unrest grows in many democratic societies.
    • At the start of 2020, no business leader predicted the disruption that was to come. This left IT in a reactive but critical role as the health crisis hit. It was core to delivering the organization’s products and services, as it drove the radical shift to work-from-home.
    • For the year ahead, IT will continue to serve a critical function in uncertain times. However, unlike last year, CIOs can better prepare for 2021. That said, in the face of the uncertainty and volatility of the year ahead, what they need to prepare for is still largely undefined.
    • But despite the lack of confidence on knowing specifically what is to come, most business leaders will admit they need to get ready for it. This year’s priority report will help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “Resilience” is the theme for this year’s CIO Priorities Report. In this context, resilience is about building up the capacity and the capabilities to effectively respond to emergent and unforeseen needs.
    • Early in 2021 is a good time to develop resilience in several different areas. As we explore in this year’s Report, CIOs can best facilitate enterprise resilience through strategic financial planning, proactive risk management, effective organizational change management and capacity planning, as well as through remaining tuned into emergent technologies to capitalize on innovations to help weather the uncertainty of the year ahead.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.
    • Each of our priorities is backed up by a “call to action” that will help CIOs start to immediately implement the right drivers of resilience for their organization.
    • By building up resilience across our five key areas, CIOs will not only be able to better prepare for the year to come, but also strengthen business relations and staff morale in difficult times.

    2021 CIO Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Read the 2021 CIO Priorities Report

    Use Info-Tech’s 2021 CIO Priorities Report to prepare for the uncertainty of the year ahead. Across our five priorities we provide five avenues through which CIOs can demonstrate resilient planning, enabling the organization as a whole to better confront what’s coming in 2021.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create an appropriate budget reserve

    Identifying and planning sources of financial contingency will help ensure CIOs can meet unforeseen and emergent operational and business needs throughout the year.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 1 – Create an Appropriate Budget Reserve

    2. Refocus IT risk planning

    The start of 2021 is a time to refocus and redouble IT risk management and business continuity planning to bring it up to the standards of our “new normal.” Indeed, if last year taught us anything, it’s that no “black swan” should be off the table in terms of scenarios or possibilities for business disruption.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 2 – Refocus IT Risk Planning

    3. Strengthen organizational change management capabilities

    At its heart, resilience is having the capacity to deal with unexpected change. Organizational change management can help build up this capacity, providing the ability to strategically plot known changes while leaving some capacity to absorb the unknowns as they present themselves.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 3 – Strengthen Organizational Change Management Capabilities

    4. Establish capacity awareness

    Capacity awareness facilitates resilience by providing capital in the form of resource data. With this data, CIOs can make better decisions on what can be approved and when it can be scheduled for.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 4 – Establish Capacity Awareness

    5. Keep emerging technologies in view

    Having an up-to-date view of emerging technologies will enable the resilient CIO to capitalize on and deploy leading-edge innovations as the business requires.

    • 2021 CIO Priorities Report: Priority 5 – Keep Emerging Technologies in View
    [infographic]

    Security Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}244|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Ransomware activities and the cost of breaches are on the rise.
    • Cybersecurity talent is hard to find, and an increasing number of cybersecurity professionals are considering leaving their jobs.
    • Moving to the digital world increases the risk of a breach.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The pandemic has fundamentally changed the technology landscape. Security programs must understand how their threat surface is now different and adapt their controls to meet the challenge.
    • The upside to the upheaval in 2021 is new opportunities to modernize your security program.

    Impact and Result

    • Use the report to ensure your plan in 2022 addresses what’s important in cybersecurity.
    • Understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space.

    Security Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Security Priorities 2022 – A report that describes priorities and recommendations for CISOs in 2022.

    Use this report to understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space and inform your plan for 2022. This report includes sections on protecting against and responding to ransomware, acquiring and retaining talent, securing a remote workforce, securing digital transformation, and adopting zero trust.

    • Security Priorities for 2022 Report

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Security Priorities 2022

    The pandemic has changed how we work

    disruptions to the way we work caused by the pandemic are here to stay.

    The pandemic has introduced a lot of changes to our lives over the past two years, and this is also true for various aspects of how we work. In particular, a large workforce moved online overnight, which shifted the work environment rapidly.

    People changed how they communicate, how they access company information, and how they connect to the company network. These changes make cybersecurity a more important focus than ever.

    Although changes like the shift to remote work occurred in response to the pandemic, they are largely expected to remain, regardless of the progression of the pandemic itself. This report will look into important security trends and the priorities that stemmed from these trends.

    30% more professionals expect transformative permanent change compared to one year ago.

    47% of professionals expect a lot of permanent change; this remains the same as last year. (Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey; N=475)

    The cost of a security breach is rising steeply

    The shift to remote work exposes organizations to more costly cyber incidents than ever before.

    $4.24 million

    Average cost of a data breach in 2021
    The cost of a data breach rose by nearly 10% in the past year, the highest rate in over seven years.

    $1.07 million

    More costly when remote work involved in the breach

    The average cost of breaches where remote work is involved is $1.07 million higher than breaches where remote work is not involved.

    The ubiquitous remote work that we saw in 2021 and continue to see in 2022 can lead to more costly security events. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Remote work is here to stay, and the cost of a breach is higher when remote work is involved.

    The cost comes not only directly from payments but also indirectly from reputational loss. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Security teams can participate in the solution

    The numbers are clear: in 2022, when we face a threat environment like WE’VE never EXPERIENCED before, good security is worth the investment

    $1.76 million

    Saved when zero trust is deployed facing a breach

    Zero trust controls are realistic and effective controls.

    Organizations that implement zero trust dramatically reduce the cost of an adverse security event.

    35%

    More costly if it takes more than 200 days to identify and contain a breach

    With increased BYOD and remote work, detection and response is more challenging than ever before – but it is also highly effective.

    Organizations that detect and respond to incidents quickly will significantly reduce the impact. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Breaches are 34% less costly when mature zero trust is implemented.

    A fully staffed and well-prepared security team could save the cost through quick responses. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Top security priorities and constraints in 2022

    Survey results

    As part of its research process for the 2022 Security Priorities Report, Info-Tech Research Group surveyed security and IT leaders (N=97) to ask their top security priorities as well as their main obstacles to security success in 2022:

    Top Priorities
    A list of the top three priorities identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Acquiring and retaining talent, 30%', 'Protecting against and responding to ransomware, 23%', and 'Securing a remote workforce, 23%'.

    Survey respondents were asked to force-rank their security priorities.

    Among the priorities chosen most frequently as #1 were talent management, addressing ransomware threats, and securing hybrid/remote work.

    Top Obstacles
    A list of the top three obstacles identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Staffing constraints, 31%', 'Demand of ever-changing business environment, 23%', and 'Budget constraints, 15%'.

    Talent management is both the #1 priority and the top obstacle facing security leaders in 2022.

    Unsurprisingly, the ever-changing environment in a world emerging from a pandemic and budget constraints are also top obstacles.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    This report details what we see the world demanding of security leaders in the coming year.

    Setting aside the demands – what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of 'Top security topics among Info-Tech members' with accompanying bars, 'Security Strategy', 'Security Policies', 'Security Operations', 'Security Governance', and 'Security Incident Response'.

    Many organizations are still mastering the foundations of a mature cybersecurity program.

    This is a good idea!

    Most breaches are still due to gaps in foundational security, not lack of advanced controls.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of industries with accompanying bars representing their demand for security. The only industry with a significant positive percentage is 'Government'. Security projects included in annual plan relative to industry.

    One industry plainly stands out from the rest. Government organizations are proportionally much more active in security than other industries, and for good reason: they are common targets.

    Manufacturing and professional services are proportionally less interested in security. This is concerning, given the recent targeting of supply chain and personal data holders by ransomware gangs.

    5 Security Priorities for 2022 Logo for Info-Tech. Logo for ITRG.

    People

    1. Acquiring and Retaining Talent
      Create a good working environment for existing and potential employees. Invest time and effort into talent issues to avoid being understaffed.
    2. Securing a Remote Workforce
      Create a secure environment for users and help your people build safe habits while working remotely.

    Process

    1. Securing Digital Transformation
      Build in security from the start and check in frequently to create agile and secure user experiences.

    Technology

    1. Adopting Zero Trust
      Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege.
    2. Protecting Against and Responding to Ransomware
      Put in your best effort to build defenses but also prepare for a breach and know how to recover.

    Main Influencing Factors

    COVID-19 Pandemic
    The pandemic has changed the way we interact with technology. Organizations are universally adapting their business and technology processes to fit the post-pandemic paradigm.
    Rampant Cybercrime Activity
    By nearly every conceivable metric, cybercrime is way up in the past two years. Cybercriminals smell blood and pose a more salient threat than before. Higher standards of cybersecurity capability are required to respond to this higher level of threat.
    Remote Work and Workforce Reallocation
    Talented IT staff across the globe enabled an extraordinarily fast shift to remote and distance work. We must now reckon with the security and human resourcing implications of this huge shift.

    Acquire and Retain Talent

    Priority 01

    Security talent was in short supply before the pandemic, and it's even worse now.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Cybersecurity talent has been in short supply for years, but this shortage has inflected upward since the pandemic.

    The Great Resignation contributed to the existing talent gap. The pandemic has changed how people work as well as how and where they choose work. More and more senior workers are retiring early or opting for remote working opportunities.

    The cost to acquire cybersecurity talent is huge, and the challenge doesn’t end there. Retaining top talent can be equally difficult.

    Current situation

    • A 2021 survey by ESG shows that 76% of security professional agree it’s difficult to recruit talent, and 57% said their organization is affected by this talent shortage.
    • (ISC)2 reports there are 2.72 million unfilled job openings and an increasing workforce gap (2021).

    2.72 million unfilled cybersecurity openings (Source: (ISC)2, 2021)

    IT leaders must do more to attract and retain talent in 2022

    • Over 70% of IT professionals are considering quitting their jobs (TalentLMS, 2021). Meanwhile, 51% of surveyed cybersecurity professionals report extreme burnout during the last 12 months and many of them have considered quitting because of it (VMWare, 2021).
    • Working remotely makes it easier for people to look elsewhere, lowering the barrier to leaving.
    • This is a big problem for security leaders, as cybersecurity talent is in very short supply. The cost of acquiring and retaining quality cybersecurity staff in 2022 is significant, and many organizations are unwilling or unable to pay the premium.
    • Top talent will demand flexible working conditions – even though remote work comes with security risk.
    • Most smart, talented new hires in 2022 are demanding to work remotely most of the time.
    Top reasons for resignations in 2021
    Burnout 30%
    Other remote opportunities 20%
    Lack of growth opportunities 20%
    Poor culture 20%
    Acquisition concerns 10%
    (Source: Survey of West Coast US cybersecurity professionals; TechBeacon, 2021)

    Talent will be 2022’s #1 strength and #1 weakness

    Staffing obstacles in 2022:

    “Attracting and retaining talent is always challenging. We don’t pay as well and my org wants staff in the office at least half of the time. Most young, smart, talented new hires want to work remotely 100 percent of the time.“

    “Trying to grow internal resources into security roles.”

    “Remote work expectations by employees and refusal by business to accommodate.”

    “Biggest obstacle: payscales that are out of touch with cybersecurity market.”

    “Request additional staff. Obtaining funding for additional position is most significant obstacle.”

    (Info-Tech Tech Security Priorities Survey 2022)
    Top obstacles in 2022:

    As you can see, respondents to our security priorities survey have strong feelings on the challenges of staffing a cybersecurity team.

    The growth of remote work means local talent can now be hired by anybody, vastly increasing your competition as an employer.

    Hiring local will get tougher – but so will hiring abroad. People who don’t want to relocate for a new job now have plenty of alternatives. Without a compelling remote work option, you will find non-local prospects unwilling to move for a new job.

    Lastly, many organizations are still reeling at the cost of experienced cybersecurity talent. Focused internal training and development will be the answer for many organizations.

    Recommended Actions

    Provide career development opportunities

    Many security professionals are dissatisfied with their unclear career development paths. To improve retention, organizations should provide their staff with opportunities and clear paths for career and skills advancement.

    Be open-minded when hiring

    To broaden the candidate pool, organizations should be open-minded when considering who to hire.

    • Enable remote work.
    • Do not fixate on certificates and years of experience; rather, be open to developing those who have the right interest and ability.
    • Consider using freelance workers.
    Facilitate work-life balance

    Many security professionals say they experience burnout. Promoting work-life balance in your organization can help retain critical skills.

    Create inclusive environment

    Hire a diverse team and create an inclusive environment where they can thrive.

    Talent acquisition and retention plan

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Address a top priority and a top obstacle with a plan to attract and retain top organizational and cybersecurity talent.

    Initiative Description:

    • Provide secure remote work capabilities for staff.
    • Work with HR to refine a hiring plan that addresses geographical and compensation gaps with cybersecurity and general staff.
    • Survey staff engagement to identify points of friction and remediate where needed.
    • Define a career path and growth plan for staff.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduction in costs due to turnover and talent loss

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Productivity due to good morale/ engagement
    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved corporate culture
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Big organizational and cultural changes
    • Increased attack surface of remote/hybrid workforce

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure a Remote Workforce

    Priority 02

    Trends suggest remote work is here to stay. Addressing the risk of insecure endpoints can no longer be deferred.

    Executive summary

    Remote work poses unique challenges to cybersecurity teams. The personal home environment may introduce unauthorized people and unknown network vulnerabilities, and the organization loses nearly all power and influence over the daily cyber hygiene of its users.

    In addition, the software used for enabling remote work itself can be a target of cybersecurity criminals.

    Current situation

    • 70% of workers in technical services work from home.
    • Employees of larger firms and highly paid individuals are more likely to be working outside the office.
    • 80% of security and business leaders find that remote work has increased the risk of a breach.
    • (Source: StatCan, 2021)

    70% of tech workers work from home (Source: Statcan, 2021)

    Remote work demands new security solutions

    The security perimeter is finally gone

    The data is outside the datacenter.
    The users are outside the office.
    The endpoints are … anywhere and everywhere.

    Organizations that did not implement digital transformation changes following COVID-19 experience higher costs following a breach, likely because it is taking nearly two months longer, on average, to detect and contain a breach when more than 50% of staff are working remotely (IBM, 2021).

    In 2022 the cumulative risk of so many remote connections means we need to rethink how we secure the remote/hybrid workforce.

    Security
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Weak VPN protocols
    Identity
    • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    Colorful tiles representing the surrounding security solutions. Network
    • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
    • Split tunneling
    Authentication
    • Weak authentication
    • Weak password
    Access
    • Man-in-the-middle attack
    • Cross-site scripting
    • Session hijacking

    Recommended Actions

    Mature your identity management

    Compromised identity is the main vector to breaches in recent years. Stale accounts, contractor accounts, misalignment between HR and IT – the lack of foundational practices leads to headline-making breaches every week.
    Tighten up identity control to keep your organization out of the newspaper.

    Get a handle on your endpoints

    Work-from-home (WFH) often means unknown endpoints on unknown networks full of other unknown devices…and others in the home potentially using the workstation for non-work purposes. Gaining visibility into your endpoints can help to keep detection and resolution times short.

    Educate users

    Educate everyone on security best practices when working remotely:

    • Apply secure settings (not just defaults) to the home network.
    • Use strong passwords.
    • Identify suspicious email.
    Ease of use

    Many workers complain that the corporate technology solution makes it difficult to get their work done.

    Employees will take productivity over security if we force them to choose, so IT needs to listen to end users’ needs and provide a solution that is nimble and secure.

    Roadmap to securing remote/hybrid workforce

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    The corporate network now extends to the internet – ensure your security plan has you covered.

    Initiative Description:

    • Reassess enterprise security strategy to include the WFH attack surface (especially endpoint visibility).
    • Ensure authentication requirements for remote workers are sufficient (e.g. MFA, strong passwords, hardware tokens for high-risk users/connections).
    • Assess the value of zero trust networking to minimize the blast radius in the case of a breach.
    • Perform penetration testing annually.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.


    Reduced cost of security incidents/reputational damage

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved ability to attract and retain talent
    Arrow pointing up.
    Increased business adaptability
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential disruption to traditional working patterns
    • Cost of investing in WFH versus risk of BYOD

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure Digital Transformation

    Priority 03

    Digital transformation could be a competitive advantage…or the cause of your next data breach.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Digital transformation is occurring at an ever-increasing rate these days. As Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella said early in the pandemic, “We’ve seen two years’ worth of digital transformation in two months.”

    We have heard similar stories from Info-Tech members who deployed rollouts that were scheduled to take months over a weekend instead.

    Microsoft’s own shift to rapidly expand its Teams product is a prime example of how quickly the digital landscape has changed. The global adaption to a digital world has largely been a success story, but rapid change comes with risk, and there is a parallel story of rampant cyberattacks like we have never seen before.

    Insight

    There is an adage that “slow is smooth, and smooth is fast” – the implication being that fast is sloppy. In 2022 we’ll see a pattern of organizations working to catch up their cybersecurity with the transformations we all made in 2020.

    $1.78 trillion expected in digital transformation investments (Source: World Economic Forum, 2021)

    An ounce of security prevention versus a pound of cure

    The journey of digital transformation is a risky one.

    Digital transformations often rely heavily on third-party cloud service providers, which increases exposure of corporate data.

    Further, adoption of new technology creates a new threat surface that must be assessed, mitigations implemented, and visibility established to measure performance.

    However, digital transformations are often run on slim budgets and without expert guidance.

    Survey respondents report as much: rushed deployments, increased cloud migration, and shadow IT are the top vulnerabilities reported by security leaders and executives.

    In a 2020 Ponemon survey, 82% of IT security and C-level executives reported experiencing at least one data breach directly resulting from a digital transformation they had undergone.

    Scope creep is inevitable on any large project like a digital transformation. A small security shortcut early in the project can have dire consequences when it grows to affect personal data and critical systems down the road.

    Recommended Actions

    Engage the business early and often

    Despite the risks, organizations engage in digital transformations because they also have huge business value.

    Security leaders should not be seeking to slow or stop digital transformations; rather, we should be engaging with the business early to get ahead of risks and enable successful transformation.

    Establish a vendor security program

    Data is moving out of datacenters and onto third-party environments. Without security requirements built into agreements, and clear visibility into vendor security capabilities, that data is a major source of risk.

    A robust vendor security program will create assurance early in the process and help to reinforce the responsibility of securing data with other parts of the organization.

    Build/revisit your security strategy

    The threat surface has changed since before your transformation. This is the right time to revisit or rebuild your security strategy to ensure that your control set is present throughout the new environment – and also a great opportunity to show how your current security investments are helping secure your new digital lines of business!

    Educate your key players

    Only 16% of security leaders and executives report alignment between security and business processes during digital transformation.

    If security is too low a priority, then key players in your transformation efforts are likely unaware of how security risks impact their own success. It will be incumbent upon the CISO to start that conversation.

    Securing digital transformation

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Ensure your investment in digital transformation is appropriately secured.

    Initiative Description:

    • Engage security with digital transformation and relevant governance structures (steering committees) to ensure security considerations are built into digital transformation planning.
    • Incorporate security stage gates in project management procedures.
    • Establish a vendor security assessment program.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased likelihood of digital transformation success

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Ability to make informed decisions for the field rep strategy
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced long-term cost of digital transformation
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential increased up front cost (reduced long-term cost)
    • Potential slowed implementation with security stage gates in project management

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Adopt Zero Trust

    Priority 04

    Governments are recognizing the importance of zero trust strategies. So should your organization.

    Why now for zero trust?

    John Kindervag modernized the concept of zero trust back in 2010, and in the intervening years there has been enormous interest in cybersecurity circles, yet in 2022 only 30% of organizations report even beginning to roll out zero trust capabilities (Statista, 2022).

    Why such little action on a revolutionary and compelling model?

    Zero trust is not a technology; it is a principle. Zero trust adoption takes concerted planning, effort, and expense, for which the business value has been unclear throughout most of the last 10 years. However, several recent developments are changing that:

    • Securing technology has become very hard! The size, complexity, and attack surface of IT environments has grown significantly – especially since the pandemic.
    • Cyberattacks have become rampant as the cost to deploy harmful ransomware has become lower and the impact has become higher.
    • The shift away from on-premises datacenters and offices created an opening for zero trust investment, and zero trust technology is more mature than ever before.

    The time has come for zero trust adoption to begin in earnest.

    97% will maintain or increase zero trust budget (Source: Statista, 2022)

    Traditional perimeter security is not working

    Zero trust directly addresses the most prevalent attack vectors today

    A hybrid workforce using traditional VPN creates an environment where we are exposed to all the risks in the wild (unknown devices at any location on any network), but at a stripped-down security level that still provides the trust afforded to on-premises workers using known devices.

    What’s more, threats such as ransomware are known to exploit identity and remote access vulnerabilities before moving laterally within a network – vectors that are addressed directly by zero trust identity and networking. Ninety-three percent of surveyed zero trust adopters state that the benefits have matched or exceeded their expectations (iSMG, 2022).

    Top reasons for building a zero trust program in 2022

    (Source: iSMG, 2022)

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    44%

    Reduce attacker ability to move laterally

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    The business case for zero trust is clearer than ever

    Prior obstacles to Zero Trust are disappearing

    A major obstacle to zero trust adoption has been the sheer cost, along with the lack of business case for that investment. Two factors are changing that paradigm in 2022:

    The May 2021 US White House Executive Order for federal agencies to adopt zero trust architecture finally placed zero trust on the radar of many CEOs and board members, creating the business interest and willingness to consider investing in zero trust.

    In addition, the cost of adopting zero trust is quickly being surpassed by the cost of not adopting zero trust, as cyberattacks become rampant and successful zero trust deployments create a case study to support investment.

    Bar chart titled 'Cost to remediate a Ransomware attack' with bars representing the years '2021' and '2020'. 2021's cost sits around $1.8M while 2020's was only $750K The cost to remediate a ransomware attack more than doubled from 2020 to 2021. Widespread adoption of zero trust capabilities could keep that number from doubling again in 2022. (Source: Sophos, 2021)

    The cost of a data breach is on average $1.76 million less for organizations with mature zero trust deployments.

    That is, the cost of a data breach is 35% reduced compared to organizations without zero trust controls. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Recommended Actions

    Start small

    Don’t put all your eggs in one basket by deploying zero trust in a wide swath. Rather, start as small as possible to allow for growing pains without creating business friction (or sinking your project altogether).

    Build a sensible roadmap

    Zero trust principles can be applied in a myriad of ways, so where should you start? Between identities, devices, networking, and data, decide on a use case to do pilot testing and then refine your approach.

    Beware too-good-to-be-true products

    Zero trust is a powerful buzzword, and vendors know it.

    Be skeptical and do your due diligence to ensure your new security partners in zero trust are delivering what you need.

    Zero trust roadmap

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Develop a practical roadmap that shows the business value of security investment.

    Initiative Description:

    • Define desired business and security outcomes from zero trust adoption.
    • Assess zero trust readiness.
    • Build roadmaps for zero trust:
      1. Identity
      2. Networking
      3. Devices
      4. Data
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased security posture and business agility

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced impact of security events
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost of managing complex control set
    Arrow pointing up.
    More secure business transformation (i.e. cloud/digital)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Learning curve of implementation (start small and slow)
    • Transition from current control set to zero trust model

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Protect Against and Respond to Ransomware

    Priority 05

    Ransomware is still the #1 threat to the safety of your data.

    Executive summary

    Background

    • Ransomware attacks have transformed in 2021 and show no sign of slowing in 2022. There is a new major security breach every week, despite organizations spending over $150 billion in a year on cybersecurity (Nasdaq, 2021).
    • Ransomware as a service (RaaS) is commonplace, and attackers are doubling down by holding encrypted data ransom and also demanding payment under threat to disclose exfiltrated data – and they are making good on their threats.
    • The global cost of ransomware is expected to rise to $265 billion by 2031 (Cybersecurity Ventures, 2021).
    • We expect to see an increase in ransomware incidents in 2022, both in severity and volume – multiple attacks and double extortion are now the norm.
    • High staff turnover increases risk because new employees are unfamiliar with security protocols.

    150% increase ransomware attacks in 2020 (Source: ENISA)

    This is a new golden age of ransomware

    What is the same in 2022

    Unbridled ransomware attacks make it seem like attackers must be using complex new techniques, but prevalent ransomware attack vectors are actually well understood.

    Nearly all modern variants are breaching victim systems in one of three ways:

    • Email phishing
    • Software vulnerabilities
    • RDP/Remote access compromise
    What is new in 2022
    The sophistication of victim targeting

    Victims often find themselves asking, “How did the attackers know to phish the most security-oblivious person in my staff?” Bad actors have refined their social engineering and phishing to exploit high-risk individuals, meaning your chain is only as strong as the weakest link.

    Ability of malware to evade detection

    Modern ransomware is getting better at bypassing anti-malware technology, for example, through creative techniques such as those seen in the MedusaLocker variant and in Ghost Control attacks.

    Effective anti-malware is still a must-have control, but a single layer of defense is no longer enough. Any organization that hopes to avoid paying a ransom must prepare to detect, respond, and recover from an attack.

    Many leaders still don’t know what a ransomware recovery would look like

    Do you know what it would take to recover from a ransomware incident?

    …and does your executive leadership know what it would take to recover?

    The organizations that are most likely to pay a ransom are unprepared for the reality of recovering their systems.

    If you have not done a tabletop or live exercise to simulate a true recovery effort, you may be exposed to more risk than you realize.

    Are your defenses sufficiently hardened against ransomware?

    Organizations with effective security prevention are often breached by ransomware – but they are prepared to contain, detect, and eradicate the infection.

    Ask yourself whether you have identified potential points of entry for ransomware. Assume that your security controls will fail.

    How well are your security controls layered, and how difficult would it be for an attacker to move east/west within your systems?

    Recommended Actions

    Be prepared for a breach

    There is no guarantee that an organization will not fall victim to ransomware, so instead of putting all their effort into prevention, organizations should also put effort into planning to respond to a breach.

    Security awareness training/phishing detection

    Phishing continues to be the main point of entry for ransomware. Investing in phishing awareness and detection among your end users may be the most impactful countermeasure you can implement.

    Zero trust adoption

    Always verify at every step of interaction, even when access is requested by internal users. Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege access.

    Encrypt and back up your data

    Encrypt your data so that even if there is a breach, the attackers don’t have a copy of your data. Also, keep regular backups of data at a separate location so that you still have data to work with after a breach occurs.

    You never want to pay a ransom. Being prepared to deal with an incident is your best chance to avoid paying!

    Prevent and respond to ransomware

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

    Initiative Description:

    • Execute a systematic assessment of your current security and ransomware recovery capabilities.
    • Perform tabletop activities and live recoveries to test data recovery capabilities.
    • Train staff to detect suspicious communications and protect their identities.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Improved productivity and brand protection

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced downtime and disruption
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost due to incidents (ransom payments, remediation)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Friction with existing staff

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Deepfakes: Dark-horse threat for 2022

    Deepfake video

    How long has it been since you’ve gone a full workday without having a videoconference with someone?

    We have become inherently trustful that the face we see on the screen is real, but the technology required to falsify that video is widely available and runs on commercially available hardware, ushering in a genuinely post-truth online era.

    Criminals can use deepfakes to enhance social engineering, to spread misinformation, and to commit fraud and blackmail.

    Deepfake audio

    Many financial institutions have recently deployed voiceprint authentication. TD describes its VoicePrint as “voice recognition technology that allows us to use your voiceprint – as unique to you as your fingerprint – to validate your identity” over the phone.

    However, hackers have been defeating voice recognition for years already. There is ripe potential for voice fakes to fool both modern voice recognition technology and the accounts payable staff.

    Bibliography

    “2021 Ransomware Statistics, Data, & Trends.” PurpleSec, 2021. Web.

    Bayern, Macy. “Why 60% of IT security pros want to quit their jobs right now.” TechRepublic, 10 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Bresnahan, Ethan. “How Digital Transformation Impacts IT And Cyber Risk Programs.” CyberSaint Security, 25 Feb. 2021. Web.

    Clancy, Molly. “The True Cost of Ransomware.” Backblaze, 9 Sept. 2021.Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, 2021. Web.

    Cybersecurity Ventures. “Global Ransomware Damage Costs To Exceed $265 Billion By 2031.” Newswires, 4 June 2021. Web.

    “Digital Transformation & Cyber Risk: What You Need to Know to Stay Safe.” Ponemon Institute, June 2020. Web.

    “Global Incident Response Threat Report: Manipulating Reality.” VMware, 2021.

    Granger, Diana. “Karmen Ransomware Variant Introduced by Russian Hacker.” Recorded Future, 18 April 2017. Web.

    “Is adopting a zero trust model a priority for your organization?” Statista, 2022. Web.

    “(ISC)2 Cybersecurity Workforce Study, 2021: A Resilient Cybersecurity Profession Charts the Path Forward.” (ISC)2, 2021. Web.

    Kobialka, Dan. “What Are the Top Zero Trust Strategies for 2022?” MSSP Alert, 10 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Kost, Edward. “What is Ransomware as a Service (RaaS)? The Dangerous Threat to World Security.” UpGuard, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Lella, Ifigeneia, et al., editors. “ENISA Threat Landscape 2021.” ENISA, Oct. 2021. Web.

    Mello, John P., Jr. “700K more cybersecurity workers, but still a talent shortage.” TechBeacon, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Naraine, Ryan. “Is the ‘Great Resignation’ Impacting Cybersecurity?” SecurityWeek, 11 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Oltsik, Jon. “ESG Research Report: The Life and Times of Cybersecurity Professionals 2021 Volume V.” Enterprise Security Group, 28 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware as a service: Negotiators are now in high demand.” ZDNet, 8 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware in 2022: We’re all screwed.” ZDNet, 22 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Retaining Tech Employees in the Era of The Great Resignation.” TalentLMS, 19 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Rubin, Andrew. “Ransomware Is the Greatest Business Threat in 2022.” Nasdaq, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Samartsev, Dmitry, and Daniel Dobrygowski. “5 ways Digital Transformation Officers can make cybersecurity a top priority.“ World Economic Forum, 15 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Seymour, John, and Azeem Aqil. “Your Voice is My Passport.” Presented at black hat USA 2018.

    Solomon, Howard. “Ransomware attacks will be more targeted in 2022: Trend Micro.” IT World Canada, 6 Jan. 2022. Web.

    “The State of Ransomware 2021.” Sophos, April 2021. Web.

    Tarun, Renee. “How The Great Resignation Could Benefit Cybersecurity.” Forbes Technology Council, Forbes, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “TD VoicePrint.” TD Bank, n.d. Web.

    “Working from home during the COVID-19 pandemic, April 202 to June 2021.” Statistics Canada, 4 Aug. 2021. Web.

    “Zero Trust Strategies for 2022.” iSMG, Palo Alto Networks, and Optiv, 28 Jan. 2022. Web.

    2020 CIO Priorities Report

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}97|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • The velocity and magnitude of technology changes today has increased dramatically compared to anything that has come before.
    • The velocity and magnitude of advancements in technology has always seemed unprecedented in every wave of technology change we have experienced over the past 40 years. With each new wave of innovation, “unprecedented” is redefined to a new level, and so it remains true that today’s CIO is faced with unprecedented levels of change as a direct result of emerging technologies.
    • What is different today is that we are at the point where the emerging technology itself is now capable of accelerating the pace of change even more through artificial intelligence capabilities.
    • If we are to realize the business value through the adoption of emerging technologies, CIOs must address significant challenges. We believe addressing these challenges lies in the CIO priorities for 2020.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • First there was IT/business alignment, then there was IT/business integration – both states characterized as IT “getting on the same page” as the business. In the context of emerging technologies, the CIO should no longer be focused on getting on the same page as the CEO.
    • Today it is about the CEO and the CIO collaborating to write a new book about convergence of all things: technology (infrastructure and applications), people (including vendors), process, and data.
    • Digital transformation and adoption of emerging technologies is not a goal, it is a journey – a means to the end, not the end unto itself.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech's 2020 CIO Priorities Report to ascertain, based on our research, what areas of focus for 2020 are critical for success in adopting emerging technologies.
    • Adopting these technologies requires careful planning and consideration for what is critical to your business customers.
    • This report provides focus on the business benefits of the technology and not just the capabilities themselves. It puts the CIO in a position to better understand the true value proposition of any of today’s technology advancements.

    2020 CIO Priorities Report Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the top five priorities for CIOs in 2020 and why these are so critical to success.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Refine and adapt processes

    Learn about how processes can make or break your adoption of emerging technologies.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 1: Refine and Adapt Processes

    2. Re-invent IT as collaboration engine

    Learn about how IT can transform its role within the organization to optimize business value.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 2: Re-Invent IT as Collaboration Engine

    3. Acquire and retain talent for roles in emerging technologies

    Learn about how IT can attract and keep employees with the skills and knowledge needed to adopt these technologies for the business.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 3: Acquire and Retain Talent for Roles in Emerging Technologies

    4. Define and manage cybersecurity and cyber resilience requirements related to emerging technologies

    Understand how the adoption of emerging technologies has created new levels of risk and how cybersecurity and resilience can keep pace.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 4: Define and Manage Cybersecurity and Cyber Resilience Requirements Related to Emerging Technologies

    5. Leverage emerging technology to create Wow! customer experiences

    Learn how IT can leverage emerging technology for its own customers and those of its business partners.

    • 2020 CIO Priorities Report – Priority 5: Leverage Emerging Technology to Create Wow! Customer Experiences
    [infographic]

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}362|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Integration
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-integration
    • IT is typically backlogged with tasks while the business waits to implement key solutions to remain competitive. In this competitive space, Cloud solutions offer attractive benefits to business stakeholders especially around agility and cost.
    • Moving to the Cloud involves more than outsourcing a component of the technology stack. Roles, processes, and authentication technologies need to be redefined to fit a distributed stack where parts of the IT solution space reside on-premise while the rest are in the Cloud.
    • Cloud integration means accepting loss of control in product development. A Cloud vendor will address the needs of most constituents and any high degree of customization which counteracts their business model. This makes integration a complex initiative involving two separate parties trying to align.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Cloud integration is a fundamental commitment to change within the organization as it deeply impacts roles, processes, and technologies.
    • Be prepared to lose some degree of control of SLA management. IT will have to manage multiple Cloud SLAs and deliver a lowest common approach to the business. This may mean lowering the SLA standards previously set with on-premise solutions.
    • Cloud integration isn’t just about the technology. It is a dedication to establish solid relationships with the Cloud vendor. Understanding where the cloud solution is moving and what issues are being addressed are critical to creating an organizational road map for the future.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a Cloud integration strategy by proactively understanding the impact of Cloud integration efforts to the organization.
    • Realize that Cloud integration will be an ongoing process of collaboration with the business, and that the initial implementation does not constitute an end.
    • Implement an integrated support structure that includes on-premise and cloud stacks.

    Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the impacts of Cloud computing on Data, Application, Access, and Service Level Agreement integration

    Assess your current level of Cloud adoption and integration, focusing on solutions that are emerging in the market and the applicability to your IT environment.

    • Storyboard: Gain Control of Cloud Integration Strategies Before they Float Away
    • Cloud Integration Checklist
    • None
    [infographic]

    Innovation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}21|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}21|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Digital Ethics = Data Equity
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • sidebar graphic: Visit Link
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Innovation is the at heart of every organization, especially in these fast moving times. It does not matter if you are in a supporting or "traditional" sector.  The company performing the service in a faster, better and more efficient way, wins.

    innovation

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}417|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $52,224 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 38 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Disaster recovery plan (DRP) documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Between day-to-day IT projects and the difficulty of maintaining 300+ page manuals, DRP documentation is not updated and quickly becomes unreliable.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disaster or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    • Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    • Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Impact and Result

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans. Don’t mix the two in an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt a visual-based DRP, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Streamline DRP documentation

    Start by documenting your recovery workflow. Create supporting documentation in the form of checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists. Finally, summarize your DR capabilities in a DRP Summary Document for stakeholders and auditors.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    2. Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy

    Select criteria for assessing DRP tools, and evaluate whether a business continuity management tool, document management solution, wiki site, or manually distributing documentation is best for your DR team.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy
    • DRP Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool
    • BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    3. Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Learn how to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes, and learn what to look for during testing and during annual reviews of your DRP.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices
    • Sample Project Intake Form Addendum for Disaster Recovery
    • Sample Change Management Checklist for Disaster Recovery
    • DRP Review Checklist
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (Visio)
    • DRP-BCP Review Workflow (PDF)

    4. Appendix: XMPL Case Study

    Model your DRP after the XMPL case study disaster recovery plan documentation.

    • Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Appendix: XMPL Case Study
    • XMPL DRP Summary Document
    • XMPL Notification, Assessment, and Declaration Plan
    • XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (Visio)
    • XMPL Recovery Workflows (PDF)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (Visio)
    • XMPL Data Center and Network Diagrams (PDF)
    • XMPL DRP Business Impact Analysis Tool
    • XMPL DRP Workbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Streamline DRP Documentation

    The Purpose

    Teach your team how to create visual-based documentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how to create visual-based DR documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct a table-top planning exercise.

    1.2 Document your high-level incident response plan.

    1.3 Identify documentation to include in your playbook.

    1.4 Create an initial collection of supplementary documentation.

    1.5 Discuss what further documentation is necessary for recovering from a disaster.

    1.6 Summarize your DR capabilities for stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Documented high-level incident response plan

    List of documentation action items

    Collection of 1-3 draft checklists, flowcharts, topology diagrams, and contact lists

    Action items for ensuring that the DRP is executable for both primary and backup DR personnel

    DRP Summary Document

    2 Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    The Purpose

    Learn the considerations for publishing your DRP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the best strategy for publishing your DRP.

    Activities

    2.1 Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.

    2.2 Evaluate categories for DRP tools.

    Outputs

    Strategy for publishing DRP

    3 Learn How to Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Address the common pain point of unmaintained DRPs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create an approach for maintaining your DRP.

    Activities

    3.1 Alter your project intake considerations.

    3.2 Integrate DR considerations into change management.

    3.3 Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management.

    3.4 Learn best practices for maintaining your DRP.

    Outputs

    Project Intake Form Addendum Template

    Change Management DRP Checklist Template

    Further reading

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    Put your DRP on a diet – keep it fit, trim, and ready for action.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    The traditional disaster recovery plan (DRP) “red binder” is dead. It takes too long to create, it’s too hard to maintain, and it’s not usable in a crisis.

    “This blueprint outlines the following key tactics to streamline your documentation effort and produce a better result:

    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.
    • Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams over traditional manuals. This drives documentation that is more concise, easier to maintain, and effective in a crisis.
    • Create your DRP in layers to get tangible results faster, starting with a recovery workflow that outlines your DR strategy, and then build out the specific documentation needed to support recovery.”
    (Frank Trovato, Research Director, Infrastructure, Info-Tech Research Group)

    This project is about DRP documentation after you have clarified your DR strategy; create these necessary inputs first

    These artifacts are the cornerstone for any disaster recovery plan.

    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DR Roles and Responsibilities
    • Recovery Workflow

    Missing a component? Start here. ➔ Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    This blueprint walks you through building these inputs.
    Our approach saves clients on average US$16,825.22. (Clients self-reported an average saving of US$16,869.21 while completing the Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan blueprint through advisory calls, guided implementations, or workshops (Info-Tech Research Group, 2017, N=129).)

    How this blueprint will help you document your DRP

    This Research is Designed For:

    • IT managers in charge of disaster recovery planning (DRP) and execution.
    • Organizations seeking to optimize their DRP using best-practice methodology.
    • Business continuity professionals that are involved with disaster recovery.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Divide the process of creating DR documentation into manageable chunks, providing a defined scope for you to work in.
    • Identify an appropriate DRP document management and distribution strategy.
    • Ensure that DR documentation is up to date and accessible.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • IT managers preparing for a DR audit.
    • IT managers looking to incorporate components of DR into an IT operations document.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Follow a structured approach in building DR documentation using best practices.
    • Integrate DR into day-to-day IT operations.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • DR documentation is often driven by audit or compliance requirements, rather than aimed at the team that would need to execute recovery.
    • Traditional DRPs are text-heavy, 300+ page manuals that are simply not usable in a crisis.
    • Compounding the problem, DR documentation is rarely updated, so it’s just shelf-ware.

    Complication

    • DRP is often given lower priority as day-to-day IT projects displace DR documentation efforts.
    • Inefficient publishing strategies result in your DRP not being accessible during disasters or key staff not knowing where to find the latest version.
    • Organizations that create traditional DRPs end up with massive manuals that are difficult to maintain, so they quickly become unreliable.

    Resolution

    • Create visual and concise DR documentation that strips out unnecessary content and is written for an IT audience – the team that would actually be executing the recovery. Your business leaders can take the same approach to create separate business response plans – don’t mix the two into an all-in-one plan that is not effective for either audience.
    • Determine a documentation distribution strategy that supports ease of maintenance and accessibility during a disaster.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. DR documentation fails when organizations try to boil the ocean with an all-in-one plan aimed at auditors, business leaders, and IT. It’s too long, too hard to maintain, and ends up being little more than shelf-ware.
    2. Using flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams aimed at an IT audience is more concise and effective in a disaster, quicker to create, and easier to maintain.
    3. Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable. Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    An effective DRP that mitigates a wide range of potential outages is critical to minimizing the impact of downtime

    The criticality of having an effective DRP is underestimated.

    Cost of Downtime for the Fortune 1000
    • Cost of unplanned apps downtime per year: $1.25B to $2.5B
    • Cost of critical apps failure per hour: $500,000 to $1M
    • Cost of infrastructure failure per hour: $100,000
    • 35% reported to have recovered within 12 hours.
    • 17% of infrastructure failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    • 13% of application failures took more than 24 hours to recover.
    Size of Impact Increasing Across Industries
    • The cost of downtime is rising across the board and not just for organizations that traditionally depend on IT (e.g. e-commerce).
    • Downtime cost increase since 2010:
      • Hospitality: 129% increase
      • Transportation: 108% increase
      • Media organizations: 104% increase
    Potential Lost Revenue
    A line graph of Potential Lost Revenue with vertical axis 'LOSS ($)' and horizontal axis 'TIME'. The line starts with low losses near the origin where 'Incident Occurs', gradually accelerates to higher losses as time passes, then decelerates before 'All Revenue Lost'. Note: 'Delay in recovery causes exponential revenue loss'.
    (Adapted from: Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan (2007 Edition).)

    The impact of downtime increases significantly over time, not just in terms of lost revenue (as illustrated here) but also goodwill/reputation and health/safety. An effective DR solution and overall resiliency that mitigate a wide range of potential outages are critical to minimizing the impact of downtime.

    Without an effective DRP, your organization is gambling on being able to define and implement a recovery strategy during a time of crisis. At the very least, this means extended downtime – potentially weeks – and substantial impact.

    Only 38% of those with a full or mostly complete DRP believe their DRPs would be effective in a real crisis

    Organizations continue to struggle with creating DRPs, let alone making them actionable.

    Why are so many living with either an incomplete or ineffective DRP? For the same reasons that IT documentation in general continues to be a pain point:

    • It is an outdated model of what documentation should be – the traditional manual with detailed (lengthy) descriptions and procedures.
    • Despite the importance of DR, low priority is placed on creating a DRP and the day-to-day SOPs required to support a recovery.
    • There is a lack of effective processes for ensuring documentation stays up to date.
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the completeness of their DRP. 'Only 20% of survey respondents indicated they have a complete DRP'. 13% said 'No DRP'. 33% said 'Partial DRP'. 34% said 'Mostly Completed'. 20% said 'Full DRP'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=165)
    A bar graph documenting percentages of survey responses about the level of confidence in their DRP. 'Only 38% of those who have a mostly completed or full DRP actually feel it would be effective in a crisis'. 4% said 'Low'. 58% said 'Unsure'. 38% said 'Confident'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=69 (includes only those who indicated DRP is mostly completed or completed))

    Improve usability and effectiveness with visual-based and more-concise documentation

    Choose flowcharts over process guides, checklists over lengthy procedures, and diagrams over descriptions.

    If you need a three-inch binder to hold your DRP, imagine having to flip through it to determine next steps during a crisis.

    DR documentation needs to be concise, scannable, and quickly understood to be effective. Visual-based documentation meets these requirements, so it’s no surprise that it also leads to higher DR success.

    DR success scores are based on:

    • Meeting recovery time objectives (RTOs).
    • Meeting recovery point objectives (RPOs).
    • IT staff’s confidence in their ability to meet RTOs/RPOs.
    A line graph of DR documentation types and their effectiveness. The vertical axis is 'DR Success', from Low to High. The horizontal axis is Documentation Type, from 'Traditional Manual' to 'Primarily flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams'. The line trends up to higher success with visual-based and more-concise documentation.(Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=95)

    “Without question, 300-page DRPs are not effective. I mean, auditors love them because of the detail, but give me a 10-page DRP with contact lists, process flows, diagrams, and recovery checklists that are easy to follow.” (Bernard Jones, MBCI, CBCP, CORP, Manager Disaster Recovery/BCP, ActiveHealth Management)

    Maintainability is another argument for visual-based, concise documentation

    There are two end goals for your DR documentation: effectiveness and maintainability. Without either, you will not have success during a disaster.

    Organizations using a visual-based approach were 30% more likely to find that DR documentation is easy to maintain. “Easy to maintain” leads to a 46% higher rate of DR success.
    Two bar graphs documenting survey responses regarding maintenance ease of DR documentation types. The first graph compares Traditional Manual vs Visual-based. For 'Traditional Manual' 72% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 28% responded they were Easy to maintain; for 'Visual-based' 42% responded they were Difficult to maintain while 58% responded they were Easy to maintain. Visual-based DR documentation received 30% more votes for Easy to Maintain. The second graph compares success rates of 'Difficult to Maintain' vs 'Easy to Maintain' DR documentation with Difficult being 31% and Easy being 77%, a 46% difference. 'Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=96'.

    Not only are visual-based disaster recovery plans more effective, but they are also easier to maintain.

    Overcome documentation inertia with a tiered model that allows you to eat the elephant one bite at a time

    Start with a recovery workflow to at least ensure a coordinated response. Then use that workflow to determine required supporting documentation.

    Recovery Workflow: Starting the project with overly detailed documentation can slow down the entire process. Overcome planning inertia by starting with high-level incident response plans in a flowchart format. For examples and additional information, see XMPL Medical’s Recovery Workflows.

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook): For each step in the high-level flowchart, create recovery procedures where necessary using additional flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams as appropriate. Leverage Info-Tech’s Systems Recovery Playbook example as a starting point.

    Additional Reference Documentation: Reference existing IT documentation, such as network diagrams and configuration documents, as well as more detailed step-by-step procedures where necessary (e.g. vendor documentation), particularly where needed to support alternate recovery staff who may not be as well versed as the primary system owners.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations that use flowcharts, checklist, and diagrams over traditional, dense DRP manuals are far more likely to meet their RTOs/RPOs because their documentation is more usable and easier to maintain.

    Use a DRP summary document to satisfy executives, auditors, and clients

    Stakeholders don’t have time to sift through a pile of paper. Summarize your overall continuity capabilities in one, easy-to-read place.

    DRP Summary Document

    • Summarize BIA results
    • Summarize DR strategy (including DR sites)
    • Summarize backup strategy
    • Summarize testing and maintenance plans

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to make DRP documentation efficient and effective

    Phases

    Phase 1: Streamline DRP documentation Phase 2: Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy Phase 3: Keep your DRP relevant through maintenance best practices

    Phases

    1.1

    Start with a recovery workflow

    2.1

    Decide on a publishing strategy

    3.1

    Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    1.2

    Create supporting DRP documentation

    3.2

    Conduct an annual focused review

    1.3

    Write the DRP Summary

    Tools and Templates

    End-to-End Sample DRP DRP Publishing Evaluation Tool Project In-take/Request Form

    Change Management Checklist

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use Info-Tech’s DRP Maturity Scorecard to evaluate your progress

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan – Project Overview

    1. Streamline DRP Documentation 2. Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy 3. Keep Your DRP Relevant
    Supporting Tool icon
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Start with a recovery workflow

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation

    1.3 Write the DRP summary

    2.1 Create Committee Profiles

    3.1 Build Governance Structure Map

    3.2 Create Committee Profiles

    Guided Implementations
    • Review Info-Tech’s approach to DRP documentation.
    • Create a high-level recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write the DRP summary.
    • Identify criteria for selecting a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Select a DRP publishing strategy.
    • Optional: Select requirements for a BCM tool and issue an RFP.
    • Optional: Review responses to RFP.
    • Learn best practices for integrating DRP maintenance into day-to-day IT processes.
    • Learn best practices for DRP-focused reviews.
    Associated Activity icon
    Onsite Workshop
    Module 1:
    Streamline DRP documentation
    Module 2:
    Select the optimal DRP publishing strategy
    Module 3:
    Learn best practices for keeping your DRP relevant
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • A complete end-to-end DRP
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Selection of a publishing and management tool for your DRP documentation
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Strategy for maintaining your DRP documentation

    Workshop Overview Associated Activity icon

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Info-Tech Analysts Finalize Deliverables
    Activities
    Assess DRP Maturity and Review Current Capabilities

    0.1 Assess current DRP maturity through Info-Tech’s Maturity Scorecard.

    0.2 Identify the IT systems that support mission-critical business activities, and select 2 or 3 key applications to be the focus of the workshop.

    0.3 Identify current recovery strategies for selected applications.

    0.4 Identify current DR challenges for selected applications.

    Document Your Recovery Workflow

    1.1 Create a recovery workflow: review tabletop planning, walk through DR scenarios, identify DR gaps, and determine how to fill them.

    Create Supporting Documentation

    1.2 Create supporting DRP documentation.

    1.3 Write the DRP summary.

    Establish a DRP Publishing, Management, and Maintenance Strategy

    2.1 Decide on a publishing strategy.

    3.1 Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT.

    3.2 Considerations for reviewing your DRP regularly.

    Deliverables
    1. Baseline DRP metric (based on DRP Maturity Scorecard)
    1. High-level DRP workflow
    2. DRP gaps and risks identified
    1. Recovery workflow and/or checklist for sample of IT systems
    2. Customized DRP Summary Template
    1. Strategy for selecting a DRP publishing tool
    2. DRP management and maintenance strategy
    3. Workshop summary presentation deck

    Workshop Goal: Learn how to document and maintain your DRP.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.


    Phase 1: Streamline DRP Documentation

    Step 1.1: Start with a recovery workflow

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.2
    Start with a Recovery Workflow Create Supporting Documentation Write the DRP Summary Select DRP Publishing Strategy Integrate into Core IT Processes Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review a model DRP.
    • Review your recovery workflow.
    • Identify documentation required to support the recovery workflow.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Alternate DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding the visual-based, concise approach to DR documentation.
    • Creating a recovery workflow that provides a roadmap for coordinating incident response and identifying required supporting documentation.

    Info-Tech Insights

    A DRP is a collection of procedures and supporting documents that allow an organization to recover its IT services to minimize system downtime for the business.

    1.1 — Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response and identify required supporting documentation

    The recovery workflow clarifies your DR strategy and ensures the DR team is on the same page.

    Recovery Workflow

    The recovery workflow maps out the incident response plan from event detection, assessment, and declaration to systems recovery and validation.

    This documentation includes:

    • Clarifying initial incident response steps.
    • Clarifying the order of systems recovery and which recovery actions can occur concurrently.
    • Estimating actual recovery timeline through each stage of recovery.
    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)
    Additional Reference Documentation

    “We use flowcharts for our declaration procedures. Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Review business impact analysis (BIA) results to plan your recovery workflow

    The BIA defines system criticality from the business’s perspective. Use it to guide system recovery order.

    Specifically, review the following from your BIA:

    • The list of tier 1, 2, and 3 applications. This will dictate the recovery order in your recovery workflow.
    • Application dependencies. This will outline what needs to be included as part of an application recovery workflow.
    • The recovery time objective (RTO) and recovery point objective (RPO) for each application. This will also guide the recovery, and enable you to identify gaps where the recovery workflow does not meet RTOs and RPOs.

    CASE STUDY: The XMPL DRP documentation is based on this Business Impact Analysis Tool.

    Haven’t conducted a BIA? Use Info-Tech’s streamlined approach.

    Info-Tech’s publication Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan takes a very practical approach to BIA work. Our process gives IT leaders a mechanism to quickly get agreement on system recovery order and DR investment priorities.

    Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to determine your recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 Tabletop Planning Exercise

    1. Define a scenario to drive the tabletop planning exercise:
      • Use a scenario that forces a full failover to your DR environment, so you can capture an end-to-end recovery workflow.
      • Avoid scenarios that impact health and safety such as tornados or a fire. You want to focus on IT recovery.
      • Example scenarios: Burst water pipe that causes data-center-wide damage or a gas leak that forces evacuation and power to be shut down for at least two days.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use scenarios to provide context for DR planning, and to test your plans, but don’t create a separate plan for every possibility.

    The high-level recovery plan will be the same whether the incident is a fire, flood, or tornado. While there might be some variances and outliers, these scenarios can be addressed by adding decision points and/or separate, supplementary instructions.

    Walk through the scenario and capture the recovery workflow

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 Tabletop Planning Exercise
    1. Capture the following information for tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 systems:
      1. On white cue cards, record the steps and track start and end times for each step (where 00:00 is when the incident occurred).
      2. On yellow cue cards, document gaps in people, process, and technology requirements to complete the step.
      3. On red cue cards, indicate risks (e.g. no backup person for a key staff member).

    Note:

    • Ensure the language is sufficiently genericized (e.g. refer to events, not specifically a burst water pipe).
    • Review isolated failures (e.g. hardware, software). Typically, the recovery procedure documented for individual systems covers the essence of the recovery workflow whether it’s just the one system that failed or it’s part of a site-wide recovery.

    Note: You may have already completed this exercise as part of Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Document your current-state recovery workflow based on the results of the tabletop planning

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1.2 Incident Response Plan Flowcharts, Tabs 2 and 3

    After you finish the tabletop planning exercise, the steps on the set of cue cards define your recovery workflow. Capture this in a flowchart format.

    Use the sample DRP to guide your own flowchart. Some notes on the example are:

    • XMPL’s Incident Management to DR flowchart shows the connection between its standard Service Desk processes and DR processes.
    • XMPL’s high-level workflows outline its recovery of tier 1, 2, and 3 systems.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation. In this example, XMPL Medical includes links to its Systems Recovery Playbook.
    Preview of an Info-Tech Template depicting a sample flowchart.

    This sample flowchart is included in XMPL Recovery Workflows.

    Step 1.2: Create Supporting DRP Documentation

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Create checklists for your playbook.
    • Document more complex procedures with flowcharts.
    • Gather and/or write network topology diagrams.
    • Compile a contact list.
    • Ensure there is enough material for backup personnel.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • Actionable supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan.
    • Contact list for IT personnel, business personnel, and vendor support.

    1.2 — Create supporting documentation for your disaster recovery plan

    Now that you have a high-level incident response plan, collect the information you need for executing that plan.

    Recovery Workflow

    Write your recovery procedures playbook to be effective and usable. Your playbook documentation should include:

    • Supplementary flowcharts
    • Checklists
    • Topology diagrams
    • Contact lists
    • DRP summary

    Reference vendors’ technical information in your flowcharts and checklists where appropriate.

    Recovery Procedures (Playbook)

    Additional Reference Documentation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Write for your audience. The playbook is for IT; include only the information they need to execute the plan. DRP summaries are for executives and auditors; do not include information intended for IT. Similarly, your disaster recovery plan is not for business units; keep BCP content out of your DRP.

    Use checklists to streamline step-by-step procedures

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 XMPL Medical’s System Recovery Checklists

    Checklists are ideal when staff just need a reminder of what to do, not how to do it.

    XMPL Medical used its high-level flowcharts as a roadmap for creating its Systems Recovery Playbook.

    • Since its Playbook is intended for experienced IT staff, the writing style in the checklists is concise. XMPL includes links to reference material to support recovery, especially for alternate staff who might need additional instruction.
    • XMPL includes key parameters (e.g. IP addresses) rather than assume those details would be memorized, especially in a stressful DR scenario.
    • Similarly, include links to other useful resources such as VM templates.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    Included in the XMPL Systems Recovery Playbook are checklists for recovering XMPL’s virtual desktop infrastructure, mission-critical applications, and core infrastructure components.

    Use flowcharts to document processes with concurrent tasks not easily captured in a checklist

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.2 XMPL Medical’s Phone Services Recovery Flowchart

    Recovery procedures can consist of flowcharts, checklists, or both, as well as diagrams. The main goal is to be clear and concise.

    • XMPL Medical created a flowchart to capture its phone services recovery procedure to capture concurrent tasks.
    • Additional instructions, where required, could still be captured in a Playbook checklist or other supporting documentation.
    • The flowchart could have also included key settings or other details as appropriate, particularly if the DR team chose to maintain this recovery procedure just in a flowchart format.
    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Recovery Workflows'.

    Included in the XMPL DR documentation is an example flowchart for recovering phone systems. This flowchart is in Recovery Workflows.

    Reference this blueprint for more SOP flowchart examples: Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Use topology diagrams to capture network layout, integrations, and system information

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.4 XMPL Medical’s Data Center and Network Diagrams

    Topology diagrams, key checklists, and configuration settings are often enough for experienced networking staff to carry out their DR tasks.

    • XMPL Medical includes these diagrams with its DRP. Instead of recreating these diagrams, the XMPL Medical DR Manager asked their network team for these diagrams:
      • Primary data center diagram
      • DR site diagram
      • High-level network diagrams
    • Often, organizations already have network topology diagrams for reference purposes.

    “Our network engineers came to me and said our standard SOP template didn't work for them. They're now using a lot of diagrams and flowcharts, and that has worked out better for them.” (Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Preview of the Info-Tech Template 'Systems Recovery Playbook'.

    You can download a PDF and a VSD version of these Data Center and Network Diagrams from Info-Tech’s website.

    Create a list of organizational, IT, and vendor contacts that may be required to assist with recovery

    If there is something strange happening to your IT infrastructure, who you gonna call?

    Many DR managers have their team on speed dial. However, having the contact info of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors can be very helpful during a disaster. XMPL Medical lists the following information in its DRP Workbook:

    • The DR Teams, SMEs critical to disaster recovery, their backups, and key contacts (e.g. BC Management team leads, vendor contacts) that would be involved in:
      • Declaring a disaster.
      • Coordinating a response at an organizational level.
      • Executing recovery.
    • The people that have authority to declare a disaster.
    • Each person’s spending authority.
    • The rules for delegating authority.
    • Primary and alternate staff for each role.
    Example list of alternate staff, BCP leads, and vendors.

    Confirm with your DR team that you have all of the documentation that you need to recover during a disaster

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.7 Group Discussion

    DISCUSS: Is there enough information in your DRP for both primary and backup DR personnel?

    • Is it clear who is responsible for each DR task, including notification steps?
    • Have alternate staff for each role been identified?
    • Does the recovery workflow capture all of the high-level steps?
    • Is there enough documentation for alternate staff (e.g. network specs)?

    Step 1.3: Write the DRP Summary

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Write a DRP summary document.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • High-level outline of your DRP capabilities for stakeholders such as executives, auditors, and clients.

    Summarize your DR capabilities using a DRP summary document

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3.1 DRP Summary Document

    The sample included on Info-Tech’s website is customized for the XMPL Medical Case Study – use the download as a starting point for your own summary document.

    DRP Summary Document

    XMPL’s DRP Summary is organized into the following categories:

    • DR requirements: This includes a summary of scope, business impact analysis (BIA), risk assessment, and high-level RTOs and achievable RTOs.
    • DR strategy: This includes a summary of XMPL’s recovery procedures, DR site, and backup strategy.
    • Testing and maintenance: This includes a summary of XMPL’s DRP testing and maintenance strategy.

    Be transparent about existing business risks in your DRP summary

    The DRP summary document is business facing. Include information of which business leaders (and other stakeholders) need to be aware.

    • Discrepancies between desired and achievable RTOs? Organizational leadership needs to know this information. Only then can they assign the resources and budget that IT needs to achieve the desired DR capabilities.
    • What is the DRP’s scope? XMPL Medical lists the IT components that will be recovered during a disaster, and components which will not. For instance, XMPL’s DRP does not recover medical equipment, and XMPL has separate plans for business continuity and emergency response coordination.
    Application tier Desired RTO (hh:mm) Desired RPO (hh:mm) Achievable RTO (hh:mm) Achievable RPO (hh:mm)
    Tier 1 4:00 1:00 *90:00 1:00
    Tier 2 8:00 1:00 *40:00 1:00
    Tier 3 48:00 24:00 *96:00 24:00

    The above table to is a snippet from the XMPL DR Summary Document (section 2.1.3.2).

    In the example, the DR team is unable to recover tier 1, 2, and 3 systems within the desired RTO. As such, they clearly communicate this information in the DRP summary, and include action items to address these gaps.

    Phase 2: Select the Optimal DRP Publishing Strategy

    Step 2.1: Select a DRP Publishing Strategy

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Select criteria for assessing DRP tools.
    • Evaluate categories for DRP tools.
    • Optional: Write an RFP for a BCM tool.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Identified strategies for publishing your DRP (i.e. making it available to your DR team).

    Info-Tech Insights

    Diversify your publishing strategy to ensure you can access your DRP in a disaster. For example, if you are using a BCM tool or SharePoint Online as your primary documentation repository, also push the DRP to your DR team’s smartphones as a backup in case the disaster affects internet access.

    2.1 — Select a DR publishing and document management strategy that fits your organization

    Publishing and document management considerations:

    Portability/External Access: Assume your primary site is down and inaccessible. Can you still access your documentation? As shown in this chart, traditional strategies of either keeping a copy at another location (e.g. at the failover site) or with staff (e.g. on a USB drive) still dominate, but these aren’t necessarily the best options.
    A bar chart titled 'Portability Strategy Popularity'. 'External Website (wiki site, cloud-based DRP tool, etc.)' scored 16%. 'Failover Site (network drive or redundant SharePoint, etc.)' scored 53%. 'Distribute to Staff (use USB drive, personal email, etc.)' scored 50%. 'Not Accessible Offsite' scored 7%.
    Note: Percentages total more than 100% due to respondents using more than one portability strategy.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group, N=118)
    Maintainability/Usability: How easy is it to create, update, and use the documentation? Is it easy to link to other documents as shown in the flowchart and checklist examples? Is there version control? Lack of version control can create a maintenance nightmare as well as issues in a crisis if staff are questioning whether they have the right version.
    Cost/Effort: Is the cost and effort appropriate? For example, a large enterprise may need a formal solution (e.g. DRP tools or SharePoint), but the cost might be hard to justify for a smaller company.

    Pros and cons of potential strategies

    This section will review the following strategies, their pros and cons, and how they meet publishing and document management requirements:

    • DRP tools (e.g. eBRP, Recovery Planner, LDRPS)
    • In-house solutions combining SharePoint and MS Office (or equivalent)
    • Wiki site
    • “Manual” approaches such as storing documents on a USB drive

    Avoid 42 hours of downtime due to a non-diversified publishing strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Municipality
    Source Interview

    Situation

    • A municipal government has recently completed an end-to-end disaster recovery plan.
    • The team is feeling good about the fact that they were able to identify:
      • Relative criticality of applications.
      • Dependencies for each application.
      • Incident response plans for the current state and desired state.
      • System recovery procedures.

    Challenge

    • While the DR plan itself was comprehensive, the team only published the DR onto the government’s network drives.
    • A power generation issue caused power to be shut down, which in turn cascaded into downtime for the network.
    • Once the network was down, their DRP was inaccessible.

    Insights

    • Each piece of documentation that was created could have contributed to recovery efforts. However, because they were inaccessible, there was a delayed response to the incident. The result was 42 hours of downtime for end users.
    • Having redundant publishing strategies is just like having redundant IT infrastructure. In the event of downtime, not only do you need to have DR documentation, but you also need to make sure that it is accessible.

    Decide on a DR publishing strategy by looking at portability, maintainability, cost, and required effort

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 DRP Publishing and Management Evaluation Tool

    Use the information included in Step 2.1 to guide your analysis of DRP publishing solutions.

    The tool enables you to compare two possible solutions based on these key considerations discussed in this section:

    • Portability/external access
    • Maintainability/usability
    • Cost
    • Effort

    The right choice will depend on factors such as current in-house tools, maturity around document management, the size of your IT department, and so on.

    For example, a small shop may do very well with the USB drive strategy, whereas a multi-national company will need a more formal strategy to manage consistent DRP distribution.

    Preview of Info-Tech's 'DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool'.

    The DRP Publishing and Management Solution Evaluation Tool helps you to evaluate the tools included in this section.

    Don’t think of a business continuity management (BCM) tool as a silver bullet; know what you’re getting out of it

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Typically a SaaS option provides built-in external access with appropriate security and user administration to vary access rights.
    • Cons: Degree of external access is often dependent on the vendor.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in templates encourage consistency and guide initial content development by indicating what details need to be captured.
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support), centralized access/navigation to required documents, and some automation (e.g. update contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Not a silver bullet. You still have to do the work to define and capture your processes.
    • Cons: Requires end-user and administrator training.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: For large enterprises, the convenience of built-in document management and templates can outweigh the cost.
    • Cons: Expect leading DRP tools to cost $20K or more per year.

    About this approach:
    BCM tools are solutions that provide templates, tools, and document management to create BC and DR documentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The business case for a BCM tool is built by answering the following questions:

    • Will the BCM tool solve an unmet need?
    • Will the tool be more effective and efficient than an in-house solution?
    • Will the solution provide enhanced capabilities that an in-house solution cannot provide?

    If you cannot get a satisfactory answer to each of these questions, then opt for an in-house solution.

    “We explored a DRP tool, and it was something we might have used, but it was tens of thousands of pounds per year, so it didn’t stack up financially for us at all.” (Rik Toms, Head of Strategy – IP and IT, Cable and Wireless Communications)

    For in-house solutions, leverage tools such as SharePoint to provide document management capabilities

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: SharePoint is commonly web-enabled and supports external access with appropriate security and user administration.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites or be cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support) as well as centralized access/navigation to required documents.
    • Pros: No tool learning curve – SharePoint and MS Office would be existing solutions already used on a daily basis.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Using existing tools, so this is a sunk cost in terms of capex.
    • Cons: Additional effort required to create templates and manage the documentation library.

    About this approach:
    DRPs and SOPs most often start as MS Office documents, even if there is a DRP tool available. For organizations that elect to bypass a formal DRP tool, and most do, the biggest gap they have to overcome is document management.

    Many organizations are turning to SharePoint to meet this need. For those that already have SharePoint in place, it makes sense to further leverage SharePoint for DR documentation and day-to-day SOPs.

    For SharePoint to be a practical solution, the documentation must still be accessible if the primary data center is down, e.g. by having redundant SharePoint instances at multiple in-house locations, or using a cloud-based SharePoint solution.

    “Just about everything that a DR planning tool does, you can do yourself using homegrown solutions or tools that you're already familiar with such as Word, Excel, and SharePoint.” (Allen Zuk, President and CEO, Sierra Management Consulting)

    A healthcare company uses SharePoint as its DRP and SOP documentation management solution

    CASE STUDY Healthcare

    • This organization is responsible for 50 medical facilities across three states.
    • It explored DRP tools, but didn’t find the right fit, so it has developed an in-house solution based in SharePoint. While DRP tools have improved, the organization no longer needs that type of solution. Its in-house solution is meeting its needs.
    • It has SharePoint instances at multiple locations to ensure availability if one site is down.

    Documentation Strategy

    • Created an IT operations library in SharePoint for DR and SOPs, from basic support to bare-metal restore procedures.
    • SOPs are linked from SharePoint to the virtual help desk for greater accessibility.
    • Where practical, diagrams and flowcharts are used, e.g. DR process flowcharts and network services SOPs dominated by diagrams and flowcharts.

    Management Strategy

    • Directors and the CIO have made finishing off SOPs their performance improvement objective for the year. The result is staff have made time to get this work done.
    • Status updates are posted monthly, and documentation is a regular agenda item in leadership meetings.
    • Regular tabletop testing validates documentation and ensures familiarity with procedures, including where to find required information.

    Results

    • Dependency on a few key individuals has been reduced. All relevant staff know what they need to do and where to access required documentation.
    • SOPs are enabling DR training as well as day-to-day operations training for new staff.
    • The organization has a high confidence in its ability to recovery from a disaster within established timelines.

    Explore using a wiki site as an inexpensive alternative to SharePoint and other content management solutions

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Wiki sites can support external access as with any web solution.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites, hosted, or cloud-based to be effective in a crisis that takes down your primary data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access/navigation to required information.
    • Pros: Authorized users can make updates dynamically, depending on how much restriction you have on the site.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: An inexpensive option compared to traditional content management solutions such as SharePoint.
    • Cons: Learning curve if wikis are new to your organization.

    About this approach:
    Wiki sites are websites where users collaborate to create and edit the content. Wikipedia is an example.

    While wiki sites are typically used for collaboration and dynamic content development, the traditional collaborative authoring model can be restricted to provide structure and an approval process.

    Several tools are available to create and manage wiki sites (and other collaboration solutions), as outlined in the following research:

    Info-Tech Insight

    If your organization is not already using wiki sites, this technology can introduce a culture shock. Start slow by using a wiki site within a specific department or for a particular project. Then evaluate how well your staff adapt to this technology as well as its potential effectiveness in your organization. Refer to our collaboration strategy research for additional guidance.

    For small IT shops, distributing documentation to key staff (e.g. via a USB drive) can still be effective

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Appropriate staff have the documentation with them; there is no need to log into a remote site or access a tool to get at the information.
    • Cons: Relies on staff to be diligent about ensuring they have the latest documentation and keep it with them (not leave it in their desk drawer).
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: With this strategy, MS Office (or equivalent) is used to create and maintain the documentation, so there is no learning curve.
    • Pros: Simple, straightforward methodology – keep the master on a network drive, and download a copy to your USB drive.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contact information) or document management (e.g. version control).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing rigid processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Little to no cost and no tool management required.
    • Cons: “Manual” document management requires strict attention to process for version control, updates, approvals, and distribution.

    About this approach:
    With this strategy, your ERT and key IT staff keep a copy of your DRP and relevant documentation with them (e.g. on a USB drive). If the primary site experiences a major event, they have ready access to the documentation.

    Fifty percent of respondents in our recent survey use this strategy. A common scenario is to use a shared network drive or a solution such as SharePoint as the master centralized repository, but distribute a copy to key staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This approach can have similar disadvantages as using hard copies. Ensuring the USB drives are up to date, and that all staff who might need access have a copy, can become a burdensome process. More often, USB drives are updated periodically, so there is the risk that the information will be out of date or incomplete.

    Avoid extensive use of paper copies of DR documentation

    DR documents need to be easy to update, accessible from anywhere, and searchable. Paper doesn’t meet these needs.

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Does not rely on technology or power.
    • Cons: Requires all staff who might be involved in a DR to have a copy, and to have it with them at all times, to truly have access at any time from anywhere.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: In terms of usability, again there is no dependence on technology.
    • Cons: Updates need to be printed and distributed to all relevant staff every time there is a change to ensure staff have access to the latest, most accurate documentation if a disaster occurred. You can’t schedule disasters, so information needs to be current all the time.
    • Cons: Navigation to other information is manual – flipping through pages, etc. No searching or hyperlinks.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: No technology system to maintain, aside from what you use for printing.
    • Cons: Printing expenses are actually among the highest incurred by organizations, and this adds to it.
    • Cons: Labor intensive due to need to print and physically distribute documentation updates.

    About this approach:
    Traditionally DRPs are printed and distributed to managers and/or kept in a central location at both the primary site and a secondary site. In addition, wallet cards are distributed that contain key information such as contact numbers.

    A wallet card or even a few printed copies of your high-level DRP for general reference can be helpful, but paper is not a practical solution for your overall DR documentation library, particularly when you include SOPs for recovery procedures.

    One argument in favor of paper is there is no dependency on power during a crisis. However, in a power outage, staff can use smartphones and potentially laptops (with battery power) to access electronically stored documentation to get through first response steps. In addition, your DR site should have backup power to be an appropriate recovery site.

    Optional: Partial list of BCM tool vendors

    A partial list of BCM tool vendors, including: Business Protector, catalyst, clearview, ContinuityLogic. Fusion, Logic Manager, Quantivate, RecoveryPlanner.com, MetricStream, SimpleRisk, riskonnect, Strategic BCP - ResilienceONE, RSA, and Sungard Availability Services.

    The list is only a partial list of BCM tool vendors. The order in which vendors are presented, and inclusion in this list, does not represent an endorsement.

    Optional: Use our list of requirements as a foundation for selecting and reviewing BCM tools

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.2 BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria

    If a BCM tool is the best option for your environment, expedite the evaluation process with our BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria.

    Through advisory services, workshops, and consulting engagements, we have created this BCM Tool Requirements List. The featured requirements includes the following categories:

    1. Integrations
    2. Planning and Monitoring
    3. Administration
    4. Architecture
    5. Security
    6. Support and Training
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria'.

    This BCM Tool – RFP Selection Criteria can be appended to an RFP. You can leverage Info-Tech’s RFP Template if your organization does not have one.

    Info-Tech can write full RFPs

    As part of a consulting engagement, Info-Tech can write RFPs for BCM tools and provide a customized scoring tool based on your environment’s unique requirements.

    Phase 3: Keep Your DRP Relevant Through Maintenance Best Practices

    Step 3.1: Integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Integrate DRP maintenance with Project Management.
    • Integrate DRP considerations into Change Management.
    • Integrate with Performance Management.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • Head of Project Management Office
    • Head of Change Advisory Board
    • CIO

    Outcomes of this step

    • Updated project intake form.
    • Updated change management practice.
    • Updated performance appraisals.

    3.1 — Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Focusing on these three processes will help ensure that your plan stays current, accurate, and usable.

    The Info-Tech / COBIT5 'IT Management and Governance Framework' with three processes highlighted: 'MEA01 Performance Measurement', 'BAI06 Change Management', and 'BAI01 Project Management'.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Prioritize quick wins that will have large benefits. The advice presented in this section offers easy ways to help keep your DRP up to date. These simple solutions can save a lot of time and effort for your DRP team as opposed to more intricate changes to the processes above.

    Assess how new projects impact service criticality and DR requirements upfront during project intake

    Icon for process 'BAI01 Project Management'.
    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.1 Sample Project Intake Form Addendum

    Understand the RTO/RPO requirements and IT impacts for new or enhanced services to ensure appropriate provisioning and overall DRP updates.

    • Have submitters include service continuity requirements. This information can be inserted into your business impact analysis. Use similar language that you use in your own BIA.
      • The submitter should know how critical the resulting project will be. Any items that the submitter doesn’t know, the Project Steering Committee should investigate.
    • Have IT assess the impact on the DRP. The submitter will not know how the DRP will be impacted directly. Ask the project committee to consider how DRP documentation and the DR environment will need to be changed due to the project under consideration.

    Note: The goal is not to make DR a roadblock, but rather to ensure project requirements will be met – including availability and DR requirements.

    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Project Intake Form'.

    This Project Intake Form asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    Leverage your change management process to identify required DRP updates as they occur

    Icon for process 'BAI06 Change Management'.

    Avoid the year-end rush to update your DRP. Keeping it up to date as changes occur saves time in the long run and ensures your plan is accurate when you need it.

    • As part of your change management process, identify potential updates to:
      • System documentation (e.g. configuration settings).
      • Recovery procedures (e.g. if a system has been virtualized, that changes the recovery procedure).
      • Your DR environment (e.g. system configuration updates for standby systems).
    • Keep track of how often a system has changed. Relevant DRP documentation might be due for a deeper review:
      • After a system has been changed ten times (even from routine changes), notify your DRP Manager to flag the relevant DRP documentation for review.
      • As part of formal DRP reviews, pay closer attention to DRP documentation for the flagged systems.
    Preview of the Info-Tech template 'Disaster Recovery Change Management'.

    This template asks the submitter to fill out the availability and criticality requirements for the project.

    For change management best practices beyond DRP considerations, please see Optimize Change Management.

    Integrate documentation into performance measurement and performance management

    Icon for process 'MEA01 Performance Measurement'.

    Documentation is a necessary evil – few like to create it and more immediate tasks take priority. If it isn’t scheduled and prioritized, it won’t happen.

    Why documentation is such a challenge

    How management can address these challenges

    We all know that IT staff typically do not like to write documentation. That’s not why they were hired, and good documentation is not what gets them promoted. Include documentation deliverables in your IT staff’s performance appraisal to stress the importance of ensuring documentation is up to date, especially where it might impact DR success.
    Similarly, documentation is secondary to more urgent tasks. Time to write documentation is often not allocated by project managers. Schedule time for developing documentation, just like any other project, or it won’t happen.
    Writing manuals is typically a time-intensive task. Focus on what is necessary for another experienced IT professional to execute the recovery. As discussed earlier, often a diagram or checklist is good enough and actually far more usable in a crisis.

    “Our directors and our CIO have tied SOP work to performance evaluations, and SOP status is reviewed during management meetings. People have now found time to get this work done.” (Assistant Director – IT Operations, Healthcare Industry)

    Step 3.2: Conduct an Annual Focused Review

    PHASE 1
    PHASE 2
    PHASE 3
    1.11.21.32.13.13.2
    Start with a Recovery WorkflowCreate Supporting DocumentationWrite the DRP SummarySelect DRP Publishing StrategyIntegrate into Core IT ProcessesConduct an Annual Focused Review

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Identify components of your DRP to refresh.
    2. Identify organizational changes requiring further focus.
    3. Test your DRP and identify problems.
    4. Correct problems identified with DRP.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • DRP Owner
    • System SMEs
    • Backup DR Personnel

    Outcomes of this step

    • An actionable, up-to-date DRP.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Testing is a waste of time and resources if you do not fix what’s broken. Tabletop testing is effective at uncovering gaps in your DR processes, but if you don’t address those gaps, then your DRP will still be unusable in a disaster.

    Set up a safety net to capture changes that slipped through the cracks with a focused review process

    Evaluate documentation supporting high-priority systems, as well as documentation supporting IT systems that have been significantly changed.

    • Ideally you’re maintaining documentation as you go along. But you need to have an annual review to catch items that may have slipped through.
    • Don’t review everything. Instead, review:
      • IT systems that have had 10+ changes: small changes and updates can add up over time. Ensure:
        • The plans for these systems are updated for changes (e.g. configuration changes).
        • SMEs and backup personnel are familiar with the changes.
      • Tier 1 / Gold Systems: Ensure that you can still recover tier 1 systems with your existing DRP documentation.
    • Track documentation issues that you discovered with your ticketing system or service desk tool to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.
    1. Annual Focused Review
    2. Tier 1 Systems
    3. Significantly Changed Systems
    4. Organizational Changes

    Identify larger changes, both organizational and within IT, that necessitate DRP updates

    During your focused review, consider how organizational changes have impacted your DRP.

    The COBIT 5 Enablers provide a foundation for this analysis. Consider:

    • Changes in regulatory requirements: Are there new requirements for IT that are not reflected in your DRP? Is the organization required to comply with any additional regulations?
    • Changes to organizational structures, business processes, and how employees work: Can employees still be productive once tier 1 services are restored or have RTOs changed? Has organizational turnover impacted your DRP?
    • SMEs leaving or changing roles: Can IT still execute your DRP? Are there still people for all the key roles?
    • Changes to IT infrastructure and applications: Can the business still access the information they need during a disaster? Is your BIA still accurate? Do new services need to be considered tier 1?

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    COBIT 5 Enablers
    What changes need to be reflected in your DRP?

    A cycle visualization titled 'Disaster Recovery Plan'. Starting at 'Changes in Regulatory Requirements', it proceeds clockwise to 'Organizational Structure', 'Changes in Business Processes', and 'How Employees Work', before it returns to DRP. Then 'Changes to Applications', 'Changes to Infrastructure', 'SMEs Leaving or Changing Roles', and then back to the DRP.

    Create a plan during your annual focused review to test your DRP throughout the year

    Regardless of your documentation approach, training and familiarity with relevant procedures is critical.

    • Start with tabletop exercises and progress to technology-based testing (simulation, parallel, and full-scale testing).
    • Ask staff to reference documentation while testing, even if they do not need to. This practice helps to confirm documentation accuracy and accessibility.
    • Incorporate cross-training in DR testing. This gives important experience to backup personnel and will further validate that documents are complete and accurate.
    • Track any discovered documentation issues with your ticketing system or project tracking tools to ensure necessary documentation changes are made.

    Example Test Schedule:

    1. Q1: Tabletop testing shadowed by backup personnel
    2. Q2: Tabletop testing led by backup personnel
    3. Q3: Technology-based testing
    4. Annual Focused Review: Review Results

    Reference this blueprint for guidance on DRP testing plans: Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing

    Appendix A: XMPL Case Study

    Follow XMPL Medical’s journey through DR documentation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Streamline your documentation and maintenance process by following the approach outlined in XMPL Medical’s journey to an end-to-end DRP.

    Outline of the Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s disaster recovery plan includes its business impact analysis and a subset of tier 1 and tier 2 patient care applications.

    Its DRP includes incident response flowcharts, system recovery checklists, and a communication plan. Its DRP also references IT operations documentation (e.g. asset management documents, system specs, and system configuration docs), but this material is not published with the example documentation.

    Resulting Disaster Recovery Plan

    XMPL’s DRP includes actionable documents in the form of high-level disaster response plan flowcharts and system recovery checklists. During an incident, the DR team is able to clearly see the items for which they are responsible.

    Disaster Recovery Plan
    • Recovery Workflow
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary
    • System Recovery Checklists
    • Communication, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    XMPL Medical’s disaster recovery plan illustrates an effective DRP. Model your end-to-end disaster recovery plan after XMPL’s completed templates. The specific data points will differ from organization to organization, but the structure of each document will be similar.

    Model your disaster recovery documentation off of our example

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Healthcare
    Source Created by amalgamating data from Info-Tech’s client base

    Recovery Workflow:

    • Recovery Workflows (PDF, VSDX)

    Recovery Procedures (Systems Recovery Playbook):

    • DR Notification, Assessment, and Disaster Declaration Plan
    • Systems Recovery Playbook
    • Network Topology Diagrams

    Additional Reference Documentation:

    • DRP Workbook
    • Business Impact Analysis
    • DRP Summary Document

    Use our structure to create your practical disaster recovery plan.

    Appendix B: Summary, Next Steps, and Bibliography

    Insight breakdown

    Use visual-based documentation instead of a traditional DRP manual.

    • Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are more concise, easier to maintain, and more effective in a crisis.
    • Write for an IT audience and focus on how to recover. You don’t need 30 pages of fluff describing the purpose of the document.

    Create your DRP in layers to keep the work manageable.

    • Start with a recovery workflow to ensure a coordinated response, and build out supporting documentation over time.

    Prioritize quick wins to make DRP maintenance easier and more likely to happen.

    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into change management and project intake procedures to systematically update and refine the DR documentation. Don’t save up changes for a year-end blitz, which turns document maintenance into an onerous project.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • How to create visual-based DRP documentation
    • How to integrate DRP maintenance into core IT processes

    Processes Optimized

    • DRP documentation creation
    • DRP publishing tool selection
    • DRP documentation maintenance

    Deliverables Completed

    • DRP documentation
    • Strategy for publishing your DRP
    • Modified project-intake form
    • Change management checklist for DR considerations

    Project step summary

    Client Project: Document and Maintain Your Disaster Recovery Plan

    • Create a recovery workflow.
    • Create supporting DRP documentation.
    • Write a summary for your DRP.
    • Decide on a publishing strategy.
    • Incorporate DRP maintenance into core IT processes.
    • Conduct an annual focused review.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project has the ability to fit the following formats:

    • Onsite workshop by Info-Tech Research Group consulting analysts.
    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    Related Info-Tech research

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Reduce Costly Downtime Through DR Testing
    Improve the accuracy of your DRP and your team’s ability to efficiently execute recovery procedures through regular DR testing.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind
    Go beyond satisfying auditors to drive process improvement, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

    Prepare for a DRP Audit
    Assess your current DRP maturity, identify required improvements, and complete an audit-ready DRP summary document.

    Bibliography

    A Structured Approach to Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) and the Requirements of ISO 31000. The Association of Insurance and Risk Managers, Alarm: The Public Risk Management Association, and The Institute of Risk Management, 2010.

    “APO012: Manage Risk.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Bird, Lyndon, Ian Charters, Mel Gosling, Tim Janes, James McAlister, and Charlie Maclean-Bristol. Good Practice Guidelines: A Guide to Global Good Practice in Business Continuity. Global ed. Business Continuity Institute, 2013.

    COBIT 5: A Business Framework for the Governance and Management of Enterprise IT. ISACA, 2012.

    “EDM03: Ensure Risk Optimisation.” COBIT 5: Enabling Processes. ISACA, 2012.

    Risk Management. ISO 31000:2009.

    Rothstein, Philip Jan. Disaster Recovery Testing: Exercising Your Contingency Plan. Rothstein Associates: 1 Oct. 2007.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Guidance. ISO 22313:2012.

    Societal Security – Business continuity management systems – Requirements. ISO 22301:2012.

    Understanding and Articulating Risk Appetite. KPMG, 2008.

    Modernize the Network

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}501|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Network Management
    • Parent Category Link: /network-management
    • Business units, functions, and processes are inextricably intertwined with less and less tolerance for downtime.
    • Business demands change rapidly but the refresh horizon for infrastructure remains 5-7 years.
    • The number of endpoint devices the network is expected to support is growing geometrically but historic capacity planning grew linearly.
    • The business is unable to clearly define requirements, paralyzing planning.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Build for your needs. Don’t fall into the trap of assuming what works for your neighbor, your peer, or your competitor will work for you.
    • Deliver on what your business knows it needs as well as what it doesn’t yet know it needs. Business leaders have business vision, but this vision won’t directly demand the required network capabilities to enable the business. This is where you come in.
    • Modern technologies are hampered by vintage processes. New technologies demand new ways of accomplishing old tasks.

    Impact and Result

    • Use a systematic approach to document all stakeholder needs and rely on the network technical staff to translate those needs into design constraints, use cases, features, and management practices.
    • Spend only on those emerging technologies that deliver features offering direct benefits to specific business goals and IT needs.
    • Solidify the business case for your network modernization project by demonstrating and quantifying the hard dollar value it provides to the business.

    Modernize the Network Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize the enterprise network, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the network

    Identify and prioritize stakeholder and IT/networking concerns.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 1: Assess the Network
    • Network Modernization Workbook

    2. Envision the network of the future

    Learn about emerging technologies and identify essential features of a modernized network solution.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 2: Envision Your Future Network
    • Network Modernization Technology Assessment Tool

    3. Communicate and execute the plan

    Compose a presentation for stakeholders and prepare the RFP for vendors.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 3: Communicate and Execute the Plan
    • Network Modernization Roadmap
    • Network Modernization Executive Presentation Template
    • Network Modernization RFP Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize the Network

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Network

    The Purpose

    Understand current stakeholder and IT needs pertaining to the network.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized lists of stakeholder and IT needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess and prioritize stakeholder concerns.

    1.2 Assess and prioritize design considerations.

    1.3 Assess and prioritize use cases.

    1.4 Assess and prioritize network infrastructure concerns.

    1.5 Assess and prioritize care and control concerns.

    Outputs

    Current State Register

    2 Analyze Emerging Technologies and Identify Features

    The Purpose

    Analyze emerging technologies to determine whether or not to include them in the network modernization.

    Identify and shortlist networking features that will be part of the network modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of what emerging technologies are suitable for including in your network modernization.

    A prioritized list of features, aligned with business needs, that your modernized network must or should have.

    Activities

    2.1 Analyze emerging technologies.

    2.2 Identify features to support drivers, practices, and pain points.

    Outputs

    Emerging technology assessment

    Prioritize lists of modernized network features

    3 Plan for Future Capacity

    The Purpose

    Estimate future port, bandwidth, and latency requirements for all sites on the network.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Planning for capacity ensures the network is capable of delivering until the next refresh cycle and beyond.

    Activities

    3.1 Estimate port, bandwidth, and latency requirements.

    3.2 Group sites according to capacity requirements.

    3.3 Create standardized capacity plans for each group.

    Outputs

    A summary of capacity requirements for each site in the network

    4 Communicate and Execute the Plan

    The Purpose

    Create a presentation to pitch the project to executives.

    Compose key elements of RFP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Communication to executives, summarizing the elements of the modernization project that business decision makers will want to know, in order to gain approval.

    Communication to vendors detailing the network solution requirements so that proposed solutions are aligned to business and IT needs.

    Activities

    4.1 Build the executive presentation.

    4.2 Compose the scope of work.

    4.3 Compose technical requirements.

    Outputs

    Executive Presentation

    Request for Proposal/Quotation

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}335|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • The evolution of natural language processing and machine learning applications has led to specialized AI-assisted toolsets that promise to improve the efficiency and timeliness of IT operations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • These are early days. These AI-assisted toolsets are generating a considerable amount of media attention, but most of them are relatively untested. Early adopters willing to absorb experimentation costs are in the process of deploying the first use cases. Initial lessons are showing that IT operations in most organizations are not yet mature enough to take advantage of AI-assisted toolsets.
    • Focus on the problem, not the tool. Explicit AI questions should be at the end of the list. Start by asking what business problem you want to solve.
    • Get your house in order. The performance of AI-assisted tools depends on mature IT operations processes and reliable data sets. Standardize service management processes and build a knowledgebase of structured content to prepare for AI-assisted IT operations.

    Impact and Result

    • Don’t fall prey to the AI-bandwagon effect. AI-assisted innovations will support shift-left service support strategies through natural language processing and machine learning applications. However, the return on your AI investment will depend on whether it helps you meet an actual business goal.
    • AI-assisted tools presuppose the existence of mature IT operations functions, including standardized processes, high-quality structured content focused on the incidents and requests that matter, and a well-functioning ITSM web portal.
    • The success of AI ITSM projects hinges on adoption. If your vision is to power end-user interactions with chatbots and deploy intelligent agents on tickets coming through the web portal, be sure to develop a self-service culture that empowers end users to help themselves and experiment with new tools and technologies. Without end-user adoption, the promised benefits of AI projects will not materialize.

    Prepare for Cognitive Service Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should prepare for cognitive service management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review emerging AI technology

    Get an overview of emerging AI applications to understand how they will strengthen a shift-left service support strategy.

    2. Sort potential IT operations AI use cases

    Review potential use cases for AI applications to prioritize improvement initiatives and align them to organizational goals.

    • Disruptive Technology Shortlisting Tool
    • Disruptive Technology Value-Readiness and SWOT Analysis Tool

    3. Prepare for a cognitive service management project

    Develop an ITSM AI strategy to prepare your organization for the coming of cognitive service management, and build a roadmap for implementation.

    • Customer Journey Map (PDF)
    • Customer Journey Map (Visio)
    • Infrastructure Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool
    [infographic]

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}234|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,716 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Contract reviews are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Vendors have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and often biased in their favor.
    • Vendors change their contracts frequently through hyperlinked documents without notifying customers, and the onus is on you to stay compliant.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Align contract language to meet IT and business needs.
    • Communicate more effectively with Legal and the vendors.
    • Identify and reduce contractual and performance risk.
    • Understand the relationship between contract provisions.
    • Negotiate more effectively.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should employ a systematic process for reviewing contracts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess contract terms and conditions

    Review and assess your IT contracts for vendor-biased terms and conditions, and gain tips for getting vendors to take on their fair share of risk and become more accountable.

    • Contract Review Tool
    • Contract Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Contract Terms and Conditions

    The Purpose

    Understand IT contract clauses, improve risk identification, and be more effective at negotiating contract terms.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased awareness of how contract provisions relate to each other.

    Demystification of legalese and legal concepts.

    Increased ability to seek assistance from internal parties (e.g. Legal, Risk, and Procurement).

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Contract Review Tool.

    1.2 Review the Contract Playbook template.

    1.3 Review 35 contract provisions and reinforce key learnings with exercises (spread across three days)

    Outputs

    Partial completion of the template

    Exercise results and debrief

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}302|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $129,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 35 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Shadow IT: The IT team is regularly surprised to discover new products within the organization, often when following up on help desk tickets or requests for renewals from business users or vendors.
    • Renewal Management: The contracts and asset teams need to be aware of upcoming renewals and have adequate time to review renewals.
    • Over-purchasing: Contracts may be renewed without a clear picture of usage, potentially renewing unused applications.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    There is a direct correlation between service delivery dissatisfaction and increases in shadow IT. Whether the goal is to reduce shadow IT or gain control, improved customer service and fast delivery are key to making lasting changes.

    Impact and Result

    Our blueprint will help you design a service that draws the business to use it. If it is easier for them to buy from IT than it is to find their own supplier, they will use IT.

    A heavy focus on customer service, design optimization, and automation will provide a means for the business to get what they need, when they need it, and provide visibility to IT and security to protect organizational interests.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Design the request service
    • Design the request catalog
    • Build the request catalog
    • Market the service

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog – A step-by-step document that walks you through creation of a request service management program.

    Use this blueprint to create a service request management program that provides immediate value.

    • Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Storyboard

    2. Nonstandard Request Assessment – A template for documenting requirements for vetting and onboarding new applications.

    Use this template to define what information is needed to vet and onboard applications into the IT environment.

    • Nonstandard Request Assessment

    3. Service Request Workflows – A library of workflows used as a starting point for creating and fulfilling requests for applications and equipment.

    Use this library of workflows as a starting point for creating and fulfilling requests for applications and equipment in a service catalog.

    • Service Request Workflows

    4. Application Portfolio – A template to organize applications requested by the business and identify which items are published in the catalog.

    Use this template as a starting point to create an application portfolio and request catalog.

    • Application Portfolio

    5. Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog Communications Template – A presentation and communications plan to announce changes to the service and introduce a catalog.

    Use this template to create a presentation and communications plan for launching the new service and service request catalog.

    • Reduce Shadow IT with a Service Request Catalog Communications Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Service

    The Purpose

    Collaborate with the business to determine service model.

    Collaborate with IT teams to build non-standard assessment process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Designed a service for service requests, including new product intake.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify challenges and obstacles.

    1.2 Complete customer journey map.

    1.3 Design process for nonstandard assessments.

    Outputs

    Nonstandard process.

    2 Design the Catalog

    The Purpose

    Design the service request catalog management process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the catalog is kept current and is integrated with IT service catalog if applicable.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine what will be listed in the catalog.

    2.2 Determine process to build and maintain the catalog, including roles, responsibilities, and workflows.

    2.3 Define success and determine metrics.

    Outputs

    Catalog scope.

    Catalog design and maintenance plan.

    Defined success metrics

    3 Build and Market the Catalog

    The Purpose

    Determine catalog contents and how requests will be fulfilled.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Catalog framework and service level agreements will be defined.

    Create communications documents.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine how catalog items will be displayed.

    3.2 Complete application categories for catalog.

    3.3 Create deployment categories and SLAs.

    3.4 Design catalog forms and deployment workflows.

    3.5 Create roadmap.

    3.6 Create communications plan.

    Outputs

    Catalog workflows and SLAs.

    Roadmap.

    Communications deck.

    4 Breakout Groups – Working Sessions

    The Purpose

    Create an applications portfolio.

    Prepare to populate the catalog.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Portfolio and catalog contents created.

    Activities

    4.1 Using existing application inventory, add applications to portfolio and categorize.

    4.2 Determine which applications should be in the catalog.

    4.3 Determine which applications are packaged and can be easily deployed.

    Outputs

    Application Portfolio.

    List of catalog items.

    Further reading

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog

    Foster business partnerships with sourcing-as-a-service.

    Analyst Perspective

    Improve the request management process to reduce shadow IT.

    In July 2022, Ivanti conducted a study on the state of the digital employee experience, surveying 10,000 office workers, IT professionals, and C-suite executives. Results of this study indicated that 49% of employees are frustrated by their tools, and 26% of employees were considering quitting their jobs due to unsuitable tech. 42% spent their own money to gain technology to improve their productivity. Despite this, only 21% of IT leaders prioritized user experience when selecting new tools.

    Any organization’s workers are expected to be productive and contribute to operational improvements or customer experience. Yet those workers don’t always have the tools needed to do the job. One option is to give the business greater control, allowing them to choose and acquire the solutions that will make them more productive. Info-Tech's blueprint Embrace Business-Managed Applications takes you down this path.

    However, if the business doesn’t want to manage applications, but just wants have access to better ones, IT is positioned to provide services for application and equipment sourcing that will improve the employee experience while ensuring applications and equipment are fully managed by the asset, service, and security teams.

    Improving the request management and deployment practice can give the business what they need without forcing them to manage license agreements, renewals, and warranties.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad

    Sandi Conrad
    ITIL Managing Professional
    Principal Research Director, IT Infrastructure & Operations,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are looking to improve request management processes and reduce shadow IT.

    Shadow IT: The IT team is regularly surprised to discover new products within the organization, often when following up on help desk tickets or requests for renewals from business users or vendors.

    Renewal management: The contracts and asset teams need to be aware of upcoming renewals and have adequate time to review renewals.

    Over-purchasing and over-spending: Contracts may be renewed without a clear picture of utilization, potentially renewing unused applications. Applications or equipment may be purchased at retail price where corporate, government, or educational discounts exist.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To increase the visibility of the IT environment, IT needs to transform the request management process to create a service that makes it easier for the business to access the tools they need rather than seeking them outside of the organization.

    609
    Average number of SaaS applications in large enterprises

    40%
    On average, only 60% of provisioned SaaS licenses are used, with the remaining 40% unused.

    — Source: Zylo, SaaS Trends for IT Leaders, 2022

    Common obstacles

    Too many layers of approvals and a lack of IT workers makes it difficult to rethink service request fulfillment.

    Delays: The business may not be getting the applications they need from IT to do their jobs or must wait too long to get the applications approved.

    Denials: Without IT’s support, the business is finding alternative options, including SaaS applications, as they can be bought and used without IT’s input or knowledge.

    Threats: Applications that have not been vetted by security or installed without their knowledge may present additional threats to the organization.

    Access: Self-serve isn’t mature enough to support an applications catalog.

    A diagram that shows the number of SaaS applications being acquired outside of IT is increasing year over year, and that business units are driving the majority of SaaS spend.

    8: average number of applications entering the organization every 30 days

    — Source: Zylo, SaaS Trends for Procurement, 2022

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Improve the request management process to create sourcing-as-a-service for the business.

    • Improve customer service
    • Reduce shadow IT
    • Gain control in a way that keeps the business happy

    1. Design the service

    Collaborate with the business

    Identify the challenges and obstacles

    Gain consensus on priorities

    Design the service

    2. Design the catalog

    Determine catalog scope

    Create a process to build and maintain the catalog

    Define metrics for the request management process

    3. Build the catalog

    Determine descriptions for catalog items

    Create definitions for license types, workflows, and SLAs

    Create application portfolio

    Design catalog forms and workflows

    4. Market the service

    Create a roadmap

    Determine messaging

    Build a communications plan

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Communications Presentation

    Photo of Communications Presentation

    Application Portfolio

    Photo of Application Portfolio

    Visio Library

    Photo of Visio Library

    Nonstandard Request Assessment

    Photo of Nonstandard Request Assessment

    Create a request management process and service catalog to improve delivery of technology to the business

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}286|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Analysis
    • Parent Category Link: /business-analysis
    • Enterprise application initiatives are complex, expensive, and require a significant amount of planning before initiation.
    • A financial business case is sometimes used to justify these initiatives.
    • Once the business case (and benefits therein) are approved, the case is forgotten, eliminating a critical check and balance of benefit realization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    1. Frame the conversation.

    Understand the audience and forum for the business case to best frame the conversation.

    2. Time-box the process of building the case.

    More time should be spent on performing the action rather than building the case.

    3. The business case is a living document.

    The business case creates the basis for review of the realization of the proposed business benefits once the procurement is complete.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the drivers for decision making in your organization, and the way initiatives are evaluated.
    • Compile a compelling business case that provides decision makers with sufficient information to make decisions confidently.
    • Evaluate proposed enterprise application initiatives “apples-to-apples” using a standardized and repeatable methodology.
    • Provide a mechanism for tracking initiative performance during and after implementation.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a business case for enterprise application investments, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gather the required information

    Complete the necessary preceding tasks to building the business case. Rationalize the initiative under consideration, determine the organizational decision flow following a stakeholder assessment, and conduct market research to understand the options.

    • Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case – Phase 1: Gather the Required Information
    • Business Case Readiness Checklist
    • Business Case Workbook
    • Request for Information Template
    • Request for Quotation Template

    2. Conduct the business case analysis

    Conduct a thorough assessment of the initiative in question. Define the alternatives under consideration, identify tangible and intangible benefits for each, aggregate the costs, and highlight any risks.

    • Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case – Phase 2: Conduct the Business Case Analysis

    3. Make the case

    Finalize the recommendation based on the analysis and create a business case presentation to frame the conversation for key stakeholders.

    • Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case – Phase 3: Make the Case
    • Full-Form Business Case Presentation Template
    • Summary Business Case Presentation Template
    • Business Case Change Log
    • Business Case Close-Out Form
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan for Business Case Development

    The Purpose

    Complete the necessary preceding tasks to building a strong business case.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment with business objectives.

    Stakeholder buy-in.

    Activities

    1.1 Map the decision flow in your organization.

    1.2 Define the proposed initiative.

    1.3 Define the problem/opportunity statement.

    1.4 Clarify goals and objectives expected from the initiative.

    Outputs

    Decision traceability

    Initiative summary

    Problem/opportunity statement

    Business objectives

    2 Build the Business Case Model

    The Purpose

    Put together the key elements of the business case including alternatives, benefits, and costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Rationalize the business case.

    Activities

    2.1 Design viable alternatives.

    2.2 Identify the tangible and intangible benefits.

    2.3 Assess current and future costs.

    2.4 Create the financial business case model.

    Outputs

    Shortlisted alternatives

    Benefits tracking model

    Total cost of ownership

    Impact analysis

    3 Enhance the Business Case

    The Purpose

    Determine more integral factors in the business case such as ramp-up time for benefits realization as well as risk assessment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Complete a comprehensive case.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine ramp-up times for costs and benefits.

    3.2 Identify performance measures and tracking.

    3.3 Assess initiative risk.

    Outputs

    Benefits realization schedule

    Performance tracking framework

    Risk register

    4 Prepare the Business Case

    The Purpose

    Finalize the recommendation and formulate the business case summary and presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prepare the business case presentation.

    Activities

    4.1 Choose the alternative to be recommended.

    4.2 Create the detailed and summary business case presentations.

    4.3 Present and incorporate feedback.

    4.4 Monitor and close out.

    Outputs

    Final recommendation

    Business case presentation

    Final sign-off

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}549|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Regrettable turnover is impacting organizational productivity and leading to significant costs associated with employee departures and the recruitment required to replace them.
    • Many organizations focus on increasing engagement to improve retention, but this approach doesn’t address the entire problem.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    Impact and Result

    • Build the case for creating retention plans by leveraging employee data and feedback to identify the key reasons for turnover that need to be addressed.
    • Target employee segments and work with management to develop solutions to retain top talent.

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Tactics to Retain IT Talent Storyboard – Use this storyboard to develop a targeted talent retention plan to retain top and core talent in the organization.

    Integrate data from exit surveys and interviews, engagement surveys, and stay interviews to understand the most commonly cited reasons for employee departure in order to select and prioritize tactics that improve retention. This blueprint will help you identify reasons for regrettable turnover, select solutions, and create an action plan.

    • Tactics to Retain IT Talent Storyboard

    2. Retention Plan Workbook – Capture key information in one place as you work through the process to assess and prioritize solutions.

    Use this tool to document and analyze turnover data to find suitable retention solutions.

    • Retention Plan Workbook

    3. Stay Interview Guide – Managers will use this guide to conduct regular stay interviews with employees to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

    The Stay Interview Guide helps managers conduct interviews with current employees, enabling the manager to understand the employee's current engagement level, satisfaction with current role and responsibilities, suggestions for potential improvements, and intent to stay with the organization.

    • Stay Interview Guide

    4. IT Retention Solutions Catalog – Use this catalog to select and prioritize retention solutions across the employee lifecycle.

    Review best-practice solutions to identify those that are most suitable to your organizational culture and employee needs. Use the IT Retention Solutions Catalog to explore a variety of methods to improve retention, understand their use cases, and determine stakeholder responsibilities.

    • IT Retention Solutions Catalog
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    The Purpose

    Identify the main drivers of turnover at the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Find out what to explore during focus groups.

    Activities

    1.1 Review data to determine why employees join, stay, and leave.

    1.2 Identify common themes.

    1.3 Prepare for focus groups.

    Outputs

    List of common themes/pain points recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook.

    2 Conduct Focus Groups

    The Purpose

    Conduct focus groups to explore retention drivers.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore identified themes.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct four 1-hour focus groups with the employee segment(s) identified in the pre-workshop activities.

    2.2 Info-Tech facilitators independently analyze results of focus groups and group results by theme.

    Outputs

    Focus group feedback.

    Focus group feedback analyzed and organized by themes.

    3 Identify Needs and Retention Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Home in on employee needs that are a priority.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of initiatives to address the identified needs

    Activities

    3.1 Create an empathy map to identify needs.

    3.2 Shortlist retention initiatives.

    Outputs

    Employee needs and shortlist of initiatives to address them.

    4 Prepare to Communicate and Launch

    The Purpose

    Prepare to launch your retention initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear action plan for implementing your retention initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Select retention initiatives.

    4.2 Determine goals and metrics.

    4.3 Plan stakeholder communication.

    4.4 Build a high-level action plan.

    Outputs

    Finalized list of retention initiatives.

    Goals and associated metrics recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook.

    Further reading

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    Keep talent from walking out the door by discovering and addressing moments that matter and turnover triggers.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Many organizations are facing an increase in voluntary turnover as low unemployment, a lack of skilled labor, and a rise in the number of vacant roles have given employees more employment choices.

    Common Obstacles

    Regrettable turnover is impacting organizational productivity and leading to significant costs associated with employee departures and the recruitment required to replace them.

    Many organizations tackle retention from an engagement perspective: Increase engagement to improve retention. This approach doesn't consider the whole problem.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Build the case for creating retention plans by leveraging employee data and feedback to identify the key reasons for turnover that need to be addressed.

    Target employee segments and work with management to develop solutions to retain top talent.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    This research addresses regrettable turnover

    This is an image of a flow chart with three levels. The top level has only one box, labeled Turnover.  the Second level has 2 boxes, labeled Voluntary, and Involuntary.  The third level has two boxes under Voluntary, labeled Non-regrettable: The loss of employees that the organization did not wish to keep, e.g. low performers, and Regrettable:  The loss of employees that the organization wishes it could have kept.

    Low unemployment and rising voluntary turnover makes it critical to focus on retention

    As the economy continues to recover from the pandemic, unemployment continues to trend downward even with a looming recession. This leaves more job openings vacant, making it easier for employees to job hop.

    This image contains a graph of the US Employment rate between 2020 - 2022 from the US Bureau of Economic Analysis and Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), 2022, the percentage of individuals who change jobs every one to five years from 2022 Job Seeker Nation Study, Jobvite, 2022, and voluntary turnover rates from BLS, 2022

    With more employees voluntarily choosing to leave jobs, it is more important than ever for organizations to identify key employees they want to retain and put plans in place to keep them.

    Retention is a challenge for many organizations

    The number of HR professionals citing retention/turnover as a top workforce management challenge is increasing, and it is now the second highest recruiting priority ("2020 Recruiter Nation Survey," Jobvite, 2020).

    65% of employees believe they can find a better position elsewhere (Legaljobs, 2021). This is a challenge for organizations in that they need to find ways to ensure employees want to stay at the organization or they will lose them, which results in high turnover costs.

    Executives and IT are making retention and turnover – two sides of the same coin – a priority because they cost organizations money.

    • 87% of HR professionals cited retention/turnover as a critical and high priority for the next few years (TINYpulse, 2020).
    • $630B The cost of voluntary turnover in the US (Work Institute, 2020).
    • 66% of organizations consider employee retention to be important or very important to an organization (PayScale, 2019).

    Improving retention leads to broad-reaching organizational benefits

    Cost savings: the price of turnover as a percentage of salary

    • 33% Improving retention can result in significant cost savings. A recent study found turnover costs, on average, to be around a third of an employee's annual salary (SHRM, 2019).
    • 37.9% of employees leave their organization within the first year. Employees who leave within the first 90 days of being hired offer very little or no return on the investment made to hire them (Work Institute, 2020).

    Improved performance

    Employees with longer tenure have an increased understanding of an organization's policies and processes, which leads to increased productivity (Indeed, 2021).

    Prevents a ripple effect

    Turnover often ripples across a team or department, with employees following each other out of the organization (Mereo). Retaining even one individual can often have an impact across the organization.

    Transfer of knowledge

    Retaining key individuals allows them to pass it on to other employees through communities of practice, mentoring, or other knowledge-sharing activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improving retention goes beyond cost savings: Employees who agree with the statement "I expect to be at this organization a year from now" are 71% more likely to put in extra hours and 32% more likely to accomplish more than what is expected of their role (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2021; N=77,170 and 97,326 respectively).

    However, the traditional engagement-focused approach to retention is not enough

    Employee engagement is a strong driver of retention, with only 25% of disengaged employees expecting to be at their organization a year from now compared to 92% of engaged employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307).

    Average employee Net Promoter Score (eNPS)

    This image contains a graph of the Average employee Net Promoter Score (eNPS)

    Individual employee Net Promoter Scores (eNPS)

    This image contains a graph of the Individual employee Net Promoter Scores (eNPS)

    However, engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave.

    This analysis of McLean & Company's engagement survey results shows that while an organization's average employee net promoter score (eNPS) stays relatively static, at an individual level there is a huge amount of volatility.

    This demonstrates the need for an approach that is more capable of responding to or identifying employees' in-the-moment needs, which an annual engagement survey doesn't support.

    Turnover triggers and moments that matter also have an impact on retention

    Retention needs to be monitored throughout the employee lifecycle. To address the variety of issues that can appear, consider three main paths to turnover:

    1. Employee engagement – areas of low engagement.
    2. Turnover triggers that can quickly lead to departures.
    3. Moments that matter in the employee experience (EX).

    Employee engagement

    Engagement drivers are strong predictors of turnover.

    Employees who are highly engaged are 3.6x more likely to believe they will be with the organization 12 months from now than disengaged employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307).

    Turnover triggers

    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Turnover triggers are a cause for voluntary turnover more often than accumulated issues (Lee et al.).

    Moments that matter

    Employee experience is the employee's perception of the accumulation of moments that matter within their employee lifecycle.

    Retention rates increase from 21% to 44% when employees have positive experiences in the following categories: belonging, purpose, achievement, happiness, and vigor at work. (Workhuman, 2020).

    While managers do not directly impact turnover, they do influence the three main paths to turnover

    Research shows managers do not appear as one of the common reasons for employee turnover.

    Top five most common reasons employees leave an organization (McLean & Company, Exit Survey, 2018-2021; N=107 to 141 companies,14,870 to 19,431 responses).

    Turnover factorsRank
    Opportunities for career advancement1
    Satisfaction with my role and responsibilities2
    Base pay3
    Opportunities for career-related skill development4
    The degree to which my skills were used in my job5

    However, managers can still have a huge impact on the turnover of their team through each of the three main paths to turnover:

    Employee engagement

    Employees who believe their managers care about them as a person are 3.3x more likely to be engaged than those who do not (McLean & Company, 2021; N=105,186).

    Turnover triggers

    Managers who are involved with and aware of their staff can serve as an early warning system for triggers that lead to turnover too quickly to detect with data.

    Moments that matter

    Managers have a direct connection with each individual and can tailor the employee experience to meet the needs of the individuals who report to them.

    Gallup has found that 52% of exiting employees say their manager could have done something to prevent them from leaving (Gallup, 2019). Do not discount the power of managers in anticipating and preventing regrettable turnover.

    Addressing engagement, turnover triggers, and moments that matter is the key to retention

    This is an image of a flow chart with four levels. The top level has only one box, labeled Turnover.  the Second level has 2 boxes, labeled Voluntary, and Involuntary.  The third level has two boxes under Voluntary, labeled Non-regrettable, and Regrettable.  The fourth level has three boxes under Regrettable, labeled Employee Engagement, Turnover triggers, and Moments that matter

    Info-Tech Insight

    HR traditionally seeks to examine engagement levels when faced with retention challenges, but engagement is only a part of the full picture. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    Follow Info-Tech's two-step process to create a retention plan

    1. Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    2. Select Solutions and Create an Action Plan

    Step 1

    Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    After completing this step you will have:

    • Analyzed and documented why employees join, stay, and leave your organization.
    • Identified common themes and employee needs.
    • Conducted employee focus groups and prioritized employee needs.

    Step 1 focuses on analyzing existing data and validating it through focus groups

    Employee engagement

    Employee engagement and moments that matter are easily tracked by data. Validating employee feedback data by speaking and empathizing with employees helps to uncover moments that matter. This step focuses on analyzing existing data and validating it through focus groups.

    Engagement drivers such as compensation or working environment are strong predictors of turnover.
    Moments that matter
    Employee experience (EX) is the employee's perception of the accumulation of moments that matter with the organization.
    Turnover triggers
    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Turnover triggers

    This step will not touch on turnover triggers. Instead, they will be discussed in step 2 in the context of the role of the manager in improving retention.

    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT managers often have insights into where and why retention is an issue through their day-to-day work. Gathering detailed quantitative and qualitative data provides credibility to these insights and is key to building a business case for action. Keep an open mind and allow the data to inform your gut feeling, not the other way around.

    Gather data to better understand why employees join, stay, and leave

    Start to gather and examine additional data to accurately identify the reason(s) for high turnover. Begin to uncover the story behind why these employees join, stay, and leave your organization through themes and trends that emerge.

    Look for these icons throughout step 2.

    Join

    Why do candidates join your organization?

    Stay

    Why do employees stay with your organization?

    Leave

    Why do employees leave your organization?

    For more information on analysis, visualization, and storytelling with data, see Info-Tech's Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions blueprint.

    Employee feedback data to look at includes:

    Gather insights through:

    • Focus groups
    • Verbatim comments
    • Exit interviews
    • Using the employee value proposition (EVP) as a filter (does it resonate with the lived experience of employees?)

    Prepare to draw themes and trends from employee data throughout step 1.

    Uncover employee needs and reasons for turnover by analyzing employee feedback data.

    • Look for trends (e.g. new hires join for career opportunities and leave for the same reason, or most departments have strong work-life balance scores in engagement data).
    • Review if there are recurring issues being raised that may impact turnover.
    • Group feedback to highlight themes (e.g. lack of understanding of EVP).
    • Identify which key employee needs merit further investigation or information.

    This is an image showing how you can draw out themes and trends using employee data throughout step 1.

    Classify where key employee needs fall within the employee lifecycle diagram in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook. This will be used in step 2 to pinpoint and prioritize solutions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The employee lifecycle is a valuable way to analyze and organize engagement pain points, moments that matter, and turnover triggers. It ensures that you consider the entirety of an employee's tenure and the different factors that lead to turnover.

    Examine new hire data and begin to document emerging themes

    Join

    While conducting a high-level analysis of new hire data, look for these three key themes impacting retention:

    Issues or pain points that occurred during the hiring process.

    Reasons why employees joined your organization.

    The experience of their first 90 days. This can include their satisfaction with the onboarding process and their overall experience with the organization.

    Themes will help to identify areas of strength and weakness organization-wide and within key segments. Document in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

    1. Start by isolating the top reasons employees joined your organization. Ask:
      • Do the reasons align with the benefits you associate with working at your organization?
      • How might this impact your EVP?
      • If you use a new hire survey, look at the results for the following questions:
      • For which of the following reasons did you apply to this organization?
      • For what reasons did you accept the job offer with this organization?
    2. then, examine other potential problem areas that may not be covered by your new hire survey, such as onboarding or the candidate experience during the hiring process.
      • If you conduct a new hire survey, look at the results in the following sections:
        • Candidate Experience
        • Acclimatization
        • Training and Development
        • Defining Performance Expectations

      Analyze engagement data to identify areas of strength that drive retention

      Employees who are engaged are 3.6x more likely to believe they will be with the organization 12 months from now (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307). Given the strength of this relationship, it is essential to identify areas of strength to maintain and leverage.

      1. Look at the highest-performing drivers in your organization's employee engagement survey and drivers that fall into the "leverage" and "maintain" quadrants of the priority matrix.
        • These drivers provide insight into what prompts broader groups of employees to stay.

      This is an image of a quadrant analysis, with the following quadrants in order from left to right, top to bottom.  Improve; Leverage; Evaluate; Maintain.

      1. Look into what efforts have been made to maintain programs, policies, and practices related to these drivers and ensure they are consistent across the entire organization.
      2. Document trends and themes related to engagement strengths in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If you use Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, look in detail at what are classified as "Retention Drivers": total compensation, working environment, and work-life balance.

      Identify areas of weakness that drive turnover in your engagement data

      1. Look at the lowest-performing drivers in your organization's employee engagement survey and drivers that fall into the "improve" and "evaluate" quadrants of the priority matrix.
        • These drivers provide insight into what pushes employees to leave the organization.
      2. Delve into organizational efforts that have been made to address issues with the programs, policies, and practices related to these drivers. Are there any projects underway to improve them? What are the barriers preventing improvements?
      3. Document trends and themes related to engagement weaknesses in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If you use a product other than Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, your results will look different. The key is to look at areas of weakness that emerge from the data.

      This is an image of a quadrant analysis, with the following quadrants in order from left to right, top to bottom.  Improve; Leverage; Evaluate; Maintain.

      If you use Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, look in detail at what are classified as "Retention Drivers": total compensation, working environment, and work-life balance.

      Mine exit surveys to develop an integrated, holistic understanding of why employees leave

      Conduct a high-level analysis of the data from your employee exit diagnostic. While analyzing this data, consider the following:

      • What are the trends and quantitative data about why employees leave your organization that may illuminate employee needs or issues at specific points throughout the employee lifecycle?
      • What are insights around your key segments? Data on key segments is easily sliced from exit survey results and can be used as a starting point for digging deeper into retention issues for specific groups.
      • Exit surveys are an excellent starting point. However, it is valuable to validate the data gathered from an exit survey using exit interviews.
      1. Isolate results for key segments of employees to target with retention initiatives (e.g. by age group or by department).
      2. Identify data trends or patterns over time; for example, that compensation factors have been increasing in importance.
      3. Document trends and themes taken from the exit survey results in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If your organization conducts exit interviews, analyze the results alongside or in lieu of exit survey data.

      Compare new hire data with exit data to identify patterns and insights

      Determine if new hire expectations weren't met, prompting employees to leave your organization, to help identify where in the employee lifecycle issues driving turnover may be occurring.

      1. Look at your new hire data for the top reasons employees joined your organization.
        • McLean & Company's New Hire Survey database shows that the top three reasons candidates accept job offers on average are:
          1. Career opportunities
          2. Nature of the job
          3. Development opportunities
      2. Next, look at your exit data and the top reasons employees left your organization.
        1. McLean & Company's Exit Survey database shows that the top three reasons employees leave on average are:
          1. Opportunities for career advancement
          2. Base pay
          3. Satisfaction with my role and responsibilities
      3. Examine the results and ask:
        • Is there a link between why employees join and leave the organization?
        • Did they cite the same reasons for joining and for leaving?
        • What do the results say about what your employees do and do not value about working at your organization?
      4. Document the resulting insights in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      Example:

      A result where employees are leaving for the same reason they're joining the organization could signal a disconnect between your organization's employee value proposition and the lived experience.

      Revisit your employee value proposition to uncover misalignment

      Your employee value proposition (EVP), formal or informal, communicates the value your organization can offer to prospective employees.

      If your EVP is mismatched with the lived experience of your employees, new hires will be in for a surprise when they start their new job and find out it isn't what they were expecting.

      Forty-six percent of respondents who left a job within 90 days of starting cited a mismatch of expectations about their role ("Job Seeker Nation Study 2020," Jobvite, 2020).

      1. Use the EVP as a filter through which you look at all your employee feedback data. It will help identify misalignment between the promised and the lived experience.
      2. If you have EVP documentation, start there. If not, go to your careers page and put yourself in the shoes of a candidate. Ask what the four elements of an EVP look like for candidates:
        • Compensation and benefits
        • Day-to-day job elements
        • Working conditions
        • Organizational elements
      3. Next, compare this to your own day-to-day experiences. Does it differ drastically? Are there any contradictions with the lived experience at your organization? Are there misleading statements or promises?
      4. Document any insights or patterns you uncover in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      Conduct focus groups to examine themes

      Through focus groups, explore the themes you have uncovered with employees to discover employee needs that are not being met. Addressing these employee needs will be a key aspect of your retention plan.

      Identify employee groups who will participate in focus groups:

      • Incorporate diverse perspectives (e.g. employees, managers, supervisors).
      • Include employees from departments and demographics with strong and weak engagement for a full picture of how engagement impacts your employees.
      • Invite boomerang employees to learn why an individual might return to your organization after leaving.

      image contains two screenshots Mclean & Company's Standard Focus Group Guide.

      Customize Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide based on the themes you have identified in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      The goal of the focus group is to learn from employees and use this information to design or modify a process, system, or other solution that impacts retention.

      Focus questions on the employees' personal experience from their perspective.

      Key things to remember:

      • It is vital for facilitators to be objective.
      • Keep an open mind; no feelings are wrong.
      • Beware of your own biases.
      • Be open and share the reason for conducting the focus groups.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Maintaining an open dialogue with employees will help flesh out the context behind the data you've gathered and allow you to keep in mind that retention is about people first and foremost.

      Empathize with employees to identify moments that matter

      Look for discrepancies between what employees are saying and doing.

      1. Say

      "What words or quotes did the employee use?"

      3.Think

      "What might the employee be thinking?"

      Record feelings and thoughts discussed, body language observed, tone of voice, and words used.

      Look for areas of negative emotion to determine the moments that matter that drive retention.

      2. Do

      "What actions or behavior did the employee demonstrate?"

      4. Feel

      "What might the employee be feeling?"

      Record them in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      5. Identify Needs

      "Needs are verbs (activities or desires), not nouns (solutions)"

      Synthesize focus group findings using Info-Tech's Empathy Map Template.

      6. Identify Insights

      "Ask yourself, why?"

      (Based on Stanford d.school Empathy Map Method)

      Distill employee needs into priority issues to address first

      Take employee needs revealed by your data and focus groups and prioritize three to five needs.

      Select a limited number of employee needs to develop solutions to ensure that the scope of the project is feasible and that the resources dedicated to this project are not stretched too thin. The remaining needs should not be ignored – act on them later.

      Share the needs you identify with stakeholders so they can support prioritization and so you can confirm their buy-in and approval where necessary.

      Ask yourself the following questions to determine your priority employee needs:

      • Which needs will have the greatest impact on turnover?
      • Which needs have the potential to be an easy fix or quick win?
      • Which themes or trends came up repeatedly in different data sources?
      • Which needs evoked particularly strong or negative emotions in the focus groups?

      This image contains screenshots of two table templates found in tab 5 of the Retention Plan Workbook

      In the Retention Plan Workbook, distill employee needs on tab 2 into three to five priorities on tab 5.

      Step 2

      Select Solutions and Create an Action Plan

      After completing this step, you will have:

      • Selected and prioritized solutions to address employee needs.
      • Created a plan to launch stay interviews.
      • Built an action plan to implement solutions.

      Select IT-owned solutions and implement people leader–driven initiatives

      Solutions

      First, select and prioritize solutions to address employee needs identified in the previous step. These solutions will address reasons for turnover that influence employee engagement and moments that matter.

      • Brainstorm solutions using the Retention Solutions Catalog as a starting point. Select a longlist of solutions to address your priority needs.
      • Prioritize the longlist of solutions into a manageable number to act on.

      People leaders

      Next, create a plan to launch stay interviews to increase managers' accountability in improving retention. Managers will be critical to solving issues stemming from turnover triggers.

      • Clarify the importance of harnessing the influence of people leaders in improving retention.
      • Discover what might cause individual employees to leave through stay interviews.
      • Increase trust in managers through training.

      Action plan

      Finally, create an action plan and present to senior leadership for approval.

      Look for these icons in the top right of slides in this step.

      Select solutions to employee needs, starting with the Retention Solutions Catalog

      Based on the priority needs you have identified, use the Retention Solutions Catalog to review best-practice solutions for pain points associated with each stage of the lifecycle.

      Use this tool as a starting point, adding to it and iterating based on your own experience and organizational culture and goals.

      This image contains three screenshots from Info-Tech's Retention Solutions Catalog.

      Use Info-Tech's Retention Solutions Catalog to start the brainstorming process and produce a shortlist of potential solutions that will be prioritized on the next slide.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Unless you have the good fortune of having only a few pain points, no single initiative will completely solve your retention issues. Combine one or two of these broad solutions with people-leader initiatives to ensure employee needs are addressed on an individual and an aggregate level.

      Prioritize solutions to be implemented

      Target efforts accordingly

      Quick wins are high-impact, low-effort initiatives that will build traction and credibility within the organization.

      Long-term initiatives require more time and need to be planned for accordingly but will still deliver a large impact. Review the planning horizon to determine how early these need to begin.

      Re-evaluate low-impact and low-effort initiatives and identify ones that either support other higher impact initiatives or have the highest impact to gain traction and credibility. Look for low-hanging fruit.

      Deprioritize initiatives that will take a high degree of effort to deliver lower-value results.

      When assessing the impact of potential solutions, consider:

      • How many critical segments or employees will this solution affect?
      • Is the employee need it addresses critical, or did the solution encompass several themes in the data you analyzed?
      • Will the success of this solution help build a case for further action?
      • Will the solution address multiple employee needs?

      Info-Tech Insight

      It's better to master a few initiatives than under-deliver on many. Start with a few solutions that will have a measurable impact to build the case for further action in the future.

      Solutions

      Low ImpactMedium ImpactLarge Impact
      Large EffortThis is an image of the used to help you prioritize solutions to be implemented.
      Medium Effort
      Low Effort

      Use tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook to prioritize your shortlist of solutions.

      Harness the influence of people leaders to improve employee retention

      Leaders at all levels have a huge impact on employees.

      Effective people leaders:

      • Manage work distribution.
      • Create a motivating work environment.
      • Provide development opportunities.
      • Ensure work is stimulating and challenging, but not overwhelming.
      • Provide clear, actionable feedback.
      • Recognize team member contributions.
      • Develop positive relationships with their teams.
      • Create a line of sight between what the employee is doing and what the organization's objectives are.

      Support leaders in recommitting to their role as people managers through Learning & Development initiatives with particular emphasis on coaching and building trust.

      For coaching training, see Info-Tech's Build a Better Manager: Team Essentials – Feedback and Coaching training deck.

      For more information on supporting managers to become better people leaders, see Info-Tech's Build a Better Manager: Manage Your People blueprint.

      "HR can't fix turnover. But leaders on the front line can."
      – Richard P. Finnegan, CEO, C-Suite Analytics

      Equip managers to conduct regular stay interviews to address turnover triggers

      Managers often have the most visibility into their employees' personal and work lives and have a key opportunity to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

      Stay interviews are an effective way of uncovering potential retention issues and allowing managers to act as an early warning system for turnover triggers.

      Examples of common turnover triggers and potential manager responses:

      • Moving, creating a long commute to the office.
        • Through stay interviews, a manager can learn that a long commute is an issue and can help find workarounds such as flexible/remote work options.
      • Not receiving an expected promotion.
        • A trusted manager can anticipate issues stemming from this, discuss why the decision was made, and plan development opportunities for future openings.

      Stay interview best practices

      1. Conducted by an employee's direct manager.
      2. Happen regularly as a part of an ongoing process.
      3. Based on the stay interview, managers produce a turnover forecast for each direct report.
        1. The method used by stay interview expert Richard P. Finnegan is simple: red for high risk, yellow for medium, and green for low.
      4. Provide managers with training and a rough script or list of questions to follow.
        1. Use and customize Info-Tech's Stay Interview Guide to provide a guide for managers on how to conduct a stay interview.
      5. Managers use the results to create an individualized retention action plan made up of concrete actions the manager and employee will take.

      Sources: Richard P. Finnegan, CEO, C-Suite Analytics; SHRM

      Build an action plan to implement the retention plan

      For each initiative identified, map out timelines and actions that need to be taken.

      When building actions and timelines:

      • Refer to the priority needs you identified in tab 4 of the Retention Plan Workbook and ensure they are addressed first.
      • Engage internal stakeholders who will be key to the development of the initiatives to ensure they have sufficient time to complete their deliverables.
        • For example, if you conduct manager training, Learning & Development needs to be involved in the development and launch of the program.
      • Include a date to revisit your baseline retention and engagement data in your project milestones.
      • Designate process owners for new processes such as stay interviews.

      Plan for stay interviews by determining:

      • Whether stay interviews will be a requirement for all employees.
      • How much flexibility managers will have with the process.
      • How you will communicate the stay interview approach to managers.
      • If manager training is required.
      • How managers should record stay interview data and how you will collect this data from them as a way to monitor retention issues.
        • For example, managers can share their turnover forecasts and action plans for each employee.

      Be clear about manager accountabilities for initiatives they will own, such as stay interviews. Plan to communicate the goals and timelines managers will be asked to meet, such as when they must conduct interviews or their responsibility to follow up on action items that come from interviews.

      Track project success to iterate and improve your solutions

      Analyze measurements

      • Regularly remeasure your engagement and retention levels to identify themes and trends that provide insights into program improvements.
      • For example, look at the difference in manager relationship score to see if training has had an impact, or look at changes in critical segment turnover to calculate cost savings.

      Revisit employee and manager feedback

      • After three to six months, conduct additional surveys or focus groups to determine the success of your initiatives and opportunities for improvement. Tweak the program, including stay interviews, based on manager and employee feedback.

      Iterate frequently

      • Revisit your initiatives every two or three years to determine if a refresh is necessary to meet changing organizational and employee needs and to update your goals and targets.

      Key insights

      Insight 1Insight 2Insight 3

      Retention and turnover are two sides of the same coin. You can't fix retention without first understanding turnover.

      Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

      Improving retention isn't just about lowering turnover, it's about discovering what healthy retention looks like for your organization.

      Insight 4Insight 5Insight 6

      HR professionals often have insights into where and why retention is an issue. Gathering detailed employee feedback data through surveys and focus groups provides credibility to these insights and is key to building a case for action. Keep an open mind and allow the data to inform your gut feeling, not the other way around.

      Successful retention plans must be owned by both IT leaders and HR.

      IT leaders often have the most visibility into their employees' personal and work lives and have a key opportunity to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

      Stay interviews help managers anticipate potential retention issues on their teams.

      Workshop Overview

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      Info-Tech AnalystsPre-workPost-work
      Client Data Gathering and PlanningImplementation Supported Through Analyst Calls

      1.1 Discuss participants, logistics, overview of workshop activities

      1.2 Provide support to client for below activities through calls.

      2.1 Schedule follow-up calls to work through implementation of retention solutions based on identified needs.
      Client

      1.Gather results of engagement survey, new hire survey, exit survey, and any exit and stay interview feedback.

      2.Gather and analyze turnover data.

      3.Identify key employee segment(s) and identify and organize participants for focus groups.

      4.Complete cost of turnover analysis.

      5.Review turnover data and prioritize list of employee segments.

      1.Obtain senior leader approval to proceed with retention plan.

      2.Finalize and implement retention solutions.

      3.Prepare managers to conduct stay interviews.

      4.Communicate next steps to stakeholders.

      Workshop Overview

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      ActivitiesDay 1Day 2Day 3Day 4
      Assess Current StateConduct Focus GroupsIdentify Needs and Retention InitiativesPrepare to Communicate and Launch

      1.1 Review data to determine why employees join, stay, and leave.

      1.2 Identify common themes.

      1.3 Prepare for focus groups.

      2.1 Conduct four 1-hour focus groups with the employee segment(s) identified in the pre-workshop activities..

      2.2 Info-Tech facilitators independently analyze results of focus groups and group results by theme.

      3.1 Create an empathy map to identify needs

      3.2 Shortlist retention initiatives

      4.1 Select retention initiatives

      4.2 Determine goals and metrics

      4.3 Plan stakeholder communication4.4 Build a high-level action plan

      Deliverables

      1.List of common themes/pain points recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook

      2.Plan for focus groups documented in the Focus Group Guide

      1.Focus group feedback

      2.Focus group feedback analyzed and organized by themes

      1.Employee needs and shortlist of initiatives to address them1.Finalized list of retention initiatives

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit

      “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

      Guided Implementation

      “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

      Workshop

      “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

      Consulting

      “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

      Research Contributors and Experts

      Jeff Bonnell
      VP HR
      Info-Tech Research Group

      Phillip Kotanidis
      CHRO
      Michael Garron Hospital

      Michael McGuire
      Director, Organizational Development
      William Osler Health System

      Dr. Iris Ware
      Chief Learning Officer
      City of Detroit

      Richard P. Finnegan
      CEO
      C-Suite Analytics

      Dr. Thomas Lee
      Professor of Management
      University of Washington

      Jane Moughon
      Specialist in increasing profits, reducing turnover, and maximizing human potential in manufacturing companies

      Lisa Kaste
      Former HR Director
      Citco

      Piyush Mathur
      Head of Workforce Analytics
      Johnson & Johnson

      Gregory P. Smith
      CEO
      Chart Your Course

      Works Cited

      "17 Surprising Statistics about Employee Retention." TINYpulse, 8 Sept. 2020. Web.
      "2020 Job Seeker Nation Study." Jobvite, April 2020. Web.
      "2020 Recruiter Nation Survey." Jobvite, 2020. Web.
      "2020 Retention Report: Insights on 2019 Turnover Trends, Reasons, Costs, & Recommendations." Work Institute, 2020. Web.
      "25 Essential Productivity Statistics for 2021." TeamStage, 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021.
      Agovino, Theresa. "To Have and to Hold." SHRM, 23 Feb. 2019. Web.
      "Civilian Unemployment Rate." Bureau of Labor Statistics, June 2020. Web.
      Foreman, Paul. "The domino effect of chief sales officer turnover on salespeople." Mereo, 19 July 2018. Web.
      "Gross Domestic Product." U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis, 27 May 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2020.
      Kinne, Aaron. "Back to Basics: What is Employee Experience?" Workhuman, 27August 2020. Accessed 21 Jun. 2021.
      Lee, Thomas W, et al. "Managing employee retention and turnover with 21st century ideas." Organizational Dynamics, vol 47, no. 2, 2017, pp. 88-98. Web.
      Lee, Thomas W. and Terence R. Mitchell. "Control Turnover by Understanding its Causes." The Blackwell Handbook of Principles of Organizational Behaviour. 2017. Print.
      McFeely, Shane, and Ben Wigert. "This Fixable Problem Costs U.S. Businesses $1 Trillion." Gallup. 13 March 2019. Web.
      "Table 18. Annual Quit rates by Industry and Region Not Seasonally Adjusted." Bureau of Labor Statistics. June 2021. Web.
      "The 2019 Compensation Best Practices Report: Will They Stay or Will They Go? Employee Retention and Acquisition in an Uncertain Economy." PayScale. 2019. Web.
      Vuleta, Branka. "30 Troubling Employee Retention Statistics." Legaljobs. 1 Feb. 2021. Web.
      "What is a Tenured Employee? Top Benefits of Tenure and How to Stay Engaged as One." Indeed. 22 Feb. 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021.

      Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}68|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $6,499 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 15 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Development
      • Parent Category Link: /development
      • Today’s customers expect a top-tier experience when interacting with businesses.
      • The advancements in IVR technology mean that IT departments are managing added complexity in drafting a strategy for a top-tier IVR approach.
      • Implementing best practices and the right enabling technology stack is critical to supporting world-class customer experience through IVR.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Don’t assume that contact centers and IVR systems are relics of the past. Customers still look to phone calls as being the most effective way to get a fast answer.
      • Tailor your IVR system for your customers. There is no “one-size-fits-all” approach – understand your key customer demographics and support their experience by implementing the most effective strategies for them.
      • Don’t buy best of breed, buy best for you. Base your enabling technology selection on your requirements and use cases, not on the latest industry trends and developments.

      Impact and Result

      • Before selecting and deploying technology solutions, create a database of common customer pain points and FAQs to act as an outline for the call flow tree.
      • Understand and apply operational best practices, such as ensuring proper call menu organization and using self-service applications, to improve IVR metrics and, ultimately, the customer experience.
      • Understand emerging technologies and evolving trends in the IVR space, including natural language processing and integrating your IVR with other essential enterprise applications (e.g. customer relationship management platforms).

      Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Transformative IVR Experience Deck – A deck outlining the best strategies and enabling technologies to implement in your IVR approach to improve your customer experience.

      This storyboard offers insight into impactful strategies and beneficial enabling technologies to implement in your IVR approach to improve your customers’ experience and to reduce the load on your support staff. This deck outlines IT’s role in the IVR development process, offering insight into how to develop an effective IVR call flow and providing details on relevant enabling technologies to consider implementing to further improve your offering.

      • Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers – Phases 1-4

      2. IVR Call Flow Template – A template designed to help you build an effective call flow tree by providing further insight into how to better understand your customers.

      This template demonstrates an ideal IVR approach, outlining a sample call flow for a telecommunications company designed to meet the needs of a curated customer persona. Use this template to gain a better understanding of your own key customers and to construct your own call flow tree.

      • Create an IVR Call Flow That Empowers Your Customers
      [infographic]

      Further reading

      Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

      Learn the strategies that will allow you to develop an effective interactive voice response (IVR) framework that supports self-service and improves customer experience.

      Stop! Are you ready for this project?

      This Research Is Designed For:

      • Business analysts, application directors/managers, and customer service leaders tasked with developing and executing a technology enablement strategy for optimizing their contact center approach.
      • Any organization aiming to improve its customer experience by implementing a customer-centric approach to over-the-phone service via an IVR system.

      This Research Will Help You:

      • Adopt the best strategies for outlining an effective IVR approach and for transforming an existing IVR system.
      • Improve customer experience and ultimately customer satisfaction by enabling you to create a more efficient IVR call flow tree.
      • Select the proper IVR strategies to focus on based on the maturity level of your organization's call center.
      • Review the "art of the possible" and learn of the latest developments in successful IVR execution.
      • Learn IT's role in developing a successful IVR system and in developing a technology strategy that optimizes your IVR approach.

      Executive Summary

      Your Challenge

      • Today's customers expect a top-tier experience when interacting with businesses.
      • The advancements in IVR technology mean that IT departments are managing added complexity in drafting a strategy for a top-tier IVR approach.
      • Implementing best practices and the right enabling technology stack is critical to supporting world-class customer experience through IVR.

      Common Obstacles

      • Many organizations do not have a clear understanding of customers' drivers for contacting their IVR.
      • As many contact centers look to improve the customer experience, the need for an impactful IVR system has markedly increased. The proliferation of recommendations for IVR best practices and related technologies has made it difficult to identify and implement the right approach.
      • With a growing number of IVR-related requests, IT must be prepared to speak intelligently about requirements and the "art of the possible."

      Info-Tech's Approach

      • Before selecting and deploying technology solutions, create a database of common customer call drivers to act as an outline for the call flow tree.
      • Understand and apply operational best practices, such as ensuring proper call menu organization and using self-service applications, to improve IVR metrics and, ultimately, the customer experience.
      • Understand evolving trends and emerging technologies in the IVR space, including offering personalized service and using natural language processing/conversational AI.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Tailor your IVR system specifically for your customers. There is no one-size-fits-all approach. Understand your key customers and support their experience by implementing the most effective strategies for them.

      Voice is still the dominant way in which customers choose to receive support

      Despite the contrary beliefs that the preference for phone support and IVR systems is declining, studies have consistently shown that consumers still prefer receiving customer service over the phone.

      76%

      of customers prefer the "traditional" medium of phone calls to reach customer support agents.

      50%

      of customers across all age groups generally use the phone to contact customer support, making it the most-used customer service channel.

      Your IVR approach can make or break your customers' experience

      The feelings that customers are left with after interacting with contact centers and support lines has a major impact on their future purchase decisions

      Effective IVR systems provide customers with positive experiences, keeping them happy and satisfied. Poorly executed IVR systems leave customers feeling frustrated and contribute to an overall negative experience. Negative experiences with your IVR system could lead to your customers taking their business elsewhere.

      In fact, research by Haptik shows that an average of $262 per customer is lost each year due to poor IVR experiences ("7 Conversational IVR Trends for 2021 and Beyond," Haptik, 2021).

      50%

      of customers have abandoned their business transactions while dealing with an IVR system.

      Source: Vonage, 2020

      45%

      of customers will abandon a business altogether due to a poor IVR experience.

      Source: "7 Remarkable IVR Trends For the Year 2022 And Beyond," Haptik, 2021

      IVR systems only improve your customers' experience when done properly

      There are many common mistakes that organizations make when implementing their own IVR strategies:

      1. Offering too many menu options. IVR systems are supposed to allow customers to resolve their inquiries quickly, so it is integral that you organize your menu effectively. Less is more when it comes to your IVR call flow tree.
      2. A lack of self-service capabilities. IVR systems are meant to maximize customer service and improve the customer experience by offering self-service functionality. If resolutions for common issues can't be found through IVR, your return on investment (ROI) is limited.
      3. Having callers get stuck in an "IVR loop." Customers caught hearing the same information repeatedly will often abandon their call. Don't allow customers to get "tangled" in your call flow tree; always make human contact an option.
      4. Not offering personalized service. The inability to identify customers by their number or other identifying features leads to poor personalization and time wasted repeating information, contributing to an overall negative experience.
      5. Not updating the IVR system. By not taking advantage of new developments in IVR technology and by not using customer and employee feedback to upgrade your offering, you are missing out on the potential to improve your customers' experience. Complacency kills, and your organization will be at a competitive disadvantage because of it.

      Implement a transformative IVR approach that empowers your customers

      Call flow trees don't grow overnight; they require commitment, nurturing, and care

      1. Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree
        • Your call flow tree will only grow as strong as the roots allow it; begin beneath the surface by understanding the needs of your customers and the goals of your organization first, before building your initial IVR menu.
      2. Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out
        • Empower your customers by directing your call flow tree to self-service applications where possible and to live agents when necessary.
      3. Let Your Call Flow Tree Flourish
        • Integrate your IVR with other relevant business applications and apply technological developments that align with the needs of your customers and the goals of your organization.
      4. Keep Watering Your Call Flow Tree
        • Don't let your call flow tree die! Elicit feedback from relevant stakeholders and develop an iterative review cycle to identify and implement necessary changes to your call flow tree, ensuring continued growth.

      IT plays an integral role in supporting the IVR approach

      IT is responsible for providing technology enablement of the IVR strategy

      While IT may not be involved in organizing the call flow tree itself, their impact on an organization's IVR approach is undeniable. Not only will IT assist with the implementation and integration of your IVR system, they will also be responsible for maintaining the technology on an ongoing basis. As such, IT should be a part of your organization's software selection team, following Info-Tech's methodology for optimizing your software selection process.

      • With an understanding of the organization's customer experience management strategy and business goals, IT should be looked toward to:
      • Provide insight into the "art of the possible" with IVR systems.
      • Recommend enabling technologies relative to your call center's maturity (e.g. agent assist and natural language processing).
      • Outline integration capabilities with your existing application portfolio.
      • Highlight any security concerns.
      • Assist with vendor engagement.
      • Take part in stakeholder feedback groups, consulting with agents about their pain points and attempting to solve their problems.

      Guided Implementation

      What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish Keep Watering Your Call Flow Tree

      Call #1: Introduce the project, scoping customer call drivers and defining metrics of success.

      Call #3: Discuss the importance of promoting self-service and how to improve call routing processes, assessing the final tiers of the IVR.

      Call #4: Discuss the benefits of integrating your IVR within your existing business architecture and using relevant enabling technologies.

      Call #5: Discuss how to elicit feedback from relevant stakeholders and develop an iterative IVR review cycle, wrapping up the project.

      Call #2: Begin assessing initial IVR structure.

      A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series

      of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

      A typical GI is 5 to 7 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

      Phase 1

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      Phase 1

      Phase 2

      Phase 3

      Phase 4

      1.1 Understand your customers

      1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

      1.3 Align goals with KPIs

      1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

      2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

      2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

      3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

      3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

      4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

      4.2 Create an agile review method

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      • Building a database of your customers' call drivers
      • Developing IVR-related goals and connecting them with your key performance indicators (KPIs)
      • Developing the first tier of your IVR menu

      This phase involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

      Step 1.1

      Understand Your Customers

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      1.1.1 Build a database of the reasons why your customers call your contact center

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • List of your customers' call drivers

      Help your customers get to where they need to go

      Understand which questions customers need answered the most and organize your IVR menu accordingly

      • With any IVR system, your primary focus should be creating a simple, easily navigated call flow. You not only want your customers to be able to find the solutions that they are looking for, but you want them to be able to do so easily and quickly.
      • In order to direct customers more efficiently, you need to understand why they're motivated to call your contact center. This will be different for every organization, so it requires a deeper understanding of your customers.
      • After understanding the motivators behind your customers' reasons for calling, you'll be able to organize your call flow tree effectively.
      • Assign the most popular reasons that customers call first in your IVR call flow. Organizing your call flow in such a way will ensure a quicker turn around time for customer inquiries, providing callers with the immediate resolution that they are seeking.

      "Call flows are the structure of a call center's interactive voice response (IVR). They define the path a caller takes to reach a resolution. The more efficient the flow, the quicker a resolution can be – thereby delivering a better caller experience."

      Thomas Randall, Ph.D.
      Senior Research Analyst
      Info-Tech Research Group

      1.1.1 Activity: Build a list of the most common reasons that your key customers call your contact center

      30 minutes

      1. As a group, review the reasons that customers call your contact center. This includes reviewing which questions are asked most frequently, what services are most often inquired about, and what pain points and complaints live agents hear most regularly.
      2. Organize each call driver from most to least popular based on how often they are heard.
      3. Record your findings.
      Input Output
      • List of common customer questions
      • List of common customer pain points/complaints
      • Database of customer call drivers
      Materials Participants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team
      • Customer service leaders/live agents

      Info-Tech Insight

      To understand why your customers are calling, first you need to know who your customers are. Improve your caller understanding by creating customer personas.

      1.1.1 Activity: Build a list of the most common reasons that your key customers call your contact center

      Example

      Customer Call Drivers
      Need to pay a bill
      Complaints about an outage to their service
      Inquiry about new plans
      Need to update account information
      Complaints about their last bill

      Step 1.2

      Develop Goals for Your IVR

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      1.2.1 Outline IVR-related goals relevant to your organization.

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Goals for your organizational IVR

      Create IVR-related goals you wish for your organization to achieve

      Organizations across different industries will measure success in a multitude of ways; develop goals that are relevant to your needs and desires

      Based on your customer experience strategy and what industry you're in, the goals that you aim to accomplish will look different. A doctor's office will be more concerned with an accurate diagnosis and high first call resolution rate than low average talk time!

      Setting business goals relevant to your organization is only half of the battle; it's just as important to hold your organization accountable to those goals and measure your continued progress toward meeting them.

      1.2.1 Activity: Brainstorm a list of goals that you would like your organization to achieve when optimizing your IVR approach

      30 minutes

      1. In two to three groups, brainstorm goals related to your IVR that are relevant to your organization.
      2. Classify these goals as being either quick wins or part of a longer-term engagement based on the time they would take to accomplish.
      3. Introduce your goals to the entire group, coming to an agreement on the top goals that the organization should aim to achieve through implementing a new/transformed IVR approach.
      InputOutput
      • Customer experience strategy
      • Desired IVR-related achievements
      • Organizational IVR goals
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team

      1.2.1 Activity: Brainstorm a list of goals that you would like your organization to achieve when optimizing your IVR approach

      Example

      Goal Designation
      Lower the average queue time Quick win
      Lower call abandonment rate Quick win
      Lower customer attrition Long-term
      Lower employee attrition Long-term
      Increase average speed of answer Quick win

      Step 1.3

      Align Your Goals With Your KPIs

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      1.3.1 Review your organizational IVR goals and connect them with your key performance indicators (KPIs)

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Metrics used to measure organizational success related to your IVR

      Ensure you are using the proper metrics for measuring the success of your call flow tree

      You won't know if your IVR is operating successfully if you don't know what success looks like for you. It is important to align your contact center KPIs with your business goals so you can hold your IVR system accountable.

      Example

      Metric Description Current Score Target Score [Date/Year]
      First call resolution
      Average abandonment rate
      Customer attrition
      Employee attrition
      Average queue time
      Service level
      Average speed of answer
      Average handle time
      Average call transfer rate
      Average talk time
      Customer self-service resolution
      Agent satisfaction
      Customer satisfaction

      1.3.1 Activity: Develop KPIs for your contact center and connect them to your organization's business goals

      30 minutes

      1. As a group, establish the metrics or KPIs that will be used to measure your progress against the organizational IVR goals created in Activity 1.2.1.
      2. Take note of your current score for each of your organizational goals and determine your target score.
      3. Attach a deadline or target date by which you would like to reach your target score. Target dates can vary based on whether your goal is classified as a quick win or part of a longer-term engagement.
      InputOutput
      • Organizational IVR goals
      • KPIs
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team

      Step 1.4

      Build Your Initial IVR Menu

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      1.4.1 Develop the first tier of your IVR menu, determining the initial selections that customers will have to choose from

      Focus on the Roots of Your Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Tier one of your IVR call flow tree

      Keep your IVR concise – minimize the length of your voice prompts and limit the depth of your menus

      You don't want to overload your customers with information. Providing your callers with overly detailed prompts and too many menu options will only lead to frustration, ultimately diminishing both the efficiency and the effectiveness of your IVR. Limiting the length of your voice prompts and the depth of your menus will lay out a clear path for your callers, increasing the likelihood that they are able to navigate your IVR accurately.

      Each of your IVR menus should provide your customers with no more than five selections.

      Your IVR should offer a maximum of three menu tiers.

      Each of your selection "descriptions" or voice prompts should be no longer than four seconds in length.

      Info-Tech Insight

      According to a study by Telzio (2020), introductory IVR messages that greet your customers and identify your company should be under 7.9 seconds in length. Longer introductions will only bore, frustrate, and overload the customer before the call really even begins.

      When developing your voice prompts, it is integral to speak clearly using simple and easily understood language

      • Speak clearly and stay away from industry-specific jargon to ensure that your voice prompts are widely understood by your customer base. This will allow callers to digest the information relayed through your IVR more accurately.
      • Part of increasing the retention of information communicated through your IVR is also ensuring that sufficient pauses are taken between each of your voice prompts. Just as you want to avoid overloading your customers with voice prompts that are too long and too detailed, you also want to give your callers adequate time to process the information that is being relayed to them.
      • Improving the ease of listening to your IVR will reduce the risk of overwhelming your callers and will increase the likelihood that they are able to follow along appropriately, directing themselves down the proper call flow.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Securing voice talent and be expensive and cumbersome. Consider using an automated voice through a text-to-speech solution for your prompts. This will ensure that all your prompts are consistent throughout your menus, and it also makes it significantly easier to provide crucial updates within your IVR system.

      When sufficient pauses are taken between menu options, input errors can be reduced by over…

      Source: Ansafone Contact Centers, 2019

      1.4.1 Activity: Begin building your call flow tree by developing the initial selections that customers will choose from when dialing into your IVR

      30 minutes

      1. Review the database of customer call drivers completed in Activity 1.1.1 to create the opening menu of your IVR call flow tree.
      2. Limit your selections/prompts to a maximum of five by grouping related questions, services, and complaints/pain points into broad categories.
      3. Organize your selections/prompts according to how often customers call in relating to that topic.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Remember: You don't need five selections! That is the maximum recommended number of prompts to use and will most likely be reserved for more complex call flows. More isn't always better. If you can limit your initial menu to fewer selections, then do so.

      InputOutput
      • Database of customer call drivers
      • Initial IVR menu
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team

      1.4.1 Activity: Begin building your call flow tree by developing the initial selections that customers will choose from when dialing into your IVR

      Example

      IVR Initial Greeting

      1. For Billing and Payments

      2. To Report an Outage

      3. To Make Changes to Your Plan or Account

      Phase 2

      Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

      Phase 1

      Phase 2

      Phase 3

      Phase 4

      1.1 Understand your customers

      1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

      1.3 Align goals with KPIs

      1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

      2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

      2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

      3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

      3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

      4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

      4.2 Create an agile review method

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      • Completing the second tier of your call flow tree
      • Completing the third and final tier of your call flow tree

      This phase involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

      Step 2.1

      Build the Second Tier of Your IVR Menu

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      • 2.1.1 Complete the second tier of your call flow tree, branching out from your initial menu

      Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Tier 2 of your IVR call flow tree

      An IVR system should empower your customers to solve problems on their own

      Integrate business applications into your IVR menus to enable self-service capabilities and automate processes where possible

      • An IVR system should assist your customer service team while also empowering your customers. This can be accomplished through offering self-service and using automated messaging via a broadcast messaging system.
      • Some common self-service practices include providing callers with the ability to check credit card statements, pay bills, and track shipments.
      • Automated messaging can be used to address common customer questions. For instance, if a company-wide issue exists, an automated message can outline the issue and highlight the approximate time for resolution, providing customers with the answer they were seeking while eliminating the need to speak to a live agent. This technique is commonly practiced by internet providers during outages.
      • Providing callers with the opportunity to find a resolution for themselves through self-service and automated messaging not only improves the customer experience but also frees up your customer service team for more pressing matters.

      73%

      of customers want to be provided with the ability to solve issues on their own.

      67%

      of customers prefer to use self-service options over speaking with a customer service representative.

      Source: Raffle, 2020

      2.1.1 Activity: Grow your call flow tree! Begin branching out from your initial menu options and develop the second tier of your IVR system

      30 minutes

      1. Branch out from your initial IVR menu created in Activity 1.4.1. Get more specific in your prompts, branching out from the general groupings you have created.
      2. Consult with your database of customer call drivers created in Activity 1.1.1 to organize your subgroupings, again prioritizing the services most sought and the questions, complaints, and pain points most frequently heard.
      3. Limit each subsection to a maximum of five prompts.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Always provide your callers with the option to go back to a previous menu or to have menu options repeated.

      InputOutput
      • Database of customer call drivers
      • Initial IVR menu
      • Second IVR menu
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team

      2.1.1 Activity: Grow your call flow tree! Begin branching out from your initial menu options and develop the second tier of your IVR system

      Example

      This is an image of the sample flow tree from Activity 2.1.1


      Step 2.2

      Build the Third Tier of Your IVR Menu

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      2.2.1 Complete your call flow tree by branching out your third and final tier of menu options.

      Allow Customers the Opportunity to Branch Out

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Third and final tier of your IVR call flow tree

      Provide your callers with the option to speak to a live agent – but not too soon

      While promoting self-service and automating certain processes will improve the functionality of your IVR, it is also important to realize that some issues will ultimately require human intervention. An effective IVR system harmonizes these concepts by making human contact an option, but not too early in the process. You need to find the right balance!

      When organizing your IVR call flow tree, you need to be conscious of sending clients in an endless "IVR loop." You should never have your IVR continually repeat its menu options. Customers will abandon an IVR if they are stuck in an IVR loop, being forced to listen to the same information repeatedly without having a way to reach an agent.

      If a problem cannot be solved within three steps or by the third tier of your IVR menus, callers should be provided with the option to speak to a live agent, if not automatically routed to one. By providing your callers with the option to speak to a live agent on the third tier of your IVR, you are still offering ample time for customers to discover an avenue to solve their issue on their own through self-service, without frustrating them by losing them in an endless loop of IVR options.

      30%

      of customers say that not being able to reach a human agent is the most frustrating aspect of a poor customer service experience.

      Source: ProProfs Chat, 2022

      Info-Tech Insight

      Consider routing callers to a live agent not only on the third tier of your IVR menus but also after three input errors. Multiple input errors can show an eagerness to speak to a representative or a strong misunderstanding of the IVR offering.

      How you direct a customer to a live agent can make all the difference

      Don't think that just offering your customers the option to speak to a live agent is enough. When aiming to significantly improve your customers' experience, how you direct calls to your live agents plays a major role. When a call is being directed to a live agent, be sure to:

      • Optimize your call routing and minimize call transfers. Use skills-based routing to direct your incoming client calls to the most suitable agent to resolve their issue. Inaccurately routing callers through your IVR leads to having to transfer the customer to another agent, which is a major contributor to a negative customer experience.
      • Include wait-time expectations and call-back functionality. There is no denying it: Waiting on hold can be a real pain. If a customer needs to go on hold, inform them of where they are in the queue and what the approximate wait time is. A little transparency can go a long way. You should also provide customers with the option to have a representative call them back. This greatly improves the customer experience, particularly when wait times are long.
      • Play useful on-hold messages. If a customer does decide to wait on the line to speak to a representative, ensure your on-hold messaging doesn't negatively impact their experience. Always have multiple songs and messages available to cycle through to limit customer annoyance. For on-hold messages, consider mentioning self-service capabilities available on other channels or providing company news and information on special promotions. Know your key customer demographics and plan your on-hold messaging accordingly.

      72%

      of customers view having to talk to multiple agents as poor customer service.

      Source: ProProfs Chat, 2022

      33%

      of customers highlight waiting on hold as being their biggest frustration.

      Source: EmailAnalytics, 2022

      2.2.1 Activity: Complete your call flow tree!

      30 minutes

      1. Branch out from the second tier of your IVR call flow tree created in Activity 2.1.1, connecting relevant prompts with self-service applications and automated responses. Keep in mind, most of your frequently asked questions can and should be directed toward an automated response.
      2. Direct all remaining prompts to a live agent, ensuring each selection from your second-tier menu is capped off appropriately.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Remember: Your IVR system doesn't live in isolation. The information offered by your IVR, particularly from automated messages, should be consistent with information found within other resources (e.g. online knowledge bases).

      InputOutput
      • Tier 1 and 2 of your IVR menus
      • Completed IVR call flow
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project team

      2.2.1 Activity: Complete your call flow tree!

      Example

      This is an image of the sample flow tree from Activity 2.2.1

      Phase 3

      Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

      Phase 1

      Phase 2

      Phase 3

      Phase 4

      1.1 Understand your customers

      1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

      1.3 Align goals with KPIs

      1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

      2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

      2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

      3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

      3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

      4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

      4.2 Create an agile review method

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      • Reviewing the benefits of offering personalized service
      • Reviewing new technologies offered in the IVR space

      This phase involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

      Step 3.1

      Learn the Benefits of a Personalized IVR

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      3.1.1 Review the benefits of offering personalized service, namely by connecting your IVR system with your customer knowledge base

      Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Understanding the importance of offering personalized service

      Personalizing service is integral for improving your customer experience

      Integrate your IVR system with your customer relationship management (CRM) system or customer knowledge base of choice to provide support to your customers on a personal level.

      The integration of your IVR system with your CRM or other applicable knowledge base allows for customer data (e.g. customer history and previous interactions) to be accessible to your staff during calls. Access to this data allows for a deeper understanding of your customers and for personalization of service. This provides immediate benefits to your contact center that will improve your customer experience.

      When you inevitably do need to transfer a customer to another agent, they won't have to repeat their issue to a new representative, as all their information will now be easily accessible. Being forced to repeat themselves to multiple agents is a major cause of frustration for customers. This integration would also allow you to route callers to the previous agent that they dealt with whenever possible for the purpose of continuity, and it would enable you to implement other beneficial technologies as well.

      One such example is "agent assist." Agent assist is an AI bot that listens in on calls, learning customer context and automatically searching knowledge bases to help resolve queries without the agent having to put the caller on hold to manually perform that work themselves. Not only does agent assist improve customer resolution times, but it also ramps up onboarding time, allowing for new agents to enter the workforce and perform with confidence earlier.

      76%

      of consumers expect personalized experiences.

      71%

      of customers expect internal collaboration so that they don't have to repeat themselves.

      Source: Zendesk, 2019

      Personalization can empower your IVR in many ways

      Personalizing your IVR does much more than just provide your customer service representatives with conversational context. Personalization enables your IVR to recognize callers by their phone number, or even by voice via biometric authentication technologies.

      This advanced level of recognition allows your IVR to greet your callers by name, speak to them in their preferred language, send follow-up correspondence to their preferred method of communication (i.e. email or SMS), and even provide them with contact numbers and addresses for your organization's physical locations that are closest to them.

      An example of a more advanced functionality is having your IVR call flow personalized for each customer based on their call history. As customers call in, their data is collected, ultimately improving your IVR's ability to predict and understand caller intent. This makes personalized call flows possible. If customers typically call in to make payments, your IVR can logically deduce that their next call will be for the same reason, and it will alter the call menu to direct them to that functionality more efficiently.

      Step 3.2

      Review New Technology to Apply to Your IVR

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      3.2.1 Review new technologies offered in the IVR space and understand their impact

      Let Your IVR Call Flow Tree Flourish

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Understanding of key technologies

      Let your customers tell you exactly what they need

      Use natural language processing and conversational AI to further advance your IVR offering

      Instead of making your customers work their way through your call flow tree to find out what they need, why not just ask them? Conversational IVR, also known as an "intuitive IVR system," makes this possible.

      Think Google Assistant, Siri, and Alexa. Your customers can simply tell you what they need and your conversational IVR, using the advancements in natural language processing and conversational AI, will take it from there, directing callers to the resources needed to resolve their issues.

      Powerful enough to understand full sentences and not just select words or phrases, the increased intelligence of a conversational IVR system allows it to handle complex customer inquiries. Leveraging machine learning capabilities, the system will only continue to improve its ability to understand caller intent, ultimately leading to increased call routing accuracy as it fields more and more calls.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Remember: Your customers want fast and easy, not overwhelming and confusing. Some customers who are greeted with an open-ended question from a conversational IVR may not be sure how to respond.

      Understand your key customer demographics and act accordingly. It may be beneficial to provide your callers with guidelines of what to say. Outlining appropriate responses that will guide your customers to their desired department quicker will boost their experience with your conversational IVR.

      There are a lot of benefits to implementing a conversational IVR

      • Putting your callers in control and offering a more humanized approach, conversational IVRs are the preferred first point of contact for customers.
      • Conversational IVRs reduce the time required to reach resolution and can handle more calls than a standard IVR.
      • Conversational IVRs allow for the collection of more relevant data. By not limiting callers to predetermined menu options, you can track the reasons behind customers' calls with more accuracy, using this data to drive future IVR developments.
      • Conversational IVRs are more cost-effective than standard IVRs. According to a report by IBM, companies world-wide spend over $1.3 trillion to address 256 billion customer calls annually. This means that each call a live agent addresses costs an average of $30 (Cognigy, 2020). With a conversational IVR, that cost can be reduced to one-eighth (ETCIO.com, 2020).
      • Conversational IVRs can be handle calls in multiple languages, offering improved scalability for companies operating multi-nationally.

      60%

      of callers will bypass the pre-recorded messages in a standard IVR to reach a human voice.

      Source: Cognigy, 2020

      66%

      of requests can be resolved faster by a conversational IVR than by a live agent.

      Source: Cognigy, 2020

      Despite this, only...

      28%

      of IVR systems contacted use voice response as their primary input method.

      Source: Telzio, 2020

      How do you know if a conversational IVR is right for your organization?

      Large, enterprise-level organizations that field a high volume of customer calls are more likely to receive the benefits and higher ROI from implementing a conversational IVR

      Instead of updating the entire IVR system and implementing a conversational IVR, smaller and mid-level organizations should consider attaching a natural language processing front-end to their existing IVR. Through this, you will be able to reap a lot of the same benefits you would if you were to upgrade to a conversational IVR.

      You can attach a natural language processing front-end to your existing IVR in two ways.

      1. Use an API to recognize your customer's voice prompts. Greet your customers with a question, such as "what is your reason for calling," as your initial IVR menu, and when your customer answers, their response will be sent to your selected API (Amazon Lex, IBM Watson, Google Dialogflow, etc.). The API will then process the customer's input and direct the caller to the appropriate branch of your call flow tree.
      2. Use a conversational AI platform to field your calls. Implement a conversational AI platform to be the first point of contact for your customers. After receiving and analyzing the input from your customers, the platform would then route your callers to your current IVR system and to the appropriate menu, whether that be to an automated message, a self-service application, or a live agent.

      Phase 4

      Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

      Phase 1

      Phase 2

      Phase 3

      Phase 4

      1.1 Understand your customers

      1.2 Develop goals for your IVR

      1.3 Align goals with KPIs

      1.4 Build your initial IVR menu

      2.1 Build the second tier of your IVR menu

      2.2 Build the third tier of your IVR menu

      3.1 Learn the benefits of a personalized IVR

      3.2 Review new technology to apply to your IVR

      4.1 Gather insights on your IVR's performance

      4.2 Create an agile review method

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      • Understanding the importance of receiving feedback from relevant stakeholders and the best practices for obtaining feedback
      • Understanding the best practices for developing an ongoing review cycle

      This phase involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Implement a Transformative IVR Approach That Empowers Your Customers

      Step 4.1

      Gather Insights on Your IVR's Performance

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      4.1.1 Understand the importance of receiving feedback and review the best methods for obtaining it from your clients.

      Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Understanding of the importance of receiving feedback and how to obtain it from customers

      Elicit feedback from your employees and from your customers

      Your live agents are on the proverbial front lines, fielding calls from customers daily. As such, they are the prime stakeholders for knowing what kinds of calls the organization receives and how often. Their input on the most frequent reasons that customers call, whether it be to address common pain points or to have FAQs answered, is invaluable. Ask them regularly for their feedback on how the IVR system is performing and which updates should be implemented.

      While improving the agent experience is a driver behind adopting an IVR system, the focus should always be improving your customer experience. So why wouldn't you ask your customers for their feedback on your IVR offering? Most customers don't only want to be asked to provide feedback, they expect to be asked. Have your agents ask your customers directly about their experience with your IVR or use the functions of your IVR to offer automated end-of-call surveys.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Many IVR systems are capable of recording calls. Listening back on previous calls is another great way to further understand how your IVR is performing, and it also can provide a glimpse into your customers' experience.

      Surveys provide great insight into your customers' level of satisfaction – not only with your IVR but also with your live agents

      Customer satisfaction score (CSAT) is a great way to determine how happy callers are with their experiences with your organization. CSAT surveys ask your clients outright how satisfied they are with their recent interaction and have them rate your service on a scale. While straightforward, the feedback received from CSAT surveys is more general and can lack depth.

      For more detailed responses, consider asking your clients an open-ended question as opposed to using a rating scale. This will provide you with a more specific understanding of your customers' experience. For this, an IVR system that supports voice transcription is best. Automated speech-to-text functionality will ensure rapid results.

      Another option is to offer a survey that includes skip logic. These multi-tiered surveys, much like an IVR call flow tree, direct your callers to different follow-up questions based on their previous answers. While capable of providing more insight into the customer experience, these surveys are only recommended for more complex service offerings.

      Customer feedback is vitally important

      Asking for feedback makes your callers feel valued, and it also provides your organization with extremely useful information – including an understanding of what you may need to change within your IVR

      90%

      of consumers believe that organizations should provide them with the opportunity to give customer feedback.

      Source: SmallBizGenius, 2022

      41%

      of customer support professionals say that CSAT is their team's most important KPI.

      Source: Hiver, 2022

      Step 4.2

      Create an Agile Review Method

      This step will walk you through the following activity:

      4.2.1 Understand the best practices for developing an ongoing review cycle for your IVR approach

      Keep Watering Your IVR Call Flow Tree

      This step involves the following participants:

      • Business stakeholders (business analysts, application director/manager, customer service leaders)
      • IT project team

      Outcomes of this step

      • Understanding of the importance of IVR maintenance and of the development of an iterative review cycle

      Create an agile review method to continually enhance your call flows

      • Track items
        • Elicit feedback from your key stakeholders (i.e. live agents) as part of a regular review – every month, two months, six months, or year – of your call flow tree's efficiency. Delve into the feedback elicited from your customers at the same intervals. Look for patterns and trends and record items accordingly.
      • Manage backlog
        • Store and organize your recorded items into a backlog, prioritizing items to implement in order of importance. This could be structured by way of identifying which items are a quick win vs. which items are part of a more strategic and long-term implementation.
      • Perform iteration
        • Record key metric scores and communicate the changes you have planned to stakeholders before you implement items. Then, make the change.
      • Be retrospective
        • Examine the success of the implementation by comparing your metric scores from before and after the change. Record instances where performing similar changes could be carried out better in future iterations.

      Summary of Accomplishment

      • Knowledge Gained
        • Benefits of enabling personalized service
        • IVR-enabling technologies
        • Methods of eliciting feedback
      • Processes Optimized
        • IVR voice prompt creation
        • IVR voice prompt organization
        • IVR review cycles
      • Deliverables Completed
        • Database of customer call drivers
        • Organizational IVR goals and KPIs
        • IVR call flow tree

      Related Info-Tech Research

      This is a picture of a hand holding a cellular phone

      Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

      • IT needs a method to pinpoint which contact center solution best aligns with business objectives, adapting to a post-COVID-19 world of remote work, flexibility, and scalability.
      This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management.

      Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management

      • Customer expectations around personalization, channel preferences, and speed-to-resolution are at an all-time high. Your customers are willing to pay more for high-value experiences, and having a strong customer experience management (CXM) strategy is a proven path to creating sustainable value for the organization.
      This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's IT Strategy Research Center

      IT Strategy Research Center

      • Create an IT strategy based on business needs, not just intuition.
      This image contains a screenshot from Info-tech's SoftwareReviews blueprint.

      SoftwareReviews

      • Accelerate and improve your software selection process with enterprise software reviews. Focus on available resources for communications platform as a service providers and conversational intelligence software.

      Bibliography

      "7 Conversational IVR Trends for 2021 and Beyond." Haptik, 25 March 2021. Accessed 16 June 2022.
      "7 Remarkable IVR Trends For the Year 2022 And Beyond." Haptik, 30 Dec. 2021. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      "8 IVR Strategies that Keep Customers Happy." Ansafone Contact Centers, 31 May 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      "Agent Assist." Speakeasy AI, 19 April 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      "AI chatbot that's easy to use." IBM, n.d. Accessed 21 June 2022.
      "IVR Trends to Watch in 2020 and Beyond: Inside CX." Intrado, 1 May 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      "RIP IVR: 1980-2020." Vonage, 2 June 2020. Accessed 16 June 2022.
      Andrea. "What do Customers Want? – 37 Customer Service Statistics." SmallBizGenius, 17 March 2022. Accessed 24 May 2022.
      Anthony, James. "106 Customer Service Statistics You Must See: 2021/2022 Data & Analysis." FinancesOnline, 14 Jan. 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      Brown, James. "14 stats that prove the importance of self-service in customer service." raffle, 13 Oct. 2020. Accessed 17 June 2022.
      Buesing, Eric, et al. "Getting the best customer service from your IVR: Fresh eyes on an old problem." McKinsey & Company, 1 Feb. 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      Callari, Ron. "IVR Menus and Best Practices." Telzio, 4 Sep. 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      Cornell, Jared. "104 Customer Service Statistics & Facts of 2022." ProProfs Chat, 6 April 2022. Accessed 16 June 2022.
      DeCarlo, Matthew. "18 Common IVR Mistakes & How To Configure Effective IVR." GetVoIP, 13 June 2019. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      DeMers, Jayson. "77 Customer Service Statistics to Know." EmailAnalytics, 23 March 2022. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      Frants, Valeriy. Interview. Conducted by Austin Wagar, 22 June 2022.
      Grieve, Patrick. "Personalized customer service: what it is and how to provide it." Zendesk, 28 June 2019. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      "How Natural Language Processing Can Help Your Interactive Voice Response System Meet Best Practice." Hostcomm, 15 July 2019. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      "IVR and customer experience: get the best UX for your clients." Kaleyra, 14 Dec. 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      Irvine, Bill. "Selecting an IVR System for Customer Satisfaction Surveys." IVR Technology Group, 14 April 2020. Accessed 22 June 2022.
      Kulbyte, Toma. "Key Customer Experience Statistics to Know." SuperOffice, 24 June 2021. Accessed 24 May 2022.
      Leite, Thiago. "What's the Difference Between Standard & Conversational IVR?" Cognigy, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 24 May 2022.
      Maza, Cristina. "What is IVR? The ultimate guide." Zendesk, 30 Sep. 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      McCraw, Corey. "What is IVR Call Flow? Benefits, Features, Metrics & More." GetVoIP, 30 April 2020. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      Mircevski, Bruno. "Smart IVR Introduction – What Is It and Why You Should Use It." Ideta, 7 March 2022. Accessed 28 April 2022.
      Oriel, Astha. "Artificial Intelligence in IVR: A Step Towards Faster Customer Services." Analytics Insight, 19 Aug. 2020. Accessed 24 May 2022.
      Perzynska, Kasia. "What is CSAT & How to Measure Customer Satisfaction?" Survicate, 9 March 2022. Accessed 22 June 2022.
      Pratt, Mary K. "How to set business goals, step by step." TechTarget, 27 April 2022. Accessed 21 June 2022.
      Robinson, Kerry. "Insight of the Week: Make Your IVR More Like Alexa." Waterfield Tech, 20 April 2022. Accessed 25 April 2022.
      Sehgal, Karishma. "Exclusive Research – 76% of customer service teams offer support outside of business hours." Hiver, 4 May 2022. Accessed 22 June 2022.
      Smith, Mercer. "111 Customer Service Statistics and Facts You Shouldn't Ignore." Help Scout, 23 May 2022. Accessed 24 June 2022.
      Thompson, Adrian. "A Guide to Conversational IVR." The Bot Forge, 27 Jan. 2021. Accessed 21 June 2022.
      Tolksdorf, Juergen. " 5 Ways to Leverage AI and Agent-Assist to Improve Customer Experience." Genesys, 19 May 2020. Accessed 27 April 2022.
      Vaish, Aakrit. "5 ways conversational IVR is helping businesses revolutionize customer service." ETCIO.com, 20 March 2020. Web.
      Westfall, Leah. "Improving customer experience with the right IVR strategy." RingCentral, 23 July 2021. Accessed 25 April 2022.

      Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}441|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
      • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
      • As portfolio manager, you oversee a portfolio made up of projects using different types of planning and execution methodologies – from traditional Waterfall, to Agile, to hybrid approaches and beyond. The discontinuity between reporting metrics and funding models makes a holistic and perpetually actionable view of the portfolio elusive.
      • Agile’s influence is growing within the organization’s project ecosystem. Even projects that don’t formally use Agile methods often adopt agile tendencies, such as mitigating risk with shorter, more iterative development cycles and increasing collaboration with stakeholders. While this has introduced efficiencies at the project level, it has not translated into business agility, with decision makers still largely playing a passive role in terms of steering the portfolio.
      • Senior management still expects traditional commitments and deadlines, not “sprints” and “velocity.” The reluctance of many Agile purists to adhere to traditional timeline, budget, and scope commitments is not making Agile a particularly popular conversation topic among the organization’s decision-making layer.
      • As portfolio manager, it’s your job to unify these two increasingly fragmented worlds into a unified portfolio.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • As Agile’s influence grows and project methodologies morph and proliferate, a more engaged executive layer is required than what we see in a traditional portfolio approach. Portfolio owners have to decide what gets worked on at a regular cadence.
      • What’s the difference? In the old paradigm, nobody stopped the portfolio owners from approving too much. Decisions were based on what should be done, rather than what could get done in a given period, with the resources available.
      • The engaged portfolio succeeds by making sure that the right people work on the right things as much as possible. The portfolio owner plays a key, ongoing role in identifying the work that needs to be done, and the portfolio managers optimize the usage of resources.

      Impact and Result

      • Establish universal control points. While the manager of a mixed methodology portfolio doesn’t need to enforce a standardized project methodology, she or he does need to establish universal control points for both intake and reporting at the portfolio level. Use this research to help you define a sustainable process that will work for all types of projects.
      • Scale the approvals process. For a mixed methodology portfolio to work, the organization needs to reconcile different models for approving and starting projects. This blueprint will help you define a right-sized intake process and decision-making paradigm for sprints and project phases alike.
      • Foster ongoing executive engagement. Mixed methodology success is contingent on regular and ongoing executive engagement. Use the tools and templates associated with this blueprint to help get buy-in and commitment upfront, and then to build out portfolio reports and dashboard that will help keep the executive layer informed and engaged long term.

      Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should consider an Engaged Agile Portfolio approach, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Get portfolio commitments

      Assess the current state of the portfolio and ensure that portfolio owners and other stakeholders are onboard before you move forward to develop and implement new portfolio processes.

      • Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio – Phase 1
      • Mixed Methodology Portfolio Analyzer
      • Mixed Methodology Portfolio Strategy Template
      • Mixed Methodology Portfolio Stakeholder Survey Tool

      2. Define your portfolio processes

      Wireframe standardized portfolio processes for all project methodologies to follow.

      • Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio – Phase 2
      • Agile Portfolio Sprint Prioritization Tool
      • Project Methodology Assessment Tool

      3. Implement your processes

      Pilot your new portfolio processes and decision-making paradigm. Then, execute a change impact analysis to inform your communications strategy and implementation plan.

      • Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio – Phase 3
      • Process Pilot Plan Template
      • Intake and Prioritization Impact Analysis Tool
      • Resource Management Impact Analysis Tool
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Unify a Mixed Methodology Portfolio

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Assess Current State of the Portfolio

      The Purpose

      Determine the current state of your project execution and portfolio oversight practices.

      Align different types of projects within a unified portfolio.

      Define the best roles and engagement strategies for individual stakeholders as you transition to an Engaged Agile Portfolio.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A current state understanding of project and portfolio management challenges.

      Bolster the business case for developing an Engaged Agile Portfolio.

      Increase stakeholder and team buy-in.

      Activities

      1.1 Calculate the size of your portfolio in human resource hours.

      1.2 Estimate your project sizes and current project methodology mix.

      1.3 Document the current known status of your in-flight projects.

      1.4 Perform a project execution portfolio oversight survey.

      Outputs

      Your portfolio’s project capacity in resource hours.

      Better understanding of project demand and portfolio mix.

      Current state visibility.

      An objective assessment of current areas of strengths and weaknesses.

      2 Define Your Portfolio Processes

      The Purpose

      Objectively and transparently approve, reject, and prioritize projects.

      Prioritize work to start and stop on a sprint-by-sprint basis.

      Maintain a high frequency of accurate reporting.

      Assess and report the realization of project benefits.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Improve timeliness and accuracy of project portfolio reporting.

      Make better, faster decisions about when to start and stop work on different projects.

      Increase stakeholder satisfaction.

      Activities

      2.1 Develop a portfolio intake workflow.

      2.2 Develop a prioritization scorecard and process.

      2.3 Establish a process to estimate sprint demand and resource supply.

      2.4 Develop a process to estimate sprint value and necessity.

      Outputs

      An intake workflow.

      A prioritization scorecard and process.

      A process to estimate sprint demand and resource supply.

      A process to estimate sprint value and necessity.

      3 Implement Your Processes

      The Purpose

      Analyze the potential change impacts of your new portfolio processes and how they will be felt across the organization.

      Develop an implementation plan to ensure strategy buy-in.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A strategic and well-planned approach to process implementation.

      Activities

      3.1 Analyze change impacts of new portfolio processes.

      3.2 Prepare a communications plan based upon change impacts.

      3.3 Develop an implementation plan.

      3.4 Present new portfolio processes to portfolio owners.

      Outputs

      A change impact analysis.

      A communications plan.

      An implementation plan.

      Portfolio strategy buy-in.

      Automate Testing to Get More Done

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}285|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $29,139 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
      • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
      • Today’s rapidly changing software products and operational processes create mounting pressure on software delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly while meeting high and demanding quality standards.
      • Most organizations see automated testing as a solution to meet this demand alongside their continuous delivery pipeline. However, they often lack the critical foundations, skills, and practices that are imperative for success.
      • The technology is available to enable automated testing for many scenarios and systems, but industry noise and an expansive tooling marketplace create confusion for those interested in adopting this technology.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Good automated testing improves development throughput. No matter how quickly you put changes into production, end users will not accept them if they do not meet quality standards. Escaped defects, refactoring, and technical debt can significantly hinder your team’s ability to deliver software on time and on budget. In fact, 65% of organizations saw a reduction of test cycle time and 62% saw reductions in test costs with automated testing (Sogeti, World Quality Report 2020–21).
      • Start automation with unit and functional tests. Automated testing has a sharp learning curve, due to either the technical skills to implement and operate it or the test cases you are asked to automate. Unit tests and functional tests are ideal starting points in your automation journey because of the available tools and knowledge in the industry, the contained nature of the tests you are asked to execute, and the repeated use of the artifacts in more complicated tests (such as performance and integration tests). After all, you want to make sure the application works before stressing it.
      • Automated testing is a cross-functional practice, not a silo. A core component of successful software delivery throughput is recognizing and addressing defects, bugs, and other system issues early and throughout the software development lifecycle (SDLC). This involves having all software delivery roles collaborate on and participate in automated test case design, configure and orchestrate testing tools with other delivery tools, and proactively prepare the necessary test data and environments for test types.

      Impact and Result

      • Bring the right people to the table. Automated testing involves significant people, process and technology changes across multiple software delivery roles. These roles will help guide how automated testing will compliment and enhance their responsibilities.
      • Build a foundation. Review your current circumstances to understand the challenges blocking automated testing. Establish a strong base of good practices to support the gradually adoption of automated testing across all test types.
      • Start with one application. Verify and validate the automated testing practices used in one application and their fit for other applications and systems. Develop a reference guide to assist new teams.

      Automate Testing to Get More Done Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should automate testing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      2. Adopt good automated testing practices

      Develop and implement practices that mature your automated testing capabilities.

      • Automated Testing Quick Reference Template

      Infographic

      Workshop: Automate Testing to Get More Done

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Adopt Good Automated Testing Practices

      The Purpose

      Understand the goals of and your vision for your automated testing practice.

      Develop your automated testing foundational practices.

      Adopt good practices for each test type.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Level set automated testing expectations and objectives.

      Learn the key practices needed to mature and streamline your automated testing across all test types.

      Activities

      1.1 Build a foundation.

      1.2 Automate your test types.

      Outputs

      Automated testing vision, expectations, and metrics

      Current state of your automated testing practice

      Ownership of the implementation and execution of automated testing foundations

      List of practices to introduce automation to for each test type

      Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}531|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
      • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
      • Text messaging services and applications (such as SMS, iMessage, WhatsApp, and Facebook Messenger) have seen explosive growth over the last decade. They are an entrenched part of consumers’ daily lives. For many demographics, text messaging rather than audio calls is the preferred medium of communication via smartphone.
      • Despite the popularity of text messaging services and applications with consumers, organizations have been slow to adequately incorporate these channels into their customer service strategy.
      • The result is a major disconnect between the channel preferences of consumers and the customer service options being offered by businesses.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • IT must work with their counterparts in customer service to build a technology roadmap that incorporates text messaging services and apps as a core channel for customer interaction. Doing so will increase IT’s stature as an innovator in the eyes of the business, while allowing the broader organization to leapfrog competitors that have not yet added text-based support to their repertoire of service channels. Incorporating text messaging as a customer service channel will increase customer satisfaction, improve retention, and reduce cost-to-serve.
      • A prudent strategy for text-based customer service begins with defining the value proposition and creating objectives: is there a strong fit with the organization’s customers and service use cases? Next, organizations must create a technology enablement roadmap for text-based support that incorporates the right tools and applications to deliver it. Finally, the strategy must address best practices for text-based customer service workflows and appropriate resourcing.

      Impact and Result

      • Understand the value and use cases for text-based customer support.
      • Create a framework for enabling technologies that will support scalable text-based customer service.
      • Improve underlying business metrics such as customer satisfaction, retention, and time to resolution by having a plan for text-based support.
      • Better align IT with customer service and support needs.

      Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be leveraging text-based services for customer support, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Create the business case for text-based customer support

      Understand the use cases and benefits of using text-based services for customer support, and establish how they align to the organization’s current service strategy.

      • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 1: Create the Business Case for Text-Based Customer Support
      • Text-Based Customer Support Strategic Summary Template
      • Text-Based Customer Support Project Charter Template
      • Text-Based Customer Support Business Case Assessment

      2. Create a technology enablement framework for text-based customer support

      Identify the right applications that will be needed to adequately support a text-based support strategy.

      • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 2: Create a Technology Enablement Framework for Text-Based Customer Support
      • Text-Based Customer Support Requirements Traceability Matrix

      3. Create customer service workflows for text-based support

      Create repeatable workflows and escalation policies for text-centric support.

      • Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support – Phase 3: Create Customer Service Workflows for Text-Based Support
      • Text-Based Customer Support TCO Tool
      • Text-Based Customer Support Acceptable Use Policy
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Drive Customer Convenience by Enabling Text-Based Customer Support

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Create the Business Case for Text-Based Support

      The Purpose

      Create the business case for text-based support.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A clear direction on the drivers and value proposition of text-based customer support for your organization.

      Activities

      1.1 Identify customer personas.

      1.2 Define business and IT drivers.

      Outputs

      Identification of IT and business drivers.

      Project framework and guiding principles for the project.

      2 Create a Technology Enablement Framework for Text-Based Support

      The Purpose

      Create a technology enablement framework for text-based support.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Prioritized requirements for text-based support and a vetted shortlist of the technologies needed to enable it.

      Activities

      2.1 Determine the correct migration strategy based on the current version of Exchange.

      2.2 Plan the user groups for a gradual deployment.

      Outputs

      Exchange migration strategy.

      User group organization by priority of migration.

      3 Create Service Workflows for Text-Based Support

      The Purpose

      Create service workflows for text-based support.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Customer service workflows and escalation policies, as well as risk mitigation considerations.

      Present final deliverable to key stakeholders.

      Activities

      3.1 Review the text channel matrix.

      3.2 Build the inventory of customer service applications that are needed to support text-based service.

      Outputs

      Extract requirements for text-based customer support.

      4 Finalize Your Text Service Strategy

      The Purpose

      Finalize the text service strategy.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Resource and risk mitigation plan.

      Activities

      4.1 Build core customer service workflows for text-based support.

      4.2 Identify text-centric risks and create a mitigation plan.

      4.3 Identify metrics for text-based support.

      Outputs

      Business process models assigned to text-based support.

      Formulation of risk mitigation plan.

      Key metrics for text-based support.

      Optimize Applications Release Management

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}406|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $44,874 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
      • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
      • The business demands high service and IT needs to respond. Rapid customer response through efficient release and deployment is critical to maintain high business satisfaction.
      • The lack of process ownership leads to chaotic and uncoordinated releases, resulting in costly rework and poor hand-offs.
      • IT emphasizes tools but release tools and technologies alone will not fix the problem. Tools are integrated into the processes they support – if the process challenges aren’t addressed first, then the tool won’t help.
      • Releases are traditionally executed in silos with limited communication across the entire release pipeline. Culturally, there is little motivation for cross-functional collaboration and holistic process optimization.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Release management is not solely driven by tools. It is about delivering high quality releases on time through accountability and governance aided by the support of tools.
      • Release management is independent of your software development lifecycle (SDLC). Release management practices sit as an agnostic umbrella over your chosen development methodology.
      • Ownership of the entire process is vital. Release managers ensure standards are upheld and the pipeline operates efficiently.

      Impact and Result

      • Acquire release management ownership. Ensure there is appropriate accountability for speed and quality of the releases passing through the entire pipeline. A release manager has oversight over the entire release process and facilitates the necessary communication between business stakeholders and various IT roles.
      • Instill holistic thinking. Release management includes all steps required to push release and change requests to production along with the hand-off to Operations and Support. Increase the transparency and visibility of the entire pipeline to ensure local optimizations do not generate bottlenecks in other areas.
      • Standardize and lay a strong release management foundation. Optimize the key areas where you are experiencing the most pain and continually improve.

      Optimize Applications Release Management Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize release management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Review your release management objectives

      Assess the current state and define the drivers behind your release management optimizations.

      • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 1: Review Your Release Management Objectives
      • Release Management Process Standard Template
      • Release Management Maturity Assessment

      2. Standardize release management

      Design your release processes, program framework, and release change management standards, and define your release management team.

      • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 2: Standardize Release Management
      • Release Manager

      3. Roll out release management enhancements

      Create an optimization roadmap that fits your context.

      • Optimize Applications Release Management – Phase 3: Roll Out Release Management Enhancements
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Optimize Applications Release Management

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Review Your Release Management Objectives

      The Purpose

      Reveal the motivators behind the optimization of release management.

      Identify the root causes of current release issues and challenges.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Ensure business alignment of optimization efforts.

      Firm grasp of why teams are facing release issues and the impacts they have on the organization.

      Activities

      1.1 Identify the objectives for application release.

      1.2 Conduct a current state assessment of release practices.

      Outputs

      Release management business objectives and technical drivers

      Current state assessment of release processes, communication flows, and tools and technologies

      2 Standardize Release Management

      The Purpose

      Alleviate current release issues and challenges with best practices.

      Standardize a core set of processes, tools, and roles & responsibilities to achieve consistency, cadence, and transparency.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Repeatable execution of the same set of processes to increase the predictability of release delivery.

      Defined ownership of release management.

      Adaptable and flexible release management practices to changing business and technical environments.

      Activities

      2.1 Strengthen your release process.

      2.2 Coordinate releases with a program framework.

      2.3 Manage release issues with change management practices.

      2.4 Define your release management team.

      Outputs

      Processes accommodating each release type and approach the team is required to complete

      Release calendars and program framework

      Release change management process

      Defined responsibilities and accountabilities of release manager and release management team

      3 Roll Out Release Management Enhancements

      The Purpose

      Define metrics to validate release management improvements.

      Identify the degree of oversight and involvement of the release management team.

      Prioritize optimization roadmap against business needs and effort.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Easy-to-gather metrics to measure success that can be communicated to stakeholders.

      Understanding of how involved release management teams are in enforcing release management standards.

      Practical and achievable optimization roadmap.

      Activities

      3.1 Define your release management metrics.

      3.2 Ensure adherence to standards.

      3.3 Create your optimization roadmap.

      Outputs

      List of metrics to gauge success

      Oversight and reporting structure of release management team

      Release management optimization roadmap

      Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}280|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Service Management
      • Parent Category Link: /service-management
      • Business is moving faster than ever and IT is getting more demands at a faster pace.
      • Many IT organizations have traditional structures and approaches that have served them well in the past. However, these frameworks and approaches alone are no longer sufficient for today’s challenges and rapidly changing environment.
      • The inability to adaptively design and deliver services as requirements change has led to diminishing service quality and an increase in shadow IT.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Being Agile is a mindset. It is not meant to be prescriptive, but to encourage you to leverage the best approaches, frameworks, and tools to meet your needs and get the job done now.
      • The goal of service management is to enable and drive value for the business. Service management practices have to be flexible and adaptable enough to manage and deliver the right service value at the right time at the right level of quality.

      Impact and Result

      • Understand Agile principles, how they align with service management principles, and what the optimal states for agility look like.
      • Use Info-Tech’s advice and tools to perform an assessment of your organization’s state of agility, identify the gaps, and create a custom roadmap to incorporate agility into your service management practice.
      • Increase business satisfaction. The ultimate outcome of having agility in your service delivery is satisfied customers.

      Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a roadmap for service management agility, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Understand the optimal state for agility

      Understand the components of agility and what the optimal states are for service management agility.

      • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 1: Understand the Optimal States for Agility

      2. Assess your current state of agility

      Determine the current state of agility in the service management practice.

      • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 2: Assess Your Current State of Agility
      • Service Management Agility Assessment Tool

      3. Build the roadmap

      Create a roadmap for service management agility and present it to key stakeholders to obtain their support.

      • Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap for Service Management Agility
      • Service Management Agility Roadmap Template
      • Building Agility Into Our Service Management Practice Stakeholders Presentation Template
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Build a Roadmap for Service Management Agility

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Define the Optimal States for Agility in Service Management

      The Purpose

      Understand agility and how it can complement service management.

      Understand how the components of culture, structure, processes, and resources enable agility in service management.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Clear understanding of Agile principles.

      Identifying opportunities for agility.

      Understanding of how Agile principles align with service management.

      Activities

      1.1 Understand agility.

      1.2 Understand how Agile methodologies can complement service management through culture, structure, processes, and resources.

      Outputs

      Summary of Agile principles.

      Summary of optimal components in culture, structure, processes, and resources that enable agility.

      2 Assess Your Current State of Agility in Service Management

      The Purpose

      Assess your current organizational agility with respect to culture, structure, processes, and resources.

      Identify your agility strengths and weaknesses with the agility score.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Understand your organization’s current enablers and constraints for agility.

      Have metrics to identify strengths or weaknesses in culture, structure, processes, and resources.

      Activities

      2.1 Complete an agility assessment.

      Outputs

      Assessment score of current state of agility.

      3 Build the Roadmap for Service Management Agility

      The Purpose

      Determine the gaps between the current and optimal states for agility.

      Create a roadmap for service management agility.

      Create a stakeholders presentation.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Have a completed custom roadmap that will help build sustainable agility into your service management practice.

      Present the roadmap to key stakeholders to communicate your plans and get organizational buy-in.

      Activities

      3.1 Create a custom roadmap for service management agility.

      3.2 Create a stakeholders presentation on service management agility.

      Outputs

      Completed roadmap for service management agility.

      Completed stakeholders presentation on service management agility.

      Build Better Workflows

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}496|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
      • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

      Do you experience any of the following challenges:

      • You lack process documentation.
      • Your documentation lacks flowchart examples.
      • Your workflows have points of friction and need improvement.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows.
      • Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs

      Impact and Result

      • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
      • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
      • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up to date as a living document.

      Build Better Workflows Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Build Better Workflows – A step by step document that walks you through the process of convening a working group to design and update a process flowchart.

      Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

      • Build Better Workflows Storyboard

      2. Workflow Activity: An onboarding example for a completed flowchart review.

      Use this workflow as an example of the output of an onboarding workflow-improvement activity.

      • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (Visio)
      • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (PDF)
      [infographic]

      Further reading

      Build Better Workflows

      Go beyond draft one to refine and pressure test your process.

      Analyst Perspective

      Remove friction as you document workflows

      Emily Sugerman

      Emily Sugerman
      Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

      Info-Tech Research Group

      You can’t mature processes without also documenting them. Process documentation is most effective when workflows are both written out and also visualized in the form of flow charts.

      Your workflows may appear in standard operating procedures, in business continuity and disaster recovery plans, or anywhere else a process’ steps need to be made explicit. Often, just getting something down on paper is a win. However, the best workflows usually do not emerge fully-formed out of a first draft. Your workflow documentation must achieve two things:

      • Be an accurate representation of how you currently operate or how you will operate in the near future as a target state.
      • Be the output of a series of refinements and improvements as the workflow is reviewed and iterated.

      This research will use the example of improving an onboarding workflow. Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

      Executive Summary

      Your Challenge

      Common Obstacles

      Info-Tech’s Approach

      • Your documentation lacks workflows entirely, or ...
      • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but are not accurate, and/or ...
      • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but contain points of friction and need process improvement.
      • Getting the relevant stakeholders together to contribute to workflow design and validate them.
      • Selecting the right detail level to include in the workflow – not too much and not too little.
      • Knowing the right questions to ask to review and improve your workflow flowcharts.

      Use this material to help

      • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
      • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
      • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up-to-date as a living document.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

      Follow these steps to build, analyze, and improve the workflow

      The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the steps needed to build better workflows.

      Insight Summary

      Keep future state in mind.
      Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

      Promote the benefits of documenting workflows as flowcharts.
      Foreground to the IT team how this will improve customer experience. End-users will benefit from more efficient workflows.

      Remember the principle of constructive criticism.
      Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

      Don’t waste time building shelfware.
      Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

      Benefits of building better workflows

      Risks of inadequate workflows

      Benefits of documented workflows

      • Lack of clear communication: If you don’t have workflows, you are losing out on an effective way to document and communicate processes.
      • Outdated documentation: If you do have workflows documented in standard operating procedures, they probably need to be updated unless you already consistently update documentation.
      • Facilitate knowledge transfer.
      • Standardize processes for service delivery consistency.
      • Optimize processes by discovering and improving points of friction within the workflow.
      • Improve transparency of processes to set expectations for other stakeholders.
      • Reduce risk.

      Why are visualized workflows useful?

      Use these talking points to build commitment toward documenting/updating processes.

      Risk reduction
      “Our outdated documentation is a risk, as people will assume the documented process is accurate.”

      Transparency
      “The activity of mapping our processes will bring transparency to everyone involved.”

      Accountability
      “Flow charts will help us clarify task ownership at a glance.”

      Accessibility
      “Some team members prefer diagrams over written steps, so we should provide both.”

      Knowledge centralization
      “Our flow charts will include links to other supporting documentation (checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts).”

      Role clarification
      “Separating steps into swim lanes can clarify different tiers, process stages, and ownership, while breaking down silos.”

      Communication
      To leadership/upper management: “This process flow chart quickly depicts the big picture.”

      Knowledge transfer
      “Flow charts will help bring new staff up to speed more quickly.”

      Consistency
      “Documenting a process standardizes it and enables everyone to do it in the same way.”

      Review what process mapping is

      A pictorial representation of a process that is used to achieve transparency.

      This research will use one specific example of an onboarding process workflow. Before drilling down into onboarding workflows specifically, review Info-Tech’s Process Mapping Guide for general guidance on what to do before you begin:

      • Know the purpose of process mapping.
      • Articulate the benefits of process mapping.
      • Recognize the risks of not process mapping.
      • Understand the different levels of processes.
      • Adopt BPMN 2.0 as a standard.
      • Consider tools for process mapping.
      • Select a process to map.
      • Learn methods to gather information.

      The image contains screenshots of the Process Mapping Guide.

      Download the Process Mapping Guide

      Select the workflow your team will focus upon

      Good candidates include:

      • Processes you don’t have documented and need to build from scratch.
      • An existing process that results in an output your users are currently dissatisfied with (if you run an annual IT satisfaction survey, use this data to find this information).
      • An existing process that is overly manual, lacks automation, and causes work slowdown for your staff.

      Info-Tech workflow examples

      Active Directory Processes

      Application Development Process

      Application Maintenance Process

      Backup Process

      Benefits Legitimacy Workflow

      Business Continuity Plan Business Process

      Business Continuity Plan Recovery Process

      Commitment Purchasing Workflow

      Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Process

      Crisis Management Process

      Data Protection Recovery Workflow

      Disaster Recovery Process

      Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan Review Workflow

      End-User Device Management Workflow Library

      Expense Process

      Event Management Process

      Incident Management and Service Desk Workflows

      MACD Workflow Mapping

      Problem Management Process

      Project Management Process

      Ransomware Response Process

      Sales Process for New Clients

      Security Policy Exception Process

      Self-Service Resolution Process

      Service Definition Process

      Service Desk Ticket Intake by Channel

      Software Asset Management Processes

      Target State Maintenance Workflow

      Example: Onboarding workflow

      Onboarding is a perennial challenge due to the large number of separate teams and departments who are implicated in the process.

      There can be resistance to alignment. As a result, everyone needs to be pulled in to see the big picture and the impact of an overly manual and disconnected process.

      Additionally, the quality of the overall onboarding process (of which IT is but one part) has a significant impact on the employee experience of new hires, and the long-term experience of those employees. This workflow is therefore often a good one to target for improvement.

      “Organizations with a standardized onboarding process experience 62% greater new hire productivity, along with 50% greater new hire retention.”1

      “Companies that focus on onboarding retain 50% more new employees than companies that don’t.”2

      1. Carucci, “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them,” 2018
      2. Uzialko, “What Does Poor Onboarding, 2023

      Tabletop exercise: Generate first draft

      In the tabletop exercise, your team will walk through your onboarding process step by step and document what happens at each stage. Prep for this meeting with the following steps:

      1. Identify roles: facilitator, notetaker, and participants. Determine who should be involved in the working group in addition to IT (HR, Hiring Team, Facilities, etc.).
      2. Decide what method of documentation you will use in the meeting. If meeting in person, cue cards are useful because they can be easily rearranged or inserted. If meeting remotely, the notetaker or facilitator will need to share their screen and capture each step with software (such as Visio, PowerPoint, or a whiteboarding software).
      3. Before you even begin mapping out the process, conduct a quick brainstorming session. What are your current challenges with it? What is working? Document on a whiteboard (electronic or hard copy).
      4. Document each step of the process as it currently happens. You will improve it later. Include task ownership.

      Roles

      Facilitator
      Tasks:

      • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
      • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

      Notetaker
      Tasks:

      • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
      • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator.

      Document your workflow challenges: Onboarding

      Brainstorm and document. Group similar challenges together to pull out themes.

      Lack of communication/expectation setting with users:

      Messy process, poor coordination among task owners:

      User experience affected:

      • Users submit onboarding requests with too little lead time.
      • HR/hiring manager does not include all necessary information when submitting new hire request.
      • Approvals are slowing down our ability to fulfill in a timely manner.
      • Lots of manual, repeated tasks.
      • Too much back and forth between technicians.
      • Procurement delays (supply chain challenges) leading to new user starting with no device/workaround.
      • Inconsistent resolution times for these types of requests.
      • Complaints about onboarding were one of the most frequently recurring issues in our most recent annual IT satisfaction survey.
      • Some of these complaints fall more to the responsibility of HR and direct managers, but some of the complaints relate to onboarding tasks not being completed by start date, which is our responsibility.

      Establish flowcharting standards

      If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, use the basic notation conventions used in the examples here.

      Basic notation convention shapes: Circle, oval, square, rectangle, diamond, thought bubble.

      Start, End, and Connector. Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified modeling language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.

      Start, End. Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.

      Process Step. Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the sub-process symbol and flowchart the sub-process separately.

      Sub-Process. A series of steps. For example, a critical incident standard operating procedure (SOP) might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a sub-process, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).

      Decision. Represents decision points, typically with yes/no branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).

      Document/Report Output. For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

      Map the current process

      Prompt the working group with the following questions.

      • What happens when the ticket comes in? Who submits it? Where is it coming from? What are the trigger events? Are there any input channels we should eliminate?
      • What is the terminal event? Where does the workflow end?
      • Do we have a triage step?
      • Is the ticket prioritized? Does this need to be a step?
      • Do we create child tickets? Separate tasks for different teams? Do we create a primary/main ticket and sub-tickets? How should we represent this in the flowchart?
      • How should we represent escalations? How should we represent task ownership by different teams?
      • What are our decision points: points when the path can potentially branch (e.g. into yes/no branches)?

      Map the process: First pass

      The image contains a screenshot example of the first pass.

      Tabletop exercise: Revise workflow

      Time to review and revise the workflow. What gaps exist? How can you improve the process? What documentation gaps have been overlooked?

      Consider the following refinements for the onboarding workflow:

      • Identify missing steps
      • Clearly identify task ownership
      • Establish SLAs and timepoints
      • Capture/implement user feedback
      • Identify approval roadblocks
      • Identify communication points
      • Identify opportunities for automation
      • Create personas
      • Create onboarding checklist

      Roles

      Facilitator
      Tasks:

      • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
      • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

      Notetaker
      Tasks:

      • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
      • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator, but this takes some practice.

      Map the process: Critique draft

      The image contains a screenshot example of critique draft.

      Solicit feedback from the group.

      "

      • Our workflow is slowed down by hidden approvals that we haven’t mapped.
      • We have no efficient way to prevent submission of incomplete requests.
      • Our workflow doesn’t clearly show how different tasks are assigned to different teams.
      • We still don’t know how long this all takes.
      • We’re missing some tasks – what about including facilities?
      • We’re missing next steps for some of the decision points.
      "

      Review: Identify missing steps

      Consider the following refinements.

      Be complete.

      The workflow should surface tacit knowledge, so make it explicit (Haddadpoor et al.):

      • Where are the inputs coming from? Do you need to account for various input channels? Have you forgotten any?
      • Are there any input channels that you want to eliminate?
      • Have you overlooked any hardware, software, or services entitlements that should be called out?
      • Have all decision paths been worked through? Do you need to add any missing decision points?
      • Add information flows and annotations as needed.

      Review: Task ownership

      Identify task ownership.

      The flow chart will be more useful if it clearly identifies who does what in the process.

      • Consider organizing the sub-processes within the overall onboarding process into swim lanes, one for each team or group involved in the process.
      • Swim lanes help clarify who does what in the overall process (e.g. all the tasks completed by HR appear in the HR swim lane, all the tasks completed by service desk appear in the service desk swim lane).
      • They can also help draw attention to escalation points or handoff points between different teams. Assess the steps around the boundary of each swim lane. Does the working group experience/know of friction at these handoff points? What might solve it?
      • In what order should the tasks occur? What dependencies do they have?

      The image contains a screenshot of a model that demonstrates task ownership swim lanes.

      “Each task has an owner, and the task list is visible to the employee and other stakeholders, so there's visibility about whether each person has done their actions.”

      Matthew Stibbe, qtd. in Zapier, 2022

      Review: The time the workflow takes

      For onboarding, this means setting SLOs/SLAs and internal timepoints.

      Add internal timepoints for the major steps/tasks in the workflow. Begin to track these service level objectives and adjust as necessary.

      • Review old onboarding tickets and track how long each main step/task takes (or should take). Every additional approval risks adding days.
      • Consider where there are opportunities to increase automation or use templates to save time.
      • Zero in on which task within the onboarding workflow is slowing down the process.
      • Create an overall service level objective that communicates how many days the onboarding workflow is expected to take. Decide where escalations go when the SLA is breached.

      When you have validated the service level objectives are accurate and you can meet them an acceptable amount of time, communicate the overall SLA to your users. This will ensure they submit future onboarding requests to your team with enough lead time to fulfill the request. Try to place the SLA directly in the service catalog.

      “Tracking the time within the workflow can be a powerful way to show the working group why there is user dissatisfaction.”

      Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

      Review: Capture user feedback

      For onboarding, this means implementing a transactional survey.

      The onboarding workflow will be subject to periodic reviews and continual improvement. Suggestions for improvement should come not only from the internal IT team, but also the users themselves.

      • Transactional surveys, launched at the close of a ticket, allow the ticket submitter to provide feedback on their customer service experience.
      • Onboarding tickets are somewhat more complex than the average incident or service request, since the ticket is often opened by one user (e.g. in HR) on behalf of another (the new employee).
      • Decide whose experience you want feedback on – the submitter of the request or the new user. Investigate your ITSM tool’s capabilities: is it possible to direct the survey to someone who is not the ticket submitter?
      Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback

      Use Info-Tech’s Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback for more guidance on creating these surveys.

      Review: Identify approval roadblocks

      For onboarding, approvals can be the main roadblock to fulfilling requests

      • How are the requests coming in? Do we have a predefined service catalog?
      • What kinds of approvals do we receive (manager, financial, legal, security, regulatory)? Ask the team to think about where there are instances of back and forth and clean that up.
      • Identify where approvals interrupt the technical flow.
        • Confirm that these approvals are indeed necessary (e.g. are certain approval requests ever declined? If not, follow up on whether they are necessary or whether some can be made into preapprovals).
        • Avoid putting agents in charge of waiting on or following up about approvals.
        • Investigate whether interruptive approvals can be moved.

      Review: Identify communication points

      A positive onboarding experience is an important part of a new employee’s success.

      Though IT is only one part of an employee’s onboarding experience, it’s an important part. Delays for hardware procurement and a lack of communication can lead to employee disengagement. Ask the team:

      • Are we communicating with our users when delays occur? When do delays occur most often?
      • How can we mitigate delays? Though we can’t resolve larger supply chain problems, can we increase stock in the meantime?
      • Can we start tracking delays to incorporate into the SLA
      • Do we offer loaner devices in the meantime?

      Place communication bullet points in the flow chart to indicate where the team will reach out to users to update or notify them of delays.

      Review: Identify opportunities for automation

      Where can we automate for onboarding?

      Identify when the process is dragged out due to waiting times (e.g. times when the technician can’t address the ticket right away).

      • Analyze the workflow to identify which tasks tend to stagnate because technician is busy elsewhere. Are these candidates for automation?
      • Is our ITSM tool capable of setting up automatically routed child tickets triggered by the main onboarding ticket? Does it generate a series of tasks? Is it a manual process? Which teams do these tasks/tickets go to?
      • Can we automate notifications if devices are delayed?
      • Can we use mobile device management for automated software installation?
      • If we have a robust service catalog, can we provide it to the users to download what they need? Or is this too many extra steps for our users?
      • Can we create personas to speed up onboarding?

      Avoid reinforcing manual processes, which make it even harder for departmental silos to work together.

      Review: Automation example – create personas

      Create role-based templates.

      Does HR know which applications our users need? Are they deferring to the manager, who then asks IT to simply duplicate an existing user?

      Personas are asset profiles that apply to multiple users (e.g. in a department) and that can be easily duplicated for new hires. You might create three persona groups in a department, with variations within each subgroup or title. To do this, you need accurate information upfront.

      Then, if you’re doing zero touch deployment, you can automate software to automatically load.

      Many HRIS systems have the ability to create a persona, and also to add users to the AD, email, and distribution groups without IT getting involved. This can alleviate work from the sysadmin. Does our HRIS do this?

      • Review old onboarding tickets. Do they include manual steps like setting up mailboxes, creating user accounts, adding to groups?
      • Investigate your ITSM tool’s onboarding template. Does it allow you to create a form through which to create dynamic required fields?
      • Identify the key information service desk needs from the department supervisor, or equivalent role, to begin the onboarding request – employee type, access level, hardware and software entitlements, etc.

      Revised workflow

      How does the group feel about the revised workflow?

      • Are any outputs still missing?
      • Can we add any more annotations to provide more context to someone reading this for the first time?
      • Do the task names follow a “verb-noun” format?
      • Are the handoffs clear?
      • Are some of the steps overly detailed compared to others?
      • Does it help resolve the challenges we listed?
      • Does it achieve the benefits we want to achieve?

      Download the Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example

      Remember the principle of constructive criticism.

      Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can also be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

      Post-review: Revised workflow

      The image contains a screenshot example of a revised workflow.

      Final check

      • Do we need to run this by Legal?
      • Have we included too many sub-processes? Not enough?
      • Is the flowchart easy to read and follow?

      Decide how often this workflow will be revised.

      • Is this workflow part of a larger piece of documentation that has a set review cadence? Where is it stored?
      • If not, what is a realistic time frame for regular review?
      • Who will own this process in an ongoing way and be in charge of convening a future review working group?

      Validation with stakeholders

      • What documentation does the flowchart belong to? When will you review it again?
      • Who do you need to validate the flowchart with?

      Share the flowchart and set up a review meeting.

      • Walk through the workflow with stakeholders who did not participate in building it.
      • Do they find it easy to follow?
      • Can they identify missing steps?

      Don’t waste time building shelfware.

      Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit

      “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

      Guided Implementation

      “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

      Workshop

      “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

      Consulting

      “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

      Bibliography

      Bushkill, Claire. “The top 5 ways to automate your onboarding checklist.” Rippling Blog. 18 Mar 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. Ha https://www.rippling.com/blog/the-top-5-ways-to-automate-your-onboarding-checklist
      Carucci, Ron. “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them.” Harvard Business Review, 3 Dec 2018
      Haddadpoor, Asefeh, et al. “Process Documentation: A Model for Knowledge Management in Organizations.” Materia Socio-Medica, vol. 27, no. 5, Oct. 2015, pp. 347–50. PubMed Central, https://doi.org/10.5455/msm.2015.27.347-350.
      King, Melissa. “New hire checklist: An employee onboarding checklist template for 2022.” Zapier. 14 Jul 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. https://zapier.com/blog/onboarding-checklist/
      Uzialko, Adam. “What Does Poor Onboarding Really Do to Your Team?” Business News Daily. 23 Jan 2023.
      https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk...

      Contributors

      Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

      Christine Coz, Executive Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group

      Allison Kinnaird, Practice Lead, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

      Natalie Sansone, Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

      Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}168|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Endpoint Security
      • Parent Category Link: /endpoint-security
      • Threat actors are more innovative than ever before and developing sophisticated methods of endpoints attacks capable of avoiding detection with traditional legacy anti-virus software.
      • Legacy anti-virus solutions rely on signatures and hence fail at detecting memory objects, and new and mutating malware.
      • Combined with the cybersecurity talent gap and the sheer volume of endpoint attacks, organizations need endpoint security solutions capable of efficiently and accurately blocking never-before-seen malware types and variants.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Don’t make machine learning a goal in itself. Think of how machine learning can help you achieve your goals.
      • Determine your endpoint security requirements and goals prior to shopping around for a vendor. Vendors can easily suck you into a vortex of marketing jargon and sell you tools that your organization does not need.
      • Machine learning alone is not a solution to catching malware. It is a computational method that can generalize and analyze large datasets, and output insights quicker than a human security analyst.

      Impact and Result

      • Consider deploying an endpoint protection technology that leverages machine learning into your existing endpoint security strategy to counteract against the unknown and to quickly sift through the large volumes of data.
      • Understand how machine learning methods can help drive your organization’s security goals.
      • Identify vendors that utilize machine learning in their endpoint security products.
      • Understand use cases of where machine learning in endpoint security has been successful.

      Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should consider machine learning in endpoint security solutions, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Demystify machine learning concepts

      Understand basic machine learning concepts used in endpoint security.

      • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 1: Demystify Machine Learning Concepts

      2. Evaluate vendors that leverage machine learning

      Determine feature requirements to evaluate vendors.

      • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 2: Evaluate Vendors That Leverage Machine Learning
      • Endpoint Protection Request for Proposal
      [infographic]

      Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}479|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
      • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
      • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
      • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
      • Incompatible technologies. Organizations with more than one service desk are likely to have many legacy IT service management (ITSM) solutions. These come with a higher support cost, costly skill-set maintenance, and the inability to negotiate volume licensing discounts.
      • Inconsistent processes. Organizations with more than one service desk often have incompatible processes, which can lead to inconsistent service support across departments, less staffing flexibility, and higher support costs.
      • Lack of data integration. Without a single system and consistent processes, IT leaders often have only a partial view of service support activities. This can lead to rigid IT silos, limit the ability to troubleshoot problems, and streamline process workflows.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Every step should put people first. It’s tempting to focus the strategy on designing processes and technologies for the target architecture. However, the most common barrier to success is workforce resistance to change.
      • A consolidated service desk is an investment, not a cost-reduction program. Focus on efficiency, customer service, and end-user satisfaction. There will be many cost savings, but viewing them as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of efficiency and customer service is the best approach.

      Impact and Result

      • Conduct a comprehensive assessment of existing service desk people, processes, and technology.
      • Identify and retire resources and processes that are no longer meeting business needs, and consolidate and modernize resources and processes that are worth keeping.
      • Identify logistic and cost considerations and create a roadmap of consolidation initiatives.
      • Communicate the change and garner support for the consolidation initiative.

      Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a service desk consolidation strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Develop a shared vision

      Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the project and perform a comprehensive assessment of existing service desks.

      • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision
      • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
      • Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation
      • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
      • IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool

      2. Design the consolidated service desk

      Outline the target state of the consolidated service desk and assess logistics and cost of consolidation.

      • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 2: Design the Consolidated Service Desk
      • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
      • Consolidated Service Desk SOP Template
      • Service Desk Efficiency Calculator
      • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

      3. Plan the transition

      Build a project roadmap and communication plan.

      • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 3: Plan the Transition
      • Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap
      • Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template
      • Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Engage Stakeholders to Develop a Vision for the Service Desk

      The Purpose

      Identify and engage key stakeholders.

      Conduct an executive visioning session to define the scope and goals of the consolidation.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A list of key stakeholders and an engagement plan to identify needs and garner support for the change.

      A common vision for the consolidation initiative with clearly defined goals and objectives.

      Activities

      1.1 Identify key stakeholders and develop an engagement plan.

      1.2 Brainstorm desired service desk attributes.

      1.3 Conduct an executive visioning session to craft a vision for the consolidated service desk.

      1.4 Define project goals, principles, and KPIs.

      Outputs

      Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

      Executive Presentation

      2 Conduct a Full Assessment of Each Service Desk

      The Purpose

      Assess the overall maturity, structure, organizational design, and performance of each service desk.

      Assess current ITSM tools and how well they are meeting needs.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A robust current state assessment of each service desk.

      An understanding of agent skills, satisfaction, roles, and responsibilities.

      An evaluation of existing ITSM tools and technology.

      Activities

      2.1 Review the results of diagnostics programs.

      2.2 Map organizational structure and roles for each service desk.

      2.3 Assess overall maturity and environment of each service desk.

      2.4 Assess current information system environment.

      Outputs

      Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

      3 Design Target Consolidated Service Desk

      The Purpose

      Define the target state for consolidated service desk.

      Identify requirements for the service desk and a supporting solution.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Detailed requirements and vision for the consolidated service desk.

      Gap analysis of current vs. target state.

      Documented standardized processes and procedures.

      Activities

      3.1 Identify requirements for target consolidated service desk.

      3.2 Build requirements document and shortlist for ITSM tool.

      3.3 Use the scorecard comparison tool to assess the gap between existing service desks and target state.

      3.4 Document standardized processes for new service desk.

      Outputs

      Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

      Consolidated Service Desk SOP

      4 Plan for the Transition

      The Purpose

      Break down the consolidation project into specific initiatives with a detailed timeline and assigned responsibilities.

      Plan the logistics and cost of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities.

      Develop a communications plan.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Initial analysis of the logistics and cost considerations to achieve the target.

      A detailed project roadmap to migrate to a consolidated service desk.

      A communications plan with responses to anticipated questions and objections.

      Activities

      4.1 Plan the logistics of the transition.

      4.2 Assess the cost and savings of consolidation to refine business case.

      4.3 Identify initiatives and develop a project roadmap.

      4.4 Plan communications for each stakeholder group.

      Outputs

      Consolidation TCO Tool

      Consolidation Roadmap

      Executive Presentation

      Communications Plan

      News Bulletin & FAQ Template

      Further reading

      Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

      Manage the dark side of growth.

      ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

      A successful service desk consolidation begins and ends with people.

      "It’s tempting to focus strategic planning on the processes and technology that will underpin the consolidated service desk. Consistent processes and a reliable tool will cement the consolidation, but they are not what will hold you back.

      The most common barrier to a successful consolidation is workforce resistance to change. Cultural difference, perceived risks, and organizational inertia can hinder data gathering, deter collaboration, and impede progress from the start.

      Building a consolidated service desk is first and foremost an exercise in organizational change. Garner executive support for the project, enlist a team of volunteers to lead the change, and communicate with key stakeholders early and often. The key is to create a shared vision for the project and engage those who will be most affected."

      Sandi Conrad

      Senior Director, Infrastructure Practice

      Info-Tech Research Group

      Our understanding of the problem

      This Research is Designed For:

      • CIOs who need to reduce support costs and improve customer service.
      • IT leaders tasked with the merger of two or more IT organizations.
      • Service managers implementing a shared service desk tool.
      • Organizations rationalizing IT service management (ITSM) processes.

      This Research Will Help You:

      • Develop a shared vision for the consolidated service desk.
      • Assess key metrics and report on existing service desk architecture.
      • Design a target service desk architecture and assess how to meet the new requirements.
      • Deploy a strategic roadmap to build the consolidated service desk architecture.

      Executive summary

      Situation

      Every organization must grow to survive. Good growth makes an organization more agile, responsive, and competitive, which leads to further growth.

      The proliferation of service desks is a hallmark of good growth when it empowers the service of diverse end users, geographies, or technologies.

      Complication

      Growth has its dark side. Bad growth within a business can hinder agility, responsiveness, and competitiveness, leading to stagnation.

      Supporting a large number of service desks can be costly and inefficient, and produce poor or inconsistent customer service, especially when each service desk uses different ITSM processes and technologies.

      Resolution

      Manage the dark side of growth. Consolidating service desks can help standardize ITSM processes, improve customer service, improve service desk efficiency, and reduce total support costs. A consolidation is a highly visible and mission critical project, and one that will change the public face of IT. Organizations need to get it right.

      Building a consolidated service desk is an exercise in organizational change. The success of the project will hinge on how well the organization engages those who will be most affected by the change. Build a guiding coalition for the project, create a shared vision, enlist a team of volunteers to lead the change, and communicate with key stakeholders early and often.

      Use a structured approach to facilitate the development of a shared strategic vision, design a detailed consolidated architecture, and anticipate resistance to change to ensure the organization reaps project benefits.

      Info-Tech Insight

      1. Every step should put people first. It’s tempting to focus the strategy on designing processes and technologies for the target architecture. However, the most common barrier to success is workforce resistance to change.
      2. A consolidated service desk is an investment, not a cost-reduction program. Focus on efficiency, customer service, and end-user satisfaction. Cost savings, and there will be many, should be seen as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of efficiency and customer service.

      Focus the service desk consolidation project on improving customer service to overcome resistance to change

      Emphasizing cost reduction as the most important motivation for the consolidation project is risky.

      End-user satisfaction is a more reliable measure of a successful consolidation.

      • Too many variables affect the impact of the consolidation on the operating costs of the service desk to predict the outcome reliably.
      • Potential reductions in costs are unlikely to overcome organizational resistance to change.
      • Successful service desk consolidations can increase ticket volume as agents capture tickets more consistently and increase customer service.

      The project will generate many cost savings, but they will take time to manifest, and are best seen as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of customer service.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Business units facing a service desk consolidation are often concerned that the project will lead to a loss of access to IT resources. Focus on building a customer-focused consolidated service desk to assuage those fears and earn their support.

      End users, IT leaders, and process owners recognize the importance of the service desk.

      2nd out of 45

      On average, IT leaders and process owners rank the service desk 2nd in terms of importance out of 45 core IT processes. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, Management and Governance Diagnostic (2015, n = 486)

      42.1%

      On average, end users who were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT services 42.1% higher than dissatisfied end users. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, End-User Satisfaction Survey 2015, n = 133)

      38.0%

      On average, end users who were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT services 38.0% higher than dissatisfied end users. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, End-User Satisfaction Survey (2015, n = 133)

      Overcome the perceived barriers from differing service unit cultures to pursue a consolidated service desk (CSD)

      In most organizations, the greatest hurdles that consolidation projects face are related to people rather than process or technology.

      In a survey of 168 service delivery organizations without a consolidated service desk, the Service Desk Institute found that the largest internal barrier to putting in place a consolidated service desk was organizational resistance to change.

      Specifically, more than 56% of respondents reported that the different cultures of each service unit would hinder the level of collaboration such an initiative would require.

      The image is a graph titled Island cultures are the largest barrier to consolidation. The graph lists Perceived Internal Barriers to CSD by percentage. The greatest % barrier is Island cultures, with executive resistance the next highest.

      Service Desk Institute (n = 168, 2007)

      Info-Tech Insight

      Use a phased approach to overcome resistance to change. Focus on quick-win implementations that bring two or three service desks together in a short time frame and add additional service desks over time.

      Avoid the costly proliferation of service desks that can come with organizational growth

      Good and bad growth

      Every organization must grow to survive, and relies heavily on its IT infrastructure to do that. Good growth makes an organization more agile, responsive, and competitive, and leads to further growth.

      However, growth has its dark side. Bad growth hobbles agility, responsiveness, and competitiveness, and leads to stagnation.

      As organizations grow organically and through mergers, their IT functions create multiple service desks across the enterprise to support:

      • Large, diverse user constituencies.
      • Rapidly increasing call volumes.
      • Broader geographic coverage.
      • A growing range of products and services.

      A hallmark of bad growth is the proliferation of redundant and often incompatible ITSM services and processes.

      Project triggers:

      • Organizational mergers
      • ITSM tool purchase
      • Service quality or cost-reduction initiatives
      Challenges arising from service desk proliferation:
      Challenge Impact
      Incompatible Technologies
      • Inability to negotiate volume discounts.
      • Costly skill set maintenance.
      • Increased support costs.
      • Increased shadow IT.
      Inconsistent Processes
      • Low efficiency.
      • High support costs.
      • Inconsistent support quality.
      • Less staffing flexibility.
      Lack of Data Integration
      • Only partial view of IT.
      • Inefficient workflows.
      • Limited troubleshooting ability.
      Low Customer Satisfaction
      • Fewer IT supporters.
      • Lack of organizational support.

      Consolidate service desks to integrate the resources, processes, and technology of your support ecosystem

      What project benefits can you anticipate?

      • Consolidated Service Desk
        • End-user group #1
        • End-user group #2
        • End-user group #3
        • End-user group #4

      A successful consolidation can significantly reduce cost per transaction, speed up service delivery, and improve the customer experience through:

      • Single point of contact for end users.
      • Integrated ITSM solution where it makes sense.
      • Standardized processes.
      • Staffing integration.
      Project Outcome

      Expected Benefit

      Integrated information The capacity to produce quick, accurate, and segmented reports of service levels across the organization.
      Integrated staffing Flexible management of resources that better responds to organizational needs.
      Integrated technology Reduced tool procurement costs, improved data integration, and increased information security.
      Standardized processes Efficient and timely customer service and a more consistent customer experience.

      Standardized and consolidated service desks will optimize infrastructure, services, and resources benefits

      • To set up a functioning service desk, the organization will need to invest resources to build and integrate tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 capabilities to manage incidents and requests.
      • The typical service desk (Figure 1) can address a certain number of tickets from all three tiers. If your tickets in a given tier are less than that number, you are paying for 100% of service costs but consuming only a portion of it.
      • The consolidated model (Figure 2) reduces the service cost by reducing unused capacity.
      • Benefits of consolidation include a single service desk solution, a single point of contact for the business, data integration, process standardization, and consolidated administration, reporting, and management.

      The image is a graphic showing 2 figures. The first shows ring graphs labelled Service Desk 1 and Service Desk 2, with the caption Service provisioning with distinct service desks. Figure 2 shows one graphic, captioned Service provisioning with Consolidated service providers. At the bottom of the image, there is a legend.

      Info-Tech’s approach to service desk consolidation draws on key metrics to establish a baseline and a target state

      The foundation of a successful service desk consolidation initiative is a robust current state assessment. Given the project’s complexity, however, determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation of existing service desks can be challenging.

      The Info-Tech approach to service desk consolidation includes:

      • Envisioning exercises to set project scope and garner executive support.
      • Surveys and interviews to identify the current state of people, processes, technologies, and service level agreements (SLAs) in each service desk, and to establish a baseline for the consolidated service desk.
      • Service desk comparison tools to gather the results of the current state assessment for analysis and identify current best practices for migration to the consolidated service desk.
      • Case studies to illustrate the full scope of the project and identify how different organizations deal with key challenges.

      The project blueprint walks through a method that helps identify which processes and technologies from each service desk work best, and it draws on them to build a target state for the consolidated service desk.

      Inspiring your target state from internal tools and best practices is much more efficient than developing new tools and processes from scratch.

      Info-Tech Insight

      The two key hurdles that a successful service desk consolidation must overcome are organizational complexity and resistance to change.

      Effective planning during the current state assessment can overcome these challenges.

      Identify existing best practices for migration to the consolidated service desk to foster agent engagement and get the consolidated service desk up quickly.

      A consolidation project should include the following steps and may involve multiple transition phases to complete

      Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision

      • Identify stakeholders
      • Develop vision
      • Measure baseline

      Phase 2: Design the Consolidation

      • Design target state
      • Assess gaps to reach target
      • Assess logistics and cost

      Phase 3: Plan the Transition

      • Develop project plan and roadmap
      • Communicate changes
      • Make the transition
        • Evaluate and prepare for next transition phase (if applicable)
        • Evaluate and stabilize
          • CSI

      Whether or not your project requires multiple transition waves to complete the consolidation depends on the complexity of the environment.

      For a more detailed breakdown of this project’s steps and deliverables, see the next section.

      Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to develop a service desk consolidation strategy

      Phases Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision Phase 2: Design the Consolidated Service Desk Phase 3: Plan the Transition
      Steps 1.1 - Identify and engage key stakeholders 2.1 - Design target consolidated service desk 3.1 - Build the project roadmap
      1.2 - Develop a vision to give the project direction
      1.3 - Conduct a full assessment of each service desk 2.2 - Assess logistics and cost of consolidation 3.2 - Communicate the change
      Tools & Templates Executive Presentation Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap
      Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool Consolidated Service Desk SOP Communications and Training Plan Template
      Service Desk Efficiency Calculator News Bulletin & FAQ Template
      Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

      Service desk consolidation is the first of several optimization projects focused on building essential best practices

      Info-Tech’s Service Desk Methodology aligns with the ITIL framework

      Extend

      Facilitate the extension of service management best practices to other business functions to improve productivity and position IT as a strategic partner.

      Standardize

      Build essential incident, service request, and knowledge management processes to create a sustainable service desk that meets business needs.

      Improve

      Build a continual improvement plan for the service desk to review and evaluate key processes and services, and manage the progress of improvement initiatives.

      Adopt Lean

      Build essential incident, service request, and knowledge management processes to create a sustainable service desk that boosts business value.

      Select and Implement

      Review mid-market and enterprise service desk tools, select an ITSM solution, and build an implementation plan to ensure your investment meets your needs.

      Consolidate

      Build a strategic roadmap to consolidate service desks to reduce end-user support costs and sustain end-user satisfaction.

      Our Approach to the Service Desk

      Service desk optimization goes beyond the blind adoption of best practices.

      Info-Tech’s approach focuses on controlling support costs and making the most of IT’s service management expertise to improve productivity.

      Complete the projects sequentially or in any order.

      Info-Tech draws on the COBIT framework, which focuses on consistent delivery of IT services across the organization

      The image shows Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework. It is a grid of boxes, which are colour-coded by category. The framework includes multiple connected categories of research, including Infrastructure & Operations, where Service Desk is highlighted.

      Oxford University IT Service Desk successfully undertook a consolidation project to merge five help desks into one

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      Background

      Until 2011, three disparate information technology organizations offered IT services, while each college had local IT officers responsible for purchasing and IT management.

      ITS Service Desk Consolidation Project

      Oxford merged the administration of these three IT organizations into IT Services (ITS) in 2012, and began planning for the consolidation of five independent help desks into a single robust service desk.

      Complication

      The relative autonomy of the five service desks had led to the proliferation of different tools and processes, licensing headaches, and confusion from end users about where to acquire IT service.

      Oxford University IT at a Glance

      • One of the world’s oldest and most prestigious universities.
      • 36 colleges with 100+ departments.
      • Over 40,000 IT end users.
      • Roughly 350 ITS staff in 40 teams.
      • 300 more distributed IT staff.
      • Offers more than 80 services.

      Help Desks:

      • Processes → Business Services & Projects
      • Processes → Computing Services
      • Processes → ICT Support Team

      "IT Services are aiming to provide a consolidated service which provides a unified and coherent experience for users. The aim is to deliver a ‘joined-up’ customer experience when users are asking for any form of help from IT Services. It will be easier for users to obtain support for their IT – whatever the need, service or system." – Oxford University, IT Services

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit

      “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

      Guided Implementation

      “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

      Workshop

      “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

      Consulting

      “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

      Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – project overview

      1. Develop shared vision 2. Design consolidation 3. Plan transition
      Best-Practice Toolkit

      1.1 Identify and engage key stakeholders

      1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

      1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      2.1 Design target consolidated service desk

      2.2 Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

      3.1 Build project roadmap

      3.2 Communicate the change

      Guided Implementations
      • Build the project team and define their roles and responsibilities, then identify key stakeholders and formulate an engagement plan
      • Develop an executive visioning session plan to formulate and get buy-in for the goals and vision of the consolidation
      • Use diagnostics results and the service desk assessment tool to evaluate the maturity and environment of each service desk
      • Define the target state of the consolidated service desk in detail
      • Identify requirements for the consolidation, broken down by people, process, technology and by short- vs. long-term needs
      • Plan the logistics of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities, and evaluate the cost and cost savings of consolidation with a TCO tool
      • Identify specific initiatives for the consolidation project and evaluate the risks and dependencies for each, then plot initiatives on a detailed project roadmap
      • Brainstorm potential objections and questions and develop a communications plan with targeted messaging for each stakeholder group
      Onsite Workshop

      Module 1: Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the service desk

      Module 2: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      Module 3: Design target consolidated service desk Module 4: Plan for the transition

      Phase 1 Outcomes:

      • Stakeholder engagement and executive buy-in
      • Vision for the consolidation
      • Comprehensive assessment of each service desk’s performance

      Phase 2 Outcomes:

      • Defined requirements, logistics plan, and target state for the consolidated service desk
      • TCO comparison

      Phase 3 Outcomes:

      • Detailed consolidation project roadmap
      • Communications plan and FAQs

      Info-Tech delivers: Use our tools and templates to accelerate your project to completion

      • Service Desk Assessment Tool (Excel)
      • Executive Presentation (PowerPoint)
      • Service Desk Scorecard Comparison Tool (Excel)
      • Service Desk Efficiency Calculator (Excel)
      • Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap (Excel)
      • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Tool (Excel)
      • Communications and Training Plan (Word)
      • Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template (PowerPoint)

      Measured value for Guided Implementations (GIs)

      Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

      GI Measured Value
      Phase 1:
      • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to engage stakeholders, develop a project vision, and assess your current state.
      • For example, 2 FTEs * 10 days * $80,000/year = $6,200
      Phase 2:
      • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s tools and templates to design the consolidated service desk and evaluate cost and logistics.
      • For example, 2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year = $3,100
      Phase 3:
      • Time, value, and resources saved by following Info-Tech’s tools and methodology to build a project roadmap and communications plan.
      • For example, 1 FTE * 5 days * $80,000/year = $1,500
      Total savings $10,800

      Workshop overview

      Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Pre-Workshop Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
      Activities

      Module 0: Gather relevant data

      0.1 Conduct CIO Business Vision Survey

      0.2 Conduct End-User Satisfaction Survey

      0.3 Measure Agent Satisfaction

      Module 1: Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the service desk

      1.1 Identify key stakeholders and develop an engagement plan

      1.2 Brainstorm desired service desk attributes

      1.3 Conduct an executive visioning session to craft a vision for the consolidated service desk

      1.4 Define project goals, principles, and KPIs

      Module 2: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      2.1 Review the results of diagnostic programs

      2.2 Map organizational structure and roles for each service desk

      2.3 Assess overall maturity and environment of each service desk

      2.4 Assess current information system environment

      Module 3: Design target consolidated service desk

      3.1 Identify requirements for target consolidated service desk

      3.2 Build requirements document and shortlist for ITSM tool

      3.3 Use the scorecard comparison tool to assess the gap between existing service desks and target state

      3.4 Document standardized processes for new service desk

      Module 4: Plan for the transition

      4.1 Plan the logistics of the transition

      4.2 Assess the cost and savings of consolidation to refine business case

      4.3 Identify initiatives and develop a project roadmap

      4.4 Plan communications for each stakeholder group

      Deliverables
      1. CIO Business Vision Survey Diagnostic Results
      2. End-User Satisfaction Survey Diagnostic Results
      1. Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
      2. Executive Presentation
      1. Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
      1. Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
      2. Consolidated Service Desk SOP
      1. Consolidation TCO Tool
      2. Executive Presentation
      3. Consolidation Roadmap
      4. Communications Plan
      5. News Bulletin & FAQ Template

      Insight breakdown

      Phase 1 Insight

      Don’t get bogged down in the details. A detailed current state assessment is a necessary first step for a consolidation project, but determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation can be challenging. Gather enough data to establish a baseline and make an informed decision about how to consolidate, but don’t waste time collecting and evaluating unnecessary information that will only distract and slow down the project, losing management interest and buy-in.

      How we can help

      Leverage the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool to gather the data you need to evaluate your existing service desks.

      Phase 2 Insight

      Select the target state that is right for your organization. Don’t feel pressured to move to a complete consolidation with a single point of contact if it wouldn’t be compatible with your organization’s needs and abilities, or if it wouldn’t be adopted by your end users. Design an appropriate level of standardization and centralization for the service desk and reinforce and improve processes moving forward.

      How we can help

      Leverage the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool to analyze the gap between your existing processes and your target state.

      Phase 3 Insight

      Getting people on board is key to the success of the consolidation, and a communication plan is essential to do so. Develop targeted messaging for each stakeholder group, keeping in mind that your end users are just as critical to success as your staff. Know your audience, communicate to them often and openly, and ensure that every communication has a purpose.

      How we can help

      Leverage the Communications Plan and Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template to plan your communications.

      Phase 1

      Develop a Shared Vision

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 1: Develop shared vision

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4-8

      Step 1.1: Identify and engage key stakeholders

      Discuss with an analyst:

      • Build the project team and define their roles and responsibilities
      • Identify key stakeholders and formulate an engagement plan

      Then complete these activities…

      • Assign project roles and responsibilities
      • Identify key stakeholders
      • Formalize an engagement plan and conduct interviews

      With these tools & templates:

      Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

      Step 1.2: Develop a vision to give the project direction

      Discuss with an analyst:

      • Develop an executive visioning session plan to formulate and get buy-in for the goals and vision of the consolidation

      Then complete these activities…

      • Host an executive visioning exercise to define the scope and goals of the consolidation

      With these tools & templates:

      Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation

      Step 1.3: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      Discuss with an analyst:

      • Use diagnostics results and the service desk assessment tool to evaluate the maturity and environment of each service desk
      • Assess agent skills, satisfaction, roles and responsibilities

      Then complete these activities…

      • Analyze organizational structure
      • Assess maturity and environment of each service desk
      • Assess agent skills and satisfaction

      With these tools & templates:

      Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

      IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool

      Phase 1 Outcome:

      • A common vision for the consolidation initiative, an analysis of existing service desk architectures, and an inventory of existing best practices.

      Step 1.1: Get buy-in from key stakeholders

      Phase 1

      Develop a shared vision

      1.1 Identify and engage key stakeholders

      1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

      1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 1.1.1 Assign roles and responsibilities
      • 1.1.2 Identify key stakeholders for the consolidation
      • 1.1.3 Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand needs in more depth, if necessary
      This step involves the following participants:
      • Project Sponsor
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      Step Outcomes:
      • A project team with clearly defined roles and responsibilities
      • A list of key stakeholders and an engagement plan to identify needs and garner support for the change

      Oxford consulted with people at all levels to ensure continuous improvement and new insights

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      Motivation

      The merging of Oxford’s disparate IT organizations was motivated primarily to improve end-user service and efficiency.

      Similarly, ITS positioned the SDCP as an “operational change,” not to save costs, but to provide better service to their customers.

      "The University is quite unique in the current climate in that reduction in costs was not one of the key drivers behind the project. The goal was to deliver improved efficiencies and offer a single point of contact for their user base." – Peter Hubbard, ITSM Consultant Pink Elephant

      Development

      Oxford recognized early that they needed an open and collaborative environment to succeed.

      Key IT and business personnel participated in a “vision workshop” to determine long- and short-term objectives, and to decide priorities for the consolidated service desk.

      "Without key support at this stage many projects fail to deliver the expected outcomes. The workshop involved the key stakeholders of the project and was deemed a successful and positive exercise, delivering value to this stage of the project by clarifying the future desired state of the Service Desk." – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service & Project Sponsor

      Deployment

      IT Services introduced a Service Desk Consolidation Project Blog very early into the project, to keep everyone up-to-date and maintain key stakeholder buy-in.

      Constant consultation with people at all levels led to continuous improvement and new insights.

      "We also became aware that staff are facing different changes depending on the nature of their work and which toolset they use (i.e. RT, Altiris, ITSM). Everyone will have to change the way they do things at least a little – but the changes depend on where you are starting from!" – Jonathan Marks, Project Manager

      Understand and validate the consolidation before embarking on the project

      Define what consolidation would mean in the context of your organization to help validate and frame the scope of the project before proceeding.

      What is service desk consolidation?

      Service desk consolidation means combining multiple service desks into one centralized, single point of contact.

      • Physical consolidation = personnel and assets are combined into a single location
      • Virtual consolidation = service desks are combined electronically

      Consolidation must include people, process, and technology:

      1. Consolidation of some or all staff into one location
      2. Consolidation of processes into a single set of standardized processes
      3. One consolidated technology platform or ITSM tool

      Consolidation can take the form of:

      1. Merging multiple desks into one
      2. Collapsing multiple desks into one
      3. Connecting multiple desks into a virtual desk
      4. Moving all desks to one connected platform

      Service Desk 1 - Service Desk 2 - Service Desk 3

      Consolidated Service Desk

      Info-Tech Insight

      Consolidation isn’t for everyone.

      Before you embark on the project, think about unique requirements for your organization that may necessitate more than one service desk, such as location-specific language. Ask yourself if consolidation makes sense for your organization and would achieve a benefit for the organization, before proceeding.

      1.1 Organize and build the project team to launch the project

      Solidify strong support for the consolidation and get the right individuals involved from the beginning to give the project the commitment and direction it requires.

      Project Sponsor
      • Has direct accountability to the executive team and provides leadership to the project team.
      • Legitimatizes the consolidation and provides necessary resources to implement the project.
      • Is credible, enthusiastic, and understands the organization’s culture and values.
      Steering Committee
      • Oversees the effort.
      • Ensures there is proper support from the organization and provides resources where required.
      • Resolves any conflicts.
      Core Project Team
      • Full-time employees drawn from roles that are critical to the service desk, and who would have a strong understanding of the consolidation goals and requirements.
      • Ideal size: 6-10 full-time employees.
      • May include roles defined in the next section.

      Involve the right people to drive and facilitate the consolidation

      Service desk consolidations require broad support and capabilities beyond only those affected in order to deal with unforeseen risks and barriers.

      • Project manager: Has primary accountability for the success of the consolidation project.
      • Senior executive project sponsor: Needed to “open doors” and signal organization’s commitment to the consolidation.
      • Technology SMEs and architects: Responsible for determining and communicating requirements and risks of the technology being implemented or changed, especially the ITSM tool.
      • Business unit leads: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
      • Product/process owners: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
      • HR specialists: Most valuable when roles and organizational design are affected, i.e. the consolidation requires staff redeployment or substantial training (not just using a new system or tool but acquiring new skills and responsibilities) or termination.
      • Training specialists: If you have full-time training staff in the organization, you will eventually need them to develop training courses and material. Consulting them early will help with scoping, scheduling, and identifying the best resources and channels to deliver the training.
      • Communications specialists (internal): Valuable in crafting communications plan, required if communications function owns internal communications.

      Use a RACI table (e.g. in the following section) to clarify who is to be accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed.

      Info-Tech Insight

      The more transformational the change, the more it will affect the organizational chart – not just after the implementation but through the transition.

      Take time early in the project to define the reporting structure for the project/transition team, as well as any teams and roles supporting the transition.

      Assign roles and responsibilities

      1.1.1 Use a RACI chart to assign overarching project responsibilities

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • Project Manager
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • RACI chart

      RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed

      The RACI chart will provide clarity for overarching roles and responsibilities during the consolidation.

      1. Confirm and modify the columns to match the stakeholders in your organization.
      2. Confirm and modify the roles listed as rows if there are obvious gaps or opportunities to consolidate rows.
      3. Carefully analyze and document the roles as a group.
      Task Project Sponsor Project Manager Sr. Executives SMEs Business Lead Service Desk Managers HR Trainers Communications
      Meeting project objectives A R A R R
      Identifying risks and opportunities R A A C C C C I I
      Assessing current state I A I R C R
      Defining target state I A I C C R
      Planning logistics I A I R R C R
      Building the action plan I A C R R R R R R
      Planning and delivering communications I A C C C C R R A
      Planning and delivering training I A C C C C R R C
      Gathering and analyzing feedback and KPIs I A C C C C C R R

      Identify key stakeholders to gather input from the business, get buy-in for the project, and plan communications

      Identify the key stakeholders for the consolidation to identify the impact consolidation will have on them and ensure their concerns don’t get lost.

      1. Use a stakeholder analysis to identify the people that can help ensure the success of your project.
      2. Identify an Executive Sponsor
        • A senior-level project sponsor is someone who will champion the consolidation project and help sell the concept to other stakeholders. They can also ensure that necessary financial and human resources will be made available to help secure the success of the project. This leader should be someone who is credible, tactful, and accessible, and one who will not only confirm the project direction but also advocate for the project.

      Why is a stakeholder analysis essential?

      • Ignoring key stakeholders is an important cause of failed consolidations.
      • You can use the opinions of the most influential stakeholders to shape the project at an early stage.
      • Their support will secure resources for the project and improve the quality of the consolidation.
      • Communicating with key stakeholders early and often will ensure they fully understand the benefits of your project.
      • You can anticipate the reaction of key stakeholders to your project and plan steps to win their support.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Be diverse and aware. When identifying key stakeholders for the project, make sure to include a rich diversity of stakeholder expertise, geography, and tactics. Also, step back and add silent members to your list. The loudest voices and heaviest campaigners are not necessarily your key stakeholders.

      Identify key stakeholders for the consolidation

      1.1.2 Identify project stakeholders, particularly project champions

      Participants
      • CIO/IT Director
      • Project Sponsor
      • Project Manager
      • IT Managers
      What You’ll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers

      Goal: Create a prioritized list of people who are affected or can affect your project so you can plan stakeholder engagement and communication.

      • Use an influence/commitment matrix to determine where your stakeholders lie.
      • High influence, high commitment individuals should be used in conjunction with your efforts to help bring others on board. Identify these individuals and engage with them immediately.
      • Beware of the high influence, low commitment individuals. They should be the first priority for engagement.
      • High commitment, low influence individuals can be used to help influence the low influence, low commitment individuals. Designate a few of these individuals as “champions” to help drive engagement on the front lines.

      Outcome: A list of key stakeholders to include on your steering committee and your project team, and to communicate with throughout the project.

      The image is a matrix, with Influence on the Y-axis and Commitment to change on the X-axis. It is a blank template.

      Overcome the value gap by gathering stakeholder concerns

      Simply identifying and engaging your stakeholders is not enough. There needs to be feedback: talk to your end users to ensure their concerns are heard and determine the impact that consolidation will have on them. Otherwise, you risk leaving value on the table.

      • Talk to the business end users who will be supported by the consolidated service desk.
      • What are their concerns about consolidation?
      • Which functions and services are most important to them? You need to make sure these won't get lost.
      • Try to determine what impact consolidation will have on them.

      According to the Project Management Institute, only 25% of individuals fully commit to change. The remaining 75% either resist or simply accept the change. Gathering stakeholder concerns is a powerful way to gain buy-in.

      The image is a graph with Business Value on the Y-Axis and Time on the X-Axis. Inside the graph, there is a line moving horizontally, separated into segments: Installation, Implementation, and Target Value. The line inclines during the first two segments, and is flat during the last. Emerging from the space between Installation and Implementation is a second line marked Actual realized value. The space between the target value line and the actual realized value line is labelled: Value gap.

      Collect relevant quantitative and qualitative data to assess key stakeholders’ perceptions of IT across the organization

      Don’t base your consolidation on a hunch. Gather reliable data to assess the current state of IT.

      Solicit direct feedback from the organization to gain critical insights into their perceptions of IT.

      • CIO Business Vision: Understanding the needs of your stakeholders is the first and most important step in building a consolidation strategy. Use the results of this survey to assess the satisfaction and importance of different IT services.
      • End-User Satisfaction: Solicit targeted department feedback on core IT service capabilities, IT communications, and business enablement. Use the results to assess the satisfaction of end users with each service broken down by department and seniority level.

      We recommend completing at least the End-User Satisfaction survey as part of your service desk consolidation assessment and planning. An analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and walk through the report with you.

      To book a diagnostic, or get a copy of our questions to inform your own survey, visit Info-Tech’s Benchmarking Tools, contact your account manager, or call toll-free 1-888-670-8889 (US) or 1-844-618-3192 (CAN).

      Data-Driven Diagnostics:

      End-User Satisfaction Survey

      CIO Business Vision

      Review the results of your diagnostics in step 1.3

      Formalize an engagement plan to cultivate support for the change from key stakeholders

      Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to formalize an engagement strategy

      If a more formal engagement plan is required for this project, use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to document an engagement strategy to ensure buy-in for the consolidation.

      The engagement plan is a structured and documented approach for gathering requirements by eliciting input and validating plans for change and cultivating sponsorship and support from key stakeholders early in the project lifecycle.

      The Stakeholder Engagement Workbook situates stakeholders on a grid that identifies which ones have the most interest in and influence on your project, to assist you in developing a tailored engagement strategy.

      You can also use this analysis to help develop a communications plan for each type of stakeholder in step 3.2.

      Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand needs in more depth, if necessary

      1.1.3 Interview key stakeholders to identify needs

      • If the consolidation will be a large and complex project and there is a need to understand requirements in more depth, conduct stakeholder interviews with “high-value targets” who can help generate requirements and promote communication around requirements at a later point.
      • Choose the interview method that is most appropriate based on available resources.
      Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort Business Analyst Effort
      Structured One-on-One Interview In a structured one-on-one interview, the business analyst has a fixed list of questions to ask the stakeholder and follows up where necessary. Structured interviews provide the opportunity to quickly hone in on areas of concern that were identified during process mapping or group elicitation techniques. They should be employed with purpose – to receive specific stakeholder feedback on proposed requirements or help identify systemic constraints. Generally speaking, they should be 30 minutes or less. Low

      Medium

      Unstructured One-on-One Interview In an unstructured one-on-one interview, the business analyst allows the conversation to flow freely. The BA may have broad themes to touch on, but does not run down a specific question list. Unstructured interviews are most useful for initial elicitation, when brainstorming a draft list of potential requirements is paramount. Unstructured interviews work best with senior stakeholders (sponsors or power users), since they can be time consuming if they’re applied to a large sample size. It’s important for BAs not to stifle open dialog and allow the participants to speak openly. They should be 60 minutes or less. Medium Low

      Step 1.2: Develop a vision to give the project direction

      Phase 1

      Develop a shared vision

      1.1 Get buy-in from key stakeholders

      1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

      1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 1.2.1 Brainstorm desired attributes for the consolidated service desk to start formulating a vision
      • 1.2.2 Develop a compelling vision and story of change
      • 1.2.3 Create a vision for the consolidated service desk
      • 1.2.4 Identify the purpose, goals, and guiding principles of the consolidation project
      • 1.2.5 Identify anticipated benefits and associated KPIs
      • 1.2.6 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the business
      This step involves the following participants:
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Business Executives
      Step outcomes

      A shared vision for the consolidated service desk that:

      • Defines the scope of the consolidation
      • Encompasses the goals and guiding principles of the project
      • Identifies key attributes of the consolidated service desk and anticipated benefits it will bring
      • Is documented in an executive presentation

      Hold an executive visioning session to kick off the project

      A major change such as service desk consolidation requires a compelling vision to engage staff and motivate them to comprehend and support the change.

      After identifying key stakeholders, gather them in a visioning session or workshop to establish a clear direction for the project.

      An executive visioning session can take up to two days of focused effort and activities with the purpose of defining the short and long-term view, objectives, and priorities for the new consolidated service desk.

      The session should include the following participants:

      • Key stakeholders identified in step 1.1, including:
        • IT management and CIO
        • Project sponsor
        • Business executives interested in the project

      The session should include the following tasks:

      • Identify and prioritize the desired outcome for the project
      • Detail the scope and definition of the consolidation
      • Identify and assess key problems and opportunities
      • Surface and challenge project assumptions
      • Clarify the future desired state of the service desk
      • Determine how processes, functions, and systems are to be included in a consolidation analysis
      • Establish a degree of ownership by senior management

      The activities throughout this step are designed to be included as part of the visioning session

      Choose the attributes of your desired consolidated service desk

      Understand what a model consolidated service desk should look like before envisioning your target consolidated service desk.

      A consolidated service desk should include the following aspects:

      • Handles all customer contacts – including internal and external users – across all locations and business units
      • Provides a single point of contact for end users to submit requests for help
      • Handles both incidents and service requests, as well as any additional relevant ITIL modules such as problem, change, or asset management
      • Consistent, standardized processes and workflows
      • Single ITSM tool with workflows for ticket handling, prioritization, and escalations
      • Central data repository so that staff have access to all information needed to resolve issues quickly and deliver high-quality service, including:
        • IT infrastructure information (such as assets and support contracts)
        • End-user information (including central AD, assets and products owned, and prior interactions)
        • Knowledgebase containing known resolutions and workarounds

      Consolidated Service Desk

      • Service Desk 1
      • Service Desk 2
      • Service Desk 3
      • Consolidated staff
      • Consolidated ITSM tool
      • Consolidated data repository

      Brainstorm desired attributes for the consolidated service desk to start formulating a vision

      1.2.1 Identify the type of consolidation and desired service desk attributes

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Other interested business executives
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      Document

      Document in the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation, slide 6.

      Brainstorm the model and attributes of the target consolidated service desk. You will use this to formulate a vision and define more specific requirements later on.
      1. Identify the type of consolidation: virtual, physical, or hybrid (both)
      2. Identify the level of consolidation: partial (some service desks consolidated) or complete (all service desks consolidated)
      Consolidated Service Desk Model Level of Consolidation
      Partial Complete
      Type of Consolidation Virtual
      Physical
      Hybrid

      3. As a group, brainstorm and document a list of attributes that the consolidated service desk should have.

      Examples:

      • Single point of contact for all users
      • One ITSM tool with consistent built-in automated workflows
      • Well-developed knowledgebase
      • Self-serve portal for end users with ability to submit and track tickets
      • Service catalog

      Develop a compelling vision and story of change

      1.2.2 Use a vision table to begin crafting the consolidation vision

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Other interested business executives
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      Document

      Document in the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation, slide 7.

      Build desire for change.

      In addition to standard high-level scope elements, consolidation projects that require organizational change also need a compelling story or vision to influence groups of stakeholders.

      Use the vision table below to begin developing a compelling vision and story of change.

      Why is there a need to consolidate service desks?
      How will consolidation benefit the organization? The stakeholders?
      How did we determine this is the right change?
      What would happen if we didn’t consolidate?
      How will we measure success?

      Develop a vision to inspire and sustain leadership and commitment

      Vision can be powerful but is difficult to craft. As a result, vision statements often end up being ineffective (but harmless) platitudes.

      A service desk consolidation project requires a compelling vision to energize staff and stakeholders toward a unified goal over a sustained period of time.

      Great visions:

      • Tell a story. They describe a journey with a beginning (who we are and how we got here) and a destination (our goals and expected success in the future).
      • Convey an intuitive sense of direction (or “spirit of change”) that helps people act appropriately without being explicitly told what to do.
      • Appeal to both emotion and reason to make people want to be part of the change.
      • Balance abstract ideas with concrete facts. Without concrete images and facts, the vision will be meaninglessly vague. Without abstract ideas and principles, the vision will lack power to unite people and inspire broad support.
      • Are concise enough to be easy to communicate and remember in any situation.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Tell a story. Stories pack a lot of information into few words. They are easy to write, remember, and most importantly – share. It’s worth spending a little extra time to get the details right.

      Create a vision for the consolidated service desk

      1.2.3 Tell a story to describe the consolidated service desk vision

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 8.

      Craft a vision of the future state of the service desk.

      Tell a story.

      Stories serve to give the consolidation real-world context by describing what the future state will mean for both staff and users of the service desk. The story should sum up the core of the experience of using the consolidated service desk and reflect how the service desk will fit into the life of the user.

      Stories should include:

      • Action describing the way things happen.
      • Contextual detail that helps readers relate to the person in the story.
      • Challenging ideas that contradict common belief and may be disruptive, but help suggest new directions.
      Example:

      Imagine if…

      … users could access one single online service that allows them to submit a ticket through a self-service portal and service catalog, view the status of their ticket, and receive updates about organization-wide outages and announcements. They never have to guess who to contact for help with a particular type of issue or how to contact them as there is only one point of contact for all types of incidents and service requests.

      … all users receive consistent service delivery regardless of their location, and never try to circumvent the help desk or go straight to a particular technician for help as there is only one way to get help by submitting a ticket through a single service desk.

      … tickets from any location could be easily tracked, prioritized, and escalated using standardized definitions and workflows to ensure consistent service delivery and allow for one set of SLAs to be defined and met across the organization.

      Discuss the drivers of the consolidation to identify the goals the project must achieve

      Identifying the reasons behind the consolidation will help formulate the vision for the consolidated service desk and the goals it should achieve.

      The image is a graph, titled Deployment Drivers for Those Planning a Consolidated Service Desk. From highest to lowest, they are: Improved Service Delivery/Increased Productivity; Drive on Operational Costs; and Perceived Best Practice.

      Service Desk Institute (n = 20, 2007)

      A survey of 233 service desks considering consolidation found that of the 20 organizations that were in the planning stages of consolidation, the biggest driver was to improve service delivery and/or increase productivity.

      This is in line with the recommendation that improved service quality should be the main consolidation driver over reducing costs.

      This image is a graph titled Drivers Among Those Who Have Implemented a Consolidated Service Desk. From highest to lowest, they are: Improved Service Delivery/Increased Productivity; Best Practice; Drive on Operational Costs; Internal vs Outsourcing; and Legacy.

      Service Desk Institute (n = 43, 2007)

      The drivers were similar among the 43 organizations that had already implemented a consolidated service desk, with improved service delivery and increased productivity again the primary driver.

      Aligning with best practice was the second most cited driver.

      Identify the purpose, goals, and guiding principles of the consolidation project

      1.2.4 Document goals of the project

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 9.

      Use the results of your stakeholder analysis and interviews to facilitate a discussion among recommended participants and document the purpose of the consolidation project, the goals the project aims to achieve, and the guiding principles that must be followed.

      Use the following example to guide your discussion:

      Purpose The purpose of consolidating service desks is to improve service delivery to end users and free up more time and resources to achieve the organization’s core mission.
      Goals
      • Align IT resources with business strategies and priorities
      • Provide uniform quality and consistent levels of service across all locations
      • Improve the end-user experience by reducing confusion about where to get help
      • Standardize service desk processes to create efficiencies
      • Identify and eliminate redundant functions or processes
      • Combine existing resources to create economies of scale
      • Improve organizational structure, realign staff with appropriate job duties, and improve career paths
      Guiding Principles

      The consolidated service desk must:

      1. Provide benefit to the organization without interfering with the core mission of the business
      2. Balance cost savings with service quality
      3. Increase service efficiency without sacrificing service quality
      4. Not interfere with service delivery or the experience of end users
      5. Be designed with input from key stakeholders

      Identify the anticipated benefits of the consolidation to weigh them against risks and plan future communications

      The primary driver for consolidation of service desks is improved service delivery and increased productivity. This should relate to the primary benefits delivered by the consolidation, most importantly, improved end-user satisfaction.

      A survey of 43 organizations that have implemented a consolidated service desk identified the key benefits delivered by the consolidation (see chart at right).

      The image is a bar graph titled Benefits Delivered by Consolidated Service Desk. The benefits, from highest to lowest are: Increased Customer Satisfaction; Optimised Resourcing; Cost Reduction; Increased Productivity/Revenue; Team Visibility/Ownership; Reporting/Accountability.

      Source: Service Desk Institute (n = 43, 2007)

      Info-Tech Insight

      Cost reduction may be an important benefit delivered by the consolidation effort, but it should not be the most valuable benefit delivered. Focus communications on anticipated benefits for improved service delivery and end-user satisfaction to gain buy-in for the project.

      Identify anticipated outcomes and benefits of consolidation

      1.2.5 Use a “stop, start, continue” exercise to identify KPIs

      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      Document

      Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 10

      1. Divide the whiteboard into 3 columns: stop, start, and continue
      2. Identify components of your service desk that:
      • Are problematic and should be phased out (stop)
      • Provide value but are not in place yet (start)
      • Are effective and should be sustained, if not improved (continue)
    • For each category, identify initiatives or outcomes that will support the desired goals and anticipated benefits of consolidation.
    • Stop Start Continue
      • Escalating incidents without following proper protocol
      • Allowing shoulder taps
      • Focusing solely on FCR as a measure of success
      • Producing monthly ticket trend reports
      • Creating a self-serve portal
      • Communicating performance to the business
      • Writing knowledgebase articles
      • Improving average TTR
      • Holding weekly meetings with team members

      Use a SWOT analysis to assess the service desk

      • A SWOT analysis is a structured planning method that organizations can use to evaluate the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats involved in a project or business venture.
      • Use a SWOT analysis to identify the organization’s current IT capabilities and classify potential disruptive technologies as the first step toward preparing for them.
      Review these questions...
      Strengths (Internal) Weaknesses (Internal)
      • What Service Desk processes provide value?
      • How does the Service Desk align with corporate/IT strategy?
      • How does your Service Desk benefit end users?
      • Does the Service Desk produce reports or data that benefit the business?
      • Does your Service Desk culture offer an advantage?
      • What areas of your service desk require improvement?
      • Are there gaps in capabilities?
      • Do you have budgetary limitations?
      • Are there leadership gaps (succession, poor management, etc.)?
      • Are there reputational issues with the business?
      Opportunities (External) Threats (External)
      • Are end users adopting hardware or software that requires training and education for either themselves or the Service Desk staff?
      • Can efficiencies be gained by consolidating our Service Desks?
      • What is the most cost-effective way to solve the user's technology problems and get them back to work?
      • How can we automate Service Desk processes?
      • Are there obstacles that the Service Desk must face?
      • Are there issues with respect to sourcing of staff or technologies?
      • Could the existing Service Desk metrics be affected?
      • Will the management team need changes to their reporting?
      • Will SLAs need to be adjusted?

      …to help you conduct your SWOT analysis on the service desk.

      Strengths (Internal) Weaknesses (Internal)
      • End user satisfaction >80%
      • Comprehensive knowledgebase
      • Clearly defined tiers
      • TTR on tickets is <1 day
      • No defined critical incident workflow
      • High cost to solve issues
      • Separate toolsets create disjointed data
      • No root cause analysis
      • Ineffective demand planning
      • No clear ticket categories
      Opportunities (External) Threats (External)
      • Service catalog
      • Ticket Templates
      • Ticket trend analysis
      • Single POC through the use of one tool
      • Low stakeholder buy-in
      • Fear over potential job loss
      • Logistics of the move
      • End user alienation over process change

      Conduct a SWOT analysis on the business

      1.2.6 Conduct SWOT analysis

      Participants
      • Project Sponsor
      • IT Director, CIO
      • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      Document
      • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 11
      1. Break the group into two teams:
      • Assign team A strengths and weaknesses.
      • Assign team B opportunities and threats.
    • Have the teams brainstorm items that fit in their assigned areas.
      • Refer to the questions on the previous slide to help guide discussion
    • Choose someone from each group to fill in the grid on the whiteboard.
    • Conduct a group discussion about the items on the list.
    • Helpful to achieving the objective Harmful to achieving the objective
      Internal origin attributes of the organization Strengths Weaknesses

      External Origin attributes of the environment

      Opportunities Threats

      Frame your project in terms of people, process, technology

      A framework should be used to guide the consolidation effort and provide a standardized basis of comparison between the current and target state.

      Frame the project in terms of the change and impact it will have on:

      • People
      • Process
      • Technology

      Service desk consolidation will likely have a significant impact in all three categories by standardizing processes, implementing a single service management tool, and reallocating resources. Framing the project in this way will ensure that no aspect goes forgotten.

      For each of the three categories, you will identify:

      • Current state
      • Target state
      • Gap and actions required
      • Impact, risks, and benefits
      • Communication and training requirements
      • How to measure progress/success

      People

      • Tier 1 support
      • Tier 2 support
      • Tier 3 support
      • Vendors

      Process

      • Incident management
      • Service request management
      • SLAs

      Technology

      • ITSM tools
      • Knowledgebase
      • CMDB and other databases
      • Technology supported

      Complete the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation

      Complete an executive presentation using the decisions made throughout this step

      Use the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation to deliver the outputs of your project planning to the business and gain buy-in for the project.

      1. Use the results of the activities throughout step 1.2 to produce the key takeaways for your executive presentation.
      2. At the end of the presentation, include 1-2 slides summarizing any additional information specific to your organization.
      3. Once complete, pitch the consolidation project to the project sponsor and executive stakeholders.
        • This presentation needs to cement buy-in for the project before any other progress is made.

      Step 1.3: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      Phase 1

      Develop a shared vision

      1.1 Get buy-in from key stakeholders

      1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

      1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 1.3.1 Review the results of your diagnostic programs
      • 1.3.2 Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk
      • 1.3.3 Assess the overall maturity of each service desk
      • 1.3.4 Map out roles and responsibilities of each service desk using organizational charts
      • 1.3.5 Assess and document current information system environment
      This step involves the following participants:
      • CIO
      • IT Directors
      • Service Desk Managers
      • Service Desk Technicians
      Step outcomes
      • A robust current state assessment of each service desk, including overall maturity, processes, organizational structure, agent skills, roles and responsibilities, agent satisfaction, technology and ITSM tools.

      Oxford saved time and effort by sticking with a tested process that works

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      Oxford ITS instigated the service desk consolidation project in the fall of 2012.

      A new ITSM solution was formally acquired in the spring 2014, and amalgamated workflows designed.

      Throughout this period, at least 3 detailed process analyses occurred in close consultation with the affected IT units.

      Responsibility for understanding each existing process (incident, services, change management, etc.) were assigned to members of the project team.

      They determined which of the existing processes were most effective, and these served as the baseline – saving time and effort in the long run by sticking with tested processes that work.

      Reach out early and often.

      Almost from day one, the Oxford consolidation team made sure to consult closely with each relevant ITS team about their processes and the tools they used to manage their workflows.

      This was done both in structured interviews during the visioning stage and informally at periodic points throughout the project.

      The result was the discovery of many underlying similarities. This information was then instrumental to determining a realistic baseline from which to design the new consolidated service desk.

      "We may give our activities different names or use different tools to manage our work but in all cases common sense has prevailed and it’s perhaps not so surprising that we have common challenges that we choose to tackle in similar ways." – Andrew Goff, Change Management at Oxford ITS

      Review the results of your diagnostic programs to inform your current state assessment

      1.3.1 Understand satisfaction with the service desk

      Participants
      • CIO/IT Director
      • IT Manager
      • Service Manager(s)
      Document
      1. Set up an analyst call through your account manager to review the results of your diagnostic.
      • Whatever survey you choose, ask the analyst to review the data and comments concerning:
        • Assessments of service desk timeliness/effectiveness
        • IT business enablement
        • IT innovation leadership
    • Book a meeting with recommended participants. Go over the results of your diagnostic survey.
    • Facilitate a discussion of the results. Focus on the first few summary slides and the overall department results slide.
      • What is the level of IT support?
      • What are stakeholders’ perceptions of IT performance?
      • How satisfied are stakeholders with IT?
      • Does the department understand and act on business needs?
      • What are the business priorities and how well are you doing in meeting these priorities?
      • How can the consolidation project assist the business in achieving goals?
      • How could the consolidation improve end-user satisfaction and business satisfaction?
    • A robust current state assessment is the foundation of a successful consolidation

      You can’t determine where you’re going without a clear idea of where you are now.

      Before you begin planning for the consolidation, make sure you have a clear picture of the magnitude of what you plan on consolidating.

      Evaluate the current state of each help desk being considered for consolidation. This should include an inventory of:

      • Process:
        • Processes and workflows
        • Metrics and SLAs
      • People:
        • Organizational structure
        • Agent workload and skills
        • Facility layout and design
      • Technology:
        • Technologies and end users supported
        • Technologies and tools used by the service desk

      Info-Tech Insight

      A detailed current state assessment is a necessary first step for a consolidation project, but determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation can be challenging. Gather enough data to establish a baseline and make an informed decision about how to consolidate, but don’t waste time collecting unnecessary information that will only distract and slow down the project.

      Review ticket handling processes for each service desk to identify best practices

      Use documentation, reports, and metrics to evaluate existing processes followed by each service desk before working toward standardized processes.

      Poor Processes vs. Optimized Processes

      Inconsistent or poor processes affect the business through:

      • Low business satisfaction
      • Low end-user satisfaction
      • High cost to resolve
      • Delayed progress on project work
      • Lack of data for reporting due to ineffective ticket categorization, tools, and logged tickets
      • No root cause analysis leads to a reactive vs. proactive service desk
      • Lack of cross-training and knowledge sharing result in time wasted troubleshooting recurring issues
      • Lack of trend analysis limits the effectiveness of demand planning

      Standardized service desk processes increase user and technician satisfaction and lower costs to support through:

      • Improved business satisfaction Improved end-user satisfaction Incidents prioritized and escalated accurately and efficiently
      • Decreased recurring issues due to root cause analysis and trends
      • Increased self-sufficiency of end users
      • Strengthened team and consistent delivery through cross-training and knowledge sharing
      • Enhanced demand planning through trend analysis and reporting

      The image is a graphic of a pyramid, with categories as follows (from bottom): FAQ/Knowledgebase; Users; Tier 1-75-80%; Tier 2-15%; Tier 3 - 5%. On the right side of the pyramid is written Resolution, with arrows extending from each of the higher sections down to Users. On the left is written Escalation, with arrows from each lower category up to the next highest. Inside the pyramid are arrows extending from the bottom to each level and vice versa.

      Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk

      1.3.2 Discuss the structure of each service desk

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

      1. Facilitate a discussion among recommended participants to discuss the structure of each service desk. Decide which model best describes each service desk:

      • The Gatekeeper Model: All calls are routed through a central call group whose sole responsibility is to link the customer to the right individual or group.
      • The Call Sorting Model: All calls are sorted into categories using technology and forwarded to the right 2nd level specialist group.
      • Tiered Structure (Specialist Model): All calls are sorted through a single specialist group, such as desktop support. Their job is to log the interaction, attempt resolution, and escalate when the problem is beyond their ability to resolve.
      • Tiered Structure (Generalist Model): All calls are sorted through a single generalist group, whose responsibility is to log the interaction, attempt a first resolution, and escalate when the problem is beyond their ability to resolve.

      2. Use a flip chart or whiteboard to draw the architecture of each service desk, using the example on the right as a guide.

      The image is a graphic depicting the organizational structure of a service desk, from Users to Vendor. The graphic shows how a user request can move through tiers of service, and the ways that Tiers 2 and 3 of the service desk are broken down into areas of specialization.

      Assess the current state of each service desk using the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

      Assess the current state of each service desk

      The Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool will provide insight into the overall health of each existing service desk along two vectors:

      1. Process Maturity (calculated on the basis of a comprehensive survey)
      2. Metrics (calculated on the basis of entered ticket and demographic data)

      Together these answers offer a snapshot of the health, efficiency, performance, and perceived value of each service desk under evaluation.

      This tool will assist you through the current state assessment process, which should follow these steps:

      1. Send a copy of this tool to the Service Desk Manager (or other designated party) of each service desk that may be considered as part of the consolidation effort.
        • This will collect key metrics and landscape data and assess process maturity
      2. Analyze the data and discuss as a group
      3. Ask follow-up questions
      4. Use the information to compare the health of each service desk using the scorecard tool

      These activities will be described in more detail throughout this step of the project.

      Gather relevant data to assess the environment of each service desk

      Assess each service desk’s environment using the assessment tool

      Send a copy of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool to the Service Desk Manager (or other designated party) of each service desk that will be considered as part of the consolidation.

      Instruct them to complete tab 2 of the tool, the Environment Survey:

      • Enter Profile, Demographic, Satisfaction, Technology, and Ticket data into the appropriate fields as accurately as possible. Satisfaction data should be entered as percentages.
      • Notes can be entered next to each field to indicate the source of the data, to note missing or inaccurate data, or to explain odd or otherwise confusing data.

      This assessment will provide an overview of key metrics to assess the performance of each service desk, including:

      • Service desk staffing for each tier
      • Average ticket volume and distribution per month
      • # staff in IT
      • # service desk staff
      • # supported devices (PC, laptops, mobiles, etc.)
      • # desktop images

      Assess the overall maturity of each service desk

      1.3.3 Use the assessment tool to measure the maturity of each service desk

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
      1. Assemble the relevant team for each service desk: process owners, functional managers, service desk manager, and relevant staff and technicians who work with the processes to be assessed. Each service desk team should meet to complete the maturity assessment together as a group.
      2. Go to tab 3 (Service Desk Maturity Survey) of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool and respond to the questions in the following categories:
      • Prerequisites (general questions)
      • People
      • Process
      • Technology
      • SLAs
    • Rate each element. Be honest. The goal is to end up with as close a representation as possible to what really exists. Only then can you identify realistic improvement opportunities. Use the maturity definitions as guides.
    • Evaluate resource utilization and satisfaction to allocate resources effectively

      Include people as part of your current state assessment to evaluate whether your resources are appropriately allocated to maximize effectiveness and agent satisfaction.

      Skills Inventory

      Use the IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool to assess agent skills and identify gaps or overlaps.

      Agent Satisfaction

      Measure employee satisfaction and engagement to identify strong teams.

      Roles and Responsibilities

      Gather a clear picture of each service desk’s organizational hierarchy, roles, and responsibilities.

      Agent Utilization

      Obtain a snapshot of service desk productivity by calculating the average amount of time an agent is handling calls, divided by the average amount of time an agent is at work.

      Conduct a skills inventory for each service desk

      Evaluate agent skills across service desks

      After evaluating processes, evaluate the skill sets of the agents tasked with following these processes to identify gaps or overlap.

      Send the Skills Coverage Tool tab to each Service Desk Manager, who will either send it to the individuals who make up their service desk with instructions to rate themselves, or complete the assessment together with individuals as part of one-on-one meetings for discussing development plans.

      IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool will enable you to:

      • List skills required to support the organization.
      • Document and rate the skills of the existing IT staffing contingent.
      • Assess the gaps to help determine hiring or training needs, or even where to pare back.
      • Build a strategy for knowledge sharing, transfer, and training through the consolidation project.

      Map out roles and responsibilities of each service desk using organizational charts

      1.3.4 Obtain or draw organizational charts for each location

      Clearly document service desk roles and responsibilities to rationalize service desk architecture.
      Participants
      • CIO, IT Director
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Tier/Specialist Manager(s)
      What You’ll Need
      • Org. charts
      • Flip chart or whiteboard and markers
      1. Obtain or draw (on a whiteboard or flip chart) the organizational chart for each service desk to get a clear picture of the roles that fulfill each service desk. If there is any uncertainty or disagreement, discuss as a group to come to a resolution.
      2. Discuss the roles and reporting relationships within the service desk and across the organization to establish if/where inefficiencies exist and how these might be addressed through consolidation.
      3. If an up-to-date organizational chart is not in place, use this time to define the organizational structure as-is and consider future state.
      IT Director
      Service Desk Manager
      Tier 1 Help Desk Lead Tier 2 Help Desk Lead Tier 2 Apps Support Lead Tier 3 Specialist Support Lead
      Tier 1 Specialist Name Title Name Title Name Title
      Tier 1 Specialist Name Title Name Title Name Title
      Name Title Name Title Name Title
      Name Title Name Title

      Conduct an agent satisfaction survey to compare employee engagement across locations

      Evaluate agent satisfaction

      End-user satisfaction isn’t the only important satisfaction metric.

      Agent satisfaction forms a key metric within the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool, and it can be evaluated in a variety of ways. Choose the approach that best suits your organization and time restraints for the project.

      Determine agent satisfaction on the basis of a robust (and anonymous) survey of service desk agents. Like the end-user satisfaction score, this measure is ideally computed as a percentage.

      There are several ways to measure agent satisfaction:

      1. If your organization runs an employee engagement survey, use the most recent survey results, separating them by location and converting them to a percentage.
      2. If your organization does not currently measure employee engagement or satisfaction, consider one of Info-Tech and McLean & Company’s two engagement diagnostics:
        • Full Engagement Diagnostic – 81 questions that provide a comprehensive view into your organization's engagement levels
        • McLean & Company’s Pulse Survey – 15 questions designed to give a high-level view of employee engagement
      3. For smaller organizations, a survey may not be feasible or make sense. In this case, consider gathering informal engagement data through one-on-one meetings.
      4. Be sure to discuss and document any reasons for dissatisfaction, including pain points with the current tools or processes.
      Document
      • Document on tab 2 of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

      Assess the service management tools supporting your service desks

      Identify the different tools being used to support each service desk in order to assess whether and how they can be consolidated into one service management tool.

      Ideally, your service desks are already on the same ITSM platform, but if not, a comprehensive assessment of current tools is the first step toward a single, consolidated solution.

      Include the following in your tools assessment:

      • All automated ITSM solutions being used to log and track incidents and service requests
      • Any manual or other methods of tracking tickets (e.g. Excel spreadsheets)
      • Configurations and any customizations that have been made to the tools
      • How configuration items are maintained and how mature the configuration management databases (CMDB) are
      • Pricing and licensing agreements for tools
      • Any unique functions or limitations of the tools

      Info-Tech Insight

      Document not only the service management tools that are used but also any of their unique and necessary functions and configurations that users may have come to rely upon, such as remote support, self-serve, or chat support, in order to inform requirements in the next phase.

      Assess the IT environment your service desks support

      Even if you don’t do any formal asset management, take this opportunity for discovery and inventory to gain a complete understanding of your IT environment and the range of devices your service desks support.

      Inventory your IT environment, including:

      User Devices

      • Device counts by category Equipment/resources by user

      Servers

      • Server hardware, CPU, memory
      • Applications residing on servers

      Data centers

      • Including location and setup

      In addition to identifying the range of devices you currently support, assess:

      • Any future devices, hardware, or software that the service desk will need to support (e.g. BYOD, mobile)
      • How well each service desk is currently able to support these devices
      • Any unique or location-specific technology or devices that could limit a consolidation

      Info-Tech Insight

      The capabilities and configuration of your existing infrastructure and applications could limit your consolidation plans. A comprehensive technology assessment of not only the service desk tools but also the range of devices and applications your service desks supports will help you to prepare for any potential limitations or obstacles a consolidated service desk may present.

      Assess and document current information system environment

      1.3.5 Identify specific technology and tool requirements

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool, tab 2.
      Document

      Document information on number of devices supported and number of desktop images associated with each service desk in the section on “Technology Data” of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool.

      1. Identify and document the service management tools that are used by each service desk.
      2. For each tool, identify and document any of the following that apply:
      • Integrations
      • Configurations that were made during implementation
      • Customizations that were made during implementation
      • Version, licenses, cost
    • For each service desk, document any location-specific or unique technology requirements or differences that could impact consolidation, including:
      • Devices and technology supported
      • Databases and configuration items
      • Differing applications or hardware needs
    • If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      1.1.1 Assign roles and responsibilities

      Use a RACI chart to assign overarching responsibilities for the consolidation project.

      1.3.2 Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk

      Map out the organizational structure and flow of each service desk and discuss the model that best describes each.

      Phase 2

      Design the Consolidated Service Desk

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 2: Design consolidated service desk

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4

      Step 2.1: Model target consolidated service desk

      Start with an analyst kick-off call:

      • Define the target state of the consolidated service desk in detail
      • Identify requirements for the consolidation, broken down by people, process, technology and by short- vs. long-term needs

      Then complete these activities…

      • Set project metrics to measure success of the consolidation
      • Brainstorm people, process, technology requirements for the service desk
      • Build requirements documents and RFP for a new tool
      • Review results of the scorecard comparison tool

      With these tools & templates:

      Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

      Step 2.2: Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

      Review findings with analyst:

      • Plan the logistics of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities
      • Evaluate the cost and cost savings of consolidation using a TCO tool

      Then complete these activities…

      • Plan logistics for process, technology, facilities, and resource allocation
      • Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project

      With these tools & templates:

      Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

      Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

      Phase 2 Results:

      • Detailed requirements and vision for the consolidated service desk, gap analysis of current vs. target state, and an initial analysis of the logistical considerations to achieve target.

      Step 2.1: Model target consolidated state

      Phase 2

      Design consolidation

      2.1 Design target consolidated service desk

      2.2 Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 2.1.1 Determine metrics to measure the value of the project
      • 2.1.2 Set targets for each metric to measure progress and success of the consolidation
      • 2.1.3 Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk
      • 2.1.4 Brainstorm people requirements for consolidated service desk
      • 2.1.5 Brainstorm technology requirements for consolidated service desk
      • 2.1.6 Build a requirements document for the service desk tool
      • 2.1.7 Evaluate alternative tools, build a shortlist for RFPs, and arrange web demonstrations or evaluation copies
      • 2.1.8 Set targets for key metrics to identify high performing service desks
      • 2.1.9 Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices
      This step involves the following participants:
      • CIO
      • IT Director
      • Service Desk Managers
      • Service Desk Technicians
      Step Outcomes
      • A list of people, process, and technology requirements for the new consolidated service desk
      • A clear vision of the target state
      • An analysis of the gaps between existing and target service desks

      Ensure the right people and methods are in place to anticipate implementation hurdles

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      "Since our last update, a review and re-planning exercise has reassessed the project approach, milestones, and time scales. This has highlighted some significant hurdles to transition which needed to be addressed, resulting primarily from the size of the project and the importance to the department of a smooth and well-planned transition to the new processes and toolset." – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service & Project Sponsor

      Initial hurdles led to a partial reorganization of the project in Fall 2014

      Despite careful planning and its ultimate success, Oxford’s consolidation effort still encountered some significant hurdles along the way – deadlines were sometimes missed and important processes overlooked.

      These bumps can be mitigated by building flexibility into your plan:

      • Adopt an Agile methodology – review and revise groups of tasks as the project progresses, rather than waiting until near the end of the project to get approval for the complete implementation.
      • Your Tiger Team or Project Steering Group must include the right people – the project team should not just include senior or high-level management; members of each affected IT group should be consulted, and junior-level employees can provide valuable insight into existing and potential processes and workflows.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Ensure that the project lead is someone conversant in ITSM, so that they are equipped to understand and react to the unique challenges and expectations of a consolidation and can easily communicate with process owners.

      Use the consolidation vision to define the target service desk in more detail

      Use your baseline assessment and your consolidation vision as a guide to figure out exactly where you’re going before planning how to get there.

      With approval for the project established and a clear idea of the current state of each service desk, narrow down the vision for the consolidated service desk into a specific picture of the target state.

      The target state should provide answers to the following types of questions:

      Process:

      • Will there be one set of SLAs across the organization?
      • What are the target SLAs?
      • How will ticket categories be defined?
      • How will users submit and track their tickets?
      • How will tickets be prioritized and escalated?
      • Will a knowledgebase be maintained and accessible by both service desk and end users?

      People:

      • How will staff be reorganized?
      • What will the roles and responsibilities look like?
      • How will tiers be structured?
      • What will the career path look like within the service desk?

      Technology:

      • Will there be one single ITSM tool to support the service desk?
      • Will an existing tool be used or will a new tool be selected?
      • If a new tool is needed, what are the requirements?

      Info-Tech Insight

      Select the target state that is right for your organization. Don’t feel pressured to select the highest target state or a complete consolidation. Instead select the target state that is most compatible with your organization’s current needs and capabilities.

      Determine metrics to measure the value of the project

      2.1.1 Identify KPIs to measure the success of the consolidation

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You’ll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers

      Identify three primary categories where the consolidation project is expected to yield benefits to the business. Use the example on the right to guide your discussion.

      Efficiency and effectiveness are standard benefits for this project, but the third category may depend on your organization.

      • Examples include: improved resourcing, security, asset management, strategic alignment, end-user experience, employee experience

      Identify 1-3 key performance indicators (KPIs) associated with each benefit category, which will be used to measure the success of the consolidation project. Ensure that each has a baseline measure that can be reassessed after the consolidation.

      Efficiency

      Streamlined processes to reduce duplication of efforts

      • Reduced IT spend and cost of delivery
      • One ITSM tool Improved reliability of service
      • Improved response time

      Resourcing

      Improved allocation of human and financial resources

      • Improved resource sharing
      • Improved organizational structure of service desk

      Effectiveness

      Service delivery will be more accessible and standardized

      • Improved responsive-ness to incidents and service requests
      • Improved resolution time
      • Single point of contact for end users
      • Improved reporting

      Set targets for each metric to measure progress and success of the consolidation

      2.1.2 Identify specific metrics for each KPI and targets for each

      Participants
      • IT Director
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You’ll Need
      • KPIs from previous step
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      1. Select one core KPI for each critical success factor, which will be used to measure progress and success of the consolidation effort down the road.
      2. For each KPI, document the average baseline metric the organization is achieving (averaged across all service desks).
      3. Discuss and document a target metric that the project will aim to reach through the single consolidated service desk.
      4. Set a short and long-term target for each metric to encourage continuous improvement. Examples:
      Efficiency
      Business Value KPI Current Metric Short-Term (6 month) Target Long-Term (1 year) Target
      Streamlined processes to reduce duplication of efforts Improved response time 2 hours 1 hour 30 minutes
      Effectiveness
      Business Value KPI Current Metric Short-Term (6 month) Target Long-Term (1 year) Target
      Service delivery will be more accessible and standardized Improved first call resolution (% resolved at Tier 1) 50% 60% 70%

      If poor processes were in place, take the opportunity to start fresh with the consolidation

      If each service desk’s existing processes were subpar, it may be easier to build a new service desk from the basics rather than trying to adapt existing processes.

      You should have these service management essentials in place:

      Service Requests:

      • Standardize process to verify, approve, and fulfill service requests.
      • Assign priority according to business criticality and service agreements.
      • Think about ways to manage service requests to better serve the business long term.

      Incident Management:

      • Set standards to define and record incidents.
      • Define incident response actions and communications.

      Knowledgebase:

      • Define standards for knowledgebase.
      • Introduce creation of knowledgebase articles.
      • Create a knowledge-sharing and cross-training culture.

      Reporting:

      • Select appropriate metrics.
      • Generate relevant insights that shed light on the value that IT creates for the organization.

      The image is a circle comprised of 3 concentric circles. At the centre is a circle labelled Standardized Service Desk. The ring outside of it is split into 4 sections: Incident Management; Service Requests; Structure and Reporting; and Knowledgebase. The outer circle is split into 3 sections: People, Process, Technologies.

      Evaluate how your processes compare with the best practices defined here. If you need further guidance on how to standardize these processes after planning the consolidation, follow Info-Tech’s blueprint, Standardize the Service Desk.

      Even optimized processes will need to be redefined for the target consolidated state

      Your target state doesn’t have to be perfect. Model a short-term, achievable target state that can demonstrate immediate value.

      Consider the following elements when designing service desk processes:
      • Ticket input (i.e. how can tickets be submitted?)
      • Ticket classification (i.e. how will tickets be categorized?)
      • Ticket prioritization (i.e. how will critical incidents be defined?)
      • Ticket escalation (i.e. how and at what point will tickets be assigned to a more specialized resource?)
      • Ticket resolution (i.e. how will resolution be defined and how will users be notified?)
      • Communication with end users (i.e. how and how often will users be notified about the status of their ticket or of other incidents and outages?)

      Consider the following unique process considerations for consolidation:

      • How will knowledge sharing be enabled in order for all technicians to quickly access known errors and resolve problems?
      • How can first contact resolution levels be maintained through the transition?
      • How will procedures be clearly documented so that tickets are escalated properly?
      • Will ticket classification and prioritization schemes need to change?
      • Will new services such as self-serve be introduced to end users and how will this be communicated?

      Info-Tech Insight

      Don’t do it all at once. Consolidation will lead to some level of standardization. It will be reinforced and improved later through ongoing reengineering and process improvement efforts (continual improvement management).

      Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk

      2.1.3 Identify process-related requirements for short and long term

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
      • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
      Document
      • Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.
      1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on process considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
      2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of process requirements or desired characteristics for the target state, particularly around incident management and service request management.
      3. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
        1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
        2. Implement within 6 months
        3. Implement within 1 year

      Example:

      Whiteboard:

      • Immediate
        • Clearly defined ticket prioritization scheme
        • Critical incident process workflow
      • 6 months
        • Clearly defined SOP, policies, and procedures
        • Transactional end-user satisfaction surveys
      • 1 year
        • Change mgmt.
        • Problem mgmt.

      Define the target resource distribution and utilization for the consolidated service desk

      Consolidation can sound scary to staff wondering if there will be layoffs. Reduce that by repurposing local staff and maximizing resource utilization in your organizational design.

      Consider the following people-related elements when designing your target state:

      • How will roles and responsibilities be defined for service desk staff?
      • How many agents will be required to deal with ticket demand?
      • What is the target agent utilization rate?
      • How will staff be distributed among tiers?
      • What will responsibilities be at each tier?
      • Will performance goals and rewards be established or standardized?

      Consider the following unique people considerations for consolidation:

      • Will staffing levels change?
      • Will job titles or roles change for certain individuals?
      • How will staff be reorganized?
      • Will staff need to be relocated to one location?
      • Will reporting relationships change?
      • How will this be managed?
      • How will performance measurements be consolidated across teams and departments to focus on the business goals?
      • Will there be a change to career paths?
      • What will consolidation do to morale, job interest, job opportunities?

      Info-Tech Insight

      Identify SMEs and individuals who are knowledgeable about a particular location, end-user base, technology, or service offering. They may be able to take on a different, greater role due to the reorganization that would make better use of their skills and capabilities and improve morale.

      Brainstorm people requirements for consolidated service desk

      2.1.4 Identify people-related requirements for short and long term

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
      • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
      Document

      Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.

      1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on people considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
      2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of requirements for the allocation and distribution of resources, including roles, responsibilities, and organizational structure.
      3. When thinking about people, consider requirements for both your staff and your end users.
      4. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
        1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
        2. Implement within 6 months
        3. Implement within 1 year

      Example:

      Whiteboard:

      • Immediate
        • Three tier structure with SMEs at Tier 2 and 3
        • All staff working together in one visible location
      • 6 months
        • Roles and responsibilities well defined and documented
        • Appropriate training and certifications available to staff
      • 1 year
        • Agent satisfaction above 80%
        • End-user satisfaction above 75%

      Identify the tools that will support the service desk and those the service desk will support

      One of the biggest technology-related decisions you need to make is whether you need a new ITSM tool. Consider how it will be used by a single service desk to support the entire organization.

      Consider the following technology elements when designing your target state:
      • What tool will be used to support the service desk?
      • What processes or ITIL modules can the tool support?
      • How will reports be produced? What types of reports will be needed for particular audiences?
      • Will a self-service tool be in place for end users to allow for password resets or searches for solutions?
      • Will the tool integrate with tools for change, configuration, problem, and asset management?
      • Will the majority of manual processes be automated?
      Consider the following unique technology considerations for consolidation:
      • Is an existing service management tool extensible?
      • If so, can it integrate with essential non-IT systems?
      • Can the tool support a wider user base?
      • Can the tool support all areas, departments, and technologies it will need to after consolidation?
      • How will data from existing tools be migrated to the new tool?
      • What implementation or configuration needs and costs must be considered?
      • What training will be required for the tool?
      • What other new tools and technologies will be required to support the consolidated service desk?

      Info-Tech Insight

      Talk to staff at each service desk to ask about their tool needs and requirements to support their work. Invite them to demonstrate how they use their tools to learn about customization, configuration, and functionality in place and to help inform requirements. Engaging staff in the process will ensure that the new consolidated tool will be supported and adopted by staff.

      Brainstorm technology requirements for consolidated service desk

      2.1.5 Identify technology-related requirements for short and long term

      Participants
      • CIO
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You’ll Need
      • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
      • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
      Document

      Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.

      1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on technology considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
      2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of requirements for the tools to support the consolidated service desk, along with any other technology requirements for the target state.
      3. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
        1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
        2. Implement within 6 months
        3. Implement within 1 year

      Example:

      Whiteboard:

      • Immediate
        • Single ITSM tool
        • Remote desktop support
      • 6 months
        • Self-service portal
        • Regular reports are produced accurately
      • 1 year
        • Mobile portal
        • Chat integration

      Identify specific requirements for a tool if you will be selecting a new ITSM solution

      Service desk software needs to address both business and technological needs. Assess these needs to identify core capabilities required from the solution.

      Features Description
      Modules
      • Do workflows integrate seamlessly between functions such as incident management, change management, asset management, desktop and network management?

      Self-Serve

      • Does the existing tool support self-serve in the form of web forms for incident reporting, forms for service requests, as well as FAQs for self-solve?
      • Is a service catalog available or can one be integrated painlessly?
      Enterprise Service Management Needs
      • Integration of solution to all of IT, Human Resources, Finance, and Facilities for workflows and financial data can yield great benefits but comes at a higher cost and greater complexity. Weigh the costs and benefits.
      Workflow Automation
      • If IT has advanced beyond simple workflows, or if extending these workflows beyond the department, more power may be necessary.
      • Full business process management (BPM) is part of a number of more advanced service desk/service management solutions.
      License Maintenance Costs
      • Are license and maintenance costs still reasonable and appropriate for the value of the tool?
      • Will the vendor renegotiate?
      • Are there better tools out there for the same or better price?
      Configuration Costs
      • Templates, forms, workflows, and reports all take time and skills but bring big benefits. Can these changes be done in-house? How much does it cost to maintain and improve?
      Speed / Performance
      • Data growth and volume may have reached levels beyond the current solution’s ability to cope, despite database tuning.
      Vendor Support
      • Is the vendor still supporting the solution and developing the roadmap? Has it been acquired? Is the level of support still meeting your needs?

      Build a requirements document for the service desk tool

      2.1.6 Create a requirements list and demo script for an ITSM tool (optional)

      Participants
      • CIO/IT Director
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Technicians
      What You'll Need
      • Flip charts and markers
      • Templates:
        • IT Service Management Demo Script Template
        • Service Desk Software and RFP Evaluation Tool

      Create a requirements list for the service desk tool.

      1. Break the group into smaller functional groups.
      2. Brainstorm features that would be important to improving efficiencies, services to users, and visibility to data.
      3. Document on flip chart paper, labelling each page with the functional group name.
      4. Prioritize into must-have and nice-to-have items.
      5. Reconvene and discuss each list with the group.
      6. Info-Tech’s Service Desk Software and RFP Evaluation Tool can also be used to document requirements for an RFI.

      Create a demo script:

      Using information from the requirements list, determine which features will be important for the team to see during a demo. Focus on areas where usability is a concern, for example:

      • End-user experience
      • Workflow creation and modification
      • Creating templates
      • Creating service catalog items
      • Knowledgebase

      Evaluate alternative tools, build a shortlist for RFPs, and arrange web demonstrations or evaluation copies

      2.1.7 Identify an alternative tool and build an RFP (optional)

      Participants
      • CIO (optional)
      • Service Desk Manager
      • Service Desk Technician(s)
      • Service Desk Tool Administrator
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      • Service Desk RFP Template

      Evaluate current tool:

      • Investigate to determine if these features are present and just not in use.
      • Contact the vendor if necessary.
      • If enough features are present, determine if additional training is required.
      • If tool is proven to be inadequate, investigate options.

      Consider alternatives:

      Use Info-Tech’s blueprints for further guidance on selecting and implementing an ITSM tool

      1. Select a tool

      Info-Tech regularly evaluates ITSM solution providers and ranks each in terms of functionality and affordability. The results are published in the Enterprise and Mid-Market Service Desk Software Vendor Landscapes.

      2. Implement the tool

      After selecting a solution, follow the Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan project to develop an implementation plan to ensure the tool is appropriately designed, installed, and tested and that technicians are sufficiently trained to ensure successful deployment and adoption of the tool.

      Compare your existing service desks with the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

      Complete the scorecard tool along with the activities of the next step

      The Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool will allow you to compare metrics and maturity results across your service desks to identify weak and poor performers and processes.

      The purpose of this tool is to organize the data from up to six service desks that are part of a service desk consolidation initiative. Displaying this data in an organized fashion, while offering a robust comparative analysis, should facilitate the process of establishing a new baseline for the consolidated service desk.

      Use the results on tab 4 of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool. Enter the data from each service desk into tab “2. InfoCards” of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool.

      Data from up to six service desks (up to six copies of the assessment tool) can be entered into this tool for comparison.

      Set targets for key metrics to identify high performing service desks

      2.1.8 Use the scorecard tool to set target metrics against which to compare service desks

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You’ll Need
      • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
      1. Review the explanations of the six core metrics identified from the service desk assessment tool. These are detailed on tab 3 of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool.
        1. End-user satisfaction
        2. Agent satisfaction
        3. Cost per ticket
        4. Agent utilization rate
        5. First contact resolution rate
        6. First tier resolution rate
      2. For each metric (except agent utilization), define a “worst” and “best” target number. These numbers should be realistic and determined only after some consideration.
      • Service desks scoring at or above the “best” threshold for a particular metric will receive 100% on that metric; while service desks scoring at or below the “worst” threshold for a particular metric will receive 0% on that metric.
      • For agent utilization, only a “best” target number is entered. Service desks hitting this target number exactly will receive 100%, with scores decreasing as a service desk’s agent utilization gets further away from this target.
    • Identify the importance of each metric and vary the values in the “weighting” column accordingly.
    • The values entered on this tab will be used in calculating the overall metric score for each service desk, allowing you to compare the performance of existing service desks against each other and against your target state.

      Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices

      2.1.9 Discuss the results of the scorecard tool

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director (optional)
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
      1. Facilitate a discussion on the results of the scorecard tool on tabs 4 (Overall Results), 5 (Maturity Results), and 6 (Metrics Results).
      2. Identify the top performing service desks(s) (SD Champions) as identified by the average of their metric and maturity scores.
      3. Identify the top performing service desk by maturity level (tab 5; Level 3 – Integrated or Optimized), paying particular attention to high scorers on process maturity and maturity in incident & service request management.
      4. Identify the top performing service desk by metric score (tab 6), paying particular attention to the metrics that tie into your KPIs.
      5. For those service desks, review their processes and identify what they are doing well to glean best practices.
        1. Incorporate best practices from existing high performing service desks into your target state.
        2. If one service desk is already performing well in all areas, you may choose to model your consolidated service desk after it.

      Document processes and procedures in an SOP

      Define the standard operating procedures for the consolidated service desk

      Develop one set of standard operating procedures to ensure consistent service delivery across locations.

      One set of standard operating procedures for the new service desk is essential for a successful consolidation.

      Info-Tech’s Consolidated Service Desk SOP Template provides a detailed example of documenting procedures for service delivery, roles and responsibilities, escalation and prioritization rules, workflows for incidents and service requests, and resolution targets to help ensure consistent service expectations across locations.

      Use this template as a guide to develop or refine your SOP and define the processes for the consolidated service desk.

      Step 2.2: Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

      Phase 2

      Design consolidation

      2.1 Design target consolidated state

      2.2 Assess logistics and cost

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 2.2.1 Plan logistics for process, technology, and facilities
      • 2.2.2 Plan logistics around resource allocation
      • 2.2.3 Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project
      This step involves the following participants:
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      Step outcomes
      • An understanding and list of tasks to accomplish to ensure all logistical considerations for the consolidation are accounted for
      • An analysis of the impact on staffing and service levels using the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator
      • An assessment of the cost of consolidation and the cost savings of a consolidated service desk using a TCO tool

      The United States Coast Guard’s consolidation saved $20 million in infrastructure and support costs

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: US Coast Guard

      Source: CIO Rear Adm. Robert E. Day, Jr. (retired)

      Challenges

      The US Coast Guard was providing internal IT support for 42,000 members on active duty from 11 distinct regional IT service centers around the US.

      Pain Points

      1. Maintaining 11 disparate IT architectures was costly and time consuming.
      2. Staffing inefficiencies limited the USCG’s global IT service operations to providing IT support from 8am to 4pm.
      3. Individual sites were unable to offload peak volume during heavier call loads to other facilities.
      4. Enforcing adherence to standard delivery processes, procedures, and methods was nearly impossible.
      5. Personnel didn’t have a single point of contact for IT support.
      6. Leadership has limited access to consolidated analytics.

      Outcomes

      • Significant reduction in infrastructure, maintenance, and support costs.
      • Reduced risk through comprehensive disaster recovery.
      • Streamlined processes and procedures improved speed of incident resolution.
      • Increased staffing efficiencies.
      • Deeper analytical insight into service desk performance.

      Admiral Day was the CIO from 2009 to 2014. In 2011, he lead an initiative to consolidate USCG service desks.

      Selecting a new location communicated the national mandate of the consolidated service desk

      Site Selection - Decision Procedures

      • Determine location criteria, including:
        • Access to airports, trains, and highways
        • Workforce availability and education
        • Cost of land, real estate, taxes
        • Building availability Financial incentives
      • Review space requirements (i.e. amount and type of space).
      • Identify potential locations and analyze with defined criteria.
      • Develop cost models for various alternatives.
      • Narrow selection to 2-3 sites. Analyze for fit and costs.
      • Conduct site visits to evaluate each option.
      • Make a choice and arrange for securing the site.
      • Remember to compare the cost to retrofit existing space with the cost of creating a space for the consolidated service desk.

      Key Decision

      Relocating to a new location involved potentially higher implementation costs, which was a significant disadvantage.

      Ultimately, the relocation reinforced the national mandate of the consolidated service desk. The new organization would act as a single point of contact for the support of all 42,000 members of the US Coast Guard.

      "Before our regional desks tended to take on different flavors and processes. Today, users get the same experience whether they’re in Alaska or Maryland by calling one number: (855) CG-FIX IT." – Rear Adm. Robert E. Day, Jr. (retired)

      Plan the logistics of the consolidation to inform the project roadmap and cost assessment

      Before proceeding, validate that the target state is achievable by evaluating the logistics of the consolidation itself.

      A detailed project roadmap will help break down the project into manageable tasks to reach the target state, but there is no value to this if the target state is not achievable or realistic.

      Don’t forget to assess the logistics of the consolidation that can be overlooked during the planning phase:

      • Service desk size
      • Location of the service desk
      • Proximity to company management and facilities
      • Unique applications, platforms, or configurations in each location/region
      • Distribution of end-user population and varying end-user needs
      • Load balancing
      • Call routing across locations
      • Special ergonomic or accessibility requirements by location
      • Language requirements

      Info-Tech Insight

      Language barriers can form significant hurdles or even roadblocks for the consolidation project. Don’t overlook the importance of unique language requirements and ensure the consolidated service desk will be able to support end-user needs.

      Plan logistics for process, technology, and facilities

      2.2.1 Assess logistical and cost considerations around processes, technology, and facilities

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      • Consolidate roadmap
      Document

      Identify tasks that should form part of the roadmap and document in the roadmap tool.

      Identify costs that should be included in the TCO assessment and document in the TCO tool.

      Discuss and identify any logistic and cost considerations that will need to form part of the consolidation plan and roadmap. Examples are highlighted below.

      Logistic considerations

      • Impact of ticket intake process changes on end users
      • Process change impact on SLAs and productivity standards
      • Call routing changes and improvements
      • Workstations and workspace – is there enough and what will it look like for each agent?
      • Physical access to the service desk – will walk-ups be permitted? Is it accessible?
      • Security or authorization requirements for specific agents that may be impacted by relocation
      • Layout and design of new location, if applicable
      • Hardware, platform, network, and server implications
      • Licensing and contract limitations of the service desk tool

      Cost considerations

      • Cost savings from ITSM tool consolidation
      • Cost of new ITSM tool purchase, if applicable
      • Efficiencies gained from process simplification
      • New hardware or software purchases
      • Cost per square foot of new physical location, if applicable

      Develop a staffing plan that leverages the strengths you currently have and supplement where your needs require

      Your staff are your greatest assets; be sensitive to their concerns as you plan the consolidation.

      Keep in mind that if your target state involves reorganization of resources and the creation of resources, there will be additional staffing tasks that should form part of the consolidation plan. These include:

      • Develop job descriptions and reporting relationships
      • Evaluate current competencies Identify training and hiring needs
      • Develop migration strategy (including severance and migration packages)

      If new positions will be created, follow these steps to mitigate risks:

      1. Conduct skills assessments (a skills inventory should have been completed in phase 1)
      2. Re-interview existing staff for open positions before considering hiring outside staff
      3. Hire staff from outside if necessary

      For more guidance on hiring help desk staff, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Manage Help Desk Staffing.

      Be sensitive to employee concerns.

      Develop guiding principles for the consolidation to ensure that employee satisfaction remains a priority throughout the consolidation.

      Examples include:

      1. Reconcile existing silos and avoid creating new silos
      2. Keep current systems where it makes sense to avoid staff having to learn multiple new systems to do their jobs and to reduce costs
      3. Repurpose staff and allocate according to their knowledge and expertise as much as possible
      4. Remain open and transparent about all changes and communicate change regularly

      Info-Tech Insight

      The most talented employees can be lost in the migration to a consolidated service desk, resulting in organizational loss of core knowledge. Mitigate this risk using measurement strategies, competency modeling, and knowledge sharing to reduce ambiguity and discomfort of affected employees.

      Plan logistics around resource allocation

      2.2.2 Assess logistical and cost considerations around people

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You’ll Need
      • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
      • Consolidate roadmap
      Document

      Identify tasks that should form part of the roadmap and document in the roadmap tool.

      Identify costs that should be included in the TCO assessment and document in the TCO tool.

      Discuss and identify any logistic and cost considerations surrounding resources and staffing that will need to form part of the consolidation plan and roadmap. Examples are highlighted below.

      Logistic considerations

      • Specialized training requirements for staff moving to new roles
      • Enablement of knowledge sharing across agents
      • Potential attrition of staff who do not wish to relocate or be reallocated
      • Relocation of staff – will staff have to move and will there be incentives for moving?
      • Skills requirements, recruitment needs, job descriptions, and postings for hiring

      Cost considerations

      • Existing and future salaries for employees
      • Potential attrition of employees
      • Retention costs and salary increases to keep employees
      • Hiring costs
      • Training needs and costs

      Assess impact on staffing with the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

      How do organizations calculate the staffing implications of a service desk consolidation?

      The Service Desk Efficiency Calculator uses the ITIL Gross Staffing Model to think through the impact of consolidating service desk processes.

      To estimate the impact of the consolidation on staffing levels, estimate what will happen to three variables:

      • Ticket volume
      • Average call resolution
      • Spare capacity

      All things being equal, a reduction in ticket volume (through outsourcing or the implementation of self-serve options, for example), will reduce your staffing requirements (all things being equal). The same goes for a reduction in the average call resolution rate.

      Constraints:

      Spare capacity: Many organizations are motivated to consolidate service desks by potential reductions in staffing costs. However, this is only true if your service desk agents have spare capacity to take on the consolidated ticket volume. If they don’t, you will still need the same number of agents to do the work at the consolidated service desk.

      Agent capabilities: If your agents have specialised skills that you need to maintain the same level of service, you won’t be able to reduce staffing until agents are cross-trained.

      Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project

      2.2.3 Discuss the results of the efficiency calculator in the context of consolidation

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You’ll Need
      • Completed Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

      The third tab of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator will quantify:

      • Service Desk Staffing: The impact of different ticket distribution on service desk staffing levels.
      • Service Desk Ticket Resolution Cost: The impact of different ticket distributions on ticket resolution costs.
      • Service Management Efficiency: The business impact of service management initiatives, specifically, the time lost or captured in service management processes relative to an average full-time employee equivalent.

      Facilitate a discussion around the results.

      Evaluate where you are now and where you hope to be. Focus on the efficiency gains expected from the outsourcing project. Review the expected gains in average resolution time, the expected impact on service desk ticket volume, and the associated productivity gains.

      Use this information to refine the business case and project plan for the consolidation, if needed.

      Assess consolidation costs and cost savings to refine the business case

      While cost savings should not be the primary driver of consolidation, they should be a key outcome of the project in order to deliver value.

      Typical cost savings for a service desk consolidation are highlighted below:

      People 10-20% savings (through resource pooling and reallocation)

      Process 5-10% savings (through process simplification and efficiencies gained)

      Technology 10-15% savings (through improved call routing and ITSM tool consolidation)

      Facilities 5-10% savings (through site selection and redesign)

      Cost savings should be balanced against the costs of the consolidation itself (including hiring for consolidation project managers or consultants, moving expenses, legal fees, etc.)

      Evaluate consolidation costs using the TCO Comparison Tool described in the next section.

      Analyze resourcing and budgeting to create a realistic TCO and evaluate the benefits of consolidation

      Use the TCO tool to assess the cost and cost savings of consolidation

      • The tool compares the cost of operating two service desks vs. one consolidated service desk, along with the cost of consolidation.
      • If your consolidation effort involves more than two facilities, then use multiple copies of the tool.
        • E.g. If you are consolidating four service desks (A, B, C, and D) into one service desk (X), then use two copies of the tool. We encourage you to book an analyst call to help you get the most out of this tool and process.

      Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

      Refine the business case and update the executive presentation

      Check in with executives and project sponsor before moving forward with the transition

      Since completing the executive visioning session in step 1.2, you should have completed the following activities:

      • Current state assessment
      • Detailed target state and metrics
      • Gap analysis between current and target state
      • Assessment of logistics and cost of consolidation

      The next step will be to develop a project roadmap to achieve the consolidation vision.

      Before doing this, check back in with the project sponsor and business executives to refine the business case, obtain necessary approvals, and secure buy-in.

      If necessary, add to the executive presentation you completed in step 1.2, copying results of the deliverables you have completed since:

      • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool (current state assessment)
      • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
      • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

      If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      2.1.3 Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk

      Identify process requirements and desired characteristics for the target consolidated service desk.

      2.1.9 Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices

      Review the results of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool to identify top performing service desks and glean best practices.

      Phase 3

      Plan the Transition

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 3: Plan the transition

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4

      Step 3.1: Build project roadmap

      Discuss with an analyst:

      • Identify specific initiatives for the consolidation project and evaluate the risks and dependencies for each
      • Plot initiatives on a detailed project roadmap with assigned responsibilities

      Then complete these activities…

      • Break the consolidation project down into specific initiatives
      • Identify and document risks and dependencies
      • Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap
      • Select transition date for consolidation

      With these tools & templates:

      Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap

      Step 3.2: Communicate the change

      Discuss with an analyst:

      • Identify the goals of communication, then develop a communications plan with targeted messaging for each stakeholder group to achieve those goals
      • Brainstorm potential objections and questions as well as responses to each

      Then complete these activities…

      • Build the communications delivery plan
      • Brainstorm potential objections and questions and prepare responses
      • Complete the news bulletin to distribute to your end users

      With these tools & templates:

      Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template

      Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template

      Phase 3 Results:
      • A detailed project roadmap toward consolidation and a communications plan to ensure stakeholders are on board

      Step 3.1: Build the project roadmap

      Phase 3

      Plan the consolidation

      3.1 Build the project roadmap

      3.2 Communicate the change

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 3.1.1 Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives
      • 3.1.2 Identify and document risks and dependencies
      • 3.1.3 Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap
      • 3.1.4 Select transition date based on business cycles
      This step involves the following participants:
      • CIO
      • IT Directors
      • Service Desk Managers
      • Consolidation Project Manager
      • Service Desk Technicians
      Step outcomes

      A detailed roadmap to migrate to a single, consolidated service desk, including:

      • A breakdown of specific tasks groups by people, process, and technology
      • Identified risks and dependencies for each task
      • A timeline for completion of each task and the overall consolidation
      • Assigned responsibility for task completion

      Failure to engage stakeholders led to the failure of a large healthcare organization’s consolidation

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Healthcare

      Source: Organizational insider

      A large US healthcare facilities organization implemented a service desk consolidation initiative in early 2013. Only 18 months later, they reluctantly decided to return to their previous service desk model.

      Why did this consolidation effort fail?

      1. Management failed to communicate the changes to service-level staff, leading to agent confusion and pushback. Initially, each desk became part of the other’s overflow queue with no mention of the consolidation effort. Next, the independent desks began to share a basic request queue. Finally, there was a complete virtual consolidation – which came as a shock to service agents.
      2. The processes and workflows of the original service desks were not integrated, requiring service agents to consult different processes and use different workflows when engaging with end users from different facilities, even though all calls were part of the same queue.
      3. Staff at the different service centers did not have a consistent level of expertise or technical ability, even though they all became part of the same queue. This led to a perceived drop in end-user satisfaction – end users were used to getting a certain level of service and were suddenly confronted with less experienced agents.

      Before Consolidation

      Two disparate service desks:

      • With distinct geographic locations.
      • Servicing several healthcare facilities in their respective regions.
      • With distinct staff, end users, processes, and workflows.

      After Consolidation

      One virtually-consolidated service desk servicing many facilities spread geographically over two distinct locations.

      The main feature of the new virtual service desk was a single, pooled ticket queue drawn from all the end users and facilities in the new geographic regions.

      Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives

      3.1.1 Create a list of specific tasks that will form the consolidation project

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You’ll Need
      • Whiteboard and markers
      • List of prioritized target state requirements
      • Consolidation roadmap
      Document

      Document the list of initiatives in the Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap.

      In order to translate your newly made decisions regarding the target state and logistical considerations into a successful consolidation strategy, create an exhaustive list of all the steps and sub-steps that will lead you from your current state to your target state.

      Use the next few steps to finish brainstorming the initiative list, identify risks and dependencies, and construct a detailed timeline populated with specific project steps.

      Instructions

      Start with the list you have been curating throughout the current and future state assessments. If you are completing this project as a workshop, add to the initiative list you have been developing on the whiteboard.

      Try to organize your initiatives into groups of related tasks. Begin arranging your initiatives into people, process, technology, or other categories.

      Whiteboard People Process Technology Other

      Evaluate the impact of potential risks and develop a backup plan for high risk initiatives

      A service desk consolidation has a high potential for risks. Have a backup plan prepared for when events don’t go as planned.

      • A consolidation project requires careful planning as it is high risk and not performed often.
      • Apply the same due diligence to the consolidation plan as you do in preparing your disaster recovery plan. Establish predetermined resolutions to realistic risks so that the team can think of solutions quickly during the consolidation.

      Potential Sources of Risk

      • Service desk tool or phone line downtime prevents ability to submit tickets
      • Unable to meet SLAs through the transition
      • Equipment failure or damage through the physical move
      • Lost data through tool migration
      • Lost knowledge from employee attrition
      Risk - degree of impact if activities do not go as planned High

      A – High Risk, Low Frequency

      Tasks that are rarely done and are high risk. Focus attention here with careful planning (e.g. consolidation)

      B – High Risk, High Frequency

      Tasks that are performed regularly and must be watched closely each time (e.g. security authorizations)

      C – Low Risk, Low Frequency

      Tasks that are performed regularly with limited impact or risk (e.g. server upgrades)

      D – Low Risk, High Frequency

      Tasks that are done all the time and are not risky (e.g. password resets)

      Low High
      Frequency - how often the activity has been performed

      Service desk consolidations fit in category A

      Identify risks for people, processes, tools, or data to ensure the project plan will include appropriate mitigations

      Each element of the consolidation has an inherent risk associated with it as the daily service flow is interrupted. Prepare in advance by anticipating these risks.

      The project manager, service desk managers, and subject matter experts (SMEs) of different areas, departments, or locations should identify risks for each of the processes, tools, resource groups (people), and any data exchanges and moves that will be part of the project or impacted by the project.

      Process - For each process, validate that workflows can remain intact throughout the consolidation project. If any gaps may occur in the process flows, develop a plan to be implemented in parallel with the consolidation to ensure service isn’t interrupted.

      Technology - For a tool consolidation, upgrade, or replacement, verify that there is a plan in place to ensure continuation of service delivery processes throughout the change.

      Make a plan for if and how data from the old tool(s) will be migrated to the new tool, and how the new tool will be installed and configured.

      People - For movement of staff, particularly with termination, identify any risks that may occur and involve your HR and legal departments to ensure all movement is compliant with larger processes within the organization.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Don’t overlook the little things. Sometimes the most minor-seeming components of the consolidation can cause the greatest difficulty. For example, don’t assume that the service desk phone number can simply roll over to a new location and support the call load of a combined service desk. Verify it.

      Identify and document risks and dependencies

      3.1.2 Risks, challenges, and dependencies exercise - Estimated Time: 60 minutes

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • SMEs
      What You'll Need
      • Whiteboard and markers
      • List of initiatives identified in previous activities
      • Consolidation roadmap
      Document

      Use the outcome of this activity to complete your consolidation roadmap.

      Instructions
      • Document risks and challenges, as well as dependencies associated with the initiatives identified earlier, using a different color sticky note from your initiatives.
      • See example below.
      Combine Related Initiatives
      • Look for initiatives that are highly similar, dependent on each other, or occurring at the same time. Consolidate these initiatives into a single initiative with several sub-steps in order to better organize your roadmap and reduce redundancy.
      • Create hierarchies for dependent initiatives that could affect the scheduling of initiatives on a roadmap, and reorganize the whiteboard where necessary.
      Optional:
      • Use a scoring method to categorize risks. E.g.:
        • High: will stop or delay operations, radically increase cost, or significantly reduce consolidation benefits
        • Medium: would cause some delay, cost increase, or performance shortfall, but would not threaten project viability
        • Low: could impact the project to a limited extent, causing minor delays or cost increases
      • Develop contingency plans for high risks or adjust to avoid the problem entirely
      Implement new ISTM tool:
      • Need to transition from existing tools
      • Users must be trained
      • Data and open tickets must be migrated

      Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap

      3.1.3 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      Document

      Document your initiatives on tab 2 of the Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap or map it out on a whiteboard.

      Determine the sequence of initiatives, identify milestones, and assign dates.
      • The purpose of this exercise is to define a timeline and commit to initiatives to reach your goals.
      • Determine the order in which previously identified consolidation initiatives will be implemented, document previously identified risks and dependencies, assign ownership for each task, and assign dates for pilots and launch.

      Select transition date based on business cycles

      3.1.4

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Consolidation roadmap
      Document

      Adjust initiatives in the consolidation roadmap if necessary.

      The transition date will be used in communications in the next step.

      1. Review the initiatives in the roadmap and the resulting sunshine diagram on tab 3.
      2. Verify that the initiatives will be possible within the determined time frame and adjust if necessary.
      3. Based on the results of the roadmap, select a target transition date for the consolidation by determining:
        1. Whether there are dates when a major effort of this kind should not be scheduled.
        2. Whether there are merger and acquisition requirements that dictate a specific date for the service desk merger.
      4. Select multiple measurable checkpoints to alert the team that something is awry and mitigate risks.
      5. Verify that stakeholders are aware of the risks and the proposed steps necessary to mitigate them, and assign the necessary resources to them.
      6. Document or adjust the target transition date in the roadmap.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Consolidating service desks doesn’t have to be done in one shot, replacing all your help desks, tools, and moving staff all at the same time. You can take a phased approach to consolidating, moving one location, department, or tool at a time to ease the transition.

      Step 3.2: Communicate the change

      Phase 3

      Design consolidation

      3.1 Build the project roadmap

      3.2 Communicate the change

      This step will walk you through the following activities:
      • 3.2.1 Build the communications delivery plan
      • 3.2.2 Brainstorm potential objections and questions and prepare responses
      This step involves the following participants:
      • IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Agents
      Step outcomes
      • A detailed communications plan with key messages, delivery timeline, and spokesperson responsibility for each key stakeholder audience
      • A set of agreed-upon responses to anticipated objections and questions to ensure consistent message delivery
      • A news bulletin and list of FAQs to distribute to end users to prepare them for the change

      Create your communication plan with everyone in mind, from the CIO to end users

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      Oxford implemented extremely innovative initiatives as part of its robust communications plan.

      ITS ran a one-day ITSM “business simulation” for the CIO and direct reports, increasing executive buy-in.

      The business simulation was incredibly effective as a way of getting management buy-in – it really showed what we are driving at. It’s a way of making it real, bringing people on board. ” – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service

      Detailed use cases were envisioned referencing particular ITIL processes as the backbone of the process framework.

      The use cases were very helpful, they were used […] in getting a broad engagement from teams across our department and getting buy-in from the distributed IT staff who we work with across the wider University. ” – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service

      The Oxford ITS SDCP blog was accessible to everyone.

      • Oxford’s SDCP blog acted as a project touchstone not only to communicate updates quickly, but also to collect feedback, enable collaboration, and set a project tone.
      • An informal tone and accessible format facilitated the difficult cultural shifts required of the consolidation effort.

      We in the project team would love to hear your view on this project and service management in general, so please feel free to comment on this blog post, contact us using the project email address […] or, for further information visit the project SharePoint site […] ” – Oxford ITS SDCP blog post

      Plan for targeted and timely communications to all stakeholders

      Develop a plan to keep all affected stakeholders informed about the changes consolidation will bring, and more importantly, how they will affect them.

      All stakeholders must be kept informed of the project plan and status as the consolidation progresses.
      • Management requires frequent communication with the core project group to evaluate the success of the project in meeting its goals.
      • End users should be informed about changes that are happening and how these changes will affect them.

      A communications plan should address three elements:

      1. The audience and their communication needs
      2. The most effective means of communicating with this audience
      3. Who should deliver the message

      Goals of communication:

      1. Create awareness and understanding of the consolidation and what it means for each role, department, or user group
      2. Gain commitment to the change from all stakeholders
      3. Reduce and address any concerns about the consolidation and be transparent in responding to any questions
      4. Communicate potential risks and mitigation plan
      5. Set expectations for service levels throughout and after the consolidation

      Plan the method of delivery for your communications carefully

      Plan the message, test it with a small audience, then deliver to your employees and stakeholders in person to avoid message avoidance or confusion.

      Message Format

      Email and Newsletters

      Email and newsletters are convenient and can be transmitted to large audiences easily, but most users are inundated with email already and may not notice or read the message.

      • Use email to make large announcements or invite people to meetings but not as the sole medium of communication.

      Face-to-Face Communication

      Face-to-face communication helps to ensure that users are receiving and understanding a clear message, and allows them to voice their concerns and clarify any confusion or questions.

      • Use one-on-ones for key stakeholders and team meetings for groups.

      Internal Website/Drive

      Internal sites help sustain change by making knowledge available after the consolidation, but won’t be retained beforehand.

      • Use for storing policies, how-to-guides, and SOPs.
      Message Delivery
      1. Plan your message
        1. Emphasize what the audience really needs to know, that is, how the change will impact them.
      2. Test your message
        1. Run focus groups or test your communications with a small audience (2-3 people) first to get feedback and adjust messages before delivering them more broadly.
      3. Deliver and repeat your message
        1. “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
      4. Gather feedback and evaluate communications
        1. Evaluate the effectiveness of the communications (through surveys, focus groups, stakeholder interviews, or metrics) to ensure the message was delivered and received successfully and communication goals were met.

      Address the specific concerns of the business vs. employees

      Focus on alleviating concerns from both sides of the communication equation: the business units and employees.

      Business units:

      Be attentive to the concerns of business unit management about loss of power. Appease worries about the potential risk of reduced service quality and support responsiveness that may have been experienced in prior corporate consolidation efforts.

      Make the value of the consolidation clear, and involve business unit management in the organizational change process.

      Focus on producing a customer-focused consolidated service desk. It will assuage fears over the loss of control and influence. Business units may be relinquishing control of their service desk, but they should retain the same level of influence.

      Employees:

      Employees are often fearful of the impact of a consolidation on their jobs. These fears should be addressed and alleviated as soon as possible.

      Design a communication plan outlining the changes and the reasons motivating it.

      Put support programs in place for displaced and surviving employees.

      Motivate employees during the transition and increase employee involvement in the change.

      Educate and train employees who make the transition to the new structure and new job demands.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Know your audience. Be wary of using technical jargon or acronyms that may seem like common knowledge within your department but would not be part of the vocabulary of non-technical audiences. Ensure your communications are suitable for the audience. If you need to use jargon or acronyms, explain what you mean.

      Build the communications delivery plan

      3.2.1 Develop a plan to deliver targeted messages to key stakeholder groups

      Participants
      • CIO or IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      What You'll Need
      • Communications plan template
      • Whiteboard and markers
      Document

      Document your decisions in the communications plan template

      1. Define the goals of the communications in section 1 of the Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template.
      2. Determine when communication milestones/activities need to be delivered by completing the Communications Schedule in section 2.
      3. Determine the key stakeholder groups or audiences to whom you will need to deliver communications.
      4. Identify the content of the key messages that need to be delivered and select the most appropriate delivery method for each (i.e. email, team meeting, individual meetings). Designate who will be responsible for delivering the messages.
      5. Document a plan for gathering feedback and evaluating the effectiveness of the communications in section 5 (i.e. stakeholder interviews and surveys).

      Section 4 of the communications plan on objections and question handling will be completed in activity 3.2.2.

      Optional Activity

      If you completed the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook in step 1.1, you may also complete the Communications tab in that workbook to further develop your plan to engage stakeholders.

      Effectively manage the consolidation by implementing change management processes

      Implement change management processes to ensure that the consolidation runs smoothly with limited impact on IT infrastructure.

      Communicate and track changes: Identify and communicate changes to all stakeholders affected by the change to ensure they are aware of any downtime and can plan their own activities accordingly.

      Isolate testing: Test changes within a safe non-production environment to eliminate the risk of system outages that result from defects discovered during testing.

      Document back-out plans: Documented back-out/backup plans enable quick recovery in the event that the change fails.

      The image is a horizontal bar graph, titled Unplanned downtime due to change versus change management maturity. The graph shows that for a Change Management Maturity that is Informal, the % Experiencing Unplanned Downtime due to Failed Change is 41%; for Defined, it is 25%; and for Optimized, it is 19%.

      Organizations that have more mature and defined change management processes experience less unplanned downtime when implementing change across the organization.

      Sustain changes by adapting people, processes, and technologies to accept the transition

      Verify that people, process, and technologies are prepared for the consolidation before going live with the transition.

      What?

      1. Adapt people to the change

      • Add/change roles and responsibilities.
      • Move people to different roles/teams.
      • Change compensation and incentive structures to reinforce new goals, if applicable.

      2. Adapt processes to the change

      • Add/change supporting processes.
      • Eliminate or consolidate legacy processes.
      • Add/change standard operating procedures.

      3. Adapt technologies to the change

      • Add/change/update supporting technologies.
      • Eliminate or consolidate legacy technologies
      How? Work with HR on any changes involving job design, personnel changes, or compensation. Work with enterprise architects or business analysts to manage significant changes to processes that may impact the business and service levels.

      See Info-Tech’s Optimize the Change Management Processblueprint to use a disciplined change control process for technology changes.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Organizational change management (OCM) is widely recognized as a key component of project success, yet many organizations struggle to get adoption for new tools, policies, and procedures. Use Info-Tech’s blueprint on driving organizational change to develop a strategy and toolkit to achieve project success.

      Manage people by addressing their specific concerns based on their attitude toward change

      Avoid high turnover and resistance to change by engaging both the enthusiasts and the skeptics with targeted messaging.

      • Clearly articulate and strongly champion the changes that will result from the consolidation for those willing to adapt to the change.
      • Make change management practices integral to the entire project.
      • Provide training workshops on new processes, new goals or metrics, new technologies and tools, and teamwork as early as possible after consolidation.
      1. Enthusiasts - Empower them to stay motivated and promote the change
      2. Fence-Sitters/Indifferent - Continually motivate them by example but give them time to adapt to the change
      3. Skeptics - Engage them early and address their concerns and doubts to convert them to enthusiasts
      4. Saboteurs - Prevent them from spreading dissent and rumors, thus undermining the project, by counteracting negative claims early

      Leverage the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook from step 1.1 as well as Info-Tech’s blueprint on driving organizational change for more tactics on change management, particularly managing and engaging various personas.

      Prepare ahead of time for questions that various stakeholder groups may have

      Anticipate questions that will arise about the consolidation so you can prepare and distribute responses to frequently asked questions. Sample questions from various stakeholders are provided below.

      General
      1. Why is the organization moving to a consolidated service desk?
      2. Where is the consolidated service desk going to be located?
      3. Are all or only some service desks consolidating?
      4. When is the consolidation happening?
      5. What are the anticipated benefits of consolidation?

      Business

      1. What is the budget for the project?
      2. What are the anticipated cost savings and return on investment?
      3. When will the proposed savings be realized?
      4. Will there be job losses from the consolidation and when will these occur?
      5. Will the organization subsidize moving costs?

      Employees

      1. Will my job function be changing?
      2. Will my job location be changing?
      3. What will happen if I can’t relocate?
      4. Will my pay and benefits be the same?
      5. Will reporting relationships change?
      6. Will performance expectations and metrics change?

      End Users

      1. How do I get help with IT issues?
      2. How do I submit a ticket?
      3. How will I be notified of ticket status, outages?
      4. Where will the physical service desk be located?
      5. Will I be able to get help in my language?
      6. Will there be changes for levels of service?

      Brainstorm likely objections/questions to prepare responses

      3.2.2 Prepare responses to likely questions to ensure consistent messaging

      Participants
      • IT Director
      • Project Manager
      • Service Desk Manager(s)
      • Service Desk Agents
      Document

      Document your questions and responses in section 4 of the communications plan template. This should be continually updated.

      1. Brainstorm anticipated objections and questions you may hear from various stakeholder groups: service desk employees, end users, and management or executives.
      2. For each objection or question, prepare a response that will be delivered to ensure consistent messaging. Use a table like the example below.
      Group Objection/Question Response
      Service desk staff I’m comfortable with the service desk tool we’ve been using here and won’t know how to use the new one. We carefully evaluated the new solution against our requirements and selected it as the one that will provide the best service to our users and be user friendly. We tested the solution through user-acceptance testing to ensure staff will be comfortable using it, and we will provide comprehensive training to all users of the tool before launching it.
      End user I’m used to going to my favorite technician for help. How will I get service now? We are initiating a single point of contact so that you will know exactly where to go to get help quickly and easily, so that we can more quickly escalate your issue to the appropriate technician, and so that we can resolve it and notify you as soon as possible. This will make our service more effective and efficient than you having to find one individual who may be tied up with other work or unavailable.

      Keep the following in mind when formulating your responses:

      • Lead with the benefits
      • Be transparent and honest
      • Avoid acronyms, jargon, and technical terms
      • Appeal to both emotion and reason
      • Be concise and straightforward
      • Don’t be afraid to be repetitive; people need repetition to remember the message
      • Use concrete facts and images wherever possible

      Complete the Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template to distribute to your end users

      Customize the template or use as a guide to develop your own

      The Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template is intended to be an example that you can follow or modify for your own organization. It provides a summary of how the consolidation project will change how end users interact with the service desk.

      1. What the change means to end users
      2. When they should contact the service desk (examples)
      3. How to contact the service desk (include all means of contact and ticket submission)
      4. Answers to questions they may have
      5. Links to more information

      The bulletin is targeted for mass distribution to end users. A similar letter may be developed for service desk staff, though face-to-face communication is recommended.

      Instructions:

      1. Use the template as a guide to develop your own FAQ news bulletin and adjust any sections or wording as you see fit.
      2. You may wish to develop separate letters for each location, referring more specifically to their location and where the new service desk will be located.
      3. Save the file as a PDF for print or email distribution at the time determined in your communications plan.

      Keeping people a priority throughout the project ensured success

      CASE STUDY

      Industry: Higher Education

      Source: Oxford University, IT Services

      Oxford’s new consolidated service desk went live April 20, 2015.

      They moved from 3 distinct tools and 5 disparate help desks to a single service desk with one robust ITSM solution, all grounded by a unified set of processes and an integrated workflow.

      The success of this project hinged upon:

      • A bold vision, formulated early and in collaboration with all stakeholders.
      • Willingness to take time to understand the unique perspective of each role and help desk, then carefully studying existing processes and workflows to build upon what works.
      • Constant collaboration, communication, and the desire to listen to feedback from all interested parties.

      "We have had a few teething issues to deal with, but overall this has been a very smooth transition given the scale of it." – ICTF Trinity Term 2015 IT Services Report

      Beyond the initial consolidation.
      • Over the summer of 2015, ITS moved to full 24/7 support coverage.
      • Oxford’s ongoing proposition with regard to support services is to extend the new consolidated service desk beyond its current IT role:
        • Academic Admissions
        • Case Management
        • IT Purchasing
      • To gradually integrate those IT departments/colleges/faculties that remain independent at the present time.
      • Info-Tech can facilitate these goals in your organization with our research blueprint, Extend the Service Desk to Enterprise.

      If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      3.1.1 Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives

      Create a list of specific tasks that will form the consolidation project on sticky notes and organize into people, process, technology, and other categories to inform the roadmap.

      3.2.2 Brainstorm likely objections/questions to prepare responses

      Brainstorm anticipated questions and objections that will arise from various stakeholder groups and prepare consistent responses to each.

      Related Info-Tech research

      Standardize the Service Desk - Provide timely and effective responses to user requests and resolutions of all incidents.

      Extend the Service Desk to the Enterprise - Position IT as an innovator.

      Build a Continual Improvement Plan for the Service Desk - Teach your old service desk new tricks.

      Adopt Lean IT to Streamline the Service Desk - Turn your service desk into a Lean, keen, value-creating machine.

      Vendor Landscape: Enterprise Service Desk Software - Move past tickets to proactive, integrated service.

      Vendor Landscape: Mid-Market Service Desk Software - Ensure the productivity of the help desk with the right platform.

      Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan - Nail your ITSM tool implementation from the outset.

      Drive Organizational Change from the PMO - Don’t let bad change happen to good projects.

      Research contributors and experts

      Stacey Keener - IT Manager for the Human Health and Performance Directorate, Johnson Space Center, NASA

      Umar Reed - Director of IT Support Services US Denton US LLP

      Maurice Pryce - IT Manager City of Roswell, Georgia

      Ian Goodhart - Senior Business Analyst Allegis Group

      Gerry Veugelaers - Service Delivery Manager New Zealand Defence Force

      Alisa Salley Rogers - Senior Service Desk Analyst HCA IT&S Central/West Texas Division

      Eddie Vidal - IS Service Desk Managers University of Miami

      John Conklin - Chief Information Officer Helen of Troy LP

      Russ Coles - Senior Manager, Computer Applications York Region District Schoolboard

      John Seddon - Principal Vanguard Consulting

      Ryan van Biljon - Director, Technical Services Samanage

      Rear Admiral Robert E. Day Jr. (ret.) - Chief Information Officer United States Coast Guard

      George Bartha - Manager of Information Technology Unifrax

      Peter Hubbard - IT Service Management Consultant Pink Elephant

      Andre Gaudreau - Manager of School Technology Operations York Region District School Board

      Craig Nekola - Manager, Information Technology Anoka County

      Bibliography and Further Reading

      Hoen, Jim. “The Single Point of Contact: Driving Support Process Improvements with a Consolidated IT Help-Desk Approach.” TechTeam Global Inc. September 2005.

      Hubbard, Peter. “Leading University embarks on IT transformation programme to deliver improved levels of service excellence.” Pink Elephant. http://pinkelephant.co.uk/about/case-studies/service-management-case-study/

      IBM Global Services. “Service Desk: Consolidation, Relocation, Status Quo.” IBM. June 2005.

      Keener, Stacey. “Help Desks: a Problem of Astronomical Proportions.” Government CIO Magazine. 1 February 2015.

      McKaughan, Jeff. “Efficiency Driver.” U.S. Coast Guard Forum Jul. 2013. Web. http://www.intergraphgovsolutions.com/documents/CoastGuardForumJuly2013.pdf

      Numara Footprints. “The Top 10 Reasons for Implementing a Consolidated Service Desk.” Numara Software.

      Roy, Gerry, and Frederieke Winkler Prins. “How to Improve Service Quality through Service Desk Consolidation.” BMC Software.

      Smith, Andrew. “The Consolidated Service Desk – An Achievable Goal?” The Service Desk Institute.

      Wolfe, Brandon. “Is it Time for IT Service Desk Consolidation?” Samanage. 4 August 2015.

      Terms of use

       These Terms of Use state the terms and conditions under which you may use this website and the Services, which are the property of Tymans Group BV. ("TY"). Your use of this site and the Services constitutes acceptance of these Terms of Use.
      1. General Use Restrictions

      TY services, advice, materials, products, websites, and networks (collectively the "Services") are to be used for the User (meaning a named individual user that uses the publicly available Services or is authorized by TY in a service agreement to use the Services that require paid access) use and benefit only pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription and may not be disclosed, disseminated or distributed to any other party, except as TY otherwise agrees in writing. The User will not circumvent any encryption or otherwise gain access to Services for which the User has not been expressly granted the appropriate rights of access.

      The User will not use the Services for or knowingly transmit to TY or upload to any TY site or network any illegal, improper, or unacceptable material or use them for illegal, improper, or unacceptable practices, including without limitation the dissemination of any defamatory, fraudulent, infringing, abusive, lewd, obscene or pornographic material, viruses, trojan horses, time bombs, worms, or other harmful code designed to interrupt, destroy, or limit the functionality of any software, hardware or communications equipment, unsolicited mass email or other internet-based advertising campaigns, privacy breaches, denial of use attacks, spoofing, or impersonation.

      1. Copyright

      The Services are © Tymans Group BV. All rights reserved.

      The Services are owned by and copyrighted by TY and other parties and may contain trademarks of TY or others. They are protected by Canadian, US, and international copyright and trademark laws and conventions.

      User may use the Services solely for his or their own information purposes pursuant to the terms and limitations of the paid subscription. The User may download any of the Service's tools or templates for his or her individual use but may not distribute any articles, tools, templates, or blueprints internally, subject to the exceptions below. The User may create derivative works from the Service's tools or templates and distribute these for internal use but may not distribute these derivative works externally for any commercial or resale purposes.

      Any other reproduction or dissemination of the Services in any form or by any means is forbidden without TY's written permission, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the User will not:

      • A. record and re-transmit the Service over any network (including any local area network), except as otherwise stated above;
      • B. use any Service in any timesharing, service bureau, bulletin board, or similar arrangement or public display;
      • C. post any Service to any other online service (including bulletin boards or the internet);
      • D. sublicense, lease, sell, offer for sale or assign the Service; or
      • E. use TY's name or any excerpts from the Services in the promotion of its products or services.
      1. Users

      Users must be authorized to use the Services by TY. Users must maintain and protect the confidentiality of any password(s) and are responsible for ensuring that the passwords are effective. Users shall advise TY immediately if they discover that their password has been compromised at the following number: 1-888-670-8889. If you are an organization that is party to a service agreement with TY, references in these Terms of Use to "User(s)" include you, and you are responsible for compliance by named individual Users within your organization with these Terms of Use.

      1. User Perspective

      For the benefit of all Users, TY's research services include the ability for Users to (i) participate in the creation of research by contributing User perspectives for publication on TY's websites and (ii) participate in industry-specific community groups and other forums by contributing discussion posts. All such contributions are voluntary with the full consent of the User. If your account is used to contribute content to TY's websites (collectively, "User Contributions"), you agree to accept sole responsibility for those User Contributions, including the information, statements, facts, and material contained in any form or medium (e.g., text, audio, video, and photographic) therein. To the extent Users contribute any feedback to TY (as User Contributions or otherwise), TY may use that feedback to assess, improve, and market its products. To the extent Users contribute to research, TY may incorporate those contributions within the research Services without the necessity of attribution. You grant us and our affiliates a worldwide, irrevocable, royalty-free, nonexclusive license to use, reproduce, create derivative works of, distribute publicly display, and publish User Contributions. You agree you will not attempt to enforce any so-called "moral rights" in User Contributions against us or our affiliates.

      By using TY's research services, you agree that none of your User Contributions will:

      • Infringe on the intellectual property, trade secret, privacy, publicity, or other rights of others;
      • Contain false statements or misrepresentations that could damage TY or any third party;
      • Include obscene, libelous, defamatory, threatening, harassing, abusive, hateful, sexually explicit, sexually-oriented, profane, or embarrassing material, as determined by TY in its sole discretion;
      • Be illegal or otherwise objectionable;
      • Contain the personal information of any third party, including, without limitation, addresses, phone numbers, email addresses, Social Security numbers, and credit card numbers;
      • Encourage or facilitate insider trading or anti-competitive behavior;
      • Include commercial advertisements or solicitations; or
      • Purport to or actually provide legal or professional advice.

      BecauseTY's Web sites are available to the public, User Contributions on TY's Web sites are not Confidential Information.

      Although you are solely responsible for the content you provide, and we do not have a policy of reviewing or monitoring all User Contributions, we reserve the right to pre-screen and/or monitor User Contributions. If we become aware of User Contributions that violate these Terms of Service or that we believe to be otherwise objectionable, we may reject or delete them or take other action without notice to you and at our sole discretion.

      If you believe that any User Contributions appear to violate these Terms of Service, or if you believe any other user is engaged in illegal, harassing, or objectionable behavior, please contact us.

      1. Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information

      In these Terms of Use, "Confidential Information" means information of a commercially sensitive or proprietary character that is marked as confidential or that a reasonable person would understand to be confidential. The "Disclosing Party" is the party disclosing Confidential Information, and the "Receiving Party" is the party receiving Confidential Information. However, Confidential Information does not include information that:

      • was in the public domain at the time of communication to the Receiving Party or is later placed in the public domain by the Disclosing Party;
      • entered the public domain through no fault of the Receiving Party subsequent to the time of disclosure hereunder to the Receiving Party;
      • was in the Receiving Party's possession free of any obligation of confidence prior to disclosure hereunder; or
      • was developed by employees or agents of the Receiving Party independently of and without reference to any Confidential Information.

      The Receiving Party shall not disclose, publish or communicate the Confidential Information to any third party without the prior written consent of the Disclosing Party. However, the Receiving Party may disclose the Confidential Information to a third party who has a need to know the Confidential Information and (i) is an accountant, attorney, underwriter, or advisor under a duty of confidentiality; or (ii) is under a written obligation of confidentiality at least as restrictive as this Agreement and to the extent required by law.

      TY may create or use anonymized data for purposes such as benchmarking, analytics, and other good-faith business purposes. Anonymized data is not the Confidential Information of Users.

      1. Term

      Many of the Services are "subscription" services that have a fixed Term and must be renewed in writing at the end of the term for services to continue. The contractual term of membership is generally one (1) to three (3) years in length and is agreed to by the parties in writing. Workshops purchased as part of membership expire without refund or credit at the end of the membership period covered by the purchase. Workshops purchased outside membership expire without refund or credit one (1) year after purchase. TY may terminate a User's access at any time if the User or the entity paying for the User's access violates the terms of use or subscription or any other agreement with TY.

      1. Cancellation

      As the Services are paid in advance for a committed membership term, a service agreement or membership cannot be terminated by a User for convenience during a contractual term.

      1. Changes

      TY strives to innovate. TY may update, upgrade or otherwise change or discontinue content, features, or other aspects of its Services. TY will not make changes that cumulatively degrade the quality of a paid subscription to the Services. TY also reserves the right to change the terms and conditions applicable to your use of the Services unless TY has otherwise agreed in a service agreement. Use of the Services after such changes shall be deemed to be acceptance by the User of such changes. These terms were last revised on June 8, 2022.

      1. Accuracy of Information and Warranty

      The information contained in the Services has been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but TY does not warrant the completeness, timeliness, or accuracy of any information contained in the Services. The Services are intended to: help identify business risks; provide insights based on industry research; and help you focus on certain matters which may be affecting your business. TY does not provide legal, accounting, or other professional advice, nor should any advice from TY be construed as such. We encourage you to seek professional advice whenever necessary.

      TY expressly excludes and disclaims all express or implied conditions, representations, and warranties, including, without limitation, any implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, to the extent allowable by law.

      Although TY takes reasonable steps to screen Services for infection by viruses, worms, Trojan horses, or other code manifesting contaminating or destructive properties before making the Services available, TY cannot guarantee that any Service will be free of infection.

      User assumes sole responsibility for the selection of the Services to achieve its intended results. The opinions expressed in the Services are subject to change without notice.

      TY does not endorse third-party products or services. TY assesses and analyzes the effectiveness and appropriateness of information technology in the context of a general business environment only unless specifically hired by a User to assess in the context of their own environment.

      1. Limitation of Liability

      In no event is TY liable for any special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or other damages however caused, whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability, operation of law, or otherwise (including without limitation damages for lost profits, business interruption or loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the Services, or any information provided in the Services, or claims attributable to errors, omissions or other inaccuracies in the Service or interpretations thereof), even if TY has been advised of the possibility of such damages. TY's total liability shall in no event exceed the amount paid by the User for the Service in question.

      The User acknowledges that TY has set its prices and sold the Services to it in reliance on the limitations of liability and disclaimers of warranties and damages set forth herein and that the same form a fundamental and essential basis of the bargain between the parties. They shall apply even if the contract between the User and TY is found to have failed in its fundamental or essential purpose or has been fundamentally breached.

      1. Links to Third-Party Sites

      Any third-party sites that are linked to the Services are not under TY's control. TY is not responsible for anything on the linked sites, including without limitation any content, links to other sites, any changes to those sites, or any policies those sites may have. TY provides links as a convenience only, and such links do not imply any endorsement by TY of those sites.

      1. Investment Advice

      The Services are not intended to be used for the purpose of, or as a basis for, making investment decisions or recommendations with respect to securities of any company or industry, and TY assumes no liability for decisions made, in whole or in part, on the basis of any information contained in the Services.

      1. Governing Law

      This site and any service agreement are governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, excluding any conflicts of law provisions and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. Any legal action against TY shall take place in the courts of the province of Antwerp, Belgium. The parties attorn to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Ontario.

      1. Entire Agreement

      These standard terms of use, together with any service agreements and statements of work signed by the parties, contains the complete and exclusive statement of Agreement between the parties and supersedes all purchase order terms and conditions, understandings, proposals, negotiations, representations, or warranties of any kind whether written or oral.

      1. Privacy

      A User's right to privacy is of paramount importance to TY. See our Privacy Policy for more detail. The identity of our research clients is not considered personal or confidential information, and we may disclose that information for promotion and marketing purposes.

      1. Contact Information

      Attn: General Counsel

      legal@tymansgroup.com

      (US): 1-917-473-8669

      (BE): 32-468-142-754

      Modernize Your Applications

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}178|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
      • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
      • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
      • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
      • Application modernization is essential to stay competitive and productive in today’s digital environment. Your stakeholders have outlined their digital business goals that IT is expected to meet.
      • Your application portfolio cannot sufficiently support the flexibility and efficiency the business needs because of legacy challenges.
      • Your teams do not have a framework to illustrate, communicate, and justify the modernization effort and organizational changes in the language your stakeholders understand.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Build your digital applications around continuous modernization. End-user needs, technology, business direction, and regulations rapidly change in today’s competitive and fast-paced industry. This reality will quickly turn your modern applications into shelfware. Build continuous modernization at the center of your digital application vision to keep up with evolving business, end-user, and IT needs.
      • Application modernization is organizational change management. If you build and modernize it, they may not come. The crux of successful application modernization is centered on the strategic, well-informed, and onboarded adoption of changes in key business areas, capabilities, and processes. Organizational change management must be front and center so that applications are fit for purpose and are something that end users want and need to use.
      • Business-IT collaboration is not optional. Application modernization will not be successful if your lines of business (LOBs) and IT are not working together. IT must empathize how LOBs operate and proactively support the underlying operational systems. LOBs must be accountable for all products leveraging modern technologies and be able to rationalize the technical feasibility of their digital application vision.

      Impact and Result

      • Establish the digital application vision. Gain a grounded understanding of the digital application construct and prioritize these attributes against your digital business goals.
      • Define your modernization approach. Obtain a thorough view of your business and technical complexities, risks, and impacts. Employ the right modernization techniques based on your organization’s change tolerance.
      • Build your roadmap. Clarify the organizational changes needed to support modernization and adoption of your digital applications.

      Modernize Your Applications Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should strategically modernize your applications, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Set your vision

      Describe your application vision and set the right modernization expectations with your stakeholders.

      • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 1: Set Your Vision

      2. Identify your modernization opportunities

      Focus your modernization efforts on the business opportunities that your stakeholders care about.

      • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 2: Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

      3. Plan your modernization

      Describe your modernization initiatives and build your modernization tactical roadmap.

      • Modernize Your Applications – Phase 3: Plan Your Modernization
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Modernize Your Applications

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Set Your Vision

      The Purpose

      Discuss the goals of your application modernization initiatives

      Define your digital application vision and priorities

      List your modernization principles

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Clear application modernization objectives and high priority value items

      Your digital application vision and attributes

      Key principles that will guide your application modernization initiatives

      Activities

      1.1 State Your Objectives

      1.2 Characterize Your Digital Application

      1.3 Define Your Modernization Principles

      Outputs

      Application modernization objectives

      Digital application vision and attributes definitions

      List of application modernization principles and guidelines

      2 Identify Your Modernization Opportunities

      The Purpose

      Identify the value streams and business capabilities that will benefit the most from application modernization

      Conduct a change tolerance assessment

      Build your modernization strategic roadmap

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Understanding of the value delivery improvements modernization can bring

      Recognizing the flexibility and tolerance of your organization to adopt changes

      Select an approach that best fits your organization’s goals and capacity

      Activities

      2.1 Identify the Opportunities

      2.2 Define Your Modernization Approach

      Outputs

      Value streams and business capabilities that are ideal modernization opportunities

      Your modernization strategic roadmap based on your change tolerance and modernization approach

      3 Plan Your Modernization

      The Purpose

      Identify the most appropriate modernization technique and the scope of changes to implement your techniques

      Develop an actionable tactical roadmap to complete your modernization initiatives

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Clear understanding of what must be changed to the organization and application considering your change tolerance

      An achievable modernization plan

      Activities

      3.1 Shortlist Your Modernization Techniques

      3.2 Roadmap Your Modernization Initiatives

      Outputs

      Scope of your application modernization initiatives

      Your modernization tactical roadmap

      Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365

      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
      • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications

      M365 projects are fraught with obstacles. Common mistakes organizations make include:

      • Not having a post-migration plan in place.
      • Treating user training as an afterthought.
      • Inadequate communication to end users.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      There are three primary areas where organizations fail in a successful implementation of M365: training, adoption, and information governance. While it is not up to IT to ensure every user is well trained, it is their initial responsibility to find champions, SMEs, and business-based trainers and manage information governance from the backup, retention, and security aspects of data management.

      Impact and Result

      Migrating to M365 is a disruptive move for most organizations. It poses risk to untrained IT staff, including admins, help desk, and security teams. The aim for organizations, especially in this new hybrid workspace, is to maintain efficiencies through collaboration, share information in a secure environment, and work from anywhere, any time.

      Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365 Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365 Storyboard – A deck that guides you through the important considerations that will help you avoid common pitfalls and make the most of your investment.

      There are three primary goals when deploying Microsoft 365: productivity, security and compliance, and collaborative functionality. On top of these you need to meet the business KPIs and IT’s drive for adoption and usage. This research will guide you through the important considerations that are often overlooked as this powerful suite of tools is rolled out to the organization.

      [infographic]

      Further reading

      Create a Post-Implementation Plan for Microsoft 365

      You’ve deployed M365. Now what? Look at your business goals and match your M365 KPIs to meet those objectives.

      Analyst perspective

      You’ve deployed M365. Now what?

      John Donovan

      There are three primary objectives when deploying Microsoft 365: from a business perspective, the expectations are based on productivity; from an IT perspective, the expectations are based on IT efficiencies, security, and compliance; and from an organizational perspective, they are based on a digital employee experience and collaborative functionality.

      Of course, all these expectations are based on one primary objective, and that is user adoption of Teams, OneDrive, and SharePoint Online. A mass adoption, along with a high usage rate and a change in the way users work, is required for your investment in M365 to be considered successful.

      So, adoption is your first step, and that can be tracked and analyzed through analytics in M365 or other tools. But what else needs to be considered once you have released M365 on your organization? What about backup? What about security? What about sharing data outside your business? What about self-service? What about ongoing training? M365 is a powerful suite of tools, and taking advantage of all that it entails should be IT’s primary goal. How to accomplish that, efficiently and securely, is up to you!

      John Donovan
      Principal Research Director, I&O
      Info-Tech Research Group

      Insight summary

      Collaboration, efficiencies, and cost savings need to be earned

      Migrating to M365 is a disruptive move for most organizations. Additionally, it poses risk to untrained IT staff, including admins, help desk, and security teams. The aim for organizations, especially in this new hybrid workspace, is to maintain efficiencies through collaboration, share information in a secure environment, and work from anywhere, any time. However, organizations need to manage their licensing and storage costs and build this new way of working through post-deployment planning. By reducing their hardware and software footprint they can ensure they have earned these savings and efficiencies.

      Understand any shortcomings in M365 or pay the price

      Failing to understand any shortcomings M365 poses for your organization can ruin your chances at a successful implementation. Commonly overlooked expenses include backup and archiving, especially for regulated organizations; spending on risk mitigation through third-party tools for security; and paying a premium to Microsoft to use its Azure offerings with Microsoft Sentinel, Microsoft Defender, or any security add-on that comes at a price above your E5 license, which is expensive in itself.

      Spend time with users to understand how they will use M365

      Understanding business processes is key to anticipating how your end users will adopt M365. By spending time with the staff and understanding their day-to-day activities and interactions, you can build better training scenarios to suit their needs and help them understand how the apps in M365 can help them do their job. On top of this you need to meet the business KPIs and IT’s drive for adoption and usage. Encourage early adopters to become trainers and champions. Success will soon follow.

      Executive summary

      Your Challenge

      Common Obstacles

      Info-Tech’s Approach

      M365 is a full suite of tools for collaboration, communication, and productivity, but organizations find the platform is not used to its full advantage and fail to get full value from their license subscription.

      Many users are unsure which tool to use when: Do you use Teams or Viva Engage, MS Project or Planner? When do you use SharePoint versus OneDrive?

      From an IT perspective, finding time to help users at the outset is difficult – it’s quite the task to set up governance, security, and backup. Yet training staff must be a priority if the implementation is to succeed.

      M365 projects are fraught with obstacles. Common mistakes organizations make include:

      • No post-migration plan in place.
      • User training is an afterthought.
      • Lack of communication to end users.
      • No C-suite promotion and sponsorship.
      • Absence of a vision and KPIs to meet that vision.

      To define your post-migration tasks and projects:

      • List all projects in a spreadsheet and rank them according to difficulty and impact.
      • Look for quick wins with easy tasks that have high impact and low difficulty.
      • Build a timeline to execute your plans and communicate clearly how these plans will impact the business and meet that vision.

      Failure to take meaningful action will not bode well for your M365 journey.

      Info-Tech Insight

      There are three primary areas where organizations fail in a successful implementation of M365: training, adoption, and information governance. While it is not up to IT to ensure every user is well trained, it is their initial responsibility to find champions, SMEs, and business-based trainers and to manage information governance from backup, retention, and security aspects of data management.

      Business priorities

      What priorities is IT focusing on with M365 adoption?

      What IT teams are saying

      • In a 2019 SoftwareONE survey, the biggest reason IT decision makers gave for adopting M365 was to achieve a “more collaborative working style.”
      • Organizations must plan and execute a strategy for mass adoption and training to ensure processes match business goals.
      • Cost savings can only be achieved through rightsizing license subscriptions, retiring legacy apps, and building efficiencies within the IT organization.
      • With increased mobility comes with increased cybersecurity risk. Make sure you take care of your security before prioritizing mobility. Multifactor authentication (MFA), conditional access (CA), and additional identity management will maintain a safe work-from-anywhere environment.

      Top IT reasons for adopting M365

      61% More collaborative working style

      54% Cost savings

      51% Improved cybersecurity

      49% Greater mobility

      Source: SoftwareONE, 2019; N=200 IT decision makers across multiple industries and organization sizes

      Define & organize post-implementation projects

      Key areas to success

      • Using Microsoft’s M365 adoption guide, we can prioritize and focus on solutions that will bring about better use of the M365 suite.
      • Most of your planning and prioritizing should be done before implementation. Many organizations, however, adopted M365 – and especially Teams, SharePoint Online, and OneDrive – in an ad hoc manner in response to the pandemic measures that forced users to work from home.
      • Use a Power BI Pro license to set up dashboards for M365 usage analytics. Install GitHub from AppSource and use the templates that will give you good insight and the ability to create business reports to show adoption and usage rates on the platform.
      • Reimagine your working behavior. Remember, you want to bring about a more collective and open framework for work. Take advantage of a champion SME to show the way. Every organization is different, so make sure your training is aligned to your business processes.
      The image contains a screenshot of the M365 post-implementation tasks.

      Process steps

      Define Vision

      Build Team

      Plan Projects

      Execute

      Define your vision and what your priorities are for M365. Understand how to reach your vision.

      Ensure you have an executive sponsor, develop champions, and build a team of SMEs.

      List all projects in a to-be scenario. Rank and prioritize projects to understand impact and difficulty.

      Build your roadmap, create timelines, and ensure you have enough resources and time to execute and deliver to the business.

      Info-Tech’s approach

      Use the out-of-the-box tools and take advantage of your subscription.

      The image contains a screenshot of the various tools and services Microsoft provides.

      Info-Tech Insight

      A clear understanding of the business purpose and processes, along with insight into the organizational culture, will help you align the right apps with the right tasks. This approach will bring about better adoption and collaboration and cancel out the shadow IT products we see in every business silo.

      Leverage built-in usage analytics

      Adoption of services in M365

      To give organizations insight into the adoption of services in M365, Microsoft provides built-in usage analytics in Power BI, with templates for visualization and custom reports. There are third-party tools out there, but why pay more? However, the template app is not free; you do need a Power BI Pro license.

      Usage Analytics pulls data from ActiveDirectory, including location, department, and organization, giving you deeper insight into how users are behaving. It can collect up to 12 months of data to analyze.

      Reports that can be created include Adoption, Usage, Communication, Collaboration (how OneDrive and SharePoint are being used), Storage (cloud storage for mailboxes, OneDrive, and SharePoint), and Mobility (which clients and devices are used to connect to Teams, email, Yammer, etc.).

      Source: Microsoft 365 usage analytics

      Understand admin roles

      Prevent intentional or unintentional internal breaches

      Admin Roles

      Best Practices

      • Global admin: Assign this role only to users who need the most access to management features and data across your tenant. Only global admins can modify an admin role.
      • Exchange admin: Assign this role to users who need to view and manage user mailboxes, M365 groups, and Exchange Online and handle Microsoft support requests.
      • Groups admin: These users can create, edit, delete, and restore M365 groups as well as create expiration and naming policies.
      • Helpdesk admin: These users can resets passwords, force user sign-out, manage Microsoft support requests, and monitor service health.
      • Teams/SharePoint Online admin: Assign these roles for users who manage the Teams and SharePoint Admin Center.
      • User admin: These users can assign licenses, add users and groups, manage user properties, and create and manage user views.

      Only assign two to four global admins, depending on the size of the organization. Too many admins increases security risk. In larger organizations, segment admin roles using role-based access control.

      Because admins have access to sensitive data, you’ll want to assign the least permissive role so they can access only the tools and data they need to do their job.

      Enable MFA for all admins except one break-glass account that is stored in the cloud and not synced. Ensure a complex password, stored securely, and use only in the event of an MFA outage.

      Due to the large number of admin roles available and the challenges that brings with it, Microsoft has a built-in tool to compare roles in the admin portal. This can help you determine which role should be used for specific tasks.

      Secure your M365 tenant

      A checklist to ensure basic security coverage post M365

      • Multifactor Authentication: MFA is part of your M365 tenant, so using it should be a practical identity security. If you want additional conditional access (CA), you will require an Azure AD (AAD) Premium P1+ license. This will ensure adequate identity security protecting the business.
      • Password Protection: Use the AAD portal to set this up under Security > Authentication Methods. Microsoft provides a list of over 2,000 known bad passwords and variants to block.
      • Legacy Authentication: Disable legacy protocols; check to see if your legacy apps/workflows/scripts use them in the AAD portal. Once identified, update them and turn the protocols off. Use CA policies.
      • Self-Service Password Reset: Enable self-service to lower the helpdesk load for password resets. Users will have to initially register and set security questions. Hybrid AD businesses must write back to AD from AAD once changes are made.
      • Security Defaults: For small businesses, turn on default settings. To enable additional security settings, such as break- glass accounts, go into Manage Security Defaults in your AAD properties.
      • Conditional Access (CA) Policies: Use CA policies if strong identity security and zero trust are required. To create policies in AAD go to Security > Conditional Access > New Policies.

      Identity Checklist

      • Enable MFA for Admins
      • Enable MFA for Users
      • Disable App Passwords
      • Configure Trusted IPs
      • Disable Text/Phone MFA
      • Remember MFA on Trusted Devices for 90 Days
      • Train Staff in Using MFA Correctly
      • Integrate Apps Into Azure AD

      Training guidelines

      Identify business scenarios and training adoption KPIs

      • Customize your training to meet your organizational goals, align with your business culture, and define how users will work inside the world of M365.
      • Create scenario templates that align to your current day-to-day operations in each department. These can be created by individual business unit champions.
      • Make sure you have covered must-have capabilities and services within M365 that need to be rolled out post-pilot.
      • Phase in large transitions rather than multiple small ones to ensure collaboration between departments meets business scenarios.
      • Ensure your success metrics are being measured and continue to communicate and train after deployment using tools available in M365. See Microsoft’s adoption guidelines and template for training.

      Determine your training needs and align with your business processes. Choose training modalities that will give users the best chance of success. Consider one or many training methods, such as:

      • Online training
      • In-person classroom
      • Business scenario use cases
      • Mentoring
      • Department champion/Early adopter
      • Weekly bulletin fun facts

      Don’t forget backup!

      Providing 99% uptime and availability is not enough

      Why is M365 backup so important?

      Accidental Data Deletion.

      If a user is deleted, that deletion gets replicated across the network. Backup can save you here by restoring that user.

      Internal and External Security Threats.

      Malicious internal deletion of data and external threats including viruses, ransomware, and malware can severely damage a business and its reputation. A clean backup can easily restore the business’ uninfected data.

      Legal and Compliance Requirements.

      While e-discovery and legal hold are available to retain sensitive data, a third-party backup solution can easily search and restore all data to meet regulatory requirements – without depending on someone to ensure a policy was set.

      Retention Policy Gaps.

      Retention policies are not a substitute for backup. While they can be used to retain or delete content, they are difficult to keep track of and manage. Backups offer greater latitude in retention and better security for that data.

      Retire your legacy apps to gain adoption

      Identify like for like and retire your legacy apps

      Legacy

      Microsoft 365

      SharePoint 2016/19

      SharePoint Online

      Microsoft Exchange Server

      Microsoft Exchange in Azure

      Skype for Business Server

      Teams

      Trello

      Planner 2022

      System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM)

      Endpoint Manager, Intune, Autopilot

      File servers

      OneDrive

      Access

      Power Apps

      To meet the objectives of cost reduction and rationalization, look at synergies that M365 brings to the table. Determine what you are currently using to meet collaboration, storage, and security needs and plan to use the equivalent in your Microsoft entitlement.

      Managing M365’s hidden costs

      Licenses and storage limits TCO

      • Email security. Ninety-one percent of all cyberattacks come from phishing on email. Microsoft Defender for M365 is a bolt-on, so it is an additional cost.
      • Backup. This will bring additional cost to M365. Plan to spend more to ensure data is backed up and stored.
      • Email archiving. Archiving is different than backup. See our research on the subject. Archiving is needed for compliance purposes. Email archiving solutions are available through third-party software, which is an added cost.
      • Email end-to-end encryption. This is a requirement for all organizations that are serious about security. The enterprise products from Microsoft come at an additional cost.
      • Cybersecurity training. IT needs to ramp up on training, another expense.
      • Microsoft 365 Power Platform Licencing. From low-code and no-code developer tools (Power Apps), workflow tools (Power Automate), and business intelligence (Power BI) – while the E5 license gives you Power BI Pro, there are limitations and costs. Power BI Pro has limitations for data volume, data refresh, and query response time, so your premium license comes at a considerably marked up cost.

      M365 is not standalone

      • While Microsoft 365 is a platform that is ”just good enough,” it is actually not good enough in today’s cyberthreat environment. Microsoft provides add-ons with Defender for 365, Purview, and Sentinel, which pose additional costs, just like a third-party solution would. See the Threat Intelligence & Incident Response research in our Security practice.
      • The lack of data archiving, backup, and encryption means additional costs that may not have been budgeted for at the outset. Microsoft provides 30-60-90-day recovery, but anything else is additional cost. For more information see Understand the Difference between Backups and Archiving.

      Compliance and regulations

      Security and compliance features out of the box

      There are plenty of preconfigured security features contained in M365, but what’s available to you depends on your license. For example, Microsoft Defender, which has many preset policies, is built-in for E5 licenses, but if you have E3 licenses Defender is an add-on.

      Three elements in security policies are profiles, policies, and policy settings.

      • Preset Profiles come in the shape of:
        • Standard – baseline protection for most users
        • Strict – aggressive protection for profiles that may be high-value targets
        • Built-in Protection – turned on by default; it is not recommended to make exceptions based on users, groups, or domains
      • Preset Security Policies
        • Exchange Online Protection Policies – anti-spam, -malware, and -phishing policies
        • Microsoft Defender Policies – safe links and safe attachments policies
      • Policy Settings
        • User impersonation protection for internal and external domains
        • Select priorities from strict, standard, custom, and built-in

      Info-Tech Insight

      Check your license entitlement before you start purchasing add-ons or third-party solutions. Security and compliance are not optional in today’s cybersecurity risk world. With many organizations offering hybrid and remote work arrangements and bring-your-own-device (BYOD) policies, it is necessary to protect your data at the tenant level. Defender for Microsoft 365 is a tool that can protect both your exchange and collaboration environments.

      More information: Microsoft 365 Defender

      Use Intune and Autopilot

      Meet the needs of your hybrid workforce

      • Using the tools available in M365 can help you develop your hybrid or remote work strategy.
      • This strategy will help you maintain security controls for mobile and BYOD.
      • Migrating to Intune and Autopilot will give rise to the opportunity to migrate off SCCM and further reduce your on-premises infrastructure.

      NOTE: You must have Azure AD Premium and Windows 10 V1703 or later as well as Intune or other MDM service to use Autopilot. There is a monthly usage fee based on volume of data transmitted. These fees can add up over time.

      For more details visit the following Microsoft Learn pages:

      Intune /Autopilot Overview

      The image contains a screenshot of the Intune/Autopilot Overview.

      Info-Tech’s research on zero-touch provisioning goes into more detail on Intune and Autopilot:
      Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

      M365 long-term strategies

      Manage your costs in an inflationary world

      • Recent inflation globally, whether caused by supply chain woes or political uncertainty, will impact IT and cloud services along with everything else. Be prepared to pay more for your existing services and budget accordingly.
      • Your long-term strategies must include ongoing cost management, data management, security risks, and license and storage costs.
      • Continually investigate efficiencies, overlaps, and new tools in M365 that can get the job done for the business. Use as many of the applications as you can to ensure you are getting the best bang for your buck.
      • Watch for upgrades in the M365 suite of tools. As Microsoft continues to improve and deliver on most business applications well after their first release, you may find that something that was previously inefficient could work in your environment today and replace a tool you currently use.

      Ongoing Activities You Need to Maintain

      • Be aware of increased license costs and higher storage costs.
      • Keep an eye on Teams sprawl.
      • Understand your total cost of ownership.
      • Continue to look at legacy apps and get rid of your infrastructure debt.

      Activity

      Build your own M365 post-migration plan

      1. Using slide 6 as your guideline, create your own project list using impact and difficulty as your weighting factors.
      2. Do this exercise as a whiteboard sticky note exercise to agree on impact and difficulty as a team.
      3. Identify easy wins that have high impact.
      4. Place the projects into a project plan with time lines.
      5. Agree on start and completion dates.
      6. Ensure you have the right resources to execute.

      The image contains a screenshot of the activity described in the above text.

      Related Info-Tech Research

      Govern Office 365

      • Office 365 is as difficult to wrangle as it is valuable. Leverage best practices to produce governance outcomes aligned with your goals.

      Drive Ongoing Adoption With an M365 Center of Excellence

      • Accelerate business processes change and get more value from your subscription by building and sharing, thanks to an effective center of excellence.

      Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

      • Adopt zero-touch provisioning to provide better services to your end users.
      • Save time and resources during device deployment while providing a high-quality experience to remote end users.

      Bibliography

      “5 Reasons Why Microsoft Office 365 Backup Is Important.” Apps 4Rent, Dec 2021, Accessed Oct 2022 .
      Chandrasekhar, Aishwarya. “Office 365 Migration Best Practices & Challenges 2022.” Saketa, 31 Mar 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
      Chronlund, Daniel. “The Fundamental Checklist – Secure your Microsoft 365 Tenant”. Daniel Chronlund Cloud Tech Blog,1 Feb 2019. Accessed 1 Oct 2022.
      Davies, Joe. “The Microsoft 365 Enterprise Deployment Guide.” Tech Community, Microsoft, 19 Sept 2018. Accessed 2 Oct 2022.
      Dillaway, Kevin. “I Upgraded to Microsoft 365 E5, Now What?!.” SpyGlassMTG, 10 Jan 2022. Accessed 4 Oct. 2022.
      Hartsel, Joe. “How to Make Your Office 365 Implementation Project a Success.” Centric, 20 Dec 2021. Accessed 2 Oct. 2022.
      Jha, Mohit. “The Ultimate Microsoft Office 365 Migration Checklist for Pre & Post Migration.” Office365 Tips.Org, 24 June 2022. Accessed Sept. 2022.
      Lang, John. “Why organizations don't realize the full value of Microsoft 365.“Business IT, 29 Nov 202I. Accessed 10 Oct 2022.
      Mason, Quinn. “How to increase Office 365 / Microsoft 365 user adoption.” Sharegate, 19 Sept 2019. Accessed 3 Oct 2022.
      McDermott, Matt. “6-Point Office 365 Post-Migration Checklist.” Spanning , 12 July 2019 . Accessed 4 Oct 2022.
      “Microsoft 365 usage analytics.” Microsoft 365, Microsoft, 25 Oct 2022. Web.
      Sharma, Megha. “Office 365 Pre & Post Migration Checklist.’” Kernel Data Recovery, 26 July 2022. Accessed 30 Sept. 2022.
      Sivertsen, Per. “How to avoid a failed M365 implementation? Infotechtion, 19 Dec 2021. Accessed 2 Oct. 2022.
      St. Hilaire, Dan. “Most Common Mistakes with Office 365 Deployment (and How to Avoid Them).“ KnowledgeWave, 4Mar 2019. Accessed Oct. 2022.
      “Under the Hood of Microsoft 365 and Office 365 Adoption.” SoftwareONE, 2019. Web.

      We may not be able to show you this

      We may not be able to show you this just yet.
      Our deeper, more detailed content is reserved for Tymans Group clients. 

      If you are interested in retaining our services or would really like access, please contact us. 

      Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}378|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 7.3/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $10,756 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 9 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
      • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance
      • The demand for qualified cybersecurity professionals far exceeds supply. As a result, organizations are struggling to protect their data against the evolving threat landscape.
      • It is a constant challenge to know what skills will be needed in the future, and when and how to acquire them.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Plan for the inevitable. All industries are expected to be affected by the talent gap in the coming years. Plan ahead to address your organization’s future needs.
      • Base skills acquisition decisions on the five key factors to define skill needs. Create an impact scale for the five key factors (data criticality, durability, availability, urgency, and frequency) that reflects your organizational strategy, initiatives, and pressures.
      • A skills gap will always exist to some degree. The threat landscape is constantly changing, and your workforce’s skill sets must evolve as well.

      Impact and Result

      • Organizations must align their security initiatives to talent requirements such that business objectives are achieved and the business is cyber ready.
      • Identify if there are skill gaps in your current workforce.
      • Decide how you’ll acquire needed skills based on characteristics of need for each skill.

      Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a technical skills acquisition strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Identify skill needs for target state

      Identify what skills will be needed in your future state.

      • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 1: Identity Skill Needs for Target State
      • Security Initiative Skills Guide
      • Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

      2. Identify technical skill gaps

      Align role requirements with future initiative skill needs.

      • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan – Phase 2: Identify Technical Skill Gaps
      • Current Workforce Skills Assessment
      • Technical Skills Workbook
      • Information Security Compliance Manager
      • IT Security Analyst
      • Chief Information Security Officer
      • Security Administrator
      • Security Architect

      3. Develop a sourcing plan for future work roles

      Acquire skills based on the impact of the five key factors.

      • Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Skills Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles – Phase 3: Develop a Sourcing Plan for Future Work Roles
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Close the InfoSec Skills Gap: Develop a Technical Skills Sourcing Plan

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Identify Skill Needs for Target State

      The Purpose

      Determine the skills needed in your workforce and align them to your organization’s security roadmap.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Insight on what skills your organization will need in the future.

      Activities

      1.1 Understand the importance of aligning security initiatives skill needs with workforce requirements.

      1.2 Identify needed skills for future initiatives.

      1.3 Prioritize the initiative skill gaps.

      Outputs

      Security Initiative Skills Guide

      Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

      2 Define Technical Skill Requirements

      The Purpose

      Identify and create technical skill requirements for key work roles that are needed to successfully execute future initiatives.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Increased understanding of the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

      Standardization of technical skill requirements of current and future work roles.

      Activities

      2.1 Assign work roles to the needs of your future environment.

      2.2 Discuss the NICE Cybersecurity Workforce Framework.

      2.3 Develop technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

      Outputs

      Skills Gap Prioritization Tool

      Technical Skills Workbook

      Current Workforce Skills Assessment

      3 Acquire Technical Skills

      The Purpose

      Assess your current workforce against their role’s skill requirements.

      Discuss five key factors that aid acquiring skills.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      A method to acquire skills in future roles.

      Activities

      3.1 Continue developing technical skill requirements for current and future work roles.

      3.2 Conduct Current Workforce Skills Assessment.

      3.3 Discuss methods of acquiring skills.

      3.4 Develop a plan to acquire skills.

      Outputs

      Technical Skills Workbook

      Current Workforce Skills Assessment

      Current Workforce Skills Assessment

      Technical Skills Workbook

      Current Workforce Skills Assessment

      Technical Skills Workbook

      Current Workforce Skills Assessment

      4 Plan to Execute Action Plan

      The Purpose

      Assist with communicating the state of the skill gap in your organization.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Strategy on how to acquire skills needs of the organization.

      Activities

      4.1 Review skills acquisition plan.

      4.2 Discuss training and certification opportunities for staff.

      4.3 Discuss next steps for closing the skills gap.

      4.4 Debrief.

      Outputs

      Technical Skills Workbook

      Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}310|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $5,199 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
      • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy

      Provide better end-user device support to a remote workforce:

      • Remain compliant while purchasing, deploying, supporting, and decommissioning devices.
      • Save time and resources during device deployment while providing a high-quality experience to remote end users.
      • Build a set of capabilities that will let you support different use cases.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Zero-touch is more than just deployment. This is more difficult than turning on a tool and provisioning new devices to end users.
      • Consider the entire user experience and device lifecycle to show value to the organization. Don’t forget that you will eventually need to touch the device.

      Impact and Result

      Approach zero-touch provisioning and patching from the end user’s experience:

      • Align your zero-touch approach with stakeholder priorities and larger IT strategies.
      • Build your zero-touch provisioning and patching plan from both the asset lifecycle and the end-user perspective to take a holistic approach that emphasizes customer service.
      • Tailor deployment plans to more easily scope and resource deployment projects.

      Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt zero-touch provisioning, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Design the zero-touch experience

      Design the user’s experience and build a vision to direct your zero-touch provisioning project. Update your ITAM practices to reflect the new experience.

      • Zero-Touch Provisioning and Support Plan
      • HAM Process Workflows (Visio)
      • HAM Process Workflows (PDF)
      • End-User Device Management Standard Operating Procedure

      2. Update device management, provisioning, and patching

      Leverage new tools to manage remote endpoints, keep those devices patched, and allow users to get the apps they need to work.

      • End-User Device Build Book Template

      3. Build a roadmap and communication plan

      Create a roadmap for migrating to zero-touch provisioning.

      • Roadmap Tool
      • Communication Plan Template
      [infographic]

      Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}100|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
      • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
      • Parent Category Name: Innovation
      • Parent Category Link: /innovation

      COVID-19 is driving the need for quick technology solutions, including some that require personal data collection. Organizations are uncertain about the right thing to do.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      Data equity approaches personal data like money, putting the owner in control and helping to protect against unethical systems.

      Impact and Result

      There are some key considerations for businesses grappling with digital ethics:

      1. If partnering, set expectations.
      2. If building, invite criticism.
      3. If imbuing authority, consider the most vulnerable.

      Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity Research & Tools

      Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity

      Understand how to use data equity as an ethical guidepost to create technology that will benefit everyone.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      • Tech Trend Update: If Digital Ethics Then Data Equity Storyboard
      [infographic]

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}416|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $38,999 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
      • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
      • Writing SOPs is the last thing most people want to do, so the work gets pushed down the priority list and the documents become dated.
      • Most organizations know it is good practice to have SOPs as it improves consistency, facilitates process improvement, and contributes to efficient operations.
      • Though the benefits are understood, many organizations don't have SOPs and those that do don't maintain them.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.
      • Start with high-impact SOPs, and identify the most critical undocumented SOPs and address them first.
      • Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and create SOP approval steps to ensure documentation is reviewed and completed in a timely fashion.

      Impact and Result

      • Create visual documents that can be scanned. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are quicker to create, take less time to update, and are ultimately more usable than a dense manual.
      • Use simple but effective document management practices.
      • Make SOPs part of your project deliverables rather than an afterthought. That includes checking documentation status as part of your change management process.

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind – Make SOPs work for you with visual documents that are easier to create and more effective for process management and optimization.

      Learn best practices for creating, maintaining, publishing, and managing effective SOP documentation.

      • Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind – Phases 1-3

      2. Standard Operating Procedures Workbook and Document Management Checklist – Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs.

      Identify required documentation and prioritize them according to urgency and impact.

      • Standard Operating Procedures Workbook
      • Document Management Checklist

      3. Process Templates and Examples – Review and assess templates to find samples that are fit for purpose.

      Review the wide variety of samples to see what works best for your needs.

      • Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool
      • System Recovery Procedures Template
      • Application Development Process – AppDev Example (Visio)
      • Application Development Process – AppDev Example (PDF)
      • Network Backup for Atlanta Data Center – Backups Example
      • DRP Recovery Workflow Template (PDF)
      • DRP Recovery Workflow Template (Visio)
      • Employee Termination Process Checklist – IT Security Example
      • Sales Process for New Clients – Sales Example (Visio)
      • Sales Process for New Clients – Sales Example (PDF)
      • Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example (Visio)
      • Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example (PDF)
      [infographic]

      Further reading

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

      Change your focus from satisfying auditors to driving process optimization, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

      Project Outline

      Two flowcharts are depicted. The first is labelled 'Executive Brief' and the second is labelled 'Tools and Templates Roadmap'. Both outline the following project.

      ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

      Do your SOPs drive process optimization?

      "Most organizations struggle to document and maintain SOPs as required, leading to process inconsistencies and inefficiencies. These breakdowns directly impact the performance of IT operations. Effective SOPs streamline training and knowledge transfer, improve transparency and compliance, enable automation, and ultimately decrease costs as processes improve and expensive breakdowns are avoided. Documenting SOPs is not just good practice; it directly impacts IT efficiency and your bottom line."

      Frank Trovato, Senior Manager, Infrastructure Research Info-Tech Research Group

      Our understanding of the problem

      This Research Is Designed For:

      • IT Process Owners
      • IT Infrastructure Managers
      • IT Service Managers
      • System Administrators
      • And more…

      This Research Will Help You:

      • Identify, prioritize, and document SOPs for critical business processes.
      • Discover opportunities for overall process optimization by documenting SOPs.
      • Develop documentation best practices that support ongoing maintenance and review.

      This Research Will Also Assist:

      • CTOs
      • Business unit leaders

      This Research Will Help Them:

      • Understand the need for and value of documenting SOPs in a usable format.
      • Help set expectations around documentation best practices.
      • Extend IT best practices to other parts of the business.

      Executive summary

      Situation

      • Most organizations know it is good practice to have SOPs as it improves consistency, facilitates process improvement, and contributes to efficient operations.
      • Though the benefits are understood, many organizations don't have SOPs and those that do don't maintain them.

      Complication

      • Writing SOPs is the last thing most people want to do, so the work gets pushed down the priority list and the documents become dated.
      • Promoting the use of SOPs can also face staff resistance as the documentation is seen as time consuming to develop and maintain, too convoluted to be useful, and generally out of date.

      Resolution

      • Overcome staff resistance while implementing a sustainable SOP documentation approach by doing the following:
        • Create visual documents that can be scanned. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are quicker to create, take less time to update, and are ultimately more usable than a dense manual.
        • Use simple, but effective document management practices.
        • Make SOPs part of your project deliverables rather than an afterthought. That includes checking documentation status as part of your change management process.
      • Extend these principles to other areas of IT and business processes. The survey data and examples in this report include application development and business processes as well as IT operations.

      Info-Tech Insight

      1. Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.
      2. Start with high-impact SOPs. Identify the most critical undocumented SOPs and document them first.
      3. Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and create SOP approval steps to ensure documentation is reviewed and completed in a timely fashion.

      Most organizations struggle to create and maintain SOP documents, especially in North America, despite the benefits

      North American companies are traditionally more technology focused than process focused, and that is reflected in the approach to documenting SOPs.

      • An ad hoc approach to SOPs almost certainly means documents will be out of date and ineffective. The same is also true when updating SOPs as part of periodic concerted efforts to prepare for an audit, annual review, or certification process, and this makes the task more imposing.
      • Incorporating SOP updates as part of regular change management processes ensures documents are up to date and usable. This can also make reviews and audits much more manageable.

      'It isn’t unusual for us to see infrastructure or operations documentation that is wildly out of date. We’re talking months, even years. Often it was produced as one big effort and then not reliably maintained.'

      – Gary Patterson, Consultant, Quorum Resources

      Organizations are most likely to update documents on an ad hoc basis or via periodic formal reviews. Less than 25% keep SOPs updated as needed.

      Graph depicting North America versus Asia and Europe practices of document updates

      Source: Info-Tech Research Group; N=104

      Document SOPs to improve knowledge transfer, optimize processes, and ultimately save money

      Benefits of documented SOPs Impact of undocumented/undefined SOPs
      Improved training and knowledge transfer: Routine tasks can be delegated to junior staff (freeing senior staff to work on higher priority tasks). Without documented SOPs: Tasks will be difficult to delegate, key staff become a bottleneck, knowledge transfer is inconsistent, and there is a longer onboarding process for new staff.
      IT automation, process optimization, and consistent operations: Defining, documenting, and then optimizing processes enables IT automation to be built on sound processes, so consistent positive results can be achieved. Without documented SOPs: IT automation built on poorly defined, unoptimized processes leads to inconsistent results.
      Compliance: Compliance audits are more manageable because the documentation is already in place. Without documented SOPs: Documenting SOPs to prepare for an audit becomes a major time-intensive project.
      Transparency: Visually documented processes answer the common business question of “why does that take so long?” Without documented SOPs: Other areas of the organization may not understand how IT operates, which can lead to confusion and unrealistic expectations.
      Cost savings: Work can be assigned to the lowest level of support cost, IT operations achieve greater efficiency, and expensive breakdowns are avoided. Without documented SOPs: Work may be distributed uneconomically, money may be wasted through inefficient processes, and the organization is vulnerable to costly disruptions.

      COBIT, ISO, and ITIL aren’t a complete solution

      "Being ITIL and ISO compliant hasn’t solved our documentation problem. We’re still struggling."

      – Vendor Relationship Manager, Financial Services Industry

      • Adopting a framework such as ITIL, COBIT, or ISO doesn’t always mean that SOP documents are accurate, effective, or up to date.
      • Although these frameworks emphasize the importance of documenting processes, they tend to focus more on process development and requirements than on actual documentation. In other words, they deal more with what needs to be done than with how to do it.
      • This research will focus more on the documentation process itself – so how to go about creating, updating, optimizing, managing, and distributing SOP documents.

      Inadequate SOPs lead to major data loss and over $99,000 in recovery costs

      CASE STUDY 1

      Company A mid-sized US organization with over 1,000 employees

      Source Info-Tech Interview

      Situation

      • IT supports storage nodes replicated across two data centers. SOPs for backup procedures did not include an escalation procedure for failed backups or a step to communicate successful backups. Management was not aware of the issue and therefore could not address it before a failure occurred.

      Incident

      • Primary storage had a catastrophic failure, and that put pressure on the secondary storage, which then also failed. All active storage failed and the data corrupted. Daily backups were failing due to lack of disk space on the backup device. The organization had to resort to monthly tape backups.

      Impact

      • Lost 1 month of data (had to go back to the last tape backup).
      • Recovery also took much longer because recovery procedures were also not documented.
      • Key steps such as notifying impacted customers were overlooked. Customers were left unhappy not only with the outage and data loss but also the lack of communication.
      Hard dollar recovery costs
      Backup specialist (vendor) to assist with restoring data from tape $12,000
      Temps to re-enter 1 month of data $5,000
      Weekend OT for 4 people (approximately 24 hours per person) $5,538
      Productivity cost for affected employees for 1 day of downtime $76,923
      Total $99,462

      Intangible costs

      High “goodwill” impact for internal staff and customers.

      "The data loss pointed out a glaring hole in our processes – the lack of an escalation procedure. If I knew backups weren’t being completed, I would have done something about that immediately."

      – Senior Division Manager, Information Technology Division

      IT services company optimizes its SOPs using “Lean” approach

      CASE STUDY 2

      Company Atrion

      SourceInfo-Tech Interview

      Lean and SOPs

      • Standardized work is important to Lean’s philosophy of continuous improvement. SOPs allow for replication of the current best practices and become the baseline standard for member collaboration toward further improvements.
      • For more on Lean’s approach to SOPs, see “Lean Six Sigma Quality Transformation Toolkit (LSSQTT) Tool #17.”

      Atrion’s approach

      • Atrion is focused on documenting high-level processes that improve the client and employee experience or which can be used for training.
      • Cross-functional teams collaborate to document a process and find ways to optimize that SOP.
      • Atrion leverages visual documentation as much as possible: flowcharts, illustrations, video screen captures, etc.

      Outcomes

      • Large increase in usable, up-to-date documentation.
      • Process and efficiency improvements realized and made repeatable.
      • Success has been so significant that Atrion is planning to offer SOP optimization training and support as a service for its clients in the future.

      Atrion

      • Atrion provides IT services, solutions, and leadership to clients in the 250+ user range.
      • After adopting the Lean framework for its organization, it has deliberately focussed on optimizing its documentation.

      When we initiated a formal process efficiency program a little over a year ago and began striving towards a culture of continuous improvement, documenting our SOPs became key. We capture how we do things today and how to make that process more efficient. We call it current state and future state mapping of any process.

      – Michelle Pope, COO, Atrion Networking Corp.

      Strategies to overcome common documentation challenges

      Use Info-Tech’s methodology to streamline the SOP documentation process.

      Common documentation challenges Info-Tech’s methodology
      Where to start. For organizations with very few (if any) documented SOPs, the challenge is where to start. Apply a client focus to prioritize SOPs. Start with mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery.
      Lack of time. Writing SOPs is viewed as an onerous task, and IT staff typically do not like to write documentation or lack the time. Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams over traditional dense manuals. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams take less time to create and maintain, and the output is far more usable than traditional manuals.
      Inconsistent document management. Documents are unorganized, e.g. hard to find documents, or you don’t know if you have the correct, latest version. Keep it simple. You don’t need a full-time SOP librarian if you stick to a simple, but consistent approach to documentation management. Simple is easier to follow (therefore, be consistent).
      Documentation is not maintained. More urgent tasks displace documentation efforts. There is little real motivation for staff to keep documents current. Ensure accountability at the individual and project level. Incorporate documentation requirements into performance evaluations, project planning, and change control procedures.

      Use this blueprint as a building block to complete these other Info-Tech projects

      Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA

      Understand business requirements, clarify capabilities, and close gaps.

      Standardize the Service Desk – Module 2 & 3

      Improve reporting and management of incidents and build service request workflows.

      Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

      Define appropriate objectives for DR, build a roadmap to close gaps, and document your incident response plan.

      Extend the Service Desk to the Enterprise

      Position IT as an innovator.

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit

      “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

      Guided Implementation

      “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

      Workshop

      “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

      Consulting

      “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

      Create Visual SOP Documents – project overview

      1. Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs 2. Establish a sustainable documentation process 3. Identify a content management solution
      Best-Practice Toolkit

      1.1 Identify and prioritize undocumented/outdated critical processes

      1.2 Reduce effort and improve usability with visual documentation

      1.3 Optimize and document critical processes

      2.1 Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs

      2.2 Write an SOP for creating and maintaining SOPs

      2.3 Plan SOP working sessions to put a dent into your documentation backlog

      3.1 Understand the options when it comes to content management solutions

      3.2 Use Info-Tech’s evaluation tool to determine the right approach for you

      Guided Implementations
      • Identify undocumented critical SOPs.
      • Understand the benefits of a visual approach.
      • Work through a tabletop exercise to document two visual SOP documents.
      • Establish documentation information guidelines.
      • Identify opportunities to create a culture that fosters SOP creation.
      • Address outstanding undocumented SOPs by working through process issues together.
      • Review your current approach to content management and discuss possible alternatives.
      • Evaluate options for a content management strategy, in the context of your own environment.
      Onsite Workshop Module 1:

      Identify undocumented critical processes and review the SOP mapping process.

      Module 2:

      Review and improve your documentation process and address your documentation backlog.

      Module 3:

      Evaluate strategies for publishing and managing SOP documentation.

      Phase 1 Outcome:
        Review and implement the process for creating usable SOPs.
      Phase 2 Outcome:
        Optimize your SOP maintenance processes.
      Phase 3 Outcome:
        Choose a content management solution that meets your needs.

      Workshop overview

      Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Workshop Prep Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
      Activities Scope the SOP pilot and secure resources
      • Identify the scope of the pilot project.
      • Develop a list of processes to document.
      • Ensure required resources are available.
      Prioritize SOPs and review methodology

      1.1 Prioritize undocumented SOPs.

      1.2 Review the visual approach to SOP planning.

      1.3 Conduct a tabletop planning exercise.

      Review SOPs and identify process gaps

      2.1 Continue the tabletop planning exercise with other critical processes.

      2.2 Conduct a gap analysis to identify solutions to issues discovered during SOP mapping.

      Identify projects to meet process gaps

      3.1 Develop a prioritized project roadmap to address gaps.

      3.2 Define a process for documenting and maintaining SOPs.

      3.3 Identify and assign actions to improve SOP management and maintenance.

      Set next steps and put a dent in your backlog

      4.1 Run an SOP working session with experts and process owners to put a dent in the documentation backlog.

      4.2 Identify an appropriate content management solution.

      Deliverables
      1. Defined scope for the workshop.
      2. A longlist of key processes.
      1. Undocumented SOPs prioritized according to business criticality and current state.
      2. One or more documented SOPs.
      1. One or more documented SOPs.
      2. Gap analysis.
      1. SOP Project Roadmap.
      2. Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool.
      1. Multiple documented SOPs.
      2. Action steps to improve SOP management and maintenance.

      Measured value for Guided Implementations (GIs)

      Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

      GI Measured Value
      Phase 1: Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs
      • Time, value, and resources saved using Info-Tech’s methodology to prioritize and document SOPs in the ideal visual format.
      • For example, 4 FTEs*4 days*$80,000/year = $5,120
      Phase 2: Establish a sustainable documentation process
      • Time, value, and resources saved using our tools and methodology to implement a process to ensure SOPs are maintained, accessible, and up to date.
      • For example: 4 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $6,400
      Phase 3: Identify a content management solution
      • Time, value, and resources saved using our best-practice guidance and tools to select an approach and solution to manage your organization’s SOPs.
      • For example: 2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200
      Total Savings $14,720

      Note: Documenting SOPs provides additional benefits that are more difficult to quantify: reducing the time spent by staff to find or execute processes, improving transparency and accountability, presenting opportunities for automation, etc.

      Phase 1

      Prioritize, Optimize, and Document Critical SOPs

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

      Phase 1 outline

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 1: Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2 weeks

      Step 1.1: Prioritize SOPs

      Start with an analyst kick off call:

      • Apply a client focus to critical IT services.
      • Identify undocumented, critical SOPs.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Rank and prioritize your SOP documentation needs.

      With this template:

      Standard Operating Procedures Workbook

      Step 1.2: Develop visual documentation

      Review findings with analyst:

      • Understand the benefits of a visual approach.
      • Review possibilities for visual documentation.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Identify formats that can improve your SOP documentation.

      With these templates:

      • Example DRP Process Flows
      • Example App Dev Process And more…

      Step 1.3: Optimize and document critical processes

      Finalize phase deliverable:

      • Two visual SOP documents, mapped using a tabletop exercise.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Create the visual SOP.
      • Review and optimize the process.

      With this tool:

      SOP Project Roadmap Tool

      Phase 1 Results & Insights:

      Identify opportunities to deploy visual documentation, and follow Info-Tech’s process to capture steps, gaps, and opportunities to improve IT processes.

      Focus first on client-facing and high-impact SOPs

      IT’s number one obligation to internal and external customers is to keep critical services running – that points to mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery.

      Topic Description
      Mission-critical operations
      • Maintenance processes for mission-critical systems (e.g. upgrade procedures, batch processing, etc.).
      • Client-facing services with either formal or informal SLAs.
      • Change management – especially for mission-critical systems, change management is more about minimizing risk of downtime than expediting change.
      Service management
      • Service desk procedures (e.g. ticket assignment and issue response).
      • Escalation procedures for critical outages.
      • System monitoring.
      Disaster recovery procedures
      • Management-level incident response plans, notification procedures, and high-level failover procedures (e.g. which systems must come up first, second, third).
      • Recovery or failover procedures for individual systems.
      • Backup and restore procedures – to ensure backups are available if needed.

      Understand what makes an application or service mission critical

      When email or a shared drive goes down, it may impact productivity, but may not be a significant impact to the business. Ask these questions when assessing whether an application or service is mission critical.

      Criteria Description
      Is there a hard-dollar impact from downtime?
      • For example, when an online catalog system goes down, it impacts sales and therefore revenue. Without determining the actual financial impact, you can make an immediate assessment that this is a Gold system.
      • By contrast, loss of email may impact productivity but may not affect revenue streams, depending on your business. A classification of Silver is most likely appropriate.
      Impact on goodwill/customer trust?
      • If downtime means delays in service delivery or otherwise impacts goodwill, there is an intangible impact on revenue that may make the associated systems Gold status.
      Is regulatory compliance a factor?
      • If a system requires redundancy and/or high availability due to legal or regulatory compliance requirements, it may need to be classified as a Gold system.
      Is there a health or safety risk?
      • For example, police and medical organizations have systems that are mission critical due to their impact on health and safety rather than revenue or cost, and therefore are classified as Gold systems. Are there similar considerations in your organization?

      "Email and other Windows-based applications are important for our day-to-day operations, but they aren’t critical. We can still manufacture and ship clothing without them. However, our manufacturing systems, those are absolutely critical"

      – Bob James, Technical Architect, Carhartt, Inc.

      Create a high-level risk and benefit scale

      1.1a

      15 minutes

      Define criteria for high, medium, and low risks and benefits, as shown in the example below. These criteria will be used in the upcoming exercises to rank SOPs.

      Note: The goal in this section is to provide high-level indicators of which SOPs should be documented first, so a high-level set of criteria is used. To conduct a detailed business impact analysis, see Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

      Materials

      • Whiteboard

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs
      Risk to the business Score
      Low: Affects ad hoc activities or non-critical data. 1
      Moderate: Impacts productivity and internal goodwill. 2
      High: Impacts revenue, safety, and external goodwill. 3
      Benefit (e.g. productivity improvement) Score
      Low: Minimal impact. 1
      Moderate: Items with short-term or occasional applicability, so limited benefit. 2
      High: Save time for common or ongoing processes, and extensive improvement to training/knowledge transfer. 3

      Identify and prioritize undocumented mission-critical operations

      1.1b

      15 minutes

      1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
      2. List your top three–five mission critical applications or services.
      3. Identify relevant SOPs that support those applications or services.
      4. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
      5. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

      OUTPUT

      • Analysis of SOPs supporting mission-critical operations

      Materials

      • Whiteboard

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs
      Application SOPs Status Risk Benefit
      Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
      • System administration (user administration, adding projects, etc.).
      Red 1 2
      • System upgrades (including OS upgrades and patches).
      Red 2 2
      • Report generation.
      Green n/a n/a
      Network services
      • Network monitoring (including fault detection).
      Yellow 3 2
      • Network upgrades.
      Red 2 1
      • Backup procedures.
      Yellow 3 1

      Identify and prioritize undocumented service management procedures

      1.1c

      15 minutes

      1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
      2. Identify service management SOPs.
      3. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
      4. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

      OUTPUT

      • Analysis of SOPs supporting service management

      Materials

      • Whiteboard

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs
      Service Type SOPs Status Risk Benefit
      Service Request
      • Software install
      Red 3 1
      • Software update
      Yellow 3 1
      • New hardware
      Green n/a n/a
      Incident Management
      • Ticket entry and triage
      Yellow 3 2
      • Ticket escalation
      Red 2 1
      • Notification for critical issues
      Yellow 3 1

      Identify and prioritize undocumented DR procedures

      1.1d

      20 minutes

      1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
      2. Identify DR SOPs.
      3. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
      4. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

      OUTPUT

      • Analysis of SOPs supporting DR

      Materials

      • Whiteboard

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs
      DR Phase SOPs Status Risk Benefit
      Discovery and Declaration
      • Initial detection and escalation
      Red 3 1
      • Notification procedures to Emergency Response Team (ERT)
      Yellow 3 1
      • Notification procedures to staff
      Green n/a n/a
      Recover Gold Systems
      • ERP recovery procedures
      Red 2 2
      • Corporate website recovery procedures
      Yellow 3 2
      Recover Silver Systems
      • MS Exchange recovery procedures
      Red 2 1

      Select the SOPs to focus on for the first round of documentation

      1.1e

      20 minutes

      1. Identify two significantly different priority 1 SOPs to document during this workshop. It’s important to get a sense of how the Info-Tech templates and methodology can be applied to different types of SOPs.
      2. Rank the remaining SOPs that you still need to address post-workshop by priority level within each topic area.

      INPUT

      • SOP analysis from activities 1.1 and 1.2

      OUTPUT

      • A shortlist of critical, undocumented SOPs to review later in this phase

      Materials

      • Whiteboard

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs
      Category Area SOPs Status Risk Benefit
      Disaster Recovery Procedures Discovery and Declaration
      • Initial detection and escalation
      Red 3 1
      • Notification procedures to ERT
      Yellow 3 1
      Mission-Critical Operations Network Services
      • Network monitoring (including fault detection)
      Yellow 3 2
      Service Management Procedures Incident Management
      • Ticket entry and triage
      Yellow 3 2

      Change the format of your documentation

      Which document is more effective? Which is more likely to be used?

      "The end result for most SOPs is a 100-page document that makes anyone but the author want to stab themselves rather than read it. Even worse is when you finally decide to waste an hour of your life reading it only to be told afterwards that it might not be quite right because Bob or Stan needed to make some changes last year but never got around to it."

      – Peter Church, Solutions Architect

      Create visual-based documentation to improve usability and effectiveness

      "Without question, 300-page DRPs are not effective. I mean, auditors love them because of the detail, but give me a 10-page DRP with contact lists, process flows, diagrams, and recovery checklists that are easy to follow."

      – Bernard Jones, MBCI, CBCP, CORP, Manager Disaster Recovery/BCP, ActiveHealth Management

      SOPs, including those that support your disaster recovery plan (DRP), are often created to meet certification requirements. However, this often leads to lengthy overly detailed documentation that is geared to auditors and business leaders, not IT staff trying to execute a procedure in a high-pressure, time-sensitive scenario.

      Staff don’t have time to flip through a 300-page manual, let alone read lengthy instructions, so organizations are transforming monster manuals into shorter, visual-based documentation. Benefits include:

      • Quicker to create than lengthy manuals.
      • Easier to be absorb, so they are more usable.
      • More likely to stay up to date because they are easier to maintain.

      Example: DRPs that include visual SOPs are easier to use — that leads to shorter recovery times and fewer mistakes.

      Chart is depicted showing the success rates of traditional manuals versus visual documentation.

      Use flowcharts for process flows or a high-level view of more detailed procedures

      • Flowcharts depict who does what and when; they provide an at-a-glance view that is easy to follow and makes task ownership clear.
      • Use swim lanes, as in this example, to indicate process stages and task ownership.
      • For experienced staff, a high-level reminder of process flows or key steps is sufficient.
      • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation (which could include checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts, etc.).

      See Info-Tech’s Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example.

      "Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management."

      – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

      Example: SOP in flowchart format

      A flowchart is depicted as an example flowchart. This one is an SOP flowchart labelled 'Triage Process - Incidents'

      Review your options for diagramming software

      Many organizations look for an option that easily integrates with the MS Office suite. The default option is often Microsoft Visio.

      Pros:

      • Easy to learn and use.
      • Has a wide range of features and capabilities.
      • Comes equipped with a large collection of stencils and templates.
      • Offers the convenience of fluid integration with the MS Office Suite.

      Cons:

      • Isn’t included in any version of the MS Office Suite and can be quite expensive to license.
      • Not available for Mac or Linux environments.

      Consider the options below if you’re looking for an alternative to Microsoft Visio:

      Desktop Solutions

      • Dia Diagram Editor
      • Diagram Designer
      • LibreOffice Draw
      • Pencil Project
      • yEd Graph Editor

      • Draw.io
      • Creately
      • Gliffy
      • LucidChart

      Note: No preference or recommendation is implied from the ordering of the options above.

      This list is not intended to be comprehensive.

      Evaluate different solutions to identify one that works for you

      Use the criteria below to identify a flowchart software that fits your needs.

      Criteria Description
      Platform What platform(s) can run the software?
      Description What use cases are identified by the vendor – and do these cover your needs for documenting your SOPs? Is the software open source?
      Features What are the noteworthy features and characteristics?
      Usability How easy is the program to use? What’s the learning curve like? How intuitive is the design?
      Templates and Stencils Availability of templates and stencils.
      Portability Can the solution integrate with other pieces of software? Consider whether other tools can view, open, and/or edit documents; what file formats can be published, etc.
      Cost Cost of the software to purchase or license.

      Use checklists to streamline step-by-step procedures

      • Checklists are ideal when staff just need a reminder of what to do, not how to do it.
      • Remember your audience. You aren’t pulling in a novice to run a complex procedure, so all you really need here are a series of reminders.
      • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation.
      • Note that a flowchart can often be used instead of a checklist, depending on preference.

      For two different examples of a checklist template, see:

      Image depicting an example checklist. This checklist depicts an employee termination checklist

      Use topology diagrams to capture network layout, integrations, and system information

      • Organizations commonly have network topology diagrams for reference purposes, so this is just a re-use of existing resources.
      • Physically label real world equipment to correspond to topology diagrams. While these labels will be redundant for most IT employees, they help give clarity and confidence when changes are being made.
      • If your topology diagrams are housed in a tool such as a systems management product, then export the diagrams so they can be included in your SOP documentation suite.

      "Our network engineers came to me and said our standard SOP template didn't work for them. They're now using a lot of diagrams and flowcharts, and that has worked out better for them."

      The image shows a topology organization diagram as an example network layout

      Use screen captures and tutorials to facilitate training for applications and SOPs

      • Screen capture tutorials or videos are effective for training staff on applications. For example, create a screen capture tutorial to train staff on the use of a help desk application and your company’s specific process for using that tool.
      • Similarly, create tutorials to train end users on straightforward “technical” tasks (e.g. setting up their VPN connection) to reduce the demand on IT staff.
      • Tutorials can be created quickly and easily with affordable software such as Snag-It, ScreenHunter Pro, HyperSnap, PicPick, FastStone, Ashampoo Snap 6, and many others.

      "When contractors come onboard, they usually don't have a lot of time to learn about the organization, and we have a lot of unique requirements. Creating SOP documents with screenshots has made the process quicker and more accurate."

      – Susan Bellamore, Business Analyst, Public Guardian and Trustee of British Columbia

      The image is an example of a screen caption tutorial, depicting desktop icons and a password login

      Example: Disaster recovery notification and declaration procedure

      1. Swim lanes indicate task ownership and process stages.
      2. Links to supporting documentation (which could include checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts, etc.) are included where necessary.
      3. Additional DR SOPs are captured within the same spreadsheet for convenient, centralized access.

      Review Info-Tech’s Incident Response and Recovery Process Flows – DRP Example.

      Example: DRP flowchart with links to supporting documents

      The image is an example of an DRP flowchart labelled 'Initial Discovery/Notification and Declaration Procedures'

      Establish flowcharting standards

      If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, then keep it simple and stick to basic flowcharting conventions as described below.

      Start, End, and Connector. Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified Modeling Language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.

      Start, End. Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.

      Process Step. Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the sub-process symbol and flowchart the sub-process separately.

      Sub-Process. A series of steps. For example, a critical incident SOP might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a sub-process, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).

      Decision. Represents decision points, typically with Yes/No branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority?” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).

      Document/Report Output. For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

      Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to build an SOP

      1.3a

      20 minutes

      Tabletop planning is a paper-based exercise where your team walks through a particular process and maps out what happens at each stage.

      1. For this exercise, choose one particular process to document.
      2. Document each step of the process using cue cards, which can be arranged on the table in sequence.
      3. Be sure to include task ownership in your steps.
      4. Map out the process as it currently happens – we’ll think about how to improve it later.
      5. Keep focused. Stay on task and on time.

      OUTPUT

      • Steps in the current process for one SOP

      Materials

      • Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      Info-Tech Insight

      Don’t get weighed down by tools. Relying on software or other technological tools can detract from the exercise. Use simple tools such as cue cards to record steps so that you can easily rearrange steps or insert steps based on input from the group.

      The image depicts three cue cards labelled steps 3 to 5. The cue cards are examples of the tabletop planning exercise.

      Collaborate to optimize the SOP

      1.3b

      20 minutes

      Review the tabletop exercise. What gaps exist in current processes?

      How can the process be made better? What are the outputs and checkpoints?

      The image depicts five cue cards, two of which are examples on how to improve the process. This is an example of the tabletop exercise.

      OUTPUT

      • Identify steps to optimize the SOP

      Materials

      • Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      A note on colors: Use white cards to record steps. Record gaps on yellow cards (e.g. a process step not documented) and risks on red cards (e.g. only one person knows how to execute a step) to highlight your gaps/to-dos and risks to be mitigated or accepted.

      If it’s necessary to clarify complex process flows during the exercise, also use green cards for decision diamonds, purple for document/report outputs, and blue for sub-processes.

      Capture opportunities to improve processes in the Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool

      1.3

      Rank and track projects to close gaps you discover in your processes.

      1. As a group, identify potential solutions to close the gaps in your processes that you’ve uncovered through the tabletop mapping exercise.
      2. Add these project names to the Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool on the “Project Scoring” tab.
      3. Review and adjust the criteria for evaluating the benefits and costs of different projects on the “Scoring Criteria” tab.
      4. Return to the “Project Scoring” tab, and assign weights at the top of each scoring column. Use the drop-down menus to adjust the scores for each project category. The tool will automatically rank the projects based on your input, but you can adjust the ranks as needed.
      5. Assign dates and descriptions to the projects on the “Implementation Schedule” tab, below.
      The image depicts a graph showing an example of ranked and tracked projects.

      Identify gaps to improve process performance and make SOP documentation a priority

      CASE STUDY

      Industry Government (700+ FTEs)
      Source Info-Tech Workshop

      Challenge

      • Tabletop planning revealed a 77-hour gap between current and desired RTO for critical systems.
      • Similarly, the current achievable RPO gap was up to one week, but the desired RPO was one hour.
      • A DR site was available but not yet set up with the necessary equipment.
      • Lack of documented standard operating procedures (SOPs) was identified as a risk since that increased the dependence on two or three key SMEs.

      Solution

      • Potential projects to close RTO/RPO gaps were identified, including:
        • Deploy servers that were decommissioned (as a result of a server refresh) to the DR site as warm standby servers.
        • Implement site-to-site data replication.
        • Document SOPs to enable tasks to be delegated and minimize resourcing risks.

      Results

      • A DR project implementation schedule was defined.
      • Many of the projects required no further investment, but rather deployment of existing equipment that could function as standby equipment at the DR site.
      • The DR risk from a lack of SOPs enabled SOPs to be made a priority. An expected side benefit is the ability to review and optimize processes and improve consistency in IT operations.

      Document the SOPs from the tabletop exercise

      1.3c

      20 minutes

      Document the results from the tabletop exercise in the appropriate format.

      1. Identify an appropriate visual format for the high-level SOP as well as for any sub-processes or supporting documentation.
      2. Break into groups of two or three.
      3. Each group will be responsible for creating part of the SOP. Include both the high-level SOP itself and any supporting documentation such as checklists, sign-off forms, sub-processes, etc.
      4. Once your document is complete, exchange it with that of another group. Review each other’s documents to check for clarity and completeness.

      OUTPUT

      • Output from activities 1.4 and 1.5

      Materials

      • Flowcharting software, laptops

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      This image has four cue cards, and an arrow pointing to a flowchart, depicting the transfer of the information on the cue cards into a flowchart software

      Repeat the tabletop exercise for the second process

      Come back together as a large group. Choose a process that is significantly different from the one you’ve just documented, and repeat the tabletop exercise.

      As a reminder, the steps are:

      1. Use the tabletop exercise to map out a current SOP.
      2. Collaborate to optimize the SOP.
      3. Decide on appropriate formats for the SOP and its supporting documents.
      4. Divide into small groups to create the SOP and its supporting documents.
      5. Repeat the steps above as needed for your initial review of critical processes.

      Info-Tech Insight

      If you plan to document more than two or three SOPs at once, consider making it an SOP “party” to add momentum and levity to an otherwise dry process. Review section 2.3 to find out how.

      If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      1.1a-e

      Get started by prioritizing SOPs

      Ensure the SOP project remains business focused, and kick off the project by analyzing critical business services. Identify key IT services that support the relevant business services. Conduct a benefit/risk analysis to prioritize which SOPs should become the focus of the workshop.

      1.3a-c

      Document the SOPs from the tabletop exercise

      Leverage a tabletop planning exercise to walk the team through the SOP. During the exercise, focus on identifying timelines, current gaps, and potential risks. Document the steps via que cards first and transpose the hard copies to an electronic version.

      Phase 2

      Establish a Sustainable Documentation Process

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

      Phase 2 outline

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 2: Establish a sustainable SOP documentation process

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks

      Step 2.1: Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs

      Start with an analyst call:

      • Establish documentation information guidelines.
      • Review version control best practices.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Implement best practices to identify and organize your SOPs.

      With these tools & templates:

      • SOP Workbook

      Step 2.2: Define a process to document and maintain SOPs

      Review findings with analyst:

      • Identify opportunities to create a culture that fosters SOP creation.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Create a plan to address SOP documentation gaps.

      With these tools & templates:

      • Document Management Checklist

      Step 2.3: Plan time with experts to put a dent in your documentation backlog

      Finalize phase deliverable:

      • Address outstanding undocumented SOPs by working through process issues together.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Organize and run a working session to document and optimize processes.

      With these tools & templates:

      • SOP Workbook
      • SOP Project Roadmap Tool

      Phase 2 Results & Insights:

      Improve the process for documenting and maintaining your SOPs, while putting a dent in your documentation backlog and gaining buy-in with staff.

      Identify current content management practices and opportunities for improvement

      DISCUSS

      What is the current state of your content management practices?

      Are you using a content management system? If not, where are documents kept?

      Are your organizational or departmental SOPs easy to find?

      Is version control a problem? What about file naming standards?

      Get everyone on the same page on the current state of your SOP document management system, using the questions above as the starting point.

      Keep document management simple for better adoption and consistency

      If there is too much complexity and staff can’t easily find what they need, you won’t get buy-in and you won’t get consistency.

      Whether you store SOPs in a sophisticated content management system (CMS) or on a shared network drive, keep it simple and focus on these primary goals:

      • Enable staff to find the right document.
      • Know if a document is the latest, approved version.
      • Minimize document management effort to encourage buy-in and consistency.

      If users can’t easily find what they need, it leads to bad practices. For example:

      • Users maintain their own local copies of commonly used documents to avoid searching for them. The risk is that local copies will not be automatically updated when the SOP changes.
      • Separate teams will implement their own document management system and repository. Now you have duplication of effort and company resources, multiple copies of documents (where each group needs their own version), and no centralized control over potentially sensitive documents.
      • Users will ignore documented SOPs or ask a colleague who might also be following the above bad practices.

      Insert a document information block on the first page of every document to identify key attributes

      Include a document information block on the first page of every document to identify key attributes. This strategy is as much about minimizing resistance as it is ensuring key attributes are captured.

      • A consistent document information block saves time (e.g. vs. customized approaches per document). If some fields don’t apply, enter “n/a.”
      • It provides key information about the document without having to check soft copy metadata, especially if you work with hard copies.
      • It’s a built-in reminder of what to capture and easier than updating document properties or header/footer information or entering metadata into a CMS.

      Note: The Info-Tech templates in this blueprint include a copy of the document information block shown in this example. Add more fields if necessary for your organization’s needs.

      For an example of a completed document information block, see Network Backup for Atlanta Data Center – Backups Example

      Info-Tech Insight

      For organizations with more advanced document management requirements, consider more sophisticated strategies (e.g. using metadata) as described in Info-Tech’s Use SharePoint for Enterprise Content Management and Reintroduce the Information Lifecycle to the Content Management Strategy. However, the basic concepts above still apply: establish standard attributes you need to capture and do so in a consistent manner.

      Modify the Info-Tech document information block to meet your requirements

      2.1a

      15 minutes

      1. Review “Guidelines and Template for the Document Information Block” in the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook. Determine if any changes are required, such as additional fields.
      2. Identify which fields you want to standardize and then establish standard terms. Balance the needs for simplicity and consistency – don’t force consistency where it isn’t a good fit.
      3. Pre-fill the document information block with standard terms and examples and add it to an SOP template that’s stored in your content management system.

      Educate staff by pre-filling the document

      • Providing examples built into the templates provides in-context, just-in-time training which is far more effective and easier than formal education efforts.
      • Focus your training on communicating when the template or standard terms change so that staff know to obtain the new version. Otherwise, the tendency for many staff will be to use one of their existing documents as their template.

      OUTPUT

      • Completed document information block

      Materials

      • Laptop
      • Projector

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      Leverage the document information block to create consistent filenames that facilitate searching

      Use the following filename format to create consistent, searchable, and descriptive filenames:

      Topic – Document Title – Document Type – Version Date

      Filename Component Purpose
      Topic
      • Functions as a filename prefix to group related documents but is also a probable search term. For project work, use a project name/number.
      Document Title
      • The title should be fairly descriptive of the content (if it isn’t, it’s not a good title) so it will help make the file easily identifiable and will include more probable search terms.
      Document Type Further distinguishes similar files (e.g. Maintenance SOP vs. a Maintenance Checklist).
      Version Date (for local files or if not using a CMS)
      • If it’s necessary to work on a file locally, include the version date at the end of the filename. The date is a more recognizable indicator of whether it’s the latest version or an old copy.
      • Establish a standard date format. Although MM-DD-YY is common in the US, the format YYYY-MM-DD reduces confusion between the month and day.

      For example:

      • ERP – System Administration Monthly Maintenance Tasks – Checklist – 2016-01-15.docx
      • ERP – System Administration Monthly Maintenance Tasks – SOP – 2017-01-10.docx
      • Backups – Network Backup Procedure for Atlanta Data Center – SOP – 2017-03-06.docx
      • PROJ437 – CRM Business Requirements – BRD – 2017-02-01.xlsx
      • DRP – Notification Procedures – SOP – 2016-09-14.docx
      • DRP – Emergency Response Team Roles and Responsibilities – Reference – 2018-03-10.xlsx

      Apply filename and document information block guidelines to existing SOPs

      2.1b

      15 minutes

      1. Review the SOPs created during the earlier exercises.
      2. Update the filenames and document information block based on guidelines in this section.
      3. Apply these guidelines to other select existing SOPs to see if additional modifications are required (e.g. additional standard terms).

      INPUT

      • Document Information Block

      OUTPUT

      • Updated filenames and document information blocks

      Materials

      • Laptop and projector

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      Implement version control policies for local files as well as those in your content management system (CMS)

      1. Version Control in Your CMS

      2. Always keep one master version of a document:

      • When uploading a new copy of an existing SOP (or any other document), ensure the filenames are identical so that you are just adding a new version rather than a separate new file.
      • Do not include version information in the filename (which would create a new separate file in your CMS). Allow your CMS to handle version numbering.
    • Version Control for Local Files

    • Ideally, staff would never keep local copies of files. However, there are times when it is practical or preferable to work from a local copy: for example, when creating or updating an SOP, or when working remotely if the CMS is not easily accessible.

      Implement the following policies to govern these circumstances:

      • Add the version date to the end of the filename while the document is local, as shown in the slide on filenames.
      • Remove the date when uploading it to a CMS that tracks date and version. If you leave the date in the filename, you will end up with multiple copies in your CMS.
      • When distributing copies for review, upload a copy to the CMS and send the link. Do not attach a physical file.
    • Minimize the Need for Version Updates

    • Reduce the need for version updates by isolating volatile information in a separate, linked document. For example:

      • Use Policy documents to establish high-level expectations and goals, and use SOPs to capture workflow, but put volatile details in a separate reference document. For example, for Backup procedures, put offsite storage vendor details such as contact information, pick up times, and approved couriers in a separate document.
      • Similarly, for DRP Notification procedures, reference a separate contacts list.

      Modify the Info-Tech Document Management Checklist to meet your requirements

      2.1c

      15 minutes

      1. Review the Info-Tech Document Management Checklist.
      2. Add or remove checklist items.
      3. Update the document information block.

      OUTPUT

      • Completed document management checklist

      Materials

      • Laptop, projector

      Participants

      • Process Owners
      • SMEs

      See Info-Tech’s Document Management Checklist.

      If you aren’t going to keep your SOPs current, then you’re potentially doing more harm than good

      An outdated SOP can be just as dangerous as having no SOP at all. When a process is documented, it’s trusted to be accurate.

      • Disaster recovery depends as much on supporting SOPs – such as backup and restore procedures – as it does on a master incident response plan.
      • For disaster scenarios, the ability to meet recovery point objectives (i.e. minimize data loss) and recovery time objectives (i.e. minimize downtime) depends on smoothly executed recovery procedures and on having well-defined and up-to-date DR documentation and supporting SOPs. For example:
        • Recovery point (data loss) objectives are directly impacted by your backup procedures.
        • Recovery time is minimized by a well-defined restore procedure that reduces the risk of human error during recovery which could lead to data loss or a delay in the recovery.
        • Similarly, a clearly documented configuration procedure will reduce the time to bring a standby system online.
      A graph depicting the much faster recovery time of up-to-date SOPs versus out-of-date SOPs.

      Follow Info-Tech best practices to keep SOPs current and drive consistent, efficient IT operations

      The following best practices were measured in this chart, and will be discussed further in this section:

      1. Identify documentation requirements as part of project planning.
      2. Require a manager or supervisor to review and approve SOPs.
      3. Check documentation status as part of change management.
      4. Hold staff accountable.
      Higher adoption of Info-Tech best practices leads to more effective SOPs and greater benefits in areas such as training and process improvement.

      Graph depicting the efficiency of adopting Info-Tech practices regarding SOPs. Four categories of 'Training', 'process improvement', 'IT automation', and 'consistent IT operations' are shown increasing in efficiency with a high adoption of Info-Tech strategies.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Audits for compliance requirements have little impact on getting SOPs done in a timely manner or the actual usefulness of those SOPs, because the focus is on passing the audit instead of creating SOPs that improve operations. The frantic annual push to complete SOPs in time for an audit is also typically a much greater effort than maintaining documents as part of ongoing change management.

      Identify documentation requirements as part of project planning

      DISCUSS

      When are documentation requirements captured, including required changes to SOPs?

      Make documentation requirements a clearly defined deliverable. As with any other task, this should include:

      • Owner: The person ultimately responsible for the documentation.
      • Assigned resource: The person who will actually put pen to paper. This could be the same person as the owner, or the owner could be a reviewer.
      • Deadlines: Include documentation deliverables in project milestones.
      • Verification process: Validate completion and accuracy. This could be a peer review or management review.
      Example: Implement a new service desk application.
      • Service desk SOP documentation requirements: SOP for monitoring and managing tickets will require changes to leverage new automation features.
      • Owner: Service Desk Lead.
      • Assigned resource: John Smith (service desk technician).
      • Deadline: Align with “ready for QA testing.”
      • Verification process: Service Desk Lead document review and signoff.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Realistically, documentation will typically be a far less urgent task than the actual application or system changes. However, if you want the necessary documentation to be ultimately completed, even if it’s done after more urgent tasks, it must be tracked.

      Implement document approval steps at the individual and project level

      DISCUSS

      How do you currently review and validate SOP documents?

      Require a manager or supervisor to review and approve SOPs.

      • Avoid a bureaucratic review process involving multiple parties. The goal is to ensure accuracy and not just provide administrative protection.
      • A review by the immediate supervisor or manager is often sufficient. Their feedback and the implied accountability improve the quality and usefulness of the SOPs.

      Check documentation status as part of change management.

      • Including a documentation status check holds the project leaders and management accountable.
      • If SOPs are not critical to the project deliverable, then realistically the deliverable is not held back. However, keep the project open until relevant documents are updated so those tasks can’t be swept under the rug until the next audit.

      SOP reviews, change management, and identifying requirements led to benefits such as training and process improvement.

      A chart depicting the impact and benefits of SOP reviews, change management and identifying requirements. The chart is accompanied by a key for the grey to blue colours depicted

      "Our directors and our CIO have tied SOP work to performance evaluations and SOP status is reviewed during management meetings. People have now found time to get this work done."

      – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

      Review SOPs regularly and assign a process owner to avoid reinforcing silos

      CASE STUDY

      Industry

      Public service organization

      Source

      Info-Tech client engagement

      Situation

      • The organization’s IT department consists of five heavily siloed units.
      • Without communication or workflow accountability across units, each had developed incompatible workflows, making estimates of “time to resolution” for service requests difficult.
      • The IT service manager purchases a new service desk tool, attempting to standardize requests across IT to improve efficiency, accountability, and transparency.

      Complication

      • The IT service manager implements the tool and creates standardized workflows without consulting stakeholders in the different service units.
      • The separate units immediately rebel against the service manager and try to undermine the implementation of the new tool.

      Results

      • Info-Tech analysts helped to facilitate a solution between experts in the different units.
      • In order to develop a common workflow and ticket categorization scheme, Info-Tech recommended that each service process should have a single approver.

      The bottom line: ensure that there’s one approver per process to drive process efficiency and accountability and avoid problems down the road.

      Hold staff accountable to encourage SOP work to be completed in a timely manner

      DISCUSS

      Are SOP updates treated as optional or “when I have time” work?

      Hold staff directly accountable for SOP work.

      Holding staff accountable is really about emphasizing the importance of ensuring SOPs stay current. If management doesn’t treat SOPs as a priority, then neither will your staff. Strategies include:

      • Include SOP work in performance appraisals.
      • Keep relevant tickets open until documentation is completed.
      • Ensure documents are reviewed, as discussed earlier.
      • Identify and assign documentation tasks as part of project planning efforts, as discussed earlier.

      Holding staff accountable minimizes procrastination and therefore maintenance effort.

      Chart depicting the impact on reducing SOP maintenance effort followed by a key defining the colours on the chart

      Info-Tech Insight

      Holding staff accountable does not by itself make a significant impact on SOP quality (and therefore the typical benefits of SOPs), but it minimizes procrastination, so the work is ultimately done in a more timely manner. This ensures SOPs are current and usable, so they can drive benefits such as consistent operations, improved training, and so on.

      Assign action items to address SOP documentation process challenges

      2.2

      1. Discuss the challenges mentioned at the start of this section, and other challenges highlighted by the strategies discussed in this section. For example:
      • Are documentation requirements included in project planning?
      • Are SOPs and other documentation deliverables reviewed?
      • Are staff held accountable for documentation?
    • Document the challenges in your copy of the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook and assign action items to address those challenges.
    • Challenge Action Items Action Item Owner
      Documentation requirements are identified at the end of a project.
      • Modify project planning templates and checklists to include “identify documentation requirements.”
      Bob Ryan
      SOPs are not reviewed.
      • When assigning documentation tasks, also assign an owner who will be responsible for reviewing and approving the deliverable.
      • Create a mechanism for officially signing off on the document (e.g. email approval or create a signoff form).
      Susan Jones

      An “SOP party” fosters a collaborative approach and can add some levity to an otherwise dry exercise

      What is an SOP party?

      • An SOP party is a working session, bringing together process owners and key staff to define current SOPs and collaborate to identify optimization opportunities.
      • The party aspect is really just about how you market the event. Order in food or build in a cooking contest (e.g. a chilli cook-off or dessert bake-off) to add some fun to what can be a dry activity.

      Why does this work?

      • Process owners become so familiar with their tasks that many of the steps essentially live in their heads. Questions from colleagues draw out those unwritten steps and get them down on paper so another sufficiently qualified employee could carry out the same steps.
      • Once the processes are defined (e.g. via a tabletop exercise), input from colleagues can help identify risks and optimization opportunities, and process questions can be quickly answered because the key people are all present.
      • The group approach also promotes consistency and enables you to set expectations (e.g. visual-based approach, standards, level of detail, etc.).

      When is collaboration necessary (e.g. via tabletop planning)?

      • Tabletop planning is ideal for complex processes as well as processes that span multiple tasks, people, and/or systems.
      • For processes with a narrow focus (e.g. recovery steps for a specific server), assign these to the SME to document. Then ensure the SOP is reviewed to draw out the unwritten steps as described above.
      • For example, if you use tabletop planning to document a high-level DR plan, sub-processes might include recovery procedures for individual systems; those SOPs can then be assigned to individual SMEs.

      Schedule SOP working sessions until critical processes are documented

      Ultimately, it’s more efficient to create and update SOPs as needed but dedicated working sessions will help address immediate critical needs.

      Organize the working session:
      1. Book a full-day meeting in an out of the way meeting room, invite key staff (system and process owners who ultimately need to be SOP owners), and order in lunch so no one has to leave.
      2. Prioritize SOPs (see Phase 1) and set goals (e.g. complete the top 6 SOPs during this session).
      3. Alternate between collaborative efforts and documenting the SOPs. For example:
        1. Tabletop or flowchart the current SOP. Take a picture of the current state for reference purposes.
        2. Look for process improvements. If you have the authority in the room to enable process changes, then modify the tabletop/flowchart accordingly and capture this desired future state (e.g. take a picture). Otherwise, identify action items to follow up on proposed changes.
        3. Identify all related documentation deliverables (e.g. sub-processes, checklists, approval forms, etc.).
        4. Create the identified documentation deliverables (divide the work among the team). Then repeat the above.
      4. Repeat these working sessions on a monthly or quarterly basis, depending on your requirements, until critical SOPs are completed.
      5. When the SOP backlog is cleared, conduct quarterly or semi-annual refreshers for ongoing review and optimization of key processes.

      Assign action items to capture next steps after SOP working sessions

      2.3

      1. Review the SOPs documented during this workshop. Identify action items to complete and validate those SOPs and related documents. For example, do the SOPs require further approval or testing?
      2. Similarly, review the document management checklist and identify action items to complete, expand, and/or validate proposed standards.
      3. For SOP working sessions, decide on a date, time, and who should be there based on the guidelines in this section. If the SOP party approach does not meet your requirements, then at the very least assign owners for the identified critical SOPs and set deadlines for completing those SOPs. Document these extra action items in your copy of the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
      SOP or Task Action Items Action Item Owner
      Ticket escalation SOP
      • Debrief the rest of the Service Desk team on the new process.
      • Modify the SOP further based on feedback, if warranted.
      • Implement the new SOP. This includes communicating visible changes to business users and other IT staff.
      Jeff Sutter
      SOP party
      • Contact prospective attendees to communicate the purpose of the SOP party.
      • Schedule the SOP party.
      Bob Smith

      If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with out Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      2.1

      Identify current content management practices

      As a group, identify current pain points and opportunities for improvement in your current content management practices.

      2.2

      Assign action items to address documentation process challenges

      Develop a list of action items to address gaps in the SOP documentation and maintenance process.

      Phase 3

      Identify a Content Management Solution

      Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

      Phase 3 outline

      Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

      Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

      Guided Implementation 3: Decide on a content management solution for your SOPs

      Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

      Step 3.1: Understand the options for CM solutions

      Start with an analyst kick off call:

      • Review your current approach to content management and discuss possible alternatives.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Evaluate the pros and cons of different approaches to content management.
      • Discuss approaches for fit with your team.

      Step 3.2: Identify the right solution for you

      Review findings with analyst:

      • Identify 2–3 possible options for a content management strategy.

      Then complete these activities…

      • Identify the best solution based on portability, maintainability, cost, and implementation effort.

      With these tools & templates:

      • Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool
      • SOP Project Roadmap
      • SOP Workbook

      Phase 3 Results & Insights:

      Choose an approach to content management that will best support your organization’s SOP documentation and maintenance process.

      Decide on an appropriate publishing and document management strategy for your organization

      Publishing and document management considerations:

      • Portability/External Access: At the best of times, portability is nice because it enables flexibility, but at the worst of times (such as in a disaster recovery situation) it is absolutely essential. If your primary site is down, can you still access your documentation? As shown in this chart, traditional storage strategies still dominate DRP documentation, but these aren’t necessarily the best options.
      • Maintainability/Usability: How easy is it to create, update, and use the documentation? Is it easy to link to other documents? Is there version control? The easier the system is to use, the easier it is to get employees to use it.
      • Cost/Effort: Is the cost and effort appropriate? For example, a large enterprise may need a formal solution like SharePoint or a Content Management System. For smaller organizations, the cost of these tools might be harder to justify.

      Consider these approaches:

      This section reviews the following approaches, their pros and cons, and how they meet publishing and document management requirements:

      • SOP tools.
      • Cloud-based content management software.
      • In-house solutions combining SharePoint and MS Office (or equivalent).
      • Wiki site.
      • “Manual” approaches such as storing documents on a USB drive.
      Chart depicting the portable strategy popularity, followed by a key defining the colours on the graph

      Source: Info-Tech Research Group; N=118

      Note: Percentages total more than 100% due to respondents using more than one portability strategy.

      Develop a content management strategy and process to reduce organizational risk

      CASE STUDY

      Segment

      Mid-market company

      Source

      Info-Tech Interview

      Situation

      • A mid-sized company hired a technical consultancy to manage its network.
      • As part of this move, the company’s network administrator was fired.
      • Over time, this administrator had become a “go-to” person for several other IT functions.

      Complication

      • The consulting team realizes that the network administrator kept critical documentation on his local hard drive.
      • This includes configs, IP addresses, passwords, logins to vendor accounts, and more.
      • It becomes clear the administrator was able to delete some of this information before leaving, which the consultants are required to retrieve and re-document.

      Result

      • Failing to implement effective SOPs for document management and terminating key IT staff exposed the organization to unnecessary risk and additional costs.
      • Allowing a local content management system to develop created a serious security risk.
      • The bottom line: create a secure, centralized, and backed-up location and establish SOPs around using it to help keep the company’s data safe.

      Info-Tech offers a web-based policy management solution with process management capabilities

      Role How myPolicies helps you
      Policy Sponsors
      • CEO
      • Board of Directors

      Reduced Corporate Risk

      Avoid being issued a regulatory fine or sanction that could jeopardize operations or hurt brand image.

      Policy Reviewers
      • Internal Audit
      • Compliance
      • Risk
      • Legal

      A Culture of Compliance

      Adherence with regulatory requirements as well as documented audit trail of all critical policy activities.

      Policy Owners
      • HR
      • IT
      • Finance
      • Operations

      Less Administrative Burden

      Automation and simplification of policy creation, distribution, and tracking.

      Policy Users
      • Employees
      • Vendors
      • Contractors

      Policy Clarity

      Well-written policies are stored in one reliable, easy to navigate location.

      About this Approach:

      myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms, built around best practices identified by our research.

      Contact your Account Manager today to find out if myPolicies is right for you.

      SOP software and DR planning tools can help, but they aren’t a silver bullet

      Portability/External Access:
      • Pros: Typically have a SaaS option, providing built-in external access with appropriate security and user administration to vary access rights.
      • Cons: Dependent on the vendor to ensure external access, but this is typically not an issue.
      Maintainability/Usability:
      • Pros: Built-in templates encourage consistency as well as guide initial content development by indicating what details need to be captured.
      • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.), centralized access/navigation to required documents, and some automation (e.g. update contacts throughout the system).
      • Cons: Not a silver bullet. You still have to do the work to define and capture your processes.
      • Cons: Requires end-user and administrator training.
      • Cons: Often modules of larger software suites. If you use the entire suite, it may make sense to use the SOP tool, but otherwise probably not.
      Cost/Effort:
      • Pros: For large enterprises, the convenience of built-in document management and templates can outweigh the cost.
      • Cons: SOP tools can be costly. Expect to pay at least $3,000-7,000 for software licensing, plus additional per user and hosting fees.
      About this Approach:

      SOP tools such as Princeton Center’s SOP ExpressTM and SOP Tracks or MasterControl’s SOP Management and eSOP allow organizations to create, manage, and access SOPs. These programs typically offer a range of SOP templates and formats, electronic signatures, version control, and review options and training features such as quizzes and monitoring.

      Similarly, DR planning solutions (e.g. eBRP, Recovery Planner, LDRPS, etc.) provide templates, tools, and document management to create DR documentation including SOPs.

      Consider leveraging SharePoint to provide document management capabilities

      Portability/External Access:
      • Pros: SharePoint is commonly web-enabled and supports external access with appropriate security and user administration.
      • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites or be cloud-based to be effective in the event of a worst-case scenario disaster recovery situation in which the primary data center is down.
      Maintainability/Usability:
      • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access to required documents.
      • Pros: No tool learning curve – SharePoint and MS Office would be existing solutions already used on a daily basis.
      • Cons: No built-in automated updates (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
      • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
      Cost/Effort:
      • Pros: Using existing tools, so this is a sunk cost in terms of capex.
      • Cons: Additional effort required to create templates and manage the documentation library.

      For more information on SharePoint as a content management solution, see Info-Tech’s Use SharePoint for Enterprise Content Management.

      About this Approach:

      Most SOP documents start as MS Office documents, even if there is an SOP tool available (some SOP tools actually run within MS Office on the desktop). For organizations that decide to bypass a formal SOP tool, the biggest gap they have to overcome is document management.

      Many organizations are turning to SharePoint to meet this need. For those that already have SharePoint in place, it makes sense to further leverage SharePoint for SOP documentation.

      For SharePoint to be a practical solution, the documentation must still be accessible if the primary data center is down, e.g. by having redundant SharePoint instance at multiple in-house locations or using a cloud-based SharePoint solution.

      As an alternative to SharePoint, SaaS tools such as Power DMS, NetDocuments, Xythos on Demand, Knowledge Tree, Spring CM, and Zoho Docs offer cloud-based document management, authoring, and distribution services that can work well for SOPs. Some of these, such as Power DMS and Spring CM, are geared specifically toward workflows.

      A wiki may be all you need

      Portability/External Access:
      • Pros: Wiki sites can support external access as with any web solution.
      • Cons: May lack more sophisticated content management features.
      Maintainability/Usability:
      • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access to required information.
      • Pros: Authorized users can make updates dynamically, depending on how much restriction you have on the site.
      • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
      • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
      Cost/Effort:
      • Pros: An inexpensive option compared to traditional content management solutions such as SharePoint.
      • Cons: Learning curve if wikis are new to your organization.
      About this Approach:

      Wiki sites are websites where users collaborate to create and edit the content. Wikipedia is an example.

      While wiki sites are typically used for collaboration and dynamic content development, the traditional collaborative authoring model can be restricted to provide structure and an approval process.

      Several tools are available to create and manage wiki sites (and other collaboration solutions), as outlined in the following research:

      An approach that I’ve seen work well is to consult the wiki for any task, activity, job, etc. Is it documented? If not, then document it there and then. Sure, this led to 6-8 weeks of huge effort, but the documentation grew in terms of volume and quality at an alarming but pleasantly surprising rate. Providing an environment to create the documentation is important and a wiki is ideal. Fast, lightweight, in-browser editing leads to little resistance in creating documents.

      - Lee Blackwell, Global IT Operation Services Manager, Avid Technology

      Managing SOPs on a shared network drive involves major challenges and limitations

      Portability/External Access:
      • Cons: Must be hosted at redundant sites in order to be effective in a worst-case scenario that takes down your data center.
      Maintainability/Usability:
      • Pros: Easy to implement and no learning curve.
      • Pros: Access can be easily managed.
      • Cons: Version control, standardization, and document management can be significant challenges.
      Cost/Effort:
      • Pros: Little to no cost and no tool management required.
      • Cons: Managing documents on a shared network drive requires strict attention to process for version control, updates, approvals, and distribution.
      About this Approach:

      With this strategy, SOP documents are stored and managed locally on a shared network drive. Only process owners and administrators have read-write permissions on documents on the shared drive.

      The administrator grants access and manages security permissions.

      Info-Tech Insight

      For small organizations, the shared network drive approach can work, but this is ultimately a short-term solution. Move to an online library by creating a wiki site. Start slow by beginning with a particular department or project, then evaluate how well your staff adapt to this technology as well as its potential effectiveness in your organization. Refer to the Info-Tech collaboration strategy research cited on the previous slide for additional guidance.

      Avoid extensive use of paper copies of SOP documentation

      SOP documents need to be easy to update, accessible from anywhere, and searchable. Paper doesn’t meet these needs.

      Portability/External Access:
      • Pros: Does not rely on technology or power.
      • Cons: Not adequate for disaster recovery situations; would require all staff to have a copy and to have it with them at all times.
      Maintainability/Usability:
      • Pros: In terms of usability, again there is no dependence on technology.
      • Cons: Updates need to be printed and distributed to all relevant staff every time there is a change to ensure staff have access to the latest most accurate documentation.
      • Cons: Navigation to other information is manual – flipping through pages etc. No searching or hyperlinks.
      Cost/Effort:
      • Pros: No technology system to maintain, aside from what you use for printing.
      • Cons: Printing expenses are actually among the highest incurred by organizations and this adds to it.
      • Cons: Labor-intensive due to need to print and physically distribute documentation updates.
      About this Approach

      Traditionally, SOPs were printed and kept somewhere in a large binder (or several large binders). This isn’t adequate to the needs of most organizations and typically results in documents that aren’t up to date or effective.

      Use Info-Tech’s solution evaluation tool to decide on a publishing and document management strategy

      All organizations have existing document management methodologies, even if it’s simply storing documents on a network drive.

      Use Info-Tech’s solution evaluation tool to decide whether your existing solution meets the portability/external access, maintainability/usability, and cost/effort criteria, or whether you need to explore a different option.

      Note: This tool was originally built to evaluate DRP publishing options, so the tool name and terminology refers to DR. However, the same tool can be used to evaluate general SOP publishing and document management solutions.

      The image is a screenshot of Info-Tech's evaluation tool
      Consider using Info-Tech’s DRP Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool.

      Info-Tech Insight

      There is no absolute ranking for possible solutions. The right choice will depend on factors such as current in-house tools, maturity around document management, the size of your IT department, and so on. For example, a small shop may do very well with the USB drive strategy, whereas a multi-national company will need a more formal strategy to ensure consistent application of corporate guidelines.

      If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

      Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

      • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
      • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
      • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

      The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

      3.1

      Decide on a publishing and document management strategy

      Review the pros and cons of different strategies for publishing and document management. Identify needs, priorities, and limitations of your environment. Create a shortlist of options that can meet your organization’s needs and priorities.

      3.2

      Complete the solution evaluation tool

      Evaluate solutions on the shortlist to identify the strongest option for your organization, based on the criteria of maintainability, affordability, effort to implement, and accessibility/portability.

      Insight breakdown

      Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.

      • Visual documents that can be scanned are more usable and easier to update.
      • Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams all have their place in visual documentation.

      Start with high-impact SOPs.

      • It can be difficult to decide where to start when faced with a major documentation backlog.
      • Focus first on client facing and high-impact SOPs, i.e. mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery procedures.

      Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and hold staff accountable.

      • Holding staff accountable does not provide all the benefits of a well documented and maintained SOP, but it minimizes procrastination, so the work is ultimately done in a more timely manner.

      Summary of accomplishment

      Knowledge Gained

      SOPs may not be exciting, but they’re very important to organizational consistency, efficiency, and improvement.

      This blueprint outlined how to:

      • Prioritize and execute SOP documentation work.
      • Establish a sustainable process for creating and maintaining SOP documentation.
      • Choose a content management solution for best fit.

      Processes Optimized

      • Multiple processes supporting mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery were documented. Gaps in those processes were uncovered and addressed.
      • In addition, your process for maintaining process documents was improved, including adding documentation requirements and steps requiring documentation approval.

      Deliverables Completed

      As part of completing this project, the following deliverables were completed:

      • Standard Operating Procedures Workbook
      • Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool
      • Document Management Checklist
      • Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool

      Project step summary

      Client Project: Create and maintain visual SOP documentation.

      1. Prioritize undocumented SOPs.
      2. Develop visual SOP documentation.
      3. Optimize and document critical processes.
      4. Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs.
      5. Define a process for documenting and maintaining SOPs.
      6. Plan time with experts to put a dent in your documentation backlog.
      7. Understand the options for content management solutions.
      8. Identify the right content management solution for your organization.

      Info-Tech Insight

      This project has the ability to fit the following formats:

      • Onsite workshop by Info-Tech Research Group consulting analysts.
      • Do-it-yourself with your team.
      • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

      Bibliography

      Anderson, Chris. “What is a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)?” Bizmanualz, Inc. No date. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://www.bizmanualz.com/save-time-writing-procedures/what-are-policies-and-procedures-sop.html

      Grusenmeyer, David. “Developing Effective Standard Operating Procedures.” Dairy Business Management. 1 Feb. 2003. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://ecommons.cornell.edu/handle/1813/36910

      Mosaic. “The Value of Standard Operating Procedures.” 22 Oct. 2012. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. ttp://www.mosaicprojects.com.au/WhitePapers/WP1086_Standard_Operating_Procedures.pdf

      Sinn, John W. “Lean, Six Sigma, Quality Transformation Toolkit (LSSQTT) Tool #17 Courseware Content – Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) For Lean and Six Sigma: Infrastructure for Understanding Process.” Summer 2006. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://www.bgsu.edu/content/dam/BGSU/college-of-technology/documents/LSSQTT/LSSQTT%20Toolkit/toolkit3/LSSQTT-Tool-17.pdf

      United States Environmental Protection Agency. “Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).” April 2007. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. http://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2015-06/documents/g6-final.pdf

      Safety as a secondary consideration

      • Large vertical image:
      • member rating overall impact: Very High
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A

      This is a story that should make you perk up.

      I know of a department that was eager to launch their new product. The strain was severe. The board was breathing down their necks. Rivals were catching up (or so they thought).

      What did they do?

      "Let's get this thing live, prove the market wants it, then we'll circle back and handle all the security and stability backlog items." For the product owner, at the time, that seemed the right thing to do.

      They were hacked 48 hours after going live.

      Customer information was stolen. The brand's reputation suffered. The decision led to a months-long legal nightmare. And they still had to completely rebuild the system. Making stability and security bolt-on items is never a good idea.

      The true price of "fix it later"

      See, I understand. When the product owner is pressing for user experience enhancements and you're running out of time for launch, it's easy to overlook those "non-functional requirements." Yet, we should avoid blaming the product owner. The PO is under pressure from many stakeholders, and a delayed launch may also come with significant costs.

      Load balancing isn't visible to customers, after all. Penetration testing doesn't excite them. Failure mechanisms don't matter to them. This statement is true until a malfunction impacts a client. Then it suddenly becomes the most important thing in the world.

      However, I know that ignoring non-functional requirements (NFRs) can lead to failed businesses (or business lines). This elevates these issues beyond mere technical inconveniences. NFRs are designed with the client in mind.

      Look at it this way. When your system crashes during periods of high traffic, how does the user experience change? How satisfied are customers when their personal information is stolen? When it takes 30 seconds for your website to load, how does that conversion rate look?

      Let me expose you to some consultant figures. The average cost of IT outages is $5,600 per minute, according to a 2014 Gartner study. That figure can rise to $300,000 per hour for larger businesses. The reality is that in your department, you will rarely reach these numbers. When we look at current (2020-2025) and expected (2026) trends, the typical operational loss numbers in international commercial banking or insurance are closer to 100K for high-impact incidents that are handled within 2–3 hours.

      Obviously, your numbers will vary. And if you don't know what your costs are, now would be a good time to discover that. This does not imply that you should simply accept the risks associated with such situations. You must fix or mitigate such opportunities for hackers to get in. Do so at the appropriate cost for your business.

      Data breaches are a unique phenomenon. According to IBM's Cost of a Data Breach Report 2025, a data breach typically costs $4.44 million, and detecting and containing it takes an average of 241 days. Some preview data from the 2025 report include that 97% of organizations that reported on the study indicated that they lacked access controls for their AI systems. That means that many companies don't even have the basics in order. And AI-related breaches are just going to accelerate. AI security defenses will help lower the cost of such breaches.

      Despite the decreasing cost of these breaches, I anticipate an increase in their frequency in the upcoming years.

      This means that non-functional requirements in terms of security and resilience should take a more prominent place in the prioritizations. Your client depends on your systems being safe, resilient, and performant.

      The blind spot in leadership

      And yet, this is where some leaders make mistakes. I have the impression they believe that client-focused design means more functionality and elegant interfaces. They prioritize user experience enhancements over system reliability.

      I want to share a key fact that distinguishes successful businesses: customers desire more than just a good product. It must always function for them. And that means following certain procedures. They are not there to hamper you; they are there to retain customers.

      88% of online shoppers are less likely to visit a website again after a negative experience, according to research from Forrester. Amazon found that they lose 1% of sales for every 100 ms of latency. That 100 milliseconds adds up to millions of lost profits when billions of dollars are at stake.

      You run the risk of more than just technical difficulties when you deprioritize safety. Customer trust, revenue stability, competitive advantage, adherence to the law, costs, and team morale are all at stake.

      The "happy flow" trap is costing you revenue.

      Allow me to illustrate what I see happening during development cycles.

      The team tests the happy flow. The user successfully logs in. The user navigates with ease. The user makes the purchase without any problems. The user logs off without incident.

      "Excellent! Publish it!"

      However, what occurs if 1000 users attempt to log in at once? What occurs if an attempt is made to insert malicious code into your contact form? During a transaction, what happens if your database connection fails?

      These are not extreme situations. These are real-life occurrences.

      Fifty percent of data center managers and operators reported having an impactful outage in the previous three years, according to the Uptime Institute's 2025 Global Data Center Survey. Note that this is at the infra level. The biggest contributor is power outages. What role does power play in ensuring a smooth flow? Power will not always flow as you want it, so plan for lack of power and for spikes.

      With regard to software failures, the spread of possible causes widens. AI is a big contributor. AI is typically brought in to accelerate development and assist in coding. But it tends to introduce subtle bugs and vulnerabilities that a seasoned developer has to review and solve.

      Another upcoming article will discuss how faster release cycles often lead to a rush in testing. This should not be the case; by spending some time automating your (non-)regression test bank, you will gain speed. But you have to invest time in building the test suite.

      Can your system handle success? This question should keep every executive awake at night.

      I've witnessed businesses invest millions in advertising campaigns to drive traffic to systems that fail due to their success. Consider describing to your board how your greatest marketing victory became your worst operational mishap.

      Managing traffic spikes is only one aspect of load balancing. It is about ensuring that your business can handle opportunities without being overwhelmed.

      The mindset that transforms everything

      Let's now address the most pressing issue: security.

      The majority of leaders consider security to be like insurance, something you hope you never need. The fact that security is more than just protection, however, will alter the way you approach every project. It's approval to develop.

      According to the Ponemon Institute's 2025 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report, the average annualized cost of insider threats, defined as employee negligence, criminal insiders, and credential thieves, has risen to $17.4 million per incident, up from $15.4 million in 2022. The number of discovered and analyzed incidents increased from 3,269 in 2018 to 7,868 in 2025 research studies. 

      Cybersecurity Ventures predicts that cybercrime will cost the global economy $10.5 trillion annually by 2025.

      The most fascinating thing, though, is that companies that invest in proactive security see measurable outcomes. Organizations that allocate over 10% of their IT budget to cybersecurity have a 2.5-fold higher chance of experiencing no security incidents than those that allocate less than 1%, per Deloitte's Future of Cyber Survey.

      By hardening your systems against common attack vectors, you can scale quickly without worrying about the future. You can handle sensitive data with confidence, enter new markets without fear, establish partnerships that require trust, and focus on innovation instead of crisis management.

      The non-functional needs that genuinely generate income

      Allow me to explain this in a way that will satisfy your CFO.

      Retention is equal to reliability. Customers return when a system functions reliably (given you sell items they want). The Harvard Business Review claims that a 5% increase in customer retention rates boosts profits by 25% to 95%. It is five to twenty-five times less expensive to retain customers than to acquire new ones.

      Scalability is equal to security. Secure systems can handle larger client volumes, more sensitive data, and higher-value transactions. 69% of board members and C-suite executives think that privacy and cyber risks could affect their company's ability to grow, according to PwC.

      Profit is equal to performance. You lose conversions for every second of load time. Google discovered that the likelihood of a bounce rises by 32% as page load time increases from 1 to 3 seconds. It increases by 90% from 1 second to 5 seconds. Walmart discovered that every second improvement in page load time led to a 2% increase in conversions.

      Reputation is equal to resilience. Guess which company benefits when your system works while your competitors' systems fail? Failures reduce trust. 71% of consumers will actively advocate against companies they don't trust, and 67% of consumers will stop purchasing from them, according to Edelman's 2023 Trust Barometer. While the 2025 report does not present comparative numbers, distrust impacting consumer behavior is likely to be even more prevalent. 

      The structure that reverses the script

      Reframe this discussion with your executives and team

      • The question we should not ask is, "Can we afford to build this right?" but rather, "Can we afford not to?" This consideration is crucial because we risk losing customers at every obstacle they encounter. 
      • Non-functional requirements should be viewed as competitive advantages rather than obstructions. If it suddenly does not work, the customer walks away.
      • Consider viewing system reliability as a profit center instead of a cost center. When a customer knows it will work, they will order again and refer a friend.

      The numbers support this point. Businesses that invest in operational resilience see three times higher profit margins and 2.5 times higher revenue growth than their counterparts, according to McKinsey's 2023 State of Organizations report. In 2025 we see a focus on AI, but the point remains.

      These metrics will grab the attention when you're presenting them.

      Although the average cost of downtime varies by industry, it is always high. 

      The impact of a security breach on customer lifetime value is equally uncomfortable. Following a data breach, 78% of consumers will cease interacting with a brand online, and 36% will never do so again, according to Ping Identity's 2023 Consumer Identity Breach Report.

      Every second that the system is unavailable results in a rapidly mounting loss of money. That's about $3,170 per minute of full downtime for a business that makes $100 million a year. We're talking about $31,700 per minute for billion-dollar businesses. Again, your experience may differ, but it's important to note that this cost is often unseen yet undeniable. If you want to calculate this more granularly, then I have a calculation method for you that is easy to implement.

      There is a discernible trend in the cost of rebuilding versus building correctly the first time. Resolving a problem in production can cost four to five times as much as fixing it during design, and it can cost up to 100 times as much as fixing it during the requirements and design phase, according to IBM's Systems Sciences Institute.

      The plan of action that truly works

      This is what you should do right away.

      Please begin by reviewing your current primary systems. When they're under stress, what happens? What occurs if they are attacked? What occurs if they don't work? 40% of businesses that suffer a significant system failure never reopen, although only 23% of organizations have tested their disaster recovery plans in the previous year, according to Gartner. Companies we work with test their systems at least once per year. If the results are unsatisfactory, we conduct a retest to ensure they meet our standards.

      Next, please determine the actual cost of addressing issues at a later stage. Add in the costs of customer attrition, security breaches, downtime, and reconstruction. To lend credibility to your calculations, try to work out exact numbers for your company. Industry standards (like in this article) will give you indicators, but you need to know your figures.

      Third, recast your non-functional needs as business needs. Consider focusing on strategies for managing success rather than solely discussing load balancing. Instead of discussing security testing, focus on revenue protection.

      Fourth, consider safety when defining "done." Until a feature is dependable, secure, and scalable, it isn't considered complete. Projects that incorporate non-functional requirements from the outset have a threefold higher chance of success, per the Standish Group's 2023 Chaos Report.

      Fifth, use system dependability as a differentiator in the marketplace. You're up when your rivals are down. You're safe when they're compromised.

      The bottom line

      I understand that resilience isn't sexy. I am aware that UI enhancements are more exciting than infrastructure resilience.

      And yet, I know that businesses that prioritize safety will survive and lead after seeing others thrive and fail based on this one choice. Customers trust them. They are capable of scaling without breaking. Because they are confident that their systems can manage whatever comes next, they are the ones who get a good night's sleep.

      Resilient organizations are twice as likely to surpass customer satisfaction goals and are 2.5 times more likely to achieve revenue growth of 10% or more.

      Resilience represents the most significant competitive advantage. You have a choice. Just keep in mind that your clients are depending on you to do the job correctly.

      Always happy to engage in a conversation.